Marc 2008 r1 Volume C: Program Input

Marc 2008 r1
Volume C: Program Input
Main Index
Corporate
MSC.Software Corporation
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Telephone: (800) 345-2078
FAX: (714) 784-4056
Europe
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich
GERMANY
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6
Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
User Documentation: Copyright © 2008 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This document, and the software described in it, are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of such license. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written authorization of
MSC.Software Corporation is strictly prohibited.
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this document are for illustrative and educational purposes
only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. THIS DOCUMENT IS
PROVIDED ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS AND ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
MSC.Software logo, MSC, MSC., MD Nastran, Adams, Dytran, Marc, Mentat, and Patran are trademarks or registered trademarks of
MSC.Software Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. Python is a trademark of the Python Software Foundation. LS-DYNA is a trademark of
Livermore Software Technology Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers.
METIS is copyrighted by the regents of the University of Minnesota. HP MPI is developed by Hewlett-Packard Development Company,
L.P. MS MPI is developed by Microsoft Corporation. PCGLSS 6.0, copyright © 1992-2005 Computational Applications and System
Integration Inc. MPICH Copyright 1993, University of Chicago and Mississippi State University. MPICH2 copyright © 2002, University
of Chicago.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation),
as applicable.
MA*V2008r1*Z*Z*Z*DC-VOL-C
Main Index
Contents
Marc Volume C: Program Input
Contents
Preface
About this Manual, 26
Who Should Read this Manual, 26
Other Marc Manuals, 26
Chapter Contents, 26
1 Introduction
Formats in Marc, 30
Fixed Field, 30
Free Field, 30
Input of List Items, 31
Examples, 33
Edges and Faces, 33
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data, 40
Typical Marc Problem Data Files, 41
Marc Input for New Users, 42
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users, 51
2 Parameters List
2 Parameters
Basic Input Requirements, 71
TITLE — Output Title Definition, 72
ALLOCATE — Initial Workspace Definition, 73
SIZING — Working Space Definition, 74
PREALLOC — Initial Workspace Allocation, 75
ELEMENTS — Element Type Selection, 76
VERSION — Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File, 77
FEATURE — Specification of the Behavior of a Feature, 78
PROCESSOR — Parallelization Control, 80
UNIT — Invoke Unit System Definition, 82
$NO LIST — No Listing of Input Data, 83
Main Index
4
EXTENDED — Extended Precision of Reading in Data, 84

END — End of Parameter Section, 85
Analysis Types, 87
ELASTIC — Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads, 88
DESIGN SENSITIVITY — Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only, 89
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION — Perform Design Optimization, 90
ADAPTIVE — Adaptive Mesh Refinement, 91
LINEAR — Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis, 93
FOURIER — Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures, 94
DYNAMIC — Dynamic Analysis, 95
HARMONIC — Frequency Response Analysis, 97
SS-ROLLING — Steady State Transport Analysis, 98
RESPONSE — Spectrum Response Analysis, 99
R-P FLOW — Rigid-Plastic Flow, 100
SPFLOW — Superplastic Forming Analysis, 101
LARGE DISP — Large Displacement or Buckling, 102
LARGE STRAIN — Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation, 103
UPDATE — Updated Lagrange Procedure, 105
FINITE — Finite Strain Plasticity, 106
CONSTANT DILATATION — Define That Elements Are to Use Constant
Dilatation Formulation, 107
ASSUMED STRAIN — Improved Bending Behavior, 108
ELASTICITY — Elasticity Procedure, 109
PLASTICITY — Plasticity Procedure, 110
FOLLOW FOR — Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current
Geometry – Application of Total Boundary Condition, 111
BUCKLE — Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis, 113
CREEP — Creep Analysis, 114
VISCO ELAS — Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model), 115
STRUCTURAL — Mechanical Analysis, 116
COUPLE — Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis, 117
DECOUPLING — Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis, 118
FLUID — Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis, 119
PORE — Soil Analysis, 121
T-T-T — Time-Temperature-Transformation, 122
HEAT — Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis, 123
JOULE — Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis, 124
DIFFUSION — Diffusion Analysis, 125
ABLATION — Specify Ablation Occurrence, 126
PYROLYSIS — Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis, 127
CURING — Curing Analysis Parameter Definition, 128
BEARING — Bearing Analysis, 129
ELECTRO — Electrostatic Analysis, 130
MAGNETO — Magnetostatic Analysis, 131
EL-MA — Perform Electromagnetic Analysis, 132
Main Index
5
PIEZO — Activate Piezoelectric Analysis, 133

ACOUSTIC — Acoustic Analysis, 134
RADIATION — Radiation Analysis, 135
CAVITY — Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities, 138
RBE — Rigid Body Elements, 139
MACHINING — NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis, 140
Rezoning and Substructure Parameters, 141
REZONING — Allow Rezoning, 142
MNF — MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options, 143
SUPER — Super Element Input, 144
USER — Create User-defined Element, 145
Additional Flags for Various Analyses, 147
CENTROID — State Storage at Centroid Only, 148
ALL POINTS — State Storage at All Points, 149
LOAD COR — Residual Load Correction, 150
NO LOADCOR — Suppression of Load Correction, 151
SCALE — Scaling to First Yield, 152
THERMAL — Thermal Stress Analysis, 153
ISTRESS — Define Initial Stress, 154
LUMP — Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix, 155
APPBC — Application of Boundary Conditions, 156
ACCUMULATE — Accumulation of Strain and Displacements, 157
ALIAS — Define Aliases, 158
Program Function and I/O Controls, 159
NEW — Use New Format, 160
TABLE — Indicate How Tables are to be used, 161
COMMENT — Define Comment, 162
PRINT — Debug Printout, 163
STOP — Exit following Workspace Allocation, 166
NOTES — Print Notes and Updates, 167
INPUT TAPE — Specify Device for Model Definition Data, 168
ELSTO — Out-of-Core Storage of Elements, 169
OOC — Out-of-core Solver, 170
IBOOC — Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data, 171
NO ECHO — Suppress Echo, 172
INCLUDE — Insert File into the Input File, 173
Modifying Default Values, 174
STATE VARS — Define Number of State Variables, 175
DIST LOADS — Distributed Loads or Point Loads, 176
FLUXES — Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes, 177
FILMS — Film Coefficients, 178
RESTRICTOR — Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis, 179
WELDING — Welding Analysis, 180
Main Index
6
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS — Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to

be Defined, 181
SHELL SECT — Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness, 182
TSHEAR — Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185, 183
TIE — Define Tying Data, 184
MPC-CHECK — Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter, 185
AUTOMSET — Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes, 186
AUTOSPC — Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes, 188
IO-DEACTIVATE — Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out, 189
Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements, 190
BEAM SECT — Beam Section Definition, 191
3 Model Definition Options List

3 Model Definition Options
MESH2D, 215
Two-dimensional Mesh Generator, 215
MESH2D — Define a Two-dimensional Mesh, 216
BLOCKS — Define Working Size, 217
DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type) — Define Block Type, 218
MANY TYPES — Define Multiple Elements, 219
START NUMBER — Specify Starting Element, 220
BOUNDARY — Define Boundary Nodes, 221
SPECIFIED NODES — Specify Node Coordinates, 222
MAPPER — Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D, 223
CONSTRAINT — Generate Boundary Condition Constraints, 224
MERGE (Model Definition) — Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes, 225
MERGE SELECTIVE — Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block, 226
CONNECT — Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks, 227
PRTCONNECT — Print Out Block Connections, 228
SYMMETRY — Define Axis of Symmetry, 229
GENERATE — End of Mesh Generation Data, 230
Mesh Definition, 231
NEW (Model Definition) — Use New Format, 232
DEFINE (Sets) — Define Sets, 233
CONNECTIVITY — Specify Element Connectivity, 236
CONN FILL — Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator, 238
CONN GENER — Copy Element Connectivity Data, 239
UFCONN — Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine, 241
COORDINATES — Enter Node Coordinates, 242
INCLUDE (Model Definition) — Insert File into the Input File, 244
FXORD — Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates, 245
NODE CIRCLE — Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs, 248
Main Index
7
NODE FILL — Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation, 249

NODE GENER — Generate Node Coordinates, 250
NODE MERGE — Merge Duplicate Nodes, 251
UFXORD — Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine, 252
CYLINDRICAL — Define Cylindrical Coordinate System, 253
WRITE — Write Connectivity and Coordinates, 255
ADAPTIVE — Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis, 256
ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) — Define Meshing Parameters Used in
Global Remeshing, 264
POINTS — Define Geometric Points, 274
CURVES — Define Geometric Curves, 275
SURFACES — Define Geometrical Surfaces, 280
STRING — Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation, 286
ATTACH NODE — Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces, 288
ATTACH EDGE — Define the Element Edges Which are Attached to Curves, 290
ATTACH FACE — Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces, 291
GEOMETRY — Specify Geometrical Data, 292
NODAL THICKNESS — Define Nodal Thickness, 296
ACTUATOR — Define the Length of the Actuator Link, 297
TRANSFORMATION — Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation, 298
COORD SYSTEM — Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and
Degrees of Freedom, 301
SHELL TRANSFORMATION — Define Shell Transformation, 308
UTRANFORM — Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS, 309
CYCLIC SYMMETRY — Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure, 310
TYING — Define Tying Constraints, 313
SERVO LINK — Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints, 321
RBE2 — Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element, 323
RBE3 — Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element, 325
RROD — Rigid 2-node Constraint, 328
PIN CODE — Define Pin Code for Beam Element, 329
INSERT — Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted, 330
SPRINGS — Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot), 332
PBUSH — Input Data for Cbush Elements, 336
CFAST — Shell Patch Fastener Connection, 344
PFAST — CFAST Fastener Property, 347
CWELD — Weld or Fastener Element Connection, 349
PWELD — Connector Element Property, 357
SWLDPRM — Parameters for CWELD Connectors, 359
SUPERELEM (Model Definition) — Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams
MNF Interface, 365
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition) — Create DMIG of Substructure, 367
DMIG-OUT (Model Definition) — Output Control of Matrices, 370
DMIG — Direct Matrix Input, 375
K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition) — Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix, 378
Main Index
8
M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition) — Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix, 379
B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition) — Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix, 380
P2G (Model Definition) — Selects Direction Input Load Vector, 381
BACKTOSUBS (Model Definition) — Recover Substructure Output, 382
MNF UNITS — MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units, 383
STIFSCALE — Define Stiffness Scaling Factor, 385
COEFFICIENT — Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices, 386
DEACTIVATE (Model Definition) — Deactivate Elements, 389
ERROR ESTIMATE — Create Error Estimation, 390
USDATA — Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization, 391
Program Control, 393
CASE COMBIN — Combine Load Cases, 394
SOLVER (Model Definition) — Specify Direct or Iterative Solver, 396
OPTIMIZE — Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers, 399
POST (Model Definition) — Create File for Postprocessing, 401
LOADCASE (Model Definition) — Define Loadcase, 418
TRACK — Enter a List of Points to be Tracked, 421
FLOW LINE — Define a Flow Line Grid, 422
IRM — Intergraph Interface, 424
SDRC — SDRC I-DEAS™ Interface, 430
HYPERMESH — HyperMesh Interface, 433
PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition) — Specify Output, 435
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) — Specify Elements to be Included in Output, 437
PRINT NODE (Model Definition) — Specify Nodes to be Included in Output, 440
NO PRINT (Model Definition) — Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output, 442
PRINT SPRING (Model Definition) — Controls the Print Out of Springs, 443
NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition) — Deactivates the Printing of All Springs, 444
PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) — Prints the Contact Body Summary, 445
NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) — Suppresses the Contact Body Summary
Printout, 446
GRID FORCE (Model Definition) — Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level, 447
PRINT VMASS (Model Definition) — Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and
Strain Energies, 449
REAUTO — Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis, 450
RESTART — Set Flags for Restart, 452
RESTART LAST — Use Condensed Restart File, 455
UDUMP — Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing, 457
SUMMARY (Model Definition) — Create Summary Report, 458
NO SUMMARY (Model Definition) — Do Not Create Summary, 459
ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition) — Sort Element Results, 460
NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition) — Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element, 462
NODE SORT (Model Definition) — Sort Nodal Results, 463
NO NODE SORT (Model Definition) — Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes, 465
DESIGN OBJECTIVE — Define Objective Function to be Optimized, 466
DESIGN VARIABLES — Define Variable Design Parameters, 467
Main Index
9
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS — Define Limits on Displacement Response, 469

DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS — Define Limits on Stress Response, 471
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS — Define Limits on Strain Response, 473
DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS — Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response, 475
Mechanical Analysis, 477
CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) — Control Option for Stress Analysis, 478
PARAMETERS (Model Definition) — Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis, 484
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) — Define Fixed Displacement, 488
FIXED DISP (Mechanical) — Define Fixed Displacement, 492
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Distributed Loads, 494
DIST LOADS (Model Definition) — Define Distributed Loads, 499
FACE IDS — Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and
Foundations, 504
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Nodal Point Loads, 509
POINT LOAD (Model Definition) — Define Nodal Point Loads, 513
HOLD NODES — Neglect Incremental Displacement, 516
INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition) — Define Inertia Relief, 517
ROTATION A — Define Rotational Axis, 519
CORNERING AXIS — Define Cornering Axis in Steady State Rolling Analysis, 520
FLUID DRAG — Define Fluid Drag, 521
CAVITY — Define Constants and Reference Values for Structures with Internal Cavities, 523
PRE STATE — Transfer History Data from Previous Analysis to the Current Analysis as the
Initial State, 524
AXITO3D (Model Definition) — Transfer Data from Axisymmetric Analysis to 3-D Analysis, 529
GLOBALLOCAL — Structural Zooming Analysis, 533
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input) — Define Initial Stress, 537
INIT STRESS — Define Initial Stress, 539
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input) — Define Initial Strain, 543
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN — Define Initial Plastic Strain, 545
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) — Initialize State Variables, 548
INITIAL STATE — Initialize State Variables, 551
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Redefine State Variables, 554
CHANGE STATE (Model Definition) — Redefine State Variables, 558
THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition) — Input Temperature Data, 562
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress) — Define Initial Temperatures, 564
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress) — Define Initial Temperatures, 566
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Point Temperatures, 568
POINT TEMP (Model Definition) — Define Point Temperatures, 570
FORCDT — Input Displacement or Load Histories, 572
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Input Elastic Foundation Data, 573
FOUNDATION (Model Definition) — Input Elastic Foundation Data, 576
FOURIER — Describe Fourier Coefficients, 577
J-INTEGRAL — Define Path for J-Integral Estimation, 579
LORENZI — Define Path for Modified J-Integral, 580
VCCT — Virtual Crack Closure Technique, 583
Main Index
10
DELAMINATION — , 587
ISLAND REMOVAL — Deactivate Islands of Connected Elements, 588
Contact, 589
Deformable and Rigid Surfaces, 589
Motion of Surfaces, 589
Cautions, 590
Control Variables and Option Flags, 590
Contact/Penetration, 591
Separation, 591
Optional Heat Transfer Data, 592
Optional Electrical Data (Joule Heating Analysis), 592
Time Step Control, 593
Dynamic Contact - Impact, 593
Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces, 593
Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces, 597
Selective Contact Surfaces, 608
User Subroutines, 608
Contact with Adaptive Meshing or Rezoning, 610
Spring-Back Analysis, 610
Contact Tolerance, 610
Corner Conditions, 611
Friction, 611
CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) — Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface, 615
CONTACT (2-D) — Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface, 627
CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) — Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface, 637
CONTACT (3-D) — Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface, 653
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition) — Define Contact Table, 667
CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition) — Define Contact Table, 676
SPLINE (Model Definition) — Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body, 683
UMOTION — Invoke User Subroutine to Prescribe Surface Motion, 687
UFRICTION — Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface Friction Behavior, 688
UHTCOEF — Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface/Environment Thermal Behavior, 689
UHTCON — Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface to Surface Behavior, 690
CONTACT NODE (Model Definition) — Define Nodes for Surface Contact, 691
DEACT GLUE (Model Definition) — Define Deact Glue for Nodes in Glued Contact, 692
EXCLUDE (Model Definition) — Ignore Contact with Certain Regions, 693
Material Properties, 695
A. Elastic Behavior, 695
B. Elastic-Plastic Behavior, 698
C. Temperature Dependent Material Properties, 700
D. Relative Density Dependent Material Properties, 700
E. Low Tension Material, 700
F. Soil Materials, 700
G. Material Dependent Failure Criteria, 700
H. Characterization of Gap Elements, 701
Main Index
11
I. Laminated Composite, 701

J. Material Preferred Direction, 701
K. Material Property (Element) Coordinate Systems in Marc, 701
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress) — Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic
Materials, 709
ISOTROPIC (Stress) — Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials, 717
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) — Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic
Materials, 723
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical) — Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic Materials, 729
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) — Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress
Analysis, 733
ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical) — Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis, 740
HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input) — Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials, 744
HYPOELASTIC — Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials, 746
MOONEY (with TABLE Input) — Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials, 748
MOONEY — Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials, 752
ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input) — Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model, 755
ARRUDBOYCE — Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model, 759
GENT (with TABLE Input) — Define Data for the Gent Model, 762
GENT — Define Data for the Gent Model, 766
OGDEN (with TABLE Input) — Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based
Material Model, 769
OGDEN — Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model, 773
NLELAST — Simplified Nonlinear Elastic Models Input, 776
FOAM (with TABLE Input) — Define Data for Foam Material Model, 781
FOAM — Define Data for Foam Material Model, 785
GASKET — Define Material Data for Gasket Materials, 788
TABLE — Define Table, 791
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) — Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress, 799
FORMING LIMIT — Forming Limit Properties, 801
WORK HARD — Define Workhardening Data, 803
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress) — Define Effects of Temperature, 806
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress) — Temperature Effects in Coupled
Thermal-Stress Analysis, 811
ORTHO TEMP (Structural) — Define Temperature Effects for Orthotropic Materials, 818
TIME-TEMP — Define Effects of Time/Temperature Transformation, 828
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input) — Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model, 832
SHAPE MEMORY — Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model, 838
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input) — Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking, 842
CRACK DATA — Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking, 844
FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input) — Define Failure Criteria Data, 845
FAIL DATA — Define Failure Criteria Data, 859
MATERIAL DATA — Define Additional Material Data Constants, 870
GRAIN SIZE — Define Grain Size Growth Model, 871
DAMAGE — Define Properties for Damaging Materials, 873
Main Index
12
GAP DATA — Define Data for Gap Elements, 880

COMPOSITE — Define Properties for Laminated Composite Materials, 882
MIXTURE — Define Constituents of Composite Material in Original and Potentially
Damaged State, 885
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input) — Define Material Data for Interface Elements, 888
COHESIVE — Define Mechanical Data for Cohesive Materials, 891
PSHELL — Shell Element Property, 894
REBAR — Define Rebar Positions, Areas, and Orientations, 897
ORIENTATION — Define Orientation of Elements, 904
POWDER (with TABLE input) — Define Powder Material Model, 912
POWDER — Define Powder Material Model, 915
DENSITY EFFECTS — Define Effects of Density on Powder Materials, 918
RELATIVE DENSITY — Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or Coupled Thermal
Stress Analysis, 921
SOIL (with TABLE Input) — Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis, 922
SOIL — Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis, 926
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input) — Define Initial Porosity, 929
INITIAL POROSITY — Define Initial Porosity, 931
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Changes in Porosity for
Nonsoil Analysis, 932
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input) — Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or
Diffusion Analysis, 934
INITIAL VOID RATIO — Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis, 936
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Changes in Void Ratio for
Nonsoil Analysis, 937
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input) — Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure, 939
INITIAL PC — Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure, 941
SPECIFIC WEIGHT — Define Specific Weight Constant for Soil Analysis, 942
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) — Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis, 943
INITIAL PORE — Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis, 945
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled
Soil Analysis, 948
CHANGE PORE (Model Definition) — Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis, 950
PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input) — Define Pressure Film Boundary Conditions, 953
PRESS FILM (Model Definition) — Define Pressure Film Coefficient Input, 956
Rate Effects, 957
CREEP (with TABLE Input) — Define Creep Constitutive Data, 959
CREEP — Define Creep Constitutive Data, 962
PHI-COEFFICIENTS — Define Phi-Coefficients for Rubber Viscoelastic Model, 967
VISCELPROP — Define Properties for Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials, 968
VISCELORTH — Define Properties for Viscoelastic Orthotropic Materials, 969
VISCELMOON — Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials, 971
VISCELOGDEN — Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Ogden Materials, 972
VISCELFOAM — Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials, 973
Main Index
13
SHIFT FUNCTION — Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple

Viscoelastic Materials, 974
VISCEL EXP — Viscoelastic Thermal Expansion, 976
Dynamic Analysis, 977
DAMPING — Define Damping Factors, 978
FLUID SOLID — Define Fluid-Solid Interface, 980
INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input) — Define Initial Displacements, 981
INITIAL DISP — Define Initial Displacements, 984
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input) — Define Initial Velocity, 985
INITIAL VEL — Define Initial Velocity, 987
FIXED ACCE — Define Fixed Acceleration, 988
MASSES — Define Concentrated Masses, 989
CONM1 — Define a General Concentrated Mass, 990
CONM2 — Define a Diagonal Mass/Moment of Inertia, 996
RESPONSE SPECTRUM — Define Density for Spectral Response, 998
MODAL INCREMENT — Define Increments for Eigenvalue Extraction, 999
BUCKLE INCREMENT — Define Increments for Buckling Analysis, 1001
Heat Transfer Analysis, 1003
FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) — Define Fixed Temperature, 1004
FIXED TEMPERATURE — Define Fixed Temperature, 1007
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Thermal Boundary Conditions, 1009
FILMS (Model Definition) — Define Convection Film Coefficient Input, 1013
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Sink Points, 1014
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Distributed Fluxes, 1016
DIST FLUXES (Model Definition) — Define Distributed Fluxes, 1019
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Point Fluxes, 1020
POINT FLUX (Model Definition) — Define Point Fluxes, 1023
QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Thermal Vector Flux Boundary
Conditions, 1024
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Motion and Flux Parameters for
Weld Heat Source, 1028
WELD FLUX (Model Definition) — Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat
Source, 1032
WELD PATH (Model Definition) — Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat
Source, 1036
WELD FILL (Model Definition) — Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements, 1042
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) — Define Two-dimensional Thermal or Electrical
Contact Conditions, 1045
THERMAL CONTACT (2-D) — Define Two-dimensional Thermal or Electrical
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) — Define Three-dimensional Thermal or Electrical
THERMAL CONTACT (3-D) — Define Three-dimensional Thermal or
ElectricalContact Conditions, 1070
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer) — Define Initial Temperatures, 1079
Main Index
14
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) — Define Initial Temperatures, 1082

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) — Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic
Materials, 1084
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer) — Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials, 1086
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) — Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic
Materials, 1088
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal) — Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials, 1091
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) — Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer
Analysis, 1093
ANISOTROPIC (Thermal) — Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer Analysis, 1096
LATENT HEAT — Define Latent Heat, 1098
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer) — Define Variation of Material Properties in
ORTHO TEMP (Thermal) — Define Variation of Orthotropic Thermal Properties, 1102
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Model Definition) — Define Control Parameters for Heat
Transfer Analysis, 1107
CONVERT — Define Conversion Factors, 1109
CONRAD GAP — Define Convection/Radiation Gap, 1110
CHANNEL — Define Fluid Channel Input, 1111
VIEW FACTOR — Read in Radiation View Factors, 1112
RADIATING CAVITY — Define Outline of Radiating Cavity, 1113
RAD-CAVITY — Define Radiation Cavity, 1114
CAVITY DEFINITION — Define Geometry of a Cavity, 1116
EMISSIVITY — Define Emissivity, 1119
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer) — Define Nodal Velocity
Components, 1122
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer) — Define Nodal Velocity Components, 1124
CURE RATE — Cure Kinetics, 1126
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input) — Define Initial Degree of Cure, 1130
INIT CURE — Define Initial Degree of Cure, 1132
CURE SHRINKAGE — Shrinkage Property of Resin Material, 1133
THERMO-PORE — Define Properties of Thermal Degrading Material, 1136
SURFACE ENERGY — Define Surface Energy, 1141
RECEDING SURFACE — Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to Thermo-chemical
Erosion or Wear Behavior, 1147
THROAT — Define Coordinates of Throat, 1150
INITIAL PYROLYSIS — Define Initial Pyrolysis, 1151
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer) — Define Initial Density, 1153
STREAM DEFINITION — Define Stream Definition, 1155
PRINT STREAMLINE — Control Output of Results along a Streamline, 1157
TRACK STREAMLINE — Track Behavior of a Point along a Streamline, 1158
Joule Heating Analysis, 1159
JOULE — Define Conversion Factor for Joule Heating Analysis, 1160
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) — Define Distributed Currents, 1161
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - Model Definition) — Define Distributed Current, 1164
Main Index
15
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) — Define Point Currents, 1165
POINT CURRENT (Joule - Model Definition) — Define Nodal Point Current, 1167
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) — Define Fixed Voltage, 1168
FIXED VOLTAGE — Define Nodal Fixed Voltage, 1171
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) — Define Initial Pressure, 1173
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) — Define Fixed Pressure, 1175
DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) — Define Distributed Mass Flux, 1177
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) — Define Nodal Mass Flux, 1180
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) — Define Diffusion Properties for
Isotropic Materials, 1182
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) — Define Diffusion Properties for Orthotropic
Materials, 1184
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) — Model Definition Option for
Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis, 1189
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) — Define Nodal Velocity Components, 1190
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic) — Define Nodal Velocity Components, 1192
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Define Lubrication Thickness, 1194
THICKNESS — Define Lubrication Thickness, 1196
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) — Coefficient Input for
Bearing Analysis, 1197
RESTRICTOR — Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis, 1199
CONTROL (Hydrodynamic) — Define Maximum Number of Increments for
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) — Define Lubricant Material
Properties, 1201
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic) — Define Lubricant Material Properties, 1203
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic) — Define Effect of Temperature in
Acoustic Analysis, 1207
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) — Define Fixed Pressure, 1208
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic) — Define Nodal Fixed Pressure, 1211
DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) — Define Distributed Sources, 1213
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic - Model Definition) — Define Distributed Sources, 1216
POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) — Define Point Source, 1217
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - Model Definition) — Define Point Sources, 1220
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) — Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity, 1221
ISOTROPIC (Acoustic) — Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity, 1222
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) — Define Material Properties for Acoustic
Analysis, 1223
ACOUSTIC — Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis, 1224
Electrostatic Analysis, 1225
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) — Define Fixed Potential, 1226
Main Index
16
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) — Define Fixed Nodal Potential, 1229

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) — Define Fixed Potential, 1231
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic) — Define Fixed Nodal Potential, 1234
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic) — Define Distributed Charges, 1236
DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic) — Define Distributed Charges, 1239
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) — Define Point Charges, 1240
POINT CHARGE — Define Nodal Point Charges, 1242
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) — Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic
Materials, 1243
ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic) — Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials, 1244
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) — Define Electrical Properties for
Orthotropic Materials, 1245
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical) — Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials, 1247
Piezoelectric Analysis, 1249
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) — Define Fixed Potential, 1250
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) — Define Fixed Nodal Potential, 1253
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) — Define Distributed Charges, 1254
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) — Define Distributed Charges, 1257
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) — Define Point Charges, 1258
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) — Define Nodal Point Charges, 1260
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) — Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric
Analysis, 1261
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) — Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric
Analysis, 1264
Magnetostatic Analysis, 1267
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) — Define Fixed Potential, 1268
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic) — Define Nodal Fixed Potential, 1271
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) — Define Fixed Potential, 1273
FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic) — Define Nodal Fixed Potential, 1276
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) — Define Distributed Currents, 1278
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) — Define Distributed Current, 1281
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) — Define Nodal Point Current, 1282
POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic) — Define Nodal Point Current, 1284
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) — Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic
Materials, 1285
ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) — Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials, 1287
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) — Define Magnetic Properties for
ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) — Define Magnetic Properties for
B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic) — Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear
Magnetic Material, 1294
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) — Define Permanent Magnet, 1296
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic) — Define Permanent Magnet, 1298
CONTROL (Magnetostatic) — Control for Magnetostatic Analysis, 1300
Main Index
17
Electromagnetic Analysis, 1301

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) — Define Fixed Potential, 1302
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic) — Define Nodal Fixed Potential, 1305
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) — Define Distributed Currents, 1307
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - Model Definition) — Define Distributed Currents, 1310
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) — Define Distributed Charges, 1311
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - Model Definition) — Define Distributed Charges, 1314
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) — Define Point
Fluxes, 1315
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE — Define Nodal Point Currents and Point Charges, 1317
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) — Define Electromagnetic Properties for
ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) — Define Electromagnetic Properties for
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) — Define Electromagnetic Properties
for Orthotropic Materials, 1322
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) — Define Electromagnetic Properties for
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic) — Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear
Magnetic Material, 1327
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic) — Define Permanent Magnet, 1329
CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic) — Control for Electromagnetostatic Analysis, 1331
Fluid Analysis, 1333
REGION (Fluid) — Define Elements in a Region, 1335
COUPLING REGION — Define Coupling Regions, 1336
FIXED DISP (Fluid) — Define Fixed Displacement, 1340
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid) — Define Fixed Velocity, 1342
FIXED VELOCITY — Define Fixed Velocity, 1345
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid) — Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis, 1347
ISOTROPIC (Fluid) — Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis, 1349
STRAIN RATE (Fluid) — Define Strain Rate Dependent Viscosity, 1351
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal) — Temperature Effects in Coupled
Fluid-Thermal Analysis, 1354
CONTROL (Fluid) — Control Option for Fluid Analysis or Fluid-Thermal Analysis, 1357
CONTROL (Fluid-Solid) — Control Option for Fluid-Stress or
Fluid-Thermal-Stress Analysis, 1360
END OPTION — Model Definition Data End, 1365
4 History Definition Options List

4 History Definition Options
Elastic Analysis, 1374
Mechanical, Acoustic, Piezoelectric or Electrostatic-Structural or
Electromagnetic Analyses, 1374
Main Index
18

Table Driven Boundary Conditions, 1375
Restart Considerations, 1375
General Controls, 1376
COMMENT — Enter Comments, 1377
TITLE — Output Title Definition, 1378
NEW (History Definition) — Use New Format, 1379
INCLUDE (History Definition) — Insert File into the Input File, 1380
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition) — Define Data to be Printed, 1381
PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition) — Specify Elements to be Included in Output, 1383
PRINT NODE (History Definition) — Define Nodes and Nodal Quantities to be Printed, 1385
NO PRINT (History Definition) — Suppress Printing, 1387
PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) — Prints the Contact Body Summary, 1388
NO PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) — Suppresses the Contact Body Summary
Printout, 1389
PRINT SPRING (History Definition) — Controls the Print Out of Springs, 1390
NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition) — Deactivates the Printing of All Springs, 1391
GRID FORCE (History Definition) — Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level, 1392
SUMMARY (History Definition) — Create Summary Report, 1394
NO SUMMARY (History Definition) — Suppress Summary, 1395
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition) — Sort Elements for Report, 1396
NO ELEM SORT (History Definition) — Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element, 1398
NODE SORT (History Definition) — Sort Nodal Results, 1399
NO NODE SORT (History Definition) — Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes, 1401
PRINT VMASS (History Definition) — Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and
Strain Energies, 1402
CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition) — Control Option for Stress Analysis, 1403
PARAMETERS (History Definition) — Definition of Parameters used in
Numerical Analysis, 1409
SOLVER (History Definition) — Specify Direct or Iterative Solver, 1413
POST (History Definition) — Create File for Postprocessing, 1416
POST INCREMENT — Define Increments between Writing on Post File, 1431
RESTART INCREMENT — Define Increments between Writing on Restart File, 1433
ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition) — Define Meshing Parameters Used in
Global Remeshing, 1434
LOADCASE (History Definition) — Define Loadcase, 1444
DMIG-OUT (History Definition) — Output Control of Matrices, 1447
K2GG, K2PP (History Definition) — Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix, 1452
M2GG, M2PP (History Definition) — Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix, 1454
B2GG, B2PP (History Definition) — Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix, 1455
Main Index
19
P2G (History Definition) — Selects Direction Input Load Vector, 1456

READ FILE — Read Data Transfer File Used in Contact Decoupled Analysis, 1457
WRITE FILE — Write Data Transfer File Used in Contact Decoupled Analysis, 1458
Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis, 1459
DISP CHANGE — Define Displacement Boundary Conditions, 1460
RELEASE NODE — Define Nodes for which the Boundary Condition is
Gradually Released, 1463
GAP CHANGE — Redefine Data for Gap Elements, 1464
TYING CHANGE — Define Tying Constraints, 1466
DIST LOADS (History Definition) — Define Distributed Loads, 1467
POINT LOAD (History Definition) — Define Point Loads, 1472
AUTO LOAD — Define Equal Load Increments, 1474
INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition) — Define Inertia Relief, 1476
BEGIN SEQUENCE — Initiate a Series of Repeated Load Cases, 1478
END SEQUENCE — Terminates a Series of Repeated Load Cases, 1479
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT — Define Proportional Increments, 1480
AUTO INCREMENT — Define Automatic Load Stepping, 1481
AUTO STEP — Adaptive Load Step Control, 1486
TERMINATE — Terminate Loadcase, 1493
SUPERPLASTIC — Superplastic Forming Analysis, 1495
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition) — Define Thermal Loads, 1497
AUTO THERM — Specify Data for Automatic Thermal Loading, 1499
CHANGE STATE (History Definition) — Change State Variables, 1501
POINT TEMP (History Definition) — Define Point Temperatures, 1506
CHANGE PORE (History Definition) — Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled
Soil Analysis, 1508
TIME STEP — Define Time Step, 1511
RESET TIME — Resets Time to Zero, 1512
BUCKLE — Specify Buckling Analysis, 1513
SUPERELEM (History Definition) — Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams
MNF Interface, 1515
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) — Create DMIG of Substructure, 1517
ASSEM LOAD — Assemble Equivalent Nodal Force Vector, 1520
ACTIVATE — Activate Elements, 1521
DEACTIVATE (History Definition) — Deactivate Elements, 1522
FOUNDATION (History Definition) — Define Foundation Spring Force for Elements, 1525
CHANGE RIGID — Define New Geometry For a Rigid Contact Surface, 1526
ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D) — Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact
Surface, 1534
ADD RIGID (2-D) — Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface, 1540
ADD RIGID with TABLES (3-D) — Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact
Surface, 1545
ADD RIGID (3-D) — Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface, 1554
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition) — Define Contact Table, 1563
CONTACT TABLE (History Definition) — Define Contact Table, 1572
Main Index
20
CONTACT NODE (History Definition) — Define Nodes for Surface Contact, 1579
MOTION CHANGE — Define Motion of Rigid Surfaces, 1580
SS-ROLLING — Define the Parameters for Steady State Transport, 1582
RELEASE — Define Release Data, 1585
APPROACH — Move Rigid Surfaces into Position, 1586
MOVE (History Definition) — Perform Rigid Body Motion on Model, 1587
ANNEAL — Modify State of Material, 1589
SYNCHRONIZED — Move Rigid Surfaces into Position, 1590
SPLINE (History Definition) — Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body, 1591
EXCLUDE (History Definition) — Ignore Contact with Certain Regions, 1593
ACTUATOR — Define the Length of the Actuator Link, 1594
Rate Dependent Analysis, 1595
CREEP INCREMENT — Define Creep Increment, 1596
AUTO CREEP — Control Transient Creep, 1597
ACCUMULATE — Specify Accumulation Option, 1599
EXTRAPOLATE — Specify Extrapolation Option, 1600
AUTO THERM CREEP — Automatic, Thermally-Loaded Elastic-Creep Analysis, 1601
Dynamic Analysis, 1605
MODAL SHAPE — Define Modal Shape, 1606
RECOVER — Recover Option, 1608
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic) — Define Integration in Time, 1610
SPECTRUM — Initiate Spectral Response Analysis, 1611
HARMONIC (Dynamic) — Define Excitation Frequency, 1612
ACC CHANGE — Define Acceleration Boundary Conditions, 1613
— , 1614
TRANSIENT — Specify Transient or Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis, 1616
STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer) — Specify Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis, 1618
DIST FLUXES (History Definition) — Define Distributed Fluxes, 1619
— , 1620
POINT FLUX (History Definition) — Define Point Fluxes, 1621
WELD FLUX (History Definition) — Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat
Source, 1622
WELD PATH (History Definition) — Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat
Source, 1626
WELD FILL (History Definition) — Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements, 1632
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition) — Define Controls for Heat
Transfer Analysis, 1635
TEMP CHANGE — Specify or Change Fixed Temperatures, 1637
FILMS (History Definition) — Define Film Coefficients and Sink Temperatures, 1639
VELOCITY CHANGE — Modify Nodal Velocity Components, 1640
Joule Heating Analysis, 1643
EMRESIS —. Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Resistance Calculation, 1644
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Definition) — Define Distributed Current, 1645
Main Index
21
POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition) — Define Nodal Point Current, 1646
VOLTAGE CHANGE — Define or Change Voltage for Joule Heating Analysis, 1647
POROSITY CHANGE — Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis, 1650
VOID CHANGE — Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis, 1652
DIST MASS (Diffusion) — Define Distributed Mass Flux, 1654
POINT MASS (Diffusion) — Define Nodal Mass Flux, 1657
THICKNS CHANGE — Define Thickness Variations, 1660
DAMPING COMPONENTS — Define Damping Coefficients, 1661
STIFFNS COMPONENTS — Define Stiffness Coefficients, 1662
Acoustic Analysis, 1663
PRESS CHANGE — Define Fixed Pressures, 1664
DIST SOURCES (History Definition) — Define Incremental Distributed Sources, 1666
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Definition) — Define Incremental Nodal
Point Sources, 1667
HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition) — Define Excitation Frequency, 1668
STEADY STATE (Electrostatic) — Specify Steady-State Electrostatic Analysis, 1670
EMCAPAC — Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Capacitance Calculation, 1671
Piezoelectric Analysis, 1672
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) — Define Potential Boundary
Conditions, 1673
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) — Define Nodal Point Charges, 1675
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) — Define Distributed Charges, 1676
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic) — Specify Steady-State Magnetostatic Analysis, 1679
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) — Define Distributed Current, 1680
Electromagnetic Analysis, 1682
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Definition) — Define Excitation Frequency, 1683
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) — Define Dynamic Change, 1684
POTENTIAL CHANGE — Define or Redefine Potential Boundary Conditions, 1685
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) — Define Point Current
and/or Charge, 1687
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) — Define Distributed Current, 1688
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) — Define Distributed Charges, 1690
CONTINUE (History Definition) — End Loadcase, 1692
Main Index
22
5 Rezoning Options List

5 Rezoning Options
Rezoning Options, 1697
REZONE — Specify Rezoning Input, 1698
SPLIT BODIES — Defines Rezoned Data of Contact Nodes, 1699
SECTIONING (Rezoning) — Define Sections for Rezoning, 1700
CONNECTIVITY CHANGE — Define or Change Connectivity, 1702
GEOMETRY CHANGE — Specify New Geometry, 1703
ORIENTATION CHANGE — Redefine Orientation, 1707
GAP DATA CHANGE — Redefine Gap Data, 1709
COORDINATE CHANGE — Redefine Node Coordinates, 1711
UFRORD — Use Subroutine UFRORD, 1712
MOVE (Rezoning) — Redefine Node Coordinates, 1713
CONTACT CHANGE — Change Surface Contact after Rezoning, 1714
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning) — Select Print Settings, 1720
URCONN — Invoke User Subroutine URCONN, 1722
CONTINUE (Rezoning) — End Rezoning Input, 1723
END REZONE — End Input for Rezoning Increment, 1724
A Program Messages
Marc Exits, 1726
Exit Numbers 1-1000, 1726
Exit Numbers 1001-2000, 1732
Exit Numbers 2001-3000, 1734
Exit Numbers 3001-4000, 1737
Exit Numbers 4001-5000, 1740
Exit Numbers 5001-6000, 1741
Exit Numbers 6001-7000, 1743
Exit Numbers 9001-10000, 1744
B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option

Estimating Workspace Sizes for Marc Jobs, 1746
I/O With Marc, 1747
Estimating File Sizes, 1748
Running Marc, 1750
C Default File
Parameters, 1760
Model Definition Options, 1760
Main Index
23
D Control File
E Environment Variables
F Material Database
G Flow Line File Format
H 3-D Remeshing Files
I Units
Tables of Units, 1776
J Parameters List
K Options List
Main Index
24
Main Index
Preface
Preface
J
About this Manual 26
J Who Should Read this Manual 26
J
Other Marc Manuals 26
J
Chapter Contents 26
Main Index
26 Marc Volume C: Program Input
About this Manual
About this Manual

This document describes the file format of the Marc input file. Its chapters and sections roughly parallel
the organization of that file. Appendices describe Marc program messages and provide an alphabetical
list of parameters and options for easy reference. Plus, at the beginning of each chapter is a list of the
parameters or options discussed in that particular chapter.
Who Should Read this Manual

This document is intended for current and new users of Marc. It does not purport to teach the use of Marc,
but is a reference to its specific functioning. Other Marc documents are listed below.
Other Marc Manuals

The Marc Reference Library includes:
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information
Marc Volume B: Element Library
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines
Marc Volume E: Demonstrations Problems
Marc User’s Guide
Marc Python Tutorial and Reference Manual
Marc Mentat Help Reference
Chapter Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction introduces basic concepts of Marc
program input.
Chapter 2 Parameters describes the options that are used in the
parameter section of the Marc input files.
Chapter 3 Model Definition Options describes the options that are used in the
model definition section of the Marc
input files.
Chapter 4 History Definition Options describes the options that are used for
displaying the results of the analysis.
Chapter 5 Rezoning Options describes the options that are used in Marc
input files to specify load
history information.
Main Index
Preface 27
Chapter Contents
Appendix A Program Messages describes the messages one might see upon
termination of Marc.
Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option details the running of Marc on
supported computers.
Appendix C Default File lists the most commonly used parameters
and options put into a default file.
Appendix D Control File describes how to create and use a control
file.
Appendix E Environment Variables introduces user-controlled
environment variables.
Appendix F Material Database describes how to enter new material into
the database.
Appendix G Flow Line File Format provides the flow line format.
Appendix H 3-D Remeshing Files provides how to view files within the GUI
for remeshing observation.
Appendix I Units provides tables for the International System
(SI) of units and conversation tables for
Imperial units from US units.
Appendix J Parameters List provides a complete alphabetical list of all
parameters and their associated
page numbers.
Appendix K Options List provides a complete alphabetical list of all
program options and their associated
page numbers.
Main Index
Chapter Contents
Main Index
Chapter 1 Introduction
1 Introduction
J
Formats in Marc 30
J
Input of List Items 31
J Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data 40
J
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users 51
Main Index
Formats in Marc
This chapter contains a brief outline of the various data input options and problem solution setups which
are available to a Marc user. It highlights only a small segment of the total problem solution capability
available. You only have to select the options required for the solution of your problem. In addition, you
can further elect to use the many default and built-in conditions which have been provided in these
options.
This user-selection feature forms the basis for Marc and input data organization. Marc then provides a
solution capability based on your selection of options. Further details on Marc’s organization can be
found in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Formats used by Marc are discussed in this chapter. A short description of the organization of the input
data is given, followed by an illustrative example particularly useful for new users. Selected portions of
the output generated by Marc are shown and discussed. The last section of this chapter summarizes the
input requirements for different classes of analyses.
Formats in Marc
Marc is written in FORTRAN, but does its own data conversion to avoid system aborts due to user data
errors. All input data files are read as alphanumeric and are converted to integer, floating point, or
keywords, as necessary. Marc issues error messages and displays the illegal image if it cannot interpret
the data field according to the specifications given in the manual. When such errors occur, Marc attempts
to scan the remainder of the data files and ends the run with an exit error message at the END OPTION
(or end file). Two conventions are allowed for input format control—fixed and free format. Fixed and
free format can be mixed within a data file, but on a single data line, only one type of format can be
entered. The syntax rules for each format type are as follows:
Fixed Field
1. Integers must be right-justified (right blank fill) in their fields.
2. Floating point numbers can be given with or without exponent. In either case, the mantissa must
contain a decimal point. If an exponent is given, it must be preceded by the character E or D and
must be right justified. The size of the number must lie in the range 10-72 to 1072.
Note that, in the this manual, integer fields are indicated as “I” and floating point numbers are indicated
as “E” or “F” and the allowable column field is specified.
Free Field
Data can be input in free field under the following syntax rules:
1. Each data block must contain the same number of data items that it would contain under standard
fixed format control as documented in this manual. Thus, for example, the 3rd data block of the
CONNECTIVITY option is given as (16I5); therefore, no more than 16 numbers can appear on a
data line in this data block under fixed or free field format. This syntax rule allows mixing of
fixed-field and free-field data in the data file, since the number of data blocks needed to input any
data list is the same in both cases.
Main Index
Chapter 1 Introduction 31
Input of List Items
2. Data items on a data line must be separated by a comma. This separator can be surrounded by an
arbitrary number of blanks. Within the data item itself, no embedded blanks can appear.
3. Floating point numbers can be given with or without exponent. In either case, the mantissa must
contain a decimal point. If an exponent is given, it must be preceded by the character E or D and
must immediately follow the mantissa (no embedded blanks). The size of the number must lie in
the range 10-35 to 1035.
4. Keywords must be typed exactly as written in the manual. Embedded blanks do not count as
separators here (for example, BEAM SECT is one word only).
5. Note that you must distinguish between a real and integer zero when entering data; the floating
point zero must contain a decimal point, as in Rule 3, above.
6. If a data line contains only one free-field data item, that item must be followed by a comma. Thus,
“1” must be entered as “1,” if it is the only data item on a data line.
Input of List Items

Marc requests that you input a list of items in association with certain program functions. These items,
as an example, can be a set of elements as in conjunction with the ISOTROPIC option, or a set of nodes
as in conjunction with the POINT LOAD option. There are 12 types of items that can be requested:
Element numbers Points

Node numbers Curves
Degree of freedom numbers Surfaces
Integration point numbers Bodies
Layer numbers Edges
Increment numbers Faces
A set of items can be expressed as a combination of one or more subsets. These subsets can be specified
in three different forms, depending on your convenience. The operations that can be performed between
subsets are:
AND
INTERSECT
EXCEPT
In forming a set, subsets are combined in binary operations going from left to right. Hence, a set can be
formed as:
1. SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2
which implies all items in SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2. Duplicate items are eliminated and the
resultant set is sorted.
2. SUBLIST1 INTERSECT SUBLIST2
which implies only those items occurring both in SUBLIST1 and SUBLIST2.
Main Index
Input of List Items
3. SUBLIST1 EXCEPT SUBLIST2

which implies all items in SUBLIST1 except those which occur in SUBLIST2.
4. SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2 EXCEPT SUBLIST3 INTERSECT SUBLIST4
which implies take the items in SUBLIST1 and SUBLIST2 and remove those items that occur in
SUBLIST3. Then, if these items also occur in SUBLIST4, include them in the set.
The SUBLISTS can have the form:

1. A range of items can be specified as:
l TO m BY n
or
1 THROUGH M BY n
which implies items l through m by n; if BY n is not included, it is assumed to be BY 1. Note
that the range can be either increasing or decreasing.
2. A string of items can be specified as:
a1 a2 a3 ... an
which implies that n items are to be included. If continuation data is necessary, a “C” or
CONTINUE should be the last item on the data line.
3. A setname can be specified as:
MYSET
which implies that all items previously specified to be in the set MYSET are to be used. The items
in a set are specified using the DEFINE option.
In a list, edges and faces are entered as pairs (i:j) where i is the user element id and j is the edge id or
face id. The edge id/face id for the different element classes is given beginning on page 33.
There are two types of edge and face sets; those expressed in Marc convention or the Marc Mentat
convention. The edge/face id in Marc convention is one greater than the Marc Mentat convention.
For example, to specify edge 1 on elements 1 to 20, one would use:
1:1 TO 20:1
Sorted vs. Unsorted Lists

In Marc, most lists are sorted lists. That is, regardless of the order of the list items on the list line, Marc
returns these items sorted from lowest to highest. Unsorted lists are required in several places, however.
These places are:
1. List of nodes in the TYING option.
2. List of nodes in the SUPERINPUT and SUBSTRUCTURE option.
3. List of degrees of freedom in the FIXED DISP option.
When defining unsorted lists, the sublist connectors EXCEPT and INTERSECT cannot be used. Setnames
can be used as long as the sets themselves are unsorted. In Marc, degree of freedom sets are always
Main Index
Edges and Faces
unsorted. Unsorted node sets can be defined by using set type NDSQ (for “node sequence”) rather than set
type NODE (see the DEFINE model definition option).
Examples
Define subsets FLOOR, NWALL, WWALL
DEFINE NODE SET FLOOR
1 TO 5 (i.e. NODES 1,2,3,4,5)
DEFINE NODE SET NWALL
5 TO 15 BY 5 AND 20 to 22 (i.e. NODES 5,10,15,20,21,22)
DEFINE NODE SET WWALL
11 TO 20 (i.e. NODES 11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20)
Possible lists can be:
1. NWALL AND WWALL, which would contain nodes
5 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2. NWALL INTERSECT WWALL, which would contain node
15 20
3. NWALL AND WWALL EXCEPT FLOOR, which would contain nodes:
10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Edges and Faces

Marc 2003 introduces the concept of edge ids and face ids that are used with the ATTACH EDGE,
ATTACH FACE, and edge and face sets. The edge and face ids follow two different conventions - either
Marc or Marc Mentat. The difference is that the Marc Mentat number is equal to the Marc number minus
one. The edge and face ids are dependent upon the element geometry and are shown below.
1-D 2-Node Elements

y
EDGE ID NODES
2 1 1–2
Main Index
Edges and Faces
1-D 3-Node Elements
3 EDGE ID NODES
1 1–2–3
2
2-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Elements

4 3
EDGE ID NODES
1 1–2
2 2–3
3 3–4
4 4–1
1 2
Load shown on EDGE ID 1

4 7 3
EDGE ID NODES
1 1–5–2
2 2–6–3
8 6 3 3–7–4
4 4–8–1
1 5 2
Main Index
Edges and Faces
2-D 3-Node Triangle

3 EDGE ID NODES
1 1–2
2 2–3
3 3–1
1 2
2-D 6-Node Triangle

3 EDGE ID NODES
1 1–4–2
2 2–5–3
3 3–6–1
6 5
1 4 2
3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral

4
EDGE ID NODES
3 1 1–2
2 2–3
3 3–1
4 1–4
1 5 2–4
6 3–4
2
Main Index
Edges and Faces
3-D 6-Node Pentahedral

6
4 EDGE ID NODES
5 1 1–2
2 2–3
3 3–1
4 4–5
5 5–6
3 6 6–4
7 1–4
1 8 2–5
2 9 3–6
3-D 8-Node Brick

8
EDGE ID NODES
5 7 1 1–2
2 2–3
6 3 3–4
4 4–1
4 5 5–6
6 6–7
7 7–8
1 3 8 8–5
9 1–5
10 2–6
2 11 3–7
12 4–8

4
10
EDGE ID NODES
3 1 1–2– 5
8 9
2 2–3– 6
7 3 3–1– 7
6 4 1–4– 8
1 5 2–4– 9
5 6 3 – 4 – 10
2
Main Index
Edges and Faces
3-D 20-Node Brick

8
16 15
EDGE ID NODES
5 7 1 1–2– 9
13 20 2 2 – 3 – 10
6 14 3 3 – 4 – 11
17 19 4 4 – 1 – 12
4 5 5 – 6 – 13
12 11
6 6 – 7 – 14
18
7 7 – 8 – 15
1 3 8 8 – 5 – 16
9 10 9 1 – 5 – 17
10 2 – 6 – 18
2
11 3 – 7 – 19
12 4 – 8 – 20
3-D 3-Node Shell

z
3
FACE ID NODES
1 1–2–3
1
y
x
2
3-D 4-Node Shell/Membrane
4 P
FACE ID NODES
1 1–2–3–4
3
Main Index
Edges and Faces
3-D 6-Node Shell

3
P FACE ID NODES
1 1–2–3–4–5–6
6 5
1 4 2

4
FACE ID NODES
3 1 1–2–4
2 2–3–4
3 3–1–4
4 1–2–3
1

6
4 FACE ID NODES
5 1 1–2–5–4
2 2–3–6–5
3 3 –1 – 4 – 6
4 1–3–2
5 4–5–6
3
1
2
Main Index
Edges and Faces
3-D 8-Node Brick

8
FACE ID NODES
5 7 1 1–2–6–5
2 2–3–7–6
6 3 3–4–8–7
4 4–1–5–8
4 5 1–2–3–4
6 6–5–8–7
1 3

4
10
FACE ID NODES
3 1 1 – 2 – 4 – 5 – 09 – 08
8 9
2 2 – 3 – 4 – 6 – 10 – 09
7 3 3 – 1 – 4 – 7 – 08 – 10
6 4 1 – 2 – 3 – 5 – 06 – 07
1
5
2

3
15
FACE ID NODES
6
1 1 – 2 – 5 – 04 – 07 – 14 – 10 – 13
2 2 – 3 – 6 – 05 – 08 – 15 – 11 – 14
9 8 3 3 – 1 – 4 – 06 – 09 – 13 – 12 – 15
4 3 – 2 – 1 – 08 – 07 – 09
5 4 – 5 – 6 – 10 – 11 – 12
12 11
1 7 2
13 14
4 10 5
Main Index
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data
3-D 20-Node Brick

8
16 15
FACE ID NODES
5 7 1 1 – 2 – 6 – 5 – 09 – 18 – 13 – 17
13 20 2 2 – 3 – 7 – 6 – 10 – 19 – 14 – 18
6 14 3 3 – 4 – 8 – 7 – 11 – 20 – 15 – 19
17 19 4 4 – 1 – 5 – 8 – 12 – 17 – 16 – 20
4 5 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 09 – 10 – 11 – 12
12 11
6 6 – 5 – 8 – 7 – 13 – 16 – 15 – 14
18
1 3
9 10
2

The input data for Marc is organized into three basic groups. These groups form a natural subdivision of
the data. Each group is then subdivided into various optional blocks of input data. The optional blocks of
data within each group have been organized to minimize the input of unnecessary data. The main idea is
to enable you to specify only the data for the optional blocks needed to define your problem. The various
blocks of input are referred to here as optional in the sense that many have built-in default values which
can be used and does not imply that they are optional in all cases. The input data is divided into the
following three groups:
Parameter Data
This group of data is used to allocate the necessary working space for the problem and to set up initial
switches which control the flow of Marc through the desired analysis. This set of input data is terminated
with END parameter data.
Model Definition Data

This set of data is used to read in the initial loading, geometry, and material data of the model. It also
provides nodal point data such a boundary conditions. In general, the initial model data is provided in this
group and control restart. Print options can also be specified here for further Marc processing. This data
provides Marc with the necessary information for determination of an initial elastic solution (zero
increment solution in Marc terminology). This group of data is terminated with END OPTION data.
History Definition Data

This group of data provide the load incrementation and control of Marc after the initial elastic analysis.
The group also includes blocks which allow changes in the initial model specifications. Each set of load
incrementation data is terminated with CONTINUE data. This data sends Marc back for another increment
or series of increments if the auto incrementation features are requested.
Main Index
Input data file organization for Marc is shown in Figure 1-1.
Proportional
Increment History
Auto Load
Etc.
Definition
Linear and Nonlinear Analysis
Requiring Incrementation
Connectivity
Coordinates Model
Fixed Displacements Definition
Linear Analysis
Etc.
Title
Sizing Parameter
Etc.
Figure 1-1 Marc Input Data File
Typical Marc Problem Data Files

Marc Parameter Data
END Data
Marc Model Definition Data
(Zero Increment)
END OPTION Data
Marc History Definition Data
for the First Increment
CONTINUE Data
(Additional History Definition Data
for the 2nd, 3rd, ..., Increments)
Main Index
Marc Input for New Users

Marc input format is designed to allow the input of very complex problems. The new user is, however,
faced with gaining familiarity with the system and its conventions. At the outset, therefore, you should
adopt a systematic approach to the preparation of input data. One approach is to follow the construction
of Marc and adopt the procedure of preparing input for each of the data blocks (parameter, model
definition, and history definition options) in turn.
We shall illustrate our discussion by preparing input for the analysis of a thin plate with hole subjected
to pressure loading. The problem, as shown in Figure 1-2, is a well-known one so that the results can be
compared to the exact solution (Timoshenko, Theory of Elasticity). The hole/plate size ratio is chosen to
approximate an infinite plate. A procedure preparing Marc input takes the following steps:
Finite Element Modeling

The plate has an outside dimension of 10 inches x 10 inches with a central hole of 1 inch radius. The
thickness of the plate is assumed to be 0.1 inches and the material property is assumed to be isotropic and
linear elastic. The Young’s modulus is 30 x 106 pounds per square inch (psi) with Poisson’s ratio of 0.3.
These quantities are sufficient to define the behavior of an isotropic, linear-elastic material.
σ = 1.0 psi
R = 1.0 in.
10 in.
10 in.
Plate Thickness = 0.1 in.
E = 30 X 106 psi
ν = 0.3
Figure 1-2 Plate with Hole
As shown in Figure 1-2, due to symmetry conditions, only a quarter of the plate is analyzed. Prescribed
displacement boundary conditions exist along the lines of symmetry (that is, u = 0 at line x = 0; v = 0 at
line y = 0) and traction (pressure) boundary condition exits at the top of the plate.
Main Index
This quarter plate is approximated by a finite element mesh consisting of twenty 8-node plane stress
elements with appropriate loading and boundary conditions. The element (Marc type 26) is a second-
order, isoparametric two-dimensional element for plane stress. There are eight nodes with two
translational degrees of freedom at each node. A description of element type 26 can be found in Marc
Volume B: Element Library.
This example uses a coarse mesh for demonstration purposes only. The analyst must anticipate the sharp
stress gradients in this problem and design the mesh accordingly. This is achieved in this problem by
using progressively smaller elements as the hole is approached. If necessary, further mesh refinement can
be achieved by adding elements to the mesh.
The preparation of parameter, model definition, and history definition data for this example is
demonstrated as follows:
Parameter Data
The analysis to be carried out in this example is a linear elastic analysis with plots. Consequently, only
five parameters are needed for the input data:
TITLE
ELEMENTS
SIZING
END
In this example, the title, Elastic Analysis of a Thin Plate with Hole, is chosen for the problem and entered
through the TITLE parameter.
The selected Marc element type 26 is entered through the ELEMENTS parameter.
No data is required on the SIZING parameter:
Finally, the parameters are completed with an END parameter.
At this stage, the input data is:
TITLE ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF A THIN PLATE WITH HOLE
SIZING
ELEMENTS,26,
END
Model Definition Data

The model definition data contains the bulk data for the analysis. The data entered here concerns:
1. the topology of the model (finite element mesh in terms of element connectivity and nodal
coordinates, as well as plate thickness),
2. material property (Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio),
Main Index
3. pressure loading and prescribed displacement boundary conditions, and

4. plotting and output controls.
A list of the model definition options can be found in Chapter 3 of this document.
1. Topology of the Model

The topology of the plate model is numerically defined by the following model definition options:
CONNECTIVITY
COORDINATES
GEOMETRY
In this example, the mesh consists of 20 elements and 79 nodes. The data required for element
connectivity and nodal coordinates are:
CONNECTIVITY
20
1 26 1 3 11 9 2 7 10 6
2 26 3 5 13 11 4 8 12 7
3 26 9 11 19 17 10 15 18 14
4 26 11 13 21 19 12 16 20 15
5 26 5 3 27 25 4 23 26 22
6 26 3 1 29 27 2 24 28 23
7 26 30 32 40 38 31 36 39 35
8 26 32 34 42 40 33 37 41 36
9 26 38 40 27 29 39 44 28 43
10 26 40 42 25 27 41 45 26 44
11 26 1 9 53 47 6 52 50 46
12 26 47 53 55 49 50 54 51 48
13 26 9 17 59 53 14 58 56 52
14 26 53 59 61 55 56 60 57 54
15 26 49 64 66 47 62 65 63 48
16 26 47 66 29 1 63 67 24 46
17 26 30 38 75 69 35 74 72 68
18 26 69 75 77 71 72 76 73 70
19 26 38 29 66 75 43 67 78 74
20 26 75 66 64 77 78 65 79 76
COORDINATES
0 0
1 1.4000 1.4000
2 1.5500 1.0500
3 1.7000 0.7000
.
.
.
77 0.0000 1.2500
78 0.4931 1.1910
79 0.0000 1.3750
The data in the CONNECTIVITY option consists of element numbers (1,2,...,19,20), element type
(26), and for each element, four corner node numbers and four midside node numbers.
Main Index
The data in the COORDINATES option consists of the node number (1); and coordinates (x = 1.4,
y = 1.4) of node 1 in the global coordinate system (x, y).
Finally, the plate thickness is entered through GEOMETRY as:
GEOMETRY
0,
0.1,
1 TO 20
A thickness of 0.1 inches is assumed for all twenty (1 to 20) elements.
2. Material Property
Material properties of the plate are entered through the ISOTROPIC option. For our problem, the only
data required for a linear elastic analysis are Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio. The same material is
used for the whole mesh (from Element No. 1 to Element No. 20). This is given a material ID of 1. The
data in ISOTROPIC is:
ISOTROPIC
1,
1,
30.E6,0.3,
1 TO 20
3. Pressure Loading and Prescribed Displacement Boundary Conditions

As shown in Figure 1-3, the pressure loading is acted on two elements (elements 13 and 14), along the
lines 61-60-59 and 59-58-17.
From CONNECTIVITY, we observe that these lines represent the 2-6-3 face of the elements. As a result,
a distributed load type of 8 can be determined for the pressure loading from the QUICK REFERENCE
of element 26 in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
"LOAD TYPE (IBODY)=8 FOR UNIFORM PRESSURE ON 2-6-3 FACE"
In addition, as shown in Figure 1-4, the sign conversion of the pressure loading is that a negative
magnitude represents a tensile distributed load. Consequently, the input for the one pound tensile
distributed loading (DIST LOADS) acting on elements 13 and 14 takes the following form:
DIST LOADS
0,
8,-1.,
13,14,
Main Index
61 60 59 58
17
57 14 13
16
55
3
51 12
11
19
49
62
15 1
64
79 16
77 20 20 y
73
71
18 19 6 4 5 in.
17 9
7 2
5
8 10 5 in.
21 Radius of the
34 37424525 22 5 8 13 16 hole = 1 in.
x
Figure 1-3 Mesh Layout for Plate with Hole
4 7 3
7 8 9
8 4 5 6 6
1 2 3
1 5 2
Figure 1-4 Integration Points of Eight-Node, 2-D Element
The FIXED DISP option is used for the input of prescribed displacement boundary conditions at the lines
of symmetry (x = 0, y = 0). As indicated in the QUICK REFERENCE of element 26, the nodal degrees
of freedom are as follows:
dof 1 = u = global x-direction displacement
dof 2 = v = global y-direction displacement.
Main Index
In this example, the symmetry conditions require that:

dof 1 = u = 0 for nodes (71, 73, 77, 79, 64, 62, 49, 51, 55, 57, 61)
along the line x=0.
and
dof 2 = v = 0 for nodes (34, 37, 42, 45, 25, 22, 5, 8, 13, 16, 21)
along the line y=0.
The input data takes the following format:
FIXED DISP
2,
0.,
2,
34,37,42,45,25,22,5,8,13,16,21,
0.,
1,
71,73,77,79,64,62,49,51,55,57,61,
4. Bandwidth Optimization and Output Controls

Although the bandwidth in this sample problem cannot be extremely large, the use of the OPTIMIZE
model definition option demonstrates the bandwidth optimization capabilities in Marc. This option can
reduce considerable computing costs in larger problems. The bandwidth optimization option creates an
internal node numbering different from your node numbering, but all data input and output is in your
node numbering system.
There are a number of options available to you for bandwidth optimization. The option number 2
(Cuthill-McKee algorithm) with a maximum of ten iterations is selected for this example.
OPTIMIZE,2,0,0,1,
10,
In order to minimize the output quantity (number of printed pages), the PRINT ELEMENT option is used
for printing out stresses and strains at a few integration points of a number of elements. The elements to
be printed are:
From Element to Element

2 2
4 5
8 8
10 10
Only two integration points (numbers 4 and 6) where stresses and strains are to be printed. Nodal
quantities (displacement, reactions, etc.) are printed for all nodes (from node 1 to node 79). The input
data of PRINT ELEMENT is:
PRINT ELEMENT
1,
Main Index
STRESS STRAIN
2,4,5,8,10
4,6,
The SUMMARY option produces summary tables containing maximum and minimum values of stresses
and strains.
The model definition data is completed with an END OPTION.
History Definition Data

This following example is a linear-elastic analysis which requires no incrementation data.
title elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole
sizing
elements 26
end
connectivity
20
1 26 1 3 11 9 2 7 10 6
2 26 3 5 13 11 4 8 12 7
3 26 9 11 19 17 10 15 18 14
4 26 11 13 21 19 12 16 20 15
5 26 5 3 27 25 4 23 26 22
6 26 3 1 29 27 2 24 28 23
7 26 30 32 40 38 31 36 39 35
8 26 32 34 42 40 33 37 41 36
9 26 38 40 27 29 39 44 28 43
10 26 40 42 25 27 41 45 26 44
11 26 1 9 53 47 6 52 50 46
12 26 47 53 55 49 50 54 51 48
13 26 9 17 59 53 14 58 56 52
14 26 53 59 61 55 56 60 57 54
15 26 49 64 66 47 62 65 63 48
16 26 47 66 29 1 63 67 24 46
17 26 30 38 75 69 35 74 72 68
18 26 69 75 77 71 72 76 73 70
19 26 38 29 66 75 43 67 78 74
20 26 75 66 64 77 78 65 79 76
coordinates
0 0
1 1.4000 1.4000
2 1.5500 1.0500
3 1.7000 0.7000
4 1.8500 0.3500
5 2.0000 0.0000
6 2.3000 2.3000
7 2.5250 1.1500
8 2.7500 0.0000
9 3.2000 3.2000
10 3.2750 2.4000
11 3.3500 1.6000
12 3.4250 0.8000
13 3.5000 0.0000
Main Index
14 4.1000 4.1000
15 4.1750 2.0500
16 4.2500 0.0000
17 5.0000 5.0000
18 5.0000 3.7500
19 5.0000 2.5000
20 5.0000 1.2500
21 5.0000 0.0000
22 1.7500 0.0000
23 1.4900 0.6150
24 1.2300 1.2300
25 1.5000 0.0000
26 1.3900 0.2650
27 1.2800 0.5300
28 1.1700 0.7950
29 1.0600 1.0600
30 0.7070 0.7070
31 0.8315 0.5557
32 0.9238 0.3825
33 0.9810 0.1948
34 1.0000 0.0000
35 0.7953 0.7953
36 1.0129 0.4194
37 1.1250 0.0000
38 0.8835 0.8835
39 1.0008 0.6753
40 1.1019 0.4562
41 1.1855 0.2299
42 1.2500 0.0000
43 0.9718 0.9718
44 1.1910 0.4931
45 1.3750 0.0000
46 1.0500 1.5500
47 0.7000 1.7000
48 0.3500 1.8500
49 0.0000 2.0000
50 1.1500 2.5250
51 0.0000 2.7500
52 2.4000 3.2750
53 1.6000 3.3500
54 0.8000 3.4250
55 0.0000 3.5000
56 2.0500 4.1750
57 0.0000 4.2500
58 3.7500 5.0000
59 2.5000 5.0000
60 1.2500 5.0000
61 0.0000 5.0000
62 0.0000 1.7500
63 0.6150 1.4900
64 0.0000 1.5000
65 0.2650 1.3900
66 0.5300 1.2800
67 0.7950 1.1700
Main Index
68 0.5557 0.8315
69 0.3825 0.9238
70 0.1948 0.9810
71 0.0000 1.0000
72 0.4194 1.0129
73 0.0000 1.1250
74 0.6753 1.0008
75 0.4562 1.1019
76 0.2299 1.1855
77 0.0000 1.2500
78 0.4931 1.1910
79 0.0000 1.3750
geometry
1
0.1
1 to 20
isotropic
1
1
30000000. .3
1 to 20
dist loads
1
8 -1.
13 14
fixed displacement
2
0.0000e+00
2
34 37 42 45 25 22 5 8 13 16 21
0.0000e+00
1
71 73 77 79 64 62 49 51 55 57 61
optimize,2,0,0,1,
10,
print element
1
stress strain
2 4 5 8 10
4 6
end option
Main Index
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

Selected portions of the output for this problem are shown in the following. The small type on the output
are the author’s comments and gives a further explanation.
Marc first gives a notes section which identifies the version of Marc being used. This is followed by an
echo of the input data and a summary of program sizing and options requested.
W W
MMMMM MMMMM
WWWWW WWWWW
MMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW
MMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMM
WWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWW
MMMM MMMMMMM MMMM
WWWW WWWWWWW WWWW
MM MMM MM
WW WWW WW
M M M
W W W
MM MMM MM
WW WWW WW
MMMM MMMMMMM MMMM
WWWW WWWWWWW WWWW
MMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMM
WWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWW
MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWW
MMMMM MMMMM
WWWWW WWWWW
M M
Marc REVISION 2008
MSC.SOFTWARE CORPORATION
machine type: NT
(c) COPYRIGHT 2008 MSC.Software Corporation, all rights reserved
Marc - N T
Main Index
i n p u t d a t a
p a g e 1
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
title prob e2.9 elastic analysis
title plate with hole
title prob e2.9 elastic analysis - elmt 26
sizing
card 5 elements,26,
processor,1,1,1,
version,10,
end
connectivity
card 10 20
1 26 1 3 11 9 2 7 10 6
2 26 3 5 13 11 4 8 12 7
3 26 9 11 19 17 10 15 18 14
4 26 11 13 21 19 12 16 20 15
card 15 5 26 5 3 27 25 4 23 26 22
6 26 3 1 29 27 2 24 28 23
7 26 30 32 40 38 31 36 39 35
8 26 32 34 42 40 33 37 41 36
9 26 38 40 27 29 39 44 28 43
card 20 10 26 40 42 25 27 41 45 26 44
11 26 1 9 53 47 6 52 50 46
12 26 47 53 55 49 50 54 51 48
13 26 9 17 59 53 14 58 56 52
14 26 53 59 61 55 56 60 57 54
card 25 15 26 49 64 66 47 62 65 63 48
16 26 47 66 29 1 63 67 24 46
17 26 30 38 75 69 35 74 72 68
18 26 69 75 77 71 72 76 73 70
19 26 38 29 66 75 43 67 78 74
card 30 20 26 75 66 64 77 78 65 79 76
coordinates
2 79
1 1.4000 1.4000
2 1.5500 1.0500
card 35 3 1.7000 0.7000
4 1.8500 0.3500
5 2.0000 0.0000
6 2.3000 2.3000
7 2.5250 1.1500
card 40 8 2.7500 0.0000
9 3.2000 3.2000
10 3.2750 2.4000
11 3.3500 1.6000
12 3.4250 0.8000
card 45 13 3.5000 0.0000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e 2
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 4.1000 4.1000
15 4.1750 2.0500
16 4.2500 0.0000
17 5.0000 5.0000
card 50 18 5.0000 3.7500
19 5.0000 2.5000
20 5.0000 1.2500
21 5.0000 0.0000
22 1.7500 0.0000
Main Index
card 55 23 1.4900 0.6150

24 1.2300 1.2300
25 1.5000 0.0000
26 1.3900 0.2650
27 1.2800 0.5300
card 60 28 1.1700 0.7950
29 1.0600 1.0600
30 0.7070 0.7070
31 0.8315 0.5557
32 0.9238 0.3825
card 65 33 0.9810 0.1948
34 1.0000 0.0000
35 0.7953 0.7953
36 1.0129 0.4194
37 1.1250 0.0000
card 70 38 0.8835 0.8835
39 1.0008 0.6753
40 1.1019 0.4562
41 1.1855 0.2299
42 1.2500 0.0000
card 75 43 0.9718 0.9718
44 1.1910 0.4931
45 1.3750 0.0000
46 1.0500 1.5500
47 0.7000 1.7000
card 80 48 0.3500 1.8500
49 0.0000 2.0000
50 1.1500 2.5250
51 0.0000 2.7500
52 2.4000 3.2750
card 85 53 1.6000 3.3500
54 0.8000 3.4250
55 0.0000 3.5000
56 2.0500 4.1750
57 0.0000 4.2500
card 90 58 3.7500 5.0000
59 2.5000 5.0000
60 1.2500 5.0000
61 0.0000 5.0000
62 0.0000 1.7500
card 95 63 0.6150 1.4900
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e 3
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
64 0.0000 1.5000
65 0.2650 1.3900
66 0.5300 1.2800
67 0.7950 1.1700
card 100 68 0.5557 0.8315
69 0.3825 0.9238
70 0.1948 0.9810
71 0.0000 1.0000
72 0.4194 1.0129
card 105 73 0.0000 1.1250
74 0.6753 1.0008
75 0.4562 1.1019
76 0.2299 1.1855
77 0.0000 1.2500
card 110 78 0.4931 1.1910
79 0.0000 1.3750
isotropic
1
card 115 0.300e+08 0.300e+00 0.000e+00 0.000e+00 0.100e+21 0.000e+00
Main Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 c
16 17 18 19 20
geometry
1
card 120 1.
1 to 20
fixed displacement
0.0000e+00
card 125 2
34 37 42 45 25 22 5 8 13 16 21
0.0000e+00
1
71 73 77 79 64 62 49 51 55 57 61
card 130 dist loads
8 -1.000
13 14
summary
card 135 optimize,2,0,0,1,
10,
print element
1
stress strain
card 140 2 4 5 8 10
4 6
post
16 17 2 0 19
17 equivalent von mises stress
card 145 11 1st comp of total stress
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e 4
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 2nd comp of total stress
13 3rd comp of total stress
end option
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
*************************************************
*************************************************
program sizing and options requested as follows
element type requested************************* 26

number of elements in mesh********************* 20
number of nodes in mesh************************ 79
max number of elements in any dist load list*** 2
maximum number of point loads****************** 0
load correction flagged or set************
number of lists of distributed loads*********** 3
values stored at all integration points****
tape no.for input of coordinates + connectivity 5
no.of different materials 1 max.no of slopes 5
number of points on shell section ************* 11
new style input format will be used*********
maximum number of set names is***************** 50
number of processors used ********************* 1
Marc input version ************************ 10
Main Index
end of parameters and sizing

*************************************************
*************************************************
At this stage, Marc attempts to allocate core for input of the model definition data and assembly of the
element stiffness matrix. Marc first prints out the key to strain, stress, and displacement output for each
element type chosen. Column numbers identifying output quantities are referenced to the appropriate
components of stress, strain, or displacement. Then, the required number of words is printed out followed
by a list of the internal core allocation parameters. They reflect the maximum requirements imposed by
different elements. The internal element variables are different for each element type and are repeated for
each element type used in a given analysis.
key to stress, strain and displacement output
element type 26
8-node isoparametric plane stress quadrilateral
stresses and strains in global directions

1=xx
2=yy
3=xy
displacements in global directions

1=u global x direction
2=v global y direction
workspace needed for input and stiffness assembly 53059
internal core allocation parameters

degrees of freedom per node (ndeg) 2
max. number of coordinates per node 2
max. nodes per element (nnodmx) 8
max. invariants per int. points (neqst) 1
max.stress components per int. point (nstrmx) 3
strains per integration point (ngens) 3
flag for element storage (ielsto) 0

elements in core, words per element (nelsto) 1046
total space required 20920
vectors in core, total space required 6004
words per record on disk set to 40960
internal element variables
internal element number 1 library code type 26
Main Index
number of nodes= 8
stresses stored per integration point = 3
direct continuum components stored = 2
shear continuum components stored = 1
shell/beam flag = 0
curvilinear coord. flag = 0
int.points for elem. stiffness 9
number of local inertia directions 2
int.point for print if all points not flagged 5
int. points for dist. surface loads (pressure) 3
library code type = 26
large disp. row counts 4 4 7
residual load correction is invoked
For nonlinear problems, it is important to note if the residual load correction was turned on. this is
automatically done in the current version.
This is followed by the model definition data; how it is read and interpreted by Marc. Marc then
calculates the bandwidth of the stiffness matrix and optimizes it if the OPTIMIZE model definition option
is included. The original bandwidth (try 0) and the optimized bandwidth (try 10).
direct symmetric profile solver is invoked for region 1
maximum connectivity in stiffness matrix is 17 at node 75
workspace needed for optimizing = 45562

maximum sky-line including fill-in is526at try 0(forward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is1128at try10(backward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is1307at try10(forward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is900at try10(backward numbering)
maximum connectivity in stiffness matrix is 14 at node 40
maximum half-bandwidth is 26 between nodes 21 and 46
number of profile entries including fill-in is 900
number of profile entries excluding fill-in is 546
total workspace needed with in-core matrix storage = 61121
load increments for each degree of freedom

summed over the whole model
from distributed loads

dist. loads on undeformed configuration - increments for dist. loads
increments for point loads
0.000000E+00 5.000000E+00
point loads
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
start of assembly cycle number is 0
Main Index
wall time = 2.00
start of matrix solution

wall time = 2.00
singularity ratio 1.8140E-01
end of matrix solution

wall time = 2.00
element with highest stress relative to yield is 8

where equivalent stress is 3.091E-20 of yield
NT version
Marc 2008
output for increment 0. "prob e2.9 elastic analysis - elmt 26"
total strain energy is 4.60569E-07

within which:
elastic strain energy is 4.60569E-07
plastic strain energy is 0.00000E+00
total ext-force work is 4.60569E-07
within which:
work by appl. force/disp. is 4.60569E-07
work by contact forces is 0.00000E+00
work by frictional forces is 0.00000E+00
After the bandwidth calculation (and optimization), Marc assigns the necessary workspace for the in-core
solution of this matrix.
maximum connectivity is 14 at node 40
maximum half-bandwidth is 26 between nodes 21 and 46
number of profile entries including fill-in is 900
number of profile entries excluding fill-in is 546
total workspace needed with in-core matrix storage = 60117
Marc then calculates the loading and sums the load applied to each degree of freedom for distributed
loads and point loads. This information provides for a valuable check on the total loads in the different
degrees of freedom.
load increments associated with each degree of freedom
distributed loads
0.000e+00 5.000e-01
point loads
0.000e+00 0.000e-00
load increments associated with each degree of freedom
distributed loads
0.000e+00 5.000e-01
Main Index
point loads
0.000e+00 0.000e-00
Then it prints the time (system billing units) at the start of assembly measured from the start of the job.
It then prints out the bandwidth which might have changed due to optimization of the nodal numbering
(if specified by you). This is followed by a printout of the time at the start of the matrix solution
start of assembly
time = 0.18
start of matrix solution
time = 0.24
If the out-of-core solver is used, a figure representing the profile of the global stiffness matrix is shown.
It then prints the following message which gives an estimate of the conditioning of the matrix. If the
singularity is of the order of the accuracy of the machine (10 for 64 bits), the equations can be considered
singular and the solution unreliable. For nonlinear problems, incremental changes in the singularity ratio
reflects approaching instabilities. Marc then prints the time at the end of the matrix solution. This is the
time at the end of matrix triangularization.
singularity ratio 1.8140e-01

end of matrix solution
time = 0.25
At this stage, Marc enters a back substitution for the displacements. This is followed by calculation of
element stress values. Default yield stress is set by Marc for a linear elastic analysis.
MARC 2008, 01/03/07, output for increment 0. elastic analysis of a thin

plate with hole
element with highest stress relative to yield is 8 where equivalent stress is
0.309e-19 of yield
A heading is printed next. The Tresca Intensity is output for application in ASME code applications. The
Mises intensity is the equivalent yield stress. Principal stress and strain values are output. This is followed
by individual stress and strain components. The number of each column is to be used with the key printed
at the beginning of the analysis.
tresca mises mean p r i n c i p a l v a l u e s p h y s i c a l c
o m p o n e n t s
intensity intensity normal minimum intermediate maximum 1 2 3 4
5 6
intensity
element 20 point 4 integration pt. coordinate= 0.234e+00 0.121e+01

section thickness = 0.100e+00
engsts 5.802e-01 5.413e-01-1.342e-01-4.914e-01 0.000e+00 8.880e-02-4.531e-01 5.052e-02-1.440e-01
engstn 2.514e-08 1.550e-08-3.131e-09-1.727e-08 0.000e+00 7.874e-09-1.561e-08 6.215e-09-1.248e-08
element 20 point 6 integration pt. coordinate= 0.261e+00 0.137e+01

section thickness = 0.100e+00
engsts 6.055e-01 5.255e-01-2.275e-02-3.369e-01 0.000e+00 2.686e-01-2.677e-01 1.995e-01-1.926e-01
engstn 2.624e-08 1.518e-08-5.307e-10-1.391e-08 0.000e+00 1.232e-08-1.092e-08 9.326e-09-1.669e-08
The stress and strain results are followed by the increment of displacements and the total displacements
for all the nodes. If it is requested to print and store all stress points, a printout of the reaction forces would
follow the displacement output.
Main Index
n o d a l p o i n t d a t a
i n c r e m e n t a l d i s p l a c e m e n t s
1 -2.17163e-08 7.15861e-08 2 -3.08177e-08 5.15029e-08 3 -4.07290e-08 3.20392e-

08
4 -4.76926e-08 1.49932e-08 5 -5.04297e-08 0. 6 -2.76616e-08 9.27126e-08
7 -4.39062e-08 4.43055e-08 8 -5.45603e-08 0. 9 -3.22702e-08 1.16274e-07
t o t a l d i s p l a c e m e n t s
1 -2.17163e-08 7.15861e-08 2 -3.08177e-08 5.15029e-08 3 -4.07290e-08 3.20392e-

08
4 -4.76926e-08 1.49932e-08 5 -5.04297e-08 0. 6 -2.76616e-08 9.27126e-08
7 -4.39062e-08 4.43055e-08 8 -5.45603e-08 0. 9 -3.22702e-08 1.16274e-07
total equivalent nodal forces (distributed plus point loads)
1 0. 0. 2 0. 0. 3 0. 0.
4 0. 0. 5 0. 0. 6 0. 0.
7 0. 0. 8 0. 0. 9 0. 0.
reaction forces at fixed boundary conditions, residual load correction elsewhere
1 1.21431e-17 -3.61690e-16 2 1.24033e-16 -1.11022e-16 3 -1.86483e-16 9.54098e-

17
4 1.31839e-16 1.42247e-16 5 -4.68375e-17 -4.27307e-02 6 -7.19910e-17 1.66533e-
16
7 -5.20417e-18 1.11022e-16 8 -3.96005e-17 -0.11445 9 -1.72388e-17 1.04083e-16
summary of externally applied loads
0.00000e+00 0.50000e+00
summary of reaction/residual forces

-0.72045e-17 -0.50000e+00
The results are concluded with an indication of the magnitude of distributed loads.
distributed load type current

list number magnitude
1 8 -1.000 0. 0.
The SUMMARY model definition option prompts Marc to print summary tables of stresses and strains
as follows:
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
* *
* elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole *
* *
* increment 0 MARC 2008 *
* *
Main Index
************************************************************************
* * * * * *
* quantity * value * elem.* int.*layer*
* * *number*point* *
* * * * * *
************************************************************************
* * * * * *
* max first comp. of stress * 0.52712e+00 * 7 * 2 * 1 *
* min first comp. of stress * -0.11257e+01 * 18 * 7 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max second comp. of stress * 0.31370e+01 * 8 * 3 * 1 *
* min second comp. of stress * -0.75958e-01 * 18 * 4 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max third comp. of stress * 0.15887e+00 * 18 * 1 * 1 *
* min third comp. of stress * -0.84812e+00 * 7 * 3 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max equivalent stress * 0.30910e+01 * 8 * 3 * 1 *
* min equivalent stress * 0.26979e+00 * 17 * 4 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max mean stress * 0.10821e+01 * 8 * 3 * 1 *
* min mean stress * -0.38696e+00 * 18 * 7 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max tresca stress * 0.31419e+01 * 8 * 3 * 1 *
* min tresca stress * 0.29647e+00 * 17 * 4 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max first comp. of total strain * 0.58578e-08 * 7 * 1 * 1 *
* min first comp. of total strain * -0.37172e-07 * 18 * 7 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max second comp. of total strain * 0.10347e-06 * 8 * 3 * 1 *
* min second comp. of total strain * 0.34023e-08 * 17 * 7 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max third comp. of total strain * 0.13769e-07 * 18 * 1 * 1 *
* min third comp. of total strain * -0.73504e-07 * 7 * 3 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max equivalent total strain * 0.87678e-07 * 8 * 3 * 1 *
* min equivalent total strain * 0.77458e-08 * 17 * 4 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max mean total strain * 0.00000e+00 * 1 * 1 * 1 *
* min mean total strain * 0.00000e+00 * 1 * 1 * 1 *
* * * * * *
************************************************************************
The message end of increment 0 signifies the end of analysis for 0th increment. Additional output
concerns only with post plottings. The output is finally concluded by plot messages, since plotting
was requested.
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
* *
* *
* increment 0 MARC 2008 *
* *
************************************************************************
Main Index
* * * * * *
* quantity * value * elem.* int.*layer*
* * *number*point* *
* * * * * *
************************************************************************
* * * * * *
* max tresca total strain * 0.13162e-06 * 8 * 3 * 1 *
* min tresca total strain * 0.12847e-07 * 17 * 4 * 1 *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* max temperature * 0.00000e+00 * 1 * 1 * 1 *
* min temperature * 0.00000e+00 * 1 * 1 * 1 *
* * * * * *
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
******************************************************************
******************************************************************
* *
* increment 0 Marc 2008 *
* *
******************************************************************
* * * *
* quantity * value * node *
* * * number *
* * * *
******************************************************************
* * * *
* max first comp. of incremental disp * -0.19968e-08 * 48 *
* min first comp. of incremental disp * -0.73223e-07 * 21 *
* * * *
* * * *
* max second comp. of incremental disp * 0.20382e-06 * 61 *
* min second comp. of incremental disp * 0.14872e-07 * 26 *
* * * *
* * * *
* max first comp. of total disp. * -0.19968e-08 * 48 *
* min first comp. of total disp. * -0.73223e-07 * 21 *
* * * *
* * * *
* max second comp. of total disp. * 0.20382e-06 * 61 *
* min second comp. of total disp. * 0.14872e-07 * 26 *
* * * *
* * * *
* max first comp. of reaction force * 0.12293e-01 * 73 *
* min first comp. of reaction force * -0.13867e-01 * 57 *
* * * *
* * * *
* max second comp. of reaction force * -0.13839e-01 * 34 *
* min second comp. of reaction force * -0.11445e+00 * 8 *
* * * *
******************************************************************
******************************************************************
e n d o f i n c r e m e n t 0
time = 1.17
The Marc exit number 3004 indicates the problem is completed.
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 2 Parameters List
2 Parameters List
Parameter Page
$NO LIST 83
ABLATION 126
ACCUMULATE 157
ACOUSTIC 134
ADAPTIVE 91
ALIAS 158
ALL POINTS 149
ALLOCATE 73
APPBC 156
ASSUMED STRAIN 108
AUTOMSET 186
AUTOSPC 188
BEAM SECT 191

BEARING 129
BOOC 171
Main Index
Parameter Page
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 181
BUCKLE 113
CAVITY 138
CENTROID 148
COMMENT 162
CONSTANT DILATATION 107
COUPLE 117
CREEP 114
CURING 128
DECOUPLING 118
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION 90
DESIGN SENSITIVITY 89
DIFFUSION 125
DIST LOADS 176
DYNAMIC 95
ELASTIC 88
ELASTICITY 109
ELECTRO 130
ELEMENTS 76
EL-MA 132
ELSTO 169
END 85
EXTENDED 84
FEATURE 78
FILMS 178
FINITE 106
FLUID 119
Main Index
Chapter 2 Parameters List 65
Parameter Page
FLUXES 177
FOLLOW FOR 111
FOURIER 94
HARMONIC 97
HEAT 123
INCLUDE 173
INPUT TAPE 168
IO-DEACTIVATE 189
ISTRESS 154
JOULE 124
LARGE DISP 102

LARGE STRAIN 103
LINEAR 93
LOAD COR 150
LUMP 155
MACHINING 140
MAGNETO 131
MNF 143
MPC-CHECK 185
NEW 160
NO ECHO 172
NO LOADCOR 151
NOTES 167
OOC 170
Main Index
Parameter Page
PIEZO 133
PLASTICITY 110
PORE 121
PREALLOC 75
PRINT 163
PROCESSOR 80
PYROLYSIS 127
RADIATION 135
RBE 139
RESPONSE 99
RESTRICTOR 179
REZONING 142
R-P FLOW 100
SCALE 152
SHELL SECT 182
SIZING 74
SPFLOW 101
SS-ROLLING 98
STATE VARS 175
STOP 166
STRUCTURAL 116
SUPER 144
TABLE 161
THERMAL 153
TIE 184
TITLE 72
TSHEAR 183
T-T-T 122
Main Index
Chapter 2 Parameters List 67
Parameter Page
UNIT 82
UPDATE 105
USER 145
VERSION 77
VISCO ELAS 115
WELDING 180
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 2: Parameters
2 Parameters
J
Basic Input Requirements 71
J
Analysis Types 87
J Rezoning and Substructure Parameters 141
J
Additional Flags for Various Analyses 147
J
Program Function and I/O Controls 159
J Modifying Default Values 175
J
Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements 191
Main Index
This chapter describes the parameter section of the Marc input file. It is the first section of the file. The
parameter section is used to specify the title of the file, the work space requirements, the elements to be
used in the analysis, and the type of analysis to be performed. It is organized according to loosely defined
categories of parameter types, as shown in the above list.
Only the TITLE, ELEMENTS, and END parameters are required. Optional parameters flag the use of
certain elements, analysis capabilities, or change the default values. The first ten columns of the
parameter data are reserved for the key words which control the input of the parameters. These key words
must be entered as left justified. Some options are set by the order in which data is input.
Main Index
Chapter 2: Parameters 71
Basic Input Requirements
Basic Input Requirements
Main Index
72 TITLE
Output Title Definition
TITLE Output Title Definition
This parameter is REQUIRED.
Description
This required parameter defines the output title. There is no limit to the number of the title data read in
as long as the word TITLE appears in the first field. However, only the last TITLE data is used as an output
header. Due to the free-format processor, do not place commas within the TITLE data (Columns 11-80).
Format
Format
Data
Fixed Free Type Entry
1-10 1st A Enter the word TITLE.
11-80 2nd A Enter the title to be output with results.
Main Index
ALLOCATE 73
Initial Workspace Definition
ALLOCATE Initial Workspace Definition
Description
This parameter allows the specification of memory to be allocated at the start of the job. Marc uses
additional memory if necessary and it is available. See Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing
Option for more details. Values which are too large waste memory. The initial allocation can be done for
the following parts.
General memory: This specifies the initial allocation of the so-called general memory. This is used for
boundary condition data, material data, storing element stiffness matrices, and part or all of the assembled
global stiffness matrix among other things. Please note that element data like stresses and strains are no
longer part of the general memory starting with the 2005r3 release. Solver 0 also uses the general memory
area for the decomposition of the stiffness matrix. Initial allocation of the general memory can be used
for avoiding reallocation (increase of the workspace). For parallel processing, the amount specified is the
total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.
Matrix solver: This specifies the initial allocation of memory for solver 8. By giving a value that is more
than the maximum used during the run, one avoids that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated).
This can be particularly useful for large contact jobs, where additional memory may be allocated due to
contact. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased. This option is
only for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. For parallel
processing, the amount specified is the total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.
Format
Format
Data
Free Fixed Type Entry
1-8 1st A Enter the word ALLOCATE.
11-15 2nd I Size of workspace in MByte for general memory.
16-20 3rd I Size of workspace in MByte for solver memory.
Main Index
74 SIZING
Working Space Definition
SIZING Working Space Definition
Description
This parameter can be used to specify the maximum number of nodes and elements.
The values for the maximum number of elements and nodes should be set to an upper-bound if a manual
rezoning analysis is performed. In general for other cases, they are not needed.
If the number of elements or nodes in the model is greater than the value of MAXNUM in the include
file located in the tools directory, then either the value of MAXNUM should be increased or the number
of elements and nodes should be given on the SIZING parameter. The default value for MAXNUM is
one million. The value of MAXNUM may also be set using the environment value of MSC_MMEM. This is
often preferable to changing the include file.
Format
Format
Data
Fixed Free Type Entry
1-10 1st A Enter the word SIZING.
11-20 2nd I Not used; enter 0.
21-25 3rd I Maximum number of elements.
26-30 4th I Maximum number of nodal points.
Main Index
PREALLOC 75
Initial Workspace Allocation
PREALLOC Initial Workspace Allocation
Description
This parameter allows the specification of memory to be allocated at the start of the job. The workspace
for solver 8, given in the second field, is used for allocating the workspace for the solver before any other
memory is allocated. By giving a value that is more than the maximum used during the run, one avoids
that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated). This can be particularly useful on 32 bit systems for
large jobs. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased.
This option is only for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. In
a job using parallel processing, the allocation applies to the local domain and is the same on all domains.
Format
Format
Data
Fixed Free Entry Entry
1-10 1st A Enter the word PREALLOC.
11-20 2nd I Size of workspace in words for solver type 8 (Multifrontal Direct
Sparse Solver).
Main Index
76 ELEMENTS
Element Type Selection
ELEMENTS Element Type Selection
Description
This required parameter is used to identify the elements used in the analysis. Element codes for all the
allowable element types are found in Marc Volume B: Element Library. This data can be repeated as often
as necessary.
Note that the ALIAS parameter is available to change element library code descriptions on the
CONNECTIVITY model definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word ELEMENTS.
11-15 2nd I Library code of the first type of element selected.
16-20 3rd I Library code of the second type of element selected.
21-25 4th I Library code of the third type of element selected.
Etc. Etc. I Etc. up to 14 element types.
Main Index
VERSION 77
Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File
VERSION Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File
Description
This parameter is used to control which version of the program to use from an input perspective and a
defaults perspective. The following numbers are appropriate.
9 – defaults and input associated with MSC.Marc 2001

12 – defaults and input associated with Marc 2007
Note: If this parameter is not included or is given a value of zero, it is automatically set to nine.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word VERSION.
11-15 2nd I Enter the input/analysis version to be used.
Main Index
78 FEATURE
Specification of the Behavior of a Feature
FEATURE Specification of the Behavior of a Feature
Description
This parameter allows the user to specify that a particular feature is to be defined in a selected data style.
This permits data files to maintain compatibility with older versions of the program while still utilizing
the latest technology.
Currently, the following options used this capability:
Feature ID
Option (ifeat) Consequence
DIST LOADS 203 Do not apply distributed load to a face or an edge if all nodes
on the face or edge are in contact.
RADIATION 3301 Radiation viewfactor cut-off is relative; default for before
version 11.
RADIATION 3302 Radiation viewfactor cut-off is relative; default for
version 11.
MOONEY, ARRUDBOYCE, 3402 use mixed J, u, p formulation for updated Lagrange rubber
GENT, OGDEN formulations and permits use of series representation of
volumetric strain energy function.
5700 Set absolute rigid link rotation tolerance to 0.001; this is the
default.
CONTROL 5701 Do not set absolute rigid link rotation tolerance by default;
instead, read off the CONTROL option.
5800 Conventional element type 140.
5801 Add the enhanced strain contribution to improve the shell
element performance especially for distorted meshes (linear
analysis only).
5802 Extensions to 5801 for nonlinear analysis.
CONTACT 1002 Contact tolerance is based upon edge length of boundary
elements only.
4401 Skip recycle due to body-body contact; generally reduces
computational costs.
5301 Use double-sided tying in contact - this sometimes improves
behavior for self contact, but often leads to increase costs. It
should only be used if no other method resolves penetration
problems.
6601 Remove deactivated deformable bodies from the post file.
8201 Activates improvements for force based friction models.
Main Index
FEATURE 79
Specification of the Behavior of a Feature
Feature ID
Option (ifeat) Consequence
PIN CODE 6901 Use static condensation to remove pin code degrees of
freedom. This is not recommended for dynamics.
HEAT 7001 Switch off Lobatto integration for convective boundary
conditions to improve compatibility with 2005 r3.
7902 Used for higher order tetrahedral elements 127, 130 and 133:
check inside-out condition based upon 16 integration points.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word FEATURE.
11-15 2nd I Enter the feature ID.
This parameter may be repeated as often as necessary, or you can enter 14

feature IDs per line.
Main Index
80 PROCESSOR
Parallelization Control
PROCESSOR Parallelization Control
Description
This parameter may be used to specify the decomposition of the model when the single input DDM
procedure is used. It is necessary to start the analysis using the -nps command line argument. For more
details, see Table 2-3: Keyword Descriptions in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 2:
Program Initiation.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PROCESSOR.
16-20 3rd I Not used; enter 0.
21-25 4th I Not used; enter 0.
31-35 6th I Enter 1 to use DDM single input file.
36-40 7th I Decomposition method:
Enter 11 to use Metis Best decomposition; default.
Enter 12 to use Metis Element-Based decomposition.
Enter 13 to use Metis Node-Based decomposition.
Enter 14 to use Vector decomposition.
Enter 15 to use Radial decomposition.
Enter 16 to use Angular decomposition.
41-45 8th I Enter 1 to use out-of-core storage for DDM single input file.
46-50 9th I Flag for Additional Domain Decomposition Information (Default 0)
0 - No additional input
1 - Additional Input (Data Blocks 2 and 3 required)
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Island Removal Flag for Domain Decomposition (Default is 0)
0 - Do not attempt to remove Islands
1 - Attempt to remove Islands
Main Index
PROCESSOR 81
Parallelization Control
Format
Data
2 - Detect contact during Decomposition; do not attempt to remove
Islands
3 - Detect contact during Decomposition; attempt to remove Islands
6-10 2nd I Fine Graph Flag for Domain Decomposition
(Default is 0)
0 - Coarse Graph
1 - Fine Graph
11-15 3rd I Control of point on axis of rotation for Radial/Angular Decompositions.
0 - Use Centroid of the Bounding Box of the model
1 - User-supplied point; defined in 4th, 5th, and 6th fields of 3rd data
block.
16-25 4th F Element coefficient weight - Controls balance between computational
cost of domains. Range <0.,1.0>. Default is 1.0 (use full element weight).
0 means do not use element weight.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F First direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15, or
16.
11-20 2nd F Second direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15,
or 16.
21-30 3rd F Third direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15,
or 16.
31-40 4th F x-coordinate of point on axis.
41-50 5th F y-coordinate of point on axis.
51-60 6th F z-coordinate of point on axis.
Main Index
82 UNIT
Invoke Unit System Definition
UNIT Invoke Unit System Definition
Description
This parameter allows users to specify the unit system used in the analysis. The material data read in from
the material data base or from the ISOTROPIC, WORK HARD, TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, MATERIAL
DATA, GRAIN SIZE, and PARAMETERS options are converted to this set of units where appropriate.
The output indicates both the user-defined quantity and the converted value. Note that if the material data
is entered through a user subroutine, it must be consistent with the unit type specified here. This option
is not applied to data entered through the TABLE option. Hence, the data must be consistent with the unit
type entered here. For material data, it is advantageous to enter data normalized with respect to the
reference value to avoid this problem. If this parameter is not included, no conversions are performed.
If this parameter is included, the display of the results indicate the unit of the resultant quantity.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word UNIT.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 for SI-meter unit.
Enter 2 for SI-millimeter unit.
Enter 3 for US-inch unit.
Notes: For the unit definition and conversions, see Appendix I: Units.
The unit is assumed to be SI-mm if this parameter is not used.
Main Index
$NO LIST 83
No Listing of Input Data
$NO LIST No Listing of Input Data
Description
Using this parameter results in the suppression of the printout of the remainder of the input file.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words $NO LIST.
Main Index
84 EXTENDED
Extended Precision of Reading in Data
EXTENDED Extended Precision of Reading in Data
Description
This parameter is used to indicate that models are to be in extended precision and/or a large number of
elements or nodes exist in the model. If this option is included, the width of all the data fields described
in this manual must be doubled. For example, all I5 integer fields change to I10. If this parameter is
included, all input lines must be in this format.
Note that the post file is written in 32 bit integer mode so the largest element of node ID is still limited
to about one billion.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word EXTENDED.
Main Index
END 85
End of Parameter Section
END End of Parameter Section
Description
This required parameter terminates the input of parameter data, signaling the end of the
parameter section.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word END.
Main Index
86
Main Index
Analysis Types
Chapt Analysis Types

er 2:
Para
meter
s
Main Index
88 ELASTIC
Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads
ELASTIC Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads
Description
When this option is invoked, each load case is independent. Total loads must be input with the POINT
LOAD, DIST LOADS, or CHANGE STATE/THERMAL LOADS model definition options after END
OPTION.
If the direct solver is invoked, the decomposed stiffness matrix is used for each load case and only a back
substitution on a series of load vectors is performed.
When the ADAPTIVE meshing option is used in conjunction with this parameter, only the loads before
the END OPTION (increment zero) are considered. This load is then re-analyzed until the error criteria
is satisfied.
Notes: This data should never be used with any data which flags nonlinear analysis or which
change the stiffness matrix; for example, the LARGE DISP parameter or the DISP CHANGE
option.
If temperature dependent material properties are included, then a new assembly is
performed (if temperature loading is on).
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word ELASTIC.
11-15 2nd I Element storage parameter, to reduce storage in elastic analysis.
Set to 1, so that creep, swelling, plastic, incremental strains, plastic strain
rates, and incremental stresses are not stored.
Set to 2, so that strain energies, thermal strains, and elastic strains are
not stored.
Note: If you request these items on the post file and they are not
stored, the information is incorrect.
Main Index
DESIGN SENSITIVITY 89
Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only
DESIGN SENSITIVITY Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only
Description
This parameter invokes the design sensitivity capability in Marc. In this release, the capability is
restricted to linear static structural analysis and eigenvalue analysis. This option requires the model
definition options: DESIGN VARIABLES and at least one of DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS,
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS, or DESIGN FREQUENCY
CONSTRAINTS. If multiple load cases are to be evaluated, the ELASTIC parameter should be included.
Format
Format
Data
1-18 1st A Enter the words DESIGN SENSITIVITY. Fixed field can be truncated to 12
characters
N/A 2nd A Enter the word SORT* if you desire to sort the constraints by degree of
criticalness (optional), and also optionally to limit the number of
constraints to be analyzed (see third field).
N/A 3rd I Only if SORT* is invoked, enter the number of most critical constraints
to be analyzed. If no number is entered, the default number (100) of most
critical constraints are isolated by sorting and are subjected to
sensitivity analysis.
*If there are any eigenvalue constraints in the sorted group, these will be output before any static
response constraints. Thus, the first constraint to be output may not always be the most critical one.
Main Index
90 DESIGN OPTIMIZATION
Perform Design Optimization
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION Perform Design Optimization
Description
This parameter invokes the design optimization capability in Marc. In this release, the capability is
restricted to linear static structural analysis and eigenvalue analysis. This option requires the model
definition options: DESIGN OBJECTIVE, DESIGN VARIABLES and at least one of DESIGN
DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRAIN
CONSTRAINTS, or DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS. The DESIGN OBJECTIVE option is used to
define the objective function. If multiple load cases are to be evaluated, the ELASTIC parameter should
be included.
Format
Format
Data
1-19 1st A Enter the words DESIGN OPTIMIZATION. Fixed field can be truncated to
12 characters.
N/A 2nd A Enter the word ACTIVESET (optional).
N/A 3rd I Only if ACTIVESET is invoked, enter the maximum number of constraints
for the active set. This does not limit the number of constraints that can be
prescribed by you.
Default is 100.
N/A 4th A Enter the word CYCLES (optional).
N/A 5th I Only if CYCLES is invoked, enter the maximum number of design
optimization cycles (including analyses). Default is 20.
The order of the ACTIVESET and CYCLES can be reversed; for example,
Free Formats 4th and 5th become 2nd and 3rd while Free Formats 2nd and
3rd become 4th and 5th.
Main Index
ADAPTIVE 91
Adaptive Mesh Refinement
ADAPTIVE Adaptive Mesh Refinement
Description
This parameter is required when either a local adaptive meshing or global adaptive meshing is to be used
to improve the accuracy and/or mesh quality. The parameter indicates whether fixed bounds are set on
the number of elements and nodes or whether dynamic memory should be used.
Local Adaptive Meshing

The criteria for determining when local remeshing should occur is provided in the ADAPTIVE model
definition option.Local remeshing is available for lower-order shell and continuum elements including
triangular, quadrilateral, tetrahedral, and brick elements.
In an elastic analysis, Marc iterates based upon the excitation given to satisfy an error tolerance. The
ELASTIC parameter must be included. In a steady-state heat transfer, electrostatic, or magnetostatic
analysis, Marc iterates until the error criteria is satisfied.
In a nonlinear incremental analysis, Marc adapts the mesh at each increment, or user controlled frequency
to improve the solution.
New elements are created as described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Global Adaptive Meshing

The criteria for determining when global remeshing is to occur is provided in the ADAPT GLOBAL
model or history definition option. This option also indicates which remeshing procedure is to be used.
Additionally, the REZONING,1 parameter must be used.
Global adaptive meshing is available for lower-order triangular, quadrilateral, and tetrahedral,
continuum, and shell elements in Marc.
Format
Format
Data
1-8 1st A Enter the word ADAPTIVE.
11-15 2nd I Enter an upper bound to the number of elements in the mesh.
16-20 3rd I Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes in the mesh.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 to continue to perform an incremental analysis. If the number of
nodes or elements created exceeds the maximums specified, the previous
mesh is used.
Main Index
92 ADAPTIVE
Adaptive Mesh Refinement
Format
Data
26-30 5th I Enter 1 if analysis is to be stopped when upper-bound is reached;
otherwise, dynamically allocate more space.
Note: If only the word ADAPTIVE is entered, the program dynamically allocates memory for the
new elements and nodes (there is no limit to the number of elements or nodes unless all
memory is exceeded).
Main Index
LINEAR 93
Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis
LINEAR Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis
Description
This parameter allows additional values to be stored rather than being recalculated during subsequent
increments. This means an increase in the overall size of the workspace used for the problem, but can
actually result in a reduced computation time. The efficiency of this parameter is highly dependent upon
the analysis data and the machine on which the problem is computed. It has proven very effective in
reducing computation time for linear elastic and small displacement dynamic problems. When set to 0,
the parameter has also been used effectively on nonlinear problems such as rigid plastic flow.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word LINEAR.
11-15 2nd I Enter 0 (default) to save BETA matrix (Strain-Displacement).
Enter 1 to save the BETA matrix and the stress-strain law.
Main Index
94 FOURIER
Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures
FOURIER Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures
Description
This parameter governs the analysis of axisymmetric structures under arbitrary loading by means of the
Fourier series expansion technique. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for a description
of this analysis technique. To perform a modal Fourier analysis, you must include a DYNAMIC parameter.
To perform a Fourier buckling analysis, you must include a BUCKLE parameter.
Note: Fourier analysis is not supported with the table driven input format in Version 2005.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word FOURIER.
11-15 2nd I Total number of FOURIER series expansions needed for characterizing
the circumferential variation of tractions, thermal loads and boundary
conditions.
16-20 3rd I Maximum number of harmonics in any of the series. The number of series
terms is two times the number of harmonics plus one.
21-25 4th I Total number of nodal degrees of freedom that are loaded by concentrated
forces or restrained by nonzero boundary conditions described by a
FOURIER series expansion.
26-30 5th I If only symmetric (cos) terms are present in all expansions used, set this
flag to 1. For strictly antisymmetric (sin) expansions, set this flag to 2.
Default is 0 which allows for the full expansion containing sine and
cosine terms.
To skip increments 0 and 1 for symmetric terms only, set this flag to -1. To
skip increments 0, 1 and 2 for antisymmetric terms only, set this flag to -2.
A negative value of this flag means that no constant loading or constant
nonzero boundary condition around the circumference are present.
31-35 6th I Maximum number of stations around circumference used for printout
during the superposition using CASE COMBIN option. Default is 24.
36-40 7th I Enter 1 if the initial stress stiffness is to be included in modal
Fourier calculation.
Main Index
DYNAMIC 95
Dynamic Analysis
DYNAMIC Dynamic Analysis
Description
This parameter sets the flags for one of several possible dynamic analysis methods. Any of several
optional data blocks can be required. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. The MODAL
SHAPE history definition option or the MODAL INCREMENT model definition option controls the
eigenvalue extraction. The DYNAMIC CHANGE or AUTO STEP history definition options control the
time steps. The RECOVER history definition option allows for modal stress recovery or storing
eigenvectors on the post file. Eigenvectors can also be stored on the post file with the MODAL
INCREMENT option.
Notes: 1) The single step Houbolt procedure is the recommended method for nonlinear
transient analysis.
2) The Lanczos method is the recommended method for extracting eigenvalues.
3) The central difference operator do not work with zero mass at any degrees of freedom.
4) The direct integration operators automatically use residual load correction, and this
cannot be overridden. The CENTROID parameter should not be used.
5) The Houbolt (IDYN=3)and central difference (IDYN=4) operators can only be used
with constant time step. If the time step is changed during analysis, results are in error.
The Newmark-beta (IDYN=2), fast central difference operator (IDYN=5), and Single
Step Houbolt (IDYN=6) can use a variable time step.
6) Rigid body modes can be handled by the inverse power sweep or Lanczos method. Use
the flag in the CONTROL option for solving a singular equation.
7) The fast central difference operator can be used with element types (2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10,
11, 18, 19, 20, 52, 64, 75, 98, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120).
8) The Newmark-beta method is unconditionally stable for linear analysis, with β = 0.25,
γ = 0.50. These parameters can be reset through the PARAMETERS option.
9) The central difference (IDYN = 4) operator does not consider the term of damping.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word DYNAMIC.
11-15 2nd I Enter the dynamic operator type (IDYN).
Set to 1 for modal superposition dynamic response.
Set to 2 for Newmark direct integration.
Main Index
96 DYNAMIC
Dynamic Analysis
Format
Data
Set to 3 for Houbolt direct integration.
Set to 4 for explicit direct time integration using central difference.
Set to 5 for fast explicit direct integration.
Set to 6 for Single Step Houbolt integration (preferred for implicit dynamic
analysis with contact).
Set to 8 for generalized alpha method direct integration.
16-20 3rd I Maximum number of modes to be used in the modal superposition
dynamic option. If the inverse power sweep method is used for eigenvalue
analysis, it is also the number of mode shapes and frequencies to
be extracted.
21-25 4th I Set to 0 for Inverse power sweep with double eigenvalue extraction.
Set to 1 to for the Lanczos method.
Set to 3 for Inverse power sweep with single eigenvalue extraction.
26-30 5th I Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post tape is to
be performed in this analysis.
36-40 7th I Used only if the 2nd field is 8. Enter 0 (default) if the parameters of the
generalized alpha method are optimized for an analysis involving dynamic
contact; enter 1 if these parameters are optimized for an analysis without
dynamic contact. Note that user-defined values can be entered on the
PARAMETERS model definition or history definition option.
Main Index
HARMONIC 97
Frequency Response Analysis
HARMONIC Frequency Response Analysis
Description
The HARMONIC parameter allows the frequency response analysis to be superimposed
upon the deformed configuration. This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the EL-MA
parameter for electromagnetic (harmonic) analysis or ACOUSTIC parameter for acoustic analysis or
PIEZO parameter for piezoelectric analysis.
Note that the 3rd through 5th fields are not required if the table input format is used.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word HARMONIC.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if complex damping matrix is used. Default is no complex
damping.
16-20 3rd I Maximum number of excitation boundary conditions.
21-25 4th I Maximum number of excitation distributed load lists.
26-30 5th I Maximum number of elements in any excitation distributed load list.
31-35 6th I Enter 1 to include inertia effects in the calculation of the harmonic
reaction force. Note that if damping is used, the mass proportional part of
the damping matrix also contributes to the inertia effects.
Main Index
98 SS-ROLLING
Steady State Transport Analysis
SS-ROLLING Steady State Transport Analysis
Description
This flag activates steady state rolling analysis. No additional data is needed for this parameter.
Using this procedure, an Eulerian/Lagrange analysis is performed on a body that is spinning about an
axis, which may also be rotating. This is typically applied to tire models, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for more detail.
Model definition options ROTATION A and CORNERING AXIS are used to define rotation and cornering
axes in a steady state rolling analysis. History definition option, SS-ROLLING, is used to define
parameters such as spinning velocity, cornering velocity, and translational velocities. See the options
descriptions for more details.
Only three-dimensional solid elements are supported in the current release.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter SS-RO.
Main Index
RESPONSE 99
Spectrum Response Analysis
RESPONSE Spectrum Response Analysis
Description
This parameter allows you to perform a spectrum response analysis. See Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for detailed directions. The modes used are specified in the SPECTRUM response load
incrementation data. To perform a SPECTRUM response calculation, it is also necessary to include the
DYNAMIC parameter and either the MODAL INCREMENT or MODAL SHAPE option.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word RESPONSE.
11-15 2nd I Enter the number of data points used to specify spectral density function.
Enter 0 to use the USSD user subroutine.
Main Index
100 R-P FLOW
Rigid-Plastic Flow
R-P FLOW Rigid-Plastic Flow
Description
This parameter is used to specify a rigid, perfectly-plastic flow analysis. See Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for an introduction to this technique. This parameter is used either with the Herrmann
elements or with conventional elements. In the latter case, a penalty function is used to apply the
incompressibility constraint. The penalty factor is defined through the PARAMETERS history
definition option.
This parameter has two modes. In the first mode, a steady state solution is obtained.
This parameter can also be used for the analysis of laminar fluid flow problems. See the UNEWTN user
subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines. This method requires iteration on
the velocity field for convergence; convergence controls are input in the CONTROL option.
In the second mode, a transient solution is obtained. This mode is always used in contact problems. This
method required iteration on the incremental displacements. Increment 0 is suppressed.
In this formulation, if the strain rate falls below a certain value, the material is effectively rigid. This
cutoff value is specified through the PARAMETERS history definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1-8 1st A Enter the words R-P FLOW.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 for steady state procedure.
Enter 2 for transient procedure.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 for constant penalty factor.
Option 2 is not available.
Enter 3 for variable penalty factor (adjusted to limit volume loss).
Main Index
SPFLOW 101
Superplastic Forming Analysis
SPFLOW Superplastic Forming Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies the use of data for superplastic forming analysis. Use of this parameter
automatically turns on the FOLLOW FOR,1 parameter. See ISOTROPIC model definition option for use
of power law and rate power law hardening models (only available hardening rules for superplastic
forming) and SUPERPLASTIC history definition option for control parameters in this document for
more information.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word SPFLOW.
Main Index
102 LARGE DISP
Large Displacement or Buckling
LARGE DISP Large Displacement or Buckling
Description
This parameter is used to specify large displacement or buckling analysis. It signals Marc to calculate the
geometric stiffness matrix and the initial stress stiffness matrix. This parameter automatically switches
on the residual load correction option and switches off the scaling option. Default is no large
displacement terms. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more information about large
displacement and buckling analysis.
Note: The CENTROID parameter should not be used in conjunction with this parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words LARGE DISP.
Main Index
LARGE STRAIN 103
Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation
LARGE STRAIN Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation
Description
This option specifies large strain analysis within the framework of updated Lagrange formulation. With
this option, the Marc program calculates the geometric stiffness matrix and the initial stress stiffness
matrix based upon the current configuration.
Updated Lagrange procedures are not supported by some element types (for example, rebar elements). If
LARGE STRAIN is specified, Marc internally switches to the total Lagrange formulation for the
unsupported elements. For a list of elements not supported by updated Lagrange, refer to the Marc
Volume B: Element Library
Note: LARGE STRAIN must not be used with the CENTROID parameter due to nonlinearities in
a large strain analysis.
For large strain analysis of rubber-like materials with incompressibility (such as materials defined with
MOONEY, OGDEN, GENT, and ARRUDBOYCE model definition options), Marc uses a mixed
formulation, in which both the displacement and the hydrostatic pressure are independent variables. For
compressible hyperelastic materials defined with FOAM model definition option, Marc uses conventional
displacement formulation.
For large strain elastic-plastic analysis, the default procedure in Marc uses a procedure based on an
additive decomposition of strain into an elastic part and a plastic part. In this case, volumetric strain is
assumed to be constant for von Mises plasticity in a lower-order plane strain, axisymmetric, or a 3-D
brick element.
For elastic-plastic analysis using Herrmann elements, Marc internally switches to a procedure based on
a multiplicative decomposition of deformation gradient into an elastic part and a plastic part. A mixed
formulation is used to treat the incompressibility constraint. Herrmann elements have additional pressure
degrees of freedom which result in increased computational times; hence, it is generally more efficient
to use displacement-based elements.
In an elastic-plastic analysis, you can indicate the preferred algorithm for displacement-based
elements.
The obtained strain and stress with updated Lagrange formulation is logarithmic strain and Cauchy stress.
Tables 3-12 and 3-13 (Chapter 3: Model Definition Options, Material Properties section) show the
consequences of this option with different material types and element selections.
Main Index
104 LARGE STRAIN
Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word LARGE STRAIN.
11-15 2nd I Flag to define preferred elasticity-plasticity procedure in an elastic-plastic
analysis.
= 1 Hypoelasticity and additive plasticity with mean normal return
mapping (default)
=2 Hyperelasticity and multiplicative plasticity with radial
return mapping.
Main Index
UPDATE 105
Updated Lagrange Procedure
UPDATE Updated Lagrange Procedure
Description
This parameter flags the use of the classical updated Lagrange procedure for elastic-plastic materials, the
elements for which such a formulation can be applied. The use of the procedure has two consequences.
First, the element stiffnesses are assembled in the current configuration of the element. Second, the stress
and strain output is given in the coordinate system which is applicable in the updated configuration of
the element.
The procedure is useful for analysis of shell and beam structures where rotations are large and the
nonlinear terms in the curvature expressions can no longer be neglected.
The updated Lagrange procedure can be used with or without the LARGE DISP parameter. With the
LARGE DISP parameter invoked, the effect of the internal stresses on the stiffness is taken into account.
Also, the strain increment is calculated to second order accuracy and, hence, large rotation increments
might be allowed. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a list of the elements that can be used in
an updated Lagrangian analysis. Instead of invoking the LARGE DISP parameter, the 4th entry of the
UPDATE parameter can be set to 1.
When the UPDATE parameter is used in conjunction with a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the element
conductivity is assembled based on the current configuration of the element.
Format
Format
Data
1-6 1st A Enter the word UPDATE.
16-20 3rd I Enter 2 to allow large incremental rotations for beam elements. This is
available for beam element types 52, 76, 77, 78, 79, and 98.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 to account for the effect of the internal stresses on the stiffness.
Main Index
106 FINITE
Finite Strain Plasticity
FINITE Finite Strain Plasticity
Description
This parameter flags the use of the large strain plasticity option. With this option invoked, the effects of
the change in metric due to large inelastic deformations is included. This results in a different stiffness of
the structure as well as in a modified calculation of stresses and inelastic strains. This parameter is only
used for the elements which are formulated in terms of the updated Lagrange procedure. When using this
parameter, true stresses are printed out.
The UPDATE parameter must be included in all cases when this parameter is invoked. When the FINITE
parameter is used, the work hardening slope for plasticity is defined as the rate of true stress versus the
true plastic strain rate. Hence, the work hardening curve must be entered as the true stress versus
logarithmic plastic strain curve in a uniaxial tension test. The anisotropic plasticity formulation cannot
be used with this option. The finite strain option in Marc is written such that fairly large strain increments
(up to 3%) can be allowed. However, large increments can result in many recycles as well as in decreased
accuracy.
Format
Format
Data
1-6 1st A Enter the word FINITE.
Main Index
CONSTANT DILATATION 107
Define That Elements Are to Use Constant Dilatation Formulation
CONSTANT DILATATION Define That Elements Are to Use

Constant Dilatation Formulation
Description
When performing nearly incompressible analysis with displacement based elements, the conventional
isoparametric interpolation methods result in poor behavior for lower order elements. This results in
overly stiff behavior when using element type 7, 149 (brick), type 10, 152 (axisymmetric), type 11, 151
(plane strain), type 19 (generalized plane strain), type 20 (axisymmetric with twist), or 136 (pentahedral).
When this option is included, all elements of these types are modified to use the constant dilatation
formulation. This is recommended for elastic-plastic analysis and creep analysis because of the
potentially nearly incompressible behavior.
Format
Format
Data
1-8 1st A Enter the word CONSTANT.
Main Index
108 ASSUMED STRAIN
Improved Bending Behavior
ASSUMED STRAIN Improved Bending Behavior
Description
The bending behavior can be improved by using the assumed strain formulation for element type 3, 160
(plane stress), type 11, 161 (plane strain), and type 7, 163 (brick). This procedure replaces the standard
linear interpolation functions with an enriched group that is able to represent pure bending behavior. This
formulation results in improved accuracy for isotropic behavior, but it should be noted that the
computational costs increase.
Note: This option may not be used with all material behavior and is deactivated for those
elements for which it is not applicable.
Format
Format
Data
1-7 1st A Enter the word ASSUMED.
Main Index
ELASTICITY 109
Elasticity Procedure
ELASTICITY Elasticity Procedure
Description
This option can be used to define which formulation is used for large strain elasticity, including rubber
and foam materials. The default is total Lagrange elasticity procedure. For rubber materials, either total
(using Herrmann elements) or updated Lagrange (using either Herrmann or displacement elements) can
be used. For foam, either total or updated Lagrange procedure is supported using the displacement based
elements. The updated Lagrange procedure does not support plane stress elements and switches to total
Lagrange procedure for these elements. For more details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word ELASTICITY.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 for total Lagrange formulation.
Enter 2 for updated Lagrange formulation.
Main Index
110 PLASTICITY
Plasticity Procedure
PLASTICITY Plasticity Procedure
Description
This option can be used to define the plasticity procedure that is used in Marc. The default is the mean
normal procedure for satisfying the yield criteria and the additive decomposition of the incremental
strains into elastic and plastic parts. For problems which have large elastic and plastic strains, the
multiplicative decomposition is more accurate. The multiplicative decomposition implementation
requires that the elasticity is isotropic. For more details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word PLASTICITY.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 for additive decomposition using the mean normal method; small
strain formulation.
Enter 2 for additive decomposition using the radial return method; small
strain formulation.
Enter 3 for additive decomposition using the mean normal method; large
strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.
Enter 4 for additive decomposition using the radial return method; large
strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.
Enter 5 for multiplicative decomposition (FeFp) using the radial return
method and the three field variational principle; large strain formulation
using the updated Lagrange procedure.
Main Index
FOLLOW FOR 111
Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry – Application of Total
Boundary Condition
FOLLOW FOR Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on

Current Geometry – Application of Total Boundary Condition
Description
The FOLLOW FOR parameter is used for follower force (for example, pressure) problems. Separate flags
under this parameter are used to control follower forces for distributed loads and point loads respectively.
When this parameter is used with default values for the associated flags, all distributed loads are formed
on the basis of current geometry. This parameter requires the use of the residual load correction and,
therefore, forces the use of that option regardless of other parameters (for example, the NO LOADCOR
parameter is ignored).
Whenever FOLLOW FOR is used, the distributed load magnitude given in the FORCEM user subroutine
must be the total magnitude to be reached after the current increment, and not the incremental magnitude.
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the fluxes are based upon the current geometry.
When the table driven input procedure is not used, boundary conditions in structural analysis are
normally entered as incremental values. To specify total values, use the third field of this option.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words FOLLOW FOR.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is not required
(default).
Enter 2 if follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is to be included.
Enter 3 if the follower force for distributed loads is based upon the
displacement at the beginning of the increment, as opposed to the last
iteration.
Enter -1 if the undeformed geometry is required but total values of
distributed loads are to be used.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 if total values of boundary conditions are to be entered on
DISP CHANGE, POINT LOAD, and DIST LOADS options as opposed to
the default incremental loads.
21-25 4th I Enter 0 if follower force forpoint loads is not required (default).
Enter 1 if follower force for point loads is to be considered.
Main Index
112 FOLLOW FOR
Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry – Application of Total
Notes: If the follower force stiffness is included, the use of the SOLVER option can be used to
specify a nonsymmetric formulation. This improves convergence, but results in longer
solver times.
If the 2nd field is 0 and the 4th field is 0, follower force is turned on for all distributed loads
in the model (this allows compatibility with previous versions).
Setting the 4th field to 1 only allows the possibility that point loads can be follower forces.
Individual point loads specified under the POINT LOAD model and history definition
options are used to actually specify if the load is a follower force or not.
Follower force stiffness is not currently available for point loads.
Follower force stiffness for distributed loads is available for element types (3, 7, 10, 11, 18, 72, 75, 80,
82, 84, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 139, 149, 151, 152, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, and 185).
Main Index
BUCKLE 113
Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis
BUCKLE Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies the use of buckling load estimation by eigenvalue analysis, based on a
perturbation of the tangent stiffness. Multiple eigenvectors are allowed for the case where the closest root
to the current load set is not pertinent. Either the inverse power sweep method or the Lanczos method can
be used. The BUCKLE history definition option or the BUCKLE INCREMENT modal definition option
controls the eigenvalue extraction. The RECOVER history definition option allows for modal stress
recovery or storing eigenvectors on a post file. The LARGE DISP parameter should be included to obtain
the nonlinear collapse load estimate.
Format
Format
Data
1-6 1st A Enter the word BUCKLE.
11-15 2nd I Maximum number of buckling modes to be estimated at any time.
16-20 3rd I Number of buckling modes with positive eigenvalues to be estimated at
any time.
In many buckling problems, collapse modes corresponding to loads of
opposite magnitude to those of interest exist. By specifying a larger
number of modes (say 5) in Columns 11-15 and one or two modes in this
field, you can ensure getting the one or two modes you are interested in.
Marc stops the modal search when all these modes have been formed, or
when all the modes requested in columns 11-15 have been formed,
whichever occurs first. If this field is left blank, all modes asked for in
columns 11-15 are formed regardless of sign.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post tape is to
be performed in this analysis.
26-30 5th I Enter 3 to perform non-axisymmetric Fourier buckling.
31-35 6th I Enter 1 to use inverse power sweep with single eigenvalue extraction.
36-40 7th I Enter 0 if inverse power sweep method is to be used (default).
Enter 1 if Lanczos method is to be used.
Main Index
114 CREEP
Creep Analysis
CREEP Creep Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies a creep analysis. For more information about creep analysis, see the Creep
Constitutive Data block model definition option in the section of this manual and Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information. The Marc CRPLAW and VSWELL user subroutines, used with creep analysis, are
explained in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
Note: When using the implicit Maxwell creep model, the stress dependence must be in
exponential form, the CRPLAW user subroutine cannot be used.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word CREEP.
11-15 2nd I Enter the flag for type of explicit creep analysis. Default of 0, normal
creep (Maxwell Model); 1, viscoplastic creep; 2, viscoplastic creep with
nonassociative flow rule.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 for explicit Kelvin Model. (This is identical to the VISCO ELAS
parameter.)
21-25 4th I Enter 1 for implicit Maxwell creep or implicit viscoplastic model.
26-30 5th I For the implicit Maxwell creep model or implicit viscoplastic model:
When using the implicit Maxwell creep model, the stress dependence
must be in exponential form, the CRPLAW user subroutine cannot be used.
Enter 0 for elastic tangent
Enter 1 for secant tangent
Enter 2 for radial return
Main Index
VISCO ELAS 115
Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model)
VISCO ELAS Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model)
Description
This parameter flags the use of the CRPVIS user subroutine to model generalized Kelvin material
behavior using an explicit procedure. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details. This
parameter automatically flags the CREEP option as well, so that Maxwell behavior (VSWELL, CRPLAW
user subroutines can be included with CRPVIS).
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words VISCO ELAS.
Main Index
116 STRUCTURAL
Mechanical Analysis
STRUCTURAL Mechanical Analysis
Description
This parameter is used in multi-physics analyses if one of the physics types is structural. It is used in
combination with other parameters such as HEAT or ELECTRO. The inclusion of both the STRUCTURAL
and ELECTRO parameters results in a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis. In such a multi-physics
analysis, one pass will be a mechanical analysis and subjected to boundary conditions defined in the
FIXED DISP, POINT LOAD, DIST LOADS, FOUNDATION, and CONTACT options.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word STRUCTURAL.
Main Index
COUPLE 117
Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis
COUPLE Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis
Description
This parameter allows a coupled thermal-stress analysis. In these problems, the independent variables are
displacements and temperatures. If you define displacement elements in the connectivity, heat transfer
capabilities are included for these elements. To obtain the coupling between plastic work and internal
heat generated, a DIST FLUXES model definition option with a flux type of 101 must be included. The
CUPFLX user subroutine can be used to define an alternative model for internal heat generation. Care
must be taken in defining the factor used to convert inelastic mechanical energy to thermal energy (see
the CONVERT model definition option). If shell elements are present or latent heats are used, the HEAT
parameter might also be required.
For a coupled thermo-mechanical-electrical problem, it is also necessary to include a JOULE parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word COUPLE.
Main Index
118 DECOUPLING
Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis
DECOUPLING Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis
Description
This parameter allows users to manually analyze contact between the workpiece and deformable tools in
a decoupled manner.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word DECOUPLING.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 for mechanical-only analysis.The deformable tools are treated as
rigid bodies.
Enter 2 for coupled analysis. The deformable tools are treated as rigid-
thermal bodies.
Enter 3 for tool stress analysis only.
Notes: Using contact decoupling assumes that the deformation in deformable tool is small
compared to the workpiece deformation.
No remeshing is allowed in the deformable tools.
Typically, a decoupling analysis is run through the run_marc command: -dcoup.
However, you can use the control here to run the analysis manually. The data transfer file
is defined through READ FILE and WRITE FILE history options or, by default, using
jid.t70 in the current directory.
Main Index
FLUID 119
Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis
FLUID Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis
Description
This parameter controls the procedure when performing a fluid analysis. In this release, Marc provides
the ability to solve the Navier Stokes equations, excluding turbulence for incompressible fluids. Marc
offers either weakly (staggered method) or strongly (simultaneous method) procedures in multi-physics
type problems. Using the weak formulation, more iterations might be necessary, but overall computation
costs might be less. For fluid-thermal problems, the strongly coupled procedure is recommended; while
for fluid-solid problems, the weakly coupled procedure should be used. Furthermore, you can select how
the fluid incompressibility conditions are to be satisfied. Either a mixed method, with degrees of freedom
of velocity and pressure or a penalty method with degrees of freedom of velocity can be used with the
continuum elements. The penalty factor can be entered through the PARAMETERS option. For more
details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Caution: Fluid analysis cannot be performed with element types 155 through 157.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word FLUID.
11-15 2nd I Enter one of the following codes:
10 – fluid analysis – mixed method
11 – fluid analysis – penalty method
12 – fluid-thermal – mixed method – strong coupling
13 – fluid-thermal – penalty method – strong coupling
2 – fluid-thermal – mixed method – weak coupling
3 – fluid-thermal – penalty method – weak coupling
40 – fluid-solid – mixed method – weak coupling
41 – fluid-solid – penalty method – weak coupling
42 – fluid-thermal-solid – mixed method – strong – weak coupling
43 – fluid-thermal-solid – penalty method – strong – weak coupling
44 – fluid-thermal-solid – mixed method – weak – weak coupling
45 – fluid-thermal-solid – penalty method – weak – weak coupling
Main Index
120 FLUID
Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis
Format
Data
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 to obtain gradients and fluxes at integration points.
Enter 2 to obtain in addition external flux values at nodal points. If this
field is left blank, only temperatures at integration points and nodal
temperatures are printed.
Main Index
PORE 121
Soil Analysis
PORE Soil Analysis
Description
This parameter sets the flags for one of several possible soil analysis. It is possible to perform either a
pore pressure calculation (transient or steady state), a soil analysis (including the effects of previously
obtained pore pressures), or a coupled pore-soil plasticity analysis. For information about soil analyses,
see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Notes: If only a pore pressure calculation is be performed, use element types 41, 42 or 44.
If an uncoupled soil calculation is to be performed, use element types 27, 28 or 21.
If a coupled fluid-soil analysis is to be performed, use element types 32, 33 or 35.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word PORE.
11-15 2nd I Enter 0 if pore pressure data is to be entered.
Enter 1 if a steady state pore pressure calculation is to be performed.
Enter 2 if a transient pore pressure calculation is to be performed.
16-20 3rd I Enter 0 if only the pore pressure is to be calculated; for example, no
stress analysis.
Enter 1 if a stress analysis is to be performed.
Example
If a fully coupled analysis is required, enter:
PORE, 2, 1
Main Index
122 T-T-T
Time-Temperature-Transformation
T-T-T Time-Temperature-Transformation
Description
This parameter allocates storage for the time-temperature-phase dependent properties. The properties
themselves are defined using the TIME-TEMP model definition option.
Most materials, when quenched or air cooled from a sufficiently high temperature, exhibit a change in
mechanical or thermal properties. At any stage during the cooling process, these properties are usually
dependent not only on the current temperature but also on the previous thermal history. This is due to the
fact that the properties are influenced by the internal microstructure of the material and this in turn usually
depends on the rate at which the temperature changes. Only in instances where the temperature is
changed very gradually does the material respond in an equilibrium manner where properties are simply
a function of the current temperature. In addition, during the cooling process, certain solid-solid phase
transformations can occur. These represent another form of change in the material microstructure which
can influence the mechanical or thermal properties. This parameter allows you to account for the time-
temperature-transformation interrelationships of what are generally termed thermomechanical effects.
For more information about this type of analysis, see the Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1-5 1st A Enter the expression T-T-T.
11-15 2nd I Enter the maximum number of material groups with time-temperature-
transformation dependent material properties (default is 1).
16-20 3rd I Enter the maximum number of cooling rates used to define any one
property of any material group (see Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information for details). Default is 3.
21-25 4th I Enter the maximum number of temperature points at which a property
value is specified for any cooling rate. Default is 5.
25-30 5th I If the thermal coefficient of expansion for any material group is to be
expressed in terms of polynomial expansions in temperature, enter the
maximum number of temperature points at which an expansion is defined
for any cooling rate.
Main Index
HEAT 123
Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis
HEAT Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies a heat transfer (conduction) analysis instead of displacement/stress analysis.
Convection can be included if the velocities are known or in a steady-state rigid plastic analysis. For the
solution of the coupled thermal/flow problem, the FLUID parameter should be used. For more
information about heat transfer capabilities in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1-4 1st A Enter the word HEAT.
11-15 2nd I Temperature distribution in thickness direction of heat transfer shell
elements 50, 85, 86, 87, and 88.
Enter 0 for linear temperature distribution in thickness direction.
Enter 1 for quadratic temperature distribution in thickness direction.
Default is 0.
16-20 3rd I Maximum number of latent heats associated with any material type.
Default is 0.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 to obtain gradients and fluxes at integration points.
Enter 2 to obtain in addition external flux values at nodal points. If this
field is left blank, only temperatures at integration points and nodal
temperatures are printed.
26-30 5th I Enter 2 to include convective terms. This automatically initiates the
nonsymmetric solver. The velocity must be prescribed.
31-35 6th I Enter the number of heat transfer layers for composite shell elements.
Default is 1.
36-40 7th I Enter 1 to linearize calculation of surface energy and receding surface
data (default).
Enter 2 to not linearize calculation.
41-45 8th I Set to 1 to store value of nonhomogeneous density for postprocessing
only. This is only applicable in a pyrolysis simulation.
Main Index
124 JOULE
Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis
JOULE Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis
Description
This parameter allows you to perform a coupled thermoelectrical (Joule heating) problem or a coupled
thermo-mechanical-electrical problem. The coupling between the electrical problem and the thermal
problem is because: (1) the resistance in the electric problem is dependent on temperatures and (2) the
internal heat generation in the thermal problem is a function of the electric flow. For more information
about the finite element formulation of Joule heating problems, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
In the analysis of Joule heating, the model definition options JOULE, VOLTAGE, DIST CURRENT and
POINT CURRENT must be used for the definition of electric problems. However, options for the heat
transfer analysis remain unchanged.
For a coupled thermo-mechanical-electrical problem, it is necessary to have either a COUPLE or a
STRUCTURAL parameter. In such problems, there is additional coupling because of the change in
boundary conditions through the CONTACT option which changes both the thermal and electrical
behavior. Heat is generated not only by electrical resistance (Joule heating), but also by heat generated
due to inelastic behavior.
Note: Joule heating is not applied to shell elements, conventional heat transfer will be applied in
these regions.
Format
Format
Data
1-5 1st A Enter the word JOULE.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 for conventional model
Enter 2 if electrical properties are a strong function of temperature.
Main Index
DIFFUSION 125
Diffusion Analysis
DIFFUSION Diffusion Analysis
Description
This parameter indicates that a diffusion analysis is to be performed. The boundary conditions are applied
using the FIXED PRESSURE, DIST MASS, and POINT MASS options.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word DIFFUSION.
Main Index
126 ABLATION
Specify Ablation Occurrence
ABLATION Specify Ablation Occurrence
Description
This parameter is used to specify that ablation is to occur. It is normally used in conjunction with the
PYROLYSIS parameter. The surface to be ablated is specified via the RECEDING SURFACE option. Data
used to control the ablation is entered via the SURFACE ENERGY option for the advanced model.
Note: Ablation is not applied to shell elements.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter word ABLATION.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 to use normal based upon all surfaces.
Enter 2 to use normal based upon surfaces given by RECEDING
SURFACE data (default).
Enter 3 to use normal based upon direction of streamline.
Enter 4 to use normal based upon direction of streamline with projected
magnitude.
16-20 3rd I The following is used only with the shaver mesher:
Enter 1 if new surface node coordinate is equal to old, shaved coordinate
(default).
Enter 2 if new surface node coordinate is projected coordinate.
21-25 4th I Enter the frequency to write the recession information to jid.rec file,
default is write every increment.
26-30 5th i Enter 0, if s· calculated at surface integration points (default).
Enter 1 if s· calculated at the nodal point.
Main Index
PYROLYSIS 127
Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis
PYROLYSIS Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis
Description
This parameter is used to indicate that a thermo-poro-ablative model is being analyzed. The region which
can undergo pyrolysis is defined either via the THERMAL CONTACT or STREAM DEFINITION option.
If the simplified streamline fluid flow model is used, the STREAM DEFINITION option is required.
Note: Pyrolysis is not applied to shell elements, conventional heat transfer will be applied in
these regions.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter word PYROLYSIS.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 for no fluid generation (default).
Enter 2 for streamline fluid flow model.
Enter 3 for D’Arcy fluid flow model.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 to linearize calculation of surface energy and receding surface data
(default).
Enter 2 to not linearize system.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 to symmetrize convective terms (default).
Enter 2 to use nonsymmetric formulation.
26-30 5th I Enter 0 or 1 if m· used in the surface energy or recession calculation is the
magnitude of m· .
˜
Enter 2 if in used in the surface energy or recession calculation is the
projection of m· ⋅ n .
˜ ˜
31-35 6th I Enter 1 for φ in rate term (default).
Enter 2 for φ2 in rate term.
Enter -1 for no φ in rate term.
36-40 7th I ·
Enter 1 to include divergence in ρg (default).
·
Enter 2 to exclude divergence in ρg .
Main Index
128 CURING
Curing Analysis Parameter Definition
CURING Curing Analysis Parameter Definition
Description
The parameter flags the capability to take into account the curing effect on either the heat transfer or
structural analysis. In a heat transfer analysis, the cure reaction heat flux is calculated and coupled into
the heat transfer equation system. In a structural analysis, the cure induced volumetric shrinkage can also
be incorporated.
Notes: The CURING parameter works in two analysis types:

(a) Heat transfer analysis
(b) Thermal-mechanical coupled analysis
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word CURING.
Main Index
BEARING 129
Bearing Analysis
BEARING Bearing Analysis
Description
This parameter activates the bearing analysis facility for the analysis of lubrication problems. For more
information about Marc’s bearing analysis capabilities, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
In a bearing analysis, the model definition options VELOCITY, THICKNESS, RESTRICTOR,
ISOTROPIC, FIXED PRESSURE, DAMPING COMPONENTS, STIFFNS COMPONENTS, and THICKNS
CHANGE can be used to define the problem.
Format
Format
Data
1-7 1st A Enter the word BEARING.
11-15 2nd I Enter the maximum number of subincrements. Default is 4.
Main Index
130 ELECTRO
Electrostatic Analysis
ELECTRO Electrostatic Analysis
Description
This parameter allows an electrostatic analysis to be performed. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC
model definition options are used to define the material properties. The FIXED POTENTIAL, DIST
CHARGES, and POINT CHARGE options are used to prescribe the boundary conditions while the history
definition option STEADY STATE is used for the steady state solution. For more information about the
electrostatic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. For
information about elements used in electrostatic analysis, see Marc Volume B: Element Library.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word ELECTRO.
11-15 2nd I Potential distribution in thickness direction of shell elements 50, 85, 86,
87, and 88.
Enter 0 for linear potential distribution in thickness direction.
Enter 1 for quadratic potential distribution in thickness direction. Default
is 0.
16-20 3rd I Flag to indicate which method for Coulomb Force calculation is used in
a coupled electrostatic analysis.
Enter 0 for using the electric field intensity based calculation. Use this
when the distance between charged bodies is small.
Enter 1 for the nodal charge based calculation. Use this when the distance
between charged bodies is large.
See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details).
Default is 0.
Main Index
MAGNETO 131
Magnetostatic Analysis
MAGNETO Magnetostatic Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies a magnetostatic analysis. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC model
definition options are used for the input of isotropic or orthotropic magnetic permeabilities. The model
definition options FIXED POTENTIAL, POINT CURRENT, and DIST CURRENT are used for prescribed
potential and current boundary conditions; B-H RELATION is used for the input of the variation of
magnetic permeability with either the magnetic field density or the magnetic field vector. Permanent
magnets can be introduced by using the PERMANENT model definition option. The STEADY STATE
history definition option is used for the steady state option.
For more information about the magnetostatic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information. For information about elements used in magnetostatic analysis, see Marc Volume
B: Element Library.
Format
Format
Data
1-6 1st A Enter the word MAGNETO.
Main Index
132 EL-MA
Perform Electromagnetic Analysis
EL-MA Perform Electromagnetic Analysis
Description
This parameter activates the capability in Marc to perform an electromagnetic analysis. The
electromagnetic analysis can be either a harmonic or a transient analysis. The ISOTROPIC and
ORTHOTROPIC model definition options are used to define the material properties. The FIXED
POTENTIAL, DIST CURRENT, and POINT CURRENT-CHARGE options are used to prescribe the
boundary conditions while the HARMONIC and DYNAMIC CHANGE history definition options are used
for the harmonic and transient solutions, respectively. Refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information for a description of the electromagnetic analysis capability in Marc. An electromagnetic
analysis can be performed with element types 111, 112, or 113. See Marc Volume B: Element Library for
further details.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word EL-MA.
11-15 2nd I Set to 0 for transient electromagnetic analysis.
Set to 1 for harmonic electromagnetic analysis.
Default is 0.
16-20 3rd I Set to 0 for transient electromagnetic analysis using Newmark
beta procedure.
Set to 1 for transient electromagnetic analysis using backward Euler
procedure; preferred for low-frequency simulations.
Main Index
PIEZO 133
Activate Piezoelectric Analysis
PIEZO Activate Piezoelectric Analysis
Description
This parameter activates a piezoelectric analysis. Possible analysis types are static, modal, transient
dynamic, harmonic, or buckling. A description of the piezoelectric capabilities is included in Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information. Piezoelectric analysis may be performed with the following
element types:
160 4-node plane stress

161 4-node plane strain
162 4-node axisymmetric
163 8-node brick
164 4-node tetrahedron
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word PIEZO.
Main Index
134 ACOUSTIC
Acoustic Analysis
ACOUSTIC Acoustic Analysis
Description
This parameter activates the capability to perform an acoustic analysis. The ACOUSTIC model definition
option is used to prescribe the material behavior of the fluid. The FIXED PRESSURE, DIST SOURCES,
and POINT SOURCE model definition options are used to prescribe boundary conditions.
For Modal Acoustic analysis, Marc calculates the fundamental frequencies when the MODAL SHAPE
option is encountered. A transient analysis can be performed using the DYNAMIC CHANGE option. This
option can only be used in combination with cavities with rigid reflecting surfaces
For Harmonic Acoustic analysis, Marc calculates the response of the coupled acoustic-solid system. The
coupling is done via the CONTACT option. The frequency range is specified using the HARMONIC
history definition option. Reactive boundary conditions can be given via the CONTACT TABLE option.
For more information about the acoustic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information. For information about elements used in acoustic analysis, see Marc Volume B:
Element Library.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word ACOUSTIC.
11-15 2nd I Maximum number of modes to be used in the modal superposition
DYNAMIC parameter. If the inverse power sweep method is used for
eigenvalue analysis, it is also the number of mode shapes and frequencies
to be extracted. Only needed for modal acoustics.
16-20 3rd I Flag to indicate the Lanczos method is used. Set to 1 to force the Lanczos
method. Only needed for modal acoustics.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post file is to
be performed in this analysis. Only needed for modal acoustics.
26-30 5th I Flag to indicate whether modal acoustics or harmonic acoustic analysis
is used.
1 = modal acoustics (default)
2 = harmonic acoustics
Main Index
RADIATION 135
Radiation Analysis
RADIATION Radiation Analysis
Description
This parameter activates the radiation analysis capabilities in heat transfer and coupled analyses. This
parameter selects the method to evaluate the viewfactors and controls the accuracy of the calculation of
the vivisectors, and the resulting thermal radiation calculation as well. Depending on which method is
chosen different model definition options are required to define the cavity and the specification of the
emissivity as defined below. If spectral dependent emissivity is defined it is also necessary to use the
PARAMETERS model definition option to specify the speed of light in the cavity medium.
Format
Format
Data
1-9 1st A Enter the word RADIATION.
11-15 2nd I View factor calculation flag (IRADFL).
Set to 0 to calculate viewfactors once using the direct integration method.
The RADIATING CAVITY model definition option defines the cavity. This
procedure is only available for axisymmetric cavities. The emissivity is
defined with other material data through the ISOTROPIC,
ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 1 to read viewfactors from a file created by the direct integration
approach. The emissivity is defined with other material data through the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 2 to read view factor file created by Marc Mentat using the Monte
Carlo method. They are read from a file jid.vfs. This procedure also
requires the use of the VIEW FACTOR model definition option. The
emissivity is defined with other material data through the ISOTROPIC,
ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 3 to calculate viewfactors by the hemi-cube projection method, and
the view factor file will be in ascii format. The CAVITY DEFINITION
option defines the cavity. The thermal radiation calculation is only active
if the RAD-CAVITY option indicates that the cavity is used in a boundary
condition, and the LOADCASE option is used to indicate that the boundary
condition is active. The emissivity is defined either with other material
data through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options, or through
the EMISSIVITY (preferred) option.
Main Index
136 RADIATION
Radiation Analysis
Format
Data
Set to 4 to calculate viewfactors by the hemi-cube projection method, and
the view factor file will be in binary format. The CAVITY DEFINITION
option defines the cavity. The thermal radiation calculation is only active
if the RAD-CAVITY option indicates that the cavity is used in a boundary
condition, and the LOADCASE option is used to indicate that the boundary
condition is active. The emissivity is defined either with other material
data through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options, or through
the EMISSIVITY (preferred) option. Default is 0
16-20 3rd I Only used if IRADFL is 0 or 1. Enter the file number (IFILVF) for
viewfactors. Viewfactors are written if IRADFL = 0, and are read if
IRADFL = 1. When IRADFL = 0 and IFILVF = 0, the viewfactors are
not saved. Default is 0.
21-25 4th I Temperature unit flag.
Set to 0 to use offset temperature entered in PARAMETERS option.
(Default)
Set to 1 if user input is in degrees Celsius.
Set to 2 if user input is in degrees Kelvin.
Set to 3 if user input is in degrees Fahrenheit.
Caution: Do not enter temperatures in degrees Rankine.
26-35 5th F Enter the Stefan-Boltzmann constant in the correct units. Default is the
value given in PARAMETERS option, 5.67051 x 10-8W/m2K4.
For the direct integration approach.
36-40 6th I Number of divisions used in view factor calculation. Default is 3.
41-45 7th I Number of Gauss points used in each subdivision. Default is 3.
46-50 8th I Enter unit number for debug printout.
51-55 9th I Enter 4 for alternative (K4) method for calculation of view factors.
For the Monte Carlo approach (IRADFL=2) the 6th, 7th, 8th, and 9th fields are zero.
For the hemi-cube approach (IRADFL=3 or IRADFL=4).
36-40 6th I Enter the number of pixels (default is 500).
41-45 7th I Enter 1 to possibly re-evaluate the viewfactors based upon the motion of
the structure. Only available in a coupled analysis using the updated
Lagrange method, or in an analysis with ABLATION.
46-50 8th I For axisymmetric cavities, enter the number of divisions around
circumference. Default is 36.
Main Index
RADIATION 137
Radiation Analysis
Format
Data
For either the Monte Carlo or hemi-cube method.
56-65 10th E Enter the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be used as a
cutoff. Viewfactors read in or calculated below this cutoff are ignored.
Default is 0.0001.
66-75 11th E Enter the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be treated
implicitly (contribute to operator matrix). View factor values smaller than
this cutoff are treated explicitly. Default is 0.01.
Main Index
138 CAVITY
Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities
CAVITY Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities
Description
This parameter governs the analysis of structures with internal cavities. When using the CAVITY
parameter, the FOLLOW FOR parameter is automatically switched on.
Note: This capability is not available if the table input option is used.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word CAVITY.
11-15 2nd I Enter an upper bound to the number of cavities. Maximum is 1000.
16-20 3rd I Enter an upper bound to the number of segments in the cavity.
21-25 4th I Enter the number of nodes per segment.
Enter 2 for low-order 2-D elements.
Enter 3 for high-order 2-D elements.
Enter 3 or 4 for low-order 3-D elements.
Enter 6 or 8 for high-order 3-D elements.
Default is 8.
Main Index
RBE 139
Rigid Body Elements
RBE Rigid Body Elements
Description
This option can be used to define the number of degrees of freedom for a reference node used in the RBE2
or RBE3 model definition option. This might be necessary in cases where the number of degrees of
freedom for all other nodes in the structure is smaller than the required number of degrees of freedom for
the reference node. This, for example, happens if the RBE2 or RBE3 option is used in an analysis with
continuum elements only.
It can also be used to set special features of RBE2 and RBE3.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word RBE.
11-15 2nd I Enter 3 for a 2-D analysis.
Enter 6 for a 3-D analysis.
Note: Values other than 3 or 6 are not allowed.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 to use large displacement formulation of RBE2 based upon a fixed
coordinate system.
Enter 3 to deactivate automatic convergence test by the RBE2 module.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 to use large displacement formulation of RBE3 based on small
rotational increment assumption.
Enter 2 to activate non-normalized rotation constraint coefficient of RBE3.
Main Index
140 MACHINING
NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis
MACHINING NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis
Description
This parameter flags the capability to simulate the NC machining (that is, Metal Cutting or Material
Removing) processes. With this option invoked, the deactivation of elements can be done according to
the cutter path defined by either the APT source or CL files.
The DEACTIVATE model or history definition option must be used in order to apply this capability during
the course of analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1-9 1st A Enter the word MACHINING.
Main Index
Rezoning and Substructure Parameters
Chapt Rezoning and Substructure Parameters

er 2:
Para
meter
s
Main Index
142 REZONING
Allow Rezoning
REZONING Allow Rezoning
Description
This parameter is used to indicate that rezoning can occur during this run. During rezoning, it is possible
to add and/or delete elements and/or nodal points. If elements and/or nodal points are added, there should
be enough elements and nodes allocated with the SIZING parameter in the initial run. The REZONING
parameter can be used with all continuum displacement elements, shell elements 22, 75, 138, 139, and
140 and Herrmann elements 80 through 84 as well as elements 155 through 157.
If the second field is entered as 1 or 2, automatic remeshing followed by rezoning is activated. In this
case, use the ADAPTIVE parameter to define the upper-bound of the number of elements and nodes in the
mesh and the ADAPT GLOBAL history definition option to define the criteria in global remeshing.
Automatic remeshing with rezoning can only be used with the updated Lagrangian formulation, and with
continuum (displacement or Herrmann) element. Marc switches to updated Lagrangian framework if the
total Lagrangian formulation is specified in the input file. Global adaptive remeshing is available for
lower-order triangular, quadrilateral continuum elements in 2-D and lower-order tetrahedral, lower-order
triangular, or quadrilateral shell elements in 3-D.
Note: If rezoning is to be performed in this analysis, this parameter must be included from the
very beginning. It cannot be added upon restart.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word REZONING.
11-15 2nd I Enter 0 for user supplied mesh for rezoning (default).
Enter 1 for 2-D automatic remeshing followed by rezoning.
Enter 2 for 3-D automatic remeshing followed by rezoning.
Main Index
MNF 143
MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options
MNF MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options
Description
This optional parameter allows the user to request that stress and/or strain modes be computed and
exported to the MNF. It also allows the user to pick the layer number for shell elements.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word MNF.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 to compute and export stress modes to MNF.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 to compute and export strain modes to MNF.
21-25 4th I Enter the shell layer:
0: continuum elements.
1: shell top layer.
2: shell middle layer.
3: shell bottom layer.
Main Index
144 SUPER
Super Element Input
SUPER Super Element Input
Description
This parameter allows the user to define an upper-bound to the number of degrees of freedom per node
when DMIGs are used to define superelements.
Format
Format
Data
1-5 1st A Enter the word SUPER.
21-25 4th I Enter the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node number in
any super element.
Main Index
USER 145
Create User-defined Element
USER Create User-defined Element
Description
You can define your own stiffness or mass matrix using this parameter and user subroutine USELEM to
specify equivalent nodal loads, stiffness matrix, mass matrix, stress recovery, and internal force. When
using this capability, the element type given on the CONNECTIVITY model definition option and the
ELEMENTS parameter is a negative number. This parameter can be used repeatedly to define different
element types.
For a thermo-mechanically coupled analysis, a user-defined element for the stress pass can be associated
with a regular Marc element or a user-defined element for the heat transfer pass. In the latter case, note
that USER parameter should be defined for all the user-defined stress elements first followed by USER
parameters for the associated heat transfer elements in the same order.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word USER.
11-15 2nd I Enter the element type; must be a negative number.
16-20 3rd I Number of degrees of freedom per node.
21-25 4th I Maximum number of stress quantities to be stored per “integration” point;
can be 0.
26-30 5th I Number of nodes per element; must be less than 101.
31-35 6th I Number of generalized strains; can be 0.
36-40 7th I Number of coordinates per node.
41-45 8th I Number of integration points per element; can be 0.
46-50 9th I Number of direct components of stress; can be 0.
51-55 10th I Number of shear components of stress; can be 0.
56-60 11th I Enter the element class based upon:
Conventional Marc Element Classes

0 = Pipe 8 = 3-D solid (brick, tet)
1 = Truss 9 = Fourier
2 = Shell 10 = Axisymmetric solid with twist
3 = Plate 11 = Axisymmetric shell
4 = Plane stress 12 = Open section beam
Main Index
146 USER
Create User-defined Element
Conventional Marc Element Classes

5 = Plane strain 13 = Closed section beam
6 = Generalized plane strain 14 = Membrane
7 = Axisymmetric solid 15 = Gap
61-65 12th I Heat transfer flag;

0 = Stress element
1 = Heat transfer element
66-70 13th I Associated heat transfer element if this is a stress element and the analysis
is coupled. This can be a positive normal Marc element type or another
negative user element type.
71-75 14th I Enter the topology class based upon:
Conventional Marc Topology Classes

11 = 2-node line (linear) 41 = 4-node tetrahedral (linear)
12 = 3-node line (quadratic) 42 = 5-node tetrahedral (4+1) (linear)
21 = 3-node triangle (linear) 43 = 10-node tetrahedral (quadratic)
22 = 4-node triangle (3+1) (linear+bubble) 51 = 6-node pentahedral
23 = 6-node triangle (quadratic) 52 = 15-node pentahedral
31 = 4-node quadrilateral (linear) 61 = 8-node hexahedral (linear)
32 = 5-node quadrilateral (4+1) Lagrange 62 = 9-node hexahedral (8+1) (linear + Lagrange
multiplier) multiplier)
33 = 6-node quadrilateral 63 = 12-node hexahedral
34 = 8-node quadrilateral (quadratic - 64 = 20-node hexahedral (quadratic - serendipity)
serendipity)
35 = 9-node quadrilateral (8+1) (quadratic -
Lagrange)
Main Index
Additional Flags for Various Analyses
Chapt Additional Flags for Various Analyses

er 2:
Para
meter
s
Main Index
148 CENTROID
State Storage at Centroid Only
CENTROID State Storage at Centroid Only
Description
This parameter is used for calculation and storage of stress and strain (or, for heat transfer, temperature)
at the centroid of each element only.
The CENTROID parameter reduces the storage requirements, and the computational costs. However, it is
not recommended for nonlinear analysis because it reduces the accuracy of the solution. If this parameter
is used, the residual load correction should be switched off by using the NO LOADCOR parameter.
Note: The POST option may be used to specify that output is at the CENTROID while insuring
an accurate analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word CENTROID.
Main Index
ALL POINTS 149
State Storage at All Points
ALL POINTS State Storage at All Points
Description
This parameter is used for calculation and storage of stress and strain (or, for heat transfer, temperature)
at all integration points of all elements. Output is obtained for each integration point of each element. For
the integration point locations of Marc elements, see Marc Volume B: Element Library.
If this parameter is switched off by the use of the CENTROID parameter, the state at each integration point
of the element is set equal to the value at the centroid of the element. This is not important in small
displacement elastic solutions and might not be significant where the mesh is very fine. However, the
utility of the sophisticated elements lies in the use of integration point data with relatively few elements.
Use of this parameter is recommended for any nonlinear analysis, particularly nonlinear shell and large
displacement analysis. If this parameter is turned off, the residual load correction should be switched off
(using the NO LOADCOR parameter) since an accurate stress distribution is necessary for this correction
to be effective. In general, use of this feature increases the run time; however, this parameter allows the
use of a coarser mesh, which can result in a lower overall cost for the analysis. Storage requirements are
also higher. This also can affect THERMAL LOADS or CHANGE STATE input requirements.
Note: This parameter has the default value of “on” in the K2 and subsequent versions. This
parameter has the default value of “off” in all versions previous to K2.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words ALL POINTS.
Main Index
150 LOAD COR
Residual Load Correction
LOAD COR Residual Load Correction
Description
This parameter is used to ensure that the nonlinear solution is always in equilibrium. In versions
subsequent to K2, this was the default option. It is recommended that the ALL POINTS parameter always
be used in conjunction with residual load correction. The residual correction depends on integrating
stress over the elements, and this can only be accurate if stresses are stored at all points.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words LOAD COR.
Main Index
NO LOADCOR 151
Suppression of Load Correction
NO LOADCOR Suppression of Load Correction
Description
Residual load correction is automatically included for any analysis. This parameter is used to override
any automatic setting. This parameter should be the last parameter given before the END parameter.
Note: Certain parameters (DYNAMIC and LARGE DISP) override this parameter and always turn
the load correction on. The use of this parameter should be limited to linear
elastic problems.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO LOADCOR.
Main Index
152 SCALE
Scaling to First Yield
SCALE Scaling to First Yield
Description
This parameter causes scaling of the linear-elastic solution to first yield in the highest stressed element,
for small displacement elastic-plastic analysis where element properties are not temperature dependent.
Using this parameter causes all aspects of the initial solution (displacements, strains, stresses,
temperature changes, loads) to be scaled. Thus, subsequent incrementation is built onto the scaled
solution; for example, the PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT history definition set proportions the
scaled load.
Note: This parameter cannot be used in dynamic, large disp, or coupled analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word SCALE.
This entry automatically switches on the load correction. This flag is
ignored if large displacement or dynamic analysis is flagged.
Main Index
THERMAL 153
Thermal Stress Analysis
THERMAL Thermal Stress Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies the use of thermal loading or temperature-dependent material properties in the
analysis. See THERMAL LOADS, CHANGE STATE, INITIAL TEMP, POINT TEMP, and TEMPERATURE
EFFECTS or TABLE model definitions in this document for more information.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word THERMAL.
Main Index
154 ISTRESS
Define Initial Stress
ISTRESS Define Initial Stress
Description
This parameter allows you to input an initial set of stresses. It is your responsibility to input a
self-equilibrating set of stresses. These stresses should not produce any material nonlinearity. The
stresses are input through the UINSTR user subroutine or through the INIT STRESS model
definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word ISTRESS.
11-15 2nd I 0: Initial stress in element coordinate system (Default)
1: Initial stress in preferred material coordinate system (Default)
Main Index
LUMP 155
Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix
LUMP Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix
Description
This parameter lumps the mass matrix (for dynamics) or specific heat matrix (for heat transfer) into a
diagonal matrix.
Note: LUMP can also be used for acoustics. However, it tends to lower the eigenfrequencies.
Use of this parameter is not recommended for second order elements (8-node quadrilateral
or 20-node brick elements) or for shell type elements.
Format
Format
Data
1-4 1st A Enter the word LUMP.
5-10 2nd I If greater than or equal to zero, use lumped mass matrix.
11-15 3rd I If greater than zero, does not add mass to rotational degrees of freedom of
the following shell elements: 22, 75, 138, 139, 140.
Main Index
156 APPBC
Application of Boundary Conditions
APPBC Application of Boundary Conditions
Description
The APPBC parameter specifies that the application of boundary conditions is performed by row-column
elimination, forcing re-assembly if there are any nonzero applied displacements. If this option is not
included, boundary conditions are applied using the penalty method. The penalty factor is entered
through the PARAMETERS option.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word APPBC.
Main Index
ACCUMULATE 157
Accumulation of Strain and Displacements
ACCUMULATE Accumulation of Strain and Displacements
Description
This parameter reserves workspace for the storage of accumulated total strains, plastic strains, creep
strains, and total displacements. Such accumulated values can be used for purposes of extrapolation in
nonlinear creep and/or plasticity analysis. In particular, it can be used in analysis of cyclic loading
problems, where from one complete cycle the accumulated strains and displacements can be extrapolated
to cover multiple loading cycles.
Note: This parameter must be used with extreme care. Because of the nature of extrapolation, the
results can only be considered to be an estimate of the values that would have otherwise
been obtained with complete analysis. After an extrapolation, the analysis can be continued
in the usual way. See the ACCUMULATE and EXTRAPOLATE options in the history
definition section of this manual for more information.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word ACCUMULATE.
Main Index
158 ALIAS
Define Aliases
ALIAS Define Aliases
Description
In many cases, you might wish to enter a different element type identification to the library element type
given on the ELEMENTS parameter when the mesh is read from the CONNECTIVITY model definition
set. A common example is the use of the same mesh for heat transfer and stress analysis. The library
element code on the ELEMENTS parameter must be changed, but you might not wish to change the
library code on the CONNECTIVITY option. This parameter defines the aliases corresponding to the
library element types in this analysis. For example, if a heat transfer analysis is to be done with 4-node,
axisymmetric quadrilateral (library code 40) but the mesh has been generated with element code type 10
(the corresponding stress analysis element) the alias is set up as 10 for library code type 40.
Format
Format
Data
1-5 1st A Enter the word ALIAS.
11-15 2nd I Number of aliases to be entered. More than one alias can be used for any
one element library code.
16-20 3rd I Alias for element library code (the type given on the CONNECTIVITY
option).
21-25 4th I Actual library code for the above alias (the type given on the ELEMENTS
parameter and the one to be used in the analysis).
Etc.
Note: Alias correspondence pairs are continued in fields of I5 to column 75. Continuation blocks,
if needed, are given in 16I5 format.
Main Index
Program Function and I/O Controls
Chapt Program Function and I/O Controls

er 2:
Para
meter
s
Main Index
160 NEW
Use New Format
NEW Use New Format
Description
This parameter can be used to switch from input in extended format to the default width or vice-versa.
Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW option is encountered.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word NEW.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input. This
overrides the EXTENDED parameter.
Enter 2 if the double width of the data fields is used for input.
Main Index
TABLE 161
Indicate How Tables are to be used
TABLE Indicate How Tables are to be used
Description
This option defines how many tables are included in the input data, and how are they to be used.
Tables may currently be used for defining nonlinear material behavior, and boundary conditions and
contact data.
Format
Format
Data
1-5 1st A Enter the word TABLE.
6-10 2nd I Enter the maximum number of tables in model.
11-15 3rd I Enter the maximum number of data points associated with a table.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 if old style input is used for:
FIXED DISP, etc.
POINT LOAD, etc.
DIST LOADS, etc.
FOUNDATION or FILMS option
Enter 2 if new style input is used for:
FIXED DISP, etc.
POINT LOAD, etc.
DIST LOADS, etc.
FOUNDATION or FILMS option
21-25 5th I Enter 0 if old style input is used for:
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN,
FOAM, HYPOELASTIC, GENT, ARRUDBOYCE options.
Enter 1 if new style input is used for:
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN,
FOAM, HYPOELASTIC, GENT, ARRUDBOYCE options.
26-30 6th I Enter 0 if old style input is used for CONTACT option.
Enter 1 if new style input is used for CONTACT option.
Main Index
162 COMMENT
Define Comment
COMMENT Define Comment
Description
The COMMENT parameter is used to enter informative comments. This parameter can be used as often
as desired within the model definition and history definition options. Use of this parameter does not affect
the analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word COMMENT.
11-80 2nd A User-entered comment.
Alternate Format
Format
Data
1-1 1st A Enter the $ character.
3-80 2nd A User-entered comment.
Main Index
PRINT 163
Debug Printout
PRINT Debug Printout
Description
This parameter allows printout of various items for debugging; however, the amount of output is
increased accordingly. Default is no check printout. Multiple print flags can be set using columns 11
to 80.
Format
Format
Data
1-5 1st A Enter the word PRINT.
11-80 2nd I Enter as many print codes as required.
Enter 1 for output of element stiffness matrices (this also prints out the
shell surface metric for doubly curved shells 4, 8, and 24), consistent mass
matrix, and equivalent nodal loads.
Caution: This produces significant output.
Enter 2 for output of the matrices used in tying. (See TYING, SERVO LINK,
UFORMS.)
Enter 3 to force the solution of a nonpositive definite matrix. This is only
recommended for the AUTO INCREMENT option to pass collapse points
in the collapse analysis. This can be entered on the CONTROL option.
Enter 5 to obtain additional information concerning gap convergence. In
contact analysis, set to 5 to obtain information concerning nodes touching
or separating from surfaces and also to print out the maximum residual and
reaction forces.
Enter 6 to obtain output of nodal value array during rezoning.
Enter 7 to obtain tying information in CONRAD GAP option and fluid
element numbers in CHANNEL option which is used to define fluid
channel input data in heat transfer analysis.
Enter 8 to obtain incremental displacements in local system in
contact problems.
Enter 9 to obtain latent heat output.
Enter 10 to obtain the stress-strain relation in the local coordinate system.
Enter 11 to obtain additional information on the interlaminar
stress calculation.
Enter 12 to output the right-hand side and solution vector.
Caution: This produces significant output.
Main Index
164 PRINT
Debug Printout
Format
Data
Enter 13 to obtain additional information regarding CPU resources used.
Enter 14 to obtain information regarding the mesh adapting process.
Enter 15 to obtain additional information regarding surface
energy balances.
Enter 16 to obtain additional information regarding pyrolysis calculation.
Enter 17 to obtain additional information regarding creation
of streamlines.
Enter 18 to obtain information about rezoning when using ADAPT
GLOBAL option.
Enter 20 to obtain information regarding the evaluation of tables.
Enter 21 to obtain information about application of kinematic boundary
conditions when table input is used.
Enter 22 to obtain information about distributed loads, point loads, films,
foundations, and initial conditions when table input is used.
Enter 23 to obtain information about ablation deformation.
Enter 24 to print internal heat generated in coupled analysis.
Enter 25 to print additional information regarding remeshing
during ablation.
Enter 26 to print additional information regarding sink points.
Enter 27 to obtain reaction forces at tied nodes.
Enter 28 to obtain additional information about convective terms in heat
transfer and fluid analysis.
Enter 29 to obtain additional information on the internal created domains
(not supported yet).
Enter 30 to obtain information on cavity pressure loading.
Enter 31 to obtain information about the welding process. The total weld
heat input for each weld flux and the filler element creation history
are printed.
Enter 33 to obtain nodes and elements that are cut.
Enter 34 to print a description of what independent variables may be used
with a physical quantity.
Enter 35 to obtain detailed information on every call to a coupling region
API routine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines,
Chapter 12: Code Coupling Interface)
Enter 36 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has the least details).
Main Index
PRINT 165
Debug Printout
Format
Data
Enter 37 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has more details).
Enter 38 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has the most details).
Enter 39 to obtain detailed information about memory allocation.
Enter 40 to obtain information about Marc-Adams integration.
Enter 42 to create a step on the post file containing the rezoned model
before the next increment of the analysis.
Enter 43 to obtain information about VCCT.
Enter 44 to obtain information during progressive failure.
Enter 46 to obtain information as to what subroutine caused the fatal error.
Main Index
166 STOP
Exit following Workspace Allocation
STOP Exit following Workspace Allocation
Description
For large problems, you might desire to see the exact sizing requirements for running a job without
actually executing the analysis. The insertion of this parameter causes Marc to exit normally following
workspace allocation. The solution space allocated is based on the optimized bandwidth if you request
the OPTIMIZE option in the model definition section. This is not the total memory required in the case of
the hardware provided solver (solver type 6) or the CASI iterative solver (solver type 9).
Format
Format
Data
1-4 1st A Enter the word STOP.
Main Index
NOTES 167
Print Notes and Updates
NOTES Print Notes and Updates
Description
This parameter provides detailed, updated information about Marc (manual update, new program
features, etc.)
Format
Format
Data
1-5 1st A Enter the word NOTES.
Main Index
168 INPUT TAPE
Specify Device for Model Definition Data
INPUT TAPE Specify Device for Model Definition Data
Description
This parameter allows specification of a storage device which contains previously generated
CONNECTIVITY and COORDINATES model definition data.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words INPUT TAPE.
11-15 2nd I Unit number for main input of coordinates and connectivity.
Default is unit 5. For larger problems, involving out-of-core options, you
should avoid using unit 2, 3, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 for mesh input.
Main Index
ELSTO 169
Out-of-Core Storage of Elements
ELSTO Out-of-Core Storage of Elements
Description
This parameter is used to save core storage for large problems. All element quantities, strains, stresses,
etc. are stored on an auxiliary storage device. If the number of words actually required is less than the
buffer specified below, this option is turned off by Marc.
Format
Format
Data
FixeD Free Entry Entry
1-10 1st A Enter the word ELSTO.
This stores element arrays on unit 3.
11-15 2nd I Buffer size for out-of-core element storage.
The default is 40960 words. This buffer size is usually adequate unless
shell elements are used with a large number of layers.
Main Index
170 OOC
Out-of-core Solver
OOC Out-of-core Solver
Description
This parameter is used to indicate that the global stiffness matrix is assembled using auxiliary disk space
and will not reside in memory. This is available for solver types 0, 2, 4, 8, and 9 only. It can be used to
save memory. Additionally, for solver types 0 and 4, this parameter controls the decomposition of the
matrix. Normally, Marc automatically switches to the out-of-core solver only when it is unable to
dynamically allocate any more space, and the system is unable to fit into the real/virtual memory
available. For solver type 8, Marc automatically switches to the out-of-core assembly when there is
inadequate memory for the decomposition.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word OOC.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 to further reduce memory requirements. Available only for solver
type 8. In this case, the memory needed for the nodal vectors will be partly
used by the direct solver. Furthermore, the memory for the direct solver
will be limited to almost the minimum needed by that solver. This will
reduce the memory but might increase the I/O time.
Main Index
IBOOC 171
Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data
IBOOC Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data
Description
During the Newton-Raphson iteration process, Marc makes a second copy of the solution space. Marc
normally does this in memory unless sufficient memory is not available; in which case, it uses auxiliary
disk space. This option can be used to force it to use disk space (file jobname.t29). This is often useful
for large problems when the sparse solver (type 0) or the multifront sparse solver (type 8) is used, as this
back-up copy is allocated before the decomposition memory is allocated. If the solver has insufficient
memory to perform its function, the job fails prematurely.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word IBOOC.
Main Index
172 NO ECHO
Suppress Echo
NO ECHO Suppress Echo
This parameter is used to limit echoing of certain input data to the output file during reading. Different
codes are used to suppress different things.
Format
Format
Data
1-7 1st A Enter the words NO ECHO.
11-80 2nd I Up to 19 codes in I5 or I10 format.
Enter 1 to suppress echo on node and element lists. Only one line and a
summary of the number of lines read are printed.
Enter 2 to suppress echo of boundary condition summary. Only the
number of boundary conditions is printed.
Enter 3 to suppress echo of NURBS data.
Enter 4 to suppress information about coordinate systems.
Main Index
INCLUDE 173
Insert File into the Input File
INCLUDE Insert File into the Input File
Description
Inserts an external file into the input file. The include statement may appear in either the parameter,
model definition, or history definition section. In Marc, an include file may reference another include
file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited to
240 characters.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word INCLUDE.
11-80 2nd A Physical filename.
If the file name is specified without a path, the file should be in the same
directory as the input file. If a path is given, the file should be in the path
relative to the current working directory. Also, note that the file name is
case sensitive and blanks should not be included in the name.
Main Index
174 INCLUDE
Main Index
Modifying Default Values
Modifying Default Values

Chapter 2: Parameters
Main Index
176 STATE VARS
Define Number of State Variables
STATE VARS Define Number of State Variables
Description
This parameter allows consideration of state variables in addition to that of temperature. The number of
predefined state variables stored at each point of the structure can be increased from the default of one
(temperature for heat transfer and lubricant pressure for bearing analysis) by the use of this parameter. In
addition, additional storage can be allocated for user-defined global scalar quantities.
For more information, see THERMAL LOADS, INITIAL STATE, or CHANGE STATE model definition
data in this document and CREDE or NEWSV user subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and
Special Routines.
Note: In bearing analysis, the first state variable equals the lubricant pressure. For this reason, the
number of state variables must be set to 2 if viscosity varies with temperature in this type
of analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words STATE VARS.
11-15 2nd I Number of state variables to be stored per point.
16-20 3rd I Number of global variables to be stored.
Main Index
DIST LOADS 177
Distributed Loads or Point Loads
DIST LOADS Distributed Loads or Point Loads
Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of different lists of distributed loads, the
maximum number of elements in any particular distributed load list, and the maximum number of nodes
with point loads applied.
This parameter is only necessary if the number of different lists of distributed loads, or the maximum
number of elements per list, or the number of point loads is increased in the history definition section.
Note: This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST LOADS.
11-15 2nd I Maximum number of different lists of distributed loads. The default is 3.
16-20 3rd I Maximum number of elements in any particular distributed load list.
21-25 4th I Enter the maximum number of nodes with point loads applied.
Main Index
178 FLUXES
Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes
FLUXES Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes
Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of different lists of distributed fluxes, the
maximum number of elements in a particular distributed flux list, and the maximum number of nodes
with point fluxes applied.
This parameter is only necessary unless the number of different lists of distributed fluxes, or the
maximum number of elements per list, or the number of point fluxes is increased in the history
definition section.
Format
Format
Data
1-6 1st A Enter the word FLUXES.
11-15 2nd I Maximum number of different lists of distributed fluxes. Default is 3.
16-20 3rd I Maximum number of elements in any particular distributed flux list.
21-25 4th I Enter the maximum number of nodes with point fluxes applied.
Main Index
FILMS 179
Film Coefficients
FILMS Film Coefficients
Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of elements that have films. This parameter
is only needed if the number of elements with films is increased in the history definition section.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word FILMS.
11-15 2nd I Maximum number of elements that have films.
Main Index
180 RESTRICTOR
Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis
RESTRICTOR Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis
Description
This parameter must be included to allow the use of restrictors in lubrication analysis. See the
RESTRICTOR model definition option section of this document for more information.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word RESTRICTOR.
11-15 2nd I Number of element surfaces for which restrictor conditions are imposed.
Main Index
WELDING 181
Welding Analysis
WELDING Welding Analysis
Description
This parameter can be used to define the maximum number of weld fluxes in the model and other related
maximum quantities for welding processes. This parameter is recommended, in general, for any welding
analysis, but is particularly required if the number of weld fluxes, weld paths, weld fillers and other
related quantities are increased in the history definition section.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word WELDING.
11-15 2nd I Enter an upper bound to the number of welding heat sources.
16-20 3rd I Enter an upper bound to the number of elements associated with any weld
heat source.
21-25 4th I Enter an upper bound to the number of weld paths.
26-30 5th I Enter an upper bound to the number of weld fillers.
31-35 6th I Enter an upper bound to the number of elements associated with any
weld filler.
36-40 7th I Enter an upper bound to the number of curves associated with any weld
path. This is set to 1 by the program if left undefined.
41-45 8th I Enter an upper bound to the number of points associated with any weld
path curve. This is set to 2 by the program is left undefined.
Main Index
182 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to be Defined
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Specify Maximum Number of Boundary

Conditions to be Defined
Description
This option allows the user to specify the maximum number of boundary conditions (FIXED DISP., etc.,
DIST LOADS, etc., POINT LOAD, etc., FILMS or FOUNDATION) labels to be given. If all boundary
conditions are specified before the END OPTION, this is not necessary. This is only necessary if the table
driven style input is used for defining boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word BOUNDARY.
11-15 2nd I Enter the maximum number of boundary condition ids.
Main Index
SHELL SECT 183
Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness
SHELL SECT Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness
Description
By default, all the shell and beam-in-a-plane elements in Marc use a Simpson rule for integration through
the cross section. This numerical integration allows any material behavior at each layer; for example, the
yielding of a nonlinear elastic-plastic shell can be followed through the section, from a fully elastic to a
fully plastic section. The density of integration points through the thickness is chosen with this parameter.
For purely linear material behavior, 1 point (the minimum) is required for exact integration across the
section. For most nonlinear problems, 7 points are sufficient to describe the nonlinear material response
exactly. For extremely nonlinear response, such as elastic-plastic dynamic problems, 11 points might be
needed. The default if this parameter is not used is 11 points.
If the COMPOSITE option is used for a group of elements, it controls the number of layers used, and the
integration is performed using the trapezoidal rule. This option (4th field) may be used to control the
procedure which can improve computational performance but limit materials selection.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words SHELL SECT.
11-15 2nd I Number of points across the section for Simpson rule integration of
stresses. The default is 11; minimum is 1. Must be an odd number.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 if you are going to perform your own integration through the
shell/beam thickness. This requires you to input a generalized stress-strain
law through the GENSTR user subroutine.
21-25 4th I Enter the default method for integrating through the thickness of
composite shell elements. If a value is given on the COMPOSITE option,
it will be used for that particular material.
Enter 1 (default) for conventional procedure, which supports all material
behavior available for composite elements.
Enter 2 if stiffness is to be fast-integrated through the thickness based
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements and
computational costs for elastic shells. Thermal strains and temperature
dependent properties are not supported.
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements and
computational costs for elastic shells. This procedure uses more memory
and computational time than method 2.
Main Index
184 TSHEAR
Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185
TSHEAR Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185
Description
The default distribution of transverse shear strain through the thickness for thick shell element types 22,
75, and 140, and for thick beam 45, is a constant. With the inclusion of the TSHEAR parameter, a more
parabolic beam-like distribution derived from a strength-of-materials approach is used. This distribution
is exact for beam 45 but is only approximate for shells 22, 75, or 140 since it is based on the assumption
that the stresses in perpendicular directions are independent of each other.
For unstacked solid shell element, type 185, and 3D composite brick elements, type 149 and 150, the
inclusion of the TSHEAR parameter results in an improved transverse shear distribution. For solid shell
elements, if not used as a composite material, the shear correction factor should be entered in the
GEOMETRY option.
The interlaminar shear is printed only if the PRINT ELEMENT option is used.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word TSHEAR.
Main Index
TIE 185
Define Tying Data
TIE Define Tying Data
Description
This allocates storage for tying data. See TYING and SERVO LINK model definition options in Chapter
3 of this manual. Also see the UFORMSN user subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and
Special Routines.
This parameter is necessary only if TYING CHANGE is used to increase the number of constraints.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word TIE.
21-25 4th I Maximum number of retained nodes plus one involved in any tying type
or servo link constraint.
Main Index
186 MPC-CHECK
Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter
MPC-CHECK Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter
Description
This parameter allows the user to specify the amount of checking and ordering done by the program
during the application of multi-point constraints arising from the model definition options: CONTACT,
CYCLIC SYMMETRY, INSERT, RBE2, RBE3, SERVO LINK, and TYING.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words MPC-CHECK.
11-15 2nd I 1: Apply the MPCs in the default order:
1. MPCs obtained from SERVO LINK option.
2. MPCs obtained from INSERT option.
3. MPCs obtained from TYING, RBE2, or RBE3 options (the actual
order follows from the order of these options in the model
definition block of the data file).
4. MPCs obtained from CYCLIC SYMMETRY option.
5. MPCs obtained from CONTACT option.
Print a warning message if a tied degree of freedom is being used by a
subsequent MPC.
2: Same as 1, but instead of warning, a fatal error message is printed and
the analysis will stop with exit 2011.
3: Try to rearrange the MPCs in such a way that a tied degree of freedom
will not be used in a subsequent MPC. If this reordering cannot
successfully be completed, print a fatal error message and stop the
analysis with exit 2011.
If the MPC-CHECK parameter is not present in the input file:
For Version 10 or earlier, default is 1.
For Version 11, default is 3.
Main Index
AUTOMSET 187
Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes
AUTOMSET Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes
Description
Without this option, a tied degree of freedom cannot be used as a tied degree of freedom in other tying
constraints nor can it be used as a fixed degree of freedom in a single point constraint (for example,
FIXED DISP/FIXED TEMPERATURE).
When this option is used, the above is allowed as long as the number of constraints is not larger than the
number of degrees of freedom. The program re-writes the tying constraint equation so that one of the
retained degrees of freedom becomes the tied degree of freedom.
If this option is activated, the MPC-CHECK parameter is ignored.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word AUTOMSET.
Examples
Example 1
Xdisplacement of node 3 is tied to Xdisplacements of node 1 and node 2:
Ux(3) = 0.5 * Ux(1) + 0.5 * Ux(2)
Xdisplacement of node 3 is fixed to be 0.1:
Ux(3) = 0.1
Without the AUTOMSET option, this is not allowed; with the AUTOMSET option, these two constraints
are rewritten as:
Ux(1) = 2*Ux(3) - Ux(2)
Ux(3) = 0.1
Example 2
Xdisplacement of node 3 is tied to Xdisplacement of node 1 and node 2:
Ux(3) = 0.5 * Ux(1) + 0.5 * Ux(2)
Xdisplacement of node 3 are tied to Xdisplacement of node 4:
Ux(3) = Ux(4)
Xdisplacement of node 3 is fixed to be 0.1:
Ux(3) = 0.1
Main Index
188 AUTOMSET
Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes
Without the AUTOMSET parameter, this is not allowed; with the AUTOMSET parameter, these two
constraints are rewritten as:
Ux(1) = 2*Ux(3) - Ux(2)
Ux(4) = Ux(3)
Ux(3)=0.1
The parameter is effective for constraints generated by the following options:
TYING
SERVO LINK
RBE2
RBE3
RROD
CONRAD GAP
It is not active for constraints generated by the following options:

INSERT
CONTACT
INERTIA RELIEF
Main Index
AUTOSPC 189
Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes
AUTOSPC Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes
Description
The AUTOSPC option applies a constraint to multiple degrees of freedom to eliminate rigid body modes
in the structure. This procedure can only be used with the direct solvers.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word AUTOSPC.
Main Index
190 IO-DEACTIVATE
Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out
Chap
IO-DEACTIVATE Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out
Description
This parameter will result in the simulation continuing even if an element goes inside-out due to large
deformation or material instability. The element that has gone inside-out will be deactivated from the
model. This option is intended for use with damage models where the reduced stiffness of the element
may result in these difficulties. It should be used with caution in the simulation, and it should be
recognized that this will result in a decrease in mass in the system.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word IO-DEACT.
Main Index
ter 2: Parameters 191
Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements
ter 2: Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements

Para
meter
s
Main Index
192 BEAM SECT
Beam Section Definition
BEAM SECT Beam Section Definition
Description
This parameter is used to define the sectional properties of beam sections used in the analysis. The format
and exact data entered depends upon which elements are used. Formats for all available Marc beam
elements are shown below. This parameter must be included if element 13, 77, or 79 is used, if 14, 25,
31, 76, or 78 is used with a noncircular section, or if element 52 or 98 is used with a nonprismatic section
or if element 52 or 98 is used with numerical section integration. See Marc Volume B: Element Library
for more information about individual elements.
If used, the BEAM SECT parameter must directly follow the SIZING and ELEMENTS parameters. Each
beam section used in the analysis must then be described. A LAST statement must follow the last beam
section description to complete the BEAM SECT parameter definition.
There are four methods in this option to define the beam cross section properties:
a. For thin section open and closed beams
b. Elastic non-integrated element types 31, 52, and 98
c. Numerically integrated standard solid section
d. Numerically integrated non-standard solid section
Format
Format
Data
For all beam elements, use the 1st and last data blocks described below.
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words BEAM SECT.
.
. (Include all beam section definitions here.)
.
Last data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word LAST.
Method A
For elements 13, 14, 25, and 76 to 79, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, 5a to define each beam section:
2a data block
1-10 1st A Descriptive title of beam section.
Main Index
BEAM SECT 193
Format
Data
3a data block for elements 13, 14, 25, and 76 - 79
1-5 1st I Number of branches used to input section.
6-10 2nd I Number of divisions in first branch. Must be an even number.
11-15 3rd I Number of divisions in second branch. Must be an even number.
Etc. Etc. I Etc.
Note that a beam section consisting of one straight branch has no stiffness against rotation along the
branch direction.
Data blocks 4a and 5a are given one pair per branch. (X, Y, and S are coordinates on the cross-section
face.) See Marc Volume B: Element Library.
Note that a branch with zero thickness does not contribute to the stiffness but is used to ensure that the
branches form a connected path for open section beams.
4a data block
1-10 1st F X-Coordinate of beginning of branch.
11-20 2nd F Y-Coordinate of beginning of branch.
21-30 3rd F DX/DS at beginning of branch.
31-40 4th F DY/DS at beginning of branch.
41-50 5th F X-Coordinate of end of branch.
51-60 6th F Y-Coordinate of end of branch.
61-70 7th F DX/DS at end of branch.
71-80 8th F DY/DS at end of branch.
5a data block
1-10 1st F Length of branch.
11-20 2nd F Thickness of beginning branch.
21-30 3rd F Thickness of end branch. Default to thickness at beginning if left zero.
Method B
For elastic non-integrated element types 31, 52, or 98, use data blocks 2b and 3b formats to define each
beam section.
2b data block
1-10 1st A Descriptive title of section.
3b data block for element type 31, 52, or 98
1-5 1st I Enter 0.
6-15 2nd F Area of cross section A.
16-25 3rd F Ixx Moment of inertia about local x-axis.
Main Index
194 BEAM SECT
Format
Data
26-35 4th F Iyy Moment of inertia about local y-axis.
36-45 5th F K Torsional stiffness factor. The torsional stiffness is calculated as
EK
--------------------- .
2(1 + ν)
46-55 6th F A xs Effective transverse shear area in x-direction (only applies to element
31 and 98). Default A xs = A.
56-65 7th F Effective transverse shear area in y-direction (only applies to element
A ys
31 and 98).
Default A ys = A.
Method C
For elements 52 and 98 using the standard numerically integrated sections, use data blocks 2c, 3c, 4c,
and 5c to define the beam section:
2c data block
3c data block
1-5 1st I Enter 0 for the standard cross-section shapes (i.e., elliptical, rectangular,
trapezoidal, or hexagonal).
6-15 2nd F Enter N sec t for the cross-section type. The negative value indicates the
section is numerically integrated. The value is entered as a real number.
N sec t = -1 for an elliptical section
N sec t = -2 for a rectangular section
N sec t = -3 for a trapezoidal section
N sec t = -4 for a hexagonal section
16-25 3rd F Enter a, the first dimension defining the cross section.
if N sec t = -1: a is the diameter of the circle or the length of the ellispe in
local x.
if N sec t = -2: a is the length of the square or the rectangle in local x.
if N sec t = -3: a is the width of the trapezoid in local x on minus local y side.
if N sec t = -4: a is the width of the hexagon in local x at y = 0.
Main Index
BEAM SECT 195
Format
Data
26-35 4th F Enter b, the second dimension defining the cross-section. The default is a
when blank or zero.
if N sec t = -1: b is the height of the ellipse in local y.
if N sec t = -2: b is the height of the rectangle in local y.
if N sec t = -3: b is the height of the trapezoid in local y.
if N sec t = -4: b is the height of the hexagon in local y.
36-45 5th F Enter c, the third dimension defining the cross section. The default is zero
when blank.
if N sec t = -1: c is not used. Leave blank or enter 0.
if N sec t = -2: c is not used. Leave blank or enter 0.
if N sec t = -3: c is the width of the trapezoid in local x on the plus local
y side.
if N sec t = -4: c is the width of the hexagon in local x on either local y side.
4c data block
1-5 1st I For an elliptical section, enter the number of subdivisions in radial
direction. The default is 3.
For a rectangular or trapezoidal section, enter the order of the integration
rule used in local x-direction. If the number is positive and odd, a Simpson
rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes rule is
used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is 5 and
the order cannot be larger than 10.
For a hexagonal section, enter the order of the integration rule used in local
x-direction over each trapezoidal half. If the number is positive and odd, a
Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes
rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is
5 and the order cannot be larger than 10.
6-10 2nd I For an elliptical section, enter the number of subdivisions in
circumferential direction of a 90° sector. The default is 2.
For a rectangular or trapezoidal section, enter the order of the integration
rule used in local y-direction. If the number is positive and odd, a Simpson
rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes rule is
used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is what
was entered in the first field and the order cannot be larger than 10.
Main Index
196 BEAM SECT
Format
Data
For a hexagonal section, enter the order of the integration rule used in local
y-direction over each trapezoidal half. If the number is positive and odd, a
half the order in x-direction plus 1 and the order cannot be larger than 10.
For non-Gauss rules, the points in the top row of the lower trapezoid
coinciding with the points in the bottom row of the upper trapezoid (i.e.,
the points coinciding at y = 0) are merged together.
11-15 3rd I Enter one if the section is to be treated as a pre-integrated section. The
default, when blank or zero, is not to treat it as a pre-integrated section and
use numerical integration throughout the analysis. If a one is entered in
this field, the input in the 1st and the 2nd field of this data block is ignored.
16-20 4th I Not used; leave blank or enter 0.
21-30 5th F Enter the normal stiffness factor f1 .
31-40 6th F Enter the bending stiffness factor f2 for bending about local x.
41-50 7th F Enter the bending stiffness factor f3 for bending about local y.
61-70 8th F Enter the shear stiffness factor f4 for shear in local x.
71-80 9th F Enter the shear stiffness factor f5 for shear in local y.
51-60 10th F Enter the torsional stiffness factor f6 .
Stiffness factors default to 1 when left blank or entered as 0.

Entered stiffness factors must be positive
5c data block
1-10 1st F For a uniform change in cross section, enter the effective Poisson’s ratio.
The default is zero when left blank. This datum is not used at this time and
its value will be ignored.
Not more than 100 integration points can exist in any cross section. Note that pre-integrated sections do
not allow746+5 stress and strain output in section integration points; only generalized stresses and
strains can be requested for output.
Method D
For elements 52 and 98 using the more general numerically integrated sections that use quadrilateral
segments as building blocks, use data blocks 2d, 3d, 4d, and 5d to define the beam section.
2d data block
Main Index
BEAM SECT 197
Format
Data
3d data block
1-5 1st I Enter – N seg , the negative of the number of quadrilateral shaped segments.
The negative number indicates the section is solid.
6-10 2nd I Enter the order of the integration rule used for each quadrilateral shaped
segment in parametric ξ -direction. If the number is positive and odd, a
5 and the order cannot be larger than 10.
11-15 3rd I Enter the order of the integration rule used for each quadrilateral shaped
segment in parametric η -direction. If the number is positive and odd, a
the same rule and order as in parametric ξ -direction and the order cannot
be larger than 10.
16-20 4th I Enter a one if the section is to be treated as a pre-integrated section. The
default, when blank or zero, is not to treat it as a pre-integrated section and
use numerical integration throughout the analysis. If a 1 is entered in this
field, the input in the 2nd and the 3rd field of this data block is ignored.
21-30 5th F Enter the normal stiffness factor f1 .
31-40 6th F Enter the bending stiffness factor f2 for bending about local x.
41-50 7th F Enter the bending stiffness factor f3 for bending about local y.
61-70 8th F Enter the shear stiffness factor f4 for shear in local x.
71-80 9th F Enter the shear stiffness factor f5 for shear in local y.
51-60 10th F Enter the torsional stiffness factor f6 .
Stiffness factors default to 1 when left blank or entered as 0.

Entered stiffness factors must be positive
Enter the 4d data block N seg times as follows (i.e., one data block for each quadrilateral segment.
4d data block
1-10 1st F x-coordinate of the first corner of the segment.
11-20 2nd F y-coordinate of the first corner of the segment.
21-30 3rd F x-coordinate of the second corner of the segment.
31-40 4th F y-coordinate of the second corner of the segment.
41-50 5th F x-coordinate of the third corner of the segment.
Main Index
198 BEAM SECT
Format
Data
51-60 6th F y-coordinate of the third corner of the segment.
61-70 7th F x-coordinate of the fourth corner of the segment.
71-80 8th F y-coordinate of the fourth corner of the segment.
The corners are given in counterclockwise order with respect to the local x-y axis.
5d data block
1-10 1st F For a uniform change in cross section, enter the effective Poisson’s ratio.
Default is zero when left blank. This data is not used at this time and its
value will be ignored.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 to have the principal axis associated with the largest area moment
of inertia to be aligned with the local x-axis.
Enter 2 to have the principal axis associated with the smallest area moment
of inertia to be aligned with the local x-axis.
Enter 3 to have the x-axis of the coordinate system for which the section
is being defined to be aligned with the local x-axis is given in the
GEOMETRY option.
Default is 3 when left blank or zero.
16-25 3rd F Enter the x-coordinate of a point that, when projected, lies on the positive
side of the local x-axis. If the principal moments of inertia are equal, this
defines the x-coordinate of a point on the positive local x-axis. This
coordinate defaults to X cg + 1 , where X cg is the x-coordinate of the center
of gravity of the section in the coordinate system in which the section was
entered. The default is used when this field is blank or zero or when the
user point coincides with the center of gravity.
26-35 4th F Enter the y-coordinate of a point that, when projected, lies on the positive
side of the local x-axis. If the principal moments of inertia are equal, this
defines the y-coordinate of a point on the positive local x-axis. This
coordinate defaults to Y cg , where Y cg is the y-coordinate of the center of
gravity of the section in the coordinate system in which the section was
entered. The default is used when this field is blank or zero or when the
user point coincides with the center of gravity.
Not more than 100 integration points can exist in any cross section. Note that pre-integrated sections do
not allow stress and strain output in section integration points; only generalized stresses and strains can
be requested for output. A section not pre-integrated cannot have more than 100 segments; using single
point integration each. For pre-integrated sections, there is no limit on the number of segments.
Main Index
Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List
3 Model Definition Options List
Model Dedinition Option Page

ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1219
ACOUSTIC 1220
ACTUATOR 293
ADAPT GLOBAL 260
ADAPTIVE 252
ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical) 736
ANISOTROPIC (Thermal) 1092
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1182
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 729
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1089
ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input) 751
ARRUDBOYCE 755
ATTACH EDGE 286
ATTACH FACE 287
ATTACH NODE 284
AXITO3D 525
Main Index
200

B2GG, B2PP 376
BACKTOSUBS 378
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic) 1323
B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic) 1290
BLOCKS 213
BOUNDARY 217
BUCKLE INCREMENT 997
CASE COMBIN 390

CAVITY DEFINITION 1112
CAVITY 520
CFAST 340
CHANGE PORE 946
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input) 944
CHANGE STATE 554
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input) 550
CHANNEL 1107
COEFFICIENT 382
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input) 884
COHESIVE 887
COMPOSITE 878
CONM1 986
CONM2 992
CONN FILL 234
CONN GENER 235
CONNECT 223
CONNECTIVITY 232
CONRAD GAP 1106
CONSTRAINT 220
CONTACT (2-D) 623
CONTACT (3-D) 649
CONTACT NODE 687
CONTACT TABLE 672
Main Index
Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List 201

CONTACT TABLE with TABLES 663
CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) 611
CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic) 1327
CONTROL (Fluid) 1353
CONTROL (Fluid-Solid) 1356
CONTROL (Heat Transfer) 1103
CONTROL (Hydrodynamic) 1196
CONTROL (Magnetostatic) 1296
CONTROL (Mechanical) 474
CONVERT 1105
COORD SYSTEM 297
COORDINATES 238
CORNERING AXIS 517
COUPLING REGION 1332
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input) 838
CRACK DATA 840
CREEP (with TABLE Input) 955
CREEP 958
CURE RATE 1122
CURE SHRINKAGE 1129
CURVES 271
CWELD 345
CYCLIC SYMMETRY 306
CYLINDRICAL 249
DAMAGE 869
DAMPING 974
DEACT GLUE 688
DEACTIVATE 385
DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type) 214
DEFINE (Sets) 229
DELAMINATION 583
Main Index
202

DENSITY EFFECTS 914
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS 465
DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS 471
DESIGN OBJECTIVE 462
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS 469
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS 467
DESIGN VARIABLES 463
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic) 1310
DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic) 1236
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric) 1254
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1307
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic) 1233
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1251
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic) 1306
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating) 1160
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) 1277
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1303
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1157
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1274
DIST FLUXES 1015
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input) 1012
DIST LOADS 495
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input) 490
DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1173
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic) 1212
DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1209
DMIG 370
DMIG-OUT 365
ELEMENT SORT 456

EMISSIVITY 1115
END OPTION 1361
ERROR ESTIMATE 386
Main Index

EXCLUDE 689
FACE IDS 500

FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input) 841
FAIL DATA 855
FILMS 1009
FILMS (with TABLE Input) 1005
FIXED ACCE 984
FIXED DISP (Fluid) 1336
FIXED DISP (Mechanical) 488
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 484
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) 1226
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1223
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic) 1267
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1264
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic) 1301
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic) 1231
FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic) 1272
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric) 1250
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1298
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1228
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1269
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1247
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic) 1207
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1204
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1171
FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) 1000
FIXED TEMPERATURE 1003
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid) 1338
FIXED VELOCITY 1341
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1164
FIXED VOLTAGE 1167
FLOW LINE 418
Main Index
204

FLUID DRAG 518
FLUID SOLID 976
FOAM (with TABLE Input) 777
FOAM 781
FORCDT 568
FORMING LIMIT 797
FOUNDATION 572
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input) 569
FOURIER 573
FXORD 241
GAP DATA 876

GASKET 784
GENERATE 226
GENT (with TABLE Input) 758
GENT 762
GEOMETRY 288
GLOBALLOCAL 529
GRAIN SIZE 867
GRID FORCE 443
HOLD NODES 513

HYPERMESH 429
HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input) 740
HYPOELASTIC 742
INCLUDE 240
INERTIA RELIEF 514
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input) 1126
INIT CURE 1128
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input) 533
INIT STRESS 535
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer) 1149
Main Index

INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input) 977
INITIAL DISP 980
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input) 935
INITIAL PC 937
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input) 539
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN 541
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) 939
INITIAL PORE 941
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input) 925
INITIAL POROSITY 927
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1169
INITIAL PYROLYSIS 1147
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) 544
INITIAL STATE 547
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) 1078
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress) 562
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer) 1075
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress) 560
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input) 981
INITIAL VEL 983
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input) 930
INITIAL VOID RATIO 932
INSERT 326
IRM 420
ISLAND REMOVAL 584
ISOTROPIC (Acoustic) 1218
ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) 1316
ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic) 1241
ISOTROPIC (Fluid) 1345
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer) 1082
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic) 1199
ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) 1283
ISOTROPIC (Stress) 713
Main Index
206

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1217
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1178
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1314
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1240
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid) 1343
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) 1197
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1281
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress) 705
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1080
J-INTEGRAL 575
JOULE 1156
K2GG, K2PP 373
LATENT HEAT 1094

LOADCASE 414
LORENZI 576
M2GG, M2PP 375

MANY TYPES 215
MAPPER 219
MASSES 985
MATERIAL DATA 866
MERGE 221
MERGE SELECTIVE 222
MESH2D 212
MIXTURE 881
MNF UNITS 379
MODAL INCREMENT 995
MOONEY (with TABLE Input) 744
MOONEY 748
NEW 228
Main Index

NLELAST 772
NO ELEM SORT 458
NO NODE SORT 461
NO PRINT 438
NO PRINT CONTACT 442
NO PRINT SPRING 440
NO SUMMARY 455
NODAL THICKNESS 292
NODE CIRCLE 244
NODE FILL 245
NODE GENER 246
NODE MERGE 247
NODE SORT 459
OGDEN (with TABLE Input) 765

OGDEN 769
OPTIMIZE 395
ORIENTATION 900
ORTHO TEMP (Structural) 814
ORTHO TEMP (Thermal) 1098
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical) 1244
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) 1321
ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) 1288
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical) 725
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal) 1087
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1180
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1318
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1242
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1284
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 719
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1084
P2G 377
Main Index
208

PARAMETERS 480
PBUSH 332
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic) 1325
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic) 1294
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1292
PFAST 343
PHI-COEFFICIENTS 963
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric) 1261
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1258
PIN CODE 325
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric) 1257
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1237
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1255
POINT CHARGE 1239
POINT CURRENT (Joule) 1163
POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic) 1280
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1161
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1278
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1311
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE 1313
POINT FLUX 1019
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input) 1016
POINT LOAD 510
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input) 506
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1176
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic) 1216
POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1213
POINT TEMP 566
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input) 564
POINTS 270
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input) 928
POST 397
POWDER (with TABLE input) 908
Main Index

POWDER 911
PRE STATE 521
PRESS FILM 952
PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input) 949
PRINT CHOICE 431
PRINT CONTACT 441
PRINT ELEMENT 433
PRINT NODE 436
PRINT SPRING 439
PRINT STREAMLINE 1153
PRINT VMASS 445
PRTCONNECT 224
PSHELL 890
PWELD 353
QVECT (with TABLE Input) 1020
RAD-CAVITY 1110
RADIATING CAVITY 1109
RBE2 319
RBE3 321
REAUTO 446
REBAR 893
RECEDING SURFACE 1143
REGION (Fluid) 1331
RELATIVE DENSITY 917
RESPONSE SPECTRUM 994
RESTART LAST 451
RESTART 448
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input) 1193
RESTRICTOR 1195
ROTATION A 516
RROD 324
Main Index
210
SDRC 426
SERVO LINK 317
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input) 828
SHAPE MEMORY 834
SHELL TRANSFORMATION 304
SHIFT FUNCTION 970
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input) 1010
SOIL (with TABLE Input) 918
SOIL 922
SOLVER 392
SPECIFIC WEIGHT 938
SPECIFIED NODES 218
SPLINE 679
SPRINGS 328
START NUMBER 216
STIFSCALE 381
STRAIN RATE (Fluid) 1347
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) 795
STREAM DEFINITION 1151
STRING 282
SUMMARY 454
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications) 363
SUPERELEM 361
SURFACE ENERGY 1137
SURFACES 276
SWLDPRM 355
SYMMETRY 225
TABLE 787
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal) 1350
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress) 807
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer) 1095
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic) 1200
Main Index

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress) 802
THERMAL CONTACT (2-D) 1049
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) 1041
THERMAL LOADS 558
THERMO-PORE 1132
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input) 1190
THICKNESS 1192
THROAT 1146
TIME-TEMP 824
TRACK STREAMLINE 1154
TRACK 417
TRANSFORMATION 294
TYING 309
UDUMP 453
UFCONN 237
UFRICTION 684
UFXORD 248
UHTCOEF 685
UHTCON 686
UMOTION 683
USDATA 387
UTRANFORM 305
VCCT 579
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer) 1120
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic) 1188
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer) 1118
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) 1186
VIEW FACTOR 1108
VISCEL EXP 972
Main Index
212

VISCELFOAM 969
VISCELMOON 967
VISCELOGDEN 968
VISCELORTH 965
VISCELPROP 964
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input) 933
WELD FILL 1038

WELD FLUX 1028
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input) 1024
WELD PATH 1032
WORK HARD 799
WRITE 251
Main Index
Chapter 3: Model Definition Options
3 Model Definition Options
J MESH2D 215
J
Mesh Definition 231
J
Program Control 393
J Mechanical Analysis 477
J
Contact 591
J
Material Properties 697
J Rate Effects 959
J
Dynamic Analysis 979
J
Joule Heating Analysis 1161
J Diffusion Analysis 1174
J
Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis 1191
J
Acoustic Analysis 1209
J Electrostatic Analysis 1227
J
Piezoelectric Analysis 1251
J
Magnetostatic Analysis 1269
J Electromagnetic Analysis 1303
J
Fluid Analysis 1335
Main Index
The model definition input consists of a series of optional blocks of data. These blocks define the
geometry of the mesh, material properties, boundary conditions, and analysis controls.
These options are read in by activating the respective option with an alphanumeric code word
(a keyword), followed by sets of data. In this document, both fixed format and free input are described.
This code word is given in capital letters at the top of each block of data in the following section. An END
OPTION is used to signify the end of all the model definition input data. Note that each option can be
exercised more than once.
In general, there is no specific order required in reading the options; however, you should be aware that
the same option flags can appear in different blocks and that the last data read controls that flag. The
exceptions are as follows:
1. If the FXORD or UFXORD option is used, it must come after the COORDINATES option when it
uses data read in the COORDINATES option;
2. If postprocessor and restart files are being used, the results are order dependent. See the POST
option for more details.
3. If the MESH2D option is used, it must follow the END parameter. If the MESH2D option is used
to write a mesh file containing connectivity, coordinates and optional boundary conditions, the
file needs to be read in sequential order. The CONNECTIVITY option must appear before the
COORDINATES option followed by BOUNDARY conditions if stored on mesh file. Other options
can be in any sequence and the above options can be repeated in any sequence to read data from
other files or data input.
Information given in the last option overwrites any previous information, thus facilitating any minor
corrections to the data. Any option not needed should be left out.
Main Index
Chapter 3: Model Definition Options 215
MESH2D
MESH2D
Two-dimensional Mesh Generator

This two-dimensional mesh generator generates a mesh composed of either triangular or quadrilateral
elements. The results of the mesh generation are output on a specified file. This file can then be used as
input for Marc. A detailed description of the capabilities of the MESH2D generation is contained in Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information.
The call to the mesh generation feature is initialized by a block with MESH2D in the first six columns.
This is followed by a series of optional sets of blocks; each of which has an alphanumeric keyword. The
keywords are:
• BLOCKS (Required as first set)
• DEFINE
• MANY TYPES
• START NUMBER
• BOUNDARY
• SPECIFIED NODES
• MAPPER
• CONSTRAINT
• MERGE
• MERGE SELECTIVE
• CONNECT
• PRTCONNECT
• SYMMETRY
• GENERATE
BLOCKS must be the first set input. GENERATE must terminate the mesh generation. BLOCKS defines the
parameters and the working space for the mesh generation. GENERATE tells Marc to start generating the
mesh, and then returns control to Marc. You should note that the generated mesh is written out on the
specified file and must be read in from this file using the appropriate model definition data options
(CONNECTIVITY and COORDINATES) described in a following section before plotting or optimization
of the mesh can proceed.
When using the MESH2D option, divide the geometry into simpler regions called blocks. Marc meshes
each block into nodes and elements, and finally combines the blocks to form the complete mesh.
The MESH2D option can be used more than once in an analysis. Simply place the second group to be
included after the previous GENERATE.
Main Index
216 MESH2D
Define a Two-dimensional Mesh
MESH2D Define a Two-dimensional Mesh
Description
This option starts the call to the two-dimensional mesh generation feature. This data must follow the END
of the parameters.
Format
Format
Data
Fixed Free‘ Entry Entry
1-6 1st A Enter the word MESH2D.
Main Index
BLOCKS 217
Define Working Size
BLOCKS Define Working Size
This option is required and must follow MESH2D.
Description
This option defines the parameters and the sizes of the working space for mesh generation.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word BLOCKS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of blocks.
6-10 2nd I Number of principal boundary nodes defining the geometry of all blocks.
Note that principal nodes should be continuous in their numbering.
11-15 3rd I Code number of element type for use with Marc series of programs.
16-20 4th I Set to 1 for generation of 4-node quadrilateral elements.
Set to 0 for triangles.
Set to 2 for 8-node quads.
21-25 5th I Local file on which the output is written; to be used by the Marc series
of programs.
26-30 6th Not used. Enter 0.
31-35 7th I Number of times the mesh is repeated due to use of the
SYMMETRY option.
36-40 8th I Maximum number of degrees of freedom constrained during mesh
generation. Default is 100.
41-45 9th I Number of degrees of freedom for each node. The default is two degrees
of freedom.
46-50 10th I Maximum number of nodes on symmetry axis. Default is 50.
51-55 11th I Maximum number of connections of any blocks. Default is 10.
Main Index
218 DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type)
Define Block Type
DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type) Define Block Type
Description
This option allows the block type and the nodal number of the boundary points to be specified.
Note: Marc always generates node connections in a counterclockwise direction. See Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information for correct specification of boundary node number
order when a distributed load has to be applied to any surface of the block.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word DEFINE.
2nd data block
One per block.
1-5 1st I Type of block: 1, 2, 3, or 4.
6-10 2nd I Number of intervals in the first direction (P1 - P2). Number of increments
between the first and second boundary nodes.
11-15 3rd I Number of intervals in the second direction (P2 - P3). M=N for a type 3
triangular block.
Number of increments between second and third boundary nodes.
16-20 4th I First boundary node number defining the block.
21-25 5th I Second boundary node number defining the block.
26-30 6th I Third boundary node number defining the block.
31-35 7th I Fourth boundary node number defining the block.
Etc. I Continue until necessary boundary nodes have been defined. A maximum
of 12 is possible and these must follow the order defined in Marc Volume
A: Theory and User Information.
Main Index
MANY TYPES 219
Define Multiple Elements
MANY TYPES Define Multiple Elements
Description
This option allows you to specify different element types per block. Default is that all elements are of the
same type specified in the BLOCKS option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MANY TYPES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Element type block 1.
6-10 2nd I Element type block 2.
Etc. for all blocks.
Continuations (more than 16 blocks) are given in Format 16I5.
Main Index
220 START NUMBER
Specify Starting Element
START NUMBER Specify Starting Element
Description
This option allows you to give a lowest element number and node number for this MESH2D sequence.
This option can be used more than once; for example, if MESH2D is used more than one time in a single
run. Default is that Marc starts generation with element 1 and node 1.
Format
Format
Data
Fixed Free Entry Enter
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words START NUMBER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Starting node number.
6-10 2nd I Starting element number.
Main Index
BOUNDARY 221
Define Boundary Nodes
BOUNDARY Define Boundary Nodes
Description
This allows the coordinates of the boundary nodes to be read in.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the word BOUNDARY.
2nd data block
Boundary node coordinates, one per node; NNO series.
1-5 1st I Boundary node number.
6-15 2nd F First (X or Z) coordinate.
16-25 3rd F Second (Y or R) coordinate.
Main Index
222 SPECIFIED NODES
Specify Node Coordinates
SPECIFIED NODES Specify Node Coordinates
Description
This option allows the coordinates of certain nodes of the generated mesh to be specified.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words SPECIFIED NODES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of nodal points coordinates to be specified,
(maximum 100).
3rd data block
One per specified node.
1-10 1st F First coordinate of a specified nodal point.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of a specified nodal point.
Main Index
MAPPER 223
Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D
MAPPER Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D
Description
This option invokes the MAP2D user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special
Routines) for boundary node coordinate generation or modification. It is used when it is more convenient
to program the boundary node coordinates rather than reading them in.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word MAPPER.
This invokes the MAP2D user subroutine. If the coordinates input on the
BOUNDARY parameter are to be modified, this option must follow the
BOUNDARY parameter.
Main Index
224 CONSTRAINT
Generate Boundary Condition Constraints
CONSTRAINT Generate Boundary Condition Constraints
Description
This feature allows boundary conditions to be generated for a particular degree of freedom for all the
nodal points on one side of a block. At the present time, there is no method available for setting boundary
conditions on those nodes generated via the SYMMETRY option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CONSTRAINT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sides to be constrained.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Number of the block to be constrained.
6-10 2nd I Number of the side to be constrained.
11-15 3rd I Degree of freedom to be constrained.
16-25 4th F Displacement value to be given to the constrained degree of freedom.
Main Index
MERGE (Model Definition) 225
Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes
MERGE (Model Definition) Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes
Description
This allows a minimum distance between nodes to be specified. Any nodes separated by less than the
minimum distance is automatically merged into a single node.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word MERGE.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Separation distance below which nodes are merged together.
Main Index
226 MERGE SELECTIVE
Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block
MERGE SELECTIVE Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block
Description
This option, used in conjunction with the CONNECT option, allows you to define which nodes are to be
merged in mesh blocks that border each other. This is especially useful if gaps are to be defined between
the blocks.
As with the MERGE option, you specify a minimum distance and a list of block numbers in which nodes
are to be merged. Nodes which are separated by less than the minimum distance specified are considered
duplicates, and merged into a single node if they lie within the same or connected blocks. Nodes located
within the specified minimum distance on unconnected blocks (those disconnected using the CONNECT
option) are not merged.
For more information about connecting blocks, see the description of the CONNECT option in
this document.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words MERGE SELECTIVE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data to be used to enter merge distance and
block numbers.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the minimum separation distance.
4th data block
Enter a list of block numbers.
Main Index
CONNECT 227
Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks
CONNECT Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks
Description
This option is used to connect or disconnect two blocks during the generation of the final mesh. Default
is that two blocks are connected if they join the same boundary points in the DEFINE option. It is
especially useful to disconnect two blocks if gaps are to be defined in between the blocks. The MERGE
SELECTIVE option must be used in combination with this option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word CONNECT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of block connections to specify.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of 3rd data block; defaults to data input.
3rd data block
One per continuation.
1-5 1st I First connected block.
6-10 2nd I Second connected block.
11-15 3rd I Set to 0 to connect the two blocks; set to 1 to disconnect the two blocks.
Main Index
228 PRTCONNECT
Print Out Block Connections
PRTCONNECT Print Out Block Connections
Description
This option gives a printout of the current BLOCKS connection information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PRTCONNECT.
Main Index
SYMMETRY 229
Define Axis of Symmetry
SYMMETRY Define Axis of Symmetry
Description
This allows symmetry axes to be defined so that further mesh blocks can be generated by reflection about
the axes. Be sure that enough space is allocated in the BLOCKS option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the word SYMMETRY.
2nd data block
1-5 21st I Number of symmetric axes.
3rd data block
One per symmetry axis.
1-10 1st F First coordinate of a point on the axis of symmetry.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of a point on the axis of symmetry.
21-30 3rd F First component of a vector along the axis of symmetry.
31-40 4th F Second component of a vector along the axis of symmetry.
Main Index
230 GENERATE
End of Mesh Generation Data
GENERATE End of Mesh Generation Data
Description
This signifies the end of the mesh generation data and instructs Marc to proceed with the mesh
generation. When the mesh has been generated, Marc proceeds to the next option found in the model
definition options. If you wish to stop without proceeding to plotting or analysis, a blank block should
immediately follow the GENERATE option. This causes Marc to stop on an illegal data exit. Provisions
should be made to save the mesh on permanent file by appropriate control blocks if only mesh generation
is desired.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the word GENERATE.
Main Index
Mesh Definition
Chapt Mesh Definition

er 3: This section describes the geometry input required to describe the object to be analyzed. The finite
Mode element mesh can be generated using MESH2D, Marc Mentat, or some other preprocessor. The element
topology and coordinates can be processed using a variety of options. This final set of connectivity and
l coordinates can be written to an auxiliary file through the WRITE option. Additional geometric quantities
can be input through the GEOMETRY or NODAL THICKNESS options; see Marc Volume B: Element
Defini Library for the data required for particular element types. The ROTATION A option is used to give the axis
tion for the calculation of centrifugal loads. The degrees of freedom associated with nodes can be transformed
from their natural system (see Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition for each particular
Optio element) to a user-defined local system. Kinematic constraints can be imposed between degrees of
freedom using either the TYING or SERVO LINK option. Finally, springs can be defined using the
ns SPRINGS option.
The NEW parameter can be used to specify a change in format.
Main Index
232 NEW (Model Definition)
Use New Format
NEW (Model Definition) Use New Format
Description
This option can be used to switch from input with extended format to the default width or vice-versa.
Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW option is encountered. This option
must not appear embedded inside any model definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input. This
overrides the EXTENDED parameter.
Main Index
DEFINE (Sets) 233
Define Sets
DEFINE (Sets) Define Sets
Description
This option allows you to define a setname and to associate members to the set. These sets can be used
wherever a list of items is requested. Multiple numbers of sets can be used by repeating this model
definition block. In defining the members of a set, any of the conventions in the Input of List Items in
Chapter 1 Introduction can be used. A previously defined set can be used to describe a set. If the input
version is 10 or greater, the set can be 32 characters in length.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word DEFINE.
The rest of this data block is free format beginning with the third field.
11-20 2nd A Enter the type of set:
ELEMENT – set of elements
ELSQ – set of elements (unsorted)
NODE – set of nodes
NDSQ – set of nodes (unsorted)
INT – set of integration points
LAYER – set of beam or shell layers
DOF – set of degrees of freedom (unsorted)
INCS – set of increment numbers
POINT – set of points
CURVE – set of curves
SURFACE – set of surfaces
BODY – set of body numbers
EDGE – set of element: edge pairs
FACE – set of element: face pairs
EDGEMT – set of element: edge pairs. Edge number given using
Marc Mentat convention.
FACEMT – set of element: face pairs. Face number given using Marc
Mentat convention.
Main Index
234 DEFINE (Sets)
Define Sets
Format
Data
ORNSUR – set of surface: orientation, where the orientation is given
in Marc convention
1 – top surface
2 – bottom surface.
ORNCUR – set of curve: orientation, where the orientation is given in
Marc convention:
1– top surface
MNORSU – set of surface: orientation, where the orientation is given
in Marc Mentat convention:
0 – top surface
MNORCU – set of curve: orientation, where the orientation is given in
Marc Mentat convention:
0 – top surface
ELNODE – set of element relative_node pairs. For example,
relative_node is 1 or 2 for 2-node beam element.
21-30 3rd A Enter the word SET. (This is optional.)
Enter the word OSET for an open set (see Note 4).
31-62 4th A Enter the name of the set.
2nd data block
1-80 1st Enter a list of items that are of the type defined to be members of the set
whose name is given.
Notes: (1) A setname cannot be used in a list unless it has been previously defined.
(2) For unsorted set types DOF, ELSQ, and NDSQ, the verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT
cannot be used in the list of items.
(3) EDGE, EDGEMT, FACE, FACEMT, ORNSUR, MNORSU, ORNCUR, MNORCU can only be
used with the table input format.
(4) When an open set is requested, nodes or elements not defined elsewhere are not
automatically created.
Main Index
DEFINE (Sets) 235
Define Sets
Example
The example below defines a set to be called WALL consisting of nodes 1, 3, 5, 7, …19.
DEFINE NODE SET WALL
1 TO 20 BY 2
The example below defines a set to be called LOADIT consisting of edge 2 of elements 1, 3, 5, 7, ... 19.
DEFINE EDGE SET LOADIT
1:2 TO 20:2 BY 2
Main Index
236 CONNECTIVITY
Specify Element Connectivity
CONNECTIVITY Specify Element Connectivity
Description
This series gives the element connectivity; for example, the nodal points for each element. Data can be
input from data or an external file by exercising the appropriate option. For two-dimensional elements,
the nodal points must be given in a counterclockwise sequence. Several blocks of connectivity data can
be input. For example, one block can be read in from file while additional ones are read from data blocks,
each block starting with the word CONNECTIVITY.
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the element type (second field, 3rd data block) should be a stress
type element if both a structural and thermal analysis is required. If a heat transfer element type is given,
the element is considered rigid in the stress analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the word CONNECTIVITY.
In many cases, when the whole mesh is in a file, just CONNECTIVITY and a blank should be included
here and the INPUT TAPE parameter must be used.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of elements to be read in this option (optional); defaults to total
number of elements in the mesh.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of connectivity; defaults to unit number
specified on the INPUT TAPE parameter.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printing of element connectivity list during
this option.
3rd data block
Element connectivity array. This data block is repeated once for each element given in data block 2.
1-5 1st I Element number.
6-10 2nd I Element type or alias (see ALIAS parameter).
11-15 3rd I Nodal point.
Main Index
CONNECTIVITY 237
Specify Element Connectivity
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Nodal point.
21-25 I Repeat until all nodes of the element have been defined. The required
ordering of the nodes is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Continuation for elements with more than 14 nodes/element (for example,
library element 21, 35, 57, etc.) is in format 16I5.
Main Index
238 CONN FILL
Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator
CONN FILL Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator
Description
This option completes the filling of connectivity lists by generating midside nodes in between the corner
nodes provided. At the same time, it generates coordinates for the new node created. The coordinates are
formed by averaging the coordinates of the end nodes of the respective side on the connectivity list. It is
used for converting linear displacement elements to quadratic displacement elements. The option works
for 4-node quadrilaterals and 8-node bricks. You must remember to turn on the bandwidth optimization
option after using this option and before an analysis.
Note: This does not calculate the coordinates correctly if going from element 4 to element 22
or 24.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words CONN FILL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the starting node number for the midside nodes.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to set the node count to the maximum node number used in
this option.
11-15 3rd I Give the start of the element list for this option.
Default is 1.
16-20 4th I Give the end of the element list for this option. Default is number of
elements specified in the analysis.
Main Index
CONN GENER 239
Copy Element Connectivity Data
CONN GENER Copy Element Connectivity Data
Description
This input performs the function of an incremental mesh generator by copying the pattern of the
connectivity data for previously defined elements. If the new elements are to be connected to the
master elements, a common node A needs to be given. The position of node A in the connectivity list of
the new element and its position in the connectivity list of the master element needs to be given. Marc
then numbers all the other nodes in the new element by making the algebraic difference between the
numbers of all the nodes in the new element the same as that of the corresponding nodes in the element
being copied.
This option copies the connectivity from a series of elements defined by a starting and end element
number and uses it to calculate the connectivity for a new series of elements. The new series of elements
is defined by the input of a starting and end element number. When the list of the elements being copied
from is ended, the recently generated elements will take its place as the elements to be copied from. This
is repeated until the list defined for the new elements is exhausted.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words CONN GENER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of the first element for which the connectivity is being generated.
6-10 2nd I Number of the last element for which the connectivity is being generated.
All the elements between the first and last element will be generated.
11-15 3rd I Number of the first element used as a master.
16-20 4th I Number of the last element used as a master.
21-25 5th I Give the position of node A in the connectivity list of the generated
element. Node A can belong to a master element. If there is no common
node between the generated and the master elements, enter 1.
26-30 6th I Give the position of node A in the connectivity list of the master element.
If there is no common node, enter 1.
Main Index
240 CONN GENER
Copy Element Connectivity Data
Format
Data
31-35 7th I Enter 1 for decrease of 1 element per series of master elements.
Enter 2 for decrease of 2 elements per series of master elements. The two
element decrease is restricted to use with three-node triangular elements.
36-40 8th I This entry is only required if there is no common node between the
generated and master elements. This defines an increment to each of the
nodes in the master element which then gives the connectivity list of the
generated element.
Main Index
UFCONN 241
Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine
UFCONN Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine
Description
This option calls the UFCONN user subroutine to generate or modify element connectivity (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.) The option can be repeated as often as necessary.
This option must follow the CONNECTIVITY option.
Format
Format
Dat
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word UFCONN.
2nd data block
Enter a list of elements for which the UFCONN user subroutine is called.
Main Index
242 COORDINATES
Enter Node Coordinates
COORDINATES Enter Node Coordinates
Description
This option defines the coordinates of each nodal point. The nodal data can be input in several blocks.
The latest data input for a particular nodal point is used. Like the element connectivity data, this data can
be input from an external file since this coordinate data can be automatically generated by a mesh
generator. Local corrections can be made to the generated mesh by input of the modified nodal
coordinates from data blocks.
Usually for the general shell elements (4, 8, and 24), the FXORD option and the UFXORD user subroutine
can help with input of coordinates.
In Marc, the nodes need not be numbered sequentially.
In most cases, when all the coordinates are input by file, just the coordinates and a blank are required here
and the INPUT TAPE parameter must be used.
If the COORD SYSTEM, CYLINDRICAL, or FXORD options are used, the coordinate positions entered
here are with respect to coordinate system entered in these options.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the word COORDINATES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the maximum number of coordinate directions to be read in per
node; defaults to the number of coordinates per node. Repeated
COORDINATES blocks need not have the same value in this field.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of nodal points read-in in this option; (optional) default
to the number of nodes in the mesh.
11-15 3rd I Enter the unit number for input of coordinates; defaults to the file number
specified on the INPUT TAPE parameter.
16-20 4th I Set to 1 to suppress print-out of nodal coordinate list during this
option input.
3rd data block
One data line per nodal point.
1-5 1st I Nodal point number.
6-15 2nd F Coordinate 1.
16-25 3rd F Coordinate 2.
Main Index
COORDINATES 243
Enter Node Coordinates
Format
Data
26-35 4th F Coordinate 3.
Etc. Etc. See library element description in Marc Volume B: Element Library for the
definition of coordinates for a particular element.
Input 6 coordinates per data line; continuation data lines in format 6E10.5.
Main Index
244 INCLUDE (Model Definition)
INCLUDE (Model Definition) Insert File into the Input File
Discription
file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited to
240 characters.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
case sensitive and blanks should not be included in the name.
Main Index
FXORD 245
Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates
FXORD Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates
SHELL COORDINATE GENERATION OPTION
Description
This option is used to generate coordinates for Elements 4, 8, or 24. (Refer to Marc Volume B: Element
Library and Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for further information on the use of this
block). This can be used for mapping of certain types of standard shell geometries such as cylinders,
spheres, etc. It can also be used to transform cylindrical coordinates into Cartesian coordinates.
The CYLINDRICAL or COORD SYSTEM options are more powerful for cylindrical coordinates.
Note that when a continuous surface has a line of discontinuity in φ1 or φ 2 (the surface coordinate) such
as a complete cylinder has at φ = 0° and 360°, two nodes must be placed at each nodal location on the
line to allow the distinct coordinate input, and tying type 100 used to join degrees of freedom. In general,
different surfaces coming together must also use the intersecting shell tyings.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word FXORD.
11-12 2nd A Enter the word NO if coordinates after FXORD are not to be printed out.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of shell geometry specifications to be input.
Data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 are provided once for each consecutive series of nodes with a different shell
geometry specification.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Identification number of surface type. See Table 3-1 and Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information.
6-10 2nd I First node of this series.
11-15 3rd I Last node of this series.
16-20 4th I Set to 1 if local (x,y,z) set in which surface is defined must be transformed
to the global (x,y,z) set. If so, data blocks 4, 5 and 6 must be input to define
the transformation. If not, data blocks 4, 5 and 6 are omitted.
4th data block
Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of the origin of the local (x,y,z) system in which the shell surface
is generated.
Main Index
246 FXORD
Format
Data
1-10 1st F Global x-coordinate origin.
11-20 2nd F Global y-coordinate origin.
21-30 3rd F Global z-coordinate origin.
5th data block
Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on the positive x-axis of the local system.
1-10 1st F Global x-coordinate of the point.
11-20 2nd F Global y-coordinate of the point.
21-30 3rd F Global z-coordinate of the point.
6th data block
Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on, or near to, the positive y-axis of the local system. This
point defines the local (x,y) plane in the global system.
1-10 1st F Global x-coordinate of the point.
11-20 2nd F Global y-coordinate of the point.
21-30 3rd F Global z-coordinate of the point.
Table 3-1 describes the ϕ1, ϕ2 directions for the FXORD option contained in Marc.
Table 3-1 Input to FXORD

Nodal Data Input Surface
(See Marc Volume A: Coordinates Non-
Input User Information used in Cartesian
Code Surface All units are length measure, program Coordinate
Type Description unless specified otherwise (θ1, θ2) s
0 General Surface All 11 Coords. for El. 8 θ1, θ2, YES
All 14 Coords. for El. 4 first two input
1 Surface ∂x 3 ∂x 3 ∂ x 3
2 x1, x2 YES
x 1, x 2, x 3, -------- , -------- , -----------------
∂x 1 ∂x 2 ∂x 1 ∂x 2
x3=x3(x1, x2)
(last coordinate only needed for
element type 4)
2 Axisymmetric shell ∂R : θ, φ YES
θ, φ, R, -------
∂φ (in radians)
(about x3 axis)
dR l en gt h
------- in -------------------- uni t s
dφ ra d ia ns
Main Index
FXORD 247
Table 3-1 Input to FXORD

Nodal Data Input Surface
(See Marc Volume A: Coordinates Non-
Input User Information used in Cartesian
Code Surface All units are length measure, program Coordinate
Type Description unless specified otherwise (θ1, θ2) s
3 General Cylinder dx 1 dx 2 s, x3 NO
s, x 3, x 1, x 2, -------- , --------
ds ds
4 Circular Cylinder q, x3, R: θ in degrees R, θ, x3 NO

(R, θ in length
(about x3 axis) R at 1st node only measure)
5 Flat Plate x3=0 x 1, x 2 x1, x2 NO
6 Curved Pipe θ, φ, r, R: θ, φ in degrees r, θ, R, φ YES
r and R at 1st node only (both in length
(elbow) measure)
7 Cylindrical r, θ, x3 x1, x2, x3 NO
8 Spherical r, θ, φ x1, x2, x3 NO
Main Index
248 NODE CIRCLE
Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs
NODE CIRCLE Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs
Description
This option generates the coordinates of a series of nodes which lie on a circular arc. The coordinates of
the first node on the arc must be previously given. The circle must lie in the x-y plane.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NODE CIRCLE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Node number of the first node on the arc.
6-10 2nd I Total number of nodes on arc.
11-15 3rd I First increment in series of node numbers to be generated.
16-20 4th I Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of
the second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is
used for 8 node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is
entered in this field.
21-25 5th I Scaling of angle between each pair of nodes as a percentage. A default of
100 percent is used.
26-35 6th F Number of degrees between the first pair of nodes.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F First coordinate of the center of the circle.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of the center of the circle.
Main Index
NODE FILL 249
Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation
NODE FILL Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation
Description
This option performs the function of an incremental mesh generator for nodes. It achieves this by
interpolation. In its simplest form, it takes the coordinates defined by two end nodes and divides the line
between them into a specified number of equally spaced nodes. Additional data can be input to vary the
distances between the generated nodes in a geometric ratio. This option is often used with the UFXORD
user subroutine to obtain a warped curve in space.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NODE FILL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of the first node in the series. The coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.
6-10 2nd I Number of the last node in the series. The coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.
11-15 3rd I Node number increments to be taken in the above list.
16-20 4th I Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of the
second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is used for
8-node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is entered in this
field.
21-25 5th I Scaling of the distances between successive nodes as a percentage. A
default of 100 percent is used.
26-30 6th I Number of times that the series will be repeated. You should ensure that
all starting and ending nodes in the series have been defined previously.
This repeat feature defaults to 1 series.
31-35 7th I Print flag is set equal to 1, nodal coordinate printout is omitted. If set equal
to 2, only the generated coordinates are printed. If set equal to 0 or left
blank, all coordinates are printed.
36-40 8th I Increment in first and last nodes in the series if the series is repeated more
than once. Defaults so that the next series will start from the node after the
last node in the preceding series.
Main Index
250 NODE GENER
Generate Node Coordinates
NODE GENER Generate Node Coordinates
Description
This option performs the function of an incremental mesh generator for nodes. It is used when elements
such as the quadratic 8-node elements require different spacing in successive nodal rows. It achieves this
by using a list of nodes as the master pattern. It then creates a new set of nodes by giving the new set of
nodes the same coordinate spacing as the list of nodes. Additional optional data allows the spacing to be
changed as a percentage of the spacing between the nodes. When the list of nodes is used up, the newly
generated nodes takes its place on the list and the process is repeated until the number of nodes to be
generated has been completed.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NODE GENER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of the first node for which coordinates are being generated. This
coordinate data for this node must have been previously defined).
6-10 2nd I Number of the last node in the series. (This coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.)
11-15 3rd I Number of the first node used as a master.
16-20 4th I Number of the last node used as a master.
21-25 5th I Increment in the node numbers of the two node series above. A default
value of 1 is used.
26-30 6th I Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of the
second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is used for
8-node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is entered in this
field.
31-35 7th I Scaling of distance between each pair of nodes as a percentage. A default
of 100 percent is used.
36-40 8th I Enter 1 for decrease of 1 node per series of master nodes. Default is 0.
Enter 2 for a decrease of 2 nodes per series.
41-45 9th I Print flag if set equal to 1, nodal coordinate printout is omitted.
If set equal to 2, only the generated coordinates are printed.
If set equal to 0 or left blank, all coordinates are printed.
Main Index
NODE MERGE 251
Merge Duplicate Nodes
NODE MERGE Merge Duplicate Nodes
Description
This option searches through all the nodes and merges all nodes which are closer to each other than a
minimum-specified distance. The default minimum distance is 0.001
The merge provision only alters the node numbers defined by the COORDINATES and CONNECTIVITY
options. Loading and boundary conditions must be applied to the new node numbers after nodal merge.
The node merge command cannot be used with shells or beam elements.
The WRITE option can be used to save the new mesh.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NODE MERGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 to set the node count to the minimum number found after the use
of this option.
6-10 2nd I Set to starting node number or nodal merge.
Default is 1.
11-15 3rd I Set to last node number for nodal merge. Default to total number of nodes
specified in SIZING parameter.
16-25 4th F Separation distance below which nodes will be merged together.
26-30 5th I Set to 1 to suppress printout of new connectivity.
Main Index
252 UFXORD
Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine
UFXORD Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine
Description
This block invokes the call to the UFXORD user subroutine to generate or modify nodal coordinates (see
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines). The block can be repeated as often as
necessary. This option must follow the COORDINATES option.
If the nodes are specified in the CYLINDRICAL or COORD SYSTEM options, the coordinates defined in
the user subroutine are with respect to the local coordinate system.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word UFXORD.
2nd data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the UFXORD user subroutine is called.
Main Index
CYLINDRICAL 253
Define Cylindrical Coordinate System
CYLINDRICAL Define Cylindrical Coordinate System
Description
This option allows for the input of a cylindrical coordinate system such that both the nodal input and
output of a group of nodal points are treated in this cylindrical coordinate system. For nodes listed in this
option, nodal input (that is, COORDINATES, POINT LOAD, FIXED DISP, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL VEL,
etc.) and nodal output (that is, incremental and total displacements, etc.) are to be given in the cylindrical
coordinate system defined here.
Note: All coordinate systems defined with this option are based upon the original model and they
are not updated during the analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CYLINDRICAL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of cylindrical coordinate data (required for this option).
6-10 2nd I Unit number for reading data. Defaults to input deck.
11-15 3rd I Enter nonzero integer to suppress printing of generated rectangular
coordinates and nodal transformations after the END OPTION option.
Repeat data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 once for each data set.
3rd data block – coordinates of origin
1-10 1st F Enter x coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of point
defining origin of cylindrical coordinate system.
11-20 2nd F Enter y coordinate of origin.
21-30 3rd F Enter z coordinate of origin.
4th data block – coordinates of point 1
1-10 1st F Enter x coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of point
such that vector from origin to this point defines the z axis of cylindrical
coordinate system.
11-20 2nd F Enter y coordinate of z axis point.
21-30 3rd F Enter z coordinate of z axis point.
Main Index
254 CYLINDRICAL
Define Cylindrical Coordinate System
Format
Data
Note: If the calculated direction cosines of the local Z-axis are zero,
they are reset to (0., 0., 1.). This is the default for
two-dimensional cylindrical coordinates.
5th data block – coordinates of point 2
1-10 1st F Enter x-coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of a
point such that a vector from the origin to this point defines the axis from
which θ is measured in planes perpendicular to the z-axis.
11-20 2nd F Enter y-coordinate of this point.
21-30 3rd F Enter z-coordinate of this point.
Note: If the calculated direction cosines of the local X-axis are zero,
they are reset to (1., 0., 0.).
ˆ
Z
Point 1
Origin θ ˆ
X Point 2
Y
X
6th data block
Enter a list of nodes using this cylindrical coordinate system. Marc
assumes that the coordinates of these nodes are given in cylindrical
coordinates with respect to the cylindrical axes defined in data blocks 3,
4 and 5. Coordinates are entered as r, theta, z, where theta is in degrees.
Marc also calculates nodal transformations for these nodes such that
all nodal input and output is given with respect to the cylindrical
coordinate system attached to these nodes.
Main Index
WRITE 255
Write Connectivity and Coordinates
WRITE Write Connectivity and Coordinates
Description
This option allows you to write the final connectivity and coordinates to an auxiliary file. The values
written are those after all internal mesh generations (MESH2D, FXORD or incremental generators) and
all external (UFXORD, UFCONN) transformations have been performed. The coordinates are output in
the global system, not in the local coordinate system specified in either the CYLINDRICAL or COORD
SYSTEM options. All node numbers are in the user system; that is, nonoptimized.
Note: The connectivity and coordinates data are written to the auxiliary file in the format (default
or extended) based on the last related valid option (see the EXTENDED parameter as well
as the NEW (model and history definition options).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word WRITE.
11-15 2nd I Enter the unit number to write to. Default is unit 1.
Main Index
256 ADAPTIVE
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis
ADAPTIVE Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis
Description
This model definition set controls the error criteria for local adaptive meshing. The ADAPTIVE parameter
must also be included.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the word ADAPTIVE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of criteria to use.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read data, defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Enter the frequency to perform adaptive meshing, default is
every increment.
16-20 4th I Enter the unit number to which the adaptive mesh data will be written.
21-25 5th I Enter 1 for ignoring attach information when an element edge or face
which is attached to a curve or surface is subdivided. By default, the new
nodes are projected to the curve or surface.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated in pairs for each criteria selected.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the criteria type:
1: Mean Strain Energy
Subdivide element if:
element strain energy > f1 * total strain
energy/NUMEL
f2 to f6 is not used
Main Index
ADAPTIVE 257
Format
Data
2: Zienkiewicz-Zhu Error Criterion
The error norm is defined as
2
π
2
=
∫ ( σ∗ – σ ) dV
----------------------------------------------------------- or
2
∫ σ d V + ∫ ( σ∗ – σ ) d V
2
ϒ
2
=
∫ ( E∗ – E ) dV
-----------------------------------------------------------
2
∫ E dV + ∫ ( E – E∗ ) dV
2
The stress error and strain energy errors are

2 2
X = ∫ ( σ∗ – σ ) dV and Y = ∫ ( E∗ – E ) dV
The allowable element stress error is

AES = f2 * X/NUMEL + f3 * X * f1/π/NUMEL
The allowable element strain energy error is
AEE = f4 * Y/NUMEL + f5 * X * f1/γ/NUMEL
where
NUMEL is the number of elements in the mesh.
If f2, f3, f4, f5 are input as zero, f2 = 1.0.
If stress error testing is to be performed, f1 ≠ 0
and f2 and/or f3 ≠ 0, f4 = 0, f5 = 0.
The element will be subdivided when:
π > f1 and Xel > AES.
If strain energy error testing is to be performed,
f1 ≠ 0 and f2 = 0, f3 = 0, f4 ≠ 0, and/or f5 ≠ 0.
γ > f1 and Yel > AEE
The default is f2 = 1.0 if f2, f3, f4, f5 are input
as 0.0.
It is advisable that f2 + f3 ≈ 1 or f4 + f5 ≈ 1.0.
3: Stress Discontinuity (not yet implemented)
4: Node within Box
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes:
Main Index
258 ADAPTIVE
Format
Data
f1 < x < f2 and f3 < y < f4 and f5 < z < f6
The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be
automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of
the 3rd data block.
-4: Node location within box
Subdivision criteria is the same as Type 4.
If all nodes of element leave the box, the subdivided elements are
merged together.
the 3rd data block.
5: Node in Contact
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes is in contact or
belongs to a segment which is contacted
f1 to f6 are not used, enter 0 or blank
6: Aspect Ratio (not yet implemented)
7: Skewness Ratio (not yet implemented)
8: Thermal Gradient (used for heat transfer and coupled analysis)
gradient > maximum gradient * f1
or gradient > f2
and temperature > f3 (if given)
typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)
9: Equivalent stress, strain
von Mises stress > f1 * maximum von
Mises stress
or
von Mises stress > f2
Equivalent strain > f3 * maximum equivalent strain
Main Index
ADAPTIVE 259
Format
Data
or
Equivalent strain > f4
Equivalent plastic strain > f5 maximum equivalent plastic strain
or
Equivalent plastic strain > f6
Equivalent creep strain > f7*maximum equivalent creep strain
or
Equivalent creep strain > f8.
10: User subroutine UADAP
user/maximum user > f1 or user > f2
user is defined in user subroutine UADAP
11: Previously Defined Mesh
Use the refined mesh from a previous analysis as the starting point
to this analysis.
(see 4th data block).
12. Zienkiewicz-Zhu plastic strain error criterion:
p 2
∫ ( ε * – ε ) dV
p
2
α = -------------------------------------------------------------
p2 p 2
∫ ε dV + ∫ ( ε * –ε ) d V
p
The plastic strain error is:

p 2
∫ (ε
p*
A = – ε ) dV
The allowable element plastic strain error is AEPS = f2 *

A/NUMEL + f3 * A * f1/α/NUMEL
The element will be subdivided when: α > f1 and Ae > AEPS.
Main Index
260 ADAPTIVE
Format
Data
13. Zienkiewicz-Zhu creep strain error criterion:
c 2
∫(ε * – ε ) dV
c
2
β = -------------------------------------------------------------
c2 c 2
∫ ε dV + ∫ ( ε – ε ) dV
c*
The creep strain error is:

c 2
∫(ε
c*
B = – ε ) dV
The allowable element creep strain error is AECS = f2 * B/NUMEL

+ f3 * B * f1/β/NUMEL
β > f1 and Bel > AECS.
14: Pressure Gradient (used only for diffusion analysis)
or gradient > f2
and pressure > f3 (if given)
15: Electrical Potential Gradient (used only for electrostatic analysis)
or gradient > f2
and potential > f3 (if given)
16: Magnetic Potential Gradient (used only for magnetostatic analysis)
or gradient > f2
and potential > f3 (if given)
17. Elements in cutter path. This criterion can only be used for analysis
of NC Machining problems.
Main Index
ADAPTIVE 261
Format
Data
18. Angle between shell elements.
Subdivide element if the change in the angle between neighboring
shell elements is larger than f1.
19: Node location within a Cylindrical Region
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes is in the region
defined by a cylinder:
f1 = radius
f2 = x-coordinate of first point on axis
f3 = y-coordinate of first point on axis
f4 = z-coordinate of first point on axis
f5 = x-coordinate of second point on axis
f6 = y-coordinate of second point on axis
f7 = z-coordinate of second point on axis
the 3rd data block.
-19: Node location within a Cylindrical Region
If all nodes of element leave the cylinder, the subdivided elements
are merged together.
The coordinates of the cylinder may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the cylinder
may be automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th
fields of the 3rd data block.
20: Node location within a Spherical Region
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes:
f1 = radius
f2 = x-coordinate of center
f3 = y-coordinate of center
f4 = z-coordinate of center
Main Index
262 ADAPTIVE
Format
Data
the 3rd data block.
-20: Node location within Spherical Region
If all nodes of element leave the sphere, the subdivided elements
are merged together.
The coordinates of the sphere may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the sphere may
be automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields
of the 3rd data block.
6-10 2nd I Enter the maximum number of levels to adapt an element.
11-15 3rd I Enter 3 for box associated with criteria 4 or -4 to automatically
follow weld pool.
16-20 4th I Enter the weld flux ID specified in the WELD FLUX option.
21-25 5th I Not used.
31-63 7th A Enter the name of the element set that will use this criteria. Default
is to apply the adaptive criteria to all elements.
Fields 3 and 4 are currently only used for the NODE IN BOX criterion in conjunction with a welding
analysis. Weld pool dimensions should be specified in the WELD FLUX option. Box dimensions
specified in the 4th data block below are not used.
4th data block (except for criteria type 11)
1-10 1st E First parameter f1
11-20 2nd E Second parameter f2
21-30 3rd E Third parameter f3
31-40 4th E Fourth parameter f4
41-50 5th E Fifth parameter f5
Main Index
ADAPTIVE 263
Format
Data
51-60 6th E Sixth parameter f6
61-70 7th E Seventh parameter f7
71-80 8th E Eighth parameter f8.
4th data block (criteria type 11)
Include the data file written by the previous analysis (the unit number was specified on the second
data block).
Main Index
264 ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)
Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing
ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Definition)
Description
This model definition set provides control parameters used for the global remeshing. The REZONING
parameter must also be included in the parameter section.
The ADAPT GLOBAL model definition option can also be used to support boundary conditions assigned
to the remeshing body for 2-D, 3-D solid (tetrahedral) and 3-D shell. When applying boundary
conditions, the new table style input format is preferred.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the words ADAPT GLOBAL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of bodies to be remeshed.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read data; defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Not used.
The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated as a set for each body to be remeshed.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 2 for Advancing Front 2-D quad or mixed mesher.
Enter 3 for Delaunay 2-D mesher.
Enter 4 for 2-D Overlay mesher.
Enter 5 for 3-D Overlay Hexahedral mesher.
Enter 6 for Delaunay 3-D tetrahedral mesher.
Enter 7 for Relax mesh generator.
Enter 8 for Stretch mesh generator.
Enter 9 for Shave mesh generator.
Enter 10 for quadtree mesher. (FEMUTEC externally supplied)
Enter 11 for MD Patran 3-D tetrahedral meshers.
Enter 12 for triangular shell mesh generator.
Enter 18 for reading new mesh from .mesh file.
Note: jobid_b*.mesh file name is expected where * is the
remeshing body number and jobid is the job name.
Main Index
ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) 265
Format
Data
Enter 19 for quadrilateral shell mesh generator.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to remesh body (default).
Enter 2 if first relax mesh; if that fails, do full remeshing.
Enter 3 if relax mesh only.
11-15 3rd I Enter the body to be remeshed (default = 1).
16-20 4th I Enter the element type; default is to previous element type.
Note: This element type must also be specified on the
ELEMENTS parameter.
21-25 5th I Enter the number of criteria.
26-30 6h I Not used; enter 0.
31-35 7th I Echo mode for Overlay Hexahedral Meshing
0 Default; no message print out.
1 Some message print out.
100 Prints out more messages and saves all the meshing input files. For
details about these files, see Appendix I: 3-D Remeshing Files.
Repeat the 4th block for each criteria (5th field, 3rd data block).
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1 if increment frequency is used.
Enter 2 if element distortion is used (2-D only).
Enter 3 if angle based.
Enter 4 if aspect ratio based.
Enter 5 if strain change.
Enter 6 if penetration based.
Enter 7 if force remeshing at next opportunity.
Enter 8 if recession distance based.
6-10 2nd I Enter the frequency in increments if criteria 1.
11-20 3rd E For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle
for quadrilaterals. Default is 40°. The reference angle is the angle of the
current mesh without deformation. For 3-D analysis, enter minimum
volume ratio for hexahedral element. Default is 0.1.
For criteria 4, enter the maximum aspect ratio allowed. Default is 10.0.
For criteria 5, enter maximum change of equivalent strain allowed before
remeshing occurs.
Main Index
Format
Data
Default is 0.4.
For criteria 6, enter the penetration limit; default is 2*contact tolerance.
For criteria 8, enter the maximum element side reduction fraction before
remeshing occurs.
If current length divided by the original length < tolerance, remeshing
will occur.
21-30 4th E For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle
for triangles. Default is 40°. The reference angle is the angle of the current
mesh without deformation.
For 3-D analysis, enter minimum volume ratio for tetrahedral element.
Default is 0.1.
For criteria 8, enter the total amount of recession before remeshing occurs.
5th data block (Two-dimensional Advancing Front All Quadrilateral or Mixed Mesher)
Mesher type = 2
1-5 1st I Enter 0 for all quadrilateral mesh.
Enter 1 for mixed quadrilateral/triangular mesh.
Enter 2 for all triangular mesh.
6-15 2nd E Enter the target element size.
16-25 3rd E Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments. (Default = 120°)
26-30 4th I Target number of elements after remeshing; default means no such
control.
If both the 2nd and 4th fields are default, the number of elements in the
previous mesh are used.
31-35 5th I Curvature outline control.
Enter number of divisions of line segments to fit a curvature circle.
Default = 36.
Enter -1 to obtain uniform outline points.
36-45 6th E Outline smoothing ratio range 0 - 1.0; default = 0.8.
46-55 7th E Minimum target element size; default = 1/3*target element size.
56-65 8th E Percentage of change allowed for the new number of elements created.
Default means no such control. Total of five remeshing trials will be used
to create the mesh to meet the requirement. Not to be used for the
remeshing with the automatic stop-and-restart option.
66-75 9th E Not used; enter 0.
76-80 10th I Number of local refinement boxes.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block (Two-dimensional Delaunay Triangular Mesher) Mesher type = 3
1-5 1st I Not used; enter 0.
16-25 3rd E Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments (default 120°).
control.
Default = 36.
36-45 6th E Outline smoothing ratio range 0-1.0; default = 0.8.
5th data block (Two-dimensional Overlay Quadrilateral Mesher) Mesher type = 4
1-10 1st E Enter the element target length.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined one level
if necessary.
Enter 2 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined two levels
if necessary.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 if elements in the interior can be merged together. Four elements
at a time will be merged.
control.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block (Three-dimensional Delaunay Tetrahedral Mesher) Mesher type = 6
1-10 1st E Enter target atom size (A).
11-20 2nd E Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0).
A value of 1 means that all element edges between elements not in the
same plane will be considered a hard edge.
21-30 3rd E Minimum edge length.
31-40 4th E Minimum edge angle.
41-50 5th E Gap distance.
56-60 7th I Enter 1 for volume control.
5th data block (Relax Mesh Generator) Mesher type = 7
1-5 1st I Enter the number of relaxes to be performed.
6-10 2nd I Enter the global direction to relax in, default is all directions.
11-20 3rd E Enter the sweep distance, nodes closer than this distance will be swept
together.
5th data block (Stretch Generator) Mesher type = 8
1-5 1st I Enter the first corner node number, if zero, then the second field gives the
streamline region that is used to define the stretching orientation.
6-10 2nd I Enter the node increment in first direction, or the streamline
region number.
11-15 3rd I Enter number of nodes in first direction.
Enter the contact body which if nodes contact, they should not be
adjusted, if zero all nodes will be adjusted.
16-20 4th I Enter the node increment in second direction.
21-25 5th I Enter the number of nodes in second direction.
26-30 6th I Enter the node increment in third direction (3-D only).
31-35 7th I Enter the number of nodes in third direction (3-D only).
5th data block (Shave Mesh Generator) Mesher type = 9
This 5th data block is not required.
5th data block (Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher) Mesher type = 11
1-10 1st E Enter target element edge length.
11-20 2nd E Minimum element edge length; default 1/3 of the element edge length.
21-30 3rd E Feature vertex angle; default 100°.
Main Index
Format
Data
31-40 4th E Feature edge angle; default 60°.
41-50 5th E Interior coarsening factor; default 1.5 times.
51-55 6th I Number of local refinement boxes; default = 0.
56-60 7th I Enter 1 for volume control; default = 1.
61-65 8th I Curvature refinement control. Enter number of division to fit a curvature
cycle. Default = 0 (no such control).
66-70 9th I Enter number of elements in the target mesh.
Default = 0 (no such control).
71-80 10th E Enter maximum element edge length.
Default = 3*element edge length.
5th data block (Three-dimensional Triangular Shell Mesher) Mesher type = 12
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block (Reading .mesh file) Mesher type = 18
1-10 1st I Enter mesh file type. Default = 3.
Enter 1 for mesh file in .t18 format
Enter 2 for mesh file in .feb format
Enter 3 for mesh file in .dat format (Marc input format)
5th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher) Mesher type = 5
1-10 1st E Enter target atom size (Ax). For cylindrical grid, Ar.
11-20 2nd E Enter target atom size (Ay). For cylindrical grid, AË.
21-30 3rd E Enter target atom size (Az).
31-40 4th E Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0). A value of 1 means
that all element edges between elements not in the same plane will be
considered a hard edge.
41-50 5th E Minimum edge length. If an edge length is less than this value, it will not
be considered as a hard edge.
51-60 6th E Minimum edge angle. If the angle between element faces is less than this
value, the common edge will not be considered as a hard edge.
71-75 8th I The template file name is specified on the 9th data block.
Enter 1 if grid-based template
Enter 2 if mesh-based template.
Enter 3 if kernel-based template.
6th data block (Two-dimensional Advancing Front or Delaunay Mesher [If refinement boxes
are used])
Repeat for each box (6th field, 5th data block)
1-5 1st I Enter refinement level.
6-10 2nd I Enter the refinement type:
0 = refinement in box.
Main Index
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Body ID 1. if not zero, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.
16-20 4th I Body ID 2. if not zero, corner 2 will be attached to this rigid body.
21-30 5th F Enter x coordinate of corner 1.
31-40 6th F Enter y coordinate of corner 1.
6th data block (Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher [If refinement boxes
are used])
11-15 3rd I Body ID 1. If not 0, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.
16-20 4th I Body ID 2. If not 0, corner 2 will be attached to this rigid body.
41-50 7th F Enter z coordinate of corner 1.
6th data block (Two-dimensional Quadtree Mesher or 3-D Hexahedral Mesher)
1-5 1st I Number of boxes used for element refinement; entered on 10th series.
6-10 2nd I Enter number of levels to coarsen (merge) the interior elements.
26-30 6th I Enter 0 for no wedge elements
Enter 1 to allow wedge elements.
Enter to split hexahedral elements.
31-35 7th I Enter 1 to perform shuffle after mesh is snapped to contact surface
(default).
Enter 2 to avoid shuffle.
Main Index
Format
Data
36-40 8th I Enter 1 for Coons projection in meshing phase. This improves the
accuracy, but increases the cost.
41-45 9th I Number of shakes. Default is 10.
46-50 10th I Number of tries. Default is 5.
51-55 11th I Type of enhancement.
56-60 12th I Edge detection:
Enter 0 to detect new edges and use contact data.
Enter 1 to use contact data only.
Enter 2 to detect new edges.
Enter 3 to not use edge information.
Enter 4 to use previously detected edges, new edges, and contact
information.
Enter 5 to use contact data and previous edges.
Enter 6 to use user edges previously detected and new edges.
Enter 7 to use previous edge information only.
7th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only)
1-5 1st I Grid type:
Enter 1 for Cartesian (default).
Enter 2 for cylindrical.
Enter 3 for user defined.
6-10 2nd I For cylindrical grid:
Enter 1 for axis aligned with x-direction.
Enter 2 for axis aligned with y-direction.
Enter 3 for axis aligned with z-direction.
11-15 3rd I Maximum allowed refinement levels.
16-20 4th I First user-defined integer parameter.
21-25 5th I Second user-defined integer parameter.
26-30 6th I Third user-defined integer parameter.
8th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only [Version 11 only])
1-10 1st F For cylindrical grid, enter the angle of the part.
11-20 2nd F Enter the geometric refinement tolerance.
21-30 3rd F Enter the surface curvature tolerance.
Main Index
Format
Data
31-40 4th F First user-defined real parameter.
41-50 5th F Second user-defined real parameter.
51-60 6th F Third user-defined real parameter.
9th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only and Template-based
Mesh Requested)
1-32 1st A Enter the template name.
10th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used])
One can either specify that refinement is in a box based upon coordinate positions or between
two bodies.
Repeat for each box (1st field, 6th data block)
1-5 1st I Enter the refinement level.
0 = refinement in the box.
1 = minimum number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
2 = minimum number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
3 = minimum number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
4 = exact number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
5 = exact number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
6 = exact number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
11-15 3rd I Body ID 1. If refinement is in the box, corner 1 is attached to this
rigid body
16-20 4th I Body ID 2. If refinement is in the box, corner 2 is attached to this
rigid body
Main Index
274 POINTS
Define Geometric Points
POINTS Define Geometric Points
Description
These geometrical entities are used with the ADAPTIVE, ADAPT GLOBAL, or for prescribing boundary
conditions. Finite elements entities are associated with these geometric entities using the ATTACH NODE
options. The use of POINTS with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPT GLOBAL, ATTACH NODE
If a node is attached to a point entity, then this point is considered a hard point. Upon remeshing,
a new node will always be located at this point. This facilitates the application of fixed
displacements, point loads, etc.
2. ATTACH NODE and all nodal based boundary conditions
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the point,
then all nodes attached to the point will have the boundary condition applied.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word POINTS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of points to be defined.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read geometric information, defaults to input.
3rd data block (Repeat for each point)
1-5 1st I Point identifier
6-15 2nd E X-coordinate of point.
16-25 3rd E Y-coordinate of point.
26-35 4th E Z-coordinate of point.
Main Index
CURVES 275
Define Geometric Curves
CURVES Define Geometric Curves
Description
or ATTACH EDGE options. The use of CURVES with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPTIVE, ATTACH NODE, ATTACH EDGE, ELASTIC
If the nodes of an element edge (2-D) are attached to a curve then if this element is subdivided,
the newly created node will be placed on the curve. If ATTACH NODE or ATTACH EDGE are not
used, the newly created nodes are placed midway between the original nodes of this edge (face).
2. ATTACH EDGE and all boundary condition options
Distributed loads, foundations, and films may be applied to curves. All finite elements that have
edges attached to these curves will be appropriately loaded.
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the curve,
then all nodes that are attached to the curve will have the boundary condition applied.
4. ADAPT GLOBAL
If boundary conditions are applied to a curve, then, when a new mesh is created using ADAPT
GLOBAL, the edges are reattached to the curves automatically and the boundary conditions are
correctly applied.
5. CAVITY
The CAVITY option may use curves defined here as symmetry surfaces.
You can either directly enter the coordinates/dimensions of the curves or define geometric point entities
and then reference these point entities using negative curve types. In the following pages, this is called
relational input and is available for 2-D Polylines, Circular Arc, Circle, 2-D NURBS (internally
generated). This is the preferred input style.
Orientation
A curve has an orientation associated with it. This has three consequences:
1. If a table has an independent value of arc length and elements are attached to this curve. The
arc length is a monotonically increasing function which has a value of zero at the beginning of
the curve.
Main Index
276 CURVES
2. If an axisymmetric shell or 2-D beam is attached to the curve, and a distributed boundary
condition is applied to the curve, then
for mechanical loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is in the direction opposite to the normal,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is in the direction of the normal.
for thermal loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is a flux added to the first degree of freedom,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is a flux added to the last degree of freedom.
3. A radiating cavity has an orientation based upon the normal to the surface.
The normal to a curve is based upon the right-hand rule relative to the direction of the curve.
When specifying the top and bottom surfaces of a curve, the following format is used in the ATTACH
EDGE, DIST LOADS, FILMS, FOUNDATION, EMISSIVITY, and CAVITY options.
Marc Mentat
top 1 0
bottom 2 1
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word CURVES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of curves to be defined.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read geometric information; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Curve identifier
6-10 2nd I Enter the curve type:
1: 3-D Polyline
2: 2-D Circular Arc
3: 2-D Circle
4: 2-D NURBS Curve (full description)
Main Index
CURVES 277
Format
Data
5: 2-D NURBS Curve (internally generate)
6: 3-D Trimming Curve
If the curve type is a negative number, it uses relational input format.
A. CURVE TYPE 1 FOR 3-D POLYLINE
For nonrelational input, use data block series 4a and 5a. For relational input, use data block 4b.
4a data block
1-5 1st I Number of points on polyline.
5a data block (nonrelational input)
Enter the coordinate points, one per line.
1-10 1st E X-coordinate.
11-20 2nd E Y-coordinate.
21-30 3rd E Z-coordinate.
5b data block (relational input)
Enter a list of point identifiers making up the polyline.
B. CURVE TYPE 2 FOR 2-D CIRCULAR ARC (in x-y plane)
1-10 1st E X-coordinate of starting point.
11-20 2nd E Y-coordinate of starting point.
21-30 3rd E X-coordinate of ending point.
31-30 4th E Y-coordinate of ending point.
41-50 5th E X-coordinate of center.
51-60 6th E Y-coordinate of center.
61-70 7th E Radius.
1-5 1st I Enter point identifier of starting point.
6-10 2nd I Enter point identifier of ending point.
11-15 3rd I Enter point identifier of center.
C. CURVE TYPE 3 FOR 2-D CIRCLE (in x-y plane)
1-10 1st E X-coordinate of center.
11-20 2nd E Y-coordinate of center.
21-30 3rd E Radius.
Main Index
278 CURVES
Format
Data
1-5 1st I Enter point identifier of center.
6-10 2nd I Enter point identifier of point whose first coordinate is the radius.
D. CURVE TYPE 4 FOR 2-D NURBS - FULL DESCRIPTION
4th data block
1-5 1st I Number of control points (NPU).
6-10 2nd I Order of NURBS (NOU).
5th data block
Enter NPU homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
Enter the physical coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (3 coordinates). There should
be NPU lines.
1-10 1st E X-coordinate of control point.
11-20 2nd E Y-coordinate of control point.
21-30 3rd E Z-coordinate of control point.
Enter NPU point identifiers in I5 format (16 per line); use as many lines as necessary.
E. CURVE TYPE 5 FOR 2-D NURBS - INTERNALLY GENERATED
For nonrelational input, use data block series 4a and 5a. For relational input, use data block 4b
4a data block
1-5 1st I Number of control points (NPU); minimum number is four.
5a data block
Enter the physical coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (3 coordinates). There should
be NPU lines.
4b data block
Enter a list of control point identifiers; minimum number is four.
Main Index
CURVES 279
Format
Data
F. CURVE TYPE 6 FOR 3-D TRIMMNG CURVE
4th data block
1-5 1st I Number of control points (NPU).
6-10 2nd I Order of NURBS (NOU).
5th data block
Enter NPU homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
Enter the physical parametric and coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (5 coordinates).
There should be NPU lines.
30-40 4th E Enter first parametric coordinate with respect to the surface that this curve
trims.
41-50 5th E Enter second parametric coordinate.
For point identifiers and parametric coordinates with respect to the surface that this curve trims. There
should be NPU lines.
1-5 1st I Enter point identifier.
6-15 2nd E Enter first parametric coordinate with respect to the surface that this
curve trims.
Main Index
280 SURFACES
Define Geometrical Surfaces
SURFACES Define Geometrical Surfaces
Description
or ATTACH FACE options. The use of CURVES with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPTIVE, ATTACH NODE, ATTACH FACE, ELASTIC
If the nodes of an element face (3-D) are attached to a surface then if this element is subdivided,
the newly created node will be placed on the surface. If ATTACH NODE or ATTACH FACE are
not used, the newly created nodes are placed midway between the original nodes of this face.
2. ATTACH FACE and all boundary condition options
Distributed loads, foundations, and films may be applied to surfaces. All finite elements that have
faces attached to these surfaces will be appropriately loaded.
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the surface,
then all nodes that are attached to the surface will have the boundary condition applied.
4. The CAVITY option may use surfaces defined here to define symmetry surfaces.
You can either directly enter the coordinates/dimensions of the surfaces or define geometric point entities
and then reference these point entities, use negative surface types. In the following pages, this is called
relational input and is available for Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, 3-D NURBS (internally generated), and
Polysurface. This is the preferred input style.
Orientation
A curve has an orientation associated with it. This has three consequences:
1. If a table has an independent value of arc length and elements are attached to this curve. The arc
length is a monotonically increasing function which has a value of zero at the beginning of the
curve.
2. If an axisymmetric shell or 2-D beam is attached to the curve, and a distributed boundary
condition is applied to the curve, then
for mechanical loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is in the direction opposite to the normal,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is in the direction of the normal.
for thermal loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is a flux added to the first DOF,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is a flux added to the last DOF.
3. A radiating cavity has an orientation based upon the normal to the surface.
Main Index
SURFACES 281
The normal to a curve is based upon the right hand rule relative to the direction of the curve.
When specifying the top and bottom surfaces of a curve, the following format is used in the ATTACH
FACE, DIST LOADS, FILMS, FOUNDATION, EMISSIVITY, and CAVITY options.
Marc Mentat
top 1 0
bottom 2 1
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word SURFACES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of surfaces to be defined.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read geometric information; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Surface identifier
6-10 2nd I Enter the surface type:
1: Plane
2: Sphere
3: Cylinder
4: NURBS Surface (full description)
5: NURBS Surface (internally generate)
6: 3-D Polysurface
If the surface type is a negative number, it uses relational input format.
A. SURFACE TYPE 1 FOR PLANE
Enter coordinates at four points; one point per line.
1-10 1st E X-coordinate.
11-20 2nd E Y-coordinate.
21-30 3rd E Z-coordinate.
Main Index
282 SURFACES
Format
Data
1-5 1st I Enter the first point identifier.
6-10 2nd I Enter the second point identifier.
11-15 3rd I Enter the third point identifier.
16-20 4th I Enter the fourth point identifier.
B. SURFACE TYPE 2 FOR SPHERE
1-10 1st E X-coordinate of center.
11-20 2nd E Y-coordinate of center.
21-30 3rd E Z-coordinate of center.
31-40 4th E Radius.
1-5 1st I Enter the point identifier of the center.
6-10 2nd I Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius.
C. SURFACE TYPE 3 FOR CYLINDER/CONE
1-10 1st E X-coordinate of starting point on axis.
11-20 2nd E Y-coordinate of starting point on axis.
21-30 3rd E Z-coordinate of starting point on axis.
31-40 4th E Radius at starting point.
41-50 5th E X-coordinate of ending point on axis.
51-60 6th E Y-coordinate of ending point on axis.
61-70 7th E Z-coordinate of ending point on axis.
71-80 8th E Radius at ending point.
1-5 1st I Enter the point identifier of the starting point on the axis.
6-10 2nd I Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius at
the start point.
11-15 3rd I Enter the point identifier of the endpoint on the axis.
16-20 4th I Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius at
the endpoint.
Main Index
SURFACES 283
Format
Data
D. SURFACE TYPE 4 FOR 3-D NURBS – FULL DESCRIPTION
4th data block
1-5 1st I Number of control points in first direction (NPU).
6-10 2nd I Order of NURBS in first direction (NOU).
11-15 3rd I Number of control points in second direction (NPV).
16-20 4th I Order of NURBS in second direction (NOV).
21-25 5th I Enter the number of trimming curves (NTRIM).
5th data block
Enter NPU times NPV homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as
necessary. The homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) plus (NPV plus NOV) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many
lines as necessary. The components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
Enter the physical coordinates of NPU times NPV control points 1 control point per line
(3 coordinates). There should be NPU times NPV lines.
Enter NPU times NPV point identifiers of the control points in I5 format
(16 per line); use as many lines as necessary.
8th data block
Enter NTRIM curve identifiers in I5 format (16 per line); use as many
lines as necessary. Note these curves should have previously defined
using the CURVES model definition option with a curve type of six.
E. SURFACE TYPE 5 FOR 3-D NURBS – INTERNALLY GENERATED
4th data block
1-5 1st I Number of control points in first direction (NPU).
Minimum is 4.
11-15 3rd I Number of control points in second direction (NPV).
Minimum is 4.
Main Index
284 SURFACES
Format
Data
Enter the physical coordinates of NPU times NPV control points 1 control point per line
(3 coordinates). There should be NPU times NPV lines.
Enter NPV lists of control point identifiers. Each list must have
NPU points.
F. SURFACE TYPE 6 FOR 3-D POLYSURFACE
For 3-D polysurface, use the 4a, 5a, and 6a data blocks for nonrelational input.
For 3-D polysurface, use the 4b and 5b data blocks for relational input.
4a data block
1-5 1st I Number of Polygons.
6-10 2nd I Number of Polygon vertices.
5a data block
The 5a data block is repeated for each polygon.
1-5 1st I Polygon ID.
11-15 3rd I First vertex ID.
16-20 4th I Second vertex ID.
21-25 5th I Third vertex ID.
26-30 6th I Fourth vertex ID (if zero, then polygon is a triangle).
6a data block
The 6a data block is repeated for each vertex point.
1-5 1st I Vertex ID.
6-15 2nd E Enter the X-coordinate of vertex.
16-25 3rd E Enter the Y-coordinate of vertex.
26-35 4th E Enter the Z-coordinate of vertex.
4b data block
1-5 1st I Number of polygons.
Main Index
SURFACES 285
Format
Data
5b data block
The 5b data block is repeated for each polygon.
1-5 1st I Polygon ID.
11-15 3rd I Enter point identifier for first vertex of polygon.
16-20 4th I Enter point identifier for second vertex of polygon.
21-25 5th I Enter point identifier for third vertex of polygon.
26-30 6th I Enter point identifier for fourth vertex of polygon.
If zero, this polygon is a triangle.
Main Index
286 STRING
Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation
STRING Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation
The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.
Description
This option allows the user to associates a number of curves together, in a fixed order so that a continuous
arc length may be created. This arc length could be used as an independent variable in the TABLE option.
Note that the curves themselves do not need to match coordinates at their endpoints. The STRING option
indicates that they are “topologically” continuous.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word STRING.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of strings.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated for each string.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the string ID.
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of curves in the string. List must be in correct order.
List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.
As an example; given three parts with six curves, the string option could be used.
Main Index
STRING 287
Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation
String
2,
1,
1,3,5,
2,
2,4,6,
For the outer surface (string number 1), the cap has a radius r = 1.0, so for points along curve 1, the
arc length goes from 0. to 1.5708, along curve 3 from 1.5708 to 2.5708, and along curve 5 from 2.5708
to 3.0707.
Main Index
288 ATTACH NODE
Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces
ATTACH NODE Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces
Description
This option allows you to attach nodes to a point, curve, or surface. This option is used for ADAPTIVE
meshing and/or application of boundary conditions. When used in conjunction with adaptive mesh
analysis, if two points on an edge of an element are attached to a curve or surface, any new points created
by the adaptive procedure are placed on the curve. This improves the geometric modeling.
Note: In the case of Updated Lagrange or if no surface is defined, the new nodes are placed
midway between the previous nodes.
When used with boundary conditions if a nodal load (POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc.) is applied to a
point/curve/surface, the nodes attached to this point/curve/surface will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a
point/curve/surface, the nodes attached to this point/curve/surface will be constrained to satisfy
this condition.
To utilize this option for the application of boundary conditions, the table driven boundary condition
input must be used. See VERSION or TABLE parameter on how to activate this input option.
Note that nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of the
nodes attached to the curve have local systems, the user may need to exercise caution.
A node can be attached to as many as three surfaces; any additional surfaces are ignored.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ATTACH NODE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of data sets.
Repeat the third and possibly the fourth data block as often as necessary. You can enter a point ID, curve
ID, or a surface ID on the 3rd data block.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the node number if a zero is entered, the 4th data block will be used.
6-10 2nd I Enter a point ID.
Main Index
ATTACH NODE 289
Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Enter a curve ID.
16-20 4th I Enter a surface ID.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes which are attached to this curve or surface.
Main Index
290 ATTACH EDGE
Define the Element Edges Which are Attached to Curves
ATTACH EDGE Define the Element Edges Which are Attached to Curves
Description
This option allows you to attach an element edge to a curve. This option is used in conjunction with the
CURVES option.
To utilize this option, the table driven boundary condition input must be used. See VERSION or TABLE
parameter on how to activate this input option.
curve, the nodes which define the edge that are attached to the curve will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a curve, the
nodes which define the edges that are attached to the curve will be constrained to satisfy this condition.
When a distributed load (DIST LOADS, DIST FLUXES, etc.) is applied to a curve, the distributed load
will be applied to the element edges attached the curve.
Note: Nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of
the nodes which define edges that are attached to the curve have local systems, the user
may need to exercise caution.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ATTACH EDGE.
2nd data block
11-15 3rd I Enter 0, if face given using Marc convention.
Enter 1, if face given using Marc Mentat convention.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter curve identifier.
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of element: edge pairs which are attached to this curve.
Main Index
ATTACH FACE 291
Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces
ATTACH FACE Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces
Description
This option allows you to attach an element face to a surface. This option is used in conjunction with the
SURFACES option.
To utilize this option, the table driven boundary condition input must be used. See VERSION or TABLE
parameter on how to activate this input option.
surface, the nodes which define the faces that are attached to the surface will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a surface,
the nodes which define the faces that are attached to the surface will be constrained to satisfy
this condition.
When a distributed load (DIST LOADS, DIST FLUXES, etc.) is applied to a surface, the distributed load
will be applied to the element faces attached the surface.
Note that nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of
the nodes which define faces that are attached to the surface have local systems, the user may need to
exercise caution.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ATTACH FACE.
2nd data block
11-15 3rd I Enter 0, if face given using Marc convention.
Enter 1, if face given using Marc Mentat convention.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter surface identifier.
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of element: face pairs which are attached to this surface.
Main Index
292 GEOMETRY
Specify Geometrical Data
GEOMETRY Specify Geometrical Data
Description
The element geometry is specified in distinct sets. The information required varies from one element type
to another. As a rule, the thickness of shell elements is given in the first defined variable (EGEOM1). The
geometry for a particular element can be defined repeatedly and only the last data is used. This feature is
designed for local variations of geometric data.
The GEOMETRY option is unnecessary if the element description does not require either EGEOM1,
EGEOM2, or EGEOM3. (See Marc Volume B: Element Library).
Notes: The NODAL THICKNESS model definition option can also be used for the input of
beam/shell thickness.
For beam elements, the eighth data variable (EGEOM8) is used to indicate the use of offsets,
pin codes, and coordinate system to define local x-axis. Activating this flag requires the
input of additional data blocks (4 and/or 5a).
For shell elements, the eighth data variable (EGEOM8) is used to indicate shell offsets.
Activating this flag requires the input of the 5b data block.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the word GEOMETRY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of distinct sets of element geometries to be input (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of geometry defaults to input.
3rd data block
Element geometries. The 3rd through 6th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.
1-10 1st F EGEOM1
11-20 2nd F EGEOM2
21-30 3rd F EGEOM3
31-40 4th F EGEOM4
41-50 5th F EGEOM5
51-60 6th F EGEOM6
61-70 7th F EGEOM7
Main Index
GEOMETRY 293
Format
Data
71-80 8th F EGEOM8
For beam and shells, EGEOM8 is the negative of the sum of three numbers
= -(ioffset + iorien + ipin)
ioffset = 0 – no offsets.
1 – offsets with beams; include the 5a data block.
2 – offsets with shells; include the 5b data block.

iorien = 0 – conventional definition of local beam orientation,
beam axis given in 4th through 6th field in global
system.
10 – the local beam orientation is given with respect to the

coordinate system of the first beam node.
ipin = 0 – no pin codes are used.
100 – pin codes are used; include the 4th data block.
Notes: iorien and ipin are only valid for beam elements.
See library element descriptions in “Quick Reference” of Marc Volume B:
Element Library for the meaning of EGEOM1, etc. for each element type.
4th data block
Necessary only if ipin = 100
1-5 1st I Enter the pin code associated with the first node of the beam.
6-10 2nd I Enter the pin code associated with the second node of the beam.
The degrees of freedom are defined in the element’s coordinate system and
the pin flags are applied at the offset ends of the beam.
The pin code is a packed integer of up to five unique integers 1 through 6
with no embedded blanks.
5a data block
Necessary only if ioffset = 1
1-10 1st F X component of offset vector at beam node 1
11-20 2nd F Y component of offset vector at beam node 1
21-30 3rd F Z component of offset vector at beam node 1
31-40 4th F X component of offset vector at beam node 2
41-50 5th F Y component of offset vector at beam node 2
51-60 6th F Z component of offset vector at beam node 2
Main Index
294 GEOMETRY
Format
Data
61-65 7th I Interpolation flag for higher-order beams
0 – no interpolation of offset vector for midside node (Offset
vector at midside node set to 0.).
1 – linear interpolation of offset vector for midside node
66-70 8th I Coordinate system flag for offset vector at beam node 1
0 – vector in global coordinate system.
1 – vector in element coordinate system.
2 – vector along associated shell normal at node.
3 – vector in local coordinate system at node 1.
0 – vector in global coordinate system
1 – vector in element coordinate system.
2 – vector along associated shell normal at node.
5b data block
1-10 1st F Offset magnitude at corner node 1
11-20 2nd F Offset magnitude at corner node 2
21-30 3rd F Offset magnitude at corner node 3
31-40 4th F Offset magnitude at corner node 4
41-45 5th I Interpolation flag for higher-order shells
0 – no interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes.
1 linear interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes
46-50 6th I Constant Offset flag
0 – offset magnitude is variable. Four data fields are used to
specify offset magnitudes at corner nodes.
1 – offset magnitude is constant. First data field is used to specify
offset magnitudes at corner nodes.
6th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above geometry is applied.
Main Index
GEOMETRY 295
Notes: For elements 7, 10, 11, and 19, enter 1 in the EGEOM2 field to activate the constant dilatation
option. This improves the behavior of the element for nearly incompressible analysis. See
Marc Volume B: Element Library for further details.
For elements 3, 7, and 11, enter 1 in the EGEOM3 field to activate the assumed strain
formulation. This improves the element bending behavior. This is an alternative to the
ASSUMED STRAIN parameter.
For elements 109 and 110, the penalty factor used to add the constraint for the vector
potential (Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information) to the set of equations for
magnetostatic calculations can be set in the EGEOM2 field.
For element 185, enter a value greater than 0 and less than 1 in the EGEOM5 field to scale
down the transverse shear modulus for homogenous material (a common value is 5/6).
Beam offset capability is possible for elements 5, 14, 25, 36, 45, 52, 65, 76, 77, 78, 79, 98.
Enter -1 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4a data block. See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for further details.
The components of the local x-axis for beam elements are entered in the EGEOM4-EGEOM6
fields. These components can be entered in the global Cartesian coordinate system
(default) or in a local coordinate system. In the latter case, the local coordinate system used
to define the beam x-axis is flagged through the EGEOM8 field and is taken to be the
coordinate system defined at the first nodal point of the beam element using the
TRANSFORMATION, CYLINDRICAL, or COORD SYSTEM options. Enter -10 or -11 in the
EGEOM8 field to indicate that the fields EGEOM4-EGEOM6 are in the local coordinate system.
If EGEOM8 is -11, it further indicates that the beam elements are offset and that the nodal
offset vectors are provided via the 4a data block.
Shell offset capability is possible for elements 1, 22, 50, 75, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 138, 139,
140. Enter -2 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4b data block. See Marc
Main Index
296 NODAL THICKNESS
Define Nodal Thickness
NODAL THICKNESS Define Nodal Thickness
Description
This option allows you to specify beam or shell thicknesses on a nodal basis. Interpolation to the element
integration points is automatically taken care of using the element displacement shape functions as
discussed for each element in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
Notes: If you specify element thicknesses for an element using the GEOMETRY model definition
option, that data is used instead of the NODAL THICKNESS data input here. Also note that
for composite elements, if you give the actual layer thicknesses, the sum of these layer
thicknesses overrides both GEOMETRY data and NODAL THICKNESS data. If you input
percentages of total thickness in the COMPOSITE data, then GEOMETRY data (or, if no
GEOMETRY, then NODAL THICKNESS data from this option) is used.
Since the NODAL THICKNESS option allows input of only one thickness per node,
thickness discontinuities must be input using GEOMETRY.
See Marc Volume B: Element Library for elements which use nodal thicknesses.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NODAL THICKNESS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data sets used to input nodal thickness values. The UTHICK
user subroutine can be used for modifying NODAL THICKNESS values.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of nodal thicknesses. Defaults to
input deck.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter nodal thickness value
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes associated with the nodal thickness given above.
Main Index
ACTUATOR 297
Define the Length of the Actuator Link
ACTUATOR Define the Length of the Actuator Link
Description
This option can be used in conjunction with the truss element type 9 to simulate an actuator. This is often
used in mechanism analyses to allow the prescription of the relative distance between two points. This
option should be used with the LARGE DISP parameter whenever large rotations of the actuator or large
displacements are anticipated.
The original length of the actuator is given in the fourth field of the GEOMETRY option. The actuator is
treated as an elastic link.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ACTUATOR.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of actuators (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of actuator data.
Defaults to input.
3rd data block
Repeat for each actuator to be modified.
1-5 1st I Enter the element number
6-15 2nd F Enter the new length of the actuator.
16-20 3rd I Enter the table ID for the length of the actuator.
Main Index
298 TRANSFORMATION
Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation
TRANSFORMATION Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation
Description
This option defines nodal coordinates for calculation of a direction cosine matrix, which is then used for
transforming the global degrees of freedom of a specified node to a new local coordinate system.
This block can be used to set up local coordinate systems at a number of flagged nodes, for application
of boundary conditions in a transformed system, or for printout purposes. Five points should be noted:
1. The displacements and loads or reactions are output in the transformed system at such nodes.
2. The transformation is done on all Cartesian displacements. Thus, for the shell elements, the
derivative degrees of freedom become the derivative of the transformed displacements with
respect to the original surface coordinate system.
3. Transformations are assumed to be orthogonal.
4. All kinematic conditions such as boundary conditions, initial displacements, initial velocity and
ties at that node must be input in the transformed system.
5. All concentrated nodal loads must be applied in the transformed system.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-14 1st A Enter the word TRANSFORMATION.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of distinct sets of transformations data to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of transformation data, defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to suppress printout of transformation data.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Node number. Enter 0 to read a list of nodes. See 4th data block.
6-15 2nd F
Global coordinates of a first point A such that the vector from this point
16-25 3rd F
to the node is direction 1 of the local coordinate system. (See Figure 3-1a.)
26-35 4th F
Main Index
TRANSFORMATION 299
Format
Data
36-45 5th F Global coordinates of a second point, such that this point, the first point,
46-55 6th F and the node define the 1-2 plane of the local coordinate system.
56-66 7th F Direction 2 of the local coordinate system will be constructed

perpendicular to direction 1 such that this second point has a positive 2
coordinate in the local 1-2 plane.
See Figure 3-1b “Three-dimensional Analysis”). Direction 3 of the

local coordinate system is given by a cross product of direction 1 with
direction 2.
4th data block
Include only if the first field in the 3rd data block is 0.
Enter a list of nodes for which the above transformation is applied.
Note that for elements in a plane (for example,; 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 15,
16, 17, 19, etc.) only the first two coordinates of the first point (cols. 6-15
and 16-25) need be supplied.
See Figure 3-1.
Main Index
300 TRANSFORMATION
TRANSFORMATION
Local 2 Local 1 1,
N,xA,yA,xB,yB
Point B Node N
Point A
X
(a) Two-dimensional Analysis
Plane defined by Node N,

Point A, and Point B TRANSFORMATION
1,
N,xA,yA,zA,xB,yB,zB
Point B
Local 2
Local 1
Node N
Y
Local 3 (= Local 1 x Local 2)
Point A
(b) Three-dimensional Analysis

Figure 3-1 Transformation Option
Main Index
COORD SYSTEM 301
Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom
COORD SYSTEM Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and

Degrees of Freedom
Description
This option allows you to specify that the coordinates of a node are with respect to a local coordinate
system. This is consistent with the CP identification number on the MD Nastran GRID Bulk Data Entry.
This option also allows you to specify the nodal coordinate system of the degrees of freedom. This is
consistent with the CD identification number on the MD Nastran GRID Bulk Data Entry. Thie coordinate
systems defined here are similar to the MD Nastran CORD1R, CORD1C, CORD1S, CORD2R, CORD2C,
and CORD2S options. Note that the data entered here should not be changed upon restart. Similar to the
use of the TRANSFORMATION option, the following points should be noted:
1. The displacements and loads or reactions are output in the transformed system at such nodes.
2. The transformation is done on all Cartesian displacements. Thus, for the shell elements, the
derivative degrees of freedom become the derivative of the transformed displacements with
respect to the original surface coordinate system.
3. All kinematic conditions such as fixed displacement, initial displacements, initial velocity and ties
at that node must be input in the transformed system.
4. All concentrated nodal loads must be applied in the transformed system.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words COORD SYSTEM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of coordinate systems (not required).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number of read data; defaults to input file.
3rd data block
1-6 1st A Enter coordinate system type:
CORD1C
CORD1R
CORD1S
CORD2C
CORD2R
CORD2S
Main Index
302 COORD SYSTEM
Format
Data
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if coordinates defined are with respect to the coordinate system.
Enter 0 if coordinate data is not transformed based on this
coordinate system.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 if degrees of freedom are to be transformed based upon this
coordinate system.
Enter 0 if degrees of freedom are not to be transformed.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 if transformation is to be updated based upon the deformation of
nodes G1A, G2A, and G3A for coordinate systems CORD1C, CORD1R,
and CORD1S.
This option should only be used with table-driven boundary conditions.
Repeat 4a and 7th data block for each CORD1:coordinate system.
4a data block
Used if coordinate system type is CORD1C, CORD1R, or CORD1S; see Remarks.
1-5 1st I Enter coordinate system identification number; must be unique. Same as
MD Nastran CIDA.
6-10 2nd I Enter first node number ID; same as MD Nastran G1A.
11-15 3rd I Enter second node number ID; same as MD Nastran G2A.
16-20 4th I Enter third node number ID; same as MD Nastran G3A.
Repeat 4b, 5th, 6th, and 7th data block for each CORD2:coordinate system
4b data block
Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S; see Remarks.
1-5 1st I Enter coordinate system identification number; must be unique. Same as
MD Nastran CID.
6-10 2nd I Enter the coordinate system that points given below are with respect to.
Default is the global coordinate system. This is the same as MD
Nastran RID.
5th data block
Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S.
1-10 1st E First coordinate of point A.
11-20 2nd E Second coordinate of point A.
21-30 3rd E Third coordinate of point A.
31-40 4th E First coordinate of point B.
41-50 5th E Second coordinate of point B.
51-60 6th E Third coordinate of point B.
Main Index
COORD SYSTEM 303
Format
Data
6th data block
Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S.
1-10 1st E First coordinate of point C.
11-20 2nd E Second coordinate of point C.
21-30 3rd E Third coordinate of point C.
7th data block
Enter a list of node numbers to which this system is to be applied.
Remarks
CORD1C
z
uz
G2
G3
uθ
G1 P
Z
θ
ur
x R y
Figure 3-2 CORDIC Definition

1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the coordinate
system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the third lies
in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not
coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-2) in this coordinate system is given by (R, θ, Z) where
θ is measured in degrees.
3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above
by ( u r, u θ, u z ) .
4. It is recommended that points on the z-axis only have their z-displacement directions defined in
this coordinate system.
Main Index
304 COORD SYSTEM
CORD1R
z
uz
G2
P
G3 uy
ux Z
G1 y
Y
x
Figure 3-3 CORD1R Definition
1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the coordinate
in the x-z plane. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-3) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).
3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by ( u x, u u, u z ) .
CORD1S
z
G2
uφ
θ
ur
G3 P
G1 R
φ uθ
x
Figure 3-4 CORD1S Definition
1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with a definition that does not involve the coordinate
in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not
coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-4) in this coordinate system is given by (R, θ, φ) where
θ and φ are measured in degrees.
Main Index
COORD SYSTEM 305
by ( u r, u θ, u φ ) .
CORD2C
z
uz
B
uθ
P
C
A Z
ur
θ
x R y
Figure 3-5 CORD2C Definition
1. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.
Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The
second point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin.
The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
2. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.
3. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-5) in this coordinate system is given by (R, θ, Z), where
θ is measured in degrees.
by ( u r, u θ, u z ) .
Main Index
306 COORD SYSTEM
CORD2R
z
uz
B
P
C uy
A ux Z
y
x Y
Figure 3-6 CORD2R Definition
second defines the direction of the z-axis. The third point defines a vector which, with the z-axis,
defines the x-z plane. The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
3. The location of a grid point (P in the Figure 3-6) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).
4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown by ( u x, u y, u z ) .
CORD2S
z
B
uφ
θ
ur
P
C
A R
uθ
φ
x
y
Figure 3-7 CORD2S Definition
second point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin.
The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
Main Index
COORD SYSTEM 307
3. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-7) in this coordinate system is given by (R, θ, φ), where
θ and φ are measured in degrees.
4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by ( u r, u θ, u φ ) .
5. It is recommended that points on the z-axis not have their displacement directions defined in this
coordinate system.
Main Index
308 SHELL TRANSFORMATION
Define Shell Transformation
SHELL TRANSFORMATION Define Shell Transformation
Description
This option allows you to transform the global degrees of freedom of (doubly curved) shells or beams to
local degrees of freedom. It facilitates the input of boundary conditions, point loads and bending
moments. A more detailed description of this capability is given in Marc Volume A: User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-20 1st A Enter the words SHELL TRANSFORMATION.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data sets to be input (optional).
6-10 I Unit number from which input is to be read (defaults to input).
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Transformation type (see Marc Volume A: User Information).
Transformation type 1 is used for beam elements 15, 16, and 17.
Transformation types 2 to 4 are used for shell elements 4, 8 and 24.
6-15 2nd F First component of t̂ vector in surface θ1 - θ2 coordinate system. Only
needed for transformation types 2 and 4.
16-25 3rd F Second component of t̂ vector in surface θ1 - θ2 coordinate system. Only
needed for transformation types 2 and 4.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above displacements are applied.
Main Index
UTRANFORM 309
Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS
UTRANFORM Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS
Description
This option allows you to transfer the global degrees of freedom to local degrees of freedom. This is done
through the UTRANS user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note: This option should not be used on boundary nodes which can come into contact with rigid
surfaces in a contact analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-9 1st A Enter the word UTRANFORM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data sets to be input.
6-10 2nd I Unit number from which input is to be read.
Defaults to input.
The 3rd data block is entered once for each data set.
3rd data block
Enter list of node numbers to which user transformations are applied.
Main Index
310 CYCLIC SYMMETRY
Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure
CYCLIC SYMMETRY Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure
Description
This option is used to define data for a structure possessing cyclic symmetry, which means that the
geometry and the loading vary periodically around a symmetry axis. This type of structure can be
effectively analyzed by modeling only one section and applying the proper multipoint constraint
equations to account for the cyclic symmetry. By defining the symmetry axis and the sector angle, the
Marc program sets up the constraint equations automatically. Additionally, the rigid body rotation around
the symmetry axis can be automatically suppressed.
Note: Cyclic Symmetry is:

a. valid for only the continuum elements. However, the presence of beams and shells is
allowed, but there is no connection of shells to shells, so the shell part can, for example,
be a turbine blade and the volume part can be a turbine rotor. The blade is connected to
the rotor and if there are 20 blades, 1/20 of the rotor is modeled and one complete blade.
b. valid for nonlinear static analysis including remeshing as well as coupled analysis.
c. invalid for pure heat transfer.
d. valid for all analysis involving contact. This option can be combined with the CONTACT
option. In this case, both sides of the cyclic symmetry sectors need to belong to the same
contact body.
Note: If used with contact and the element is not in a contact body, it is not detected
as being on a symmetry surface.
e. valid also for: eigenvalue analysis such as buckling or modal analysis, harmonic
analysis, and transient dynamic analysis. However, there are restrictions in the case of
modal analysis which are described in more detail in Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information, Chapter 9, Cyclic Symmetry.
f. valid only if used in a non-contact analysis with a mixture of element types. If a
combination of beam, shell, linear continuum and/or quadratic continuum elements is
present and contact is not used in the model, exit 61 is issued. To overcome this problem,
two different contact bodies must be defined: one consisting of only the linear continuum
elements and one consisting of only the quadratic continuum elements. Shell and/or
beam elements do not have to be a part of any contact body (see a. above). Only the
elements belonging to the cyclically symmetric sector need to be in a contact body. In
order to prevent unwanted contact items (CPU due to unneeded contact search, unwanted
contacting nodes, etc.), turn off the normal Marc contact calculations by defining an
empty contact table. In this case, both sides of every cyclic symmetry sector should
belong to the same body, so that it is impossible to model one side with linear continuum
elements and the other side of the sector with quadratic continuum elements.
Main Index
CYCLIC SYMMETRY 311
g. When using CYCLIC SYMMETRY in 3-D, tetrahedral elements must be used if the body
is to be remeshed.
h. If used with the SPLINE option, the ε' continuity is not applied between across the
symmetry planes.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words CYCLIC SYMMETRY.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E First component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.
11-20 2nd E Second component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.
21-30 3rd E Third component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E X-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.
11-20 2nd E Y-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.
21-30 3rd E Z-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.
4th data block
1-10 1st E Cyclic angle (in degrees).
11-20 2nd E Cyclic Symmetry Tolerance. Default is 0.5 times of the minimum
element size.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter:
-1 To automatically suppress rigid body mode.
0 To have no suppression.
>0 To suppress at node number given.
Main Index
312 CYCLIC SYMMETRY
Format
Data
6-10 2nd I Linearization flag; to be used if a cyclic symmetric structure consists of
quadratic elements:
1 The outer boundary of the structure is described based on the
corner nodes only. Multipoint constraints due to cyclic symmetry
are not assigned to midside nodes. Instead, they are linearly tied
to the corresponding corner nodes.
-1 The outer boundary of the structure is described using a quadratic
field. Due to cyclic symmetry, full quadratic multipoint
constraints are set up; they are assigned both to corner and
midside nodes.
The default value is 1.
Main Index
TYING 313
Define Tying Constraints
TYING Define Tying Constraints
Description
This option is used to define homogeneous constraints. Constraints are defined by specifying a tied node
and one or more associated retained nodes. Further details are provided in Marc Volume A: User
Information. Special types of tying can be obtained using the UFORMSN user subroutine (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
A rigid link for either small deformation or large deformation can be implemented by using tying type
80 or using RBE2.
To obtain tying constraint based on updated current coordinates, add 1000 to tying type code. For tying
type associated with user derived tying (UFORMSN), subtract 1000 from tying type code.
In a coupled thermal-mechanical analysis during the heat transfer subincrements, tying type 1 is used for
all tying types except 31, 32, 33, 34, and 69.
It is possible to have a tying constraint equation to be active for only selective passes in a
multiphysics analysis.
A tying constraint always consists of a tied node (removed from the system) and one or more retained
nodes (which remain in the system). Each tying constraint is specified by a series of two data blocks (data
blocks 3 and 3a).
If a sequence of similar tying types must be specified, a list of nodes for tied nodes (3b) and
corresponding retained nodes (3c - 3d) must be given.
If the constraint equations utlize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK
parameter should be invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word TYING.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of constraint equations to be read (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of tying data. Defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to suppress printout of tying data.
Main Index
314 TYING
Format
Data
3rd data block
Data blocks 3 and 3a or 3 and 3b, 3c, 3d, are given once for each constraint equation set.
1-5 1st I Enter the code for tying type. SeeTable and Marc Volume A: User
Information for definition of default types and user-defined routines.
6-10 2nd I Enter 0 to indicate a list of nodes to be tied will be defined in data block
3b.
Enter a node number to indicate an individual node to be tied.
11-15 3rd I Number of retained nodes for this tying type. If a standard Marc tying type
is used this does not need to be entered.
16-20 4th I Enter a 0 if tying type is available for all passes in multiphysics analysis.
Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be active
using:
1 – stress pass.
2 – heat pass.
4 – electrical pass in Joule analysis.
5 – diffusion pass.
6 – electrostatic pass
For example, 24 means tie is active only in heat and electrical pass, but is
not active in structural pass.
3a data block
If the number of a node is entered in the second field of the 3rd data block (above), use data block 3a
to list the retained nodes.
1-80 1st I Sequence of retained nodes for constraint in (16I5) format, etc.
3b data block
If no tied node is entered in the second field of the 3rd data block (that is, 0 is entered), use data blocks
3b, 3c, and 3d to enter a list of nodes to be tied.
Enter an unsorted list of nodes to be tied.
3c data block
Enter an unsorted list of nodes which will be the first retained nodes
associated with tied nodes given in data block 3b.
3d data block
Same as 3c except second retained nodes, etc.
Note: List verbs EXCEPT, INTERSECT and sorted node sets are illegal
in these lists.
Main Index
TYING 315
Table 3-2 Summary of Standard Tying Types

Tying Number of
Code Retained Nodes Purpose Remarks
I < NDEG 1 Tie the Ith degree of freedom
at the tied node to the Ith
degree of freedom at the
retained node
100 1 Tie all degrees of freedom at
the tied node to the
corresponding degrees of
freedom at the retained node
23 1 Tie axisymmetric solid node Both tied and retained nodes
to axisymmetric-shell must be transformed to local
(element system. TRANSFORMATION
type 1) node option must be invoked. (See
Marc Volume A: User
Information, Table 9-17)
15 Number of retained Special tying types for pipe
nodes is 1 less than bend element 17 to remove
the number of shell rigid body modes (see
nodes in the z-r plane Volume B: Element Library)
of the section
16 Number of shell nodes Special tying types for pipe
in the z-r plane of the bend element 17 to remove
section rigid body modes (see
Volume B: Element Library)
17 2 Special tying types for pipe
bend element 17 to couple
bend section into pipe line
(see Volume B: Element
Library)
18 2 Joining together the Tied node is also second
boundaries of intersecting retained node. Neither node can
shell, element type 4, 8, or 24. be transformed (see Marc
Fully moment carrying joint. Volume A: User Information,
Table 9-15)
28 2 Joining intersecting shells, Tied node is also second
element type 4, 8, or 24. retained node (see Marc Volume
Pinned joint. A: User Information,
Table 9-15)
Caution: TRANSFORMATION MUST NOT BE USED AT NODES INVOLVED IN TYING
TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
Main Index
316 TYING
Table 3-2 Summary of Standard Tying Types (continued)

Tying Number of
19 2 Use beam element 13 as a
stiffener on shell elements 4
or 8. Tied node is beam node:
First retained node
is shell node, second is beam
node again. Beam node
should be on, or close to, the
normal to the shell at the shell
node.
20 3 Create an extra node in a shell Always use after tying type 21.
type 8 element tied to the
interpolation function of the
shell. Use in conjunction with
tying type 21 to tie a beam
element 13 or a stiffener
across a shell element.
21 2 Same as type 19, but tying Must be followed by a tying
beam to an interpolated shell type 20.
node not as a vertex of an
element – element type 8
only. Must be followed by
type 20 to tie the interpolated
shell node into the shell
mesh.
24 2 Join intersecting shells or Tied node is also second
beams, element type 15-17. retained node. Neither node can
be transformed. Tying is
necessary only when there is a
large angle between the two
plates.
25 2 Join solid mesh to shell or Tied node is also second
beam (type 15 or 16). retained node.
26 2 Join solid mesh to Similar to 23, but no
axisymmetric shell (type 1 or transformation needed. Tied
89). node is also second to retained
node.
TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
Main Index
TYING 317

Tying Number of
27 2 Join Fourier solid to Fourier Tied node is also second
shell (type 90). retained node.
31 2 Refine mesh of first order Tie interior nodes on refined
(linear displacement) side to corner nodes on coarse
elements in 2-D. side.
32 2 Refine mesh of second order Tie interior nodes on refined
(quadratic displacement) side to the edge of an element
elements in 2-D. on the coarse side.
33 4 Refine mesh of 8-node bricks Tie interior node on the refined
side to the 4 corner nodes of an
element face on the coarse side.
The retained nodes must be
entered in the same or opposite
order as they occur in the
element connectivity.
34 8 Refine mesh of 20-node Tie interior nodes on refined
bricks side to the 8 (4 corner, 4
midside) nodes of an element
on the coarse side. The retained
nodes must be entered in the
same or opposite order as they
occur in the
TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
Main Index
318 TYING

Tying Number of
44 2 is 2-D or Rigidly tie a node with The number of retained nodes
axisymmetric displacements and rotations is required. This tying type
lower-order element to a surface patch. This is fully supports large
edge internally used for CWELD deformation/rotations. No
and CFAST option. transformations are required.
3 is 2-D or
axisymmetric
higher-order
element edge
3 if 3-D lower-order
triangular face
4 if 3-D lower-order
quadrilateral face
6 if 3-D higher-order
triangular face
8 if 3-D higher-order
quadrilateral face
52 1 Pin joint for beam types 14,
25, or 52.
53 1 Fully moment carrying joint
for beam types 14, 25, or 52.
13 2 Joining two elements type 13 Tied node is also the second
under an arbitrary angle. retained node.
Fully moment carrying joint.
>100 1 Generate several tyings Tying code is the first degree of
of type freedom multiplied by 100
added to the last degree of
< NDEG. freedom; that is, 209 means tie
2nd to 9th d.o.f. at tied node to
resp. 2nd and 9th degrees of
freedom at retained node.
TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
Main Index
TYING 319

Tying Number of
69 2 Joint for creating gaps or The second retained node is the
overlaps between two parts control node of the tying. The
of a model either by force on this node is equal to the
prescribing the total force on total force on the tied nodes of
the nodes on either side of the all tyings that share this control
gap or overlap or by node. The displacement of the
prescribing the size of the gap node is equal to size of the gap
or overlap. or overlap between the parts. In
non-mechanical passes, the
tying reduces to tying type 100
between the tied and the first
retained node.
80 2 Form a rigid link between The second retained node is an
tied node and retained node. extra node which contains the
This works for either small or rigid body rotation. Therefore,
large deformation. If a rigid it may not be connected to any
region is to be modeled, use elements in a model.
multiple ties of type 80, with
the tied node of each link
being a different node, and
use the same common node
as the retained node.
85 2 Tying of temperatures Tied node is the shell node and
between shell and solid two retained nodes are nodes of
elements in heat transfer the solid element. Order of the
analysis retained nodes follows the shell
(linear/quadratic/new node degrees of freedom. The
composite temperature assumption here is that the shell
distribution in the thickness and brick have the
direction of shell elements). same thickness.
TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
Main Index
320 TYING

Tying Number of
86 3 Tying of temperatures Tied node is the shell node and
between shell and solid three retained nodes are nodes
element in heat transfer of the solid element. Order of
analysis (quadratic/new the retained nodes follows shell
composite temperature node degrees of freedom. Tied
distribution in the thickness node should not have linear
direction of shell element). temperature distribution. The
assumption here is that the shell
and brick have the
same thickness.
87 1 Tying of temperatures Tied and retained nodes are
between two shell elements shell nodes. The tied node
in a heat transfer analysis should have more or equal
(linear/quadratic/new number of degree of freedom
composite temperature than the retained node. The
distribution). assumption here is that the tied
shell and retained shell have
equal thickness.
TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
Main Index
SERVO LINK 321
Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints
SERVO LINK Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints
Description
This option uses homogeneous linear constraint capability (TYING) to input simple constraints of
the form:
ut = a1 ur1 + a2 ur2 + . . .
where ut is a degree of freedom to be constrained.
ur1, ur2 etc., are the other retained degrees of freedom in this structure.
a1, a2 etc., are constants provided in this option.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. Note that more complex
constraints can be entered via the TYING model definition set and the UFORMSN user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SERVO LINK.
11-15 2nd I Number of servo links to be entered below; defaults to number given on
the TIE parameter.
16-20 3rd I Enter unit number for input of servo links. Defaults to input.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 if the 4th data block is being used to define in which pass of a
multiphysics analysis the servo link should be active.
Data blocks 2, 3, and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each servo link.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of retained nodes (must not exceed the value given in the TIE
parameter, fourth field).
6-10 2nd I Tied degree of freedom, at tied node.
11-15 3rd I Tied node.
16-20 4th I First retained degree of freedom at first retained node.
21-25 5th I First retained node.
Main Index
322 SERVO LINK
Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints
Format
Data
26-30 6th I Second retained degree of freedom at second retained node.
31-35 7th I Second retained node.
Etc. (Continuation data in 16I5 format).
3rd data block
One set of this data block goes with each set from data block 2.
1-10 1st F Numerical constant a1 joining tied and first retained variables.
11-20 2nd F Numerical constant a2 joining tied and second retained variables
Etc.
4th data block
Needed only if 4th entry on the 1st data block is set to 1.
1-5 1st I Enter 0 if servo link is active for all passes in multiphysics analysis
(default).
Enter a packed number indicating which passes the servo link should be
active using:
1 – stress pass.
2 – heat pass.
6 – electrostatic pass.
For example, 24 means servo link is active only in heat and electrical pass,
but is not active in structural pass.
Main Index
RBE2 323
Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element
RBE2 Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element
Description
The RBE2 option defines a rigid kinematic link between a single retained node with dependent degrees
of freedom specified at an arbitrary number of tied nodes. The distance between the tied nodes to the
retained node must be greater than zero.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP parameter. If the updated Lagrange
option is set, then the large rotation formulation is automatically used. If all degrees of freedom of the
tied nodes are tied, then RBE2 simulates rigid body motion. This is similar with tying 80. But RBE2 is
more general than tying 80. For example, when the rotations are not tied, then RBE2 simulates spherical
link or it can be used to simulate slider connection. The degrees of freedom of the tied nodes are
co-rotated with the rotation of the retained node.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: User and Theory Information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word RBE2.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of RBE2 to be input.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of RBE2; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Retained (reference) node. This node has 3 degrees of freedom in 2-D
(two translations and one rotation about the global z-axis) and six degrees
of freedom in 3-D (three translations and three rotations). Note that this
may require the use of the RBE parameter.
6-10 2nd I Packed list of degrees of freedom of tied nodes to be constrained. If, for
example, the first and the third degree of freedom must be constrained,
enter 13. Put blank or zero if all translational and rotational degrees of
freedom are constrained.
11-15 3rd I Number of tied nodes.
Main Index
324 RBE2
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Enter a 0 if tying type is available for all passes in myltiphysics analysis.
Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be
active using:
1 – stress pass.
2 – heat pass.
6 – electrostatic pass.
21-25 5th I REB2 ID; default equals 0.
4a data block
Sequence of tied nodes in (1615) format.
Main Index
RBE3 325
RBE3 Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element
Description
The RBE3 option defines the motion at a reference node as the weighted average of the motion at a set
of other nodes. The distance between the reference node to the retained nodes must be greater than zero.
This option is a powerful tool to distribute applied loads in a model. Forces and moments applied to
reference nodes are distributed to a set of independent degrees of freedom based on the RBE3 geometry
and local weighting factors.
By defaults, the reference node is considered as a tied node. It is also possible to specify the subset of the
retained nodes as tied nodes. In this case, the total number of degrees of freedom specified for every tied
node must be the same as the degrees of freedom specified for the reference node. In this way, it possible
to use the reference node as tied node for other tyings. If the choice of the tied nodes is not done properly,
a singularity may occur during the internal manipulation of the tying matrix, user should modify their
input file.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP parameter. If the updated Lagrange
option is set, then large rotation formulation is automatically used. The degrees of freedom of the
reference node are not co-rotated.
The constrained degrees of freedom of all retained nodes on an RBE3 option must be adequate to define
its rigid body motion, otherwise, A-matrix is singular and an error message is issued. It is recommended,
that for most applications, only the translation components be used for the degrees of freedom of the
retained nodes. An exception is the case where the retained nodes are colinear. A rotation component may
then be added to one node to stabilize its associated rigid body mode.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word RBE3.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of RBE3 to be input.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of RBE3; defaults to input.
Main Index
326 RBE3
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Reference node. This node has three degrees of freedom in 2-D (two
translations and one rotation about the global z-axis) and six degrees of
freedom in 3-D (three translations and three rotations). Note that this may
require the use of the RBE parameter.
6-10 2nd I Packed list of degrees of freedom of tied node to be constrained. If (e.g.
the first and the third degree of freedom must be constrained) enter 13. Put
blank or zero if all translational and rotational degrees of freedom are
constrained.
11-15 3rd I Number of different weighting factors.
16-20 4th I Number of user-defined MSETS, maximum is eight. This indicates that a
subset of retained nodes entered on the 5th data block are also tied nodes
given on the 6th data block.
21-25 5th I Enter a 0 if tying type is available for all passes in multiphysics analysis.
Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be
active using:
1 – stress pass.
2 – heat pass.
6 – electrostatic pass
4th data block
The 4th and 5th data blocks are repeated as pairs, one for each weighting factor.
1-10 1st R Weighting factor.
11-15 2nd I Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the weighting factor.
16-20 4th I Enter the number of tied nodes with this weighting factor. The nodes are
entered in the 5th data block.
5th data block
Sequence of retained nodes in (1615) format.
Main Index
RBE3 327
Format
Data
6th data block
Required only if 4th field of 3rd data block is nonzero. The listed tied nodes must be a subset of the
retained nodes. The total number of tied degrees of freedom must be the same as the number of degrees
of freedom specified for the reference node.
1-5 1st I The first tied node number.
6-10 2nd I Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the first tied node.
11-15 3rd I The second tied node number.
16-20 4th I Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the second tied node.
etc.
Main Index
328 RROD
Rigid 2-node Constraint
RROD Rigid 2-node Constraint
Description
This option defines a 2-noded rigid constraint that has the similar characteristics as the MD Nastran
RROD element. The constraint is applied using equation elimination like tying or servolinks. The link
must have finite length and may undergo large rotations.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word RROD.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of rigid links (not required).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number (defaults to the standard input).
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the ID of this link.
6-10 2nd I Enter the first node ID.
11-15 3rd I Enter the second node ID.
16-20 4th I Enter component number of one and only one dependent translational
degree of freedon in the global coordinate system (MD Nastran CMA).
21-25 5th I Enter component number of one and only one dependent translational
degree of freedon in the global coordinate system (MD Nastran CMB).
Note: Either CMA or CMB must be nonzero, but not both.
Main Index
PIN CODE 329
Define Pin Code for Beam Element
PIN CODE Define Pin Code for Beam Element
Description
The PIN CODE option is used to remove connections between the node and selected degrees-of-freedom
of the beam. The degrees of freedom are defined in the element’s coordinate system and the pin codes
are applied at the offset end of the beam.
By default, a new internal node is generated for every pinned node, and constraints are setup between
these two nodes. When FEATURE, 6901 is activated, Marc condenses out the pinned degrees of freedoms
instead of creating a new node.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP, LARGE STRAIN, or
UPDATE parameter.
Note: The degrees of freedom listed in the 3rd data block are with respect to an element
coordinate system defined by the beam cross section axis.
Format
Format
Data
Fixe Free Entry Entry
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PIN CODE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of PIN CODE to be input.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of PIN CODE; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Packed list of degrees of freedom to be flagged. For example, when the
first and the third degree of freedom are to remain free (unconstrained),
enter 13.
4th data block
List of element:node pairs. For example, 100:1 means the first node of
element ID 100. The node value must be 1 or 2. For 3-node beam
elements, only the end nodes can be flagged with pin code.
Main Index
330 INSERT
Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted
INSERT Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted
3 Description
Model This option allows the definition of host bodies and lists of elements or nodes to be inserted in the host
Definiti bodies. The degrees of freedom of the nodes in the inserted node list or element list are automatically tied
on using the corresponding degrees of freedom of the nodes in host body elements based on their
isoparametric location in the elements.
Option
s This option can be used to place reinforcing cords or rods, such as 2-D rebar membrane elements, into
solid elements.
This option can be used to apply point loads in some specific locations other than element nodes. It also
can be used to link two different meshes.
After local adaptive meshing or global meshing, the constraint equation is reformulated. In this way, one
can apply a point load in a region and it will continue to be applied in the correct location after remeshing.
If a node to be inserted is also a node of a host body element, no tying is applied to the node.
Format
Format
Data
Fixed Free Entry
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word INSERT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data sets to be read in (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit numbers for input; defaults to standard input (unit 5).
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are given for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I INSERT data set ID.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if a list of elements to be inserted; default is 0 - a list of nodes to
be inserted.
11-20 3rd F Exterior tolerance. A node is considered within a host element if the
distance between the element and the node is smaller than the tolerance
times average edge length of the element, unless the node is actually
inside another host element. Default is 0.05.
21-25 4th I Enter a 0 if a list of elements defines the host body.
Enter a 1 if a list of contact bodies defines the host body.
Main Index
INSERT 331
Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted
Format
Data
Fixed Free Entry
4th data block
Enter a list of elements or contact bodies which define the host body.
5th data block
If the second field of the 3rd data block is 1, enter a list of elements to
be inserted.
Otherwise, enter a list of nodes to be inserted.
Main Index
332 SPRINGS
Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)
SPRINGS Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)
Description
This data set is used to input any linear or nonlinear springs. For dynamic analysis, a dashpot capability
is offered as well. The spring can be used for mechanical, thermal, and electrical analysis. Note that for
input files that have the VERSION,10 or later parameter, two data blocks are needed to define each linear
or nonlinear spring.
The force in a linear mechanical spring/dashpot is given by:
F = K ( u 2 – u 1 ) + C ( u· 2 – u· 1 )
where K is the spring stiffness, C is the damping coefficient, u2 is the displacement of the degree of
freedom at the second end of the spring (third and fourth fields), and u1 is the displacement of the degree
of freedom at the first end of the spring (first and second fields).
During heat transfer or electrical analysis (regular heat transfer analysis, Joule heating analysis, or
the thermal part of a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis), the spring acts like a link. The dashpot is
not active.
During a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis, springs can act in only the stress part (only 5th field of the
2nd data block is nonzero), or can act in only the thermal part (only 8th field of the 2nd data block is
nonzero), or in both stress and thermal parts (both 5th and 8th fields of the 2nd data block are nonzero).
In the last case, care should be taken to ensure that the degrees of freedom specified are uniformly valid
for both the stress and thermal parts of the coupled run.
If the degrees of freedom are specified as zero for a mechanical run, the spring acts along the line joining
the two nodes. This line direction is updated during an incremental stress analysis only if large
displacement is flagged. If the thermal conduction or electrical conduction is specified for a true direction
spring, the associated degrees of freedom for the spring are assumed as one.
If the second node is specified as zero, the spring is assumed to be fixed to ground along the specified
degree of freedom. The displacement of the ground along the specified degree of freedom is assumed to
be zero. In the thermal part, the temperature of the ground is assumed to be zero. In the electrical part,
the voltage of the ground is assumed to be zero.
Note that for degree of freedom springs, the spring force is positive if the displacement of node 2 along
the specified degree of freedom is greater than the displacement of node 1 along the specified degree of
freedom. Note also that for degree of freedom springs, if user nodal transformations are used for one or
both nodes, the spring force is calculated based on the local transformed degree of freedom. For springs
connected to the ground, the displacement of node 2 along the appropriate degree of freedom is always
zero. For true direction springs, the spring force is positive if the spring is in tension and negative if the
spring is in compression and is independent of any nodal transformations.
Main Index
SPRINGS 333
For a nonlinear spring/dashpot (mechanical, thermal or electrical analysis), the spring stiffness can be
specified in one of three ways:
a. Nonlinear Spring Force: This is defined using the TABLE parameter and TABLE model
definition option. The spring force computed from the multi-variate table is scaled by the
corresponding reference value provided in the 5th, 6th, 8th or 9th field of the 2nd data block.
The gradient of the table is internally calculated and used for the spring stiffness. To facilitate
the gradient calculation, the spring force needs to be specified as a function of: relative
displacement for mechanical springs (type 38), relative velocity for dashpots (type 22),
relative temperature for thermal links (type 12), relative voltage for electrical links (type 31).
In addition, the spring force can be optionally varied as a function of: time (type 1),
normalized time (type 2), increment number (type 3), or normalized increment number (type
4). In thermo-mechanical coupled analysis, the mechanical spring force and damping force
can also be specified as a function of the average temperature of the spring (type 12). In Joule-
heating analysis, the electrical conduction can also be specified as a function of the average
temperature of the spring (type 12). If the value of any independent variable falls beyond its
minimum or maximum value in the table, the last force value associated with that independent
variable is used by default and can be linearly extrapolated by the user if desired. For more
general nonlinearities, option (c) (USPRNG) can be used independently or in conjunction
with option (a).
b. Nonlinear Spring Stiffness: This is defined using the TABLE parameter and TABLE model
definition option. The stiffness value computed from the multi-variate table is scaled by the
corresponding reference value provided in the 5th, 6th, 8th or 9th field of the 2nd data block.
The stiffness can be varied as a function of time (type 1), normalized time (type 2), increment
number (type 3), or normalized increment number (type 4). The spring stiffness can also be
varied as a function of relative displacement for mechanical springs (type 38), relative
velocity for dashpots (type 22), relative temperature for thermal links (type 12), relative
voltage for electrical links (type 31). In thermo-mechanical coupled analysis, the mechanical
spring stiffness and dashpot damping can also be specified as a function of the average
temperature of the spring (type 12). In Joule heating analysis, the electrical conduction can
also be specified as a function of the average temperature of the spring (type 12). If the value
of any independent variable falls beyond its minimum or maximum value in the table, the last
stiffness value associated with that independent variable is used by default and can be linearly
extrapolated by the user if desired. For more general nonlinearities, option (c) (USPRNG) can
be used independently or in conjunction with option (b).
c. The nonlinear spring stiffness can also be specified with the USPRNG user subroutine with
the general relation:
F = F ( u 2 – u 1, u· 2 – u· 1 )
See Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for details.
Main Index
334 SPRINGS
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word SPRINGS.
2nd data block
Enter one data block per spring/dashpot.
1-5 1st I Node to which first end of spring/dashpot will be attached.
6-10 2nd I Degree of freedom at above node to which spring/dashpot will
be attached.
Enter 0 for a spring/dashpot acting in the direction from the first to the
second node (this also requires a 0 on the 4th field).
11-15 3rd I Node to which other end of spring/dashpot will be attached.
Enter 0 if the spring goes from the first end to the ground.
16-20 4th I Degree of freedom at above node to which spring will be attached.
Enter 0 if the spring goes from the first end to the ground.
Enter 0 for a spring/dashpot acting in the direction from the first to the
second node (this also requires a 0 on the 2nd field).
21-30 5th F Reference stiffness of spring or scale factor to force versus displacement
table.
31-40 6th F Reference damping coefficient of dashpot or scale factor to force versus
relative velocity table (for dynamic analysis only).
41-50 7th F Initial force in spring.
51-60 8th F Reference thermal conduction of link or scale factor to flux versus relative
temperature table.
61-70 9th F Reference electrical conduction of link or scale factor to electrical flux
versus relative voltage table.
71-75 10th I Spring ID
76-80 11th I Numerical Stabilizer Flag
3rd data block
Enter one data block per spring/dashpot
1-5 1st I Table ID for nonlinear mechanical stiffness.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for nonlinear dashpot damping.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for nonlinear thermal conduction.
16-20 4th I Table ID for nonlinear electrical conduction.
Main Index
SPRINGS 335
21-25 5th I -1 mechanical stiffness is obtained from gradient values. Force versus
relative displacement table is entered.
1 mechanical stiffness is obtained from direct values. Stiffness versus
relative table is entered.
26-30 6th I -1 dashpot damping is obtained from gradient values. Force versus
relative velocity table is entered.
1 dashpot damping is obtained from direct values. Damping coefficient
versus relative velocity is entered.
31-35 7th I -1 thermal conduction is obtained from gradient values. Flux versus
relative temperature table is entered.
1 thermal conduction is obtained from direct values. Thermal
conduction versus temperature table is entered.
36-40 8th I -1 electrical conduction is obtained from gradient values. Electrical flux
versus relative voltage table is entered.
1 electrical conduction is obtained from direct values. Electrical
conductivity versus voltage table is entered.
Main Index
336 PBUSH
Input Data for Cbush Elements
PBUSH Input Data for Cbush Elements
Description
This data set is used to input all relevant data for cbush elements (2-D - type 194 and 3-D - type 195).
The definition of the cbush coordinate system, cbush nodal offsets and coefficients for stiffness,
damping, mass, stress and strain recovery, thermal and electrical behavior can be provided through these
data blocks. The connectivity for the cbush elements are specified through the CONNECTIVITY model
definition option.
Some details for each of the data specifications are provided herein. The reader is referred to Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 9 for more details.
Cbush Coordinate System

Options are provided to define the local cbush coordinate system along the element, in the global
coordinate system or in a user-defined coordinate system.
For the element coordinate system, the x axis is defined along the element length and forms a
perpendicular triad with the local y and z axes. For 3-D cbush elements, an extra node or an orientation
vector is specified to define the local y-z plane. For large displacement analysis, this local coordinate
system attached to the element is constantly updated.
Alternately, the element coordinate system can be defined along global Cartesian coordinates or in a user-
coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM model definition option. In these options, the
coordinate system remains fixed through the analysis and is not updated for large displacement analysis.
Cbush Nodal Offsets

Options are provided for locating an offset point along the cbush element axis, in the global coordinate
system, or in a user-defined coordinate system. In the first option, the offset point is located along the
line joining the two end nodes of the cbush element. The distance of the offset point along this line from
the first end node is user defined. Alternately, the offset point position can be defined in the global
Cartesian coordinate system or in a user-coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM model
definition option.
For all options, the offset vectors from each cbush end node are internally calculated, and for large
displacement analysis, these offset vectors are updated based on the respective rotations at each end node.
Cbush Properties
Mechanical stiffness and damping properties are defined in the local cbush coordinate system. Stiffness
properties can be specified in coefficient form or through force-displacement curves. Damping properties
are specified as nominal damping either in coefficient form or force-velocity curves, and structural
damping in the form of coefficients. For 2-D cbush elements, up to three coefficients can be specified
and for 3-D cbush elements, up to six coefficients can be specified.
Main Index
PBUSH 337
The force in a linear mechanical cbush element is given by:

{ F } = [ K ] { u 2 – u 1 } + [ C ] { u· 2 – u· 1 }
where { F } is the force vector in the local coordinate system of the cbush element, [ K ] is a diagonal
matrix of the cbush stiffness coefficients, [ C ] is a diagonal matrix of the cbush damping coefficients,
{ u 2 } is the vector of displacement degrees of freedom in the local cbush coordinate system at the second
end of the cbush, and { u1 } is the vector of displacement degrees of freedom in the local cbush coordinate
system at the first end of the cbush. [ C ] includes the contributions of nominal damping, structural
damping, and stiffness proportional damping. If the second node is specified as zero, the cbush element
is assumed to be fixed to ground with all the ground degrees of freedom taken as zero.
Note that for cbush elements defined in the global coordinate or user-coordinate system, the cbush force
for a particular dof is positive if the displacements of node 2 along the specified degrees of freedom is
greater than the displacement of node 1 along the specified degrees of freedom. For cbush elements
defined in the element coordinate system, the cbush force is positive if the cbush is in tension and
negative if the cbush is in compression.
Field Analysis
During heat transfer or electrical analysis (regular heat transfer analysis, Joule heating analysis, or the
thermal part of a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis), the cbush element acts like a link. The dashpot
is not active. For the ground cbush element in the thermal part, the temperature of the ground is assumed
to be zero and in the electrical part, the voltage of the ground is assumed to be zero.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word PBUSH.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of distinct sets of PBUSH entries.
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of PBUSH data (default to standard input).
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to suppress printout.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter PBUSH ID.
6-10 2nd I Method to enter cbush spring behavior (default = 0).
Enter 0 if no stiffness.
Enter 1 if stiffness is entered in coefficient form.
Enter 2 if stiffness is specified via force-displacement tables.
Main Index
338 PBUSH
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Method to enter cbush damping behavior (default=0).
Enter 0 for no damping.
Enter 1 if nominal damping is entered in coefficient form.
Enter 2 if nominal damping is specified via force-velocity tables.
Enter 3 if structural damping coefficients are entered.
Enter 4 if both nominal damping and structural damping are specified in
coefficient form.
Enter 5 if nominal damping is specified via force-velocity tables and
structural damping is entered in coefficient form.
16-20 4th I Enter node ID G0 (default 0).
21-25 5th I Enter Coordinate System ID CID.
Enter -1 if element coordinate system is used. For 3-D, either G0 or Xi can
be used to define the local y-z plane.
Enter 0 if global coordinate system is to be used.
Enter > 0 if user-defined coordinate system given via COORD SYSTEM
option is to be used.
26-35 6th F Enter X1.
Note: The local y-z plane for each 3-D cbush element are defined through either G0 or Xi. Xi are
the components of an orientation vector measured from the first end-node GA in the
displacement coordinate system at node GA. Node ID G0 is an alternate method to suppy this
orientation vector. The G0 method supercedes the Xi method. The orientation vector is
measured from end GA to G0.
To use either of them, CID (field 5) should be set to -1. CI D ≥ 0 supercedes any definition
of G0 or Xi
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter Offset Coordinate System ID (OCID)
Enter -2 if no offsets are to be provided.
Enter -1 if offset point is located on the line joining the two nodes. The
value of offset is provided by the 2nd field.
Enter 0 if offset point coordinates in fields 3 - 5 are given in the global
coordinate system.
Main Index
PBUSH 339
Format
Data
Enter > 0 if offset point coordinates in fields 3 - 5 are given in a user-
defined coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM option.
6 - 15 2nd F Enter the value of S for the location of the cbush spring-dashpot along the
line joining the two end-nodes.
16-25 3rd F Enter S1
26-35 4th F Enter S2
36-45 5th F Enter S3
Notes: The value of S defined in field 2 is used with OCID = -1 in field 1. 0≤S≤1. S is
measured from end GA. (1-S) is the distance from end GB.
Si in fields 3 - 5 are used with OC ID ≥ 0 in field 1. They refer to the components of the
vector measured from the origin to the offset point.
OCID = -2 is set when no offsets are to be provided. It is commonly used when only the
local x stiffness is defined along the cbush element and effectively behaves like a
true-direction spring. This is also the equivalent of the CBUSH1D element in
MD Nastran.
Enter 5th and 6th data blocks if field 2 of 3rd data block (method to enter stiffness) is 1.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Enter reference stiffness in the first direction.
11-20 2nd F Enter reference stiffness in the second direction.
21-30 3rd F Enter reference stiffness in the third direction.
31-40 4th F Enter reference stiffness in the fourth direction.
41-50 5th F Enter reference stiffness in the fifth direction.
51-60 6th F Enter reference stiffness in the sixth direction.
6th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the first direction.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the second direction.
11-15 3rd I Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the third direction.
16-20 4th I Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the fourth direction.
21-25 5th I Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the fifth direction.
26-30 6th I Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the sixth direction.
Enter 7th and 8th data blocks if field 2 of the 3rd data block (method to enter stiffness) is 2.
Main Index
340 PBUSH
Format
Data
7th data block
1-10 1st F Enter reference force in the first direction.
11-20 2nd F Enter reference force in the second direction.
21-30 3rd F Enter reference force in the third direction.
31-40 4th F Enter reference force in fourth direction.
41-50 5th F Enter reference force in fifth direction.
51-60 6th F Enter reference force in sixth direction.
8th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the first direction.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the
second direction.
11-15 3rd I Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the
third direction.
16-20 4th I Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the
fourth direction.
21-25 5th I Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the fifth direction.
26-30 6th I Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the
sixth direction.
Notes: Up to six coefficients and table IDs can be provided in data blocks 5 - 8. Note that for
the tables referenced in data blocks 6 and 8, the stiffness or force can be a function of up
to four independent variables. For data block 8, a mandatory independent variable type is
displacement. Other independent variables in the tables referenced by data blocks 6 or 8
can be time, normalized time, increment number, normalized increment number, x, y, z
original and current position coordinates, frequency (for harmonic analysis), temperature.
For 3-D cbush elements, the first three directions refer to x, y and z translations while the
4 - 6 directions refer to x, y and z rotations. For 2-D cbush elements, the first two
directions refer to x and y translations while the 3rd direction refers to z rotation.
Enter 9th and 10th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 1 or 4.
9th data block
1-10 1st F Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in first direction.
11-20 2nd F Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the second direction
21-30 3rd F Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the third direction.
31-40 4th F Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the fourth direction.
41-50 5th F Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the fifth direction.
51-60 6th F Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the sixth direction.
Main Index
PBUSH 341
Format
Data
10th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the first direction.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the second direction.
11-15 3rd I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the third direction.
16-20 4th I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the fourth direction.
21-25 5th I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the fifth direction.
26-30 6th I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the sixth direction.
Enter 11th and 12th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 2 or 5.
11th data block
1-10 1st F Enter reference force in the first direction.
11-20 2nd F Enter reference force in the second direction.
21-30 3rd F Enter reference force in the third direction.
31-40 4th F Enter reference force in the fourth direction.
41-50 5th F Enter reference force in the fifth direction.
51-60 6th F Enter reference force in the sixth direction.
12th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
first direction.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
second direction.
11-15 3rd I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
third direction.
16-20 4th I Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
fourth direction.
fifth direction.
sixth direction.
Enter 13th and 14th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 3, 4 or 5.
13th data block
1-10 1st F Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the first direction.
11-20 2nd F Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the second direction.
21-30 3rd F Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the third direction.
Main Index
342 PBUSH
Format
Data
31-40 4th F Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the fourth direction.
41-50 5th F Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the fifth direction.
51-60 6th F Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the sixth direction.
14th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the first direction.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the second direction.
11-15 3rd I Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the third direction.
16-20 4th I Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the fourth direction.
21-25 5th I Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the fifth direction.
26-30 6th I Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the sixth direction.
Notes: Up to six coefficients and tables can be provided in data blocks 9- 14. These coefficients
and associated table IDs are used for transient dynamic analysis. Data blocks 9, 10, 13,
and 14 can also be used for harmonic analysis with complex-valued damping. Note that
for the tables referenced in data blocks 10, 12, and 14, the damping coefficient or force
can be a function of upto four independent variables. For data block 12, a mandatory
independent variable type is velocity. Other independent variables in the tables
referenced by data blocks 10, 12, or 14 can be time, normalized time, increment number,
normalized increment number, x, y, z position coordinates, frequency (for harmonic
analysis), temperature.
For 3-D cbush elements, the first three directions refer to x, y and z translations while the
four - six directions refer to x, y and z rotations. For 2-D cbush elements, the first two
directions refer to x and y translations while the third direction refers to z rotation.
15th data block
1-10 1st F Enter stress recovery coefficient for the translational components
(default = 0).
11-20 2nd F Enter stress recovery components for the rotational components (default
= 0).
21-30 3rd F Enter strain recovery coefficient for the translational components
(default = 0).
31-40 4th F Enter strain recovery coefficients for the rotational components
(default = 0).
41-50 5th F Enter lumped translational mass.
51-60 6th F Enter lumped rotational mass.
Note: Fields 5 and 6 refer to the lumped mass values at each end-node. They are used for
dynamic/harmonic analysis.
Enter 16th and 17th data blocks only for analyses where heat transfer plays a role (e.g., thermal
analysis, thermo-mechanical coupled, Joule heating, etc.)
Main Index
PBUSH 343
Format
Data
16th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the thermal conduction coefficient.
11-20 2nd F Enter the electrical resistance coefficient.
17th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the thermal conduction coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the electrical resistance coefficient.
18th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with this PBUSH ID.
Main Index
344 CFAST
Shell Patch Fastener Connection
CFAST Shell Patch Fastener Connection
Description
The CFAST option defines a flexible connection between two surface patches. The surfaces may be either
shell elements or faces of continuum elements in 3-D applications and truss, beam, axisymmetric shell
elements or edges of continuum elements in 2-D applications. The PFAST option is used in conjunction
with the CFAST option to define the characteristics of the connection which behaves like a generalized
spring. This option internally creates a bushing element (element type 194 or 195 for 2-D or 3-D analysis,
respectively) and a set of tyings to connect the bushing nodes to the parts of the structure that are to
be connected.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CFAST.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of CFAST data to follow (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input; defaults to input file.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printout.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the value of identifier of CFAST. Leave blank to allow internally
created identifier.
6-15 2nd A Enter the method of connection as one of “PROP” or “ELEM”.
16-20 3rd I Enter the value of the property identifier of a PFAST entry.
21-25 4th I Enter the value of GS, the node number of the CFAST location.
If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 7, 8, and 9.
GS is ignored if GA in field 5 and GB in field 6 are both nonzero.
26-30 5th I Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CFAST.
If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A.
If not blank and GB in field 6 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.
31-35 6th I Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CFAST.
If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.
If not blank and GA in field 5 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.
36-45 7th E Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.
Main Index
CFAST 345
Format
Data
46-55 8th E Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.
56-65 9th E Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.
66-75 10th A Enter the name of the CFAST. This name is only used for output purposes.
If left blank, a default name is given as “cf” followed by the order number
of the CFAST in the input sequence left-padded with zeros to obtain a
ten-character string.
For the PROP method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5 1st I Not used.
6-10 2nd I Not used.
5th data block
1-32 1st A Enter the set name of SetA containing the items to search from for the first
patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto an element from this set, and
all the elements comprising the patch are automatically selected from the
set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set entered in the 2nd
field of this data block, but the search procedure is facilitated if it is.
33-64 2nd A Enter the set name of SetB containing the items to search from for the
second patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto an element from this
set, and all the elements comprising the patch are automatically selected
from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set entered
in the 1st field of this data block, but the search procedure is facilitated
if it is.
For the ELEM method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the element number identifying the first patch.
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 3rd field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto
this element/face, and the elements comprising the patch are
automatically selected. GS or GA must have a projection onto this
element/face.
6-10 2nd I Enter the element number identifying the second patch.
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 4th field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto
this element/face, and the elements comprising the patch are
automatically selected. GS or GB must have a projection onto this
element/face.
Main Index
346 CFAST
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 1st field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell
elements).
16-20 4th I Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 2nd field
elements).
5th data block
1-32 1st A Enter the set name of SetA containing the items to search from for the first
patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto the master element specified
in the 1st field of the 4th data block and all further elements comprising
the patch are automatically selected from the set.
This entry is required for continuum elements, but is not required for
shells.
33-64 2nd A Enter the set name of SetB containing the items to search from for the
second patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto the master element
specified in the 2nd field of the 4th data block and all further elements
comprising the patch are automatically selected from the set.
This entry is required for continuum elements, but is not required for
shells.
Main Index
PFAST 347
CFAST Fastener Property
PFAST CFAST Fastener Property
Description
Defines the CFAST fastener property values.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PFAST.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of PFAST data to follow (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input file.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printout.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the PFAST property identification number.
6-15 2nd E Enter the diameter of the fastener.
16-20 3rd I Specify the element stiffness coordinate system.
Enter -1 to use element connectivity to define x-axis. Value in 4th field
is ignored.
Enter 0 to use global x-axis as the element x-axis (default).
Enter n to use the x-axis of the user’s defined coordinate system to define
the element x-axis.
30-35 4th I Define if the coordinate system in the 3rd field is absolute or relative.
Enter 0 for relative (default). The element y- and z-axis is determined
internally. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information.
Enter 1 for absolute. It is only valid when the value in the 3rd field is
greater than -1. The selected coordinate system is used for the element.
36-45 5th E Enter the mass of the fastener.
4th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the reference stiffness value in direction 1.
11-20 2nd E Enter the reference stiffness value in direction 2.
21-30 3rd E Enter the reference stiffness value in direction 3.
31-40 4th E Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 1.
Main Index
348 PFAST
CFAST Fastener Property
Format
Data
41-50 5th E Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 2.
51-60 6th E Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 3
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the stiffness value in direction 1.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the stiffness value in direction 2.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the stiffness value in direction 3.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the rotational stiffness value in direction 1.
6th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the reference damping value in direction 1.
11-20 2nd E Enter the reference damping value in direction 2.
21-30 3rd E Enter the reference damping value in direction 3.
31-40 4th E Enter the reference rotational damping value in direction 1.
7th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the damping value in direction 1
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the damping value in direction 2
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the damping value in direction 3
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the rotational damping value in direction 1.
Main Index
CWELD 349
Weld or Fastener Element Connection
CWELD Weld or Fastener Element Connection
Description
This option allows the CWELD connector information to be specified. A and B refer to the two surfaces
(shell elements or solid element faces), that are to be connected by the CWELD. Patch-to-patch
connections can be shell-to-shell, shell-to-solid, and solid-to-solid. Point-to-patch connections can be
point-to-shell or point-to-solid. For each CWELD connection, a complete set of data is entered. The first
data block contains:
• EWID, METHOD, PWID, MCID, BTYPE, TTYPE, α, WGHT, IPROJ, CWNAME
EWID is the connector beam element number and it may be left blank. In that case, Marc
automatically generates the element, but its end nodes GA and GB can still be entered. If GA
and/or GB are not specified, Marc automatically generates the missing nodes as well. If EWID is
not blank, the element may be defined in the CONNECTIVITY option, but this is not required. If
it is not defined in the CONNECTIVITY option, the nodes GA and/or GB are automatically
generated if they were left blank. If the element is defined in the CONNECTVITY option, its
definition must be made after the CWELD option in order to take effect. In that case, the element
is redefined in terms of its type and its nodes. METHOD defines the connection method and is
one of PARTPAT, ELPAT, ELEMID, GRIDID, or ALIGN. PWID is the identification number
of a corresponding PWELD property entry. BTYPE is the beam element type used for the
connector element. The orientation of the beam cross section is computed by using the
GEOMETRY or PWELD input data. Alternatively the orientation of the beam cross section can be
specified by MCID, the identification number of a coordinate system defined in the
COORD SYSTEM option. The value α is the angle over which the beam cross section is rotated
about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation. TTYPE specifies the connection type for the
auxiliary nodes. WGHT is the exponent used in computing distance weight factors for RBE3
constraints. IPROJ is a flag to control the projection of auxiliary nodes to their respective
patches. CWNAME is an optional CWELD name (character string) used only in the output file to
reference the CWELD.
Depending on the connection method, one or more data blocks follow.
• For PARTPAT, they contain: GS, SetA, SetB, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS
• For ELPAT, they contain: GS, SHIDA, SHIDB, GA, GB, XY, YS, ZS, FaceA, FaceB, SetA,
SetB
• For ELEMID, they contain: GS, SHIDA, SHIDB, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS, FaceA, FaceB
• For GRIDID, they contain: GS, SPTYP, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS followed by GA1...GA8,
GB1...GB8 where SPTYP defines the surface patch type on both sides of the weld and can be
QQ, TT, QT, TQ, Q, or T and GAi are the nodes of patch A and GBi are the nodes of patch B.
• For ALIGN, they contain: GA, GB. No additional data is needed.
For all methods, the pairing surface patch information is required, which identifies the master patches
and, in addition, for the indirect connection methods, the regions from where to select the secondary
patches. It is possible to have point connections on either side when the master patch information for that
Main Index
350 CWELD
side is omitted (i.e., the SetA or SetB for PARTPAT, the SHIDA or SHIDB for ELPAT and ELMID or
the GA1..GA8 or GB1..GB8 for GRIDID is left blank). It is not possible to make point connections to
automatically generated nodes. The node GS is the approximate CWELD location node or CWELD
reference node. If GS is blank, the coordinates may be entered directly through XS, YS, and ZS and a
GS-node is automatically created. If GA and GB are both entered explicitly, the GS input is ignored;
otherwise, the GS input is used for the projection onto the surfaces on each side of the CWELD to
determine the end locations of the beam. If GS is ignored, GA and GB are projected onto their respective
surfaces. If GS and GA are not specified but GB is, then GB is used as GS. If GS and GB are not specified,
but GA is, then GA is used as GS. If GS, GA, and GB are not specified, then the coordinates XS, YS, ZS
are used. If GS is specified and maximally one of the GA or GB, then GS is used for the projections on
both sides and GA or GB are ignored for this purpose. If one side of the connector makes a point
connection and the connector node for that side has been left blank and the GS-node has been specified,
the point connection is made to the GS-node and the GS-node is projected onto the opposite side to
determine the location of the other connector node. If the node on the opposite side also makes a point
connection, the node for that side must have been specified. SHIDA and SHIDB are element numbers
defining master patches. For solid elements, face information must be entered as well to fully identify the
patch. For shell elements, the face information is not required. Face identifiers for FaceA and FaceB
follow the definitions specified in the FACE IDS option described in Marc Volume C: Program Input.
Valid set types specifying the sets SetA and SetB with patches to search from when finding the
projections are element and face sets for shell elements in 3-D models, face sets for continuum elements
in 3-D models, element and edge sets for truss, beam and axysmmetric shell elements in 2-D models and
edge sets for continuum elements in 2-D models. Below faces should be understood as edges when
entering the data for a 2-D model.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CWELD.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of CWELD data to follow (optional).
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printing of the CWELD data during this option.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the element number (EWID) of the connector element between the
patches.
Leave blank when the automatic element generation is used.
6-15 2nd A Enter the method of connection as one of PARTPAT, ELPAT, ELEMID,
GRIDID, ALIGN.
16-20 3rd I Enter the value of PWID, the property identifier of a PWELD entry.
Main Index
CWELD 351
Format
Data
30-35 4th I Enter the value of MCID, the identification number of a coordinate system
defined in the COORD SYSTEM option to define the orientation of the
beam cross section. Leave blank or enter 0 if the automatic procedure is
to be used.
36-40 5th I Enter the value for BTYPE (the Marc beam element type to be used for the
connection). Default is 98 in a 3-D and 5 in a 2-D analysis when EWID is
blank or the element type used on the CONNECTIVITY input when EWID
is not blank.
41-45 6th I Enter the value for TTYPE (the type of constraint used to connect the
auxiliary nodes in the CWELD).
Enter 0 (default) for RBE3 constraints.
Enter 44 for Kirchhoff constraints.
Enter 80 for combined RBE2 and RBE3 constraints.
46-55 7th E Enter the value for α, the angle over which to rotate the cross section
about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation.
56-65 8th E Enter the value for WGHT, the RBE3 distance weighting exponent.
Defaults to the value given on the SWLDPRM input.
66-70 9th I Enter the value for IPROJ.
Enter 0 (default) if the auxiliary nodes should not be relocated.to their
projections on the finite element model.
Enter 1 to have the auxiliary nodes relocated to their projections on the
finite element model.
71-80 10th A Enter the name of the CWELD. This name is only used for output
purposes.
If left blank, a default name will be given as “cw” followed by the order
number of the CWELD in the input sequence left-padded with zeros to
obtain a ten-character string.
For the PARTPAT method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate CWELD
location.
6-10 2nd I Not used; enter zero.
11-15 3rd I Not used; enter zero.
Main Index
352 CWELD
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD.
If not blank and GB in field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.
21-25 5th I Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD.
If not blank and GA in field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.
26-35 6th E Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.
36-45 7th E Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.
46-55 8th E Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.
5th data block
1-32 1st A Enter the setname of SetA containing the patches to search from for side
A of the connection. The GS or GA node is projected onto a patch from
this set and all further patches involved in the connection are
automatically selected from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint
with the set entered in the 2nd field of this data block, but the search
procedure is facilitated if it is.
If left blank, a point connection is assumed on this side.
33-64 2nd A Enter the setname of SetB containing the patches to search from for side
B of the connection. The GS or GB node is projected onto a patch from this
set and all further patches involved in the connection are automatically
selected from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set
entered in the 1st field of this data block, but the search procedure is
facilitated if it is.
If left blank, a point connection is assumed on this side.
For the ELPAT method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
location.
6-10 2nd I Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side A of
the connection.
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GA node will be projected
onto this patch.
Main Index
CWELD 353
Format
Data
If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.
11-15 3rd I Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side B of
the connection
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 10 field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GB node will be projected
onto this patch.
If not blank and GB on field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.
If not blank and GA on field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.
elements).
61-65 10th I Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 3rd field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for
shell elements).
5th data block
1-32 1st A Enter the setname of SetA containing the patches to search from for side
A of the connection. The GS or GA node is projected onto the master patch
specified in the 2nd field of the 4th data block and all further patches
involved in the connection are automatically selected from the set.
If the master patch is a shell element, this field can be left blank and all
shell elements in the model are considered.
If the master patch is the face of a continuum element, a face set is
required here.
Main Index
354 CWELD
Format
Data
33-64 2nd A Enter the setname of SetB containing the patches to search from for side
B of the connection. The GS or GB node is projected onto the master patch
specified in the 3rd field of the 4th data block and all further patches
involved in the connection are automatically selected from the set.
If the master patch is a shell element, this field can be left blank and all
shell elements in the model are considered.
If the master patch is the face of a continuum element, a face set is
required here.
For the ELEMID method, enter the 4th data block as follows:
4th data block
location. If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8.
GS is ignored if GA on field 4 and GB on field 5 are both nonzero.
6-10 2nd I Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side A of
the connection.
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GA node is projected onto
this patch.
11-15 3rd I Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side B of
the connection.
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 10th field of
this data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GB node is projected
onto this patch.
If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A
If blank,GS is used for the projection on side B.
Main Index
CWELD 355
Format
Data
elements).
61-65 10th I Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 3rd field
elements).
For the GRIDID method, enter the 4th, 5th and 6th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate cweld
location.
If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8. GS is
ignored if GA on field 4 and GB on field 5 are both nonzero.
16-20 4th I Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD. If blank, GS is used
for the projection on side A.
21-25 5th I Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD. If blank, GS is
used for the projection on side B.
56-65 9th A Enter the value of SPTYP defining the surface patch combination being
connected as one of QQ, TT, QT, TQ, Q, or T.
This field is optional and may be left blank.
5th data block
If this data block is blank, a point connection is assumed on side A.
1-5 1st I Enter the node number GA1.
6-10 2nd I Enter the node number GA2.
11-15 3rd I Repeat until all nodes of the patch on side A have been defined. A patch
can have up to 8 nodes.
Main Index
356 CWELD
Format
Data
6th data block
If this data block is blank, a point connection is assumed on side B.
1-5 1st I Enter the node number GB1.
6-10 2nd I Enter the node number GB2.
11-15 3rd I Repeat until all nodes of the patch on side B have been defined. A patch
can have up to 8 nodes.
For the ALIGN method, enter the 4th data block as follows:
4th data block
1-5 1st I Not used; leave blank or enter 0.
6-10 2nd I Not used; leave blank or enter 0.
11-15 3rd I Not used; leave blank or enter 0.
16-20 4th I Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD. May be blank if the
element is entered through the CONNECTIVITY option.
21-25 5th I Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD. May be blank if
the element is entered through the CONNECTIVITY option.
Main Index
PWELD 357
Connector Element Property
PWELD Connector Element Property
Description
The properties of the cweld connector element are entered through the PWELD option. The geometrical
properties of the connector element between the two patches may also be entered here instead of entering
them through the GEOMETRY option. The PWELD option contains the following information:
PWID, D, MID, LDMIN, LDMAX, WTYPE
EGEOM1, EGEOM2, ..., EGEOM8
The first line defines the general CWELD characteristics. If the second field on the first line (D) is
nonzero, it represents the characteristic diameter (3-D analysis) or thickness (2-D anlaysis) of the
CWELD that will be used to compute the positions of the auxiliary nodes. It also defines the cross-section
properties if no further geometric data is supplied. PWID is the PWELD identifier referenced on the
CWELD option. LDMIN and LDMAX are the minimum and maximum length to diameter ratios of the
CWELD. WTYPE defines the connection type as either a general connection or a spotweld connection.
MID is a material identification number.
The second line defines the geometrical properties of the element in the same way they are defined in the
GEOMETRY option for the particular element type. The data required for each element type can be found
in Marc Volume B: Element Library. This second line is always required even when the characteristic
dimension (diameter or thickness) D has been defined and no further data is needed. In that case, it should
be left blank (or contain zeros only) and in 3-D models, the cross section will be circular with diameter
D or in 2-D models, the cross section will be rectangular with thickness D and unit width. If the
characteristic dimension D on the first line is zero and the first field on the second line is nonzero, a
characteristic dimension will be estimated from the geometric properties. If the first field on the second
line is zero, a nonzero value for D is required on the first line when using a method that generates auxiliary
nodes and patches for its connections because it is currently not possible to estimate a characteristic
diameter from BEAM SECT data. If the EGEOM4, EGEOM5, and EGEOM6 fields are all blank or zero, the
local directions of the connector element are determined by one of the two procedures outlined in the
Connector Orientation section of Marc Volume A: Theory and User information; otherwise, these values
are used to define the local directions. In the latter case, it is possible to use a coordinate system defined
at the first node of the element, but it is not possible to offset its nodes. If the geometrical properties are
defined in both the PWELD and GEOMETRY options for the same connector elment, the properties
defined in the PWELD option are used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PWELD.
Main Index
358 PWELD
Connector Element Property
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of PWELD data to follow (optional).
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the value for PWID, the PWELD identification number.
6-15 2nd E Enter the characteristic dimension D of the CWELD. If blank or zero,
Marc will make an estimate if the cross-section data are not entered
through the BEAM SECT parameter.
In a 3-D analysis, D is the characteristic diameter.
In a 2-D analysis, D is the characteristic thickness and the section will
have a unit width.
16-20 3rd I Enter the value for MID; a material identification number to assign the
material properties.
21-30 4th E Enter the value of LDMIN; the smallest ratio of length to diameter for
stiffness calculation
Default is DLDMIN, which defaults to 0.2 if not specified on the
SWLDPRM option.
31-40 5th E Enter the value of LDMAX, the largest ratio of length to diameter for
stiffness calculation.
Default is DLDMAX, which defaults to 5.0 if not specified on the
SWLDPRM option.
41-50 6th A Enter the value for WTYPE, the type of connection as SPOT for a spotweld
connector or leave blank for a general connector.
4th data block
1-10 1st E EGEOM1
11-20 2nd E EGEOM2
21-30 3rd E EGEOM3
31-40 4th E EGEOM4
41-50 5th E EGEOM5
51-60 6th E EGEOM6
61-70 7th E EGEOM7
71-80 8th E EGEOM8
Main Index
SWLDPRM 359
Parameters for CWELD Connectors
SWLDPRM Parameters for CWELD Connectors
Description
A number of global parameters that control the behaviour of CWELD and CFAST connections and their
output to the jobid.out file can be entered through this model definition option. These parameters and
their descriptions are summarized in Table 3-3.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SWLDPRM.
2nd data block
1-10 1st A Enter the name of the first parameter.
11-… 2nd E or I Enter the value for the first parameter.
…-… 3rd A Enter the name of the second parameter.
…-… 4th E or I Enter the value for the second parameter.
A maximum of four parameter,value pairs can be entered per line, but it may also be less. The
parameter,value pairs can appear in any order. A parameter and its value cannot occur in different lines;
they must appear on the same line. At least one pair is required per line. The second data block can be
repeated as many times as desired. If a parameter is defined more than once, the last assigned value is the
active value.
Table 3-3 SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions

Name Type Default Description
CHKRUN Integer > 0 0 This parameter is available in MD Nastran but has no
(0 or 1) meaning in Marc and is ignored.
GSMOVE Integer > 0 0 Maximum number of times GS is moved in case a
complete projection of all points has not been found.
NREDIA 0 < Integer < 4 0 Maximum number of times the characteristic diameter
D is reduced in half in case a complete projection of all
points has not been found.
Main Index
360 SWLDPRM
Table 3-3 SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions (continued)

PRTSW 0 < Integer < 4 0 Parameter to control the CWELD/CFAST diagnostic
output to the Marc output file (jobid.out).
0 = no diagnostic output
1 = print errors only
2 = print errors and warnings only
3 = print projection diagnostics with no tying details
4 = print all diagnostics
GSPROJ -90 < Real < 90 20.0 Maximum angle allowed between the normal vectors of
master patch A and master patch B. The connection will
not be generated if the angle between these two normal
vectors is greater than the value of GSPROJ. If GSPROJ
is negative, the program will always accept the
connection and will only issue a warning if the angle is
larger than |GSPROJ| (see Figure 9-62 in Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information).
GSCURV -90 < Real < 90 20.0 Maximum angle allowed between the normal vectors of
a patch to which an auxiliary node projects and its
corresponding auxiliary and master patches. It provides
a measure to monitor the curvature of a surface and to
recognize patches that belong to, for example, stiffeners.
A connection is not generated if the angle between the
normal vectors is greater than 90-GSCURV meaning
that the patches are almost normal to each other. In that
case, the patch is rejected and the search proceeds to the
next patch in the list. If the angle is between zero and
GSCURV, no message is displayed. If the angle is between
GSCURV and 90-GSCURV, a large angle warning is
displayed. The following three tests are performed in the
order given below when GSCURV is positive:
If 0 < angle < GSCURV => OK
If GSCURVE < angle < 90-GSCURV => trigger a warning.
If angle > 90-GSCURV => reject.
Note that the warning condition is never triggered when
GSCURV > 45 as it is overruled by the reject condition.
If GSCURV is negative, the projection is always accepted
and a warning is issued when the angle is larger than
|GSCURV| (see Figure 9-62 in Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information)
Main Index
SWLDPRM 361

GSTOL Real 0.0 Maximum allowable distance of the node GS to its
projection on a patch. IF GSTOL is positive, the distance
is relative to the characteristic CWELD/CFAST diameter
D, (the tolerance is GSTOL*D). If GSTOL is negative, the
distance is absolute (i.e., the tolerance is -GSTOL). If GS
is used for the projection together with one of the
methods PARTPAT/PROP or ELPAT/ELEM, an error is
issued if the distance is too large. If GA and GB are used
for the projection or if one of the ELEMID or GRIDID
methods is used, the test only issues a warning if the
distance is too large. If GSTOL is zero, any distance
is accepted.
PROJTOL 0.0 < Real < 0.2 0.0 Tolerance to accept the projected point GA or GB if the
computed coordinates of the projection point lie outside
the patch boundary, but are located within
PROJTOL*(dimension of the patch).
ACTVTOL Integer > 0 1111 Parameter controlling the behavior of PROJTOL for the
different CWELD/CFAST connection methods. This
Integer < 2211
parameter is entered as an integer and is converted to a
four-character string. If its value is less than 1000, the
string is prepended with zeros. The first character (from
the left) controls the behavior when the PARTPAT/PROP
method is used. The second controls the behavior when
the ELPAT/ELEM method is used. The third controls the
behavior when the ELEMID method is used and the
fourth controls the behavior when the GRIDID method is
used. For ALIGN, the PROJTOL tolerance has no
significance. Each digit ( d i ) in the string can have the
value 0 or 1 or 2, where the value 2 only has significance
for the ELPAT/ELEM or PARTPAT/PROP methods. The
values have the following meaning:
0 = PROJTOL is completely deactivated
Main Index
362 SWLDPRM

ACTVTOL 1 = PROJTOL is activated for ELEMID and GRIDID,
(cont) PROJTOL is activated in initial projections for
ELPAT/ELEM, PROJTOL is only activated over free
edges of the patch in auxiliary projections for
ELPAT/ELEM, and in initial and auxiliary
projections for PARTPAT/PROP. Free edges have
no neighbors within the set that defines the
complete surface.
2 = PROJTOL is always activated
CWSETS Integer > 0 0 Parameter to control the automatic creation of four
(0 or 1) element sets with the elements involved in the
CWELD/CFAST connections.
0 = the sets are not created
1 = four sets are created automatically:
fastener_all_beams_inc000”, the set
containing all connector beam elements.
fastener_all_faces_sidea_inc0000,
the set containing all elements with patches on side
A of the connection.
fastener_all_faces_sideb_inc0000,
the set containing all elements with patches on side
B of the connection.
fastener_all_warnings_inc0000, the set
containing all elements involved in CWELD/CFAST
warning messages.
Defining sets with any of these names must be avoided
and are considered an error.
MAXEXP Integer > 0 2 Parameter to control the maximum number of
expansions in the search for projections of the auxiliary
nodes. First, the master patch is tried. If no projection is
found on the master patch, a first expansion is made
including all neighboring patches of the master patch. If
no projection is found on any of the new patches, a
second expansion is made including all neighbors of the
patches tried so far. This process continues until the
number of expansions exceeds MAXEXP. Two patches are
neighbors if they share at least one node in their
connectivities.
DLDMIN Real > 0.0 0.2 Default value for LDMIN; the smallest ratio of length to
characteristic diameter.
Main Index
SWLDPRM 363

DLDMAX Real > 0.0 5.0 Default value for LDMAX; the largest ratio of length to
characteristic diameter.
MAXITR Integer > 0 25 The maximum number of iterations allowed in the
iteration process for finding the projection on a patch.
EPSITR Real > 0.0 1.0E-5 Tolerance to terminate the iteration process for finding
the projection on a patch. If the parametric coordinate
change in an iteration is less than EPSITR, the projection
is accepted as converged.
DELMAX Real > 0.0 0.1 Maximum allowable parametric coordinate change
during the iteration process for finding the projection on
a patch. At first DELMAX is not activated (i.e., the
parametric coordinate change is not limited during the
iteration process). The parameter is only activated when
the full Newton Raphson iteration process for a
projection did not converge. In that case, the iteration
process is restarted with DELMAX activated.
CWSPOT 0 < Integer < 3 1 Parameter to choose the method for modifying the
beam length.
1 = scale the stiffness of the beam
2 = reposition the end nodes of the beam
3 = reposition the auxiliary patch nodes and the end
nodes of the beam.
RBE3WT Real 0.0 Default RBE3 distance weighting exponent.
The weight factor for each retained node in a RBE3
1
involved in a CWELD/CFAST connection is: f i = ----n-
di
where
fi is the weighting factor for retained node i.
di is the distance from the tied node to retained node i
n is the weighting exponent RBE3WT.
Negative values for RBE3WT are not recommended,
since they result in heavier weighting for nodes further
away. The default results in uniform weighting
( fi ) = 1 .
Main Index
364 SWLDPRM

BOXING -1 < Integer < 1 0 Parameter to control the boxing algorithm used to speed
up the search for master patches when connection
method PARTPAT/PROP is used.
-1 =The boxing algorithm is always deactivated
0 = The boxing algorithm may or may not be activated
depending on the number of elements in the sets.
1 = The boxing algorithm is always activated
Main Index
SUPERELEM (Model Definition) 365
Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface
SUPERELEM (Model Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface

Definition)
Description
This option triggers Marc to perform the Craig-Bampton method of Component Mode Synthesis and
generate a Modal Neutral File (MNF) that can be uploaded into MD Adams models to represent flexible
components. The option allows direct definition of the boundary or interface degrees of freedom. The
option also allows automatic definition of interface degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact
with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint
analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are not known a priori. It also allows the specification
of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The
two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies are consolidated into one node with six degrees of
freedom before exporting to the MNF.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SUPERELEM.
2nd data block
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to generate MNF.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs. Data blocks 3a and 4a may be repeated if needed.
A. List of Interface Degrees of Freedom.
3a data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of degrees of freedom.
4a data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of interface nodes.
B. List of Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of all nodes in contact with
these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.
3b data block
1-5 1st I Enter -1.
4b data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of rigid contact bodies.
Main Index
366 SUPERELEM (Model Definition)
Format
Data
C. List of Load-controlled Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of the control
nodes of these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.
3c data block
1-5 1st I Enter -2.
4c data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of load-controlled rigid contact bodies.
Main Index
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition) 367
Create DMIG of Substructure
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Create DMIG of Substructure

Definition)
Description
This option allows the creation of a DMIG file containing the stiffness associated with the degrees of
freedom specified here. This DMIG may be subsequently read into Marc or Nastran. The option allows
direct definition of the degrees of freedom. The option also allows automatic definition of interface
degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful
for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are
not known a priori. It also allows the specification of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes
of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies
are consolidated into one node with six degrees of freedom before exporting to the DMIG.
This option can only occur once in the analysis. However, it may be used in either the model definition
or the load increment section.
The DMIG will be written to file jidname_dmigst_inc, where:
jidname is the job name

inc is the increment number
Note: If a node is subsequently going to be transformed, all degrees of freedom of all nodes must
be specified here.
This option may only be used with direct solution techniques.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Main Index
368 SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition)
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Enter 1 to create a DMIG file.
Enter 3 to create a DMIGB file.
DMIGB uses a different output format, which results in a smaller file

(about one third of the size of a DMIG file). When a DMIGB file is
included in a Marc analysis, the program uses a column-wise storage
instead of a full in-core matrix storage. This memory reduction can be
important for large DMIG files. The DMIGB format can be used only
as input for a Marc analysis; it can not be used in a Nastran analysis.
26-30 6th I Enter 0 if all stiffness terms written to DMIG.
Enter 1 if terms less than x f ⋅ K1 are filtered out.
Enter 2 if terms less than xf are filtered out.
31-40 7th F Enter the value used for filtering xf ; default = 1.e-8.
41-50 8th A Enter the name of the matrix; default is KAAX which is limited to
eight characters.
3a data block
4a data block
3b data block
1-5 1st I Enter -1.

4b data block
3c data block
Main Index
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition) 369
Format
Data
1-5 1st I Enter -2.
4c data block
Main Index
370 DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)
Output Control of Matrices
DMIG-OUT (Model Definition) Output Control of Matrices
Description
This option allows you to control the output of matrices into DMIG format. These matrices may then be
read in using the DMIG option and activated using either the B2GG, B2PP, K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP,
and P2G options within Marc or within MD Nastran. To output the substructure matrix, use the
SUPERELEM option. In the case of element matrix, they can either be written in the Marc global
(MSC.Nastran Basic) or a local coordinate system. Both symmetric and nonsymmetric matrices are
supported. Note that the scalar factor associated with the STIFSCALE option is not applied to the element
matrices. This option may be repeated in each loadcase.
The files created associated with element matrices have the names jidname_dmigXX_inc, where:
Jidname is the job ID name

XX is the suffix associated with the matrix type
ST stiffness matrix
DF differential stiffness matrix
MS mass matrix
DM damping matrix
CO conductivity matrix
SP specific heat matrix
Inc is the increment number
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word DMIG-OUT.
The 2nd and 3rd, 4th and 5th, 6th and 7th, 8th and 9th, 10th and 11th, 12th and 13th data blocks are
entered as pairs as required.
2nd data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word STIFFNESS.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 for element matrices.
Enter 2 for global matrix.
Enter 3 for element and global matrices.
Main Index
DMIG-OUT (Model Definition) 371
Format
Data
16-20 3rd I Frequency to write (default is every increment).
Enter –1 to write out only once in the loadcase.
Enter -2 to switch off writing DMIG output.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 to output in Marc global (MSC.Nastran basic) (default).
Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is
always written in transformed system.
26-30 5th I Control of which element matrices are to be written. If only the global
matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.
Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).
Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.
Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.
Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.
31-35 6th I Enter 0 to output global stiffness in untied state.
Enter 1 to output global stiffness in tied state.
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Stiffness values below this
3rd data block (only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given)
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIFF MATRIX.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block (only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given)
6th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MASS MATRIX.
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Mass values below this
8th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DAMPING MATRIX.
Main Index
DMIG-OUT (Model Definition) 373
Format
Data
21-25 4th I Enter 1 to output in Marc global, Nastran basic (default).
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Damping values below this
10th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CONDUCTIVITY.
31-35 6th I Enter 0 to output global conductivity in untied state.
Enter 1 to output global conductivity in tied state.
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Conductivity values below
this value will be ignored.
Main Index
Format
Data
12th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SPECIFIC.
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Specific heat values below
Main Index
DMIG 375
Direct Matrix Input
DMIG Direct Matrix Input
Description
This option is compatable with MD Nastran and allows the direct input of matrices at nodal points. It
permits matrices generated with either product to be entered into Marc.
The matrix is defined by a single header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required
for each column with nonzero element.
The matrix may only be used for real symmetric or nonsymmetric stiffness matrices, real mass matrices,
or for load matrices. The matrices are not activated unless a K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP, or P2G model
or history definition option is used.
It is advisable to have K2GG, M2GG, etc. placec before the DMIG in the input file.
Note: This option must be in fixed format using the MD.Nastran conversion of ten fields per line
of width 8 or 16.
Header Entry Format

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIG NAME "0" IFO TIN TOUT POLAR NCOL
Column Entry Format

DMIG NAME GJ CJ G1 C1 A1 B1
G2 C2 A2 B2 - etc. -
Example
DMIG STIF 0 1 3 4
DMIG STIF 27 1 2 3 3.+5 3.+3
2 4 2.5+10 0. 50 1.0 0.
Main Index
376 DMIG
Direct Matrix Input
Field Contents
NAME Name of the matrix. See Remark 1.(One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of
which is alphabetic.) The name is case sensitive.
IFO Form of matrix input. IFO = 6 must be specified for matrices selected by the K2GG,
M2GG and B2GG options. (Integer)
1 = Square
9 or 2 = Rectangular
6 = Symmetric
TIN Type of matrix being input: (Integer)
1 = Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)

2 = Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
3 = Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element.) (not available)
4 = Complex, double precision (Two fields are used per element.) (not available)
TOUT Type of matrix created (not used; enter 0).
POLAR Input format of Ai, Bi. (Integer=blank or 0 indicates real, imaginary format; Integer > 0
indicates amplitude, phase format.)
NCOL Number of columns in a rectangular matrix. Used only for IFO = 9. See Remarks 5 and
6 (Integer > 0)
GJ Node identification number for column index. (Integer > 0)
CJ Degree of freedom number for node point GJ. (1 < Integer < 6;)
Gi Node identification number for row index. (Integer > 0)
Ci Degree of freedom number for Gi for a grid point. (1<CJ < 6)
Ai, Bi Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is
real (TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)
Remarks
1. Matrices may also be selected for all simulations by K2GG = NAME and M2GG = NAME.
2. The header entry containing IFO, TIN, and TOUT is required. Each nonnull column is started
with a GJ, CJ pair. The entries for each row of that column follows. Only nonzero terms need be
entered. The terms may be input in arbitrary order. A GJ, CJ pair may be entered more than once,
but input of an element of the matrix more than once produces a fatal message.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer 0.
4. For symmetric matrices (IFO = 6), a given off-diagonal element may be input either below or
above the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal message is issued
if an element is input both below and above the diagonal.
Main Index
DMIG 377
Direct Matrix Input
5. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. The
number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all rectangular DMIG matrices
is always the number of nodal points.) The GJ term is used for the column index. The CJ term is
ignored.
6. If NCOL is not used for rectangular matrices, it is taken to be the maximum number of degrees of
freedom per node.
7. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIGs.
8. TIN should be set consistent with the number of decimal digits required to read the input data
adequately. For a single-precision specification on a short-word machine, the input is truncated
after about eight decimal digits, even when more digits are present in a double-field format. If
more digits are needed, a double precision specification should be used instead. However, note
that a double precision specification requires a “D” type exponent even for terms that do not need
an exponent. For example, unity may be input as 1.0 in single precision, but the longer form
1.0D0 is required for double precision.
Note: In Marc, all matrices are stored as double precision.
Main Index
378 K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition)
Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix
K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition) Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix
Description
This option activates or deactivates a stiffness matrix defined by the DMIG option.
This option should be in the input file before the matrix is read in by the DMIG option.
Note: If transformation or rigid body rotations of the stiffness matrix are to occur, all degrees of
freedom of the nodes must appear on the DMIG file.
Form0at
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word K2GG or K2PP.
11-20 2nd A Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.
21-25 3rd I Enter 0 or 1 to activate matrix.
Enter -1 to deactivate matrix.
26-35 4th E Enter scale factor; default is 1.0.
41-45 6th I Enter 0 to suppress the transformation to the stiffness matrix although a
transformation has been applied to the node (default - this implies that the
stiffness matrix used is provided in the transformed system).
Enter 1 to apply transformations to the stiffness matrix.
46-50 7th I Enter first node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.
51-55 8th I Enter second node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.
56-60 9th I Enter third node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.
Remarks
1. DMIG matrices are not used unless selected.
2. Terms are added to the stiffness matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. A scale factor may be applied to the stiffness matrix specified here or to all stiffness matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CK2 entry.
4. If a transformation is to be applied to the stiffness matrix, the DMIG must contain all of the
degrees of freedom associated with the node to which the transformation is applied.
5. Large roataion DMIG is based upon the node numbers given in the 7th, 8th, and 9th fields. If only
the 7th field is used, then the rotation is based upon the rotation degrees of freedom of this node.
If all these nodes are specified, then a triad is formed, and the rotation of this triad is used.
Main Index
M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition) 379
Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix
M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition) Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix
Description
This option activates or deactivates a mass matrix defined by the DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
Fixe Free Entry Entry
1-10 1st A Enter the word M2GG or M2PP.
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the mass matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain a 6.
4. M2GG input must either be in consistent mass units or the COEFFICIENT model definition option,
CM2 entry may be used.
Main Index
380 B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition)
Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix
B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition) Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix
Description
This option activates or deactivates a damping matrix for dynamic or harmonic analysis defined by the
DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word B2GG or B2PP.
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the damping matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain the integer 6.
4. A scale factor may be applied to the damping matrix specified here or to all damping matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CB2 entry.
Main Index
P2G (Model Definition) 381
Selects Direction Input Load Vector
P2G (Model Definition) Selects Direction Input Load Vector
Description
This option activates or deactivates a load vector defined by the DMIG option. This load vector may be
scaled by referencing a table which is a function of time.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word P2G.
21-25 3rd I Enter 0 or 1 to activate the load vector.
Enter -1 to deactivate the load vector.
31-35 5th I Enter a table ID.
Remarks
1. Terms are added to the load matrix before any constraints are applied.
2. The matrix must be rectangular in form ( i.e., field 4 on DMIG entry - IFO -must contain the
integer 9).
3. A scale factor may be applied to the vector specified here or to all vectors via the COEFFICIENT
model definition option entry.
Main Index
382 BACKTOSUBS (Model Definition)
Recover Substructure Output
BACKTOSUBS (Model Definition) Recover Substructure Output
Description
This option allows you to perform a displacement and stress calculation for the substructure. It can be
followed by output control options, such as PRINT ELEMENT, PRINT CHOICE, POST, etc.
The file containing the displacements of the external nodes is given using the -sid option when the job
is submitted.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word BACKTOSUBS.
Main Index
MNF UNITS 383
MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units
MNF UNITS MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units
Description
This option defines the units used to define the model. If this option is not included, default is SI units
(kilogram, meter, second, Newton). This option is only used for creating the MNF file.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word MNF UNITS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter mass unit:
1: kilogram
2: pound mass
3: slug
4: gram
5: ounce mass
6: kpound mass
7: megagram
8: dozen slug
6-10 2nd I Enter length unit:
1: kilometer
2: meter
3: centimeter
4: millimeter
5: mile
6: foot
7: inch
11-15 3rd I Enter time unit:
1: hour
2: minute
3: second
4: millisecond
Main Index
384 MNF UNITS
MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Enter force unit:
1: newton
2: pound force
3: kilogram force
4: ounce force
5: dyne
6: kNewton
7: kpound force
Main Index
STIFSCALE 385
Define Stiffness Scaling Factor
STIFSCALE Define Stiffness Scaling Factor
Description
This option allows the contributions of an element stiffness and mass matrix to be scaled before including
them into the global stiffness matrix. The distributed loads associated with the element are also scaled.
Note that this is a scalar multiple; no transformation occurs.
Caution: If you use this option, you must define the scale factor for all elements; the default is zero.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word STIFSCALE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sets to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number from which the following data is read. Defaults
to input.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter scaling factor.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements for which the above scaling is applied.
Main Index
386 COEFFICIENT
Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices
COEFFICIENT Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices
Description
This option allows you to put in global coefficients that can be used to either define or scale matrices. It
allows compatibility with MD Nastran PARAM of the same names that are used here.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word COEFFICIENT.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the value of ALPHA1 mass coefficient of Rayleigh Damping
(default=0.0). If the DAMPING model definition option is included, the
value entered here is ignored.
11-20 2nd E Enter the value of ALPHA2 stiffness coefficient of Rayleigh Damping
(default=0.0). If the DAMPING model definition option is included, the
value entered here is ignored.
21-30 3rd E Enter the value of CB1, factor applied to spring damping matrix. Default
is 1.0
31-40 4th E Enter the value of CB2, factor applied to damping DMIG, default is 0.0
unless, B2GG references DMIG.
41-50 5th E Enter the value of CK1, factor applied to element stiffness matrix, and
springs. Default is 1.0
51-60 6th E Enter the value of CK2, factor applied to Stiffness DMIG; default is 0.0
unless, K2GG references DMIG.
61-70 7th E Enter the value of CK3, factor applied to stiffness matrix from user
element (USELEM user subroutine). Default =1.0
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID for ALPHA1.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID for ALPHA2.
11-15 3rd I Enter table ID for CB1.
16-20 4th I Enter table ID for CB2.
21-25 5th I Enter table ID for CK1.
Main Index
COEFFICIENT 387
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the value of CM1 factor applied to element mass matrix, and mass
points. Default is 1.0
11-20 2nd E Enter the value of CM2, factor applied to Mass DMIG; default is 0.0
unless M2GG references DMIG.
21-30 3rd E Enter the value of CM3, factor applied to use-defined element mass
matrix. Default is 1.0
31-40 4th E Enter the value of CP1, factor applied to external loads, this is only
allowed if the ELASTIC parameter is included. Caution should be
exercised if the load is due to centrifugal effects, as this reflects a scaling
of the mass, not the rotational speed.
41-50 5th E Enter the value of CP2, factor applied to load DMIG; default is 0.0 unless
P2G references DMIG.
51-60 6th E Enter the value of CP3, factor applied to external load associated with
user-defined elements. Default is 1.0
61-70 7th E Enter the value of G, uniform structural coefficient in the formulation of
dynamic problems. Default is 0.0
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID for CM1.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID for CM2.
11-15 3rd I Enter table ID for CM3.
16-20 4th I Enter table ID for CP1.
31-35 7th I Enter table ID for G.
6th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the value of W3, coefficient in damping matrix; default is 0.0,
indicating do not include term.
11-20 2nd E Enter the value of W4, coefficient in damping matrix; default is 0.0,
indicating do not include term.
7th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID for W3.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID for W4.
Main Index
388 COEFFICIENT
Remarks
1. If the DAMPING model definition option is used to specify different damping coefficients based
upon the element number, it is assumed to be active for all elements, and ALPHA1, ALPHA2, and
CB1 coefficients are ignored.
2. If the STIFSCALE model definition option is used to specify scale factors based upon the element
number, it is assumed to be active for all elements and the CK1, CK3, CM1, CM3, CP1, and CP3
coefficients are ignored.
Main Index
DEACTIVATE (Model Definition) 389
Deactivate Elements
DEACTIVATE (Model Definition) Deactivate Elements
Description
This option allows you to deactivate elements during the course of an analysis, which can be useful to
model ablation or excavation. By default, after the elements are deactivated, they demonstrate zero
stresses and strains on the post file. However, internally, they retain the stress state in effect at the time
of deactivation and this state can be postprocessed or printed at any time. At a later stage in the analysis,
the elements can again be activated with the ACTIVATE history definition option. As an alternative, you
can use the UACTIVE user subroutine. The stress state is restored on the post file when the elements are
reactivated. If this is not desirable, the stress/strain states can be permanently set to zero at deactivation
by using the additional command line option ‘STRESS/STRAIN’.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word DEACTIVATE.
11-20 2nd A Enter the word STRESS to set the stresses to zero.
21-30 3rd A Enter the word STRAIN to set the strains to zero.
31-40 4th A Enter the word POST to update the post file geometry so deactivated
elements are not shown.
41-50 5th A Enter the word NOPO to not update the post file geometry; the deactivated
elements are shown.
2nd data block
1-80 1st I Enter the list of elements to be deactivated at this time.
Main Index
390 ERROR ESTIMATE
Create Error Estimation
ERROR ESTIMATE Create Error Estimation
Description
You can request that Marc give information regarding the error associated with the finite element
discretization. There are two measures; the first evaluates the stress discontinuity between elements. A
large value implies that the stresses gradients are not accurately represented in the finite element mesh.
In a classical linear elastic solution, this could be resolved by choosing quadratic elements over linear
elements or refining the mesh.
The second error measure examines geometric distortion in the model. It first examines the aspect ratios
and warpage of the elements and in subsequent increments measures how much these ratios change. This
measure can be used to indicate if the original mesh is good and whether, at a later time, rezoning
is required.
The evaluation of the stress error measure is moderately expensive. The evaluation of the geometric error
measure is very inexpensive.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ERROR ESTIMATE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1 if the stress measure is to be evaluated.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if the geometric measure is to be evaluated.
Main Index
USDATA 391
Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization
USDATA Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization
Description
This option invokes the call to the USDATA user subroutine for the initialization of user variables. These
variables (data) are stored in a common block USDACM that can be used in other user subroutines. This
option also provides for the definition of the amount of memory for the data in the common block in
REAL*4 words. If this memory is specified as nonzero, the data is automatically saved on the restart file
for use in subsequent analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word USDATA.
11-15 2nd I Enter the number of REAL*4 words needed for the data stored in
common block USDAM via the USDATA user subroutine.
Main Index
392 USDATA
Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization
Main Index
Program Control
Chapt Program Control

er 3: This section of the document describes various program control options. The information in this section
Mode ismagnetostatic,
relevant to all types of analyses (mechanical, heat, Joule, bearing, acoustic, electrostatic,
and electromagnetic). In particular, the CASE COMBIN option allows you to combine
l separate load cases obtained from elastic analyses. The SOLVER option is used to control the solution
procedure of the linearized equations. The default is the direct solvers; as an alternative, the iterative
Defini solver can be chosen. The OPTIMIZE option is very important to minimize the computational cost of the
tion analysis, as the cost of analysis is proportional to the square of the size of the bandwidth. (Options POST,
PRINT CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, PRINT SPRING, PRINT CONTACT, PRINT NODE, NODE SORT,
Optio SUMMARY, ELEM SORT, and UDUMP all control the amount and method that you can obtain the
resultant quantities.) The RESTART option is important for all nonlinear analysis or for postprocessing
ns with Marc. As the solution to nonlinear problems is obtained using the incremental technique, the
RESTART option is used to stop the analysis (checkpoint) and then continue it at some later time. The
REAUTO option is used to overwrite previously defined control values upon restarting an analysis. The
POST option is used to control the database that is used by Marc Mentat and MD Patran for
postprocessing.
Main Index
394 CASE COMBIN
Combine Load Cases
CASE COMBIN Combine Load Cases
Description
This option allows you to combine different load cases for an elastic analysis. Each load case must be
stored on a RESTART file and then combined with other cases as a scalar multiple (LAMBDA) of itself.
All output element variables and nodal variables are combined.
This option can be used only in conjunction with the ELASTIC parameter. A new restart file of the
resulting combination is written as increment 0 if it is requested.
The use of the CASE COMBIN option precludes the addition of any further load cases in the same run.
Cases can only be combined from restart files.
This option can be used to perform the superposition of the results of a Fourier analysis at certain
locations around the circumference. The positions for which superposition is requested can be either
equally spaced or specified by you.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the words CASE COMBIN.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of load cases to be read in and combined.
6-10 2nd I Number of stations for superposition of Fourier analysis. If input as a
positive number the stations are equally spaced around the circumference
starting at θ = 0. If preceded by a minus sign, the θ - values are read from
data lines.
3rd data block
Only used for Fourier result superposition and if the second integer on the 2nd data block is negative.
1-10 1st F Value of θ in degrees for first printout station.
11-20 2nd F Value of θ in degrees for second printout station.
Continuation data is in Format 8E10.0.
Main Index
CASE COMBIN 395
Combine Load Cases
Format
Data
4th data block
The 4th data block is repeated for each load case.
1-5 1st I Increment number on restart file to be read for this load case.
6-10 2nd I Input file number for restart file to be read. Default is Unit 9.
11-20 3rd F LAMBDA – Scalar multiplication factor to be used with this load case.
Default is 1.0.
Main Index
396 SOLVER (Model Definition)
Specify Direct or Iterative Solver
SOLVER (Model Definition) Specify Direct or Iterative Solver
Description
This option defines the solver to be used in the analysis. You can specify either the direct or iterative
solver. The choice of whether the in-core or out-of-core procedure is used is automatically determined
by Marc, based upon the amount of workspace required and the amount of memory that can be allocated.
You can also select whether a symmetric or nonsymmetric solver is used. Additionally, you can specify
if the solution of a nonpositive definite system is to be obtained. For DDM, an out-of-core procedure is
only available for solver type 8.
As a convenience, it is necessary to specify the control parameters for the decoupled pre-conditioner only
in the first domain file, eliminating unnecessary editing.
When the iterative solver, type 2 or type 9, is chosen, additional parameters must be defined which are
used to control the accuracy.
Note: It is not recommended to use the iterative solver type 2 for beam or shell models, because
these problems are ill conditioned, resulting in a large number of iterations. For a well-
conditioned system, the number of iterations should be less than the square root of the total
number of degrees of freedom in the system.
You control the maximum number of iterations allowed. If this is a positive number, Marc
stops if this is exceeded. If this is a negative number, Marc prints a warning and continues
to the next Newton-Raphson iteration or increment.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SOLVER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Solver Type, enter:
0 for Profile Direct Solver.
2 for Sparse Iterative.
4 for Sparse Direct Solver
6 for Hardware Provided Direct Sparse Solver
8 for Multifrontal Direct Sparse Solver.
9 for CASI Iterative solver.
10 for mixed direct/iterative solver.
Main Index
SOLVER (Model Definition) 397
Format
Data
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 for solving a nonsymmetric system. Only available for solver
types 0 and 8. (Not supported for DDM.)
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if the solution of nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 if standard pre-conditioner is to be used.
Enter 3 if decoupled pre-conditioner is to be used.
Default value is 0.
36-40 8th I Enter, in millions, the number of four-byte words to be used by solver type
6, 8, or 10 before going out-of-core. Default is the same behavior as for
other solvers. For solver type 6, this option is only available on SGI. For
solver type 8 or 10, it is available on all platforms.
41-45 9th Not used; enter 0.
66-70 14th Enter 1 to activate AUTOSPC when singularity occurs. This is only
applicable to the direct solvers.
Enter -1 to deactivate AUTOSPC.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9
(CASI). They may also be used with the solver type 10.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter maximum number of conjugate-gradient iterations. Default is 1000.
For solver type 10, set to 0.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if the previous solution is to be used as the initial trial solution.
11-15 3rd I Solver type 2:
Enter 3 for diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 4 for scaled-diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 5 for incomplete Cholesky preconditioner.
Solver type 9:
Enter 0 for CASI Primal Preconditioner.
Main Index
398 SOLVER (Model Definition)
Format
Data
Enter 1 for CASI Standard Preconditioner.
Solver type 10:
Enter 0; not used.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter tolerance on conjugate gradient convergence for stress analysis.
The default for solver type 2 is 1.e-3.
Main Index
OPTIMIZE 399
Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers
OPTIMIZE Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers
Description
This option allows a choice of bandwidth optimizers to be invoked and is used to reduce computer costs
in larger problems. Note that this option creates an internal node numbering different from your node
numbering, but that all data input and output is in your node numbering system.
In addition, you can output the obtained correspondence table for later use. This correspondence table
can then be read in subsequent analyses.
In a deformable contact analysis, the bandwidth is re-optimized when the contact conditions change.
Note: Gap elements can change the internal node numbers. This can result in a non-optimal node
numbering system.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the word OPTIMIZE.
11-15 2nd I Enter:
2 Cuthill-McKee algorithm.
5 Read externally supplied correspondence table from unit specified in
the fifth field.
9 Sloan Algorithm (default).
10 Minimum Degree Algorithm (only available for sparse direct solver
- Solver Type 4).
11 Metis Nested Dissection Algorithm (only available for Multifrontal
Direct Sparse Solver - Solver Type 8 or 10).
Note: If sparse direct solver is used, the minimum degree
Algorithm is used by default.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 to have optimized mesh (elements then nodes) written to a file.
(Not available for optimizer 11.)
21-25 4th I Unit number of optimized mesh file. Only used if the third field is set to
1. Default is 18 if left blank.
Main Index
400 OPTIMIZE
Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers
Format
Data
26-30 5th I Unit number of correspondence table. If the second field is not equal to 5
the correspondence table is written to this unit. If the second field is 5 then
the correspondence table is read from this unit. (Not available for
optimizer 11.)
31-35 6th I Print flag for correspondence table.
Set to 1 to suppress print out (default).
Set to 2 to print table.
0 Special treatment of nodes with LM for R-P Flow and gap elements
for all analysis types (default).
1 Special treatment for all nodes with LM, all analysis types.
2 No special treatment for nodes with LM.
Option 2 – Cuthill-McKee
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of different numbering schemes to be tried. Usually less than 20.
Option 5 – User-specified Correspondence Table
2nd data block
1st I Internal node numbers, continuation in 16I5 format on logical unit
number given in the fifth field of data block 1.
Option 9 – Sloan Algorithm
No continuation data.
Option 10 – Minimum Degree Algorithms
Option 11 – Metis Nested Dissection Algorithms
Main Index
POST (Model Definition) 401
Create File for Postprocessing
POST (Model Definition) Create File for Postprocessing
Description
This option creates a postprocessor file for time-history or variable versus variable plots using Marc
Mentat or your own postprocessing. In the latter case, the file is accessed via the utility PLDUMP given
in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
You have two possibilities for the post file in association with restarted runs:
a. If the POST option follows the RESTART option, Marc first copies the previous post file onto
the new post file (up to the restart increment), thus providing a continuous post file from the
beginning of the analysis. The old post file is closed after it has been read. It is important that
the POST option of the restart job requests the same post variables to be written to the post
file as requested in the previous data file. Otherwise, loss of data or I/O errors can occur.
b. If the POST option precedes the RESTART option, the new post file contains only those
increments analyzed in the current run.
One or the other options should be chosen – if (B) is used, a continuous post file is not created, so that
(A) cannot subsequently be used for this analysis unless you combine the files with your own program.
Note: In a modal or buckling analysis in addition to POST option, the RECOVER history
definition option must be used for storing eigenvectors on post file.
Element data is written to the post file for each integration point of a continuum element or for the
integration points on the layer requested; unless, either the CENTROID parameter is used or the average
value is requested via the 14th field.
Note: The stresses/strains are generally engineering stresses/strains in an analysis involving only
small deformations. In a geometrically nonlinear analysis, if the total Lagrangian
formulation is used, the stresses and the strains are the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress and
the Green-Lagrange strains, respectively. You can always request to output Cauchy stresses
(post code 41-47 and 341) in the post file. If the updated Lagrangian formulation is used in
the large deformation analysis, the stresses and the strains are generally Cauchy stresses
and the logarithmic strains, respectively.
Note: Marc 2008 will be the last version to support post revisions less that 7.
Main Index
402 POST (Model Definition)
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-4 1st A Enter the word POST.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of element variables to be written on the file (optional)
For heat transfer, by default, the temperatures are written to a post file.
Enter -1 to suppresses this.
6-10 2nd I Unit number on which to open the new binary post file (jid.t16).
Defaults to unit 16 if left blank. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.
11-15 3rd I Unit number on which to open the previous binary post file (rid.t16)
for a restarted run. Defaults to unit 17 if left blank. Note that all data from
this file (up to the restart increment) is copied to the new file upon restart,
so that the post file is continuous from the start of the analysis, provided
the POST option follows the RESTART option.
16-20 4th I Set to 0 for binary post file.
Set to 1 for formatted post file.
Set to 2 for both binary and formatted post file.
21-25 5th I Set to 2 to generate a single post file in DDM runs. Defaults to multiple
post files.
26-30 6th I Unit number on which to open the new formatted post file (jid.t19).
Defaults to unit 19. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.
31-35 7th I Unit number on which to open the previous formatted post file for a restart
run. Defaults to unit 20. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.
36-40 8th I Set to 1 to convert restart file to post file with no analysis. Increments to be
converted are given in the third and eleventh field of RESTART model
definition section.
41-45 9th I Number of increments between writing of post data. Defaults to write post
file every increment.
46-50 10th I Number of user-defined post vectors.
Vector is defined UPOSTV in user subroutine. This field is only used for
7- and 8-style post files.
51-55 11th I Enter 1 to generate Marc K2 style post file.
Enter 3 to generate Marc K3 style post file.
Main Index
Format
Data
Enter 8 to generate Marc 8 (not released) style post file.
Enter 9 to generate MSC.Marc 2000 style post file.
Enter 12 to generate MSC.Marc 2005 style post file (default).
Enter 13 to generate MSC.Marc 2005r3 style post file.
56-60 12th I This field can be used for debugging purposes in a stress analysis:
Enter 0 if no iterative data is needed.
Enter 1 to get the iterative displacements.
Enter 2 to get the iterative displacements and reaction/residual forces.
Enter 3 to get the iterative displacements, reaction/residual forces and the
touched bodies in a contact analysis.
The iterative data is written as subincremental data.
Note: The use of this option can generate a huge post file since the
post data is written for every iteration.
61-65 13th I Only for MSC.Marc 2000 and higher style post file.
Enter the total number of nodal post codes (including user-defined nodal
post codes).
If a 0 is entered a default set of nodal data is written on the post file,
depending on the analysis type.
If a -1 is entered, no nodal data is written.
Note: Displacements are not automatically written in the custom post
file unless explicitly chosen. Besides the chosen quantities, if
the deformation also needs to be visualized then the
displacements also need to be chosen as nodal quantities.
66-70 14th I Enter 1 if per element only the average element integration point data
should be written on the post file. This might considerably reduce the size
of the post file, but some significant information might be lost.
The default is 0 where the element data is written on the post file for all
available integration points.
71-75 15th I Enter 1 if automatically generated extra nodes associated with element
types 80-84 and 155-157 do not appear on the post file.
Main Index
Format
Data
The default is 0, where all the available nodes are written on the post file.
76-80 16th I Enter 1 to exclude forces caused by glued contact from the contact normal
and friction forces.
The default is 0 where the contact normal and friction forces also contain
the contributions due to glued contact.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are used for input of variables to be written on the post file. For 8- and lower style
post files, only element data can be selected and the nodal data is written by default. For 9- and higher
style post files, both element and nodal data can be selected. This data block is repeated for all selected
element variables, and, for 9- and higher style post files, all selected nodal variables.
3rd data block (POST Version 13)
Use for defining element post codes.
1-10 1st A Enter the word ELEMENT.
11-15 2nd I Enter an element post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-4.
16-20 3rd I Enter the layer number for shell elements or continuum composite
elements.
For post codes 471 and 481, enter the global identification number of the
rebar layer
21-68 4th A Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use
in postprocessing.
3rd data block (POST Version 12 and earlier)
1-5 1st I Enter an element post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-4.
6-10 2nd I Enter the layer number for shell elements or continuum composite
elements.
rebar layer
11-35 3rd A Enter a 24-character label associated with this post code for use in
postprocessing.
4th data block
Use for defining nodal post codes.
1-10 1st A Enter the word NODAL.
11-15 2nd I Enter a nodal post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-5.
16-63 3rd A Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use
in postprocessing.
Main Index
Format
Data
Data blocks 5, 6, and 7 are used for post file version 13 or higher to select elements and nodes to be
written on the post file. They are all optional. If none of the block is present, all elements are written in
the post file.
5a data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SELECT ELEMENT
5b data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of elements to be written to post file.
6a data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SELECT BODY
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if all elements of the selected contact body are placed on post file
(default)
Enter 2 if only the elements on the exterior surface are placed on the post
file.
6b data block
1-80 I Enter a list of contact bodies, for which the elements are to be written to
post file.
For the 7th data block, these nodes are in addition to nodes based upon element selection; typically, it
would be used for nodes not associated with elements.
7a data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SELECT NODE
7b data block
1-80 I Enter a list of nodes to be written to post file.
Main Index
Table 3-4 Element Post Codes

Codes Description
1-6 Components of strain. For rigid-perfectly plastic flow problems, components of strain rate
7 Equivalent plastic strain (integral of equivalent plastic strain rate). For rigid-perfectly
plastic flow problems, equivalent plastic strain rate
8 Equivalent creep strain (integral of equivalent creep strain rate)
9 Total temperature
10 Increment of temperature
11-16 Components of stress
17 Equivalent von Mises stress
18 Mean normal stress (tensile positive) for Mohr-Coulomb
19 User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines.
20 Thickness of element
21-26 Components of plastic strain
p 2
27 Equivalent plastic strain. ε = --- Σ Δ ε ipj ΣΔ ε ijp
3
28 Plastic strain rate

29 Total value of second state variable
30 Forming Limit Parameter: FLP = calculated major engineering strain/maximum major
engineering strain
31-36 Components of creep strain
c 2
37 Equivalent creep strain. ε = --- ΣΔ ε icj Σ Δε ijc
3
38 Total swelling strain (from the VSWELL user subroutine)

39 Total value of third state variable
41-46 Components of Cauchy stress
47 Equivalent Cauchy stress
48 Strain energy density
49 Thickness strain for plane stress: Mooney or Ogden material
51-56 Real components of harmonic stress
57 Equivalent real harmonic stress
58 Elastic strain energy density
59 Equivalent stress/yield stress
60 Equivalent stress/yield stress (at current temperatures)
Main Index
Table 3-4 Element Post Codes (continued)

Codes Description
61-66 Imaginary components of harmonic stress
67 Equivalent imaginary harmonic stress
68 Plastic strain energy density
69 Current volume
71-76 Components of thermal strain
78 Original volume
79 Grain size
80 Damage indicator for Cockroft-Latham, Oyane, and Principal Stress criteria, and criteria
using the UDAMAGE_INDICATOR user subroutine.
81-86 Components of cracking strain (only for stress analysis)
91-107 Failure indices associated with failure criteria
108-109 Interlaminar shear for thick composite shells (TSHEAR parameter must be present)
110 Interlaminar shear bond index for thick composite shells (only available if TSHEAR
parameter is present and Allowable Shear Bond Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the
COMPOSITE option) = max(Interlaminar shear components given by post codes 108 and
109)/SB
111-116 Components of stress in preferred coordinate system defined by the ORIENTATION option
121-126 Elastic strain
127 Equivalent elastic strain
128 Major engineering strain
129 Minor engineering strain
175 Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate (powder material)
176 Relative density (powder material)
177 Void volume fraction (damage model)
178 Lemaitre damage factor
179 Lemaitre relative damage
<0 User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
241 Gasket Pressure
242 Gasket Closure
243 Plastic Gasket Closure
251 Global components of Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1
254 Global components of Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1
Main Index

Codes Description
257 Interlaminar shear bond index for composite solids (only available if Allowable Shear Bond
Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the COMPOSITE option) = magnitude of interlaminar
shear vector calculated by post code 254/SB
261 Beam axis (required if beam moment plots are created with Marc Mentat). Orientation axis
of CBUSH/CFAST elements 194 and 195.
264 Axial Force
265 Moment Mxx
266 Moment Myy
267 Shear Force Vxz
268 Shear Force Vyz
269 Torque
270 Bimoment
301 Total strains tensor
311 Stress tensor
321 Plastic strain tensor
331 Creep strain tensor
341 Cauchy stress tensor
351 Real harmonic stress tensor
361 Imaginary harmonic stress tensor
371 Thermal strain tensor
381 Cracking strain tensor
391 Stresses in preferred direction tensor
401 Elastic strain tensor
411 Stress in global coordinate system tensor
421 Elastic strain in global coordinate system tensor
431 Plastic strain in global coordinate system tensor
441 Creep strain in global coordinate system tensor
451 Velocity strains (for fluids)
461 Elastic strain in preferred direction tensor
471 Global components of the rebar stresses in the undeformed configuration
(Second Piola-Kirchhoff). See Marc Volume B: Element Library for details.
481 Global components of the rebar stress in the deformed configuration (Cauchy). See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for details.
Main Index

Codes Description
487 Rebar angle.
501 Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library for details.
511 Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element Library
for details.
531 Volume fraction of Martensite.
541 Phase transformation strain tensor.
547 Equivalent Phase Transformation strain
ε eq
PH = 2 ⁄ 3ΣΔ ε ijPH Σ Δ ε ijPH
548 Equivalent TWIN Strain
ε eq
T WIN = 2 ⁄ 3ΣΔ ε ijTWI N Σ Δ ε ijTWI N
549 Equivalent TRIP Strain in the forward transformation
ε eq
T RIP = 2 ⁄ 3Σ Δε ijTRI P Σ Δ ε iTR
j
IP
551 Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Multiphase Aggregate:
ε eq
PL = 2 ⁄ 3 ΣΔ ε iPL
j Σ Δ εi j
PL
552 Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Austenite

553 Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Martensite
557 Yield Stress of Multiphase Aggregate
601-617 Strength ratios based upon FAIL DATA failure modes.
621 Generalized Strain (Harmonic only)
631 Imaginary Generalized Strain (Harmonic only)
641 Generalized Strain - curvatures tensor
661 Generalized Stress - Moments tensor
681 True Strain Tensor (for continuum elements)
691 Element Orientation Vector 1
697 Layer Orientation Angle
Main Index

Codes Description
Post Codes for Heat Transfer Analysis
9 or 180 Total temperature
181-183 Components of temperature gradient T
184-186 Components of flux
271 Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysised solid (model C) or nonhomogeneous density
272 Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysis gas (model C)
273 Volumetric Mass density of liquid (model C)
274 χp (Pyrolysis model B or C)
275 φw (Pyrolysis model B or C)
276 χc (Pyrolysis model B or C)
ef f
277 ρc (Pyrolysis model B or C)
eff
278 k (Pyrolysis model B or C)
279 ρ g, w Pyrolysis Volumetric Mass density of water vapor
280 mg (Pyrolysis model B or C)

·
281 ρ s, p (Pyrolysis model C only)
·
282 ρ s, l (Pyrolysis model C only)
·
283 ρ s, c (Pyrolysis model C only)
Post Codes for Bearing Analysis
190 Pressure
191-193 Components of pressure gradient
194-196 Mass flux vector
Post Codes for Joule Heating Analysis
87 Voltage
88 Distributed current
89 Heat generated
197-199 Components of electric potential gradient
577-579 Components of current density
Post Codes for Acoustic Analysis
190 Pressure
Main Index

Codes Description
Post Codes for Electrostatic Analysis
130 Electric potential (V)
561-563 Components of electric field intensity (E)
564-566 Components of electric displacement (D)
Post Codes for Magnetostatic Analysis
140 Magnetic potential (2-D analysis only) (Az)
571-573 Components of magnetic induction (B)
574-576 Components of magnetic field intensity (H)
Post Codes for Transient Electromagnetic Analysis
567-569 Components of Lorentz force
577-579 Components of current density (J)
Post Codes for Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis
131-133 Real components of electric field intensity (E)
134-136 Real components of electric displacement (D)
137-139 Real components of Lorentz force
141-143 Real components of magnetic induction (B)
144-146 Real components of magnetic field intensity (H)
147-149 Real components of current density (J)
151-153 Imaginary components of electric field intensity (E)
154-156 Imaginary components of electric displacement (D)
157-159 Imaginary components of Lorentz force
161-163 Imaginary components of magnetic induction (B)
164-166 Imaginary components of magnetic field intensity (H)
167-169 Imaginary components of current density (J)
Post Codes for Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)
Main Index

Codes Description
Post Codes for Harmonic Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)
Post Codes for Soil Analysis
171 Porosity
172 Void ratio
173 Pore pressure
174 Preconsolidation pressure
Post Codes for Cure and Cure Shrinkage Analysis
285 Degree of cure
286 Total cure reaction heat
287 Degree of cure shrinkage
288 Volumetric cure shrinkage of resin
289-294 Cure shrinkage strain components in global coordinate system
295-300 Cure shrinkage strain components in preferred coordinate system
581-586 Cure shrinkage strain tensor in global coordinate system
591-596 Cure shrinkage strain tensor in preferred coordinate system
Notes: For heat transfer, code 9 is used for all heat transfer elements.
When using shells in heat transfer, it is important to enter a code for each layer in
chronological order if post file is to be correctly read by the INITIAL STATE or CHANGE
STATE options.
Note that you do not need to select nodal values (that is, displacement, velocities and
accelerations, and temperature for a heat transfer run) as these are automatically written to
the post file.
Eigenmodes (dynamic analysis) and eigenvectors (buckling analysis) are written to
the post file only if indicated by the RECOVER or MODAL
INCREMENT/BUCKLE INCREMENT option.
Layered quantities for beams, shells, composite shells, composite solids, and
rebar quantities.
Main Index
For many post codes, a layer number is required, and is conventionally one to the last layer
number in the element. Layer 1 is the top layer, layer 2 is the next layer, etc. for shells,
composite shells, bricks, or rebar elements. In many shell applications, the number of
layers in different elements is not the same. Two alternative mechanisms may be used to
specify the layer number:
I.The user can specify the following layer codes:
15000 - top layer
10000 - bottom layer
5000 - middle layer
If the number of layers in a shell is an even number, it will use (nlayer +1)/2 where
nlayer is the number of layers.
II.If the user specifies the layer ID for the composite elements, then the user must specify
the layer ID. This is useful in ply drop-off simulations.
Note that post codes 91-107 refer to failure indices for different failure criteria and post
codes 601-617 refer to associated strength ratios. More than 17 quantities are allowed in
the analysis but only the first 17 quantities are available for postprocessing. For example.
if three failure criteria (say, max. stress, Hoffman and Puck) are flagged, post codes 91-
97/601-607 would contain the six indices/ratios associated with maximum stress, post code
98 / 608 would contain the one index / ratio associated with Hoffman and post codes 99-
103 / 609-613 would contain the five indices / ratios associated with Puck criterion.
Post codes 691 and 694 provide access to the first and second orientation vectors
respectively. These vectors depict the alignment of the material coordinate system at the
element level with respect to the global cartesian system. They are available for elements
that are either composites, or using materials that are orthotropic/anisotropic / requiring the
HOOKLW ANELAS user subroutines, or using the ORIENTATION option to identify the
material coordinate system. Note that these element orientation vectors are averaged across
all integration points of the element and presented as a single set of vectors at the element
centroid. They are always calculated on the current element geometry and any layer IDs
associated with post codes 691 and 694 are ignored. Note also that while the normal usage
of these post vectors is in conjunction with the ORIENTATION option, if no special material
orientation is provided, then they can also be used to obtain the element coordinate system
for orthotropic materials, composites, etc. For composites, post code 697 provides access
to the fiber angle in any layer. If used without any associated layer id, post code 697
provides access to all layer angles. Else, the user can obtain the angle for a specific layer L
by using 697,L as the post code. Note that if there are no composite elements, post code
697 is ignored. The orientation vectors on the post file are available for visualization in
Marc Mentat. Either element orientations or layer orientations can be plotted. Note that for
layer orientation vectors to be available for a set of layers, the associated layer orientation
angle should be available on the post file through post code 697.
Main Index
For post codes 411, 421, 431, and 441, global quantities for shell elements are reported for
as many layers as requested and the same layer numbering system is used as for regular
shell quantities. Layer 1 is the top surface; layer 2 is the next surface, etc. This convention
is followed from MSC.Marc 2000 on.
Caution has to be exercised in interpreting the results when strain and/or stress tensors are
requested for beam and shell elements:
1. For most elements in this category (elastic beam elements 31, 52, 98 are exceptions),
stress tensors (post codes 311, 351, 361) or their associated component values (post
codes 11-16, 51-56, 61-66) and total strain tensor (post code 301) or its associated
component values (post codes 1-6) can be requested with or without an associated layer
number. When no layer number is requested, the generalized strains (stretches, shear
strains) are reported for the strain post values and generalized stresses (axial force,
shear forces) are reported for the stress post values. Generalized curvature strains and
generalized moments can be requested through post codes 641 and 661 for shells and
numerically integrated beams. Note that for shell elements, the generalized stresses are
forces per unit length. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of the
generalized strain and stress output for each element type. When a layer number is
used, the actual strain and stress components at the requested layer are reported. Layer
number are ignored for post codes 641 and 661.
2. For conventional (non-numerically integrated) elastic beams (types 31, 52, 98), there
are no layers - so only the generalized strains and stresses are reported for these
elements. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of the generalized
strain and stress output for each element type. Equivalent quantities are not computed
for these element types since they do not make physical sense. The thermal strain tensor
(post code 371) or its associated components (post codes 71-76) are available.
3. For other stress tensors (post codes 341, 391, 411) and strain tensors (post codes 321,
331, 371, 381, 401, 421, 431, 441, 461), there are no generalized values and they can
only be requested for a particular layer. If no layer number is provided by the user, by
default, the tensors are reported for layer number 1. Numerically integrated solid-
section beam elements (type 52 or 98) have layer numbers and from a postprocessing
perspective behave as open or closed section beams or shells.
Main Index
Table 3-5 Nodal Post Codes

Code Description
1 Displacement
2 Rotation
3 External Force
4 External Moment
5 Reaction Force
6 Reaction Moment
7 Fluid Velocity
8 Fluid Pressure
9 External Fluid Force
10 Reaction Fluid Force
11 Sound Pressure
12 External Sound Source
13 Reaction Sound Source
14 Temperature
15 External Heat Flux
16 Reaction Heat Flux
17 Electric Potential
18 External Electric Charge
19 Reaction Electric Charge
20 Magnetic Potential
21 External Electric Current
22 Reaction Electric Current
23 Pore Pressure
24 External Mass Flux
25 Reaction Mass Flux
26 Bearing Pressure
27 Bearing Force
28 Velocity
29 Rotational Velocity
30 Acceleration
31 Rotational Acceleration
32 Modal Mass
Main Index
Table 3-5 Nodal Post Codes (continued)

Code Description
33 Rotational Modal Mass
34 Contact Normal Stress
35 Contact Normal Force
36 Contact Friction Stress
37 Contact Friction Force
38 Contact Status
39 Contact Touched Body
40 Herrmann Variable
41 ρ sol id (Pyrolysis Model B only)
42 M· g (Pyrolysis Model B or C)
·
43 ρ s, p (Pyrolysis Model B only)
·
44 ρ s, l (Pyrolysis Model B only)
46 Tying Force
47 Coulomb Force
48 Tying Moment
49 Generalized Nodal Stress
50 Generalized Nodal Strain
51 Inertia Relief Load
52 Inertia Relief Moment
53 J-Integral
54 Stress Intensity, Mode I
55 Stress Intensity, Mode II
56 Stress Intensity, Mode III
57 Energy Release
58 Energy Release Rate I
59 Energy Release Rate II
60 Energy Release Rate III
61 —
62 Crack System Local X
63 Crack System Local Y
64 Crack System Local Z
Main Index

Code Description
65 Near Contact Distance
66 Breaking Index (Normal)
67 Breaking Index (Tangential)
68 Breaking Index
69 Delamination Index (Normal)
70 Delamination Index Tangential)
71 Delamination Index
72 Recession
73 Glue Deactivation Status
74 VCCT Failure Index
<0 User-defined nodal quantity via the UPSTNO user subroutine.
Note: The contact status (code 38) can have the following values:
0 if a node is neither in contact nor has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
0.5 if a node is in near contact.
1 if a node is in true contact.
2 if a node has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
Main Index
418 LOADCASE (Model Definition)
Define Loadcase
LOADCASE (Model Definition) Define Loadcase
Description
This option is used to specify the boundary conditions and initial conditions that are active in this
loadcase. This is used to activate or deactivate FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc., DIST LOADS,
DIST FLUXES, etc., POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc., FOUNDATION, FILMS, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL
VEL, INITIAL TEMP, etc. Boundary conditions not explicitly activated are deactivated.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word LOADCASE.
11-32 2nd A Enter the name of the loadcase (no blanks).
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of labels. This is required.
3rd data block (Repeat as many times as specified on 2nd data block.)
1-32 1st A Enter the boundary condition or initial condition label.
33-40 2nd I Enter flag to control application of this boundary condition.
This is applicable to FIXED DISP, DIST LOADS, POINT TEMP, and
CHANGE STATE only.
If a time dependent table (independent variable types 1,2,3,4) is applied to
this boundary condition, this flag is ignored and the table is used to control
the temporal variations.
Enter 0 if load is applied instantaneously,
or if boundary condition has been previously activated, it
remains constant (default).
Enter 1 if point load, distributed load or kinematic load is to be
linearly changed from current magnitude to prescribed
magnitude,
or point temp is to be linearly changed from initial temp to
prescribed magnitude,
or change state is to be linearly changed from “initial state”
to prescribed state.
Main Index
LOADCASE (Model Definition) 419
Define Loadcase
Format
Data
linearly changed from zero to prescribed magnitude,
If the boundary condition is not included in a subsequent
loadcase: point load, distributed load or kinematic load is
linearly reduced in magnitude to zero,
point temperature is linearly changed to the
initial temperature,
change state is linearly changed to the “initial state”.
loadcase:
point load, distributed load is linearly reduced in
magnitude to zero,
kinematic displacements are to be instantaneously
removed, and the previous reaction force is linearly
reduced to zero,
Enter -1 or -2 load is removed “gradually”.
point load, distributed load or kinematic load is linearly
reduced in magnitude to zero,
Enter -3 load is removed “gradually”,
Main Index
420 LOADCASE (Model Definition)
Define Loadcase
Format
Data
magnitude to zero,
reduced to zero,
point temperature is linearly ramped to the
initial temperatures,
change state is linearly ramped to the “initial state”.
Enter -4 Load is removed instantaneously,
point load, distributed load is instantaneously reduced to
zero,
reduced to zero,
point temperature is instantaneously changed to the initial
temperature,
change state is instantaneously changed to the
“initial state”.
When POINT TEMP is used, the initial temperatures are
prescribed in the INITIAL TEMP option.
When CHANGE STATE is used, the “initial temperatures”
are prescribed in the CHANGE STATE option.
Main Index
TRACK 421
Enter a List of Points to be Tracked
TRACK Enter a List of Points to be Tracked
Description
The analysis program creates a file containing information regarding the motion of a material particle
which is at the coordinate position of the node in the undeformed state. This file is then used by the
graphical user interface to visualize the motion of the point. It is also possible to track the material
behavior (equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain). This can be used for time history plots. This
information is written to a file, jid.trk.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the work TRACK.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of nodal lists. Default is 1.
6-10 2nd I Unit number to read list of nodes. Defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Enter 0 if no quantities are to be tracked.
Enter 1 to track equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain.
Enter -1 if quantities specified in the 3rd data block are to be tracked.
16-20 4th I Enter the body number which contains these nodes. This is optional, but
it does speed up the calculation.
3rd data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word QUANTITY.
11-15 2nd I Enter the element post code of the quantity to be tracked (see Table 3-4 in
the POST option description).
16-40 3rd I Enter a 24 character label associated with this quantity for use
in postprocessing.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to be tracked.
Main Index
422 FLOW LINE
Define a Flow Line Grid
FLOW LINE Define a Flow Line Grid
Description
This option allows you to define a grid (possibly independent of the original mesh) which is tracked
during the analysis. This information is written to the post file. This facilitates viewing the motion of the
material particles.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-9 1st A Enter the words FLOW LINE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1 if original mesh is used as a grid.
Enter 2 if Cartesian grid is used.
Enter 3 if flow line file is used. See Appendix G Flow Line FIle Format: for
the format of the .flw file.
Enter 4 if circular grid is used for 2-D analysis only. The initial diameter
will be 80% of the grid size specified in the 3rd data block.
6-10 2nd I Enter the body number to be flow lined.
Default is body 1.
Enter -1 to put flow lines on all bodies.
16-20 4th I Number of segments used to draw flow line.
Default = 5 for original mesh grid
= 100 for Cartesian grid
= 50 for circular grid
3rd data block
Required if a Cartesian or circular grid is used, Option 2 or 4.
1-5 1st I Enter 0 if Marc is to position grid.
Enter 1 if grid is to pass through a point specified in the 8th, 9th, or
10th field.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of grid atoms in the x-direction.
Main Index
FLOW LINE 423
Define a Flow Line Grid
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Enter the number of grid atoms in the y-direction.
16-20 4th I Enter the number of grid atoms in the z-direction.
21-30 5th F Enter the grid spacing in the x-direction.
31-40 6th F Enter the grid spacing in the y-direction.
41-50 7th F Enter the grid spacing in the z-direction.
51-60 8th F Enter the x-coordinate of the reference point.
61-70 9th F Enter the y-coordinate of the reference point.
71-80 10th F Enter the z-coordinate of the reference point.
3rd data block
Required if flow line file is used, Option 3.
1-80 1st A Enter the flow line file name.
Main Index
424 IRM
Intergraph Interface
IRM Intergraph Interface
Description
This option allows you to generate an IRM file which is compatible with Intergraph. Two types of
quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses, strains, etc.)
can either be component values or invariant values or both. They are each an average value within the
element. The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points and a weighted average
is calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam and/or shell elements. If the
IRM option is used simultaneously with either or both of the SDRC and HYPERMESH options, internally the
program treats the data in a cumulative manner. For example, if stresses are requested for the Intergraph file
and creep strains are requested for the SDRC Universal file, both quantities are output into both files. The
Intergraph results file is named jid.g.
Note: When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the Hypermesh results file, the
invariant element quantities are automatically written into the Intergraph results file.
Format
Format
Data
1st data
block
1-4 1st A Enter the word IRM.
11-15 2nd I Enter the unit number to which to write file; default is 39.
16-20 3rd I Frequency to write out file.
If no element data is required, skip to the 4th data block.
2nd data block
Repeat 3rd data block as often as required.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter:
1 for stresses.
2 for total generalized strains.
3 for creep strains.
4 for thermal strains.
5 for plastic strains.
Main Index
IRM 425
Format
Data
6 for strain energy.
7 for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.
8 for failure indices.
6-10 2nd I Enter a layer number if shell elements.
If the value in the first field is a 2, enter 0.
11-15 3rd I Enter 0 for component values.
Enter 1 for invariants.
Enter 2 for component and invariant values.
Note: When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the
Hypermesh results file, the invariant element quantities are
automatically written into the Intergraph results file.
If no nodal data is required, skip to the next model definition point.
4th data block
Repeat 5th data block as often as required
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter:
1 for displacements.
2 for velocities.
4 for reaction forces.
5 for temperatures.
6 for generalized stresses.
7 for generalized strains.
8 for top/middle/bottom layer stresses.
9 for top/middle/bottom elastic strains.
10 for top/middle/bottom plastic strains.
11 for top/middle/bottom creep strains.
13 for eigenmodes.
14 for harmonic displacements and reactions.
Note: If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying 8, 9,
10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component.
Main Index
426 IRM
Internals of IRM files

Element Data
CAT = ELEM
TYPE - A.B.C.D where A = S for stress
E for total strain
C for creep strain
T for thermal strain
P for plastic strain
B = C for component
I for invariant
C = 1 for 1st component
2 for 2nd component
3 for 3rd component
4 for 4th component
5 for 5th component
6 for 6th component
or
C = 1 for lowest principal
2 for intermediate principal
3 for highest principal
4 for Von Mises Intensity
5 for mean normal (hydrostatic)
6 for Tresca
D= layer number
If strain energy is requested, then:
TYPE A.D where A = ETT for total strain energy density

ETI for incremental strain energy density
EET for total elastic strain energy density
EEI for incremental elastic strain energy density
EPT for total plastic strain energy density
EPI for incremental plastic strain energy density
D = layer number
Main Index
IRM 427
If stress/yield stress is requested, then:
TYPE A.D where A = SYI for stress/original yield stress

SYT for stress/yield stress at current temperature
D = layer number
If failure indexes are requested, then:
TYPE A.B.D where A = FL

B = 1 to 6
D = layer number
Nodal Data
CAT = NODE
TYPE = A.B.C.
A= D for displacement
V for velocity
A for acceleration
R for reactions
E for eigenmode
M for magnitude of harmonic displacement
P for phase of harmonic displacement
N for magnitude of harmonic reaction
Q for phase of harmonic reaction
TEMP for temperatures
GSC for generalized stress components
GSI for generalized stress invariants
GNC for generalized strain components
GNI for generalized strain invariants
TSC for stress components, top layer
TSI for stress invariants, top layer
MSC for stress components, middle layer
MSI for stress invariants, middle layer
BSC for stress components, bottom layer
BSI for stress invariants, bottom layer
Main Index
428 IRM
TEC for elastic strain components, top layer

TEI for elastic strain invariants, top layer
MEC for elastic strain components, middle layer
MEI for elastic strain invariants, middle layer
BEC for elastic strain components, bottom layer
BEI for elastic strain invariants, bottom layer
TPC for plastic strain components, top layer
TPI for plastic strain invariants, top layer
MPC for plastic strain components, mid layer
MPI for plastic strain invariants, mid layer
BPC for plastic strain components, bottom layer
BPI for plastic strain invariants, bottom layer
TCC for creep strain components, top layer
TCI for creep strain invariants, top layer
MCC for creep strain components, mid layer
MCI for creep strain invariants, mid layer
BCC for creep strain components, bottom layer
BCI for creep strain invariants, bottom layer
B= X for the X direction
Y for the Y direction
Z for the Z direction
THX for rotation about X
THY for rotation about Y
THZ for rotation about Z
Skipped if A is not D, V, A or R
C = 1 for 1st component
2 for 2nd component
3 for 3rd component
4 for 4th component
5 for 5th component
6 for 6th component
Main Index
IRM 429
Skipped if A is D, V, A, or R
I= 1 for minimum principle value
2 for intermediate principle value
3 for maximum principle value
4 for von Mises intensity
5 for dilatational value
6 for Tresca intensity
Main Index
430 SDRC
SDRC I-DEAS™ Interface
SDRC SDRC I-DEAS™ Interface
Description
This option allows you to generate a Universal file which is compatible with the SDRC I-DEAS program.
Two types of quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses,
strains, etc.) written into the Universal file are only the component values. Once the Universal file is read
into I-DEAS, the invariants are computed internally. They are each an average value within the element.
The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points and a weighted average is
calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam and/or shell elements. If the
SDRC option is used simultaneously with either or both of the IRM and HYPERMESH options, internally the
program treats the data in a cumulative manner. For example, if stresses are requested for the SDRC Universal
file and creep strains are requested for the Hypermesh results file, both quantities are output into both files.
The SDRC Universal file is named jid.unv.
In addition, if the SDRC Universal file is required, the element results can be output as element or
nodal variables. To output the element variables, use ELEMENT. To output the nodal variables, use
ELEMENT NODE.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-4 1st A Enter the word SDRC.
11-15 2nd I Enter the unit number to which to write file; default is 40.
Enter either the 2a data block or 2b data block.
2a data block
2a data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ELEMENT NODE.
Main Index
SDRC 431
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter:
1 for stresses.
2 for total strains.
If layer number equals zero, total generalized strain is output.
4th data block
Repeat 5th data block as often as required
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter:
2 for velocities.
3 for acceleration.
5 for temperatures.
Main Index
432 SDRC
Format
Data
13 for eigenmodes.
14 for harmonic displacements and reactions.
Note: If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying
8, 9, 10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component.
Main Index
HYPERMESH 433
HyperMesh Interface
HYPERMESH HyperMesh Interface
Description
This option allows you to generate a results file which is compatible with HyperMesh. Two types of
quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses, strains, etc.)
written into the results file are both the component values and the invariant values. They are each an
average value within the element. The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points
and a weighted average is calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam
and/or shell elements. For writing of eigenmodes into the HYPERMESH results file, the Marc data file
should contain either the MODAL INCREMENT or the BUCKLE INCREMENT model definition option, as
appropriate, together with the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter. Do not use related history definition
options MODAL SHAPE, BUCKLE, or RECOVER. If the HYPERMESH option is used simultaneously with
either or both of the IRM and SDRC options, internally the program treats the data in a cumulative manner.
For example, if stresses are requested for the SDRC Universal file and creep strains are requested for the
Hypermesh results file, both quantities are output into both files. The HyperMesh results file is named
jid.hmr.
Note: When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the HyperMesh results file, the
invariant element quantities are automatically written into the Intergraph results file.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-4 1st A Enter the word HYPERMESH.
11-15 2nd I Leave blank.
2nd data block
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter:
1 for stresses.
2 for total generalized strains.
Main Index
434 HYPERMESH
HyperMesh Interface
Format
Data
If the value in the first field is a 2, enter 0.
4th data block
Repeat 5th data block as often as required.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter:
2 for velocities.
3 for acceleration.
5 for temperatures.
13 for eigenmodesa.
Note: If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying 8, 9,
10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component
a
For writing of eigenmodes into the HYPERMESH results file, the Marc data file should contain either the
MODAL INCREMENT or the BUCKLE INCREMENT model definition option, as appropriate, together with
the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter. Do not use related history definition options MODAL SHAPE,
BUCKLE, or RECOVER.
Main Index
PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition) 435
Specify Output
PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition) Specify Output
Description
This option allows you the control of the output from Marc. The data given here remains in control until
a subsequent PRINT CHOICE set is inserted – such a set can be included with either the model definition
or with history definition data set. See also PRINT ELEMENT and PRINT NODE.
The default values print all elements and all nodes. Element quantities are printed at each integration
point or at the centroid only, depending on whether the CENTROID parameter is used. For shells,
only the extreme fibers are output, plus layers where the inelastic strains or state variables are nonzero.
For beams, fibers with inelastic strains or nonzero state variables are printed. In addition, section forces
are given for these elements. This option also allows debug output of certain items. The default is no
debug printout.
All of the above defaults are reset by the PRINT CHOICE option.
The PRINT CHOICE option has no effect on the post processor file.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words PRINT CHOICE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of first and last element numbers to be printed (maximum
10).
6-10 2nd I Number of sets of first and last node numbers to be printed
(maximum 10).
11-15 3rd I Number of integration points to be printed in each element (not used if
CENTROID is flagged).
16-20 4th I Number of layers to be printed. This is for beams and shells only and
overrides the default described above.
21-25 5th I Increments between printout. Default is print every increment.
26-30 6th I Enter 1 for complex nodal quantities to be output as magnitude and phase,
otherwise real and imaginary components are given.
31-35 7th I Debug print flag. Enter a nonzero value and use data block 7.
36-40 8th I Log file flag. Enter unit number to which log file is to be written.
3rd data block
Include only if the first field of 2nd data block is not zero.
Main Index
436 PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition)
Specify Output
Format
Data
1-5 1st I First element in first set.
6-10 2nd I Last element in first set.
11-15 3rd I First element in second set.
16-20 4th I Last element in second set.
Etc. 5th Etc. in I5 format.
4th data block
Include only if the second field of 2nd data block is not zero.
1-5 1st I First node in first set.
6-10 2nd I Last node in first set.
11-15 3rd I First node in second set.
16-20 4th I Last node in second set.
Etc. 5th Etc. in I5 format.
5th data block
Include only if the third field of 2nd data block is not zero.
I Enter the list of integration points to be printed in (16I5) format (number
of entries given in third field of data block 2). This is only used if
CENTROID is not flagged. Be careful with analyses with several different
element types.
6th data block
Include only if the fourth field of 2nd data block is not zero.
I Enter the list of shell or beam fibers to be printed in (16I5) format. This
overrides Marc default, so you should be careful to not unintentionally
suppress plasticity or creep printout.
7th data block
Include only if the seventh field of 2nd data block is not zero
1-5 1st 16I5 Enter debug print flags. See the PRINT parameter.
Main Index
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) 437
Specify Elements to be Included in Output
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) Specify Elements to be Included in Output
Description
This option allows you to choose which elements, and what quantities associated with an element are to
be printed. If you do not specify NODE on the first data line, these values are at the integration points.
This option can be used to print response quantities for the first 28 integration points of any element. This
suffices for all elements, except continuum composite elements (types 149 - 154, 175 - 180) which can
have as many as 2040 integration points. For print-outs at integration point numbers greater than 28 for
continuum composite elements, use PRINT CHOICE. If you specify the word NODE, these values are the
extrapolated nodal values. This extrapolation is currently not available for rebar elements, composite
continuum elements, semi-infinite elements, or cavity elements.
Note: This option revokes any NO PRINT that precedes it. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by
PRINT ELEMENT and not followed by PRINT NODE results in the selected element
printout and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE with a blank node list to suppress
node output.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words PRINT ELEMENT.
11-20 2nd A Enter the word NODE (optional).
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets to be given below (optional).
6-10 2nd I Increment between printout. Default is print every increment.
11-15 3rd I File unit to which output is to be written. Defaults to standard output,
unit 6.
Data blocks 3, 4, and, if necessary, 5 and 6 are given once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-80 1st A Enter one or more of the following:
STRAIN output total strain.
STRESS output total stress.
PLASTIC output plastic strain.
CREEP output creep, swelling and viscoelastic strain.
THERMAL output thermal strain
Main Index
438 PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition)
Format
Data
ENERGY output of strain energy densities:
• total strain energy
• incremental total strain energy
• total elastic strain energy
• incremental elastic strain energy
• plastic strain energy
• incremental plastic strain energy
CRACK output of cracking strain.
CAUCHY output Cauchy stress.
STATE output state variables.
PREFER output stresses in preferred system.
ELECTRIC output electric field and electric flux.
MAGNETIC output magnetic field and magnetic flux.
CURRENT output current.
ALL output of all of the above.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to be printed.
Note: To suppress all element print-out, enter a blank list for the list
of elements.
5th data block
If the NODE option is not specified on the 1st data block, enter a list of
integration points to be printed.
If the NODE option is specified on the 1 data block, enter a list of node
positions based upon the CONNECTIVITY option. These node positions
range from one to the maximum number of nodes per element.
Main Index
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) 439
Format
Data
6th data block
Enter a list of layers to be printed. This is only necessary if there are either
thin walled beam, shell, rebar, solid composite elements in the mesh, (that
is, element types 1, 4, 5, 8, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 22, 23, 24, 25, 45,46, 47,
48, 49, 50, 72, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 98, 138, 139, 140,
142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 165, 166,
167, 168, 169, 170, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180).
It is also necessary to include this data block if there are beam element
types 52 or 98 and they are used with integrated solid cross sections.
Main Index
440 PRINT NODE (Model Definition)
Specify Nodes to be Included in Output
PRINT NODE (Model Definition) Specify Nodes to be Included in Output
Description
This option allows you to choose which nodes and what nodal quantities are to be printed.
PRINT NODE and not followed by PRINT ELEMENT results in the selected nodal output
and full element output. Use PRINT ELEMENT with a blank element list to suppress
element printout.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words PRINT NODE.
2nd data block
11-15 3rd I File unit to which output is to be written, default to standard output, unit 6.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
INCR output incremental displacement or potentials
TOTA output total displacement or potentials
VELO output velocity
ACCE output acceleration
LOAD output total applied load
REAC output reaction/residual force
TEMP output temperature
FLUX output flux
Note: Fluxes are only available if the parameter HEAT, 0,
0, 2 is used.
MODE output eigenvector (modal or buckle)
STRESS output average generalized stresses at nodes
Main Index
PRINT NODE (Model Definition) 441
Specify Nodes to be Included in Output
Format
Data
VOLT output voltage (Joule analysis)
PRES output pressure (bearing analysis)
COOR output coordinates (for rezoning)
INER output inertia relief load (for interia relief analysis)
ALL output all relevant quantities
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to be printed.
Note: To suppress all nodal printout, enter a blank list for the list of nodes. The average nodal
generalized stresses are obtained via an extrapolation and averaging procedure. If there is
a geometric or material discontinuity at a node, this value is not correct unless either double
nodes are used with kinematic tying, or you control which elements are to be averaged
using the PRINT ELEMENT feature.
Main Index
442 NO PRINT (Model Definition)
Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output
NO PRINT (Model Definition) Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output
Description
This option suppresses element and nodal output.
Note: This option is revoked by using either the PRINT CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, or PRINT
NODE options. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by a PRINT ELEMENT, for example, results
in element and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE or PRINT ELEMENT with blank node
or element lists to suppress all node or element output.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO PRINT.
Main Index
PRINT SPRING (Model Definition) 443
Controls the Print Out of Springs
PRINT SPRING (Model Definition) Controls the Print Out of Springs
Description
This option controls the output for selected springs.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PRINT SPRING.
2nd data block
Enter a list of springs to be printed
Main Index
444 NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)
Deactivates the Printing of All Springs
NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition) Deactivates the Printing of All Springs
Description
This options supresses the output of spring results.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word NO PRINT SPRING.
Main Index
PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) 445
Prints the Contact Body Summary
PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) Prints the Contact Body Summary
Description
This option ensures that the summary of contact information for each body is printed to the output file
even if the NO PRINT option is activated.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words PRINT CONTACT.
Main Index
446 NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)
Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout
NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout

Definition)
Description
This option deactivates the output of the summary of contact information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO PRINT CONTACT.
Main Index
GRID FORCE (Model Definition) 447
Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level
GRID FORCE (Model Definition) Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level
Description
This option allows the user to output the contributions to the nodal force at either an element level or a
nodal level. This is useful when constructing a free body diagram of part of the structure. The Marc for
grid force balance is with respect to the global coordinate system. In Marc, the following contributions
are considered:
On an element level, the grid force balance is based upon the
Internal forces
Distributed Loads
Foundation Forces
Reaction Force
On a nodal basis, it is much more complete and includes
Internal Forces Distributed + Point Forces

Foundation Forces Spring Forces
Contact Normal Forces Contact Friction Forces
Tying/MPC Forces Inertia Forces
Damping Forces DMIG Forces
Reaction Force
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word GRID FORCE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Frequency (increments) between writing out the grid forces.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if force output is based upon elements.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if force output is based upon nodes.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 if grid force output is to be written to standard output (default).
Enter 1 if grid force output is to be written to file jid.grd.
21-25 5th I Enter the number of times that grid force should be output in a load case;
if 1 is entered, the output will occur at the last increment of the load case.
Main Index
448 GRID FORCE (Model Definition)
Format
Data
3rd and 4th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
3rd data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SELECT ELEMENT.
4th data block
1-80 Enter a list of elements for which grid force output will be done
5th and 6th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
5th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SELECT BODY.
6th data block
1-80 Enter a list of contact bodies; grid force on an element level will be given
for elements in these bodies.
7th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SELECT NODE.
8th data block
1-80 Enter a list of nodes for which forces will be output on a nodal basis.
Main Index
PRINT VMASS (Model Definition) 449
Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies
PRINT VMASS (Model Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies
Definition)
Description
This option allows you to obtain printed output of element volumes, masses, costs and strain energies.
Options are provided for you to print the total quantities for each group of elements and the quantities for
each element in the group or the total quantities for each group of elements only.
In order to have correct mass computations, mass density for each element must be entered through one
of the material options. In order to have the correct cost, the cost per unit mass or the cost per unit volume
must be defined through the ISOTROPIC/ORTHOTROPIC option. The total strain energy and the plastic
strain energy, if applicable, are printed. Note that volumes and masses for some special elements (for
example, gap element, semi-infinite element, etc.) is not be computed. These quantities can be written on
either standard output file unit 6, or your specified unit.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the words PRINT VMASS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets to be given below.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 for option to print only total volumes, masses, costs, and strain
energy for groups of elements. Default is 0.
11-15 3rd I File unit to which output is to be written; default to standard output, unit 6.
Either data block 3a or 3b may be used
3a data block
3b data block
Enter the negative of deformable body number (only one body number per
data block).
Main Index
450 REAUTO
Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis
REAUTO Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis
Description
Used for changing conditions on restart of a problem in an autoloading sequence, dynamics, creep, or
heat transfer.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word REAUTO.
This entry allows a reset of various parameters during restart. It can be
used to override previously set values in the middle of automatic load
incrementation. These values are originally set in the AUTO CREEP,
AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, DYNAMIC CHANGE, or
TRANSIENT. Only the nonzero values set here are used. For AUTO LOAD,
only the 3rd, 4th, and 5th fields are used; set other fields to 0.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Time step size. The value should only be set in dynamic problems.
11-20 2nd F End value of time for this set of boundary conditions.
21-25 3rd I Total number of time steps in this set of boundary conditions or, for AUTO
LOAD, number of equal load increments. To immediately complete
previous set of load history data, set to 1.
26-30 4th I Not used, enter 0.
31-35 5th I Reassembly interval for mass and stiffness matrices; for linear problems,
set equal to the value given in the third field.
36-40 6th I Desired number of recycles for the AUTO INCREMENT option.
41-50 7th F Maximum step size in AUTO INCREMENT option.
51-60 8th F Current percentage of total load to be applied (AUTO TIME or AUTO
INCREMENT).
61-65 9th I Enter 1 to force remeshing immediately after restart. The meshing
parameters based upon the ADAPT GLOBAL option, before the END
OPTION, are used.
Enter 2 to force remeshing immediately after restart and user will provide
mesh file in jid_b*.mesh file in the format of a .t18 file.
mesh file in jid_b*.mesh file in the format of a .feb file.
Main Index
REAUTO 451
Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis
Format
Data
the mesh file in jid_b*.mesh in the format of a standard Marc data file.
66-70 10th I Enter 1 to force recalculation of radiation viewfactors immediately after
restart.
Notes: “*” is the remeshing body number.

When using REAUTO to read mesh files, you need to prepare mesh files for all defined
remeshing bodies.
Use ADAPT GLOBAL to read mesh files immediately after the restart. With this option, you
can select the remeshing body.
Main Index
452 RESTART
Set Flags for Restart
RESTART Set Flags for Restart
Description
This option sets up the flags for the restart files; both for the input of a previous restart file and for output
of a restart file from the current analysis. When the ELASTIC parameter is included, always restart at
increment 0.
The following points should be noted concerning the RESTART option.
• A restart write frequency must be specified when a restart file is to be output. The analysis can
then be restarted from any increment at which restart has been written.
• The restart file contains only those increments written during the current part of the analysis. The
restart file is not continuous because of the large volume of data that can be involved. If it were
written on the same file, the input/output time would be increased and also you might overflow
the file storage in large problems.
• At restart, the data governing the increments (or increment set) next to be analyzed must follow
the END OPTION as incremental input data. Any file input, such as a file of temperature
increments describing a thermal history, must be skipped forward by you to the appropriate
point; that is, to the beginning of the increment of the new part of the analysis.
• During any option set for a series of increments (AUTO CREEP, DYNAMIC CHANGE, AUTO
INCREMENT, AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, AUTO THERM CREEP, TRANSIENT), restart can be
effected and control parameters changed. Marc then continues to the end of the part of the
analysis specified by the option. You have the option to terminate such a part of the analysis
prematurely through the use of restart with the REAUTO option.
• The RESTART INCREMENT history definition option can be used to modify parameters defined
in this option, or terminate the writing of a restart file.
• The RESTART LAST option can be used to save only the last converged increment or to
periodically write restart data to individual files.
• The old restart file is closed after it has been read.
The input data describing the problem is not saved, and therefore must be read in with each restart. This
option specifies restart parameters; for example, input/output files, restart increment, and intervals at
which restarts are to be written.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word RESTART.
Main Index
RESTART 453
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 to write out restart data on a file. Set to 2 to read restart data from
a file (that is, to restart a problem). Set to 3 to restart a problem and
continue writing restart data for subsequent restart.
6-10 2nd I Number of increments between writing of restart data. For example, to
write every three increments, set the second field to 3. This data is only
used if the first field is set to 1 or 3. Defaults to 1 if left blank.
11-15 3rd I Enter the increment at which the restarted problem run begins. Only used
if the first field of this data block is set to 2 or 3. The number here should
be the number given in the message:
RESTART DATA AT INCREMENT
i on TAPE j
which appears on the output of the previous run of the problem at the point
where the restart is desired.
Note: The problem can only be restarted at such points. The frequency
of such points is determined by the data in columns 6 through
10 of this data block in the previous run of the problem.
A restarted run should, in principle, have the same parameters

as the original run. Only those parameters can be changed
which do not affect the storage allocation within Marc.
16-20 4th I Logical unit number for output of restart data; default logical unit number
is 8 if nothing is given here and the RESTART option is specified in the
parameters. Note that this file must be specified in the main program.
21-25 5th I Logical unit number for input of restart data from previous run; default is
9 if nothing is given here. Specify file in main program.
46-50 10th I Set to 1 to print out increment specified in the third field through
increment specified in the eleventh field. The job does not do any analysis.
This is to, for example, allow you to recover increments suppressed by
PRINT CHOICE.
Main Index
454 RESTART
Format
Data
51-55 11th I Set to last increment on restart file to be read. This is used in conjunction
with the tenth field above or the eighth field of the POST option.
56-60 12th I Enter the subincrement at which the restart problem begins. Defaults to
zero. This can be used to postprocess either eigenvectors or harmonics.
61-65- 13th I Enter the last subincrement to be read. This is used in conjunction with the
tenth field above or the eighth field of the POST option.
Main Index
RESTART LAST 455
Use Condensed Restart File
RESTART LAST Use Condensed Restart File
Description
This option sets up the flags for a condensed restart file where only the last converged increment or some
specific increment is saved. It can also be used to write a restart file on separate files at a
specified frequency.
Notes: Upon writing, the last converged increment is written to the restart file. Upon reading, this
increment is subsequently read in and the analysis continues. The restart file is closed after it
has been read. The REAUTO option can be used to terminate any multi-increment history
definition block.
The restart file name to store data at the last increment or at the end of analysis is jid.t08
by default. This file is overwritten when it is used. The file name to store data at specific
increment or increment intervals or at the end of each loadcase is jid.i_n.to8, n being the
increment number.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the word RESTART LAST.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 to write out last increment of restart data on a file.
Enter -1 to write out the last increment at the end of each loadcase and at
the end of the analysis.
Set to 2 to read restart data from a file (that is, to restart a problem).
Set to 3 to restart a problem and write out the last increment of restart data
for subsequent restart.
Enter -3 to restart a problem and write out the last increment at the end of
each loadcase and at the end of the analysis.
6-10 2nd I Logical unit number for output of restart data; default unit number is 8 if
nothing is given here.
Main Index
456 RESTART LAST
Use Condensed Restart File
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Logical unit number for input of restart data from previous run; default is
9 if nothing is given here.
16-20 4th I Enter frequency to write restart to individual files. The files will be named
jid_i_nn.t08 (where nn is the current increment).
If the number here is less than zero, its positive number is the specific
increment to write out the restart file. This option works when the first
field is set to -1 or -3.
Main Index
UDUMP 457
Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing
UDUMP Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing
Description
This option allows you to specify which nodes and elements can be referenced for postprocessing
through user subroutines. Nodal quantities are accessed through subroutine IMPD, element quantities are
accessed through the ELEVAR user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special
Routines). During harmonic subincrements, the ELEVEC user subroutine is used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word UDUMP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I First element, defaults to 1.
6-10 2nd I Last element, defaults to last element in mesh.
11-15 3rd I First node, defaults to 1.
16-20 4th I Last node, defaults to last node in mesh.
Main Index
458 SUMMARY (Model Definition)
Create Summary Report
SUMMARY (Model Definition) Create Summary Report
Description
This option produces a summary of the results of the increment and outputs them in a report format. This
option is in effect until a NO SUMMARY option is encountered. The summary consists of the maximum
and minimum of temperatures, stresses, strains, plastic strains, creep strains, displacements, velocities,
accelerations and reaction forces. The option also produces a detailed accounting of both the memory
usage and timing information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SUMMARY.
11-15 2nd I Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output,
unit 6.
16-20 3rd I Enter the increment frequency of summary, default is every increment.
Main Index
NO SUMMARY (Model Definition) 459
Do Not Create Summary
NO SUMMARY (Model Definition) Do Not Create Summary
Description
This option turns off the summary feature. The default is off unless the SUMMARY option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO SUMMARY.
Main Index
460 ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition)
Sort Element Results
ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition) Sort Element Results
Description
This option allows various element quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This
option is in effect until a NO ELEM SORT option is encountered. This option allows you to sort either in
ascending or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute
value. A range can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ELEM SORT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block, as given
below, defines each sort.
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number to read sort data.
11-15 3rd I Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output, unit
6.
16-20 4th I Enter the increment frequency, default is every increment.
3rd data block
The 3rd data block is repeated once for each sort.
1-5 1st I Enter code indicating type of quantity to be sorted (see Table 3-6).
6-10 2nd I Enter 0 for sort in descending order. Enter 1 for sort in ascending order.
Default is 0; sort in descending order.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value.
Enter 0 for sort by absolute value. Default is 0; sort by absolute value.
16-20 4th I Enter number of items to be included in sorted list.
21-25 5th I Enter lowest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.
26-30 6th I Enter highest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last
element in mesh.
Main Index
ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition) 461
Sort Element Results
Table 3-6 Element Sort Codes

Code Description Code Description
1 first stress 28 fourth plastic strain
2 second stress 29 fifth plastic strain
3 third stress 30 sixth plastic strain
4 fourth stress 31 equivalent plastic strain
5 fifth stress 32 mean plastic strain
6 sixth stress 33 Tresca plastic strain
7 equivalent stress 34 first principal plastic strain
8 mean stress 35 second principal plastic strain
9 Tresca stress 36 third principal plastic strain
10 first principal stress 37 first creep strain
11 second principal stress 38 second creep strain
12 third principal stress 39 third creep strain
13 first strain 40 fourth creep strain
14 second strain 41 fifth creep strain
15 third strain 42 sixth creep strain
16 fourth strain 43 equivalent creep strain
17 fifth strain 44 mean creep strain
18 sixth strain 45 Tresca creep strain
19 equivalent strain 46 first principal creep strain
20 mean strain 47 second principal creep strain
21 Tresca strain 48 third principal creep strain
22 first principal strain 49 temperature
23 second principal strain 61 voltage
24 third principal strain 73 first gradient
25 first plastic strain 74 second gradient
26 second plastic strain 75 third gradient
27 third plastic strain
Main Index
462 NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition)
Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element
NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition) Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element
Description
This option turns off the ELEM SORT feature. The default is off unless the ELEM SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO ELEM SORT.
Main Index
NODE SORT (Model Definition) 463
Sort Nodal Results
NODE SORT (Model Definition) Sort Nodal Results
Description
This option allows various nodal quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This option
is in effect until a NO NODE SORT is encountered. NODE SORT allows you to sort either in ascending
or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute value. A range
can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NODE SORT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block as given
below defines each sort.
6.
3rd data block
The 3rd data block is entered once for each sort.
Default is 0, sort in descending value.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value. Enter 0 for sort by absolute value.
Default is 0, sort by absolute value.
21-25 5th I Enter lowest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.
26-30 6th I Enter highest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last node in
mesh.
Main Index
464 NODE SORT (Model Definition)
Sort Nodal Results
Table 3-7 Node Sort Codes

Code Meaning Result
1-12 sort code I Results in the Ith component of the incremental displacement to
be sorted.
13-34 sort code I +12 Results in the Ith component of the total displacement to be sorted.
25-36 sort code I + 24 Results in the Ith component of the velocity to be sorted.
37-48 sort code I + 36 Results in the Ith component of the acceleration to be sorted.
48-60 sort code I + 48 Results in the nodal temperature to be sorted.
61-72 sort code I + 60 Results in the Ith component of the reaction force to be sorted.
71-84 sort code I + 72 Results in the Ith component of the contact force to be sorted.
101 101 Sort on magnitude of incremental displacement.
102 102 Sort on magnitude of total displacement.
103 103 Sort on magnitude of velocity.
104 104 Sort on magnitude of acceleration.
105 105 Sort on magnitude of temperature.
106 106 Sort on magnitude of reaction force.
107 107 Sort on magnitude of contact force.
Main Index
NO NODE SORT (Model Definition) 465
Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes
NO NODE SORT (Model Definition) Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes
Description
This option negates the NODE SORT option. The default is off unless the NODE SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO NODE SORT.
Main Index
466 DESIGN OBJECTIVE
Define Objective Function to be Optimized
DESIGN OBJECTIVE Define Objective Function to be Optimized
Description
This option defines the objective function for the optimization process. It is not needed for a pure
sensitivity analysis run. If it is specified for a pure sensitivity analysis run, the gradient of the objective
function is also computed. Currently, the only option is to “minimize” the objective function.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-16 1st A Enter the words DESIGN OBJECTIVE.
2nd data block
N/A 1st A Enter one of the following:
MATERIAL VOLUME
MATERIAL MASS
MATERIAL COST
USER DEFINED
Note: For MATERIAL MASS, the mass density, and for MATERIAL
COST, the material unit cost should be defined with the
material data (for example, see ISOTROPIC)
For USER DEFINED, you need to modify the user subroutine
uobjfn.f. This routine is self-explanatory together with an
example.
Main Index
DESIGN VARIABLES 467
Define Variable Design Parameters
DESIGN VARIABLES Define Variable Design Parameters
Description
This option defines the design variables. If a sensitivity analysis is required, the derivative of the response
with respect to each design variable and the element contributions to the response are reported. If an
optimization analysis is performed, then the design variables are modified to optimize the objective
function. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words DESIGN VARIABLES.
Data blocks 2 through 5 are repeated
for each design variable.
2nd data block
N/A 1st I Enter design variable set ID (optional). In general, this is not the same as
design variable numbers assigned by Marc and defined in the output.
N/A 2nd A Enter, as appropriate, one of the words GEOMETRY, MATERIAL, or
COMPOSITE.
N/A 3rd A For GEOMETRY, enter one of the following:
CTHIC – constant thickness over element
AREA – cross-sectional area
IXX – moment of inertia Ixx
IYY – moment of inertia Iyy
BMHEI – beam height
BMWID – beam width
RADIU – radius
WLLTH – wall thickness
For MATERIAL, enter one of the following:
YNGMD – Young’s modulus (isotropy)
YNG11 – Young’s modulus E11
Main Index
468 DESIGN VARIABLES
Define Variable Design Parameters
Format
Data
POISR – Poisson’s ratio (isotropy)
PSR12 – Poisson’s ratio ν12
SHR12 – Shear modulus G12
SHR23 – Shear modulus G23
SHR31 – Shear modulue G31
MASSD – Mass density
For COMPOSITE, enter one of the following:
LYRTH – layer thickness (the “layer thickness option needs to be
selected in the 3rd field of the 3rd data block under the
COMPOSITE model definition option.)
PLYAN – ply angle
N/A 4th I Enter related composite group number if applicable.
3rd data block
N/A 1st E Enter lower bound for value of variable.
N/A 2nd E Enter upper bound for value of variable.
4th data block
N/A 1st A Enter one of the following:
LINKED or UNLINKED.
N/A 2nd A Enter one of the following:
ELEMENTS, MATERIALS, or LAYERS, depending on the second field
in the 2nd data block.
5th data block
N/A Enter a list of elements if the second field of the 4th data block is
ELEMENTS.
Enter a list of material IDs if second field of the 4th data block is
MATERIALS.
Enter a list of layer numbers if second field of the 4th data block is
LAYERS.
Main Index
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS 469
Define Limits on Displacement Response
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT Define Limits on Displacement Response

CONSTRAINTS
Description
This option is used to specify displacement constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization
process. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words DESIGN DISPLACEMENT.
Data blocks 2 through 7 are repeated for each displacement constraint group.
2nd data block
N/A 1st A Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE where needed;
for example, ABSOLUTE TRANSL1):
TRANSL1 – translation parallel to first axis
TRANSL2 – translation parallel to second axis
TRANSL3 – translation parallel to third axis
ROTATN1 – rotation about first axis
ROTATN2 – rotation about second axis
ROTATN3 – rotation about third axis
RESTRAN – resultant translation
RESROTA – resultant rotation
DIRTRAN – translation along a vector
DIRROTA – rotation about a vector
DIRLTRA – relative translation along a vector
DIRLROT – relative rotation about a vector
RLTRAN1 – relative translation 1 (first axis)
RLTRAN2 – relative translation 2 (second axis)
RLTRAN3 – relative translation 3 (third axis)
RLROTA1 – relative rotation 1 (first axis)
RLROTA2 – relative rotation 2 (second axis)
RLROTA3 – relative rotation 3 (third axis)
Main Index
470 DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS
Define Limits on Displacement Response
Format
Data
N/A 2nd A Enter either:
< (for less than or equal to)
or
> (for greater than or equal to)
N/A 3rd E Enter the bound with the correct sign
The 3rd data block is only used if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is DIRTRAN, DIRROTA,
DIRLTRA, DIRLROT; otherwise, it is skipped.
3rd data block
N/A 1st E Enter first component of vector.
N/A 2nd E Enter second component of vector.
N/A 3rd E Enter third component of vector.
Note: Marc extracts the direction cosines.
4th data block
N/A 1st A Enter the words LOAD CASES.
5th data block
N/A I Enter a list of load cases for which this constraint is prescribed.
6th data block
N/A 1st A Enter the word NODES.
7th data block
N/A If first field of 2nd data block does not begin with RL, enter the list of
constrained nodes.
If first field of 2nd data block begins with RL, enter the first and second
node numbers which are constrained relative to one another.
Main Index
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS 471
Define Limits on Stress Response
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Stress Response
Description
This option is used to specify stress constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization process. The
option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block

1-13 1st A Enter the words DESIGN STRESS.
Data blocks 2 through 7 are repeated
for each stress constraint group.
2nd data block
N/A 1st I Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE where needed;
for example, ABSOLUTE STRESS1):
STRESS1
STRESS2
STRESS3 The stress components as defined for each
element separately in Marc Volume B: Element
STRESS4
Library (see below for “generalized stresses”).
STRESS5
STRESS6
VOMSTRS – von Mises equivalent stress
OSHSTRS – octahedral shear stress
MAPSTRS – maximum absolute principal stress
PRSTRS1 – algebraically highest (first) principal stress
PRSTRS2 – second principal stress
PRSTRS3 – third principal stress
TRESTRS – Tresca equivalent stress
STRESSV – normal stress along a vector
SHSTRSP – maximum shear stress on a plane
Main Index
472 DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS
Define Limits on Stress Response
Format
Data
GENSTS1 generalized stresses
1 through 9
GENSTS9 obtained by integration through thickness of
layered elements as defined in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.
or
N/A 3rd E Enter the bound with the correct sign.
The 3rd data block is only used if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is STRESSV or SHSTRSP;
otherwise, it is skipped.
3rd data block
N/A 1st E Enter first component of vector.
N/A 2nd E Enter second component of vector.
N/A 3rd E Enter third component of vector.
Note: Marc extracts the direction cosines.
4th data block
N/A 1str A Enter the words LOAD CASES.
5th data block
N/A Enter a list of load cases for which this constraint is prescribed.
6th data block
N/A 1st A Enter the word ELEMENTS.
7th data block
N/A Enter the list of constrained elements.
Main Index
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS 473
Define Limits on Strain Response
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Strain Response
Description
This option is used to specify strain constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization analysis. The
option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words DESIGN STRAIN.
Data blocks 2 through 6 are repeated for each constraint group.
2nd data block
N/A 1st I Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE if needed; for
example, ABSOLUTE STRAIN1):
STRAIN1
STRAIN2
STRAIN3 The strain components as defined
for each element separately in
STRAIN4
Marc Volume B: Element Library.
STRAIN5
STRAIN6
VOMSTRN – von Mises equivalent strain
MAPSTRN – maximum absolute principal strain
PRSTRN1 – algebraically highest (first) principal strain
PRSTRN2 – second principal strain
PRSTRN3 – third principal strain
TRESTRN – Tresca equivalent strain
N/A 2nd A Enter:
or
N/A 3rd E Enter the bound with the correct sign.
3rd data block
N/A 1st A Enter the words LOAD CASES.
Main Index
474 DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS
Define Limits on Strain Response
Format
Data
4th data block
N/A Enter a list of load cases for which this constraint is prescribed.
5th data block
N/A 1st A Enter the word ELEMENTS.
6th data block
N/A Enter the list of constrained elements.
Main Index
DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS 475
Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response
DESIGN FREQUENCY Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response

CONSTRAINTS
Description
This option is used to specify free vibration frequency constraints for a design sensitivity or design
optimization case. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-16 1st A Enter the words DESIGN FREQUENCY.
Data blocks 2 though 4 are repeated for each constraint group.
2nd data block
N/A 1st A Enter one of the following words:
FRQCYCL – frequency in cycles per unit time
FRQRADS – frequency in radians per unit time
FGPCYCL – difference or gap in frequency between any two modes to
be prescribed; in cycles per unit time
FGPRADS – difference or gap in frequency between any two modes to
be prescribed; in radians per unit time
or
N/A 3rd E Enter the bound. This is always positive.
3rd data block
N/A 1st A Enter the word FREQUENCIES.
4th data block
N/A 1st If the constraint is on the frequencies of modes, enter a list of constrained
mode numbers.
If the constraint is on the difference between the frequencies of two modes,
enter the numbers of the two modes.
Main Index
476 DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS
Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response
Main Index
Mechanical Analysis
Chapt Mechanical Analysis

er 3: This section is the first of four sections describing the input format for mechanical analysis. This section
Mode describes analysis controls and boundary conditions. The three subsequent sections concentrate on
material properties, rate effects, and dynamic analysis.
l The CONTROL option is required in all nonlinear analysis. It governs the number of increments and the
Defini accuracy associated with the analysis. This section also discusses the procedures for J-integral calculation
in fracture mechanics.
tion
The boundary conditions available for performing mechanical analysis are:
Optio
• Kinematic constraints of either zero or specified displacements.
ns • Surface, volumetric or nodal loads.
• Thermal loads.
• Foundation support.
• Surface contact.
These boundary conditions can be specified using a variety of techniques. The boundary conditions
when given here in the model definition sections represent the total quantities to be applied in the
zeroth increment. Mechanical loads are scaled if the SCALE parameter is included so that the model is
at impending yield. Note that thermal loads are not scaled. In addition, as the zeroth increment is
treated as linear elastic, the applied boundary conditions should not produce either material or
geometry nonlinearities.
Main Index
478 CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition)
Control Option for Stress Analysis
CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) Control Option for Stress Analysis
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for nonlinear
analysis. For heat transfer analysis, see the CONTROL (Heat Transfer) history definition option in
Chapter 4, History Definition Options.
For coupled thermal-stress analysis, data block 6 must be used.
For coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, data block 7 must be used.
For nonlinear static analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
They do not appear on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word CONTROL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of load steps/increments in this run. Default is 9999.
This is a cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when
restart is being used. If an ELASTIC parameter is included, this field is
ignored and all load cases are analyzed.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment for
plasticity, or other tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 3. This
should usually be increased to 10 for rigid-plastic flow option.
If a negative number is entered, Marc does a maximum of the absolute
value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is
given and Marc proceeds to the next increment. This is not recommended.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment for plasticity or other
tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 0.
Note: This data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all
subsequent increments.
Caution: This value is overwritten by the PROPORTIONAL
INCREMENT option.
16-20 4th I Flag for convergence testing.
0 or left blank Convergence is achieved when residuals satisfy
the criterion.
Main Index
CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) 479
Format
Data
1 Convergence is achieved when displacements satisfy
the criterion.
2 Convergence is achieved when strain energy satisfies
the criteria.
4 Convergence is achieved when either residual or
displacement satisfies the criterion.
5 Convergence is achieved when both residual and
Notes: Testing on relative displacements or strain energy always
requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done
with the CENTROID parameter, the residuals are not
calculated and testing is always done on displacements.
Nonlinear analysis with the CENTROID parameter is not
recommended.
If the fields are set as 0, 1, or 2, only the 3rd data block is
needed.
If the fields are set as 4 or 5, the 3a data block is also
needed. In this case, the 3rd data block is set for residual
testing and 3a data block is set for displacements
check only.
21-25 5th I Flag to specify relative or absolute error testing.
If equal to 0 Testing is done on relative error.
If equal to 1 Testing is done on absolute value.
If equal to 2 Testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or
incremental displacements are below minimum value, in
which case absolute tolerances testing is used.
26-30 6th I Iterative procedure flag.
1 Full Newton-Raphson (default).
2 Modified Newton-Raphson (no reassembly
during iteration).
3 Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification (see
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information).
8 Secant method.
31-35 7th I Nonpositive definite flag.
If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system is forced.
Note: With use of gap and Herrmann elements, the matrix always is
nonpositive definite and this entry has no significance.
Main Index
Format
Data
36-40 8th I No longer used; enter 0.
41-45 9th I To print convergence control messages to log file, enter 1.
46-50 10th I Control on initial stress stiffness.
0 Normal-full contribution.
1 For Mooney material, reduce contribution of hydrostatic
pressure on initial stress stiffness according to:
σ i ni ti al = σ – f r ⋅ p ⋅ I
where σ i ni ti al is the stress tensor used in the initial stress

stiffness matrix, σ is the current stress tensor, f r is entered
through the PARAMETERS option, p is the hydrostatic
pressure and I I is a unit tensor.
2 No initial stress stiffness.
3 Use stress at beginning of increment, not last iteration.
4 Results in the inclusion of only the positive stresses in the
initial stress stiffness during the equilibrium iteration.
Besides faster convergence, this leads to a stable analysis
of very thin shell structures.
51-55 11th I Control parameter:
0 Do not allow switching of convergence testing between
residuals and displacements.
1 Allow switching of convergence testing between residual
and displacements if reaction forces or displacements
become extremely small. For more details, see Marc
Note: Set this parameter to 0 if any kind of absolute value testing is
being used.
56-60 12th I Assembly flag. If set to 1, the stiffness matrix is assembled each iteration.
Note that this switches off the modified Newton-Raphson procedure if
chosen in the sixth field of this data block.
61-65 13th I For some material models, such as damage, cracking, and Chaboche,
there is an inner iteration loop to insure accuracy. The maximum number
of iterations allowed can be set here.
Default is 50.
3rd data block
Include if residual testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 0, 4, or 5.
Main Index
Format
Data
1-10 1st F If relative residual checking:
Maximum allowable value of maximum residual force divided by
maximum reaction force.
Default is 0.10.
11-20 2nd F If relative residual checking:
Maximum allowable value of maximum residual moment divided by
maximum reaction moment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on
residual moment occurs.
21-30 3rd F If relative residual checking:
Minimum reaction force, if reaction force is less than this value, checking
is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.
31-40 4th F If relative residual checking:
Minimum moment: if moment is less than this value, checking is
bypassed or absolute testing is performed.
41-50 5th F If absolute residual testing:
Maximum value of residual force.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual force takes place.
Maximum value of residual moment.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual moments
takes place.
If absolute displacement testing, maximum value of rotation increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking or rotations take place.
61-70 7th F Rigid Link Rotation Tolerance:
Maximum allowable value of the change in rotation increment at the
retained nodes of RBE2, rigid link (tying type 80) or beam-shell offset
nodes. Default is 0.001 radians.
Notes: If the 4th field of the 2nd data block is 4 or 5, the rigid link rotation tolerance entered in
the 4th data block circumvents the corresponding value in the 3rd data block.
The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to
ensure backward compatibility for RBE2.Theare two ways to by-pass the link
rotation check: the rigid link rotation tolerance can be set to a negative number, or the
rigid link rotation tolerance can be left as 0.0 with an additional FEATURE,5701 added to
the parameter section of the input.
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
Include if displacement testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 1, 4, or 5.
1-10 1 F Maximum allowable value of the change in displacement increment
divided by the displacement increment.
Default is 0.10.
11-20 2nd F Maximum allowable value of the change in rotational increment divided
by the rotational increment.
Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on change in rotational
increment occurs.
21-30 3rd F Minimum displacement, if displacement increment is less than this value,
checking is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.
31-40 4th F Minimum rotation: if rotation increment is less than this value, checking
is bypassed.
41-50 5th F Maximum value of displacement increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on displacements takes place.
51-60 6th F Maximum value of rotation increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on rotations takes place.
The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to
5th data block
Include if energy testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 2.
1-10 1st F Maximum allowable value of the change is energy increment.
Default is 0.1.
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
Only necessary for coupled thermal-mechanical analysis.
1-10 1st F Maximum nodal temperature change allowed. Used to control automatic
time step scheme for heat transfer.
Default value of 20.
11-20 2nd F Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are re-
evaluated and matrices reassembled.
21-30 3rd F Maximum error in temperature estimate used for property evaluation.
This control provides a recycling capability to improve accuracy in highly
nonlinear heat-transfer problems (for example, latent heat, radiation
boundary conditions).
Default is 0, which bypasses this test. Set to maximum temperature error
which is considered acceptable.
Note: Only the temperature estimate error (3rd field) is checked for
the TRANSIENT NON AUTO fixed stepping procedure. All three
fields are checked for the transient adaptive stepping procedure.
None of the three fields are checked for the auto step adaptive
stepping procedure.
31-40 4th F Not used; enter 0.
41-50 5th F Maximum change of xsi,p allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to
control automatic time step scheme.
51-60 6th F Maximum change of xsi,v allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to
61-70 7th F Maximum change of xsi,c allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to
71-80 8th F Maximum change in surface displacement per time step due to recession.
This is used to control the time step for the TRANSIENT option.
7th data block
Only necessary for coupled electrostatic structural analysis.
1-10 1st F Maximum allowed relative error in residual charge.
11-20 2nd F Maximum allowed absolute error in residual charge.
Main Index
484 PARAMETERS (Model Definition)
Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis
PARAMETERS (Model Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Definition)
Description
There are many parameters that are used in the finite element calculations. These parameters can be
customized for your particular application. Some of these constants can be entered in other input blocks
as well. The last nonzero value is used for the calculation.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PARAMETERS.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the scale factor which, when multiplied with the incremental strain,
is used to predict the incremental strain in the next increment.
Default is 1.0.
11-20 2nd E Enter the multiplier used to calculate the penalty factor to impose
boundary conditions. The penalty factor is this multiplier times the
maximum diagonal value of the operator matrix. Default multiplier is
1 x 109. If the APPBC parameter is used, this option is not used.
21-30 3rd E Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in rigid plastic
analysis for plane strain, axisymmetric, or solid analysis when
displacement elements are used.
Default is 100.
31-40 4th E Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in fluid analysis
when displacement elements are used.
Default is 1 x 106.
41-50 5th E Beta parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmark-beta
procedure.
Default is 0.25.
51-60 6th E Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmark-
beta procedure.
Default is 0.50.
61-70 7th E Gamma1 parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step
Houbolt procedure.
Main Index
PARAMETERS (Model Definition) 485
Format
Data
Default is 1.5.
71-80 8th E Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step
Houbolt procedure.
Default is -0.5.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the angle at which a node separates from a convex corner or
becomes stuck in a concave corner for two-dimensional contact.
Default is 8.625°.
11-20 2nd E Enter the angle at which a node separates from a convex corner or
becomes stuck in a concave corner for three-dimensional contact.
Default is 20.0°.
21-30 3rd E Enter the initial strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.
Default is 1 x 10-4.
31-40 4th E Enter the cutoff strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.
41-50 5th E Enter the fraction of the hydrostatic pressure that is subtracted from the
stress tensor in the initial stress calculation. See the tenth field of the
CONTROL option.
Default is 1.0
51-60 6th E Enter the factor used to calculate the drilling mode for shell elements type
22, 75, 138, 139, and 140.
Default is 0.0001.
61-70 7th E Enter the scale factor to the initial incremental displacements estimate for
the increment after a rezoning increment. The default value is 1.0, which
usually improves friction convergence, but may result in an inside-out
element.
4th data block (Optional)
1-10 1st E Universal gas constant (R). Default is 8.314 J mol-1K-1.
11-20 2nd E Offset temperature between user units and absolute temperature.
Default is 273.15°; that is, user input in Centigrade.
If user temperature is in Kelvin (K) or Rankine (R), enter a negative value.
The offset temperature is then set to zero.
21-30 3rd E Thermal Properties Evaluation Weight.
Default is 0.5
Main Index
486 PARAMETERS (Model Definition)
Format
Data
31-40 4th E Surface projection factor for single step Houbolt.
Default is 0.0.
41-50 5th E Stefan Boltzmann Constant.
Default is 5.67051 x 10-8 W/m2K4.
51-60 6th E Planks second constant.
Default is 14387.69 μM°K.
61-70 7th E Speed of light in a vacuum.
Default is 2.9979 x 1014 μM/s
71-80 8th E Maximum change in the incremental displacement in a Newton-Raphson
iteration.
Default is 1 x 1030.
1-10 1st E Initial friction stiffness (only for friction models 6 and 7). This stiffness
will be used during the first cycle of an increment to define the friction
stiffness matrix in cases where a touching node has a zero normal force
and the amount of sliding does not exceed the elastic sticking limit.
If set to zero, Marc will estimate the initial friction stiffness based on
the initial average stiffness of the contact body to which the touching
node belongs.
11-20 2nd E Specifies the minimum value that indicates a singularity if a direct solver
is used. If a zero is given, that this value is set internally by Marc and
depends on the solver being used.
21-30 3rd E Specify the maximum change in temperature per iteration in radiation
simulations. This is useful to stabilize the solution. The default is 100.
31-40 4th E Enter parameter alphaf for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
Note that the value of alphaf defined here may be overruled by defining
the spectral radius on the 6th field.
Main Index
PARAMETERS (Model Definition) 487
Format
Data
41-50 5th E Enter parameter alpham for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
Note that the value of alpham defined here may be overruled by defining
51-60 6th E Define the spectral radius S for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
The following conventions apply:
• 0 ≤ S ≤ 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and alphaf and alpham
are calculated based upon the spectral radius according to
alphaf = - S /(1+ S ) and alpham = (1-2 S )/(1+ S )
• S = – 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and neither alphaf nor
alpham will be changed
• S = – 2 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and the values of alphaf
and alpham will be optimized for a dynamic contact analysis
and alpham will be optimized for an analysis without dynamic
contact
• S = – 4 : use the values of alphaf and alpham as entered on the 4th
and 5th field
61-70 7th E RBE3 conditioning number. If the conditioning number is greater than
this value, the RBE3 is probably singular and a warning message is
printed. If the value is negative, the analysis is stopped. Default is 1 x 106.
Main Index
488 FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
Define Fixed Displacement
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Define Fixed Displacement
Description
This data block defines potential fixed displacements, including the magnitude, degrees of freedom and
applied locations, and associates it with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition is activated
or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the kinematic displacement, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of
nodal numbers or a list of surfaces. The prescribed displacements are with respect to the degrees of
freedom associated with the element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system
using either the TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or
UTRANFORM options.
The FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter
nonuniform time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Note: In static analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to remove
all rigid body modes.
It is advised that boundary conditions not be placed on nodes which might come into
contact. Using a symmetry rigid body is preferred.
Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the
non-table driven input instead.
Further detail is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library, for a definition of the degrees of freedom for each element type.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FIXED DISP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of boundary condition data to be read (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit number to read data default is the standard input file.
Data blocks 3 through 10 are repeated for each set.
Main Index
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometric types used to define boundary condition,
default is 1. See 9th and 10th data blocks.
6-10 2nd I Enter 0 if no user subroutine required.
Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines are required for this
boundary condition.
11-15 3rd I Enter 0 if real value given.
Enter 1 if complex value given as real and imaginary numbers.
Enter 2 if complex value given as magnitude and phase.
16-20 4th I Enter the Fourier series number associated with prescribed displacement,
enter 0 if no Fourier series.
21-25 5th I Enter a 0 if total displacements are to be given (default).
Enter a 1 if incremental displacements relative to the position at the
beginning of this loadcase are to be given.
31-63 7th A Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label
will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.
If a real displacement is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 are used.
If a complex harmonic displacement is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or
the magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
4th data block - Magnitudes
1-10 1st E Prescribed displacement for first degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data
block 8.
21-30 3rd E Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified.
5th data block - Table IDs
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the first degree of freedom listed.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the second degree of freedom listed.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the third degree of freedom listed.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.
Main Index
490 FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
Format
Data
6th data block - Imaginary Component or Phase Angle
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the first
degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the
second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
21-30 3rd E Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the third
7th data block - Table IDs for Imaginary Component or Phase Angle
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the first degree
of freedom listed.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second
degree of freedom listed.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the third degree
of freedom listed.
8th data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed
displacements are prescribed.
Note: List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.
The 9th and 10th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd
data block, 1st field.
9th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the geometry type:
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
3: Volume/Region/Body IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
11: Element-Edges IDs
12: Element-Faces IDs
13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention
14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention
Main Index
Format
Data
10th data block
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions
are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the
9th data block.
Main Index
492 FIXED DISP (Mechanical)
FIXED DISP (Mechanical) Define Fixed Displacement
The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven
input style.
Description
This data defines the fixed displacement that each specified degree of freedom must take during the first
and subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the DISP CHANGE option. The boundary
conditions are specified either by giving the kinematic displacement and a list of degrees of freedom and
a list of nodal numbers or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation
(MESH2D). The prescribed displacements are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the
element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the
TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I This field is set to nonzero to flag input of boundary conditions set during
mesh generation (MESH2D). If this field is activated, no further data is
required in this option.
11-15 3rd I Unit number used for MESH2D option.
Note: The boundary conditions are stored after the connectivity and
coordinate data on this file, so that the model definition data
must be arranged accordingly.
For each set of boundary conditions use the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks.
Main Index
FIXED DISP (Mechanical) 493
Format
Data
3a data block
Use only if not Fourier Analysis.
block 4.
21-30 3rd F Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified. The third
data block is read as 8E10.3.
3b data block
Use for Fourier analysis only.
1-5 1st I Enter the series number associated with this boundary condition.
6-15 2nd F Prescribed displacement for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
16-25 3rd F Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data block
4.
26-35 4th F Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
36-45 5th F Prescribed displacement for fourth degree of freedom listed in data block
4.
46-55 6th F Prescribed displacement for fifth degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
4th data block
5th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above boundary conditions are applied.
Main Index
494 DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Distributed Loads
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) Define Distributed Loads
Description
This data block defines potential distributed loads applied to the model, including the magnitude, type of
load and location, and associates this with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition will be
activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The FORCEM user
subroutine can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads, or the TABLE model definition
option may be used.
The distributed loads entered here are total loads. If no time-dependent tables are referenced and the
ramping options in the LOADCASE model or history definition option are not used, the distributed load
will be instantaneously applied in the loadcase.
When used with global adaptive meshing, if the load is applied to a curve or a surface where element
edges or faces are attached, the load is correctly applied after remeshing.
Note: If distributed load is applied on the bottom of a shell, the sign of the load is reversed, that
is, a positive load is now in the direction of the normal to the surface.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of distributed loads to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of distributed load data, defaults to input.
The 3rd through 9th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
Main Index
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 495
Format
Data
Enter 1 if the FORCEM user subroutine required for this
boundary condition.
16-20 4th I Enter the Fourier series number associated with the load, enter 0 if no
Fourier series.
21-25 5th I Enter the cavity number if necessary.
26-30 6th I Enter 1 to exclude applied load when the edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is fully
in contact.
will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.
If a real distributed load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 are used.
If a complex harmonic distributed load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component
or the magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first
coordinate direction.
11-20 2nd F For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the load in second
21-30 3rd F For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the load in third coordinate direction.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the load. For load type 21 or 102 to 113,
enter the table ID associated with the load in the first direction.
6-10 2nd I For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID associated with the load
in the second direction.
11-15 3rd I For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID associated with the load
in the third direction.
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of load or phase angle.
11-20 2nd E For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the imaginary component of load in
second coordinate direction.
Main Index
Format
Data
21-30 3rd E For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the imaginary component of load in
third coordinate direction.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase.
6-10 2nd I For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID for imaginary component
or phase in second direction.
11-15 3rd I For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID for imaginary component
or phase in third direction.
8th data block
If geometry type is element IDs (1) use either the first field or the second and third field.
If geometry type is volume (3), surface (4), or curve (5) use the second field only.
1-5 1st I Enter the distributed load type based upon element library description in
6-10 2nd I Enter the distributed load type based upon:
1: Normal pressure
2: Shear stress in 1st tangent direction
3: Shear stress in 2nd tangent direction
4: Volumetric in x-direction
5: Volumetric in y-direction
6: Volumetric in z-direction
7: force/length in beams x-direction
8: force/length in beams y-direction
9: force/length in beams z-direction
11: Wave loading
13: Force/length on edge of shell on midplane; perpendicular to
edge
14: Force/length on edge of shell on midplane; tangent to the
edge; positive is from node 1 to node 1+1
15: Force/length on edge of shell; perpendicular to shell, for
example, -v3 direction
21: General traction
100 + jaxis: Centrifugal based upon entering ω2,ω in radians/time
101: Inelastic heat generation
Main Index
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 497
Format
Data
102: Gravity
103 + jaxis: Coriolis based upon entering ω2,ω in radians/time
104 + jaxis: Centrifugal based upon entering ω (cycles/time)
105 + jaxis: Coriolis based upon entering ω (cycles/time)
106: Uniform body load (force per unit volume)
107: Nonuniform body load (force per unit volume)
110: Uniform beam load (force per unit length)
111: Nonuniform beam load (force per unit length)
112: Uniform load per unit area
113: Nonuniform load per unit area
Note: For problems with more than one rotation axes, jaxis equals the
rotation ID times a thousand.
11-15 3rd I Enter the face ID.
9th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
16: Surface ID: orientation ID
17: Curve ID: orientation ID
18: Surface ID: orientation ID - Mentat convention
19: Curve ID: orientation ID - Mentat convention
Main Index
Format
Data
10th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions
9th data block.
Main Index
DIST LOADS (Model Definition) 499
DIST LOADS (Model Definition) Define Distributed Loads
input style.
Description
This block of data allows pressure (surface and volumetric) loads to be specified. These values are
incremental values per increment if a fixed time-step procedure is used or the total change over the
loadcase if an adaptive time-step procedure is used or the total value of the load if the ELASTIC parameter
is used. User subroutine FORCEM can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads.
Note: If FOLLOW FOR is included in the input file with DIST LOADS, the input about type of
load, magnitude etc. (data blocks 3 and 4) needs to be consistent in the model and history
definition options.
If FEATURE,203 is used, then the pressure on an edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is applied, unless all nodes of
that edge or face are in contact with another body. If separation occurs, the distributed load is reapplied
to the surface.
For most distributed load types, one enters a load per unit length (on beams or shell edges) or a load per
unit area. There are a few exceptions listed below:
Load Type
100 Centrifugal Enter ω2 (ω in radians/time)

102 Gravity Enter three values (Force/mass)
103 Centrifugal and Coriolis Enter ω2 (ω in radians/time)
104 Centrifugal Enter ω (ω in cycles/time)
105 Centrifugal and Coriolis Enter ω (ω in cycles/time)
106 Uniform Volumetric load Enter three values force/volume
107 Nonuniform Volumetric load Enter three values force/volume
110 Uniform load per unit length Enter three values force/length
111 Nonuniform load per unit length Enter three values force/length
112 Uniform load per unit area Enter three values force/area
113 Nonuniform load per unit area Enter three values force/area
-10 to -21 General traction Enter three values force/area
Main Index
500 DIST LOADS (Model Definition)
Table 3-8 CID Load Types (Not Table Driven Input)

IBODY Specify Traction on Edge or Face User Subroutine
-10 1 No
-11 1 Yes
-12 2 No
-13 3 Yes
-14 3 No
-15 3 Yes
-16 4 No
-17 4 Yes
-18 5 No
-19 5 Yes
-20 6 No
-21 6 Yes
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3a data block
Use if conventional Marc input, not Fourier, not applied to a cavity, and not Nastran PLOAD4 style.
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of load. See library element description in
For problems with more than one rotation axes, add the rotation axis ID
times a thousand.
6-15 2nd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.
For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first
Main Index
Format
Data
16-25 3rd F For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in
second coordinate direction
26-35 4th F For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in third
coordinate direction
36-40 5th I Distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to be used in
the FORCEM user subroutine.)
3b data block
Use if distributed load is applied to cavity and not Fourier. The CAVITY parameter and CAVITY model
definition option is also required.
1-5 1st I Enter the value of ibody_cavity.
i bo dy _c a vi t y = ic a vi t y * 10000 + i c av it y _t y pe * 1000 + ib od y
where
ibody_cavity is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.
icavity is the cavity ID.
icavity_type is the cavity load type:
0: cavity is closed.
1: cavity is loaded with an applied pressure.
2: cavity is loaded with an applied mass.
9: cavity load is defined by the UCAV user subroutine.
ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see
library element description in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.)
6-15 2nd F If icavity_type = 1, enter incremental pressure.
If icavity_type = 2, enter incremental mass.
16-25 3rd F Not used; enter 0.
41-45 6th I Enter -1 if the cavity load is not active.
Main Index
502 DIST LOADS (Model Definition)
Format
Data
3c data block
Use if Fourier Analysis.
times a thousand.
6-15 2nd I Enter the series number associated with this load.
16-25 3rd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.
26-35 4th F For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in
3d data block
Use if Nastran PLOAD4 style input.
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of load plus 200. See library element
description in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
6-15 2nd F Enter P1, the magnitude of load at node 1 of face or edge.
16-25 3rd F Enter P2, the magnitude of load at node 2 of face or edge.
26-35 4th F Enter P3, the magnitude of load at node 3 of face or edge.
36-45 5th F Enter P4, the magnitude of load at node 4 of face or edge. Not required if
a triangular face.
46-55 6th F Enter first component of direction of load.
56-65 7th F Enter second component of direction of load.
Main Index
Format
Data
66-75 8th F Enter third component of direction of load.
76-80 9th I If positive, distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to
be used in the FORCEM user subroutine.) If the direction of the load is
given with respect to a COORD SYSTEM option, then enter the negative
of the coordinate system ID.
Notes: If the direction of the load is not defined, then the conventional Marc direction is used.
If the direction of the load is defined, then it is fixed and not updated even if the FOLLOW
FOR parameter is activated.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed loads.
Main Index
504 FACE IDS
Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations
FACE IDS Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source,
Films, and Foundations
1-D 2-Node Elements

y
FACE ID NODES
2
1 1–2
1-D 3-Node Elements

3 FACE ID NODES
1 1–2–3
2

4 3
FACE ID NODES
1 1–2
2 2–3
3 3–4
4 4–1
1 2
Load shown on FACE ID 1
Main Index
FACE IDS 505

4 7 3
FACE ID NODES
1 1–5–2
2 2–6–3
8 6
3 3–7–4
4 4–8–1
1 5 2
2-D 3-Node Triangle

3 FACE ID NODES
1 1–2
2 2–3
3 3–1
1 2
2-D 6-Node Triangle

3 FACE ID NODES
1 1–4–2
2 2–5–3
6 5 3 3–6–1
1 4 2
3-D 3-Node Shell

z 3
FACE ID NODES
1 1–2–3 (top)
2 1–3–2 (bottom)
1
y
x 2
Main Index
506 FACE IDS
3-D 4-Node Shell/Membrane

4 P
FACE ID NODES
1 1–2–3–4 (top)
3
2 1–4–3–2 (bottom)
1
3-D 6-Node Shell

3
P FACE ID NODES
1 1–2–3–4–5–6 (top)
2 1–3–2–6–5–4 (bottom)
6 5
1 4 2
3-D 8-Node Shell

4 7 3
FACE ID NODES
1 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8 (top)
8 6 2 1–4–3–2–8–7–6–5 (bottom)
1 5 2

4
FACE ID NODES
3
1 1–2–4
2 2–3–4
1 3 3–1–4
4 1–2–3
2
Main Index
FACE IDS 507
6
4 FACE ID NODES
5
1 1–2–5–4
2 2–3–6–5
3 3 –1 – 4 – 6
4 1–3–2
3
5 4–5–6
1
2

3 FACE ID NODES
15
1 1 – 2 – 5 – 4 – 7 – 14 – 10 – 13
6 2 2 – 3 – 6 – 5 – 8 – 15 – 11 – 14
3 3 – 1 – 4 – 6 – 9 – 13 – 12 – 15
4 3–2–1–8–7–9
8
9 5 4 – 5– 6 – 10 – 11 – 12
12 11
1 7 2
13 14
4 10 5
3-D 8-Node Brick

8
FACE ID NODES
5 7 1 1–2–6–5
6 2 2–3–7–6
3 3–4–8–7
4
4 4–1–5–8
5 1–2–3–4
1 3
6 6–5–8–7
Main Index
508 FACE IDS

4
10 FACE ID NODES
3 1 1 – 2 – 4 – 5 – 09 – 08
8 9
2 2 – 3 – 4 – 6 – 10 – 09
7
6 3 3 – 1 – 4 – 7 – 08 – 10
1 4 1 – 2 – 3 – 5 – 06 – 07
5
2
3-D 20-Node Brick

8
16 15
FACE ID NODES
5 7
20 1 1 – 2 – 6 – 5 – 09 – 18 – 13 – 17
13
6 14 2 2 – 3 – 7 – 6 – 10 – 19 – 14 – 18
17 19 3 3 – 4 – 8 – 7 – 11 – 20 – 15 – 19
4
12 11 4 4 – 1 – 5 – 8 – 12 – 17 – 16 – 20
18
5 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 09 – 10 – 11 – 12
1 3
9 6 6 – 5 – 8 – 7 – 13 – 16 – 15 – 14
10
2
Main Index
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 509
Define Nodal Point Loads
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)Define Nodal Point Loads
Description
This data block defines potential point loads, including the magnitude and location of application and
associates this with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition will be activated or deactivated
using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. Point loads can be specified as fixed direction
loads or follower loads. The prescribed forces are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with
the element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the
TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
The point loads entered here are total loads. If no time-dependent tables are referenced and the ramping
options in the LOADCASE model or history definition option are not used, the point load will be
instantaneously applied in the loadcase.
The FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter
nonuniform time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Notes: Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the
The fourth field of the FOLLOW FOR parameter should be set to 1 when follower force
point loads are used in the model. The follower load is only supported through the mesh
based automated option wherein the nodal loads are specified in vector form and the initial
load orientation with respect to the mesh is maintained as the structure deforms. The
follower force option is not available for fourier loads or harmonic loads. Also, the
follower force capability is not supported for point loads specified through the FORCDT
user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT LOAD.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sets of point loads to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point load data, defaults to input.
The 3rd through 8th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
Main Index
510 POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
16-20 4th I Enter the Fourier series number associated with the nodal load; enter 0 if
no Fourier series.
21-25 5th I Enter 0 for fixed direction load.
Enter -1 for automated follower force
will be referenced by the LOADCASE option.
If a real point load is to be defined, data blocks 3 and 4 are used.
If a complex harmonic point load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or the
magnitude; and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
4th data block
Real magnitude.
1-10 1st F Nodal load associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd F Nodal load associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Nodal load associated with third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th F Nodal load associated with fourth degree of freedom.
41-50 5th F Nodal load associated with fifth degree of freedom.
51-60 6th F Nodal load associated with sixth degree of freedom.
5th data block - Table ID for Real Magnitude
1-5 1st I Table ID associated with the first degree of freedom.
6-10 2nd I Table ID associated with the second degree of freedom.
11-15 3rd I Table ID associated with the third degree of freedom.
16-20 4th I Table ID associated with the fourth degree of freedom.
21-25 5th I Table ID associated with the fifth degree of freedom.
Main Index
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 511
Format
Data
26-30 6th I Table ID associated with the sixth degree of freedom.
1-10 1st E Imaginary component/phase associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd E Imaginary component/phase associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd E Imaginary component/phase associated with third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th E Imaginary component/phase associated with fourth degree of freedom.
41-50 5th E Imaginary component/phase associated with fifth degree of freedom.
51-60 6th E Imaginary component/phase associated with sixth degree of freedom.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for first degree
of freedom.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for second degree
of freedom.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for third degree
of freedom.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for fourth degree
of freedom.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for fifth degree
of freedom.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for sixth degree
of freedom.
The 8th and 9th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data
block, 1st field.
8th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
512 POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
9th data block
8th data block.
Main Index
POINT LOAD (Model Definition) 513
POINT LOAD (Model Definition) Define Nodal Point Loads
input style.
Description
This block of data allows nodal point loads to be specified. The nodal loads can be specified as fixed
direction loads or follower loads. For the fixed direction loads, the nodal forces are always specified in
vector form. For the follower loads, two options are possible: Option 1 is the MD Nastran style Follower
Force wherein the magnitudes of the nodal force and moment are specified and the direction is
independently specified using 2 or 4 nodes. Option 2 is the Mesh Based Automated Follower Force
wherein the nodal loads are specified in vector form and the initial load orientation with respect to the
mesh is maintained as the structure deforms. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
These values are incremental values unless the ELASTIC parameter is used or the 3rd field of the
FOLLOW FOR parameter is set to 1, in which case they are total loads. When specified in the form of a
load vector, the prescribed forces are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the element,
unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the TRANSFORMATION,
COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
Notes: Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes with point loads on the DIST
LOADS parameter.
The fourth field of the FOLLOW FOR parameter should be set to 1 when follower force
loads are used in the model. When this global parameter for follower force point loads is
turned on, the 5th data block is mandatory. The follower force option is not valid for fourier
loads or harmonic loads. Also, the follower force capability is not supported for point
loads specified through user subroutine FORCDT.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point load data, defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to signal existence of more than one point loadcase on the same
node. The loads are summed in this case.
Main Index
514 POINT LOAD (Model Definition)
Format
Data
3a data block
Use if not Fourier Analysis.
Nodal force magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.
Nodal moment magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.
61-70 7th F Nodal load associated with seventh degree of freedom.
71-80 8th F Nodal load associated with eighth degree of freedom.
Continuation data is necessary, must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data is needed if more than
eight degrees of freedom per node in analysis.
Notes: The nodal load vector is valid for fixed direction force or for automated follower force.
Only the first two fields are used for the MD Nastran style follower force.
3b data block
Use only if Fourier Analysis.
1-5 1st I Enter the series number associated with this load.
6-15 2nd F Nodal load associated with first degree of freedom.
16-25 3rd F Nodal load associated with second degree of freedom.
26-35 4th F Nodal load associated with third degree of freedom.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes having the point load given above.
5th data block
Used only when 4th field of FOLLOW FOR parameter is 1.
For the Nastran style follower force, enter as many lines as there are nodes in the 4th data block.
1-5 1st I 0 = Fixed direction force
-1 = Automated follower force
Main Index
POINT LOAD (Model Definition) 515
Format
Data
First node for Nastran style follower force
6-10 2nd I Second node for Nastran style follower force
11-15 3rd I Third node for Nastran style follower force
16-20 4th I Fourth node for Nastran style follower force
Main Index
516 HOLD NODES
Neglect Incremental Displacement
HOLD NODES Neglect Incremental Displacement
Description
This model definition option indicates that the incremental displacement of the indicated nodes is to be
neglected. This allows you to apply a load or displacement on the structure to generate a stress in the body
without the displacements changing. In this way, an initial stress field may be generated. This option
cannot be used with the multiplicative (FeFp) plasticity formulation (PLASTICITY, 5).
At the end of the increment, this option is automatically deactivated.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words HOLD NODES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read the data from.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of nodes for which the displacements will not be updated in
this increment.
Main Index
INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition) 517
Define Inertia Relief
INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition) Define Inertia Relief
Description
This option defines the parameters necessary for conducting an inertia relief analysis. The parameters are
used to evaluate the Rigid Body Modes of the system. Once the modes are evaluated, the program
evaluates the inertia relief load vector which balances the external load vector acting on the system. For
more details of these procedures, you are referred to Inertia Relief in Chapter 5 in the Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information manual.
When inertia relief is no longer active in a current loadcase, an option can be provided to remove or retain
inertia relief loads from previous loadcases.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INERTIA RELIEF.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Flag for Rigid Body Mode evaluation method:
0 - Inertia Relief is not active in current loadcase
3 - Support Method
6-10 2nd I Flag to retain/remove previous Inertia Relief Loading:
1 - retain load
-1 - remove load immediately (default)
-2 - remove load gradually
11-15 3rd I Number of Lines containing Support degree of freedom information
(default 1)
Note: Field 2 of data block 2 is only used if inertia relief is not active in the current loadcase (i.e.,
Field 1 of data block 2 is 0). Also, data block 3 is not necessary in this case.
Data block 3 is repeated as many times as specified in the 2nd data block, 3rd field.
3rd data block
Use only if 1st field of 2nd data block is 3 (Support Method)
1-5 1st I Node ID 1.
6-10 2nd I Degree of Freedom ID 1.
11-15 3rd I Node ID 2.
16-20 4th I Degree of Freedom ID 2.
Main Index
518 INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition)
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Node ID 3.
71-75 15th I Node ID 8.
Note: The degrees of freedom in fields 2, 4, etc. of data block 3 refer to the nodal degrees of
freedom that define the rigid body motion (r-constraint set). The associated nodes are defined
in fields 1,3, etc. The degrees of freedom that form part of the r-constraint set at any
particular node can be specified in combined form (e.g., 123, 135, etc.). If all degrees of
freedom at node N are to be part of this set, simply specify a negative number in the
associated degrees of freedom field.
Main Index
ROTATION A 519
Define Rotational Axis
ROTATION A Define Rotational Axis
Description
This option defines the rotation axis for centrifugal and/or Coriolis loading or for the STEADY STATE
rolling option. This option is also used for steady state rolling analyses. The rotational speed is entered
though the DIST LOADS option. Using an IBODY=100 or 104 results in centrifugal loading, using an
IBODY=103 or 105 results in both centrifugal and Coriolis loading.
If multiple rotation axis are supported for centrifugal and Coriolis loads, this all data blocks should
be repeated.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ROTATION A.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F
11-20 2nd F Direction cosines of the axis of rotation.
21-30 3rd F
31-35 4th I Enter rotation axis ID; default is 1.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F
11-20 2nd F Global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on the axis of rotation.
21-30 3rd F
31-40 4th F
41-50 5th F Velocity of the point on the axis of rotation, used for Coriolis
51-60 6th F loading only.
Main Index
520 CORNERING AXIS
Define Cornering Axis in Steady State Rolling Analysis
CORNERING AXIS Define Cornering Axis in Steady State Rolling Analysis
Description
This option defines the cornering axis for steady state rolling analysis. The cornering velocity is defined
via the SS-ROLLING history definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CORNERING.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F First direction cosine of the cornering axis.
11-20 2nd F Second direction cosine of the cornering axis.
21-30 3rd F Third direction cosine of the cornering axis.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F x coordinate of a point on the cornering axis.
11-20 2nd F y coordinate of a point on the cornering axis.
21-30 3rd F z coordinate of a point on the cornering axis.
Main Index
FLUID DRAG 521
Define Fluid Drag
FLUID DRAG Define Fluid Drag
Description
This option defines parameters required for the evaluation of drag loads and buoyancy loads on beam
type structures immersed in a fluid. The drag forces are defined by Morison’s equation. In static analyses,
the fluid velocity is constant and defined here. In dynamic analyses, an additional contribution is added
due to wave effects.
Note: In two dimensional analyses, the y-axis is considered vertically up, current is required only
in x and y directions and the first direction cosine is either a one or minus one. In three
dimensional analyses, the z-axis is considered vertically up.
Those elements which require fluid drag must be indicated on the DIST LOADS option
using a load type of 11. If an element is above the fluid surface, no drag or buoyancy
is included.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FLUID DRAG.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the elevation of the sea bed.
11-20 2nd E Enter the surface elevation of the fluid outside the pipe.
21-30 3rd E Enter the surface elevation of the fluid inside the pipe.
31-40 4th E Enter the gravity constant.
41-50 5th E Enter mass density of fluid outside pipe.
51-60 6th E Enter mass density of fluid inside pipe.
61-70 7th E Enter the drag coefficient.
71-80 8th E Enter the inertia coefficient.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Current in x-direction.
11-20 2nd E Current in y-direction.
21-30 3rd E Current in z-direction.
31-40 4th E Gradient of x-current with elevation.
41-50 5th E Gradient of y-current with elevation.
Main Index
522 FLUID DRAG
Define Fluid Drag
Format
Data
51-60 6th E Gradient of x-current with elevation.
4th data block
1-10 1st E Wave height.
11-20 2nd E Wave period.
21-30 3rd E Wave phase.
31-40 4th E First direction cosine in horizontal plane of wave front.
41-50 5th E Second direction cosine in horizontal plane of wave front.
Main Index
CAVITY 523
Define Constants and Reference Values for Structures with Internal Cavities
CAVITY Define Constants and Reference Values for Structures with

Internal Cavities
Description
This option allows you to enter the ambient pressure and ideal gas law exponent for structural analyses
involving internal cavities. It also allows you to enter the reference gas pressure, temperature, and density
for each cavity. When using the CAVITY option, the CAVITY parameter must also be included. (See Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information.)
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CAVITY.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E Ambient pressure. Default is 0.0.
11-20 2nd E Ideal gas law exponent. Default is 1.0.
Data block 3 is repeated for each cavity
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Cavity ID.
6-15 2nd E Gas reference pressure.
16-25 3rd E Gas reference temperature.
26-35 4th E Gas reference density.
36-40 5th I Cavity sign convention; used for shell and membrane elements:
Set to 1 (default) if the signs of the cavity pressure and a positive element
pressure are the same.
Set to -1 if the signs of the cavity pressure and a positive element pressure
are opposite.
Note: The elements defining the cavity must be aligned.
Main Index
524 PRE STATE
Transfer History Data from Previous Analysis to the Current Analysis as the Initial State
PRE STATE Transfer History Data from Previous Analysis to the Current
Analysis as the Initial State
Description
In a general multi-stage analysis, previous analysis results are often required as the initial state for the
new analysis. The PRE STATE option includes the capability of the existing AXITO3D option to allow
the transfer of data in a result file to the new analysis. This capability includes data transfer from a 2-D
axisymmetric analysis to a 3-D analysis, from a 2-D plane strain analysis to a 3-D analysis, or simply
data transfer to the same type of analysis. If, in the previous analysis, there are multiple deformable
contact bodies, the PRE STATE option allows the user to specify which contact bodies in the previous
analysis need the data transfer, by providing a list of contact body names. The PRE STATE option
replaces the existing AXITO3D option.
In order to have a correct data transfer, the following should be observed:
1. Correct data in the previous result file:
For large strain metal plasticity, this would include at least stress (post code 311) and equivalent
plastic strain (post code 7). For plasticity procedure using multiplicative elastic-plastic
decomposition, total strain tensor (post code 301) and plastic strain tensor (post code 321) are
required. For updated Lagrange rubber elasticity, strain (post code 301) and stress (post code 311)
are needed. For an analysis involving temperature, thermal strain (post code 371) and temperature
(post code 9) are required. Creep strain (post code 331) and equivalent creep strain (post code 37),
velocity and acceleration are needed for a creep and dynamic analysis, respectively.
Nodal displacement can be transferred as well as nodal velocity and acceleration but it should be
consistent with the previous model. If the current model is created based on the original mesh in
the previous model, nodal displacement should be included in the transfer. If the current model is
created based on the final mesh, such as in the case of global remeshing, the nodal displacement
should not be included in the transfer. By default, if total Lagrange procedure is used in the current
model, nodal displacement is transferred. Therefore, in this case, it is important to create the
model based on the initial mesh in the previous model.
Nodal temperature is transferred by default in the thermal-mechanical coupled analysis. If the
temperature at the integration points is required in the current model but not stored in the previous
result file, nodal temperature is used instead.
2. Compatible analysis types
In the current release, only 2-D plane strain to 3-D model and 2-D axisymmetric to 3-D model are
supported in the 2-D to 3-D transfer. 2-D to 2-D and 3-D to 3-D transfer are based on the same
mesh model. Not all the element types are supported in the analysis with the PRE STATE option
as stated below.
3. Compatible element types
It is important to select the correct element types compatible with the previous model for a 2-D to
3-D transfer. For the same element type transfer, not all the element types are supported.
For axisymmetric to 3-D transfer, supported element types are:
Main Index
PRE STATE 525
10 -> 7 20 -> 7
82 -> 84 83 -> 84
28 -> 21 67 -> 21
33 -> 35 66 -> 35
55 -> 57 59 -> 61
48 -> 23 142 -> 23
144 -> 146 145 -> 146
For 2-D plane strain to 3-D solid elements, supported elements types are:
11 -> 7 80 -> 84
19 -> 7 81 -> 84
27 -> 21 32 -> 35
29 -> 21 34 -> 35
For 2-D to 2-D and 3-D to 3-D transfer, the following element types are tested and supported:
7, 157, 10, 11, 19, 20
4. Compatible PRE STATE models and mesh numbering
During the PRE STATE history data transfer, a list of contact bodies is transferred from a result
file. If this is not a 2-D to 3-D conversion, the elemental data and nodal data are copied to the
current model providing the elements and nodes within the bodies are matched. Element and
nodal numbering sequence within the bodies should be continuous and in the same order although
the numbers may not be the same. For 2-D to 3-D transfer, the mesh expansion is based on the
method that Marc Mentat uses – that is, each base element in 2-D is expanded with number of
repetitions in z-direction or around x axis in the axisymmetric to 3-D case. The element
numbering follows each element expansion. If the new mesh in 3-D is not generated in such
manner, the data transfer will be incorrect. For axisymmetric to 3-D, if MD Patran is used to
generate the 3-D mesh, this can be specified in the input.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PRE STATE
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Analysis Type in the previous model
Main Index
526 PRE STATE
Format
Data
= 1 plane stress (not supported)
= 2 plane strain
= 3 axisymmetric
= 4 3-D
6-10 2nd I Analysis Type in the current model
= 2 plane strain
= 3 axisymmetric
= 4 3-D
11-15 3rd I Enter the number of repetitions in 3-D expansion direction. Used only for
axisymmetric to 3-D or plane strain to 3-D transfer. Default = 0.
16-20 4th I Increment to read from post file.
-1 The last increment on the post file.
-2 Input the time to read the post file at 3rd data block.
21-25 5th I Unit number from which the post file is read. Defaults to unit 24 for a
formatted post file and to unit 25 for a binary post file.
26-30 6th I Enter 0 for binary post file.
Enter 1 for formatted post file.
31-35 7th I Enter 1 to move stress tensor (post code 311).
36-40 8th I Enter 1 to move equivalent plastic strain (post code 7).
41-45 9th I Enter 1 to move temperatures (post code 9 or 180).
46-50 10th I Enter 1 to move strain tensor (post code 301).
51-55 11th I Enter 1 to move plastic strain tensor (post code 321).
56-60 12th I Enter 1 to move thermal strain tensor (post code 371).
61-65 13th I Enter 1 to move creep strain tensor (post code 331).
66-70 14th I Enter 1 to move equivalent creep strain (post code 37).
71-75 15th I Enter 1 to move displacements, (as well as velocity and acceleration in a
dynamic analysis).
If total Lagrangian formulation is used in the analysis, the number is set
to 1 by Marc. Displacements are always moved. In this case, the mesh of
the data transfer body in the new model must be generated based on the
undeformed model.
Enter 0 if the new mesh is generated based on the deformed mesh in the
previous model and the updated Lagrange is used in the analysis.
Main Index
PRE STATE 527
Format
Data
= 2 plane strain
= 3 axisymmetric
= 4 3-D
6-10 2nd I Analysis Type in the current model
= 2 plane strain
= 3 axisymmetric
= 4 3-D
11-15 3rd I Enter the number of repetitions in 3-D expansion direction. Used only for
axisymmetric to 3-D or plane strain to 3-D transfer. Default = 0.
16-20 4th I Increment to read from post file.
-1 The last increment on the post file.
31-35 7th I Enter 1 to move stress tensor (post code 311).
dynamic analysis).
If total Lagrangian formulation is used in the analysis, the number is set
to 1 by Marc. Displacements are always moved. In this case, the mesh of
the data transfer body in the new model must be generated based on the
undeformed model.
Enter 0 if the new mesh is generated based on the deformed mesh in the
previous model and the updated Lagrange is used in the analysis.
Main Index
528 PRE STATE
Format
Data
Enter 1 to move displacements If the new mesh is generated based on the
initial configuration in the previous model.
76-80 16th I Enter 0 if the standard Marc Mentat numbering is used (default).
Enter 1 if the position based mapping is required.
The 3rd data block is needed only if the 4th field of the 2nd data block is -2.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the time to read the post file.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of contact bodies in data transfer. Default = 0, in this
case all the elements in the previous model are transferred.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 for rigid body rotation (not supported).
The 5th data block is required only when the first field of 4th data block is not zero. Repeat 5th data
block for all contact names defined in the first field of the 4th data block.
5th data block
1-24 1st A Enter contact body name in the previous model for data transfer.
Main Index
AXITO3D (Model Definition) 529
Transfer Data from Axisymmetric Analysis to 3-D Analysis
AXITO3D (Model Transfer Data from Axisymmetric Analysis to 3-D Analysis

Definition)
Description
In certain cases, it is possible to begin a numerical simulation using a 2-D axisymmetric model, even
though the final problem is fully 3-D. Splitting the simulation in an axisymmetric and a 3-D part might
be advantageous because of considerable computational savings, provided that there is an efficient data
transfer from the axisymmetric to the 3-D model. The AXITO3D option is used in the input file of the 3-
D problem to import results of an axisymmetric analysis into a 3-D analysis. Since the results from the
axisymmetric analysis are imported from the post file, care must be taken to write the appropriate data
on the post file during the axisymmetric analysis. For example, for large strain metal plasticity, this would
include at least stress (post code 311) and equivalent plastic strain (post code 7). For updated Lagrange
rubber elasticity, strain (post code 301) and stress (post code 311) are needed. For an analysis involving
temperature, thermal strain (post code 371) and temperature (post code 9) are required. Creep strain (post
code 331) and equivalent creep strain (post code 37), velocity and acceleration are needed for a creep and
dynamic analysis, respectively. The AXITO3D option can be used for most quadrilateral axisymmetric
continuum elements. The following table shows the correlation between element types.
Axisymmetric 3-D Solid

10 7
20 7
82 84
83 84
28 21
67 21
33 35
66 35
55 57
59 61
48 23
142 23
144 146
145 146
166 147
167 147
169 148
170 148
Main Index
530 AXITO3D (Model Definition)
The external applied load and displacement boundary conditions are transferred from the axisymmetric
analysis to 3-D analysis using the table curve shift feature in Marc Mentat.
This option cannot be used for beams, composites, and triangular elements.
There are three steps required to perform these types of analysis using Marc Mentat.
1. Perform axisymmetric analysis:
a. Create axisymmetric model using Marc Mentat.
b. Save the created model; for example, into stage_axi.mud.
c. Run axisymmetric model and keep post file (stage_axi_job1.t16 or
stage_axi_job1.t19).
2. Create 3-D model using Marc Mentat.
a. Open axisymmetric model stage_axi.mud.
b. Expand axisymmetric mesh to 3-D model via:
MESH GENERATION→EXPAND→AXSYMMETRIC MODEL TO 3D and move the rigid
surfaces, if any, to the deformed configuration.
c. Define data transfer parameters via:
INITIAL CONDITIONS→MECHANICAL→AXSYMMETRIC-3D
d. Add additional model data such as contact surfaces if necessary.
e. Save the created model with a different name to avoid overwriting the existing
stage_axi.mud; for example, into stage_3d.mud.
3. Run 3-D model.
Note: (1) In the axisymmetric model, the node and element numbering have to start at 1 and have
to be consecutive.
(2) If a 3-D analysis is run outside of Marc Mentat, use the -pid command line option to
read in a post file of axisymmetric analysis. For example, to submit a 3-D analysis, use
the command:
marc -j stage_3d_job1 -pid stage_axi_job1
(3) If remeshing/rezoning steps are performed in the axisymmetric analysis, the original
mesh in the model is replaced by a new mesh. The 3-D analysis starts based on the
deformed configuration.
To replace step 2-a above, do the following:
i. Open post file stage_axi.t16 (or stage_axi.t19)
ii. Position to the desired increment.
iii. Rezone.
iv. Save the model to stage_3d.mud.
Main Index
AXITO3D (Model Definition) 531
v. Close post file.

vi. Open stage_3d.mud.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word AXITO3D.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Not used.
11-15 3rd I Enter the number of repetitions in θ direction.
16-20 4th I Increment to read off post file.
-1 The last increment on the post file of an axisymmetric job (default).
31-35 7th I Enter 1 to move stress tensor (post code S).
dynamic analysis).
If total Lagrangian formulation is used in the analysis, the number is set to
1 by Marc. Displacements are always moved. In this case, the 3-D mesh
must be generated based on the undeformed axisymmetric mesh.
Main Index
532 AXITO3D (Model Definition)
Format
Data
If updated Lagrange is used in the analysis, enter 0 if the 3-D mesh is
generated based on the deformed axisymmetric mesh. If the 3-D mesh is
generated based on the original axisymmetric mesh, enter 1 to move
displacements.
76-80 16th I Enter 1 if the 3-D mesh is not generated by Marc Mentat.
The 3rd data block is needed only if the 4th field of the 2nd data block is -2.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the time to read the post file.
Main Index
GLOBALLOCAL 533
Structural Zooming Analysis
GLOBALLOCAL Structural Zooming Analysis
Description
This option defines control parameters and a list of local nodes connecting to the global model in a
structural zooming analysis.
In order to achieve a better evaluation of the local gradients in the solution, a re-analysis of the model
with some local variations may be needed. These variations may be due to changes in model geometry
or in the finite element mesh. However, in cases that these local changes have negligible influence on the
solution a certain distance away from the changes, it is computationally more efficient to model only the
local changes and the vicinity affected. This can be accomplished by applying the existing loads and/or
boundary conditions in the local model along with properly defined kinematic conditions to the local
boundaries connecting to the global model.
A typical Marc structural zooming analysis contains two steps:
1. Global run to obtain global results and a post file containing these results.
2. Local run to define kinematic boundary conditions in the local model and to obtain refined results
in the local model.
This procedure can be repeated as many times as desired. Any local analysis can be the global analysis
of a subsequent refinement analysis.
The GLOBALLOCAL option is used in the input of the local run to define the list of nodes connecting to
the global model. Marc calculates the deformation (temperature) history of these nodes based on their
locations in the global model and on the solution of the global analysis. The obtained deformation
(temperature) history is then applied to the nodes as prescribed kinematic boundary conditions. The
detailed steps include:
a. Reading in the GLOBALLOCAL option to get the list of connecting nodes.
b. Reading in the global model (element types, node coordinates, element connectivity,
thickness if shell elements) and solution of the model from the previously generated post file
of the global run.
c. Finding the locations of local connecting nodes in the global model (the element each node is
associated with and its isoparametric location within the element).
d. Calculating the deformation (temperature) of each connecting node for every increment
available in the global post file based on its location in the global elements associated using
the interpolation techniques, and store the deformation (temperature) history in the format of
time-dependant tables.
e. Applying the deformation (temperature) history of the connecting nodes to the local model as
prescribed kinematic boundary conditions.
All the above steps are performed automatically inside Marc once the GLOBALLOCAL option is used in
the input file of the local run.
Main Index
534 GLOBALLOCAL
Factors to Consider in Global Analysis

In the global analysis, it is a good idea to write the entire global model into the post file. The post file
should contain, at least, nodal displacements for mechanical analyses or nodal temperatures for heat
transfer analysis, or both for thermal-mechanical coupled analyses. If there are shell elements in the
model, the shell thickness at each integration point (i.e., post code 20) should also be written into the post
file. In order to form an accurate deformation (temperature) history of the connecting nodes in the local
run, it is recommended that the results of all increments be put onto the post file. Smaller increment size
(therefore, more increments) in the post file leads to a more accurate deformation (temperature) history
of connecting nodes.
The time scale in the global analysis must be the same as that of local analysis. It is recommended that
the time range used in the local run [ 0, t l o ca l ] be equal to or less than the time range in the global run
[ 0, t gl obal ] ; i.e., t local ≤ t globa l . If t local > t g lo bal , the extrapolation option defined in the 4th field of the 2nd
data block of the GLOBALLOCAL option can be used.
Element Types Supported

The global to local modeling can be used in the following four cases:
Global Model Local Model

2-D Solid 2-D Solid
3-D Solid 3-D Solid
3-D Shell/Membrane 3-D Shell/Membrane
3-D Shell/Membrane 3-D Solid
Limitations
The local run must be based on a single, continuous global post file. Therefore, if restart had been
employed during the global analysis, a complete post file for the global analysis must be properly
generated. This is also true if the global analysis is performed with DDM.
Adaptive remeshing can be used in global but not in local runs.
The element types not supported includes all rebar element types, all 1-D element types (truss, beam
axisymmetric shell), all special element types (gap, semi-infinite …) and nonconventional shell types
(type 4, 8, 24, 49, 68, and 72).
In the current release, the feature does not support magnetostatic, fluid-solid or harmonic analysis.
Main Index
GLOBALLOCAL 535
Note: If the local analysis is run outside of Marc Mentat, use the -pid command line option to
read in the post file of global analysis. For example, to submit a local analysis, use the
command line:
marc -j local_model -pid global_model
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the word GLOBALLOCAL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometry types
(see the 3rd and the 4th data block). Default is 1.
5-10 2nd I = 0 if read in a binary global post file
= 1 if read in a formatted global post file.
11-15 3rd F Exterior tolerance; used to find the associated global element for a
connecting node. Default is 0.05.
A connecting node is considered within a global element if the distance
between the node and the element is smaller than the tolerance times the
corresponding element edge length, unless the node is actually inside
another global element.
16-20 4th I = 0 exit if the local run time range exceeds the global post file time range.
= 1 use end value if the local run time range exceeds the global post file
time range.
= 2 use extrapolation if the local run time range exceeds the global post
file time range.
26-35 5th F Timeshift. Global results will be taken at Local time + Timeshift. Default
ID 0.d0. Timeshift cannot be negative.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 1st
field of the 2nd data block.
Main Index
536 GLOBALLOCAL
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the geometry types
2: Nodes
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Default is 2.
4th data block
Enter the list of geometry entities, which must all be of the type prescribed
in the 3rd data block.
Main Index
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input) 537
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Stress
Description
This option allows you to define initial stresses and associate them with an initial condition name. These
initial conditions will be activated using the LOADCASE model definition option. It is your responsibility
to input a self-equilibrating set of stresses. These stresses should not produce any material nonlinearity.
As an alternative, the UINSTR user subroutine can be used.
To obtain the initial stress from the calculated value of a previous analysis, use the PRE STATE option.
Notes: It is not recommended to use the CENTROID parameter with initial stresses because the
residual load cannot be accurately calculated.
For shells and beams, these are the real physical stress, not the generalized stresses.
The stresses entered should be in the element coordinate system and not the preferred
material coordinate system.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INIT STRESS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of initial stress data to be entered (optional)
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of initial stress data.
Defaults to input file.
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are repeated once for each data set. The components of stress are given
in the order described for each element type in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometry types used to define this initial condition,
default is 1. See the 6th and 7th data blocks.
6-10 2nd I Enter 0 if no user subroutine is required.
Enter 1 if the UINSTR user subroutine is used.
Main Index
538 INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
31-63 7th A Enter the unique label associated with this initial condition. This label will
be referenced by the LOADCASE option.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the first component of stress.
11-20 2nd F Enter the second component of stress.
21-30 3rd F Enter the third component of stress.
31-40 4th F Enter the fourth component of stress.
41-50 5th F Enter the fifth component of stress.
51-60 6th F Enter the sixth component of stress.
61-70 7th F Enter the seventh component of stress.
5th data block
1-5 1st F Table ID associated with the first component of stress.
6-10 2nd F Table ID associated with the second component of stress.
11-15 3rd F Table ID associated with the third component of stress.
16-20 4th F Table ID associated with the fourth component of stress.
21-25 5th F Table ID associated with the fifth component of stress.
26-30 6th F Table ID associated with the sixth component of stress.
31-35 7th F Table ID associated with the seventh component of stress.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data block,
1st field.
6th data block
1 - Element IDs
3 - Volume/Region/Body IDs
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial conditions are
applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the
6th data block.
Main Index
INIT STRESS 539
INIT STRESS Define Initial Stress
input style.
Description
Option A allows the user to enter initial stresses into the model. It is the user’s responsibility to input a
self-equilibrating set of stresses. These stresses should not produce any material nonlinearity. As an
alternative, the UINSTR user subroutine can be used.
For analysis that involves the machining capability of Marc, there exists another option (Option B) to
input the initial stress. Option B allows users to have the initial stress data stored in a data file. The data
file is in ASCII text format.
Notes: It is not recommended to use the CENTROID parameter with initial stresses because the
residual load cannot be accurately calculated.
For shells and beams, these are the real physical stress, not the generalized stresses.
The stresses entered should be in the element coordinate system and not the preferred
material coordinate system.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INIT STRESS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of initial stress data to be entered (optional)
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of initial stress data.
10-15 3rd I Enter 1 if there exists initial stress data stored in an ASCII data file.
(Default is set to 0.)
Note: This option only works in combination with the MACHINING
parameter. In the current version of Marc, the only element
types supported are: 7, 117, and 134.
The 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th (and, if necessary, 7th) data blocks are repeated once for each data set. The
components of stress are given in the order described for each element type in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.
Main Index
540 INIT STRESS
Format
Data
Option A
Option A is only necessary if the third field of the 2nd data block is set to 0. In this case, the 3rd, 4th,
5th, and 6th data blocks are repeated once for each data set.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of elements for which initial stress prescribed above is applied.
5th data block
Only necessary if CENTROID parameter is not used.
1-80 1st I Enter a list of integration points for which the initial stresses are applied.
6th data block
Only necessary for shell or beam analysis.
1-80 1st I Enter a list of layers for which the initial stress is prescribed.
Option B
Option B is necessary only if the third field of the 2nd data block is set to 1. In this case, the 3rd, 4th,
5th, 6th, and 7th data blocks are repeated once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 0 if the residual stress data is not defined by a text data file.
Enter 1 to 3 if the stress data is given in a separate text data file.
1 if stresses are defined in one direction only (1-D space).
2 if stresses are defined in 2-D space.
3 if stresses are defined in 3-D space.
6-80 2nd A Enter the name of text file that contains the initial stress data if the first
field is set to 1, 2, or 3.
4th data block (If the first field of the 3rd data block is set to 0.)
Main Index
INIT STRESS 541
Format
Data
4th data block (If the first field of the 3rd data block is set to 1, 2, or 3.)
1-10 1st F Enter the first component of base vector, V1.
11-20 2nd F Enter the second component of base vector, V1.
21-30 3rd F Enter the third component of base vector, V1.
31-40 4th F Enter the first component of base vector, V2.
41-50 5th F Enter the second component of base vector, V2.
51-60 6th F Enter the third component of base vector, V2.
Note: In case of 1-D or 2-D, the primary axes are V1 and V2; if 3-D,
the primary axes are V1, V2, and V3. Here, V3 is defined by the
cross product of V1 and V2.
5th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of elements for which initial stress prescribed above is applied.
6th data block
Only necessary if CENTROID parameter is not used.
1-80 1st I Enter a list of integration points for which the initial stresses are applied.
7th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of layers for which the initial stress is prescribed.
ASCII Text Data Format
This ASCII text data format is used in a separate text file as defined by input Option B when the first
field of the 3rd data block is set as nonzero.
1st data block
1st I Enter the total number of points (optional).
Main Index
542 INIT STRESS
Format
Data
2nd data block
1st F First coordinate of starting point of the coordinate system defined in the
ASCII text file.
2nd F Second coordinate of starting point of the coordinate system defined in the
ASCII text file.
3rd F Third coordinate of starting point of the coordinate system defined in the
ASCII text file.
3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each point till the end of the file.
3rd data block
1st F Enter the first coordinate component of the point.
2nd F Enter the second coordinate component of the point.
3rd F Enter the third coordinate component of the point.
4th data block
1st F Enter the first component of stress.
2nd F Enter the second component of stress.
3rd F Enter the third component of stress.
4th F Enter the fourth component of stress.
5th F Enter the fifth component of stress.
6th F Enter the sixth component of stress.
Main Index
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input) 543
Define Initial Strain
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Strain
Description
This option allows you to define potential initial plastic strains, and associate them with an initial
condition name. The initial condition is activated using the LOADCASE model definition option.
Occasionally, in metal forming analysis, it is required to define the previous amount of equivalent plastic
strain. This history dependent variable represents the amount of plastic deformation that the model was
subjected to, and is used in the work (strain) hardening model.
Initial Plastic Strain may be used in three different ways with the new table input format.
Method 1 is when data is directly input. While not explicitly stated, the data can always be a function of
a table, where the independent variables are, e.g., positioned to allow a nonhomogeneous field.
Method 2 is based upon reading the plastic strain from a post file created in a previous stress analysis.
Method 3 is using INITPL user subroutine to define initial plastic strain variables.
1. Read the range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding value.
2. Read the initial values from a step of the post output file from a previous analysis with Marc. With
this option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file elements with the elements in the
current analysis. Any spatial interpolation must be provided separately by you.
3. Read the initial values through the INITPL user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INIT PLASTIC STRAIN.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of initial plastic stain data to be entered (optional)
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of initial plastic stain data.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Not used: enter 0.
6-10 2nd I Enter the method:
Main Index
544 INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input)
Define Initial Strain
Format
Data
3 - use binary post file
5 - use ASCII post file
6 - use data lines (default)
7 - use the INITPL user subroutine.
11-15 3rd I If method 3 or 5, enter the step number to read.
If method 6, enter the number of geometric types used to define this
boundary condition.
31-35 7th A Enter unique label associated with this initial condition. This label will be
referenced by the LOADCASE option.
4th data block (Used only if method = 6 or 7)
1-10 1st F Enter the first magnitude of the initial equivalent plastic strain.
1-5 1st F Table ID associated with the initial equivalent plastic strain.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd field of the
2nd data block (only used if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1 - Element IDs
7th data block
applied. The geometric entities must all be al the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
Main Index
Define Initial Plastic Strain
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN Define Initial Plastic Strain
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define potential initial plastic strains. and associate them with an initial
Occasionally, in metal forming analysis, it is required to define the previous amount of equivalent plastic
strain. This history dependent variable represents the amount of plastic deformation that the model was
subjected to, and is used in the work (strain) hardening model.
Four ways of specifying the initial equivalent plastic strain values are shown below:
• Read the range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding value.
• Read the initial values through user subroutine INITPL.
• Read the initial values from a step of the post output file from a previous analysis with Marc.
With this option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file elements with the elements
in the current analysis. Any spatial interpolation must be provided separately by you.
• Read a list of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding value.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Not used, enter 0.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to initialize the equivalent plastic strain via the 3rd and 4th data
blocks below. In this case, the third field must also be defined.
Enter 2 to initialize the equivalent plastic strain via the INITPL user
subroutine. This subroutine is now called in a loop over all elements in
the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the initial values of the equivalent plastic strain from the
post file written by a previous analysis. In this case, the fourth and fifth
field must also be defined.
Enter 4 to initialize the equivalent plastic strain via the 5th, 6th, 7th, and
8th data blocks shown below. See also the third field on this block.
Main Index
546 INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 1 or 4. Then this entry gives the
number of pairs of data blocks in series 3 and 4 or in series 5, 6, 7 8 used
to input the equivalent plastic strain. Defaults to 1.
16-20 4th I Only used if the second field is set to 3. Then this entry defines the unit
number from which the post file information from the previous run is to
be read.
21-25 5th I Only used if the second field is set to 3. In that case, this entry defines the
step number of the previous analysis.
26-30 6th Not used, enter 0.
31-35 7th I Set to 1 if option 3 is used, and a formatted post file is used.
36-40 8th I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 2. Set to 1 to suppress printout
of equivalent plastic strains values that are initialized in INITPL.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are only input if the second field above is set to 1. In that case, the number of sets
is equal to the number given in the third field above.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I First element with this value.
6-10 2nd I Last element with this value.
11-15 3rd I First integration point with this value.
16-20 4th I Last integration point with this value.
21-25 5th I First layer of cross-section point with this value.
26-30 6th I Last layer or cross-section point with this value can only be bigger than 1
for beam or shell elements.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Initial value of the equivalent plastic strain for the above range of points.
Data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 are only input if the second field above is set to 4. In that case, the number
of sets is equal to the number given in the third field above.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Initial value of the equivalent plastic strain at zeroth increment.
6th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above value is applied.
7th data block
This data block is not necessary if the CENTROID parameter is used.
Enter a list of integration points to which the above value is applied.
Main Index
Format
Data
8th data block
This data block is only necessary if there are either beams or shells in the mesh.
Enter a list of layer points to which the above value is applied.
Main Index
548 INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input)
Initialize State Variables
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) Initialize State Variables
Description
This option allows you to define potential initial state variables and associate them with an initial
The number of state variables per integration point is defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default
is one, with temperature always being the first state variable at an integration point. If more than one state
variable per integration point has been assigned, this option can be used repeatedly to initialize all the
state variables. The default value of state variables not initialized is zero.
Initial State may be used in three different ways with the new table input format. Method 1 is when data
is directly input and not read from a post file. While not explicitly stated, the data can always be a
function of a table, where the independent variables are position to allow a nonhomogeneous field. They
may also be a function of time, but will be evaluated at time equals zero.
Method 2 is based upon reading the state variable from a post file created in a previously generated heat
transfer analysis.
1. The initial value is the value entered here including the evaluation of the table.
2. The initial state variable is obtained by reading in a single increment from the post file. Only a
single increment is read in.
3. The INITSV user subroutine is used to define the initial state variables.
Notes: The Fourier series number is not applicable to the methods where the initial
conditions are read from the post file. The Fourier series number is not
supported in Version 2005.
Initial temperature values read in by this option are assumed to define the
stress-free temperature field. Temperature changes which cause thermal
strains are read in through the CHANGE STATE options.
In a coupled analysis, the temperatures are not independent state variables
and the INITIAL TEMP option must be used.
Main Index
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) 549
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL STATE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data (not required).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read data.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the state variable identifier
(1 for temperature).
Enter -1 if multiple state variables are read from a post file. In this case,
the 8th data block is also required.
5 - use ASCII post file
6 - use data lines (default)
7 - use the INITSV user subroutine.
boundary condition.
16-20 4th I Enter the Fourier Series Number
31-35 7th A Enter boundary condition label.
1-10 1st E Enter the magnitude of the initial state variable.
5th data block (User only if method = 6 or 7)
1-10 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the initial state variable.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometric types as specified in the in the third
field of the 2nd data block (only used if method = 6 or 7).
Main Index
550 INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
6th data block
1 - Element IDs
3 - Volume/Region/Body ID
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial condition are
applied. All the geometric entities must be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
The 8th data block is required only if multiple state variables are read from a post file if the first field
of the 3rd data block is -1.
8th data block
1-80 I Enter a list of state variables.
Main Index
INITIAL STATE 551
INITIAL STATE Initialize State Variables
input style.
Description
This option provides various ways of initializing the state variables throughout the model. The number
of state variables per integration point is defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default is one, with
temperature always being the first state variable at an integration point. If more than one state variable
per integration point has been assigned, this option can be used repeatedly to initialize all the state
variables. The default value of state variables not initialized is zero.
Four ways of providing the state variable initial values are shown below:
• Read the range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding state
variable value.
• Read the initial values through the INITSV user subroutine.
• Read the initial values from a step of the binary or formatted post output file from a previous
heat transfer analysis with Marc. This technique is most common for thermal stress analysis to
initialize temperature (the first state variable at any point). With this option, Marc assumes direct
correspondence of the post file elements with the elements in the current analysis. Any spatial
interpolation must be provided separately by you.
• Read a list of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding state variable value.
Note: Initial temperature values read in by this option are assumed to define the stress-free
temperature field. Temperature changes which cause thermal strains are read in
through the CHANGE STATE or AUTO THERM options.
In a coupled analysis, the temperatures are not independent state variables and the
INITIAL TEMP option must be used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL STATE.
Main Index
552 INITIAL STATE
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the state variable IDentifier for the state variable being set (1,2,etc.).
1=temperature. If more than one state variable is being used, the STATE
VARS parameter must be included.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to initialize the state variable via the 3rd and 4th data block below.
See also the third field on this data block.
Enter 2 to initialize the state variable via the INITSV user subroutine. This
subroutine is now called in a loop over all elements in the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the file values of the state variable from the post file
written by a previous heat transfer analysis. In this case, the fourth and
fifth fields must also be defined.
Enter 4 to initialize the state variable via the 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8th data
blocks as given below. Also, see the third field on this data block.
11-15 3rd I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 1 or 4. Then this entry gives the
number of pairs of data blocks in series 3 and 4 or in series 5, 6, 7, and 8
used to input the state variable.
number from which the post file information from the previous heat
transfer run is to be read. Defaults to unit 24 for a formatted post file and
to unit 25 for a binary post file.
21-25 5th I Only used if the second field is set to 3. In that case, this entry defines the
increment number on the heat transfer run post file to be used as the
definition of the initial state variable values.
26-30 6th Not used, enter 0.
31-35 7th I Set to 1 if option 3 is used, and a formatted post file is used.
of state variable values that are initialized in the INITSV user subroutine.
41-45 9th I Enter the post code number to be read into this state variable, default is 9
(temperature).
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Last element with the value.
Main Index
INITIAL STATE 553
Format
Data
21-25 5th I First layer of cross section point with this value.
26-30 6th I Last layer or cross section point with this value can only be bigger than 1
4th data block
1-10 1st F Initial value of this state variable for the above range of points.
Data blocks 5, 6, 7 and 8 are only input if the second field above is set to 4. In that case, the number of
sets is equal to the number given in the third field above.
5th data block
1-10 1st F New total value of this state variable for the points given below at the start
of the zeroth increment.
6th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above state variable is applied.
7th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above state variable is
applied.
8th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above state variable is applied.
Main Index
554 CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Redefine State Variables
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Redefine State Variables

Definition)
Description
This option allows you to potentially define the state variables. and associate them with a boundary
condition name. The boundary condition is activated using the LOADCASE model or history definition
option. State variables are initialized in the INITIAL STATE model definition set. The number of state
variables per point is defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default is one, with temperature always
being the first state variable at a point. If more than one state variable per point has been assigned, this
option can be used repeatedly to change the values of all state variables. The default value is no change
if this option is not used.
CHANGE STATE may be used in several different ways with the new table input format. Methods 1 to 4
discuss behavior when data is directly input and not read from a post file. While not explicitly stated, the
data can always be a function of a table, where the independent variables are position to allow a
nonhomogeneous field. They may be a function of time as described below.
Methods 5-7 are based upon reading the state variable from a post file created in a previously generated
heat transfer analysis.
1. Change the state variable in a loadcase with a single increment typically in conjunction with
AUTO LOAD and a single increment.
The state variable takes the value entered here including all table effects.
2. Change the state variable over multiple increments of fixed time step, typically used with AUTO
LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, or TRANSIENT NON AUTO; in the later case, the state variable is
not the first one (temperature). In this case, the state variable will either:
a. Immediately take the value given here, if there is no table of time, and the ramp parameter is
not activated on the LOADCASE model or history definition option.
b. Linearly ramp the state variable from the value given at the beginning of the loadcase to the
value at the end of the loadcase, if the ramp parameter is set on the LOADCASE model or
history definition option. Note the values may include tables that are functions of time. They
will be evaluated twice, at the beginning and end of loadcase.
c. A general variation based upon a state variable that is a function of time.
3. Change the state variable over multiple increments using a variable time step procedure typically
used with AUTO STEP or TRANSIENT; in the later case, the state variable is not the first one
(temperature). In this case, the state variable will either:
a. Immediately take the value given here, if there is no table of time and the ramp parameter is
not activated on the LOADCASE model or history definition option.
Main Index
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 555
b. Linearly ramp the state variable from the value given at the beginning of the loadcase to the
value at the end of the loadcase, if the ramp parameter is set on the LOADCASE model or
history definition option. Note the values may include tables that are functions of time. They
will be evaluated twice: at the beginning and at the end of loadcase.
c. A general variation based upon a state variable that is a function of time.
4. Change the state variable over multiple increments using a variable time step procedure where
increment is based upon change in temperature, typically used with AUTO THERM.
The state variable entered here may include a table reference, but the table should not be a
function of time. This procedure should not be used with the ramp procedure. The difference in
the temperature is determined, and if this is greater than the amount specified the loadcase will be
divided into multiple increments.
5. Change the state variable by reading in a single increment from the post file. This is typically done
using AUTO LOAD, and a single step. The 5th field of the 2nd line is one. If the time increment is
not provided, the program will use the time associated with the heat transfer analysis.
6. Change the state variable in a multiple number of steps, each of which is associated to an
increment in the heat transfer analysis. This is typically done using AUTO LOAD, and the number
of increments equals the number of increments to be read, which is the same as the 5th field of
the 2nd line.
7. Change the state variable by reading in a series of increments from a previously generated heat
transfer job, and either dividing or consolidating the thermal increments based upon a maximum
allowed change in the state variable. Used in conjunction with the AUTO THERM option.
8. Change the state variable by reading in a single increment from the post file, but apply the change
in state variable over multiple increments based upon a user-defined criteria specified in the
AUTO STEP option. The 5th field of the 2nd data block should be a -1.
9. Change the state variable by reading in a series of increments from the post file, and either
dividing or consolidating the thermal increments based upon a user-defined criteria specified in
the AUTO STEP option. In this case, the 5th field of the 2nd data block is not used and enough
increments are read to satisfy the time period defined on the AUTO STEP option.
10. The NEWSV user subroutine is used to define the new state variables.
The Fourier series number is not applicable to the methods where the initial conditions are read from the
post file. The Fourier series number is not supported in version 2005.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words CHANGE STATE.
Main Index
556 CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data (not required).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read data.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the state variable identifier (1 for temperature).
5 - user ASCII post file
6 - use data blocks (default)
7 - use user subroutine.
11-15 3rd I If method 3 or 5, enter the first step number to read.
If method 6 or 7, enter the number of geometric types used to define this
boundary condition.
16-20 4th I Enter the Fourier Series Number.
21-25 5th I For CHANGE STATE and method 3 or 5, enter the number of increments
to be read in from post file in conjunction with AUTO THERM.
31-63 7th A Enter boundary condition label.
4th data block (User only if method = 6 or 7)
1-10 1st E Enter the magnitude of the new state variable.
11-20 2nd E Enter the magnitude of the state variable at the beginning of the loadcase.
This is required only if the ramp procedure is used.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the new state variable.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the state variable at the beginning of the
loadcase. This is required only if the ramp procedure is used.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometric types as specified in the third field of
the 3rd data block (used only if method = 6 or 7).
Main Index
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 557
Format
Data
6th data block
1 - Element IDs
3 - Volume/Region/Body ID.
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above new state variables
are applied. All the geometric entities must be of the type prescribed in the
6th data block.
of the 3rd data block is -1.
8th data block
Main Index
558 CHANGE STATE (Model Definition)
CHANGE STATE (Model Definition) Redefine State Variables
input style.
Description
This option provides various ways of changing the state variables throughout the model. State variables
are initialized in the INITIAL STATE model definition set. The number of state variables per point is
defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default is one, with temperature always being the first state
variable at a point. If more than one state variable per point has been assigned, this option can be used
repeatedly to change the values of all state variables. The default value is no change if this option is not
used. In this option, the values of the state variable at the end of the current increment are read in. When
the temperature is being defined, the following points should be noted:
• For “history following analysis”, the thermal strains are based on temperature change during
this step.
• For elastic re-analysis (ELASTIC parameter) the thermal strains are always based on temperature
change between the initial, stress free temperature field and the values read in here.
• The AUTO LOAD option is available for specifying a time-varying history of state variables. The
value of the total state variable at the end of each increment is specified.
• The AUTO THERM option is available for automatic control of a nonlinear (elastic-plastic)
temperature loaded stress problem, to be used in conjunction with this option.
• The THERMAL LOADS option can be used as an alternative to input the change of temperature.
Either incremental or total temperatures can be specified using this option.
• The AUTO THERM CREEP option is available for automatic control of a thermally loaded
elastic-plastic-creep problem, to be used in conjunction with this option.
• The AUTO STEP option is available for automatic control of a nonlinear thermally loaded
problem, to be used in conjunction with this option. Time steps based on default recycling
criteria and/or user-defined physical criteria are used to determine appropriate state
variable increments.
Four ways of changing any state variable through CHANGE STATE are possible:
• Read a range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding state variable value
for the end of the current step.
• Read the state variable values for the end of the current step through the NEWSV
user subroutine.
Main Index
CHANGE STATE (Model Definition) 559
• Read the state variable values for the end of the current step from a named step of the post file
output from a previous heat transfer analysis with Marc. With this option, Marc assumes direct
interpolation must be provided separately by the user. Providing state variables through the
thermal post file is currently supported for AUTO LOAD, AUTO THERM, AUTO THERM CREEP
and AUTO STEP. It is not supported other adaptive stepping procedures.
• For AUTO LOAD, a one-to-one correspondence between the thermal increments on the post
file and the mechanical increments is assumed between the user-defined starting and ending
post increments.
• For AUTO THERM or AUTO THERM CREEP, based on the user-defined allowable
temperature change, the thermal increments on the post file can be subdivided into many
mechanical increments.
• For AUTO STEP, thermal values on the post file are used to determine interpolated values of
state variables for the mechanical run. The interpolation is based on how the current
mechanical loadcase time compares with the times read in from the thermal post file. Use of
a state variable criterion to control the temperature increment is optional. The starting
increment to be read in from the thermal post file (5th field of the 2nd data block) is user-
defined. The number of sets of input to be read in (6th field of the 2nd data block) is
not supported for AUTO STEP. Instead, the thermal information is read till the mechanical
loadcase time or the thermal post file is completed. The post file is rewound and read from the
beginning at the start of each loadcase or at any time a cutback is used by the AUTO STEP
algorithm to reduce the current time step.
• Read a list of elements, integration points, and layers and a corresponding state variable value.
It should be noted that the end of the current step is interpreted as the end of the current increment for
fixed stepping procedures (AUTO LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, CREEP INCREMENT) and as the end of
the loadcase for adaptive stepping procedures (AUTO STEP, AUTO THERM, AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO
CREEP).
Note: Using this option, total state variable values are input. From Marc 2001 onwards, the
incremental change in the state variables is reset to 0 before each new increment if the
AUTO LOAD option is used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
Main Index
560 CHANGE STATE (Model Definition)
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the state variable identifier for the state variable being changed
(1,2,3,etc.) 1 = temperature. If more than one state variable is being used,
the STATE VARS parameter must be included.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to change the state variable via the 3rd and 4th data blocks below.
In this case, the third field must also be defined, and the sixth field if the
AUTO THERM option is in use.
Enter 2 to change the state variable via the NEWSV user subroutine. This
subroutine is now called in a loop on all the elements in the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the new values of the state variable from a post file written
by a previous heat transfer analysis. In this case, the fourth and fifth field
must be defined, and the sixth field if the AUTO THERM option is in use.
Enter 4 to change the state variable via data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 below.
11-15 3rd I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 1 or 4. In that case, this entry
gives the number of data blocks set in data blocks 3 and 4 used to input
the new value of the state variable (optional).
16-20 4th I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. Then. this entry defines the
unit number from which the post file information from the previous heat
transfer run is read. Defaults to unit 24 for a formatted post file, and to unit
25 for a binary post file.
21-25 5th I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. In that case, this entry defines
the step number on the heat transfer run post file to be read as the definition
of the new value of the state variable at the end of the current step. This
is currently only supported for AUTO LOAD, AUTO THERM, and
AUTO STEP.
26-30 6th I Only used if the AUTO LOAD or AUTO THERM options are in use. Give
the number of sets of input to be read to define the temperature history.
Not used for AUTO STEP.
31-35 7th I Enter 1 if formatted post file is used.
36-40 8th I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 2.
Set to 1 to suppress printout of state variable values that are defined
in NEWSV.
41-45 9th I Enter the post code number to be read into this state variable; default is 9
(temperature).
Main Index
CHANGE STATE (Model Definition) 561
Format
Data
3rd data block
16-20 4th I Last integration point with this value (11-15 and 16-20 can only be bigger
than 1 if ALL POINTS parameter is used).
21-25 5th I First layer or cross-section point with this value.
26-30 6th I Last layer or cross-section point with this value (21-25 and 26-30 can
only be bigger than 1 for beam or shell elements).
4th data block
1-10 1st F New value of this state variable for the above range of points at the end of
the current step.
5th data block
6th data block
7th data block
applied.
8th data block
of the 2nd data block is -1.
9th data block
Main Index
562 THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition)
Input Temperature Data
THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition) Input Temperature Data
input style. This option is not available with the table driven input.
Description
This option allows input of temperature and other state variables (see STATE VARS parameter).
You can specify either a uniform or nonuniform change in temperature (or other state variables). If a
nonuniform change is desired, the change of every state variable at every layer of every integration point
of every element must be specified. In this case, Marc calls user subroutine CREDE for every element in
the mesh.
CREDE already exists in the standard version of Marc with coding to read data in loops over integration
points, layers and state variables, as illustrated below:
NSTRES
NEQST
NSTATS
READ VARIABLE DATA
NSTRES = Maximum number of integration points per elements

NEQST = Maximum number of layers per element
NSTATS = Maximum number of state variables
The data to be read should be put in the 4th data block of this option. For particular elements with less
than the maximum number of integration points or layers, dummy values should be input when the
integration point or layer number exceed the appropriate range. See the description of CREDE in Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for other necessary information.
If temperature (state variable) data is on a file, this file can be read from CREDE. However, if temperature
data is on a post file from a Marc heat transfer analysis that uses the same mesh, the CHANGE STATE
option provides a much simpler method for reading temperature data.
If the Fourier decomposition method is being used to analyze an arbitrarily loaded axisymmetric
structure, the THERMAL LOADS option must be invoked separately for each Fourier series term that has
temperatures (state variables) associated with it. If there is no variation of these variables in the
circumferential direction, only the 0th term of the series should be specified.
Main Index
THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition) 563
Input Temperature Data
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words THERMAL LOADS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1 if uniform incremental temperature (state variable) is applied to
all elements.
Enter 2 if nonuniform incremental temperature (state variable) is read via
the CREDE user subroutine.
Enter 3 if nonuniform total temperature (state variable) is read via the
CREDE user subroutine.
6-10 2nd I If a Fourier analysis; the Fourier term with which this loading is
associated.
3rd data block
1-80 1st E If the first field of data block 2 is 1, enter the uniform increments in
temperature and any additional state variables are applied to all elements.
4th data block
1-80 1st E Include only if the first field of data block 2 is 2 or 3, and using the default
CREDE user subroutine. Temperature and state variable data to be read in
by CREDE. All data blocks should contain 8 values, do not start a new
data block for each element.
Main Index
564 INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress)
Define Initial Temperatures
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Define Initial Temperatures

Stress)
Description
This option allows you to define initial temperatures at nodal points for thermal stress problems. This
option allows you to define the magnitude and the location and associate them with an initial condition
name. The initial condition is activated by the LOADCASE model definition option. For heat transfer
analyses, see INITIAL TEMP for heat transfer.
Note: For shell analyses, a uniform temperature is used through the thickness direction.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INITIAL TEMP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of prescribed temperatures (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of prescribed temperatures data, defaults to
input.
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are entered as pairs.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the USINC user subroutine is used.
11-15 3rd I Flag to indicate that initial conditions are read from previously generated
post file. Set to 1.
16-20 4th I Only nonzero if the third field is set to 1. Then. this entry defines the unit
21-25 5th I Enter step number to be read.
Main Index
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress) 565
Format
Data
If -1 is entered, the last step of the post file is used.
26-30 6th I Enter 1 if a formatted post file is used.
If data is read from post file, the 4th through 7th blocks may be skipped.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the initial temperature.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the geometric variation in initial
temperature.
1st field.
6th data block
2 - Node IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
566 INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress)
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress) Define Initial Temperatures
input style.
Description
This option provides initial temperatures at nodal points for thermal stress problems. For heat transfer
analyses, see INITIAL TEMP for heat transfer.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Enter -1 if the USINC user subroutine is used. In this case, data blocks 3
and 4 are not used.
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of prescribed temperatures data, defaults
to input.
36-40 8th I Enter 1 if the whole model has a default temperature given in the next field
and only nodes not having this default temperature are given in the 3rd
and 4th data blocks.
41-50 9th E Default temperature for all nodes in the model.
Main Index
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress) 567
Format
Data
Data blocks 3 and 4 are given in NSET pairs, only if the flag in the third field is not equal to 1.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Initial temperature.
4th data block
Enter list of nodes for which the above initial temperature is applied.
Main Index
568 POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Point Temperatures
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model Define Point Temperatures

Definition)
Description
This option allows you to define temperatures at nodal points for an uncoupled thermal stress problem
and associate them with a boundary condition name. The boundary condition will be activated or
deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT TEMP.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of prescribed temperatures data; defaults
to input.
3rd data block
11-15 3rd I Flag to indicate that temperatures are read from previously generated post
file. Set to 1.
16-20 4th I Only nonzero if the third field is set to 1. Then, this entry defines the unit
number from which the post file information is read.
Main Index
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 569
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the temperature.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the temperature.
1st field.
6th data block
2 - Node IDs
7th data block
applied. the geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
Main Index
570 POINT TEMP (Model Definition)
POINT TEMP (Model Definition) Define Point Temperatures
input style.
Description
This option defines temperatures at the end of the increment at nodal points for an uncoupled thermal
stress problem.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Enter -1 if the USINC user subroutine is used. In this case, the 3rd and 4th
data blocks are not used.
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of prescribed temperatures data; defaults to
input.
file. Set to 1.
36-40 8th I Enter 1 if the whole model has a default temperature given in the next field
and only nodes not having this default temperature are given in the 3rd
and 4th data blocks.
41-50 9th E Default temperature for all nodes in the model.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are given in NSET pairs, only if the flag in the third field is not equal to 1.
Main Index
POINT TEMP (Model Definition) 571
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Temperatures at the end of the increment.
4th data block
Main Index
572 FORCDT
Input Displacement or Load Histories
FORCDT Input Displacement or Load Histories
Description
This option specifies the nodes for which the FORCDT user subroutine is called when not using the table
driven input (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines). The FORCDT user subroutine
can be used to prescribe the kinematic displacements and point loads. To prescribe
displacements/temperatures, they must also be defined in FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.
When using the table driven input format, the use of the FORCDT user subroutine is activated on the
FIXED DISP, etc. or POINT LOAD model definition options.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 A Enter the word FORCDT.
11-15 I Enter the number of lists to be given below.
Default is 1.
2nd data block
The 2nd data block is entered once for each data set.
1-80 1st I List of nodes for which the FORCDT user subroutine is used.
Main Index
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 573
Input Elastic Foundation Data
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Input Elastic Foundation Data

Definition)
Description
This option defines a foundation, including the magnitude and application location and associates it with
a boundary condition name (see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information). The foundation will be
activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model definition option. A foundation damping may be
applied for dynamic or harmonic analyses. Nonlinear foundations are available via user subroutine
UFOUND (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines) or via use of the TABLE option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word FOUNDATION.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data blocks to be used to input the lists of element and
foundation stiffnesses (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of foundation data, defaults to input.
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each list.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the USPRNG user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
Main Index
574 FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st E Foundation stiffness per unit surface area (or per unit length for beam
elements).
11-20 2nd E Foundation damping per unit surface area or per unit length for
beam elements.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID to be associated with the foundation stiffness.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID to be associated with the foundation damping.
6th data block
1: Normal stiffness
2: Shear stiffness in 1st tangent direction
3: Shear stiffness in 2nd tangent direction
4: Volumetric in x-direction
5: Volumetric in y-direction
6: Volumetric in z-direction
7: Stiffness/length in x-direction for beams
8: Stiffness/length in y-direction for beams
9: Stiffness/length in z-direction for beams
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
Main Index
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 575
Format
Data
10: Polysurface IDs
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
576 FOUNDATION (Model Definition)
FOUNDATION (Model Definition) Input Elastic Foundation Data
input style.
Description
This option allows the specification of elements and associated foundation stiffness to be used with the
elastic foundation option (see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information). Nonlinear foundations are
available via the USPRNG user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of foundation data. Defaults to input.
3rd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each list.
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of elastic foundation; this is the same
parameter as used in the DIST LOADS option. See Marc Volume B:
Element Library for a description of the possible distributed load types for
each element type in Marc.
6-15 2nd E Spring stiffness per unit surface area (or per unit length for
beam elements).
4th data block
1-80 1st Enter a list of elements to which the above foundation is applied.
Main Index
FOURIER 577
Describe Fourier Coefficients
FOURIER Describe Fourier Coefficients
Description
This option is used to describe all the Fourier coefficients for each series used. The FOURIER parameter
must be included. If the Fourier coefficients of a series are known, they can be input directly. The
function F(θ) to be expanded into a Fourier series can be described by an arbitrary number of pairs of
data [θ, F(θ)]. The starting location (θ = 0) as well as the ending location (θ = 360) must be included.
They can have different values F(θ). The function F(θ) can also be described via a UFOUR user
subroutine for an arbitrary number of stations around the circumference.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-9 1st A Enter the word FOURIER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of Fourier series for which coefficients are input via data blocks.
6-10 2nd I Number of Fourier series for which the coefficients are calculated from
user input [θ, F(θ)]. The description of F(θ) is given via data blocks. The
number of coefficients to be calculated depends on the number of Fourier
harmonics specified on the parameter data block.
11-15 3rd I Number of Fourier series for which the function F(θ) is determined by a
user subroutine. The details on the UFOUR user subroutine are found in
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
3rd data block
Only included if the first parameter of the 2nd data block is nonzero. This series is repeated for each
Fourier expansion for which coefficients are input via data blocks.
1-5 1st I Number of coefficients to be read for this series.
6-15 2nd E Fourier coefficients a0, a 1, b1, . . . an, bn,. Continuation data is in format
8E10.0.
The following group is included only if the second parameter of the 2nd data block is nonzero. This
group is repeated for each F(θ) function.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Number of [θ, F(θ)] pairs to be read in for this function.
Main Index
578 FOURIER
Describe Fourier Coefficients
Format
Data
5th data block
Four pairs of [θ, F(θ)] per data block. Continuation data is in format
8E10.0
1-10 1st F Value in degrees of first station.
11-20 2nd F F(θ) – value for first station.
21-30 3rd F Value in degrees of second station.
31-40 4th F F(θ) – value for second station (etc.)
Main Index
J-INTEGRAL 579
Define Path for J-Integral Estimation
J-INTEGRAL Define Path for J-Integral Estimation
Description
This option gives an estimation of the J-Integral for a crack configuration, based on differential stiffness
technique. The technique is based upon moving nodes around the crack tip by a small distance and
estimating the energy change. This model definition set is used to input the list of nodes to be moved, and
the direction and size of those motions. Usually, the motion is 10 times smaller than the crack element
size. Marc prints out the change in strain energy, which must then be divided by the change in crack
surface area to obtain the J-Integral.
Note: For each evaluation the first list must contain the crack tip. The CENTROID parameter
should not be used in conjunction with this option. With second order elements, we suggest
the use of 1/4 point elements at the crack tip.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word J-INTEGRAL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of lists in this path.
6-10 2nd I Logical unit number for reading this data.
Defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as paris, one for each list.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Motion of these nodes in the 1st coordinate direction.
11-20 2nd F Motion in the second coordinate direction, etc. in (8E10) format. (Provide
enough data to define the motion in each coordinate direction).
Note: The motion of the midsize nodes should be proportional to their
position along the sides of the elements.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to be moved.
Main Index
580 LORENZI
Define Path for Modified J-Integral
LORENZI Define Path for Modified J-Integral
Description
This option gives an estimation of the J-Integral for a crack configuration using the domain integration
method (a similar method is the deLorenzi method). The domain integration method has the advantage
that it can also be used for problems with thermal behavior and for dynamic analysis. This procedure is
only available for continuum elements. Only the nodes defining the crack front (crack tip in two
dimensions) need to be defined. Marc automatically finds integrations paths according to the format
below. The complete J-Integral is evaluated and printed. For the case of linear elastic material with no
external loads on the crack faces, the program automatically separates mode I, mode II, and mode III (3-
D only) stress intensity factors from the J-Integral.
Note: The CENTROID parameter should not be used in conjunction with this option. With second
order elements, we suggest the use of 1/4 point elements at the crack tip.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word LORENZI.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Not used.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read the data.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 for new input format.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of cracks (optional).
6-10 2nd I 0 = no mode separation
1 = mode separation is activated. Default.
Data blocks 4 through 7 are repeated for each crack.
4th data block
1-5 2nd I Enter input style of rigid regions.
1 = direct input of nodes and/or elements.
2 = automatic search based on topology (default)
3 = automatic search based on geometry.
6-25 1st A Crack name.
Main Index
LORENZI 581
Format
Data
5th data block
Enter a node path defining the crack front (for 2-D, the node at the
crack tip).
Direct Input
5a data block
1-5 1st I Number of rigid regions for this crack.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if crack is at a symmetry plane.
Data block 6a is repeated for each rigid region.
6a data block
Enter a list of nodes for the rigid region.
7a data block
1-10 1st E First component of shift vector.
11-20 2nd E Second component of shift vector.
21-30 3rd E Third component of shift vector (only for 3-D).
Topology Search
5b data block
1-5 1st I Number of rigid regions for each crack tip node
6-10 2nd I Shift vector (2-D); normal to crack face (3-D)
0 = entered values
1 = automatic determination (default)
11-20 3rd E Enter the tolerance for multiple nodes at the crack tip (default = 0.0).
6b data block (included only if second parameter of data block 5b is equal to 0)
1-10 1st E First component of shift vector (2-D); first component of the normal to
crack face (3-D).
11-20 2nd E Second component of shift vector (2-D); second component of the normal
to crack face (3-D).
21-30 3rd E Third component of the normal to crack face (3-D only).
Geometry Search
5c data block
1-5 1st I Number of rigid regions for each crack tip node.
6-10 2nd I Shift vector (2-D); normal to crack face (3-D)
0 = entered values
1 = automatic determination (default)
Main Index
582 LORENZI
Format
Data
11-20 3rd E Enter the tolerance for multiple nodes at the crack tip (default = 0.0).
6c data block (included only if second parameter of data block 5b is equal to 0)
1-10 1st E First component of shift vector (2-D); first component of the normal to
crack face (3-D).
11-20 2nd E Second component of shift vector (2-D); second component of the normal
to crack face (3-D).
21-30 3rd E Third component of the normal to crack face(3-D only)
Data block 7c is repeated for each rigid region.
7c data block
1-10 1st E Enter radius of rigid region to be found.
11-20 2nd E Enter relative length of cylinder for path search (3-D only).
Main Index
VCCT 583
Virtual Crack Closure Technique
VCCT Virtual Crack Closure Technique
Description
This option defines that the virtual crack closure technique is to be used for evaluating energy
release rates.
The user defines the node (in 2-D or for shells) or nodes (in 3-D) that define each crack.The supported
elements are lower- and higher-order 2-D solids and 3-D shells, lower- and higher-order 3-D hexahedral
solids, and lower order 3-D tetrahedral solids. For 3-D solids, it is important that a regular mesh around
the crack front is used. See Volume A for details.
Multiple cracks can be defined and results are obtained for each crack separately. Each crack consists of
a crack tip node in 2-D for shells and a list of nodes along the crack front for 3-D solids. Shell elements
can be used for defining a 2-D style line crack and also be connected to the face of another shell or 3-D
solid to form a 3-D style surface crack. These different cases are automatically identified.
For crack propagation, there are two modes of growth: fatigue and direct. For fatigue style, the user
specifies a load sequence time period. During the load sequence, the largest energy release rate and the
corresponding estimated crack growth direction is recorded. At the end of the load sequence, the crack
is grown using the specified method. For direct growth, the crack grows as soon as the crack growth
criterion is fulfilled. Note that Gc and the respective mode specific limits can be made a function of the
accumulated crack growth length to model a crack growth resistance behavior.
Crack opening or propagation may be modeled using three techniques. In the first method, the body in
which the crack is located is remeshed based upon the criteria defined in the ADAPT GLOBAL option and
the crack is extended by the user specified length. This is currently available for planar and axisymmetric
models only. In the second method, the uncracked area is represented by elements with double nodes and
ties, RBE2 or RROD or by elements that are glued together via CONTACT TABLE with TABLES. In the
third method, the crack grows along element edges or faces. New nodes are automatically inserted and
the element connectivity at one side of the crack is changed in order to expand the crack. See Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 5: Structural Procedure Library, Fracture Mechanics
for details.
The settings for a crack can be modified in the history section and after restart. Also, a crack can be
activated or deactivated for these cases. The check for an existing crack is done by matching the name of
the crack, as given in the 4th data block. The settings will change only when a new VCCT option is
encountered.
Main Index
584 VCCT
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the word VCCT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of cracks.
The 3rd through 8th data blocks are repeated for each crack. If crack propagation is specified, also read
data blocks 6 through 8.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Flag for activating or deactivating an existing crack.
0 – leave as is
1 – activate
2 – deactivate
6-10 2nd I Specification of crack propagation
0 – no crack propagation
1 – fatigue style crack propagation
2 – direct crack propagation
4th data block
1-20 1st A Enter the name of the crack. Must be unique for each crack.
5th data block
Enter an unsorted list of nodes defining the crack front. For 2-D and shells,
this will be a single node.
If crack propagation is specified (2nd field of 3rd data block equal to 1 or 2), enter data blocks 6
through 8.
6th data block
1-5 1st I Specification of crack growth
1 – remeshing
2 – release user tyings or glued contact
3 – break up mesh at edges or faces
Main Index
VCCT 585
Format
Data
6-10 2nd I Specification of method used for the crack growth direction
1 – maximum hoop stress criterion (default)
2 – along pure mode with largest Gi–Gic where i is mode I, II or III
3 – always along mode I
4 – along given vector; for this case read data block 9
11-15 3rd I Specification of crack growth increment for fatigue.
1 – fixed increment or via user subroutine
2 – Paris law
16-20 4th I Crack growth criterion
1 – Total G > Gc (default)
2 – GI > GIc or GII > GIIc or GIII > GIIIc
G I ⎞ n 1 ⎛ G II ⎞ n 2 ⎛ G III ⎞ n 3
⎛ -------
3 – Power law mixed mode criterion - + ---------- + ------------ >1
⎝ G Ic⎠ ⎝ G II c⎠ ⎝ G I IIc⎠
4 – Reeder mixed mode criterion

G I + G II + G I II
->1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
⎛ G II + G III ⎞ 1
n G III ⎛ G II + G I II ⎞ n 1
G Ic + ( G IIc – G Ic ) -------------------------------------- + ( G III c – G II c ) ------------------------ ⎜ --------------------------------------⎟
⎝ G I + G II + G II I⎠ G II + G II I ⎝ G + G + G ⎠
I II III
If fatigue crack propagation is specified (2nd field of 3rd data block equal to 1)
7a data block
1-10 1st E Crack growth increment. If the option of releasing tyings or glued contact
is used, the length of the released element edge is used. Ignored for growth
defined by Paris law
11-20 2nd E Time period for fatigue load sequence.
21-30 3rd E Paris law energy release rate threshold Gth.
31-40 4th E Paris law parameter C.
41-50 5th E Paris law parameter m.
51-60 6th E Minimum growth increment.
If direct crack propagation is specified (2nd field of 3rd data block equal to 2)
7b data block
1-10 1st E Crack growth increment. If the option of releasing tyings or glued contact
or breaking up element edges is used, the length of the released element
edge is used.
11-20 2nd E Crack growth resistance Gc for total G.
Main Index
586 VCCT
Format
Data
21-30 3rd E Crack growth resistance for mode I, GIc.
Defaults to Gc
31-40 4th E Crack growth resistance for mode II, GIc.
Defaults to Gc
41-50 5th E Crack growth resistance for mode III, GIIIc.
Defaults to Gc
51-60 6th E Exponent n1 for mixed mode methods, default 2.0
51-60 7th E Exponent n2 for mixed mode method 1, default 2.0
51-60 8th E Exponent n3 for mixed mode method 1, default 2.0
8th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for scaling of the first value given in the 7th data block. For old
style input (not table driven), these are ignored.
11-20 2nd I Table ID for scaling of the second value.
21-30 3rd I Table ID for scaling of the third value.
31-40 4th I Table ID for scaling of the forth value.
41-50 5th I Table ID for scaling of the fifth value.
51-60 6th I Table ID for scaling of the sixth value (fatigue only).
If crack growth direction vector is specified (crack growth direction option equal to 4)
9th data block
1-10 1st E x component of crack growth direction vector
11-20 2nd E y component of crack growth direction vector
21-30 3rd E z component of crack growth direction vector
Main Index
DELAMINATION 587
DELAMINATION
Description
This option defines a delamination, or in other words a mesh split. A stress criterion is used for
determining if the mesh should split. The split can either be done in the interface between two materials
or within a material. The criterion used is
⎛σ σt n
m
-----n-⎞ + ⎛ -----⎞ > 1
⎝ Sn⎠ ⎝ S t⎠
Here σ n is the normal stress, σ t is the tangential stress, S n is the allowable normal stress given below, St
the allowable tangential stress given below and m and n are the exponents given below.
For the option of splitting between materials, the normal direction is perpendicular to the material
interface. The stress tensor of the nodal extrapolated stresses is transformed into this system.
For the option of splitting within a material the system is given by the respective element edges in 2D
and faces in 3D.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st I Enter the word DELAMIN.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets (required).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number. Defaults to input file.
Data block 3 through 5 are repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the first material ID
6-10 2nd I Enter the second material ID; note that if this is the same as first material,
then delamination within material.
11-15 3rd I Enter the delamination type:
0 – calculate delamination index and split mesh if necessary (default)
1 – only calculate a delamination index for post processing
16-20 4th I Enter the material ID of a cohesive material. If specified, cohesive
elements using this material will be inserted when the mesh breaks up.
Main Index
588 DELAMINATION
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Allowable normal stress
11-20 2nd F Allowable tangential stress
21-30 3rd F m – exponent for normal stress (default 2.0)
31-40 4th F n – exponent for tangential stress (default 2.0)
It table input is used
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for allowable normal stress
6-10 2nd I Table ID for allowable tangential stress
11-15 3rd I Table ID for m
16-20 4th I Table ID for n
n m
The delamination criteria is based upon ( σ n ⁄ σ n a ) + ( σ t ⁄ σ ta ) > 1
Main Index
ISLAND REMOVAL 589
Deactivate Islands of Connected Elements
ISLAND REMOVAL Deactivate Islands of Connected Elements
Description
This option subdivides the mesh into islands of connected regions. If the number of elements in an island
is less than or equal to a specified number, then all elements of this island are deactivated. This check is
performed after element deactivation has taken place where the deactivation can be due to model input
(DEACTIVATE option), the UACTIVE user subroutine, or through material damage or failure. Two
elements are considered connected if they share a node for line elements, an edge for 2-D elements, or a
face for 3-D solid elements. This option us useful for cases where we would get unconnected elements
or regions of elements after the neighboring elements have been deactivated. There is no check
performed to see if the island to be deactivated has enough boundary conditions. Only the number of
elements in the island is used for determining if the elements should be deactivated.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ISLAND REM
2nd data block
1-10 1st I Enter the number of elements to use as a limit for element deactivation. If
the number of elements in an island is less than or equal to this number,
then all elements of this island are deactivated.
Main Index
590
Main Index
Contact
Chapt Contact
er 3: This section describes surface geometry definition, motion definition, and friction description in two- and
Mode three-dimensional contact applications. The basic philosophy behind these applications is the existence
of one or more bodies that may or may not come into contact with one another, or even contact with
l themselves during an analysis. As far as the contact is concerned, it is the surface associated with the
body that plays a role.
Defini
Some bodies can be deformable, others can be rigid. However, deformable surfaces must always be
tion declared in the input file before any rigid surface.
Optio
ns Deformable and Rigid Surfaces
Marc A deformable surface is simply defined by the set of elements that constitute the body to which it is
Volume associated. When a node of another body or the same body (in self contact) comes into contact with a
C: deformable surface, information regarding the contacted surface is obtained. This is based upon the
Program coordinates of the nodes on the face of the element or the coordinates and an averaged normal if the
Input SPLINE option is used. This can improve the accuracy of the solution.
A rigid surface does not deform. There are two modes to describe the geometric profile of a rigid surface.
In the first, labeled the PieceWise Linear approach (PWL), the profile is defined by sets of geometrical
data which can be comprised of straight lines, circles and splines, ruled surfaces, surfaces of revolution
and patches, etc. These sets have to be given in a proper sequence around the rigid body they define, even
if it is not necessary that the full enclosure be defined.
In the second method, labeled Analytical, the geometric profile is defined by prescribing 2-D NURBS
curves, 3-D NURBS surfaces, or exact quadratic descriptions. Using this method, the surface is divided
into line segments or patches; this is used for visualization (K6 style post file) or by the searching
algorithm. The contact condition is based on the true surface geometry. This method is more accurate for
curved surfaces, and might reduce the number of iterations, especially if friction is present.
In coupled thermal-stress contact, it is possible to have a surface defined strictly by thermal elements with
a rigid body motion applied to it.
Motion of Surfaces
Deformable surfaces can move either because of contact with other surfaces, or because of directly
applied displacement boundary conditions or loads.
To each surface, we associate a point (center of rotation) that can be anywhere in space. A translative
velocity and a rotational velocity around that point define the instantaneous motion of the surface. These
velocities are integrated forward in time to define the motion of the surfaces. It is also possible to directly
prescribe the location of the rigid body. As an alternative, you can prescribe a force or torque to the rigid
body. The force is applied with the POINT LOAD option.
The CONTACT model definition option can be used for the input of constant rigid body motions which
do not change with time during the analysis. However, changes in rigid body motion (time dependent
Main Index
Contact
motion) can be simulated either by the load history option MOTION CHANGE or by the MOTION user
subroutine activated through the UMOTION model definition option.
Cautions
It is recommended that whenever several deformable bodies are present, the OPTIMIZE option be
exercised. In static analysis, it is also necessary to artificially connect (for instance, by very low stiffness
springs) deformable bodies that during an analysis might be completely separated from other deformable
bodies and have no kinematic boundary conditions applied to them. This is to avoid rigid body motion.
When the debug printout parameter PRINT is used in a contact analysis, IDEV = 5 or 8, it produces
information on when any node on the boundary comes into contact or separates from any surface. It
also produces information on whether a contact node is fixed to a surface or is free to slide along it. In
addition to the information printed with IDEV = 5, when IDEV = 8 is entered, the incremental
displacement and the reaction forces for those nodes in contact with rigid surfaces are printed in a local
coordinate system.
The CONTACT option creates ties between nodes which come into contact with another deformable
body. If a node can come into contact with another deformable body or with a load controlled rigid body,
one should avoid using these nodes as tied nodes in TYING, SERVO LINK, RBE2, or RBE3.
There are three implied loops in this block of data: the outermost loop is over the number of surfaces; the
next loop is over the number of sets of geometrical data for each surface; and the innermost loop is over
the number of points comprised in each set. In case of deformable surfaces, the two inner loops reduce
to the list of elements.
Control Variables and Option Flags

The variable RVCNST (3rd data block, 1st field) depends on the selected friction model:
1. For the relative velocity based arctangent model it allows the system to self-adaptively search for
sticking zones. RVCNST should be a relative sliding velocity very small compared to the typical
sliding velocities in the model, but not so small that it would be overcome by changes between
iterations. It is suggested you use values between 10-1 and 10-2 times a typical relative surface
velocity. Marc default is 1.0.
2. For the stick-slip model, RVCNST indicates the slip to stick transition region, indicating a relative
displacement magnitude in the direction of the friction force which is still accepted by the
program. Its value should be small compared to a typical element length. The default value in
Marc is 1.0e-6.
3. For the bilinear model, RVCNST is the relative displacement below which elastic stick is
simulated. The default value is automatically determined by Marc, based on the dimensions of the
elements in the deformable contact bodies.
The variable ERROR (3rd data block, 2nd field) determines the tolerance for contact. A too small
tolerance might provoke too many increment splits or iterations. A too coarse tolerance produces
unrealistic behavior. If left blank, the code calculates ERROR as the smallest nonzero element dimension
Main Index
Contact
divided by 20 or the shell thickness divided by 4. If there are splines in surface definitions, a value should
be entered. (See SPLINE definition.)
The user can control the type of friction in a contact analysis (2nd data block, 4th field). Either a friction
(shear friction or Coulomb friction) or a frictionless condition can be assumed in the analysis. The
friction behavior can be based on a continuous velocity based model, a true-stick-slip model or a bilinear
displacement based model with an elastic sticking region.
The computation of Coulomb friction in a contact problem can be based on either nodal stresses or nodal
forces (2nd data block, 5th field).
When shell or beam elements are in the body, it uses the nodal force based friction model. This is also
true for the stick-slip friction model and the bilinear model.
Contact/Penetration
In a contact analysis, the constraints imposed are to insure that penetration does not occur. Historically,
the user can specify one of three different procedures to be used (2nd data block, 7th field). The first
procedure, called Increment Splitting, is not recommended anymore. The two remaining are called
Iterative Penetration Checking Procedure and Time Step Reduction Procedure.
The Iterative Penetration Checking Procedure is recommended for most contact analyses. It may
effectively add contact constraints during the Newton-Raphson iterations by scaling the iterative
displacement vector of an iteration and bringing new nodes into contact at the start of the next iteration.
In this sense, one is iterating on both global equilibrium and contact simultaneously. This procedure is
always used when beam-beam contact is invoked. It is automatically used for quasi-static problems using
AUTO STEP.
The Time Step Reduction Procedure is recommended for dynamic contact analyses using an adaptive
time stepping procedure. When this procedure is active, the time step of an increment may be reduced to
make sure that nodes do not penetrate during the current increment, but instead are brought into contact
at the beginning of the next increment. It is automatically used for dynamic problems using AUTO STEP.
Separation
A node separates from a body depending on whether the force or the stress exceeds a threshold value (3rd
data block, 5th field). It is possible to indicate whether the testing is based upon the force or the stress,
how the stress is calculated, and how the threshold is calculated (2nd data block, 12th field). This choice
has a significant influence on the accuracy and convergence of problems when:
a. the contact forces are low,
b. on rolling problems (where nodes periodically contact and separate), and
c. in connector problems.
It is recommended that a stress-based criterion is used, because it eliminates the numerical influence of
element sizes, and that either physically meaningful tolerances are specified or a relative tolerance is
entered. When quadratic contact is used, the separation criterion is always based upon a stress, which is
Main Index
Contact
obtained by extrapolating, averaging, and transforming the stresses at the integration points. The default
separation threshold is:
• the maximum residual force if separation is based upon nodal forces (the separation flag on the
CONTACT option is 0);
• the maximum stress at reaction nodes times the convergence tolerance (given on the CONTROL
option) if separation is based on absolute stresses, where a stress is calculated as a nodal force
divided by a nodal area (the separation flag on the CONTACT option is 1);
• 10% of the maximum compressive stress for all the contacting nodes if separation is based on
any of the other methods (the separation flag on the CONTACT option is 2, 3 or 4).
For beam-to-beam contact, contact stresses cannot be calculated and separation can only be based on
nodal forces. Hence, if within one model both beam-to-beam contact and contact between continuum
elements occur and separation should be based on stresses, then it is recommended to enter the separation
threshold for beam-to-beam contact using a CONTACT TABLE. Otherwise, the default separation stress
would be used as a force to decide if beam-to-beam contact constraints should be released.
During each load increment, separations can occur. You can control the maximum number of nodal
separations allowed in each increment to reduce computational costs (2nd data block, 6th field).
During the analysis, a node may come into contact and separate within the same increment. This may be
due to either the nonlinear motions or due to small contact forces/stresses that are developed. This often
leads to oscillations in the contact status which leads to multiple iterations and higher computational
costs. This behavior may be controlled using the flag on the 2nd data block, 9th field. This chattering
behavior is automatically suppressed for explicit dynamics.
Optional Heat Transfer Data

In a coupled thermal-stress-contact analysis, a film coefficient is needed for calculating heat transfer from
any other surface that contacts the current surface (deformable-to-rigid, or deformable-to-deformable).
If the surface is modeled as a rigid surface, the rigid surface temperature is also needed for the analysis.
In addition, both a film coefficient and an ambient temperature must be given for the simulation of heat
transfer between the surface and surrounding environment.
If the near thermal contact option is invoked using CONTACT TABLE, it is also possible to have
transmission of heat when bodies are close to one another. The thermal fluxes have components of
convection and radiation. This requires input of the distance that is considered to be close and
additional thermal parameters. Unlike the error tolerance, it is not possible for the program to determine
a default value.
Optional Electrical Data (Joule Heating Analysis)

In Joule heating or coupled thermal-structural-electrical problems, current may be transmitted between
contact bodies. This current is assumed to be continuous (that is, no electrical arcing). This requires
additional data analogous to the heat transfer data.
Main Index
Contact
Time Step Control

The automatic contact procedure is controlled by the time step. This is used to determine the motion of
rigid surfaces and to control the splitting of increments if penetration occurs. Even in a quasi-static
analysis, a time step must be defined by you. Several procedures can be used to enter this data.
• The AUTO LOAD and TIME STEP history definition options can be used to define several time
steps, each of the same magnitude.
• The DYNAMIC CHANGE or TRANSIENT NON AUTO history definition options can be used to
define a time period which is divided into equal time steps.
• With the AUTO STEP or AUTO INCREMENT history definition option, you define a total time
period which is divided into variable size time steps.
Dynamic Contact - Impact

The automatic contact procedure can also be used in dynamic analyses to model impact problems. This
can be used with the implicit Newmark-beta or single step Houbolt operator or the explicit central
difference operator. The DYNAMIC parameter is used to control the choice. When the Newmark-beta or
single step Houbolt operator is used, either the DYNAMIC CHANGE or AUTO STEP option can be used
to control the time step. When the central difference procedure is used, the DYNAMIC CHANGE option
should be used, and the time step must be less than the stability limit. The stability limit is automatically
calculated by Marc.
Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces

In a two-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces can be represented by any of or a combination of the
following geometric entities: (1) straight line segments (ITYPE = 1), (2) circular arcs (ITYPE = 2),
and (3) spline (ITYPE = 3). The variable ITYPE defines the type of the geometric entities to be used
for a rigid surface.
Note that the normal vector of the geometric entities (line segments, circular arc, and the spline) always
points into the rigid-body. The normal vector direction is determined from the direction of the geometric
entity, following a right-handed rule. Care must be taken in entering the coordinates (x, y) data, in a
correct direction, for rigid-surfaces.
Line Segments
When option ITYPE = 1 is chosen, the number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y) of (NPOINT) points
must be entered for the definition of the rigid surface. Marc automatically creates a rigid surface
consisting of (NPOINT -1) linear segments for the contact problem. A two-dimensional rigid surface
consisted of line segments is shown in Figure 3-1.
This entity supports analytic description/procedure.
Main Index
Contact
Start point
1 2 3 Rigid body
4
y
5 End point
x 6 7 8
Figure 3-1 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Line Segment, ITYPE = 1)
Circular Arc
When ITYPE = 2 is chosen, one circular segment is created by Marc. There are five different methods
available to define a circular arc in two dimensions. Each method requires four data blocks with the
following type of data:
Starting Point of Arc (SP)

Ending Point of Arc (EP)
Center of Circle (C)
Radius of Circle (R)
Tangent Angles (TA)
Swept Angle (SA)
Number of Subdivisions (NS)
Clearly, not all of this information is required for each method. Table 3-9 describes which data is
required. The default number of subdivisions is 10. If the analytical approach is used, the number of
subdivisions does not influence the accuracy, but is only used for visualization purposes.
Table 3-1 Data Required for Circular Arc Input

Method
Data Block 0 1 2 3 4
1 SP SP SP SP SP
2 EP EP EP EP blank
3 C C C TA1, TA2 C
4 R, NS R, NS R, NS R, NS SA, NS
Notes: For methods 1 and 3, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface side.
A negative radius means the center of the circle is on the outside.
Main Index
Contact
For method 2, the first coordinate of the center is taken into account, determining whether
the center is above (>0) or below (<0) the segment defined by the end points.
For planar problems, SP, EP and C are X, Y data.
For axisymmetric problems, SP, EP and C are Z, R data.
For methods 0, 1 and 2, if R is zero, it is calculated as distance from the center to the
starting point.
This entity supports analytical description/procedure.

A two-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3.
End point
η Center
Start point +
1 Radius
Note: For additional circular arc definitions, see Figure 3-3
Figure 3-2 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc, ITYPE = 2, METHOD = 0)
Main Index
Contact
EP EP
SP SP
R R
C+ C+
Method 0 Positive R Method 1 Negative R
EP
TA2
SP SA
R SP
TA1
C+ X
C +
Method 3 Positive R Method 4 Positive R
Figure 3-3 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc)
Main Index
Contact
Spline
When ITYPE = 3 is chosen, Marc creates a spline by passing from the second point through to the
second to last point entered. The first and the last points entered are used to define the tangents at the
beginning and end of the spline. If a nonanalytical approach is used, then the spline is internally split into
linear segments in such a way that the maximum difference between any of them and the spline is less
than the contact tolerance ERROR. This operation is done before the automatic tolerance calculation;
therefore, a value for ERROR must be entered whenever a spline is used. Figure 3-4 shows a two-
dimensional rigid surface defined by a spline.
End point
6 Note: the normal vector η is pointed into the rigid body.
5
4
3 2 1
Start point
Rigid body
η
Figure 3-4 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Spline, ITYPE = 3)
This entity supports analytical description/procedure if only one spline is used in a particular rigid body.
Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces

In a three-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces are represented by any of or a combination of the
following three-dimensional surface entities:
Surface Entity Type Type Identification (ITYPE)

Ruled surface 4
Surface of revolution 5
Bezier surface 6
4-node patch 7
Poly-surface 8
NURB 9
Cylinder 10
Sphere 11
The variable ITYPE defines the type of surface entity to be used for a rigid surface. Since most of the
three-dimensional surfaces can be easily and adequately represented by a finite element mesh of 4-node
plate (patch) elements, the option ITYPE = 7 is a very convenient way of representing three-
dimensional rigid surfaces. Both the connectivities and the coordinates of the 4-node patches can
be generated using Marc Mentat, or entered through the DIGEOM user subroutine.
Main Index
Contact
The three-dimensional surface entities mentioned above, except 4-node patches, can in turn be generated
from three-dimensional geometric entities. Available three-dimensional geometric entities are:
Geometric Entity Type Type Identification (JTYPE)

Straight line segment 1
3-D circular arc 2
Spline 3
Bezier Curve 4
Poly line 5
The variable JTYPE defines the type of geometric entities to be used for the generation of
three-dimensional rigid surfaces.
For the (PWL) approach, note that all geometrical data in 3-D space is reduced to 4-node patches. The
four nodes will probably not be on the same plane. The error in the approximation is determined by the
number of subdivisions of the defined surfaces. Note that the normal to a patch is defined by the right-
hand rule, based on the sequence in which the four points are entered.
Ruled Surface (ITYPE = 4)

When ITYPE = 4 is chosen, a ruled surface is created by Marc based on the input of two surface
generators, defined by straight line segment (JTYPE = 1), 3-D circular arc (JTYPE = 2), spline
(JTYPE = 3) or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface generator is not a 3-D circular arc, the
number NPOINT1 (NPOINT2) and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT1 (NPOINT2) points must
be entered for the definition of the surface generators. In case the surface generator is a 3-D circular arc,
a method (METH) must be selected for the definition of the circular arc. A 3-D circular arc is defined by
four points. In addition, the number of subdivisions, NDIV1, along the first (surface generator) and the
NDIV2 along the second (from the first surface generator to second surface generator) direction must
also be entered. For a (PWL) approach, Marc creates (NDIV1) x (NDIV2) 4-node patches automatically
to represent the prescribed ruled surface. For analytical approach, (NDIV1 + 1) x (NDIV2 + 1) points
are created and a NURB surface is general which passes exactly through these points. The accuracy in
general is controlled by the number of points. Figure 3-5 shows a typical ruled surface.
Main Index
Contact
Start point
End point
η 2
2nd Geometric entity
Start point
1
End point
1: first direction 1st Geometric entity
2: second direction
η: normal direction into the rigid body
y
x
NDIV2 = 3
NDIV1 = 4
NDIV1 = number of divisions in the first direction

NDIV2 = number of divisions in the second direction
Figure 3-5 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Ruled Surface, ITYPE = 4)
Surface of Revolution (ITYPE = 5)

When ITYPE = 5 is chosen, a surface of revolution is created by Marc based on the input of one surface
generator, defined by straight line segment (JTYPE = 1), 3-D circular arc (JTYPE = 2), spline
(JTYPE = 3) or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface generator is not a 3-D circular arc, the
number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT points must be entered for the definition
of the surface generator. In case the surface generator is a 3-D circular arc, a method (METH) must be
selected for the definition of the circular arc. A 3-D circular arc is defined by four points. In addition, the
number of subdivisions NDIV1 along the surface generator and NDIV2 along the second
(circumferential) direction must also be entered.
Main Index
Contact
Marc then creates (NDIV1 x NDIV2) four-node patches automatically, to represent the prescribed
surface of revolution. The axis of revolution is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of two points in space,
and an angle of rotation from the initial position is also needed for the definition of the surface of
revolution. A positive rotation is about the axis formed from point 1 to point 2. Figure 3-6 shows a typical
surface of revolution.
Axis of revolution defined

by the coordinates of
points 1 and 2
Start point
Surface generation
(initial position) 1
Point 1
2
Angle of
rotation
End point η
Point 2
z 1: First direction
2: Second direction
x y η: Normal direction into the rigid body (see Figure 3-8)
Figure 3-6 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Surface of Revolution, ITYPE = 5)
Bezier Surface (ITYPE = 6)

When ITYPE = 6 is chosen, a Bezier surface is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of NPOINT1 x
NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered along the first direction and then repeated
NPOINT2 times to fill through the second direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 have to be
at least equal to 4. Number of subdivisions (NDIV1, NDIV2) entered has to be equal or greater than
NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 for Bezier surface. (NPOINT1-1) x (NPOINT2-1) 4-node patches are
created by Marc for the definition of a Bezier surface. Figure 3-7 shows a typical Bezier surface. It can
be treated as an analytical surface, an exact conversion to NURBS is performed.
Main Index
Contact
r13
r23
r22 r33
r03
r32
r12
r21
r11
r31
NPOINT2 = 4
r02
NDIV2 = 4
2
r20
r01 r10
η r30
z
1
y r00 NPOINT1 = 4
NDIV1 = 4
x
1: First direction
2: Second direction
h: Normal direction into the rigid body (see Figure 3-8)
Figure 3-7 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface, ITYPE = 6)
Four-node patches (ITYPE = 7)

When ITYPE = 7 is chosen, you enter directly all the 4-node patches that comprise this surface. They
are entered following the same format Marc would use to read the connectivities and coordinates of a
mesh of 3-D 4-node elements (element type 18 or 75). In this way, a finite element preprocessor can be
used to create surfaces. Alternatively, this data can be entered via the user subroutine DIGEOM, further
permitting you to read by yourself from any data you have access to. Figure 3-8 shows a typical 4-node
patch surface. It cannot be used as an analytical surface.
Both the value of ERROR and BIAS can also be specified on the CONTACT TABLE option for a specific
combination of bodies. A BIAS of zero will be used for glued contact and contact with a symmetry
body even if a nonzero value is specified on the third data block, unless it is specified via the CONTACT
TABLE option.
Main Index
Contact
z
Number of patches = 12
Number of nodes = 20
y 12
Nodal coordinates can be entered
using user subroutine DIGEOM
x
7 13
12 13
2 Rigid body 7 2
8
12 η
η 13
1 Rigid body
7 8
1: First direction
2: Second direction
η: Normal vector (right-hand rule) into the rigid body
Figure 3-8 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch, ITYPE = 7)
Poly-surface (ITYPE = 8)
When ITYPE = 8 is chosen, a poly-surface is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of NPOINT1 x
NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered along the first direction and then repeated
NPOINT2 times to fill through the second direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 have to be
at least equal to 4 for a poly-surface and there is no need to divide it. A typical poly-surface is shown in
Figure 3-9.
In a three-dimensional contact problem, as in a two-dimensional situation, the surface generators can

be represented in a variety of ways. It can be treated as an analytical surface. Approximate conversion
to NURBS.
Main Index
Contact
53
52 54
43 55
51 44
42
45
33 34
41 35
32
NPOINT2 = 5
23 24 25
31 22
2
21
13 14 15
h
z 12
1
y
11 NPOINT1 = 5
x
1: First direction
2: Second direction
η: Normal direction into the rigid body

Figure 3-9 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Poly Surface, ITYPE = 8)
Nonuniform Rational Bspline Surface, NURBS (ITYPE = 9)

When ITYPE = 9 is chosen, a NURBS is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of
NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points, NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 homogeneous coordinates and
(NPOINT1+NORDER1) + (NPOINT2+NORDER2) normalized knot vectors. If only the control points
are entered, the interpolation scheme is used such that the surface passes through all of control points.
The homogeneous coordinates and knot vectors are calculated by Marc. NPOINTS and NPOINT2 have
to be at least equal to 3 for the interpolation scheme. A typical NURBS is shown in Figure 3-10.
Main Index
Contact
+10
+8 +6
+9
+7 +5
+4
+2
+3 Z
Y X
+1
Figure 3-10 Nonuniform Rational Bspline Surface, NURBS (ITYPE = 9)
Cylinder (Cone) Surface (ITYPE = 10)

When ITYPE = 10 is chosen, a cylinder is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of the center, C1, with
radius, R1, in top face and the coordinate (x, y, z) of center, C2, with radius, R2, in bottom face. The
normal vector of cylinder is inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the normal vector is outwards.
A typical cylinder is shown in Figure 3-11.
Main Index
Contact
R1
C1
R2
C2
X Y
Z
Figure 3-11 Cylinder (Cone) Surface (ITYPE = 10)
Sphere Surface (ITYPE = 11)

When ITYPE = 11 is chosen, a sphere is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of the center, C1, with
radius, R1. The normal vector of sphere is inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the normal vector
is outwards. A typical sphere is shown in Figure 3-12.
Main Index
Contact
R1
C1
X Y
Figure 3-12 Sphere Surface (ITYPE = 11)
3-D Circular Arc

When JTYPE = 2 is chosen, a circular arc is created by Marc. There are three different methods
(Table 3-10) available to define a circular arc in three dimensions. Each method requires four data blocks,
with the following type of data:
Starting point of arc (SP)

Ending point of arc (EP)
Enter of circle (C)
Radius of circle (R)
Swept angle (SA)
Swept angle flag (SAF)
Middle point (MP)
Arbitrary point (lying in plane of circle) (AP)
Main Index
Contact
Table 3-2 Defining Circular Arcs

Method
Data Block 0 1 2
1 SP SP SP
2 EP MP AP
3 C EP C
4 R SAF SA
Notes: For Method 1, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface side. A
negative radius means the center of the circle is on the outside.
For Method 2, a SAF that is positive means an angle less than 180, a negative value an
angle greater than 180.
For Method 3, the starting point, arbitrary point and center define the plane in which the
circular arc lies.
SP, EP, C, MP and AP are X, Y, Z data.
For an arc with 180 degrees, either Method 1 or Method 2 is recommended.
A three-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 3-13.
EP
EP
MP
SP SA
R SP
SP
+
C C+
Method 0 Method 1 AP
Method 2
Figure 3-13 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc)
Spline
When JTYPE = 3 is chosen, the spline passes by all NPOINT declared, and has zero curvature at the
ends (enter at least 4 points).
Bezier curve
When JTYPE = 4 is chosen, a Bezier curve is defined by NPOINT control points (enter at least
4 points).
Main Index
Contact
Poly-line
When JTYPE = 5 is chosen, a poly-line defined by NPOINT control points.
Selective Contact Surfaces

In both the two- and three-dimensional contact problems, contact is always detected between nodes on
the surface of a deformable body and the geometrical profile of another surface. There are two modes of
the order in which a node checks contact with other bodies - so called single-sided contact and double-
sided contact. The default version is the double-sided contact procedure.
In the single-sided contact procedure, by default, the nodes on a lower numbered body can come into
contact with equally or higher numbered surfaces. For instance, the boundary nodes of body number 1
are checked against the surface profiles of bodies 1, 2, 3, .... The boundary nodes of body number 2,
however, are only checked against surface profiles of bodies 2, 3, ... It is possible, therefore, that due to
surface discretization, a node of body 2 slightly penetrates the surface of body 1. The order of contact
checking can be defined via the CONTACT TABLE option.
The double-sided contact option checks possible contact between any two surfaces (surface i is checked
for contact with surface j, and surface j is also checked for contact with surface i, where i, j = 1, 2, 3, ...,
total number of surfaces in the problem).
When defining contact bodies for a deformable-to-deformable analysis, it is important to define them in
the proper order. As a general rule, a body with a finer mesh should be defined before a body with a
coarser mesh. For problems involving adaptive meshing or automated remeshing, care must be taken to
satisfy this rule before as well as after the mesh change.
In addition, an option (CONTACT TABLE model definition and load incrementation options) is provided
to you for the selection of contact surfaces. Through this option, you can choose, for instance, the surface
no. 1 to be in contact with surfaces 3, 5, 6, 7, but not with surfaces 2 and 4. This option can repeatedly
be used during an analysis by specifying it in the history definition option.
You can further restrict the potential contact by using the CONTACT NODE or the EXCLUDE option.
User Subroutines
A number of user subroutines are available to you for two- and three-dimensional contact problems.
These are listed in Table 3-11.
Main Index
Contact
Table 3-3 User Subroutines for Contact Problems

User Option
Subroutine Required Contents
MOTION (2-D) CONTACT (2-D), To define surface motion.
MOTION (3-D) CONTACT (3-D),
UMOTION
UFRIC CONTACT (2-D), To define friction data.
CONTACT (3-D),
UFRICTION
UFRICBBC CONTACT (2-D) To define the separation force for beam-to-beam
CONTACT (3-D) contact.
CONTACT TABLE
UHTCOE CONTACT (2-D), To define film coefficient and sink temperature.
CONTACT (3-D),
UHTCOEF
UHTCON CONTACT (2-D), To define film coefficient between
CONTACT (3-D), contact surfaces.
UHTCON
UVTCOE JOULE To define environment electrical film coefficient.
CONTACT (2-D)
CONTACT (3-D)
UHTCOEF
UVTCON JOULE To define contact electrical film coefficient.
CONTACT (2-D)
CONTACT (3-D)
UHTCON
UMDCOE DIFFUSION Definition of variable mass diffusion coefficients
CONTACT and sink pressure on free surfaces.
UHTCOEF
UMDCON DIFFUSION Definition of variable mass diffusion coefficients
CONTACT of surfaces that are in contact with other surfaces.
UHTCON
UMDNRC DIFFUSION Definition of mass diffusion coefficients between
UHTCON surfaces almost in contact.
CONTACT
CONTACT TABLE
DIGEOM CONTACT (2-D), To define coordinates of 4-node patches.
CONTACT (3-D)
SEPFOR CONTACT (2-D), To define the separation force.
CONTACT (3-D)
Note: Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines manual provides more detailed
information on these subroutines.
Main Index
Contact
Table 3-3 User Subroutines for Contact Problems (continued)

User Option
Subroutine Required Contents
SEPFORBBC CONTACT (2-D), To define the separation force for beam-to-beam
CONTACT (3-D) contact.
CONTACT TABLE
SEPSTR CONTACT (2-D), To define the separation stress.
CONTACT (3-D)
UNORST CONTACT (2-D), To define normal stress at each node in contact.
CONTACT (3-D)
Note: Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines manual provides more detailed
information on these subroutines.
Contact with Adaptive Meshing or Rezoning

In a contact (or any other) problem, the original mesh can be badly deteriorated during the analysis due
to excessive deformation. Rezoning of the deteriorated mesh generally allows the continuation of the
analysis to completion. This can be performed automatically using the ADAPT GLOBAL model definition
option or manually using the REZONING parameter, and the rezoning options CONNECTIVITY CHANGE
and COORDINATE CHANGE. When using the ADAPT GLOBAL option, this will be performed as often
as necessary. Note that in a contact problem, only the deformable surface definition can be changed. After
rezoning occurs, rigid surfaces must be kept the same and cannot be changed. The upper bound to the
number of nodes that lie on the periphery of any deformable body must be sufficiently high to account
for an increase in the number of nodes.
Spring-Back Analysis
In metal forming analysis, the spring-back condition is of great interest to engineers for the study of the
state of residual stresses in the workpiece. However, it is a difficult numerical problem and generally
requires a large number of load increments for a final solution. The RELEASE load incrementation option
allows the release (separation) of all the nodes in contact with a particular surface at the beginning of the
increment. A spring-back condition can be obtained in one load increment. Marc iterates the solution
within the increment automatically for an equilibrium solution.
Contact Tolerance
A node comes into contact with another body when it enters the contact tolerance zone. This area is
dependent upon the value of ERROR and BIAS entered on the third data block. When BIAS is zero, the
tolerance is equidistant from the actual surface as shown in Figure 3-14 (a); otherwise, the situation
shown in Figure 3-14 (b) is used. If a node would have moved past line B, then increment splitting would
occur if the fixed time step procedure is used and the increment splitting procedure is used.
Main Index
Contact
ERROR ERROR*(1-BIAS)
ERROR ERROR*(1+BIAS)
B
(a) Equidistant Default (b) Biased
Figure 3-14 Contact Tolerances
Corner Conditions
When a node slides along a surface composed of multiple segments, three conditions can occur based on
the angle that the segments make. This is true for both two-dimensional and three-dimensional problems.
The Figure 3-15 shows the two-dimensional case for simplicity. If the angle between the two segments is
between 180 - β < α < 180° + β, the node smoothly slides between the segments. If the angle is such that
0 < α < 180 - β, the node sticks in the sharp concave corner. If the angle is such that α > 180 + β, the
node separates. The value of β is 8.625° for two-dimensional problems and 20° for three-dimensional
problems. These values can be reset using the PARAMETERS option.
Smooth Sharp Concave
Sharp Convex
Figure 3-15 Corner Conditions
Friction
There are several friction models available in Marc. The friction types, entered on the second line of the
CONTACT option, are as follows:
Main Index
Contact
0 No friction
1 Shear friction: velocity based smoothing function
2 Coulomb friction: velocity based smoothing function
3 Shear friction for rolling: velocity based smoothing function
4 Coulomb friction for rolling: velocity based smoothing function
5 Stick-slip model: step function
6 Coulomb friction: displacement based bilinear function
7 Shear friction: displacement based bilinear function
More details on these models are presented in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. For model
types (1-4), you need to define both the friction constant and the value of RVCNST(C). This value is
used to smooth out the discontinuous behavior of friction. The value of RVCNST can be interpreted as
the value of the relative velocity when sliding occurs. A very small value results in a difficulty to
converge; while a very large value results in hardly any effect of friction. This is depicted in Figure 3-16.
-
Ft
C = 0.01 1
C = 0.1
C=1
C = 10
C = 100 10
-10 vr
-1
Figure 3-16 Stick-slip Approximation (Fn = 1)
Using the stick-slip friction model, type 5, three parameters (α, β, and e) are available to control the
numerical behavior. Here α represents a tolerance on the frictional force before sliding occurs. The node
changes from stick to slip when
F t > αμ F n
Main Index
Contact
So the difference between the static and the dynamic coefficient of friction is expressed by α. Parameter
β can be seen as the amount of relative displacement in the direction of the friction force to enforce the
friction condition to change from slip to stick. The tolerance on the convergence of the solution is given
by e. It is required that
Ft
1 – e ≤ --------p- ≤ 1 + e
Ft
where F t p is the tangential force at the previous iteration. This is shown in Figure 3-17. The stick-slip
model automatically used the nodal based friction procedure.
Ft
αμFn
2β
μFn
2εβ
Δut
α = 1.05 (default; can be user-defined)

β = 1 x 10-6 (default; can be user-defined)
ε = 1 x 10-6 (fixed; so that εβ ≈ 0)
e = 5 x 10-2 (default; can be user-defined)
Figure 3-17 Stick-slip Friction Parameters
Finally, the friction models 6 and 7 (see Figure 3-18 for the Coulomb model) offer two parameters to
control the numerical behavior: δ and e. The parameter δ can be seen as the slip threshold: as long as the
relative tangential displacement in a contact node is smaller than δ, there exists an “elastic” or stick
condition. Its default value is determined automatically by the program. Parameter e is used to control
the accuracy of the friction solution. A friction solution is considered to be converged if:
p
F t – Ft
--------------------------------
p
≤e
Ft
where F pt is the total friction force of the previous iteration and (i) indicates a component of the friction
force vector.
Main Index
Contact
Ft
μF n
Δu t
δ
Figure 3-18 Bilinear Friction Model
The shear friction model 7 works similar to type 6, but introduces a limit on the friction force if plasticity
is observed and is better suited to simulate; e.g., bulk forming processes. Both types 6 and 7 are always
based on nodal forces.
Main Index
Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface
CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface
Description
This option allows for the input of 2-D contact surface definition (rigid or deformable) in contact
problems. It also allows you to input friction type, relative sliding velocity for sticking conditions,
contact tolerance, location of center of rotation, initial angular position of surface, velocity of center of
rotation, angular velocity, as well as friction coefficient. For coupled analysis, additional input is required
to define the thermal, electrical, and diffusion behavior if applicable. In acoustic-solid analysis, it also
allows for the input of reactive boundary conditions. Near thermal contact is only available with input
version 10 or greater.
Notes: Always define deformable surfaces before rigid surfaces.

Always define acoustic bodies before structural bodies.
If the UMOTION option and MOTION user subroutine are used, velocity data can be skipped.
If the UFRICTION option and UFRIC user subroutine are used, friction data can be skipped, but the
friction type must be identified.
If, in a coupled thermal-stress-contact problem, the UHTCOEF option and UHTCOE user subroutine are
used, the film coefficient and sink temperature data of a free surface can be skipped.
If the UHTCON option and UHTCON user subroutine are used in a coupled thermal-stress-contact
problem, film coefficient data between surfaces in contact can be skipped.
The following data can be changed upon restart:
Friction type 4th field 2nd data line

Maximum number of separations 6th field 2nd data line
Suppression of splitting 7th field 2nd data line
Relative sliding velocity 1st field 3rd data line

Contact distance 2nd field 3rd data line
Thermal close distance 3rd field 3rd data line
Separation force 5th field 3rd data line
Bias factor 6th field 3rd data line
Main Index
618 CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)
Note: The CONTACT TABLE option offers the possibility to specify data per pair of contact
bodies. Data which can be entered through the CONTACT TABLE option is designated with
a red asterisk (*).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word CONTACT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of surfaces to be defined.
16-20 4th I Friction type
0: No Friction (default)
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb Friction
3: Shear Friction for Rolling
4: Coulomb Friction for Rolling
5: Stick-slip Coulomb Friction
6: Bilinear Coulomb Friction
7: Bilinear Shear Friction
21-25 5th I Enter 0 (default) for the calculation of Coulomb friction based on
nodal stress. This can only be activated for friction types 1 to 4. Friction
types 5 to 7 always use nodal force.
Enter 1 for the calculation of Coulomb friction based on nodal force
instead of nodal stress.
26-30 6th I Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. Default
is 9999.
31-35 7th I Enter 0 (default) to use the increment splitting procedure for the fixed time
step procedures (AUTO LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, TRANSIENT
NON AUTO).
Enter 1 for the suppression of the splitting of an increment in fixed time
step procedure. Enter 2 for adaptive time step procedure. Default is 0.
Main Index
Format
Data
Enter 3 (preferred) to use contact procedure which does not require
increment splitting (iterative penetration checking procedure).
36-40 8th I Enter 0 (default) to reset NCYCLE=0 which does not result in the
initialization of the Newton-Raphson procedure.
Enter 3 to not reset NCYCLE=0 when separation occurs; this speeds up
the solution but might result in instabilities.
41-45 9th I Control separations within an increment.
When 0 (default) is entered, if the force on a node is greater than the
separation force, the node separates and an iteration occurs.
When 1 is entered, if a node, which was in contact at the end of the
previous increment, has a force greater than the separation force, the node
does not separate in this increment, but separates at the beginning of the
next increment.
When 2 is entered, if a new node comes into contact during this increment,
it is not allowed to separate during this increment (prevents chattering).
When 3 is entered, both (1) and (2) above are in effect.
46-50 10th I Parameter governing normal direction/thickness contribution of shell
(ISH).
Enter 0 – Check Node Contact with top and bottom surface; including
shell thickness
Enter 1 – Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer
Enter 2 – Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer and ignore
shell thickness
Enter -1 – Nodes only come into contact with top layer
Enter -2 – Nodes only come into contact with top layer and ignore shell
thickness
51-55 11th I Enter 0 (default) for full printout of the rigid surface geometry.
Enter 1 to reduce printout of surface definition.
56-60 12th I Separation flag. This flag is related to the separation threshold entered on
the 5th field of the 3rd data block and may have the following values:
0: Separation is based on nodal forces. If the contact normal force
on a node in contact exceeds the threshold, the node separates.
1: Separation is based on absolute nodal stresses where a nodal
stress is calculated as a force divided by an equivalent area. If
the contact normal stress on a node in contact exceeds the
threshold, the node separates.
Main Index
Format
Data
2: Separation is based on absolute nodal stresses, where a nodal
stress is determined by extrapolating and averaging integration
point values. If the contact normal stress on a node in contact
exceeds the threshold, the node separates.
3: Separation is based on relative nodal stresses, where a nodal
threshold times the maximum contact normal stress, the
node separates.
exceeds the threshold times the maximum contact normal stress,
the node separates.
The default value is 0. Notice that for true quadratic contact, only stress-
based separation (2 or 4) can be used.
66-70 14th I Linearization flag, to be used if a contact body consists of
quadratic elements:
1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described based on the
corner nodes only. In the contact area, the midside nodes are
linearly tied to the corresponding corner nodes. Midside nodes
cannot come into contact.
-1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described using a
quadratic field. If a node touches a quadratic segment, a full
quadratic multipoint constraint is set up. Both corner and
midside nodes can come into contact.
76-80 16th I Enter 1 to get the tying information due to initial contact written into the
jid.t01 file. This file can be included in a second analysis, so that
(glued) contact conditions can be obtained without actually defining
contact bodies in the second analysis.
Enter 3 to write out the tying information due to contact each increment to
a file called jid.conmpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
Marc format is used.
a file called jid.conmpc_xxx. The MD Nastran MPC format is used.
Main Index
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-10 1st F For friction types 1, 2, 3, or 4 enter the relative sliding velocity between
bodies below which sticking is simulated (RVCNST).
Default = 1.0.
For friction type 5, enter the slip-to-stick transition region (β);
Default is 1.e-6.
For friction types 6 and 7, enter the slip threshold (δ). Default = 0.0, which
means that the actual value is automatically determined.
11-20* 2nd F Distance below which a node is considered touching a body (ERROR).
Leave blank if you want Marc to calculate it. This number is also used to
divide splines. If splines are used, this must be defined.
41-50* 5th F Separation threshold. The physical meaning of this threshold (a force, a
stress or a fraction of the maximum contact normal stress) depends on the
separation flag entered on the 12th field of the 2nd data block.
51-60* 6th F Contact tolerance BIAS factor. (0-1) Not used for glued contact and
contact with a symmetry body.
61-70 7th F For stick-slip model, enter the friction coefficient multiplier (α).
Defaults to 1.05.
71-80 8th F For stick-slip model, enter the friction force tolerance (e).
Defaults to 0.05.
Data blocks 4 through 22 are repeated once for each body to be defined.
Numbering of Contact Bodies: When defining contact bodies for a deformable-to-deformable
analysis, it is important to define them in the proper order. As a general rule, a body with a finer mesh
should be defined before a body with a coarser mesh. For problems involving adaptive meshing or
automated remeshing, care must be taken to satisfy this rule before as well as after the mesh change.
Note: The CONTACT TABLE option allow the contact body numbering to be either automatic or
user-defined.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Body number.
6-10 2nd I Number of sets of geometrical data to be input for this rigid body
(NETTY). Enter 0 if deformable body.
Main Index
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I For deformable bodies, enter 0 if double-sided deformable-deformable
contact with default search order based upon body IDs.
For rigid surfaces, enter 1 if surface is a symmetry plane.
For deformable bodies, enter 1 if single-sided deformable-deformable
contact is used.
Note that, in this case, results are dependent upon the order in which
contact bodies are defined.
For deformable bodies, enter 2 if double-sided deformable-deformable
contact is used with automatic optimization of the contact constraint
equations. Notice that this can be overruled per contact body combination
by the CONTACT TABLE option. This is recommended for simulations
with global adaptive remeshing.
21-25 5th I For rigid bodies, enter 0 (default) if the piecewise linear representation
is used.
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if analytic form is to be used.
26-30 6th I Enter -1 if body is position controlled.
Enter 0 (default) if body is velocity controlled.
Enter a positive number if load controlled. The number entered is the node
number which has the displacement degrees of freedom of the body. The
user-defined coordinates of this node are ignored and replaced with the
coordinates of the center of rotation given in the 5th data block.
Note: In Mentat, the coordinates of this node are used to define the
center of rotation.
31-35 7th I Enter a positive number if load controlled and rotations are allowed. The
number is the node number which has the rotation(s) of the body as
degrees of freedom. This node number should not be the same as the node
number given in the 6th field. The position of this node is at the center of
rotation given in the 5th data block.
The load controlled body node(s) may have FIXED DISP/POINT LOAD or
connections with environment/other structures using the
SPRINGS option.
Node 1 has x- and y-displacement as degree of freedom 1 and 2
Node 2 has z-rotation as degree of freedom 1
The first node of a load-controlled body use the TRANSFORMATION
or COORD SYSTEM option to allow for movement in user-defined
directions.
Main Index
Format
Data
36-40 8th I Contact body type (optional):
1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
41-64 9th A Contact body name (optional)
5th data block
1-10 1st F First coordinate of initial position of center of rotation.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of initial position of center of rotation.
21-30 3rd F Third coordinate of initial position of center of ratio.
31-40 4th F Initial Angular position.
41-50 5th F First component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 0.0
51-60 6th F Second component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 0.0
61-70 7th F Third component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 1.0
6th data block
1-10 1st F First component of approach velocity of center of rotation.
11-20 2nd F Second component of approach velocity of center of rotation.
21-30 3rd F Third component of approach velocity of center of rotation.
31-40 4th F Approach Angular velocity about local axis through center of rotation.
7th data block (Only required if a mechanical-displacement analysis)
1-10 1st F First component of velocity or target position of center of rotation.
11-20 2nd F Second component of velocity or target position of center of rotation.
21-30 3rd F Third component of velocity or target position of center of rotation.
31-40 4th F Angular velocity or angular position about local axis through center of
rotation.
41-50 5th F Growth factor of rigid surface in first coordinate direction.
51-60 6th F Growth factor of rigid surface in second coordinate direction.
61-70 7th F Growth factor of rigid surface in third coordinate direction.
71-80* 8th F Friction Coefficient.
8th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the first component of velocity, or target position of
center of rotation.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the second component of velocity, or target position
of center of rotation.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the third component of velocity, or target position of
center of rotation.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the angular velocity.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for growth factor in first coordinate direction.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for growth factor in second coordinate direction.
31-35 7th I Enter the table ID for growth factor in third coordinate direction.
36-40 8th I Enter the table ID for the friction coefficient.
9th data block
1-10 1st F Heat Transfer coefficient (film) to environment (HCVE).
11-20 2nd F Environment sink temperature (TSINK).
21-30* 3rd F Contact heat transfer coefficient (HCT).
31-40 4th F Body temperature (TBODY). (Required for rigid body only.)
41-50* 5th F Enter the convection coefficient for near field behavior (HCV).
51-60* 6th F Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior (HNC).
61-70* 7th F Enter the exponent associated with natural convection (BNC).
71-80* 8th F Enter the surface emissivity ( ε ) for radiation to the environment or near
thermal radiation.
10th data block
The 10th data block is only necessary if heat transfer is included.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the heat transfer coefficient to environment (HCVE).
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the environment sink temperature (TSINK).
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the contact heat transfer coefficient (HCT).
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the body temperature (TBODY).
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the convection coefficient for near field behavior
(HCV).
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for natural convection coefficient for near field behavior
(HNC).
Main Index
Format
Data
31-35 7th I Enter the table ID for the exponent associated with natural convection.
(BNC).
36-40 8th I Enter the table ID for surface emissivity ( ε ) for radiation to the
environment or near thermal radiation.
11th data block (Only if heat transfer is included)
1-10* 1st F Enter the separation distance dependent heat transfer film coefficient
(HBL).
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with (HBL).
The thermal flux can be described between two bodies A and B as follows:
1. If separation distance (s) is less than ERROR, bodies are in contact q = H CT ( T B – T A ) .
2. If separation distance (s) is greater than ERROR, but less than DQ NEAR , and DQ NEAR is not
zero. DQ NEAR must be defined via the CONTACT TABLE option.
BNC
4 4
q = H CV ( T B – T A ) + H NC ( T B – T A ) + σε ( T B – T A )
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛⎝ 1 – --------------------------⎞⎠ + H BL -------------------------- ⎬ ( T B – T A )
S S
⎩ DQN EAR DQN EAR ⎭
The last term is only included if HBL is not zero.

The Stefan Boltzmann constant ( σ ) is entered via the PARAMETERS model definition option.
Radiation is based upon the absolute temperatures using the offset temperature entered via the
PARAMETERS model definition option.
3. If separation distance S is greater than DQN EA R or E R ROR if DQN EA R is not
defined, then convection and radiation to the environment occurs.
4 4
q = H CVE ( T SI NK – T A ) + σε ( T SI NK – T A )
13th data block (Only if Joule Heating is included)

1-10 1st F Electrical transfer coefficient to environment.
11-20 2nd F Environment sink voltage.
21-30* 3rd F Contact Electrical transfer coefficient.
31-40 4th F Body voltage (Required for rigid body only).
41-50* 5th F Electrical transfer coefficient for near field behavior.
51-60* 6th F Enter the separation distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the electrical transfer coefficient to environment.
Main Index
Format
Data
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the sink voltage.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the contact electrical transfer coefficient.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the body voltage.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the electrical transfer coefficient for near field
behavior.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for the separation distance dependent electrical
transfer coefficient.
15th data block (Only used if coupled mass diffusion)
1-10 1st E Enter the mass flow rate coefficient to environment.
11-20 2nd E Enter the environment sink pressure (PSINK).
21-30* 3rd E Enter the contact mass flow rate coefficient.
31-40 4th E Enter the body pressure (required for rigid body only).
41-50* 5th E Enter the mass flow rate coefficient for near field behavior.
51-60* 6th E Enter separation distance dependent mass flow rate coefficient.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the mass flow rate coefficient to environment.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the environment sink pressure (PSINK).
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the contact mass flow rate coefficient.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the body pressure.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the mass rate coefficient for near field behavior.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for the separation distance dependent mass flow
rate coefficient.
17th data block
The 17th data block is only necessary for harmonic acoustic analysis.
1-10 1st F 1
----- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
11-20 2nd F 1
c1
18th data block

1
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with ----- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
Main Index
Format
Data
1
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with ----- reactive boundary coefficient.
c1
The 19th through 22nd data blocks are repeated for as many geometrical data as required (NETTY).
A. For 2-D Deformable Bodies
19a data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of elements of which the body is comprised.
B. For 2-D Rigid Body (Line-Segment)
19b data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1 for straight line segments (ITYPE).
6-10 2nd I Number of points required to define polyline (NPOINT).
The 20th data block is repeated once for each point entered.
20b data block
1-10 1st F First coordinate of point.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of point.
C. For 2-D Rigid Body (Circular Arc)
19c data block
1-5 1st I Enter 2 for circular arc (ITYPE).
6-10 2nd I Method of describing circular arc (METHOD).
See Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3.
The 20c data block is repeated four times.
20c data block
D. For 2-D Rigid Body (Spline)
19d data block
1-5 1st I Enter 3 for spline (ITYPE).
6-10 2nd I Number of points required to define spline (NPOINT).
The 20d data block is repeated for each point to be entered.
20d data block
Main Index
Format
Data
E. For 2-D Rigid Body (NURBS)
The 19e data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
19e data block
1-5 1st I Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10 2nd I Number of control points (NPTU).
11-15 3rd I Order (NORU).
16-20 4th I Number of subdivisions; default 50.
20e data block
1-10 1st F First coordinate of point
If interpolation scheme is used the following two data blocks are ignored.
The 21e data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
21e data block
1-10 1st F Homogeneous coordinate between 0 and 1.
The 22e data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
22e data block
1-10 1st F Component of knot vector between 0 and 1.
Main Index
CONTACT (2-D) 629
CONTACT (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface
input style.
Description
rotation, angular velocity, as well as friction coefficient. In acoustic-solid analysis, it also allows for the
input of reactive boundary conditions.

If the UMOTION option and the MOTION user subroutine are used, velocity data can be skipped.
If the UFRICTION option and the UFRIC user subroutine are used, friction data can be skipped, but the
If, in a coupled thermal-stress-contact problem, the UHTCOEF option and the UHTCOE user subroutine
are used, the film coefficient and sink temperature data of a free surface can be skipped.
If the UHTCON option and the UHTCON user subroutine are used in a coupled thermal-stress-contact


a red asterisk (*).
Main Index
630 CONTACT (2-D)
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb Friction
types 5 to 7 always used nodal force.
is 9999.
31-35 7th I Enter 0 (default) to use the increment splitting procedure for the fixed
time step procedures (AUTO LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, TRANSIENT
NON AUTO).
step procedure. Enter 2 for adaptive time step procedure.
36-40 8th I Enter 0 (default) to reset NCYCLE = 0 which does not result in the
Main Index
CONTACT (2-D) 631
Format
Data
next increment.
When 2 is entered, if a new node comes into contact during this
increment, it is not allowed to separate during this increment (prevents
chattering).
(ISH).
shell thickness
shell thickness
Enter -2 – Nodes only come into contact with top layer and ignore
shell thickness
51-55 11th I Enter 0 (default) for full print out of the rigid surface geometry.
Main Index
632 CONTACT (2-D)
Format
Data
node separates.
the node separates.
66-70 14th I Linearization flag, to be used if a contact body consists of quadratic
elements:
Enter 3 to write out the tying information due to contact each increment
to a file called jid.conmpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
to a file called jid.conmpc_xxx. The MD Nastran MPC format is used.
3rd data block
Default = 1.0.
Main Index
CONTACT (2-D) 633
Format
Data
For friction type 5, enter the slip-to-stick transition region (β); Default
is 10-6.
stress or a percentage of the maximum contact normal stress) depends on
the separation flag entered on the 12th field of the 2nd data block.
Defaults to 1.05
71-80 8th F For stick-slip and bilinear models, enter the friction force tolerance (e).
Defaults to 0.05.
The 4th through the 15th data blocks are repeated once for each body to be defined.
user-defined.
4th data block
contact is used.
Main Index
634 CONTACT (2-D)
Format
Data
is used.
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if analytic form is to be used.
center of rotation.
SPRINGS option.
The TRANSFORMATION or COORD SYSTEM option may be used to
transform the degrees of freedom on the first node to allow for movement
in user-defined directions.
1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
Main Index
CONTACT (2-D) 635
Format
Data
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
5th data block
21-30 3rd F Third coordinate of initial position of center of rotation.
31-40 4th F Initial angular position.
41-50 5th F First component direction cosine of local axis.
Default = 0.0.
51-60 6th F Second component direction cosine of local axis.
Default = 0.0.
61-70 7th F Third component direction cosine of local axis;
Default = 1.0.
6th data block
31-40 4th F Approach angular velocity about local axis through center of rotation.
7th data block
rotation.
71-80* 8th F Friction coefficient.
Main Index
636 CONTACT (2-D)
Format
Data
8th data block
1-10 1st F Heat transfer coefficient (film) to environment ( H CVE ).
11-20 2nd F Environment sink temperature ( T S INK ).
21-30* 3rd F Contact heat transfer coefficient ( H CT ).
31-40 4th F Body temperature ( T BODY ). (Required for rigid body only.)
41-50* 5th F Enter the convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H CV ).
51-60* 6th F Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H NC ).
61-70* 7th F Enter the exponent associated with natural convection ( B NC ).
71-80* 8th F Enter the surface emissivity for either near field behavior or radiation to
environment ( ε ).
9th data block
1-10* 1st F Enter the separation distance dependent heat transfer file coefficient
( H BL ).
1. If separation distances ( S ) is less than ERROR , bodies are in contact q = H CT ( T B – T A ) .
2. If separation distance ( S ) is greater than ERROR , but less than DQ NEAR , and DQ NEAR is
defined in the CONTACT TABLE option.
B NC
q = H CV ( T B – T A ) + H NC ( T B – T A ) + σε ( T B4 – T A4 )
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛ 1 – --------------------------⎞ + H BL -------------------------- ⎬ T B – T A
S S
⎝ D QNE A R⎠ DQ NEAR ⎭
⎩
The last term is included only when H BL is not zero.

The Stefan Boltzmann constant ( σ ) is entered via the PARAMETERS model definition
option.
3. If separation distance S is greater than DQ NEAR or ERROR if DQ NEAR is not defined, then
4 4
convection and radiation to the environment occurs. q = H CVE ( T SI NK – T A ) + σε ( T SINK – T A )
Main Index
CONTACT (2-D) 637
Format
Data
10th data block
The 10th data block is only necessary for Joule heating.
21-30* 3rd F Contact electrical transfer coefficient.
31-40 4th F Body voltage (required for rigid body only).
11th data block
1-10 1st F 1-
---- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
11-20 2nd F 1
c1

The 12th through the 15th data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NSURGN).
12a data block
12b data block
The 13b data block is repeated once for each point entered.
13b data block
12c data block
Main Index
638 CONTACT (2-D)
Format
Data
13c data block
12d data block
13d data block
12e data block
13e data block
14e data block
15e data block
Main Index
Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface
CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface
Description
rotation, angular velocity, as well as friction coefficient. For coupled analysis, additional input is required
to define the thermal, electrical, and diffusion behavior if applicable. In acoustic-solid analysis, it also
allows for the input of reactive boundary conditions. Near thermal contact is only available with input
version 10 or greater.

If the UFRICTION option and the UFRIC user subroutine are used, friction data can be skipped, but the


Thermal close distance 3rd field 3rd data line
Main Index
a red asterisk (*).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
0: No Friction
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb Friction
is 9999.
Main Index
Format
Data
NON AUTO).
next increment.
(ISH).
shell thickness
shell thickness
thickness
51-55 11th I Enter 0 (default) for full print out of the rigid surface geometry.
Main Index
Format
Data
node separates.
the node separates.
61-65 13th I Enter 1 to activate beam-to-beam contact.
Enter 1+100*FREQ to activate beam-to-beam contact and write Mentat
mfd-files with the given frequency that contain line segments connecting
the beam-to-beam contact locations of touching beam elements.
quadratic elements:
Main Index
Format
Data
to a file called jid.conmpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
to a file called jid.conmpc_xxx. The MD Nastran MPC format is used.
3rd data block
Default = 1.0.
Default is 1.e-6.
Leave blank if you want Marc to calculate it.
stress or a fraction of the maximum contact normal stress) depends on the
separation flag entered on the 12th field of the 2nd data block.
Notice that the CONTACT TABLE option offers the possibility to define a
separation threshold per pair of contact bodies.
Defaults to 1.05
Defaults to 0.05.
Main Index
Format
Data
user-defined.
4th data block
11-15 3rd I For deformable bodies, enter 0 (default) if double-sided deformable-
deformable contact with default search order based upon body IDs.
contact is used.
is used.
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if analytic form is to be used. This is required if
trimmed NURBS are entered.
center of rotation.
Main Index
Format
Data
connections with environment/ other structures using the
SPRINGS option.
Node 1 has x-, y-, and z-displacement as degrees of freedom 1, 2 and 3
Node 2 has x-,y-, and z-rotation as degrees of freedom 1, 2 and 3
The rotation is defined as: Rx.Ry.Rz
Both nodes of a load-controlled body may use the TRANSFORMATION or
COORD SYSTEM option to allow for movement in the user-defined
directions. Note also that it is not necessary for the user-defined directions
at the nodes to be identical to each other.
1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
5th data block
6th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
7th data block
rotation.
71-80* 8th F Friction Coefficient.
8th data block
center of rotation.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the third component of velocity, or target position of
center of rotation.
9th data block
21-30* 3rd F Contact heat transfer coefficient (HCT).
41-50 5th F Enter the convection coefficient for near field behavior (HCV).
Main Index
Format
Data
51-60* 6th F Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior (HNC).
61-70* 7th F Enter the exponent associated with natural convection (BNC).
71-80* 8th F Enter the surface emissivity ( ε ) for radiation to the environment or near
thermal radiation.
10th data block
(HCV).
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for natural convection coefficient for near field
behavior (HNC).
(BNC).
36-40 8th I Enter the table ID for surface emissivity ( ε ) for radiation to the
environment or near thermal radiation.
1-10* 1st F Enter the separation distance dependent heat transfer film coefficient
(HBL).
2. If separation distance (s) is greater than ERROR, but less than DQ NE A R , and DQ NE A R is not
zero. DQ NEAR must be defined via the CONTACT TABLE option.
BNC 4 4
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛ 1 – --------------------------⎞ + H BL -------------------------- ⎬ ( T B – T A )
S S
⎝ DQN EAR⎠ DQN EAR ⎭
⎩
Main Index
Format
Data
The Stefan Boltzmann constant ( σ ) is entered via the PARAMETERS model
definition option.
3. If separation distance S is greater than DQ NEAR or E R ROR if DQ NEAR is not defined, then
4 4
convection and radiation to the environment occurs. q = H CVE ( T SI NK – T A ) + σε ( T SI NK – T A )

21-30* 3rd F Contact Electrical transfer coefficient.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the electrical transfer coefficient for near
field behavior.
21-30* 3rd E Enter the contact mass flow rate coefficient.
41-50* 5th E Enter the mass flow rate coefficient for near field behavior.
51-60* 6th E Enter separation distance dependent mass flow rate coefficient.
Main Index
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the mass rate coefficient for near behavior.
rate coefficient.
17th data block
1
1-10 1st F ----- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
1-
11-20 2nd F ---- reactive boundary coefficient.
c1
18th data block

1-
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with ---- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
1-
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with ---- reactive boundary coefficient.
c1
The 19th through 26th data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NSURGN).
A. For 3-D Deformable Body
19a data block
B. For 3-D Rigid Body (Ruled Surface)
19b data block
1-5 1st I Enter 4 for ruled surface (ITYPE).
6-10 2nd I Entity type of the first surface generator (child) of the surface, JTYPE1.
11-15 3rd I If JTYPE1 = 1, 3, 4, 5 enter number of point required to describe first
surface generator (NPOINT1).
If JTYPE1 = 2 method to describe the circular arc (METH).
16-20 4th I Entity type of the second surface generator (child) of the surface
(JPOINT2).
Main Index
Format
Data
21-25 5th I If JTYPE1 = 1, 3, 4, 5 enter number of point required to describe second
26-30 6th I Number of subdivisions along first direction (NDIV1), (direction along
first and second surface generator).
31-35 7th I Number of subdivisions along second direction (NDIV2), (direction from
first surface generator to second surface generator).
The 20b data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for ruled surface.
20b data block
21-30 3rd F Third coordinate of point.
C. For 3-D Rigid Body (Surface of Revolution)
19c data block
1-5 1st I Enter 5 for surface of revolution (ITYPE).
6-10 2nd I Entity type of the surface generator.
11-15 3rd I If JTYPE1 = 1, 3, 4, 5 enter number of points required to describe the
generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2
Method to describe the circular arc (METH).
16-20 4th I Number of subdivisions along the first (surface generator) direction
(NDIV1).
21-25 5th I Number of subdivisions along the second (circumference)
direction (NDIV2).
The 20c data block is repeated NPOINT times for surface of revolution.
20c data block
21c data block
1-10 1st F First coordinate of 1st point on the axis of revolution.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of 1st point on the axis of revolution.
21-30 3rd F Third coordinate of 1st point on the axis of revolution.
Main Index
Format
Data
31-40 4th F First coordinate of 2nd point on the axis of revolution.
41-50 5th F Second coordinate of 2nd point on the axis of revolution.
51-60 6th F Third coordinate of 2nd point on the axis of revolution.
61-70 7th F Total angle (degree) of rotation (Initial position of the surface generator is
given on the 9th data block.)
D. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface)
19d data block
1-5 1st I Enter 6 for Bezier surface (ITYPE).
6-10 2nd I Number of points along the first direction of surface (NPONT1).
11-15 3rd Number of points along the second direction of surface (NPOINT2).
16-20 4th I Number of subdivisions along first direction (NDIV1).
21-25 5th I Number of subdivisions along second direction (NDIV2).
The 20d data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for Bezier surface.
20d data block
E. For 3-D Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch)
19e data block
1-5 1st I Enter 7 for a surface consisting of 4-node patches (ITYPE).
6-10 2nd I Number of 4-node patches to be read (which makes the entire
surface) NSEG.
11-15 3rd I Number of points to be read (NPOINT).
16-20 4th I Unit number. Defaults to input. Set KUNIT = -1 if data entered via the
DIGEOM user subroutine.
21-25 5th I Set to 1 if patch data is to be printed.
Default: no printing.
The 20e data block is repeated NSEG times for patches not entered by means of user subroutines
(ITYPE = 7 and KUNIT not -1)
20e data block
1-5 1st I Patch number (not necessary, can be left blank).
11-15 3rd I First point number of this patch.
Main Index
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Second point number of this patch.
21-25 5th I Third point number of this patch.
26-30 6th I Fourth point number of this patch.
The 21e data block is repeated NPOINT times for patches not entered by means number of user
subroutine (ITYPE = 7 and KUNIT not -1).
21e data block
1-5 1st I Point number.
6-15 2nd F First coordinate of this node.
16-25 3rd F Second coordinate of this node.
26-35 4th F Third coordinate of this node.
F. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Poly-Surface)
19f data block
1-5 1st I Enter 8 for polysurface (ITYPE).
6-10 2nd I Number of points along the first direction of surface (NPOINT1).
11-15 3rd I Number of points along the second direction of surface (NPOINT2).
The 20f data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for poly-surfaces.
20f data block
G. For 3-D Rigid Surface (NURBS)
19g data block
6-10 2nd I Number of control points along u-direction (NPTU).
11-15 3rd I Number of control points along v-direction (NPTV).
16-20 4th I Order along u-direction (NORU).
21-25 5th I Order along v-direction (NORV).
26-30 6th I Number of subdivisions along u-direction; default 50.
31-35 7th I Number of subdivisions along v-direction; default 50.
36-40 8th I Number of trimming curves.
The 20g data block is repeated (NPTU ∗ NPTV) for control points.
20g data block
Main Index
Format
Data
The 21g data block is repeated (NPTU ∗ NPTV) for homogeneous coordinate.
21g data block
1-10 1st F Homogeneous coordinate (0 ≤ h ≤ 1).
The 22g data block is repeated (NPTU + NORU) + (NPTV + NORV) for knot vectors.
22g data block
1-10 1st F Knot vector(0 ≤ k ≤ 1).
For each trimming curve, data blocks 23g, 24g, 25g, and 26g.
23g data block
The 24g data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
24g data block
1-10 1st F First coordinate of point in isoparametric space.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of point in isoparametric space.
The 25g data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
25g data block
The 26g data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
26g data block
H. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Cylinder)
19h data block
1-5 1st I Enter 10 for Cylinder.
6-10 2nd I Number of subdivisions.
20h data block
1-10 1st F First coordinate of center point on top surface.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of center point on top surface.
Main Index
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F Third coordinate of center point on top surface.
31-40 4th F Radius of top surface
41-50 5th F First coordinate of center point on bottom surface.
51-60 6th F Second coordinate of center point on bottom surface.
61-70 7th F Third coordinate of center point on bottom surface radius of bottom
surface.
71-80 8th F Radius of bottom surface.
Note: If the radius is negative value in 4th field the normal of cylinder
is outward. Default is inward.
I. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Sphere)
19i data block
1-5 1st I Enter 11 for Sphere.
20i data block
1-10 1st F First coordinate of center point.
11-20 2nd F Second coordinate of center point.
21-30 3rd F Third coordinate of center point.
31-40 4th F Radius of sphere.
Note: If the radius is negative value in 4th field, the normal of sphere
Main Index
CONTACT (3-D) 655
CONTACT (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface
input style.
Description
problems. It also allows you to input friction type, relative sliding velocity for sticking condition, contact
tolerance, location of center of rotation, initial angular position of surface, velocity of center of rotation,
angular velocity, as well as friction coefficient. In acoustic-solid analysis it also allows for the input of
reactive boundary conditions.

If the UFRICTION option and the UFRIC or UFRICBBC user subroutine are used, friction data can be
skipped, but the friction type must be identified.
If the 4-node patch option for the definition of rigid surface and the DIGEOM user subroutine are used,
the coordinates of the patches can be skipped.


Frequency for writing beam-to-beam contact location mfd-files 13th field 2nd data line
Main Index
656 CONTACT (3-D)
a red asterisk (*).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
16-20 4th I Friction
type:
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb Friction
26-30 6th I Maximum of separations allowed in each increment. Default is 9999.
NON AUTO).
procedure.
Enter 2 for adaptive time stepping procedure.
Main Index
CONTACT (3-D) 657
Format
Data
Enter 3 to not reset NCYCLE = 0; this speeds up the solution but might
result in instabilities (not relevant for iterative penetration check).
When 1 is entered, if a node which was in contact at the end of the
previous increment has a force greater than the separation force, the node
next increment.
When 3 is entered, both (1) and (2) above is in effect.
(ISH).
shell thickness
shell thickness
thickness
51-55 11th I Enter 0 (default) for full printout of the rigid surface geometry.
stress is calculated as a force divided by an equivalent area. If the
contact normal stress on a node in contact exceeds the threshold,
the node separates.
Main Index
658 CONTACT (3-D)
Format
Data
stress is calculated as a force divided by an equivalent area. If the
contact normal stress on a node in contact exceeds the threshold
times the maximum contact normal stress, the node separates.
the node separates.
The default value is 0. Notice that for true quadratic contact, only
stress-based separation (2 or 4) can be used.
61-65 13th I Enter 1 to activate beam-to-beam contact.
Enter 1+100*FREQ to activate beam-to-beam contact and write Mentat
mfd-files with the given frequency that contain line segments connecting
the beam-to-beam contact locations of touching beam elements.
quadratic elements:
a file called jid.conmpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
Main Index
CONTACT (3-D) 659
Format
Data
3rd data block
Default is 1.0.
Default is 10-6.
Leave it blank if you want Marc to calculate it.
Defaults to 1.05
71-80 8th F For stick-slip model and bilinear models, enter the friction force tolerance (e).
Defaults to 0.05.
user-defined.
4th data block
6-10 2nd I Number of sets of body entities, NSURGN, to be input for this rigid body.
Enter 0 if deformable body.
Main Index
660 CONTACT (3-D)
Format
Data
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if body is a symmetry plane.
contact is used.
Note that in this case, results are dependent upon the order in which
with global adaptive meshing.
is used.
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if analytic form is to be used. This is required if
trimmed NURBS are entered.
center of rotation.
The load controlled body node(s) may have FIXED DISP/POINT LOAD
or connections with environment/other structures using the
SPRINGS option.
Main Index
CONTACT (3-D) 661
Format
Data
Both nodes of a load-controlled body may use the TRANSFORMATION or
COORD SYSTEM option to allow for movement in the user-defined
directions. Note also that it is not necessary for the user-defined directions
at the nodes to be identical to each other.
1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
5th data block
Default = 0.0.
Default = 0.0.
Default = 1.0.
6th data block
7th data block
Main Index
662 CONTACT (3-D)
Format
Data
rotation.
71-80* 8th F Friction coefficient.
8th data block
21-30* 3rd F Contact heat transfer coefficient ( H CT ).
41-50* 5th F Enter the convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H CV ).
51-60* 6th F Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H NC ).
61-70* 7th F Enter the exponent associated with natural convection ( B NC ).
71-80* 8th F Enter the surface emissivity for either near field behavior or radiation
to environment ( ε ).
9th data block
1-10* 1st F Enter the separation distance dependent heat transfer file coefficient
( H BL ).
1. If separation distances ( S ) is less than ERROR , bodies are in contact q = H CT ( T B – T A ) .
2. If separation distance ( S ) is greater than E R R OR , but less than DQ NE A R , and DQ NE A R is

defined in the CONTACT TABLE option.
B NC
q = H CV ( T B – T A ) + H NC ( T B – T A ) + σε ( T B4 – T A4 )
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛⎝ 1 – --------------------------⎞⎠ + H BL -------------------------- ⎬ T B – T A
S S
⎩ D QNE A R DQ NEAR ⎭
The last term is included only when H BL is not zero.

The Stefan Boltzmann constant ( σ ) is entered via the PARAMETERS model definition option.
Main Index
CONTACT (3-D) 663
Format
Data
3. If separation distance S is greater than DQ NEAR or ERROR if DQ NEAR is not defined, then
convection and radiation to the environment occurs.
4 4
q = H CVE ( T SINK – T A ) + σε ( T SINK – T A )
10th data block

21-30* 3rd F Contact electrical transfer coefficient.
11th data block
1-
1-10 1st F ---- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
1-
c1

12a data block
12b data block
(JPOINT2).
Main Index
664 CONTACT (3-D)
Format
Data
13b data block
12c data block
generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2
(NDIV1).
21-25 5th I Number of subdivisions along the second (circumference) direction
(NDIV2).
13c data block
14c data block
Main Index
CONTACT (3-D) 665
Format
Data
12d data block
13d data block
12e data block
6-10 2nd I Number of 4-node patches to be read (which makes the entire surface)
NSEG.
13e data block
Main Index
666 CONTACT (3-D)
Format
Data
14e data block
12f data block
13f data block
12g data block
13g data block
Main Index
CONTACT (3-D) 667
Format
Data
14g data block
15g data block
16g data block
17g data block
18g data block
The 19g data block is repeated NPTU + NORU times for knot vectors.
19g data block
12h data block
13h data block
Main Index
668 CONTACT (3-D)
Format
Data
surface.
12i data block
13i data block
Main Index
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition) 669
Define Contact Table
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition) Define Contact Table
Description
This option overrides information provided on the CONTACT option to allow the user to give more
detailed information concerning the interaction of the bodies. In particular, this option allows you to
specify which bodies contact which other bodies, and what is their behavior after contact occurs.
If this option is not included, the default for contact analysis is that every body detects the possibility of
contact with all other bodies, and itself if it is a flexible body. When the CONTACT TABLE option is
entered, the default of detection for every body is overridden. Instead, you specify the relationship of
detection between bodies for contact. The touching body does not contact itself unless you request it. This
is useful for deactivating or activating bodies to either reduce computational costs, or because the
physical process (such as manufacturing) involves multiple stages with different body interactions.
Whenever the touched body is a flexible one, by default, the capability of double-sided contact is applied
between the contacting bodies. This can be switched off by selecting single-sided contact on the
CONTACT option or by setting the searching order in the CONTACT TABLE option. A positive value of
the interference closure implies that there is an overlap between the bodies; a negative value implies that
a gap exists.
In addition, you can invoke the glue option, delayed slide off a deformable body, and stress-free
initial contact.
In the glue option, when a node contacts a rigid body, the relative tangential displacement is zero. When
a node contacts a deformable body, all the translational degrees of freedom are tied.
By default, if a node slides off the boundary of a deformable body at a sharp corner by a distance more
than the contact tolerance, contact between the node and the contacted body is lost. By invoking the
delayed sliding off option, the tangential contact tolerance is increased by a user-defined value.
In any static contact analysis, a node contacting a body is projected onto the contacted segment of this
body. Due to inaccuracies in the finite element model, this might introduce undesired stress changes,
since an overlap or a gap between the node and the contacted segment will be closed. The option for
stress-free initial contact forces a change of the coordinates of a node contacting a deformable body, thus
avoiding the stress changes. In combination with the glue option, a similar effect can be obtained;
however, the overlap or gap remains.
The following control variables of contact between bodies can be modified throughout the table:
contact tolerance, separation threshold, friction coefficient, interference closure and contact heat
transfer and electrical coefficients. For an acoustic-solid analysis, you can also modify the reactive
boundary coefficients.
Main Index
670 CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition)
The near thermal contact option can only be invoked using the CONTACT TABLE option. In this case,
one must specify the distance at which near thermal contact occurs and the additional parameters to
control the thermal (and electrical) flux.
The previous value of those control variables is not overridden unless nonzero values are entered here.
Notes: This option should be placed after the CONTACT option.

In a restart analysis, if these values are to be changed, use the REAUTO option and specify
the CONTACT TABLE after the END OPTION.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CONTACT TABLE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of bodies to be input.
6-10 2nd I Enter the version number for reading the CONTACT TABLE block.
Enter 2 if the 5th, 8th, 9th, 16th, 17th, 18th, and 19th data blocks are to be
read to control contact, ungluing, and multiphysics. Default is 0.
The 3rd through the 22nd data blocks are entered once for each set of bodies to be input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the touching body number.
6-15 2nd F Enter the contact tolerance ( E R R OR ).
16-25 3rd F Enter the distance below which near thermal or electrical contact behavior
occurs ( DQ NE A R ). A 0 entered here indicates that near contact behavior
is not included.
56-65 7th F Enter 0 (default) if there is no additional constraint on the tangential
displacement when contact occurs. No constraints are placed on rotational
degrees of freedom.
Enter 1 to insure that there is no relative tangential displacement when the
node comes into contact. A possible relative normal displacement might
originate from an initial gap or overlap between the node and the
contacted body, as the node will be projected onto the contacted body.
Main Index
Format
Data
Enter 2 to insure that there is no relative tangential and normal
displacement when the node comes into contact. An existing initial gap or
overlap between the node and the contacted body is not removed, as the
node is not projected onto the contacted body.
Enter 3 to insure full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node
will be projected onto the contacted body.
will not be projected onto the contact body.
66-70 8th I Enter 0 (default) if search order is based upon first checking bodies with
lower body number versus bodies with higher body number.
Enter 1 to indicate that the searching order for deformable contact bodies
is from the touching body to the touched bodies on the 5th data block. This
might change the default order for deformable bodies, which is from
bodies with a lower number to bodies with a higher number.
Enter 2 to let the program decide which searching order is optimal for
deformable bodies. This order is set up such that searching is done starting
with the body having the smallest element edge. This option forces single-
sided contact between the touching and touched bodies: searching is done
only from one body to another and not the other way around.
71-75 9th I Enter 0 (default) if during initial contact, a projection onto the contact
surface induces a stress.
Enter 1 to modify the coordinates of a node in contact with a deformable
body so that stress-free initial contact can be obtained.
Enter 2 to extend the tangential error tolerance at sharp corners of
deformable bodies to delay sliding off a contacted segment.
Enter 3 to have both 1 and 2 active.
76-80 10th I Only relevant if the glue option is invoked and the separation force has not
been set.
Enter 0 (default) if a node should not separate.
Enter 1 to invoke the separation behavior procedure, as specified on the
12th field of the 2nd data block of the CONTACT option.
Enter 2 to invoke the breaking glue capability. A node will be released if
the break criterion is fulfilled. Then the node will do regular contact with
separation instead of being glued. The stress limits for this capability are
specified in the 8th data block below.
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the contact tolerance.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the near contact distance.
5th data block
Only required if version number is equal to 2.
1-5 1st I Enter the boundary description flag for the touching body (entered on the
3rd data block).
6-10 2nd I Enter the boundary description flag for the touched body (entered on the
18th data block).
The boundary description flag is given by A+10*B+1000*C, where parameter A is related to
continuum elements in a body, parameter B is related to shell elements in a body and parameter C is
related to beam elements and/or shell edges in a body. The possible values of these parameters and their
meaning are:
A = 1: the outside edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) of continuum elements are included in the
boundary description (default).
B = 1: both top and bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B = 2: only bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the
boundary description.
B = 3: only bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the
B = 4: only top faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B = 5: only top faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B = 6: both top and bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the
The default value of B depends on the parameter governing the normal
direction/thickness contribution of shell elements as entered on the
CONTACT option.
Note: The choice B = 6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only
meaningful for glued contact. If in such cases separation is allowed,
separated nodes will not come into contact anymore, unless a new
CONTACT TABLE is defined to reset the value of B.
C = 0: neither beam elements nor shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C = 1: beam elements are included in the boundary description (allowing for beam-to-
beam contact).
Main Index
Format
Data
C = 10: shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C = 11: both beam elements and shell edges are included in the boundary description.
If beam-to-beam contact is not activated on the CONTACT option, the default value
of C is 0, otherwise the default value is 1.
6th data block
Only required if a mechanical-displacement solution is obtained.
1-10 1st F Enter the contact separation threshold. The physical meaning of this
threshold (a force, a stress, or a fraction of the maximum contact normal
stress) depends on the separation flag entered on the 12th field of the 2nd
data block of the CONTACT option.
11-20 2nd F Enter the friction coefficient.
21-30 3rd F Enter the interference closure amount, normal to the contact surface.
31-40 4th F Enter the friction stress limit σ limit .
This entry is only used for friction type 6 (Coulomb friction using the
bilinear model). If the shear stress due to friction reaches this limit value,
then the applied friction force will be reduced so that the maximum
friction stress is given by min ( μ σ n ,σ limit ) , with μ the friction coefficient
and σ n the contact normal stress. Default for this entry is 1.e20.
41-50 5th F Enter the contact tolerance BIAS factor (0-1). This value will overrule the
BIAS factor entered on the 6th field of the 3rd data block of the
CONTACT option if nonzero.
51-60 6th F Enter the delayed slide off distance (this entry is only used if delayed slide
off has been activated by the 9th entry of the 3rd data block). When using
the delayed slide off option, a node sliding on a segment will slide off this
segment only if it passes the node (2-D) or edge (3-D) at a sharp corner
over a distance larger than the delayed slide off distance. By default, the
delayed slide off distance is related to the dimensions of the contacted
segment by a 20 percent increase of its isoparametric domain.
61-70 7th F Enter the hard-soft ratio (this entry is only used if double-sided contact
with automatic constraint optimization is used, as defined on the 4th data
block of the CONTACT option). The hard-soft ratio can be used by the
program if there is a significant difference in the (average) stiffness of the
contact bodies (expressed by the trace of the initial stress-strain law). If
the ratio of the stiffnesses is larger than the hard-soft ratio, the nodes of
the softest body are the preferred slave nodes. By default, the hard-soft
ratio is 2.
Main Index
Format
Data
7th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the contact separation threshold.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the friction coefficient.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the interface closure amount.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the friction stress limit.
8th data block
Only required if version number is equal to 2 and a mechanical displacement solution is obtained.
1-10 1st F Normal stress to break glued contact (SN).
11-20 2nd F Tangential stress to break glued contact (ST).
21-30 3rd F Enter exponent for breaking normal stress term (m). Default = 2.
31-40 4th F Enter exponent for breaking tangential stress term (n). Default = 2.
m n
The glue breaks when ( σ N ⁄ SN ) + ( σ T ⁄ ST ) > 1
9th data block

1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with normal stress to break glued contact.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with tangential stress to break glued contact.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with exponent of normal stress term.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID associated with exponent of tangential stress term.
10th data block
Only required if heat transfer is included.
1-10 1st F Enter the contact heat transfer coefficient. (HCT)
11-20 2nd F Enter the convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior. (HCV)
21-30 3rd F Enter the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for near
behavior. (HNC)
31-40 4th F Enter the exponent associated with the natural convection for near
behavior. (BNC)
41-50 5th F Enter the surface emissivity. (ε)
51-60 6th F Enter the separation distance dependent thermal convection
coefficient. (HBL)
Main Index
Format
Data
11th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the contact heat transfer coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the heat transfer coefficient for near behavior.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the exponent associated with the natural convection
for near behavior.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the surface emissivity.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for the separation dependent thermal
convection coefficient.
12th data block
Only required for Joule heating.
1-10 1st F Enter the contact electrical coefficient (coupled Joule analysis only).
11-20 2nd F Enter the electrical transfer coefficient for near behavior.
21-30 3rd F Enter the separation distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient.
13th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the contact electrical coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the electrical transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with the separation distance dependent
electrical transfer coefficient.
14th data block
Only required for coupled mass diffusion analysis.
1-10 1st F Enter the contact mass transfer coefficient).
11-20 2nd F Enter the mass transfer coefficient for near behavior.
21-30 3rd F Enter the separation distance dependent mass diffusion coefficient.
Main Index
Format
Data
15th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the contact mass transfer coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the mass transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with the separation distance dependent mass
diffusion coefficient.
16th data block
Only required if version number is equal to 2 and electrostatic or piezoelectric analysis is included.
1-10 1st F Not used; enter 0.
17th data block
18th data block
Only required if magnetostatic analysis is included.
19th data block
20th data block
Only required for harmonic acoustic analysis.
1-
1-10 1st F Enter the ---- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
1-
11-20 2nd F Enter the ---- reactive boundary coefficient.
c1
Main Index
Format
Data
21st data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the 1
k1
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the 1

c1
22nd data block

Enter a list of touched bodies for which the touching body detects contact
with the parameters above.
Main Index
678 CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition)
CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition) Define Contact Table
input style.
Description
a gap exists.
initial contact.
Main Index
CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition) 679

Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Enter 2 if the 4th, 6th, 10th, and 11th data blocks are to be read to control
contact, ungluing, and multiphysics. Default is 0.
The 3rd through the 13th data blocks are entered once for each set of bodies to be input.
3rd data block
occurs ( DQ NE A R ). A zero entered here indicates that near contact
behavior is not included.
degrees of freedom.
Main Index
Format
Data
71-75 9th I Enter 0 (default) if, during initial contact, a projection onto the contact
been set.
Enter 0 if a node should not separate (default).
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
3rd data block).
11th data block).
meaning are:
A=1: the outside edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) of continuum elements are included in the
B=1: both top and bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=2: only bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=3: only bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=4: only top faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B=5: only top faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B=6: both top and bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
direction/thickness contribution of shell elements as entered on the CONTACT
option.
Note: The choice B=6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only
C=0: neither beam elements nor shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C=1: beam elements are included in the boundary description (allowing for beam-to-
beam contact).
C=10: shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C=11: both beam elements and shell edges are included in the boundary description.
If beam-to-beam contact is not activated on the CONTACT option, the default
value of C is 0, otherwise the default value is 1.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block
21-30 3rd F Enter the interference closure amount; normal to the contact surface.
friction stress is given by min ( μ σn ,σ limit ) , with μ the friction coefficient
ratio is 2.
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
m n
7th data block

1-10 1st F Enter the contact heat transfer coefficient ( H T ).
11-20 2nd F Enter the convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior ( H CV ).
21-30 3rd F Enter the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior
( H NC ).
behavior ( B NC ).
41-50 5th F Enter the surface emissivity ( ε ).
51-60 6th F Enter the separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient
( H BL ).
8th data block
21-30 3rd F Enter the separation distance dependent electrical coefficient.
9th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the contact mass transfer coefficient.
10th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
11th data block
12th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the 1
k1
11-20 2nd F Enter the 1

c1
13th data block

Main Index
SPLINE (Model Definition) 685
Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body
SPLINE (Model Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body

Definition)
Description
In order to improve the accuracy for a deformable-deformable contact analysis, the outer surface of a
contacted body can be described based on a spline (2-D) or Coons surface (3-D) description. The
analytical surface is then used to calculate the normal to the deformable body and the closest point
projection of a contacting node.
In 2-D, for a contacted segment, a spline is created based on:
tangent at first and second point of segment
position of first and second point of segment
In 3-D, for a contacted segment, a Coons surface is created based on:
tangent vectors at corner points of segment
position of corner points of segment
zero twist vectors
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word SPLINE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of deformable bodies for which the spline description
must be applied.
6-10 2nd I Enter the increment frequency of writing the spline representation in Marc
Mentat model files, called jid_spline_inc.mfd, where inc is the
increment number. These files can be used to visualize the spline
description and can be merged to the post file during post processing.
Default is zero, so that no additional files are generated.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each deformable body with a spline description.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I For 3-D analyses only: enter 1 to enforce C0-continuity at edges where the
normal vector to the outer contour of the structure shows a discontinuity
(also see the 4th data block below).
Main Index
686 SPLINE (Model Definition)
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to automatically determine nodes (2-D) or edges (3-D) where the
normal vector to the outer contour of the structure shows a discontinuity.
16-25 4th F Used only if the 3rd entry of this data block is set to 1: enter the threshold
angle to decide if there is a normal vector discontinuity between two
adjacent segments of the contact body defined in the first entry of this data
block. The threshold angle should be between 0 and 90 degrees; the
default value is 60 degrees.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes defining nodes (2-D) or edges (3-D) where the
Notes: In 3-D, when there is a normal vector discontinuity at an
element edge, the corner nodes defining the edge must be
entered one after another.
If the automatic detection is activated using the 3rd data

block above, the nodes/edges with a normal vector
discontinuity found by the program will be added to the list
defined here.
As an example for the 2-D contact body below, (which is the second body in the model and the only body
for which the SPLINE option is active), based on user-defined normal vector discontinuities the SPLINE
option would be:
spline
1
2
1 14 27 40
Finite Element Model Spline Representation
Main Index
SPLINE (Model Definition) 687
Alternatively, using the automatic detection the input would be:

spline
1
2 0 1 60.000
As an example for the 3-D contact body below (which is the second body in the model and the only body
for which the SPLINE option is active), based on user-defined normal vector discontinuities the SPLINE
option would be:
spline
1
2
26 27 93 95 31 26 103 93 27 28 95 97 28 c
29 97 99 29 30 99 101 30 32 101 105 33 31 c
107 103 32 34 105 109 35 33 111 107 34 36 109 c
113 38 37 117 115 37 35 115 111 39 38 119 117 c
40 39 121 119 36 41 113 123 41 40 123 121
Finite Element Model Coons Representation

Alternatively, using the automatic detection the input would be:
spline
1
2 0 1 60.000
Main Index
688 SPLINE (Model Definition)
The effect of enforcing C0-continuity can be seen in the figures below.
C0-discontinuous C0-continuous
Main Index
UMOTION 689
Invoke User Subroutine to Prescribe Surface Motion
UMOTION Invoke User Subroutine to Prescribe Surface Motion
Description
This option calls the MOTION user subroutine to define surface motions. See Marc Volume D: User
This option also calls the UGROWRIGID user subroutine to define a scale factor to be applied to the size
of the rigid bodies during the analysis as a function of time.
Note: This option should be placed after the CONTACT option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word UMOTION.
11-15 2nd I Enter a 2 if the UGROWRIGID user subroutine is to be called to grow
rigid bodies.
Main Index
690 UFRICTION
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface Friction Behavior
UFRICTION Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface Friction Behavior
Description
This option calls the UFRIC user subroutine to define friction coefficients. If beam-to-beam contact is
activated, the option also calls the UFRICBBC user subroutine to define friction coefficients for
beam-to-beam contact (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note: Use this option only in conjunction with the CONTACT option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-9 1st A Enter the word UFRICTION.
Main Index
UHTCOEF 691
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface/Environment Thermal Behavior
UHTCOEF Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface/Environment

Thermal Behavior
Description
This option activates the calls to user subroutines in contact analyses to influence the behavior between
the surface and the environment. For heat transfer, the UHTCOE user subroutine may be used to define
heat transfer coefficients (film coefficients) and sink temperatures of a free surface subjected to
convective or radiative heat transfer. The UVTCOE user subroutine is used to define the analogous
quantities for electrical contact in a coupled Joule heating analysis. In a diffusion analysis, the UMDCOE
user subroutine is used to define the mass transfer coefficient and the environment pressure. (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note: Use only in conjunction with the CONTACT option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 A Enter the word UHTCOEF.
Main Index
692 UHTCON
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface to Surface Behavior
UHTCON Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface to Surface Behavior
Description
This option activates the calls to user subroutines in contact analyses to influence the behavior between
surfaces. For heat transfer, the UHTCON user subroutine to define heat transfer coefficients (film
coefficients) between surfaces in contact. In Joule heating analysis, the UVTCON user subroutine is used
to define the analogous quantities for electrical contact.In a diffusion analysis, the UMDCON user
subroutine is used to define the analogous mass transfer coefficient (see Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note: Use only in conjunction with the CONTACT option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word UHTCON.
Main Index
CONTACT NODE (Model Definition) 693
Define Nodes for Surface Contact
CONTACT NODE (Model Definition) Define Nodes for Surface Contact
Description
This option is used to define which nodes in a body might potentially contact other surfaces. This option
can be used to reduce the computational cost if a body has many exterior nodes and it is known for which
nodes contact might occur. If this option is not used, all exterior surface nodes are checked for contact.
Notes: If this option is used and a node number is not explicitly listed, that node might penetrate
other bodies.
the CONTACT NODE option after the END OPTION.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words CONTACT NODE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of bodies for which exterior nodes are defined
3rd data block
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of nodes that are potential contact nodes.
Main Index
694 DEACT GLUE (Model Definition)
Define Deact Glue for Nodes in Glued Contact
DEACT GLUE (Model Definition) Define Deact Glue for Nodes in Glued Contact
Description
This option is used to define nodes of a glued interface that should have regular contact instead of glued
contact. The option has no effect if defined for a contact body which is not in glued contact. If two bodies
are glued together, this option can be used to specify certain nodes that should not be glued, for example
to define an initial crack. Unless single sided contact is used, it is best to identify nodes of both sides of
the contact interface to make sure that the selected part is not glued. The deact glue only influences the
contacting node.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words DEACT GLUE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of bodies for which deact glue nodes are defined.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of nodes that should have regular contact.
Main Index
EXCLUDE (Model Definition) 695
Ignore Contact with Certain Regions
EXCLUDE (Model Definition) Ignore Contact with Certain Regions
Description
For certain contact problems, you might wish to influence the decision regarding the deformable segment
a node contacts. By means of the EXCLUDE option, you can specify a list of nodes defining segments to
be excluded from the contacted bodies.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word EXCLUDE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of deformable bodies for which the EXCLUDE option
must be applied.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each deformable body with the EXCLUDE option.
3rd data block
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes defining segments to be excluded from contacted
bodies.
Notes: In 2-D, each segment must be defined by two nodes.
In 3-D, each segment must be defined by four nodes.
If, in a 3-D, a segment corresponds to a tetrahedral or a

collapsed hexahedral element, then the last two nodes of the
set of four should be identical.
Main Index
696
Main Index
Material Properties
Chapt Material Properties

er 3: This section describes the material properties that can be associated with the model. These consist of both
Mode the specification of the constitutive model used to describe the material behavior and the actual material
data necessary to represent the material.
l The ISOTROPIC model definition option can be used for the input of simple engineering material
Defini properties, including the fluid density in fluid-solid interaction problems. Additional model definition
options such as ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN, ARRUDBOYCE, GENT, FOAM,
tion and HYPOELASTIC, NLELAST, GASKET, SHAPE MEMORY, POWDER and SOIL are available for more
Optio complex material representations. When not using the table driven input, the STRAIN RATE option
allows the definition of a strain-rate dependent yield stress; the WORK HARD option allows the user to
ns specify work hardening slopes for elastic-plastic behavior. Variations of material properties with
temperatures such as Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, etc. can be entered through TEMPERATURE
EFFECTS, ORTHO TEMP, and TIME-TEMP options. When using the table driven input format, all these
behaviors can be defined with the TABLE input. Cracking data and failure criteria data can be entered
using CRACK DATA and FAIL DATA, respectively. Finally, the GAP DATA option can be used for the
input of gap width, frictional coefficient, etc. for the gap-friction element (element type 12 and 97).
Marc In addition, the COMPOSITE model definition option allows you to input layer information for a
Volume laminated composite material and the ORIENTATION option allows for the definition of the preferred
C: material directions. A material consisting of multiple components may be defined using the MIXTURE
Program option.
Input
A brief description of the material models which Marc has the capability of representing is given below.
For additional details, refer to Marc Volume A: User Information.
A. Elastic Behavior
1. Isotropic Elastic Compressible Material – This is a material represented by Hooke’s Law. This
material has a linear relation between stress and strain and its behavior is not path dependent. The
stress strain relations can be expressed as σ i j = λ δij ε kk + 2Gε i j
where λ, the Lame constant, and G, the shear modulus, can be expressed as:
λ= νE/((1+ν)(1-2ν)) and G = E/2(1+ν)
E and ν are the familiar Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio, respectively, and can be specified
using the ISOTROPIC model definition option.
2. Orthotropic Elastic Compressible Material – For an isotropic material, every plane is a plane of
symmetry and every direction is an axis of symmetry. An orthotropic material, however, has only
three mutually orthogonal planes of symmetry. With respect to a coordinate system parallel to
these planes, the constitutive law for this material is given by the following more general form of
Hooke’s Law:
Main Index
Material Properties
1 ν 21 ν 31
-------- – -------
- – -------- 0 0 0
E 11 E 22 E 33
ν 12 1 ν 32
⎧ ε 11 ⎫ – -------- -------- – -------- 0 0 0 ⎧ σ 11 ⎫
E 11 E 22 E 33
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎪ ε 22 ⎪ ν 13 ν 23 1 ⎪ σ 22 ⎪
⎪ ⎪ – -------
- – -------- -------- 0 0 0 ⎪ ⎪
⎪ ε 33 ⎪ E 11 E 22 E 33 ⎪ σ 33 ⎪
⎨ ⎬ = ⎨ ⎬
⎪ γ 12 ⎪ 1 ⎪ τ 12 ⎪
⎪ ⎪ 0 0 0 --------- 0 0 ⎪ ⎪
⎪ γ 23 ⎪ G 12 ⎪ τ 23 ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎩ γ 31 ⎭ 1- ⎩ τ 31 ⎭
0 0 0 0 -------- 0
G 23
1
0 0 0 0 0 ---------
G 31
Due to symmetry of this compliance matrix, E11 ν21 = E22 ν12, E22 ν32 = E33 ν23, and E33 ν13 =
E11 ν31. Using these relations, a general orthotropic material has nine independent constants: E11,
E22, E33, ν12, ν23, ν31, G12, G23, G31. These nine constants can be specified using the
ORTHOTROPIC option. Note that the inequalities E22 > ν232 E33, E11 > ν122 E22, and E33 > ν312
E11 must be satisfied in order for the orthotropic material to be stable. This is checked by Marc.
3. Anisotropic Elastic Compressible Material – This is a material represented by the generalized
Hookes’ Law. This material has a linear relation between stress and strain and its behavior is not
path dependent. The stress-strain relation can be expressed as:
σij = Cijkl ekl.
All of the values of C can be specified using either the ANELAS or HOOKLW user subroutine. As
an alternative, the user can supply the compliance matrix in the HOOKLW user subroutine. The
ANISOTROPIC model definition option is used to direct Marc to call these user subroutines when
necessary.
4. Isotropic Incompressible Material Mooney-Rivlin form – The nonlinear elastic material can be
represented by a certain class of strain energy functions. The form of this function is:
W = C10 (I1 -3) + C01 (I2 -3) + C11 (I1 -3)(I2 -3) + C20 (I1 -3)2 + C30 (I1 -3)3
where I1, I2 are the first and second invariants of the elastic strain. This strain energy function can
represent the Neo-Hookean materials (C01, C11, C20, and C30 are zero) or Mooney-Rivlin
materials (C11, C20, and C30 are zero). The material has a nonlinear relation between stress and
strain; hence, an incremental procedure must be performed. Alternative energy functions can be
specified via the UENERG user subroutine.
∂W
The stress-strain relations can be expressed as σ i j = --------- .
∂ε i j
The constants are supplied by you through the MOONEY option. Note that this material model can
be used to represent large-strain elastic materials.
Main Index
Material Properties
5. Isotropic Elastic Incompressible Material-Ogden Formulation - Another representation of

nonlinear elastic material is by the Ogden strain energy function. This model can be used to
represent large-strain behavior in elastic materials. For plane stress, displacement elements are
always used. The strain energy function is
μ –α ⁄ 3 α α α
W = ∑ -----n- J n ( λ 1 n + λ 2 n + λ 3 n – 3 ) + 4.5K ( J 1 / 3 – 1 ) 2
αn
n = 1
Note: There are two modes for performing rubber (Mooney, Ogden, Arruda Boyce, Gent)
analysis for plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric, or solid analysis.
This mode is set on the ELASTICITY or LARGE STRAIN parameters. If the total
Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements, in this case, must be of the
Herrmann formulation. If the updated Lagrange formulation is invoked, the
elements can have a conventional displacement formulation.
6. Isotropic Incompressible Arruda-Boyce Model - An invariant based model simulating micro-

mechanical behavior of rubber elasticity.
2 3 4 5
W = nk θ --- ( I 1 – 3 ) + ---------- ⎛ I – 9⎞ + ------------------2- ⎛ I – 27⎞ + ------------------3- ⎛ I – 81⎞ + ------------------------4- ⎛ I – 243⎞
1 1 11 19 519
2 20 N ⎝ 1 ⎠
1050N 1
⎝ ⎠
7000N 1
⎝ ⎠
673750N 1
⎝ ⎠
7. Isotropic Incompressible Gent Model - An invariant based model simulating micro-mechanical

behavior of rubber elasticity.
E ⎛ I1 – 3 ⎞
W = – --- ( I m – 3 ) log ⎜ 1 – ---------------⎟
6 ⎝ I m – 3⎠
8. Isotropic Elastic Foam Material - This nonlinear elastic material has the characteristic that it can
have both large strain deviatoric and volumetric behavior. The material model is used in
conjunction with the displacement elements. The strain energy function is
μ α α α μ β
W = ∑ -----n- ( λ 1 n + λ 2 n + λ 3 n – 3 ) + ∑ -----n ⎛ 1 – J n⎞
αn βn ⎝ ⎠
n =1 n=1
Conventional displacement based elements are always used with the foam material model.
9. Generalized Isotropic Hyperelastic Materials - Generalized strain energy functions which include
the above mentioned Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, Gent models and foam model as
special cases can be defined using the UELASTOMER user subroutine. The MOONEY model
definition option directs Marc to call UELASTOMER for strain-invariant-based energy functions
with volumetric-deviatoric split. The OGDEN model definition option directs Marc to call
UELASTOMER for principal-stretch-based energy functions with volumetric-deviatoric split. The
FOAM model definition option activates UELASTOMER for generalized compressible foam
models of both the invariant-based and the principal-stretch-based.
Main Index
Material Properties
10. General Anisotropic Nonlinear Elastic Material – This can be represented by the hypoelastic
material model. The material has a nonlinear relation between stress and strain; hence, an
incremental procedure must be performed. The stress-strain relation can be expressed as
· ·
σ i j = C ij kl ε + g ij where Cijkl and gij are functions of elastic strain and temperature. The
HYPOELASTIC model definition option should be used to direct Marc to call the HYPELA2 user
subroutine when necessary or to define the hypoelastic material data.
11. Predefined Nonlinear Elastic Materials – The NLELAST option may be used to specify that the
model has nonlinear material behavior of a type that has been implemented in Marc. These models
may be summarized as follows:
a. Nonlinear equivalent stress-equivalent strain representation
b. Young’s modulus function of strain invariants
c. Principal strain-based model
d. Linear elastic with tension/compression limits
e. Bi-modulus linear elastic with tension/compression limits
f. Orthotropic nonlinear
The table driven input method must be used with this option. For further details, see Marc Volume
A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 3: Data Entry, Table Driven Input.
B. Elastic-Plastic Behavior
Elastic-plastic material can be described using a variety of models. The differentiation between these
models is due to:
a. the inclusion or exclusion of elastic effects;
b. the yield function;
c. the flow rule, and
d. the hardening rule.
1. Rigid Plastic Material – This is the only material model which excludes the elastic strains. The
capability is based on the iteration for the velocity field in an incompressible, non-Newtonian
·
fluid. The nonlinear stress-strain relation can be expressed as S i j = G ( ε ) ε ij . Note that as the
material is incompressible, a traction boundary condition must be specified; otherwise the stress
field is only known to an arbitrary hydrostatic pressure. Only the yield stress need be entered.
2. Elastic-Perfectly-Plastic Material – This is a material which behaves elastically until it reaches the
yield stress. The material has no ability to support additional load (in a uniaxial sense) upon yield.
The material has a nonlinear relation between the stress rate and strain rate and is path dependent.
You need only specify the elastic constants and the yield stress. Marc uses the von Mises yield
function and the associated flow law.
Main Index
Material Properties
3. Elastic-Plastic Isotropic-Hardening Material – This is a model which behaves elastically until it

reaches the yield stress. After yielding the material strains or work hardens according to the
isotropic model. The yield surface uniformly expands in all directions with increasing equivalent
plastic strain. The additional information necessary to define the rate of growth of the yield
surface is prescribed through the WORK HARD or TABLE option.
Four new hardening models have been added for modeling the hardening behavior.
m ·n
Power Law Model – σy = A ( εo + ε ) + B ε
m ·n
Rate Power Law Model – σy = A ε ε + B
· 1⁄n
Kumar model – σ = B 0∗ sinh
–1 ⎛ --ε-⎞ e
Q ⁄ ( nRT )
⎝ A⎠
n ·
ρ ε ⎞⎞ ⎛ T – T room m
Johnson-Cook model – σ y = ⎛ A + B ε ⎞ ⎛ 1 + C ln ⎛ ----
- 1 – ⎛ ---------------------------------⎞ ⎞
⎝ ⎠⎝ ⎝ ε ⎠⎠ ⎝
· ⎝ T melt – T room⎠ ⎠
0
4. Elastic-Plastic Kinematic-Hardening Material – This is a material whose yield surface behavior

is governed by the kinematic hardening model. In this model, the yield surface translates in stress
space depending upon the change in plastic strain. The rate of translation is prescribed through
the WORK HARD or TABLE option. This option is set through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC
or ANISOTROPIC model definition option.
5. Elastic-Plastic Combined-Hardening Material – This is a material whose yield surface behavior
is governed by a combination of both the isotropic and kinematic hardening models. That is, the
yield surface both expands in size and shifts in space. This behavior is given through the WORK
HARD or TABLE option. This option is set through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or
ANISOTROPIC model definition option.
6. Elastic-Plastic-ORNL Hardening – This is a model whose yield surface is governed by the ORNL
constitutive theory. This model also allows plastic creep interaction. This option is set through the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC model definition option.
7. The Chaboche model is a combined isotropic/kinematic hardening model.
8. Anisotropic Yield Surface – It is also possible to use the anisotropic yield function of Hill or
Barlat. For 3-D models, these yield surfaces are noncircular when observed in deviatoric stress
space. These anisotropic yield functions may be used in conjunction with isotropic, orthotropic,
or anisotropic elasticity. In addition, the yield function can be dependent upon the strain rate; this
can be specified by using the STRAIN RATE or TABLE option.
9. Elastic-Plastic Material with Mohr-Coulomb Yield Surface – is a model which allows the
representation of materials in which the yield surface is dependent on the hydrostatic stress. It is
appropriate for modeling soils. The yield function dependence on the shear stress is given using
the WORK HARD or TABLE option; the dependence on the hydrostatic stress is given in the
ISOTROPIC option. This option is set through the ISOTROPIC model definition option.
10. The yield surface can also be modified based upon the Gurson model for void damage. In this
model, a modified von Mises criteria, with hydrostatic stress and void dependency, is used. The
DAMAGE option is used to activate this model.
Main Index
Material Properties
11. A special viscoplastic model for powder materials can be entered through the POWDER option.
In this model, the material properties are also dependent on the relative density of the material.
These materials are always assumed to be isotropic.
12. A general viscoplastic option is available for materials that are modeled using unified creep-
plasticity rules. In this procedure, the elastic properties are defined in either the ISOTROPIC or
ORTHOTROPIC option and the inelastic properties are provided through the UVSCPL user
subroutine.
13. Superplastic material behavior can be modeled using Power Law and Rate Power Law defined in
ISOTROPIC model definition option.
C. Temperature Dependent Material Properties

All of the parameters (except density) necessary to represent the material properties can be given as a
function of temperature. These effects are specified using the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, ORTHO
TEMP or TABLE option.
D. Relative Density Dependent Material Properties

In powder materials, the materials can be given as a function of the relative density where a relative
density of 1.0 implies a fully compacted material. This data is entered through the DENSITY EFFECTS
option.
E. Low Tension Material

In addition to using the ISOTROPIC model definition option for the input of Young’s modulus, Poisson’s
ratio, yield stress, etc., the CRACK DATA model definition option must be used for the specification of
critical cracking stress, tension-softening modulus, crushing strain and shear retention factor. These data
can be alternatively specified by the UCRACK and TENSOF user subroutines. Detailed discussion on low
tension material can be found in Marc Volume A: User Information.
F. Soil Materials
When performing a coupled fluid-soil analysis, the soil material can be modeled either as a linear elastic
material, a nonlinear elastic material or using the modified CAM-CLAY model.
G. Material Dependent Failure Criteria

Ten failure criteria are available in Marc. They are maximum stress, maximum strain, Tsai-Wu, Hoffman,
Hill, Puck, and three variations of the Hashin failure criteria. Detailed discussion on failure criteria can
be found in Marc Volume A: User Information. During each analysis, up to three fail criteria can be
selected; failure indices are calculated and printed for every integration point. The model definition
option FAIL DATA (or user subroutine UFAIL) is used for the input of failure criteria data.
Main Index
Material Properties
H. Characterization of Gap Elements

The GAP DATA model definition option allows for the input of gap closure distance, gap elastic stiffness,
contact coefficient of friction and momentum ratio. Detailed discussion on gap elements (elements 12
and 97) can be found in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
I. Laminated Composite
A laminated composite is a “material” made of several thin layers of separate materials with different
material behavior, layer thicknesses, and orientations from one layer to the next. To model laminated
composite plates, shells, or beams with Marc, use the COMPOSITE option. In this option, three quantities
are specified on a layer-by-layer basis: material identification number, layer thickness, and ply angle. The
entire set of data (a “composite group”) is then associated with a list of elements. For each individual
layer, all of the above mentioned constitutive laws can be used with the exception of the low tension
material. The layer thickness can be constant or variable (in the case of variable total thickness elements),
and the ply angle can change from one layer to the next. The orientation of the 0 ply angle within each
element is defined in the ORIENTATION option. These elements are used in conjunction with shell
elements, composite continuum elements, or the solid shell element. For more information on the specific
assumptions employed by the COMPOSITE option, see Marc Volume A: User Information.
J. Material Preferred Direction

Every element type in Marc has a default orientation (that is, a default coordinate system) within which
element stress-strain calculations take place. This system is also assumed to be the coordinate system of
material symmetry. This is especially important for nonisotropic materials (orthotropic, anisotropic, or
composite materials). With the ORIENTATION option, you specify the orientation of the material axes of
symmetry (or the 0 ply angle line, if composite) in one of five different ways: 1) as a specific angle offset
from an element edge, 2) as a specific angle offset from the line created by two intersecting planes, 3) as
a particular coordinate system specified by user-supplied unit vectors, 4) by referencing a coordinate
system defined by the COORD SYSTEM option, or 5) as specified by the ORIENT user subroutine. For
more information on these options, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
K. Material Property (Element) Coordinate Systems in Marc

When defining material properties in Marc, you should be aware of the three coordinate systems used by
Marc. They are:
Global Coordinate System

The material data supplied in the ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC options are always considered to be
defined with respect to the material principal axes of symmetry.
For continuum problems (that is, those using 2-D or 3-D solid elements), this coordinate system is
aligned (by default) with the global xyz coordinate system. (For truss, beam and shell problems, see Marc
(or Local) Coordinate System.) This is not normally a problem for isotropic materials since every
Main Index
Material Properties
direction is then a principal direction. For orthotropic materials, however, the material principal
coordinates are seldom aligned with the global coordinates. For this reason, a second coordinate system
is needed.
User-defined (or “preferred”) Coordinate System

If the material principal axes of symmetry are not aligned with the global coordinate system, a second
coordinate system is used. This is the user-defined “preferred” coordinate system. This coordinate system
is usually taken to be coincident with the material principal coordinates. The orientation of the preferred
coordinate system and, hence, of the material principal axes, is defined by the ORIENTATION option on
an element-by-element basis. In this way, you can completely define through the input file, the material
data and orientation of a general orthotropic material.
Marc (or Local) Coordinate System

For truss, beam, and shell problems, the material principal axes of symmetry are aligned (by default) with
special local element dependent coordinate systems. For example, for shell element 72, these local
coordinates are the ṽ 1 ṽ 2 ṽ 3 surface coordinates so that material property data are assumed to begin with
respect to these ṽ 1 ṽ 2 ṽ 3 coordinates. For isotropic materials, this is not normally a problem. For
orthotropic materials, the material principal axes cannot be aligned with the ṽ 1 ṽ 2 ṽ 3 axes. As in
continuum problems, the ORIENTATION option is used to define a second set of preferred coordinates.
This allows you to arbitrarily orient orthotropic materials in shells with local coordinates.
Composite Shells
In composite shells, the orientation of the materials in each shell layer can vary from layer to layer. In
this case, the ORIENTATION option is used to locate the 00 ply angle direction in the shell surface. (If the
ORIENTATION option is omitted, the 00 ply angle direction coincides with the ṽ 1 axis. See previous
section.) For each layer, additional ply angle offsets from this 00 ply angle direction are given in the
COMPOSITE option. This allows you to arbitrarily orient an arbitrary composite layup in shells with
local coordinates.
Numerical Procedure for LARGE STRAIN

The Tables 3-12 and 3-13 use these keywords:
A – Additive strain rate decomposition

M – Multiplicative strain rate decomposition
TL – Total Lagrange
UL – Updated Lagrange
SS – Small Strain
LS – Large Strain (logarithmic)
GL – Green-Lagrange
Main Index
Material Properties
Table 3-12 Influence of LARGE STRAIN, 1 on Numerical Procedure

Plane strain, Plane strain,
Axisymmetric Axisymmetric,
Truss, Beam, , Solid - Solid -
Plane stress, Displacement Herrmann
Material Option Suboption 1 Suboption 2 Membrane, Shell Based Based
ISOTROPIC ELASTIC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A TL -GL
VON MISES ISOTROPIC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A UL-LS-M
KINEMATIC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
COMBINED UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
CHABOCHE UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
HILL UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
BARLAT UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
LIN MOHRC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
PBL MOHRC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
BUY MOHRC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
ORNL UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
GEN-PLAST UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
VISCO-PLAS UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
RIGID SS (membranes) SS-UL SS-UL
IMPL-CREEP UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
ORTHOTROPIC ELASTIC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A TL -GL

VON MISES ISOTROPIC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
ANISOTROPIC ELASTIC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A TL -GL

Notes: If cracking requested on ISOTROPIC option, then it always uses UL-LS-A, and Herrmann elements
are not supported.
If Gurson damage model requested on DAMAGE then it always uses UL-LS-A, and Herrmann
elements are not supported
Main Index
Material Properties
Table 3-12 Influence of LARGE STRAIN, 1 on Numerical Procedure (continued)

NLELAST Nastran UL-LS UL-LS UL-LS

Invariant UL-LS UL-LS UL-LS
Principal strain UL-LS UL-LS N/A
Linear elastic w /limit UL-LS UL-LS UL-LS
Bi-modulus w/limit UL-LS UL-LS UL-LS
orthotropic nonlin. UL-LS UL-LS N/A
HYPOELASTIC UL-LS UL-LS UL-LS
MOONEY TL -GL UL - LS UL - LS
ARRUDA-BOYCE TL -GL UL - LS UL - LS
GENT TL -GL UL - LS UL - LS
OGDEN TL -GL UL - LS UL - LS
FOAM TL -GL UL - LS N/A

are not supported.
Main Index
Material Properties
Table 3-12 Influence of LARGE STRAIN, 1 on Numerical Procedure (continued)

GASKET N/A UL - LS N/A
SHAPE MEMORY THERMO-MECH UL - LS -A UL - LS -A N/A

AURICCHIO N/A UL - LS -M N/A
COMPOSITE UL - LS - no finite UL -LS N/A
POWDER N/A UL -LS-A N/A
SOIL N/A UL - LS - A N/A
COHESIVE N/A UL-LS N/A
GASKET N/A UL-LS N/A

are not supported.
Main Index
Material Properties
Table 3-13 Influence LARGE STRAIN, 2 on Numerical Procedure

ISOTROPIC ELASTIC UL - LS - M UL - LS - M TL - GL
VON MISES ISOTROPIC UL - LS - M UL - LS - M UL-LS-M
CHABOCHE UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
LIN MOHRC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
PBL MOHRC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
BUY MOHRC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
GEN-PLAST UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
RIGID SS (membranes) SS-UL SS-UL
IMPL-CREEP UL - LS - A UL - LS - A N/A
ORTHOTROIC ELASTIC UL - LS UL - LS TL - GL
are not supported.
Main Index
Material Properties
Table 3-13 Influence LARGE STRAIN, 2 on Numerical Procedure (continued)

ANISOTROPIC ELASTIC UL - LS - A UL - LS - A TL - GL
NLELAST Nastran UL-LS UL-LS UL - LS

Invariant UL-LS UL-LS UL - LS
Principal strain UL-LS UL-LS N/A
Linear elastic w /limit UL-LS UL-LS UL - LS
Bi-modulus w/limit UL-LS UL-LS UL - LS
orthotropic nonlin. UL-LS UL-LS N/A
HYPOELASTIC UL-LS UL-LS UL-LS
MOONEY TL -GL UL-LS UL-LS
ARRUDA-BOYCE TL -GL UL-LS UL-LS
GENT TL -GL UL-LS UL-LS
OGDEN TL -GL UL-LS UL-LS
are not supported.
Main Index
Material Properties
Table 3-13 Influence LARGE STRAIN, 2 on Numerical Procedure (continued)

FOAM TL -GL UL-LS N/A
GASKET N/A UL - LS N/A
SHAPE MEMORY THERMO-MECH UL - LS -A UL - LS -A N/A

AURICCHIO N/A UL - LS -M N/A
COMPOSITE UL - LS - no finite UL-LS N/A
POWDER N/A UL -LS-A N/A
SOIL N/A UL - LS - A N/A
COHESIVE N/A UL-LS N/A
GASKET N/A UL-LS N/A
are not supported.
Main Index
Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials
Stress)
Description
This option allows you to define material properties, a yield criterion, and a strain hardening law for an
isotropic material. You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Defaults for this option are von Mises yield criterion, isotropic strain hardening law (with a slope of 0.0),
and an equivalent yield stress of 1020. Therefore, the default is an elastic nonyielding isotropic material.
See Tables 3-12 and 3-13 to determine procedure used when the LARGE STRAIN parameter is invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ISOTROPIC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of isotropic material data to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3 through 15 are repeated as a set, once for each set of isotropic material defined.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.),for cross-referencing CREEP,
CRACK DATA, FAIL DATA, etc. and user subroutines.
6-15 2nd A Enter one of the following yield criteria:
ELASTIC – Purely elastic material
VON MISES – von Mises (Default)
HILL – Hill’s (1948) Yield.
BARLAT – Barlat’s (1991) Yield.
LIN MOHRC – Linear Mohr-Coulomb
PBL MOHRC – Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb
BUY MOHRC – Buyukozturk Concrete Model
NORM ORNL – Normal ORNL
Main Index
712 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress)
Format
Data
CRMO ORNL – 2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL
REVP ORNL – Reversed Plasticity ORNL
ARST ORNL – Full alpha reset ORNL.
GEN-PLAST – Generalized Plasticity Model
VISCO PLAS – Viscoplastic model through the UVSCPL
user subroutine
RIGID – Rigid-plastic material, no elasticity,
von Mises yield
IMPL CREEP – Implicit creep model, both plasticity and creep,
von Mises criterion.
16-25 3rd A Enter one of the following hardening rules:
ISOTROPIC – Isotropic hardening (Default)
KINEMATIC – Kinematic hardening
COMBINED – Combined (isotropic kinematic) hardening.
CHABOCHE – Nonlinear (in)viscid isotropic-kinematic
hardening.
POWER LAW –
RATE POWER LAW –
JOHNSON-COOK –
KUMAR –
For superplastic forming analyses (SPF), only POWER LAW is available
as hardening rule.
31-35 5th I Enter 1 to turn on concrete cracking.
36-40 6th I Enter 4 if Marc database is used for flow stress.
Enter 5 if MATILDA database is used.
Enter 6 if data read in SI-mm from input file.
Enter -6 if data read in SI-mm from database.
Enter 7 if data read in SI-m from input file.
Enter -7 if data read in SI-m from database.
Enter 8 if data read in US from input file.
Enter -8 if data read in US from database.
Main Index
Format
Data
41-45 7th I Number of viscoplastic parameters to be read through data block 5b or the
number of phases in this material.
46-57 8th A Enter the material name to cross-reference with material database.
4th data block
The data entered in the following blocks are the reference values that are used with tables or
are constants.
1-10 1st F Young’s modulus (Not required for RIGID).
11-20 2nd F Poisson’s ratio (Not required for RIGID).
21-30 3rd F Mass density (stress analysis).
31-40 4th F Coefficient of thermal expansion.
41-50 5th F Equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress. (For Mohr-Coulomb behavior,
this is at zero hydrostatic stress. For implicit viscoplasticity, back stress.)
51-60 6th F For ORNL yield criteria, equivalent 10th cycle tensile yield stress. (For
Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, α-β parameter.)
For von Mises, Hill, and Barlat criteria with combined hardening, enter the
kinematic hardening fraction (F: 0 to 1) F = 0: Pure isotropic hardening,
F = 1: pure kinematic hardening, 0 < F < 1: combined hardening. This is
only available if the PLASTICITY,4 parameter is used.
For Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, α-β parameter.
For implicit creep, equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.
61-70 7th F Enter the cost per unit volume.
71-80 8th F Enter the cost per unit mass.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for Young’s modulus.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for Poisson’s ratio.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for mass density.
16-20 4th I Table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
21-25 5th I Table ID for equivalent tensile yield stress.
26-30 6th I Table ID for ORNL 10th cycle yield stress or Mohr Coulomb
α-β parameter.
6a data block
Necessary only for Hill and Barlat’s yield criteria.
1-10 1st F YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat)
11-20 2nd F YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat)
Main Index
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F YRDIR3 (for Hill) or C2 (for Barlat)
31-40 4th F YRSHR1 (for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat)
51-60 6th F YRSHR3 (for Hill)
6aa data block
Note: In this release, table IDs are input but not used.
1-5 1st I Table ID for YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat)
6-10 2nd I Table ID for YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat)
11-15 3rd I Table ID for YRDIR3 (for Hill) or C2 (for Barlat)
16-20 4th I Table ID for YRSHR1 (for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat)
26-30 6th I Table ID for YRSHR3 (for Hill)
6b data block
The following blocks are only used for CHABOCHE hardening rule.
1-10 1st F R0 for isotropic hardening.
11-20 2nd F R∞ for isotropic hardening (Q0 in case of using plastic-strain-range
memorization, see 6c data block)
21-30 3rd F b coefficient for isotropic hardening.
31-40 4th F C coefficient for kinematic hardening.
41-50 5th F γ coefficient for kinematic hardening.
51-60 6th F K value for viscosity model.
61-70 7th F n coefficient for viscosity model.
6bb data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for R0 for isotropic hardening.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for R∞ for isotropic hardening (Q0 in case of using plastic-strain-
range memorization).
11-15 3rd I Table ID for b coefficient for isotropic hardening.
16-20 4th I Table ID for C coefficient for kinematic hardening.
21-25 5th I Table ID for γ coefficient for kinematic hardening.
Main Index
Format
Data
26-30 6th I Table ID for K value for viscosity model.
31-35 7th I Table ID for n coefficient for viscosity model.
6c data block
Necessary only for CHABOCHE hardening rule with plastic-strain-range memorization. Notice that if
no memorization is required, then provide a blank line.
1-10 1st F Qm coefficient for isotropic hardening.
11-20 2nd F μ coefficient for isotropic hardening.
21-30 3rd F η coefficient to introduce progressive memory.
6cc data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for Qm coefficient for isotropic hardening.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for μ coefficient for isotropic hardening.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for η coefficient to introduce progressive memory.
7th data block
Necessary only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis
1-10 1st F Thermal conductivity.
11-20 2nd F Specific heat.
21-30 3rd F Mass density (heat transfer analysis).
31-40 4th F Electrical resistance (Joule Analysis).
41-50 5th F Emissivity.
51-60 6th F Enter the enthalpy of formation.
61-70 7th F Enter the reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
8th data block
Necessary only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-5 1st I Table ID for thermal conductivity.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for specific heat.
16-20 4th I Table ID for electrical resistivity.
21-25 5th I Table ID for emissivity.
26-30 6th I Table ID for enthalpy of formation.
Main Index
Format
Data
9th data block
Necessary only in a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis.
1-10 1st F Permittivity constant.
10th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for permittivity constant.
11th data block
The following blocks are only used if viscoplastic material and the seventh field of data block 3 is
entered. Enter 8 fields per data line.
1-10 1st Enter the first viscoplastic parameter
11-20 2nd Enter the second viscoplastic parameter.
12a data block
The following two blocks (12a and 12b) are read in for Power Law or Rate Power Law model.
m ·n
m·n
Rate Power Law Model – σ y = Aε ε + B, σ 0
If the value is less than the minimum yield stress, the minimum yield stress is used.
1-10 1st F Enter coefficient A.
11-20 2nd F Enter exponent m.
21-30 3rd F Enter coefficient B.
31-40 4th F Enter exponent n.
41-50 5th F Enter σ0 for the Rate Power Law Model or ε0 for the Power Law Model.
1
-------------
m–1
ε 0 = ⎛ ---⎞
E
If 0 is entered, and σ0 = 0
⎝ A⎠
12b data block

1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the coefficient A.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the exponent m.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the coefficient B.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the exponent n.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the σ0 .
Main Index
Format
Data
The following blocks (13a and 13b) are read in for Kumar model only.
· 1⁄n
σ = B 0 sinh
–1 ⎛ ε----p-⎞ e
Q ⁄ ( nRT )
⎝ A⎠
B3
A is a constant or ln A = B 1 + B 2 ⁄ ε p
B3
n is a constant or n = B4 + B 5 ⁄ εp
The activation energy (Q) is specified in the MATERIAL DATA option.

The universal gas constant (R) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
13a data block
1-10 1st F Enter coefficient B0.
11-20 2nd F Enter coefficient A; if A = 0, then B1, B2, and B3 is used.
21-30 3rd F Enter B1.
31-40 4th F Enter B2.
51-55 6th I Enter the table ID for the coefficient B0.
56-60 7th I Enter the table ID for the coefficient A.
13b data block
1-10 1st E Enter coefficient n; if n = 0, then B4, B5, and B6 is used.
11-20 2nd E Enter B4.
21-30 3rd E Enter B5.
31-40 4th E Enter B6.
41-45 5th I Enter the table ID for the exponent n.
14th data block
The following block is read in for the Johnson-Cook model.
·
n ⎛ ⎛ ε p⎞ ⎞ ⎛ T – T room ⎞ m⎞
⎛ --------------------------------
σ y = ( A + B ε p ) ⎜ 1 + C ln ⎜ ----
· -⎟ ⎟ 1 – ⎝ T -
⎝ ⎝ε ⎠⎠ ⎝ m elt – T room
⎠ ⎠
0
where T is the current temperature, T melt is the material melt temperature, and T room is the ambient
· ·
temperature. ε p is the effective plastic strain, εp is the effective plastic strain rate and ε0 is the reference
strain rate. A, B, C, n, and m are constants.
Main Index
Format
Data
1-10 1st F Enter A.
11-20 2nd E Enter B.
21-30 3rd F Enter n.
31-40 4th F Enter C.
41-50 5th F Enter m (default is 1.0)
51-60 6th F Enter T melt .
61-70 7th F Enter T room .
71-80 8th F ·
Enter ε0 (default is 1.0s – 1 ).
15th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with this material. (Do not enter
composite elements which use this material in its layers.)
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (Stress) Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials
input style.
Description
isotropic material. You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS
model definition.
Defaults for this option are von Mises yield criterion, isotropic strain hardening law (with a slope of 0.0
if the WORK HARD model definition is omitted), and an equivalent yield stress of 1020. Therefore, the
default is an elastic nonyielding isotropic material.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Data blocks 3 through 12 are repeated as a set, once for each set of isotropic material defined.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.),for cross-referencing
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS and WORK HARD data.
VON MISES – von Mises (Default).
LIN MOHRC – Linear Mohr-Coulomb.
PBL MOHRC – Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb.
Main Index
720 ISOTROPIC (Stress)
Format
Data
BUY MOHRC – Buyukozturk Concrete Model.
NORM ORNL – Normal ORNL.
CRMO ORNL – 2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL.
REVP ORNL – Reversed Plasticity ORNL.
GEN-PLAST – Generalized Plasticity Model.
VISCO PLAS – Viscoplastic model through the UVSCPL user
subroutine.
RIGID – Rigid-plastic material, no elasticity, von Mises
yield.
IMPL CREEP – Implicit creep model, both plasticity and creep,
von Mises criterion.
ISOTROPIC – Isotropic hardening (Default).
KINEMATIC – Kinematic hardening.
COMBINED – Combined hardening (isotropic/kinematic).
CHABOCHE – Nonlinear (in)viscid isotropic-kinematic
hardening.
POWER LAW –
RATE POWER LAW –
JOHNSON-COOK –
KUMAR –
For superplastic forming analyses (SPF), only POWER LAW and RATE
POWER LAW are available as hardening rules.
31-35 5th I Enter 1 to turn on concrete cracking.
Main Index
Format
Data
41-45 7th I Number of viscoplastic parameters to be read through the 8th data block.
46-55 8th A Enter the material name to cross-reference with material data base for
temperature dependent properties, strain rate, and work hardening effects.
4th data block
The data entered in the following blocks should be the values at the lowest temperature expected during
an analysis, not necessarily at the stress-free temperature.
1-10 1st F Young’s modulus (Not required for RIGID).
11-20 2nd F Poisson’s ratio (Not required for RIGID).
21-30 3rd F Mass density (stress analysis).
41-50 5th F Equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.
For Mohr-Coulomb behavior, this is at zero hydrostatic stress.
For implicit creep, back stress.
51-60 6th F For ORNL yield criteria, equivalent 10th cycle tensile yield stress.
For Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, α-β parameter.
For implicit creep, equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.
5a data block
5b data block
Main Index
Format
Data
1-10 1st F R0 for isotropic hardening.
11-20 2nd F R∞ for isotropic hardening (Q0 in case of using plastic-strain-range
memorization, see 5c data block)
21-30 3rd F b coefficient for isotropic hardening.
31-40 4th F C coefficient for kinematic hardening.
41-50 5th F γ coefficient for kinematic hardening.
51-60 6th F K value for viscosity model.
61-70 7th F n coefficient for viscosity model.
5c data block
1-10 1st F Qm coefficient for isotropic hardening.
11-20 2nd F μ coefficient for isotropic hardening.
21-30 3rd F η coefficient to introduce progressive memory.
6th data block
31-40 4th F Resistivity (if Joule analysis)
7th data block
8th data block
The following blocks are only used if viscoplastic material and the seventh field of data block 3 is
greater than zero. Enter 8 fields per data line.
1-10 1st Enter the first viscoplastic parameter
11-20 2nd Enter the second viscoplastic parameter.
9th data block
The following block is read in for Power Law or Rate Power Law model.
m ·n
Main Index
Format
Data
m ·n
Rate Power Law Model – σ y = A ε ε + B, σ 0
If the value is less than the minimum yield stress, the minimum yield stress is used.
1-10 1st F Enter coefficient A.
11-20 2nd F Enter exponent m.
21-30 3rd F Enter coefficient B.
31-40 4th F Enter exponent n.
41-50 5th F Enter σ0 for the Rate Power Law Model or ε0 for the Power Law Model.
1
-------------
m–1
ε 0 = ⎛ ---⎞
E
If 0 is entered, and σ0 = 0
⎝ A⎠
The following blocks (10a and 10b) are read in for Kumar model only.
· 1⁄n
σ = B 0 sinh
–1 ⎛ ε----p-⎞ e
Q ⁄ ( nRT )
⎝ A⎠
B
3
A is a constant or ln A = B 1 + B 2 ⁄ ε p
B
3
n is a constant or n = B4 + B 5 ⁄ εp
The activation energy (Q) is specified in the MATERIAL DATA option.

The universal gas constant (R) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
10a data block
1-10 1st F Enter coefficient B0.
11-20 2nd F Enter coefficient A; if A = 0, then B1, B2, and B3 is used.
21-30 3rd F Enter B1.
10b data block
1-10 1st E Enter coefficient n; if n = 0, then B4, B5, and B6 is used.
11-20 2nd E Enter B4.
21-30 3rd E Enter B5.
31-40 4th E Enter B6.
Main Index
Format
Data
11th data block
The following block is read in for the Johnson-Cook model.
·
n ⎛ ⎛ ε p⎞ ⎞ ⎛ T – T room ⎞ m⎞
⎛ --------------------------------
σ y = ( A + B ε p ) ⎜ 1 + C ln ⎜ ----
· -⎟ ⎟ ⎝ 1 – ⎝ T -
⎝ ⎝ ε ⎠⎠ m elt – T room
⎠ ⎠
0
where T is the current temperature, T melt is the material melt temperature, and T room is the ambient
· ·
temperature. εp is the effective plastic strain, εp is the effective plastic strain rate and ε0 is the reference
strain rate. A, B, C, n, and m are constants.
1-10 1st F Enter A.
11-20 2nd E Enter B.
21-30 3rd F Enter n.
31-40 4th F Enter C.
41-50 5th F Enter m (default is 1.0)
51-60 6th F Enter T melt .
61-70 7th F Enter T room .
71-80 8th F ·
Enter ε0 (default is 1.0s – 1 ).
12th data block

Main Index
Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic Materials

Input - Mechanical)
Description
orthotropic material. You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the TABLE model definition option.
Defaults for this option are von Mises yield criterion, isotropic strain hardening law (with a slope of 0, if
the WORK HARD model definition is omitted), and an equivalent yield stress of 1020. Therefore, the
default is an elastic nonyielding orthotropic material.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ORTHOTROPIC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of orthotropic material data to follow.
Data blocks 3 through 17 are entered as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.); for cross-referencing
CREEP, FAIL DATA, etc., and user subroutines.
VON MISES – von Mises (Default)
CRMO ORNL – 2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL
Main Index
726 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
Format
Data
ARST ORNL – Full alpha reset ORNL
user subroutine.
ISOTROPIC – Isotropic hardening (Default)
COMBINED – Combined (isotropic/kinematic) hardening
26-30 4th I IANELS flag, enter 1 to call the ANELAS, HOOKLW ANPLAS, ANEXP,
ANKOND, and ORIENT user subroutines.
41-45 7th I Number of viscoplastic parameters to be read through data block 7b or the
number of phases in this material.
Notes: Since all material properties in an orthotropic material are independent, it is your
responsibility to enter all the data required to match the dimension of the stress-strain law of
the elements listed for this material (See Marc Volume B: Element Library, if necessary). No
defaults for this data are provided by Marc.
The data entered in the following data lines are the reference values that are used with tables
or are constants.
These values are with respect to the user coordinate (1, 2, 3) system.
In a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, the electrostatic material model defaults to isotropic
electrostatic behavior.
4th data block
1-10 1st F E11 – Young’s modulus.
11-20 2nd F E22 – Young’s modulus.
Main Index
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F E33 – Young’s modulus.
31-40 4th F ν12 – Poisson’s ratio.
61-70 7th F ρ – Mass density (stress analysis).
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for E11.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for E22.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for E33.
16-20 4th I Table ID for ν12.
31-35 7th I Table ID for mass density.
6th data block
1-10 1st F G12 – Shear modulus.
11-20 2nd F G23 – Shear modulus.
21-30 3rd F G31 – Shear modulus.
31-40 4th F α11 – Coefficients of thermal expansion.
7th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for G12.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for G23.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for G31.
16-20 4th I Table ID for α11.
Main Index
Format
Data
8th data block
1-10 1st F Equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress. Default: 1020. (For implicit
viscoplasticity, back stress.)
11-20 2nd F For ORNL, 10th cycle equivalent yield stress.
21-30 3rd F YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat).
30-40 4th F YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat).
41-50 5th F YRDIR3 (for Hill) or C2 (for Barlat).
51-60 6th F YRSHR1(for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat).
61-70 7th F YRSHR2 (for Hill) or C6 (for Barlat).
9th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for tensile yield stress.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for ORNL 10th cycle yield stress.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat).
16-20 4th I Table ID for YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat).
21-25 5th I Table ID for YRDIR3 (for Hill) or C2 (for Barlat).
26-30 6th I Table ID for YRSHR1 (for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat).
31-35 7th I Table ID for YRSHR2 (for Hill) or C6 (for Barlat).
36-40 8th I Table ID for YRSHR3 (for Hill).
10th data block
1-10 1st F K11 – Thermal conductivities.
11-20 2nd F K22 – Thermal conductivities.
21-30 3rd F K33 – Thermal conductivities.
31-40 4th F ρ – Mass density (heat transfer analysis).
41-50 5th F Specific heat
Main Index
Format
Data
51-60 6th F R11 – If Joule heating analysis, resistivity.
11th data block
Necessary only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis and the input format is 2 or greater.
1-5 1st I Table ID for K11.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for K22.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for K33.
21-25 5th I Table ID for specific heat.
26-30 6th I Table ID for R11.
12th data block
Necessary only if coupled thermal-stress.
1-10 1st F Emissivity
11-20 2nd F Enter the enthalpy of formation.
21-30 3rd F Enter the reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
13th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for emissivity.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for enthalpy of formation.
11-15 2nd I Table ID for reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
14th data block
Necessary only in a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis
1-10 1st F ε11 – Electrical permittivity.
11-20 2nd F ε22 – Electrical permittivity.
21-30 3rd F ε33 – Electrical permittivity.
Main Index
Format
Data
15th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for ε11 – Electrical permittivity.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for ε22 – Electrical permittivity.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for ε33 – Electrical permittivity.
16th data block
The following data blocks are only required if viscoplastic material and the seventh field, data block 3,
is entered. Enter 8 fields per block.
1-10 1st F Enter first viscoplastic parameter.
11-20 2nd F Enter second viscoplastic parameter.
17th data block
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical) Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic Materials
input style.
Description
orthotropic material. You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the ORTHO TEMP model definition.
Defaults for this option are von Mises yield criterion, isotropic strain hardening law (with a slope of 0. if
the WORK HARD model definition is omitted), and an equivalent yield stress of 1020. Therefore, the
default is an elastic nonyielding orthotropic material.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Data blocks 3-8 are entered as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.); for cross-referencing
ORTHO TEMP, WORK HARD data and user subroutines.
VON MISES – von Mises (Default).
NORM – Normal ORNL.
ORNL
CRMO ORNL – 2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL.
Main Index
732 ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical)
Format
Data
REVP ORNL – Reversed Plasticity ORNL.
user subroutine.
ISOTROPIC – Isotropic hardening (Default).
KINEMATIC – Kinematic hardening.
COMBINED – Combined hardening; (isotropic/kinematic).
26-30 4th I IANELS flag, enter 1 to call the ANELAS, HOOKLW, ANPLAS, ANEXP,
ANKOND, and ORIENT user subroutines.
41-45 7th I Number of viscoplastic parameters to be read through data block 7b.
temperature dependent properties, strain rate, and work hardening effects.
Notes: Since all material properties in an orthotropic material are independent, it is your
responsibility to enter all the data required to match the dimension of the stress-strain law of
the elements listed for this material (See Marc Volume B: Element Library, if necessary). No
The data entered in the following data lines should be the values at the lowest temperature
expected during an analysis, not necessarily at the stress-free temperature.
4th data block
5th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
1-10 1st F Equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress. Default: 1020. (For implicit
viscoplasticity, back stress.)
11-20 2nd F For ORNL, 10th cycle equivalent yield stress.
For von Mises, Hill, and Barlat criteria with combined hardening, enter
the kinematic hardening fraction (F: 0 to 1) F = 0: Pure isotropic
hardening, F = 1: pure kinematic hardening, 0 < F < 1: combined
hardening. This is only available if the PLASTICITY,4 parameter is used.
21-30 3rd F YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat)
30-40 4th F YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat)
41-50 5th F YRDIR3 (for Hill) or C2 (for Barlat)
51-60 6th F YRSHR1(for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat)
7th data block
Necessary only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis
51-60 6th F R11 – Resistivities (if Joule analysis).
Main Index
734 ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical)
Format
Data
7b data block
Necessary only if coupled and radiation analysis.
7c data block
1-10 1st F ε11 – Electric permittivity.
11-20 2nd F ε22 – Electric permittivity.
21-30 3rd F ε33 – Electric permittivity.
7d data block
The following data block is only required if viscoplastic material and the seventh field, data block 3, is
entered. Enter 8 fields per block.
1-10 1st F Enter first viscoplastic parameter.
11-20 2nd F Enter second viscoplastic parameter.
Note: Data block 7d is provided for possible future expansion. Implicit viscoplasticity (through the
UVSCPL user subroutine) or implicit creep is not currently supported for
orthotropic materials.
8th data block
composite elements which use this material in its layers.).
Main Index
Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis

Mechanical)
Description
A general temperature dependent orthotropic material model is available through the Marc input file by
the use of the ORTHOTROPIC and TABLE options. If a more general model is needed, you can supply
such a model through the ANELAS, HOOKLW, ANEXP, ANKOND, ANPLAS, or ORIENT user subroutines.
Two ways to request a call to these subroutines are shown below:
• Use the flag (3rd data block, fourth field) on the ORTHOTROPIC option to modify the material
data entered there.
• Use the ANISOTROPIC model definition option to call these subroutines.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ANISOTROPIC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of anisotropic material data sets to follow.
Data blocks 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are repeated as a set NSET times.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing CREEP,
FAIL DATA, etc., and user subroutines.
VON MISES – von Mises (default)
Main Index
736 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
Format
Data
CRMO ORNL – 2-1.3 Cr-Mo ORNL
ISOTROPIC – Isotropic hardening (default)
COMBINED – Combined hardening (isotropic/kinematic)
26-30 4th I Enter 1 if the ANELAS, ANEXP, ANPLAS, and HOOKLW user subroutines
are to be called.
Enter 2 if the anisotropic stress strain law, etc., is to be entered in data
blocks (6th data block).
4th data block
1-10 1st F Mass density (stress analysis).
11-20 2nd F Equivalent (von Mises) yield stress.
21-30 3rd F If ORNL yielding, 10th cycle yield stress.
31-40 4th F Mass density (heat transfer analysis).
41-50 5th F Specific Heat.
51-60 6th F Electrical resistance.
Main Index
Format
Data
61-70 7th F Cost of material per unit volume (optional).
71-80 8th F Cost of material per unit mass (optional).
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for mass density.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for equivalent yield stress.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for ORNL 10th cycle yield.
16-20 4th I Table ID for mass density (heat transfer).
26-30 6th I Table ID for electrical resistance.
Data blocks 6a to 6ee are only required if the fourth field of the 3rd data block is 2.
6a data block
1-10 1st F C11
11-20 2nd F C12
21-30 3rd F C13
31-40 4th F C14
41-50 5th F C15
51-60 6th F C16
61-70 7th F C22
71-80 8th F C23
6aa data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for C11
6-10 2nd I Table ID for C12
11-15 3rd I Table ID for C13
16-20 4th I Table ID for C14
6b data block
1-10 1st F C24
Main Index
Format
Data
11-20 2nd F C25
21-30 3rd F C26
31-40 4th F C33
41-50 5th F C34
51-60 6th F C35
61-70 7th F C36
71-80 8th F C44
6bb data block
6c data block
1-10 1st F C45
11-20 2nd F C46
21-30 3rd F C55
31-40 4th F C56
41-50 5th F C66
6cc data block
Main Index
Format
Data
Use only as many terms as are required for the element type chosen. All three (A, B, and C) blocks must
be used. For plane stress, only C11, C12, C13, C22, C24, C33 must be entered.
6d data block
1-10 1st F α11
11-20 2nd F α12
21-30 3rd F α13
31-40 4th F α22
41-50 5th F α23
51-60 6th F α33
6dd data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for α11
6-10 2nd I Table ID for α12
11-15 3rd I Table ID for α13
16-20 4th I Table ID for α22
6e data block
6ee data block
1-10 1st I Table ID for YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat)
11-20 2nd I Table ID for YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat)
21-30 3rd I Table ID for YRDIR3 (for Hill) or C2 (for Barlat)
51-60 6th I Table ID for YRSHR3 (for Hill)
Main Index
Format
Data
Data blocks 6f and 6ff are only required if the fourth field is a 2 in a coupled analysis.
6f data block
1-10 1st F K11
11-20 2nd F K12
21-30 3rd F K13
31-40 4th F K22
41-50 5th F K23
51-60 6th F K33
6ff data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for K11
6-10 2nd I Table ID for K12
11-15 3rd I Table ID for K13
16-20 4th I Table ID for K22
Data blocks 6g and 6gg are only required if the fourth field of the 3rd data block is a 2 and a Joule
heating analysis is being performed.
6g data block
1-10 1st F R11 – Resistivity if Joule heating.
11-20 2nd F R12 – Resistivity if Joule heating.
21-30 3rd F R13 – Resistivity if Joule heating.
31-40 4th F R22 – Resistivity if Joule heating.
6gg data block
1-5 1st I R11 – Table IDs if Joule heating.
6-10 2nd I R12 – Table IDs if Joule heating.
11-15 3rd I R13 – able IDs if Joule heating.
16-20 4th I R22 – Table IDs if Joule heating.
Main Index
Format
Data
7th data block
Main Index
742 ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical)
ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical) Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis
input style.
Description
A general temperature dependent orthotropic material model is available through the Marc input file by
the use of the ORTHOTROPIC and ORTHO TEMP options. If a more general model is needed, you can
supply such a model through the ANELAS, HOOKLW, ANEXP, ANKOND, ANPLAS, or ORIENT user
subroutines.
Two ways to request a call to these subroutines are shown below:
• Use the flag (3rd data block, fourth field) on the ORTHOTROPIC option to modify the material
data entered there.
• Use the ANISOTROPIC model definition option to call these subroutines.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of anisotropic material data sets to follow.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are repeated as a set NSET times.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing ORTHO
TEMP, WORK HARD data and user subroutines.
VON MISES – von Mises (default)
CRMO ORNL – 2-1.3 Cr-Mo ORNL
Main Index
Format
Data
ISOTROPIC – Isotropic hardening (default)
COMBINED – Combined hardening (isotropic/kinematic)
26-30 4th I Enter 1 if the ANELAS, ANEXP, ANPLAS, and HOOKLW user subroutines
are to be called.
Enter 2 if the anisotropic stress strain law, etc., is to be entered in data
blocks (4a, 4b, 4c, 4d, 4e, 4f).
4th data block
1-10 1st F Mass density (stress analysis)
11-20 2nd F Equivalent (von Mises) yield stress
21-30 3rd F If ORNL yielding, 10th cycle yield stress.
31-40 4th F Mass density (heat transfer analysis)
41-50 5th F Specific Heat
51-60 6th F Leave blank.
61-70 7th F Cost of material per unit volume (optional).
71-80 8th F Cost of material per unit mass (optional).
Data blocks 4a, 4b, and 4c used to define anisotropic elastic stress strain relation. Data block 4a only
required if the fourth field is a 2.
4a data block
1-10 1st F C11
11-20 2nd F C12
21-30 3rd F C13
31-40 4th F C14
41-50 5th F C15
Main Index
744 ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical)
Format
Data
51-60 6th F C16
61-70 7th F C22
71-80 8th F C23
Data block 4b only required if the fourth field is a 2.
4b data block
1-10 1st F C24
11-20 2nd F C25
21-30 3rd F C26
31-40 4th F C33
41-50 5th F C34
51-60 6th F C35
61-70 7th F C36
71-80 8th F C44
Data block 4c only required if the fourth field is a 2
4c data block
1-10 1st F C45
11-20 2nd F C46
21-30 3rd F C55
31-40 4th F C56
41-50 5th F C66
Use only as many terms as are required for the element type chosen. All three blocks must be used. For
plane stress, only C11, C12, C13, C22, C24, C33 must be entered.
Data block 4d is only required if the fourth field is a 2. It defines the anisotropic thermal
expansion coefficients.
4d data block
1-10 1st F α11
11-20 2nd F α12
21-30 3rd F α13
Main Index
Format
Data
31-40 4th F α22
41-50 5th F α23
51-60 6th F α33
Data block 4e is only required if the fourth field is a 2. It defines the anisotropic plasticity.
4e data block
Data block 4f required only if the fourth field is a 2 and heat transfer is included.
4f data block
1-10 1st F K11
11-20 2nd F K12
21-30 3rd F K13
31-40 4th F K22
41-50 5th F K23
51-60 6th F K33
Data block 4g required only if the fourth field is a 2 and Joule heating is included.
4g data block
1-10 1st F R11
11-20 2nd F R12
21-30 3rd F R13
31-40 4th F R22
41-50 5th F R23
51-60 6th F R33
5th data block
Main Index
746 HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input)
Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials
HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials
Description
This option allows you to input data associated with Marc’s hypoelastic material model. You must define
the material stress/strain law through the HYPELA2 user subroutine (or, for element type 52 or 98 without
using numerically integrated solid cross section, the UBEAM user subroutine).
Note: In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults to isotropic heat
transfer behavior.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word HYPOELASTIC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of hypoelastic material data sets to follow.
Data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 are repeated as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing CREEP,
etc., and user subroutines.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to call the ANEXP and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15 3rd I Flag to use the HYPELA2 user subroutine.
Enter 1 to pass in deformation gradient (F) and rotation (R).
Enter 2 to pass in deformation gradient (F) and stretch ratios (λ).
Enter 3 to pass in F, R, and λ.
Enter 13 to pass in F, R, and λ. Kinematic quantities are calculated at the
mid increment if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used which results in
logarithmic strains.
end of the increment if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used.
Main Index
HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input) 747
Format
Data
26-37 6th A Enter the material name to cross-reference with material database for
temperature dependent properties, strain rate, and workhardening effects.
4th data block
1-10 1st F ρ – mass density (stress analysis).
11-20 2nd F α – coefficient of thermal expansion.
21-30 3rd F K – thermal conductivity.
31-40 4th F Specific heat.
41-50 5th F Resistivity.
51-60 6th F ρ – mass density (heat transfer analysis).
5th data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for thermal conductivity.
26-30 6th I Table ID for mass density (heat transfer).
6th data block
Enter a list of elements using this material model. (Do not enter
composite elements using this material in a layer.)
Main Index
748 HYPOELASTIC
HYPOELASTIC Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials
input style.
Description
This option allows you to input data associated with Marc’s hypoelastic material model. You must define
the material stress/strain law through the HYPELA2 user subroutine (or, for element type 52 or 98 without
using numerically integrated solid cross section, the UBEAM user subroutine).
Note: In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults to isotropic heat
transfer behavior.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word HYPOELASTIC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of hypoelastic material data sets to follow.
Data block 3, 4, 5 are repeated as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS data and user subroutines.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to call the ANEXP and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15 3rd I Flag to use the HYPELA2 user subroutine.
Enter 1 to pass in deformation gradient (F) and rotation (R).
Enter 2 to pass in deformation gradient (F) and stretch ratios (λ).
Enter 3 to pass in F, R, and λ.
mid increment if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used which results in
logarithmic strains.
end of the increment if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used.
Main Index
HYPOELASTIC 749
Format
Data
4th data block
21-30 3rd F K – thermal conductivity.
31-40 4th F Specific heat.
41-50 5th F Resistivity (if Joule analysis).
51-60 6th F ρ – mass density (heat transfer analysis).
5th data block
Enter a list of elements using this material model. (Do not enter
composite elements using this material in a layer.)
Main Index
750 MOONEY (with TABLE Input)
Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials
MOONEY (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for a Mooney-Rivlin rubber material. The UMOONY
user subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. The UENERG user subroutine
can be used to enter a general strain energy function. If rate effects are also present, the VISCELMOON
model definition option can also be required. A list of elements can also be associated with this material.
The strain energy function is:
W = C 10 ( I 1 – 3 ) + C 01 ( I 2 – 3 ) + C 11 ( I 1 – 3 ) ⋅ ( I 2 – 3 ) + C 20 ( I 1 – 3 ) 2 + C 30 ( I 1 – 3 ) 3 + U
9
where U = --- K ( J – 1 ) 2
2
A series form of the volumetric strain energy U to capture the nonlinear pressure-volumetric strain
relationship is also implemented and can be used by using a FEATURE,3402 parameter in the input. The
volumetric strain energy is expressed as:
J
U = ∑ Di ( J – 1 ) 2
i= 1
Notes: For a Neo-Hookean material model, only C10 is needed.

For a Mooney/Rivlin material model, only C10 and C01 are needed.
For the full 3rd-order invariant model of Jamus, Green and Simpson, use all C10, C01, C11,
C20, C30.
The procedure used is defined on the LARGE DISP or LARGE STRAIN parameters. If the
Total Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements in this case must be of the Herrmann
formulation except for plane stress. If the Updated Lagrange formulation is used, either
Herrmann or displacement elements may be used. (Near-incompressibility is imposed by
using the mixed approach and condensing out the pressure degrees of freedom.) For plane
stress, displacement elements with Total Lagrange are always used.
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults to isotropic heat
transfer behavior.
These material identifications cannot be referenced by any composite group.
The values C10, C01, C11, C20, and C30 can be redefined using the UMOONY
user subroutine.
Main Index
Although a general strain energy function can be defined by using the UENERG user
subroutine, it is still required to define the elements associated with the material
identifier here.
The UELASTOMER user subroutine may be used to define a general material based upon
the strain invariants. It is always called when the updated Lagrange procedure is used.
In a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, the electrostatic material model defaults to
isotropic electrostatic behavior.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word MOONEY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of data sets to follow.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for data input. Defaults to input file.
Data blocks 3 through 12 are repeated as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number.
11-15 3rd I Data input mode - Enter 0.
4th data block
1-10 1st F C10 – Mooney-Rivlin constant.
11-20 2nd F C01 – Mooney-Rivlin constant.
21-30 3rd F ρ – mass density (stress analysis).
31-40 4th F α – coefficient of thermal expansion.
41-50 5th F C11 – higher order constants
51-60 6th F C20 – higher order constants.
61-70 7th F C30 – higher order constants.
71-80 8th F K – bulk modulus.
5th data block
Main Index
752 MOONEY (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
Only necessary for input format 2 or greater.
1-5 1st I Table ID for C10.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for C01.
16-20 4th I Table ID for α.
21-25 5th I Table ID for C11.
36-40 8th I Table ID for K.
6th data block
Only necessary for analysis with FEATURE,3402 parameter and user-specified bulk modulus of -1.0.
1-10 1st F D1 coefficient of the volumetric strain energy function.
11-20 2nd F D2 coefficient of the volumetric strain energy function.
21-30 3rd F D3 coefficient of the volumetric strain energy function.
31-40 4th F D4 coefficient of the volumetric strain energy function.
7th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for D1 .
6-10 2nd I Table ID for D2 .
11-15 3rd I Table ID for D3 .
16-20 4th I Table ID for D4 .
8th data block

Only necessary in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-10 1st F Conductivity.
Main Index
Format
Data
9th data block
11-15 3rd I Table ID for mass density (heat transfer).
10th data block
Only necessary in a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis
11th data block
12th data block
Enter a list of element numbers associated with this particular
elastomeric material.
Main Index
754 MOONEY
MOONEY Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials
input style.
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for a Mooney-Rivlin rubber material. The UMOONY
user subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. The UENERG or
UELASTOMER user subroutine can be used to enter a general strain energy function. If rate effects are
present, the VISCELMOON model definition option can be used. A list of elements can also be associated
with this material.
W = C 10 ( I 1 – 3 ) + C 01 ( I 2 – 3 ) + C 11 ( I 1 – 3 ) ⋅ ( I 2 – 3 ) + C 20 ( I 1 – 3 ) 2 + C 30 ( I 1 – 3 ) 3 + U
9
where U = --- K ( J – 1 ) 2
2
J
U = ∑ Di ( J – 1 ) 2
i= 1
Notes: For a Neo-Hookean material model, only C10 is needed.

For a Mooney/Rivlin material model, only C10 and C01 are needed.
For the full third-order invariant model of James-Green-Simpson, use all C10, C01, C11,
C20, C30.
Total Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements in this case can be of the Herrmann
stress, displacement elements are always used.
transfer behavior
The values C10, C01, C11, C20, and C30 can be redefined using the UMOONY
user subroutine.
Main Index
MOONEY 755
Although a general strain energy function can be defined by using the UENERG user
subroutine, it is still required to define the elements associated with the material
identifier here.
The UELASTOMER user subroutine may be used to define a general material based upon
the strain invariants. It is always called when the updated Lagrange procedure is used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word MOONEY.
2nd data block
Data blocks 3 through 8 are repeated as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F C10 – Mooney-Rivlin constant.
11-20 2nd F C01 – Mooney-Rivlin constant.
41-50 5th F C11 – higher order constant.
71-80 8th F K – bulk modulus.
5th data block
Main Index
756 MOONEY
Format
Data
6th data block
Only necessary in a coupled thermal-stress analysis
7th data block
8th data block
Main Index
Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model
ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for the Arruda-Boyce rubber material model. The
UARRBO user subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. If rate effects are also
present, the VISCELMOON model definition option may also be required. A list of elements can also be
associated with this material.
2 3 4 5
W = n kθ --- ( I 1 – 3 ) + ---------- ⎛⎝ I – 9⎞⎠ + ------------------2- ⎛ I – 27⎞ + ------------------3- ⎛ I – 81⎞ + ------------------------4- ⎛ I – 243⎞ + U
1 1 11 19 519
2 20N 1 ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠
1050 N 1 7000 N 1 673750N 1
9
where U = --- K ( J – 1 ) 2
2
J
U = ∑ Di ( J – 1 ) 2
i =1
Notes: This model is very sensitive to material instabilities. Positive, physical coefficients
are essential.
transfer behavior.
isotropic electrostatic behavior
Main Index
758 ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input)

The values nkθ and N can be redefined using the UARRBO user subroutine.
For nkθ = 2C1 and N → ∞, one term Mooney-Rivlin (or Neo-Hookean) material model
can be recovered.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ARRUDBOYCE.
2nd data block
Data blocks 3 through 12 are repeated as a set; once for each data set.
3rd data block
11-15 3rd I Data Input Mode; enter 0
4th data block
1-10 1st F nkθ – linear term where n is the chain density, k is the Boltzmann
constant, and θ is the temperature.
11-20 2nd F N – number of links between chemical crosslinks.
41-50 5th F K – bulk modulus; default is such that the material is
incompressible (enter -1 if a series form of volumetric free
energy is flagged in a FEATURE,3402 parameter).
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for rubber modulus (nkθ).
6-10 2nd I Table ID for N.
Main Index
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Table ID for bulk modulus.
6th data block
7th data block
8th data block

31-40 4th F Electrical resistivity.
9th data block
Main Index
760 ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
10th data block
11th data block
12th data block
Main Index
ARRUDBOYCE 761
ARRUDBOYCE Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model
input style.
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for the Arruda-Boyce rubber material model. The
UARRBO user subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. If rate effects are also
present, the VISCELMOON model definition option may also be required. A list of elements can also be
associated with this material.
2 3 4 5
W = n kθ --- ( I 1 – 3 ) + ---------- ⎛⎝ I – 9⎞⎠ + ------------------2- ⎛ I – 27⎞ + ------------------3- ⎛ I – 81⎞ + ------------------------4- ⎛ I – 243⎞ + U
1 1 11 19 519
2 20N 1 ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠
1050 N 1 7000 N 1 673750N 1
9
where U = --- K ( J – 1 ) 2
2
J
U = ∑ Di ( J – 1 ) 2
i =1
Notes: This model is very sensitive to material instabilities. Positive, physical coefficients
are essential.
transfer behavior.
Main Index
762 ARRUDBOYCE
The values nkθ and N can be redefined using the UARRBO user subroutine.
For nkθ = 2C1 and N → ∞, one term Mooney-Rivlin (or Neo-Hookean) material model
can be recovered.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ARRUDBOYCE.
2nd data block
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F nkθ – linear term where n is the chain density, k is the Boltzmann
constant, and θ is the temperature.
11-20 2nd F N – number of statistical links of length in the chain between
chemical crosslinks.
41-50 5th F K – bulk modulus; default is such that the material is incompressible
(enter -1 if a series form of volumetric free energy is flagged in
a FEATURE,3402 parameter).
5th data block
Main Index
ARRUDBOYCE 763
Format
Data
6th data block
Note: In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model
defaults to isotropic heat transfer behavior.
7th data block
8th data block
Main Index
764 GENT (with TABLE Input)
Define Data for the Gent Model
GENT (with TABLE Input) Define Data for the Gent Model
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for the Gent rubber material model. The UGENT user
subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. If rate effects are also present, the
VISCELMOON model definition option can also be required. A list of elements can also be associated
with this material.
I 1*
W = ------ I m log ⎛ 1 – -----⎞ + U
–E
⎝
where I 1* = I 1 – 3
6 I m⎠
9
where U = --- K ( J – 1 ) 2
2
J
U = ∑ Di ( J – 1 ) 2
i= 1
Notes: Negative coefficients are nonphysical.

In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults of isotropic heat
transfer behavior.
The values E and Im can be redefined using the UGENT user subroutine.
Main Index
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words GENT.
2nd data block
3rd data block
11-15 3rd I Data Input mode; enter 0
4th data block
21-30 3rd F E – small strain tensile modulus.
31-40 4th F Im – maximum value of first invariant (defines maximum stretch in the
chains). I m > 3
(enter -1 if a series form of volumetric free energy is flagged in a
FEATURE,3402 parameter).
5th data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for small strain tensile modulus.
16-20 4th I Table ID for maximum value of first invariant.
21-25 5th I Table ID for bulk modulus.
Main Index
766 GENT (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
6th data block
7th data block
8th data block

9th data block
10th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
11th data block
12th data block
Main Index
768 GENT
GENT Define Data for the Gent Model
input style.
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for the Gent rubber material model. The UGENT user
subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. If rate effects are also present, the
VISCELMOON model definition option can also be required. A list of elements can also be associated
with this material.
I 1*
W = ------ I m log ⎛ 1 – -----⎞ + U
–E
⎝
where I 1* = I 1 – 3
6 I m⎠
9
where U = --- K ( J – 1 ) 2
2
J
U = ∑ Di ( J – 1 ) 2
i= 1
Notes: Negative coefficients are nonphysical.

In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults of isotropic heat
transfer behavior.
The values E and Im can be redefined using the UGENT user subroutine.
Main Index
GENT 769
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words GENT.
2nd data block
3rd data block
4th data block
21-30 3rd F E – small strain tensile modulus.
31-40 4th F Im – maximum value of first invariant (defines maximum stretch in the
chains). I m > 3 .
5th data block
6th data block
Main Index
770 GENT
Format
Data
Note: In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model
defaults of isotropic heat transfer behavior.
7th data block
8th data block
Main Index
Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model
OGDEN (with Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model
TABLE Input)
Description
This option allows you to define the data associated with the Ogden model for incompressible and nearly
incompressible rubber material. The strain energy function for this model has the form:
N
μ –α ⁄ 3 α α α
W = ∑ -----n- [ J n ( λ 1 n + λ 2 n + λ 3 n ) – 3 ] + U
αn
n =1
9
where U = --- K ( J – 1 ) 2
2
J
U = ∑ Di ( J – 1 ) 2
i =1
This option can also be used to activate the general principal stretch based models through the
UELASTOMER and UOGDEN user subroutines.
Notes: The procedure used is defined on the LARGE DISP or LARGE STRAIN parameters. If the
total Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements in this case can be of the Herrmann
formulation except for plane stress. If the updated Lagrange formulation is invoked, the
elements must be conventional displacement formulation. (Near-incompressibility is
imposed using mixed approach and condensing out pressure degrees of freedom.) For
plane stress, displacement elements are always used.
transfer behavior.
Main Index
772 OGDEN (with TABLE Input)
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word OGDEN.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of Ogden material data to follow (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the logical unit number for input. Defaults to input file.
Data blocks 3 through 13 are repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the material identification.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of terms (N) that defines the strain energy function.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 for Ogden model (default).
Enter 3 for generalized principal stretch based model using the
UELASTOMER user subroutine.
16-20 4th I Data input mode; enter 0.
4th data block
1-10 1st F K - bulk modulus; default is such that the material is incompressible
11-20 2nd F Enter the mass density.
21-30 3rd F Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion.
31-40 4th F Reference value of modulus μ.
41-50 5th F Reference value of exponent α.
If the table IDs of the 4th and 5th fields of the 5th data block are zero, then the reference values ( μ , α,
β ) are not used and the 12th data block is used instead.
5th data block

1-5 1st I Table ID for bulk modulus.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for mass density.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
16-20 4th I Table ID for modulus.
21-25 5th I Table ID for exponent.
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
7th data block
8th data block

9th data block
10th data block
Main Index
774 OGDEN (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
11th data block
Data block 12 is repeated once for each term specified in the 3rd data block. Not used if generalized
stretch based model. Not used if table based input is used and the table IDs given on the 5th data block
are nonzero.
12th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the modulus.
11-20 2nd F Enter the power.
13th data block
Main Index
OGDEN 775
OGDEN Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define the data associated with the Ogden model for incompressible and nearly
incompressible rubber material. The strain energy function for this model has the form:
N
μ –α ⁄ 3 α α α
W = ∑ -----n- [ J n ( λ 1 n + λ 2 n + λ 3 n ) – 3 ] + U
αn
n =1
9
where U = --- K ( J – 1 ) 2
2
J
U = ∑ Di ( J – 1 ) 2
i =1
This option can also be used to activate the general principal stretch based models through the
Notes: The procedure used is defined on the LARGE DISP or LARGE STRAIN parameters. If the
total Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements in this case can be of the Herrmann
formulation except for plane stress. If the updated Lagrange formulation is invoked, the
elements must be conventional displacement formulation. (Near-incompressibility is
imposed using mixed approach and condensing out pressure degrees of freedom.) For
plane stress, displacement elements are always used.
transfer behavior.
The UELASTOMER user subroutine is only available in the updated Lagrange mode.
Main Index
776 OGDEN
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word OGDEN.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of Ogden material data to follow (optional).
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of terms (N) which define the strain energy function.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 for Ogden model (default).
Enter 3 for generalized principal stretch based model using the
4th data block
1-10 1st F K - bulk modulus; default is such that the material is incompressible
5th data block
6th data block
Main Index
OGDEN 777
Format
Data
7th data block
Data block 8 is repeated once for each term specified in the 3rd data block. Not used if generalized
stretch based model.
8th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the modulus.
11-20 2nd F Enter the power.
9th data block
Main Index
778 NLELAST
Simplified Nonlinear Elastic Models Input
NLELAST Simplified Nonlinear Elastic Models Input
Description
This option allows for the input of simplified nonlinear elastic models, which do not have a well defined
strain energy function. It allows an easy way to represent behavior that is observed in tests. See Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information for further details.
Notes: When used in conjunction with the LARGE DISP parameter, the table used to enter the
stress-strain data should be the second Piola Kirchhoff stress versus the Green
Lagrange strain.
When used in conjunction with LARGE DISP, UPDATE, and FINITE, or PLASTICITY,3, or
LARGE STRAIN, the stress-strain data should be the true (Cauchy) stress versus
logarithmic strain.
It is not recommended to represent materials when large strains are present.
The MD Nastran compatible model with Herrmann elements shows slow convergence;
conventional displacement elements should be used.
The principal strain-loaded model (3) and the orthotropic model (6) cannot be used with
Herrmann elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word NLELAST.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of distinct sets of NLELAST entries (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of NLELAST data (default to standard input).
Repeat 3rd through 18th data block for each NLELAST material defined.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the material ID.
6-10 2nd I Material model:
Enter 1 for Nastran compatible model.
Enter 2 for invariant based model.
Enter 3 for principal strain based model.
Enter 4 for linear elasticity with tension compression limits.
Main Index
NLELAST 779
Format
Data
Enter 5 for bi-modulus linear elasticity with tension compression limits.
Enter 6 for orthotropic nonlinear elasticity based upon strains in local
direction.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if Bilateral model; i.e., both tension and compression data will be
used (default).
Enter 2 if only tension data will be used (Nastran pre-Version 64).
16-20 4th I Enter 1 to indicate constant Poisson’s ratio (default) (Nastran model).
Enter 2 to indicate constant bulk modulus (Nastran model).
21-25 5th I Enter 0 – material has no limits on tension/compression behavior
(default).
Enter 1 to activate no/limited tension model.
Enter 2 to activate no/limited compression model.
Enter 3 to activate no/limited tension and/or compression model.
26-37 6th A Enter the material name to cross reference with material database.
4th data block – For models 1,2,3,4 or 5
1-10 1st E Model model 1or 3; enter the reference value to the stress-strain curve;
default=1.0.
For model 2, enter the reference Young’s modulus.
For model 4 or 5, enter the reference value of Young’s modulus for
tensile behavior.
11-20 2nd E Enter the Poisson’s ratio.
21-30 3rd E Enter the mass density.
31-40 4th E Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion.
41-50 5th E Enter the Shear modulus for material model 3.
51-60 6th E Tensile stress limit if 5th field of 3rd data block is 1 or 3.
61-70 7th E Compressive stress limit if 5th field of 3rd data block is 2 or 3.
5th data block For models 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID used to describe stress-strain law.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for Poisson’s ratio.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for mass density.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
Main Index
780 NLELAST
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the shear modulus for material model 3.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for tensile stress limit.
31-35 7th I Enter the table ID for compressive stress limit.
6th data block - for model 5 only
1-10 1st E For model 5; enter the reference value of Young’s modulus for
compressive behavior.
11-20 2nd E Enter the Poisson’s ratio for compressive behavior.
7th data block - for model 5 only
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for Young’s modulus for compressive behavior.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for Poisson’s ratio for compressive behavior.
8th data block – for model 6 only
1-10 1st E E 11 – Reference value for Young’s modulus.
11-20 2nd E E 22 – Reference value for Young’s modulus.
21-30 3rd E E 33 – Reference value for Young’s modulus.
31-40 4th E ν 12 – Reference value for Poisson’s ratio.
41-50 5th E ν 23 – Reference value for Poisson’s ratio
51-60 6th E ν 31 – Reference value for Poisson’s ratio
61-70 7th E ρ – Mass density (stress analysis)
1-5 1st I Table ID for E 11 .
6-10 2nd I Table ID for E 22 .
11-15 3rd I Table ID for E 33 .
16-20 4th I Table ID for ν 12 .
31-35 7th I Table ID for ρ .

1-10 1st E G 12 – Reference value for shear modulus.
11-20 2nd E G 23 – Reference value for shear modulus.
Main Index
NLELAST 781
Format
Data
21-30 3rd E G 31 – Reference value for shear modulus.
31-40 4th E α 11 – Coefficient of thermal expansion.
1-5 1st I Table ID for G 12 .
6-10 2nd I Table ID for G 23 .
11-15 3rd I Table ID for G 31 .
16-20 4th I Table ID for α 11 .
12th data block (only required in a coupled thermal-stress analysis) models 1-5
1-10 1st E Enter the thermal conductivity.
11-20 2nd E Enter the specific heat.
21-30 3rd E Enter the mass density (heat transfer analysis).
31-40 4th E Enter the electrical resistance (Joule Analysis).
41-50 5th E Enter the emissivity.
13th data block (only required in a coupled thermal-stress analysis), models 1-5
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID used for thermal conductivity.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for specific heat.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for mass density.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for electrical resistance.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for emissivity.
14th data block (only required for coupled thermal-stress analysis) model 6
Main Index
782 NLELAST
Format
Data
11-15 2nd I Table ID for reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
18th data block
Main Index
Define Data for Foam Material Model
FOAM (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Foam Material Model
Description
This option allows you to define the data associated with the foam model for highly compressible rubber
material. The foam model can be used for plane strain, axisymmetric, and solid elements using the
conventional displacement elements.
The strain energy function for this model has the form.
N N
μ α α α μ β
W = ∑ -----n- ( λ 1 n + λ 2 n + λ 3 n – 3 ) +
αn ∑ -----n ( 1 – J n )
βn
n =1 n=1
Notes: In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults to isotropic heat
transfer behavior. The foam model is only available for continuum elements (plane strain,
axisymmetric, or solids) for Total Lagrange or Updated Lagrange.
The procedure used for the Foam formulation is defined on the LARGE DISP or LARGE
STRAIN parameters.
The use of the UELASTOMER user subroutine is only available in updated Lagrange mode.
Viscoelasticity may be included in the updated Lagrange mode using the VISCELFOAM
model definition option.
transfer behavior.
If the bulk modulus is entered, then βi = 0 for all values of i.
If the bulk modulus is zero and all βi are 0, then the material is treated as an
Ogden material.
Main Index
784 FOAM (with TABLE Input)
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word FOAM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of Foam material data to follow (optional).
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of terms (N) that defines the strain energy function.
11-15 3rd I Data input mode; enter 0.
16-20 4th I Flag for user-defined foam models:
= 0 no user-defined foam model (default).
= 1 energy function based on strain invariants.
= 2 energy function based on principal stretches.
= 3 energy function based on strain invariants and with the form of
deviatoric split.
= 4 energy function based on principal stretches and with the form of
deviatoric split
temperature dependent properties, strain rate, and workhardening effects.
4th data block
31-40 4th F Enter reference value of modulus μ.
41-50 5th F Enter reference value of exponent α.
51-60 6th F Enter reference value of exponent β.
If the table IDs of the 4th, 5th, and 6th fields of the 5th data block are zero, then the reference values
( μ , α , β ) are not used and the 8th data block is used instead.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block
16-20 4th I Table ID for modulus μ.
21-25 5th I Table ID for exponent α.
26-30 6th I Table ID for exponent β.
6th data block
7th data block
8th data block
9th data block
Data block 10 is repeated once for each term specified in the 3rd data block. Not used if the table based
input is used and the table IDs given on the 5th data block are nonzero.
Main Index
786 FOAM (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
10th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the modulus ( μ n ).
11-15 2nd F Enter the power for deviatoric behavior ( α n ).
21-30 3rd F Enter the power for volumetric behavior ( β n ).
11th data block
Main Index
FOAM 787
FOAM Define Data for Foam Material Model
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define the data associated with the foam model for highly compressible rubber
material. The foam model can be used for plane strain, axisymmetric, and solid elements using the
conventional displacement elements.
The strain energy function for this model has the form.
N N
μ α α α μ β
W = ∑ -----n- ( λ 1 n + λ 2 n + λ 3 n – 3 ) +
αn ∑ -----n ( 1 – J n )
βn
n =1 n=1
Notes: In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults to isotropic heat
transfer behavior. The foam model is only available for continuum elements (plane strain,
axisymmetric, or solids) for Total Lagrange or Updated Lagrange.
The procedure used for the Foam formulation is defined on the LARGE DISP or LARGE
STRAIN parameters.
The use of the UELASTOMER user subroutine is only available in updated Lagrange mode.
Viscoelasticity may be included in the updated Lagrange mode using the VISCELFOAM
transfer behavior.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word FOAM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of Foam material data to follow (optional).
Main Index
788 FOAM
Format
Data
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of terms (N) which define the strain energy function.
11-15 3rd i Not used; enter 0.
16-20 4th I Flag for user-defined foam models:
= 0 no user-defined foam model (default).
= 1 energy function based on strain invariants.
= 2 energy function based on principal stretches.
= 3 energy function based on strain invariants and with the form of
deviatoric split.
= 4 energy function based on principal stretches and with the form of
deviatoric split
4th data block
31-40 4th F Enter reference value of modulus μ.
41-50 5th F Enter reference value of exponent α.
51-60 6th F Enter reference value of exponent β.
5th data block
6th data block
Data block 7 is repeated once for each term specified in the 3rd data block.
Main Index
FOAM 789
Format
Data
7th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the modulus (μn).
11-15 2nd F Enter the power for deviatoric behavior (αn).
21-30 3rd F Enter the power for volumetric behavior (βn).
8th data block
Main Index
790 GASKET
Define Material Data for Gasket Materials
GASKET Define Material Data for Gasket Materials
Description
This option allows you to specify the material properties for a gasket material, such as the loading and
unloading paths, the yield pressure, the transverse shear modulus and the membrane behavior of the
gasket (see Gasket in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information). The loading and unloading paths
should be defined using the TABLE option and must be given as a relation between the pressure on the
gasket and the gasket closure (variable type 37). The reference value of these tables is always 1. The
loading and unloading curves may also be a function of the temperature type (variable 12), and the
coordinates (variable types 5, 6, and 7). The yield pressure, tensile modulus, and transverse modulus can
be functions of the temperature and coordinates. The initial gap can only be a function of the coordinates.
The membrane behavior should be specified using the ISOTROPIC option.
Note: This option can be used only with the lower-order solid composite element types 149, 151,
and 152.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word GASKET.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of gasket material data to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3 through 7 are repeated as a set; once for each set of gasket material to be input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the gasket material identification number.
6-10 2nd I Enter the material identification number of the isotropic material to be
used for the membrane behavior of the gasket. In a coupled analysis, the
thermal properties are also associated with this material ID.
Main Index
GASKET 791
Format
Data
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter gasket behavior type in the thickness direction. Currently only type
0 (elastic-plastic) is supported.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table identification number of the loading path of the gasket.
11-15 3rd I Enter the number of unloading paths to be read through data block 4a. If
a 0 is entered here, the gasket behavior will be fully elastic. Up to 10
unloading paths may be specified.
4a data block
Necessary only if the number of unloading paths entered in the 3rd field of the 4th data block
is nonzero.
1-5 1st I Enter the table identification number of the first unloading path of
the gasket.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table identification number of the second unloading path of the
gasket if present.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table identification number of the third unloading path of the
gasket if present.
16-20 4th I Enter the table identification number of the fourth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
21-25 5th I Enter the table identification number of the fifth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
26-30 6th I Enter the table identification number of the sixth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
31-35 7th I Enter the table identification number of the seventh unloading path of the
gasket if present.
36-40 8th I Enter the table identification number of the eighth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
41-45 9th I Enter the table identification number of the ninth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
46-50 10th I Enter the table identification number of the tenth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the yield pressure.
11-20 2nd F Enter the tensile modulus (pressure per unit length).
21-30 3rd F Enter the transverse shear modulus (force per unit area).
31-40 4th F Enter the initial gap.
Main Index
792 GASKET
Format
Data
6th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table identification number associated with the yield pressure.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table identification number associated with the tensile modulus.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table identification number associated with the transverse shear
modulus.
16-20 4th I Enter the table identification number associated with the initial gap.
7th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with this material. The elements have
to be of lower-order solid composite type (element types 149, 151,
or 152).
Main Index
TABLE 793
Define Table
TABLE Define Table
Description
This option defines the data associated with a function or parametric input. These tables are referenced
when defining material properties, boundary conditions, contact, and springs. A quantity may be a
function of up to four independent variables. The function may be defined either in a piecewise linear
manner using a set of points or by a mathematical equation.
The value used in the analysis is the value of the evaluated table obtained by linear interpolation
multiplied by the reference value given in the input. If the reference value is entered as 0.0, it is taken as
1.0 and, hence, the table value is used. The scaling by the reference value is useful when applying
boundary conditions. If the independent variable is out of range of the table, the user can specify whether
the function should be evaluated at the endpoint of the table or by extrapolation.
When an equation is defined, the value used in the analysis is the evaluation of the equation multiplied
by the reference value. If the reference value is entered as 0.0, it is taken as 1.0 and, hence, the equation
is not scaled.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word TABLE.
11-42 2nd A Enter the table name.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Table ID.
6-10 2nd I Number of independent variables.
11-15 3rd I Unit number to read data.
16-20 4th I Set to 1 to suppress printout.
21-25 5th I Enter method to read function:
0 – one row at a time
1 – one data point at a time
2 – read X 1 , function pairs (only available if number of independent
variables is one).
3 – a formula is used.
Main Index
794 TABLE
Define Table
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the first independent variable type.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of X1 data points (nw1).
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to not allow extrapolation of X1 (default).
Enter 2 to allow extrapolation of X1 .
16-20 4th I Enter the second independent variable type.

21-25 5th I Enter the number of X2 data points (nw2).
26-30 6th I Enter 1 to not allow extrapolation of X2 (default).
31-35 7th I Enter the third independent variable type.

46-50 10th I Enter the fourth independent variable type.

Independent Variable Type

1 time 28 contact force F 55 normalized arc distance
2 normalized time 29 contact body M 56 distance to other contact surface
(near contact only)
3 increment number 30 σn (normal stress) 57 term of series
4 normalized increment 31 voltage 58 hydrostatic stress
5 x coordinate 32 current 59 hydrostatic strain
6 y coordinate 33 ⎛ current radius ⎞ 2 60 B g, p = m· g, p ⁄ αm .
------------------------------------ (see THROAT)
⎝ radius of throat ⎠
7 z coordinate 34 χp (pyrolysis damage). 61 B g, w = m· g, w ⁄ αm .

8 35 φw (water vapor fraction). 62 2nd state variable
s = x2 + y2 + z2
9 θ angle 36 χc (coking damage). 63 3rd state variable
10 mode number 37 gasket closure distance 64 4th state variable
Main Index
TABLE 795
Define Table
11 frequency 38 displacement magnitude 65 5th state variable

12 temperature 39 stress rate 66 loadcase number
13 function 40 experimental data 67 degree of cure
14 fourier 41 porosity 68 magnetic field intensity
15 p (equivalent plastic strain) 42 void ratio 69 equivalent mechanical strain
ε
16 · 43 ·c 70 1st strain invariant
ε (equivalent strain rate) ε
(equivalent creep strain rate)
17 B g = m· ⁄ αm (normalized 44 minor principal total strain 71 2nd strain invariant
mass flow rate).
18 arc length 45 distance from neutral axis 72 3rd strain invariant
(-t/2, +t/2)
19 relative density 46 normalized distance from neutral 73 any strain component
(not available for shells) axis (-1, +1)
20 σ (equivalent stress) 47 local x-coordinate of layer point 74 damage
for open or closed section beam
21 magnetic induction 48 local y-coordinate of layer point 75 accumulated crack growth
for open or closed section beam
22 velocity 49 1st isoparametric coordinate -1 to parametric variable 1 to 100
(not available in this release) -100
23 particle diameter 50 2nd isoparametric coordinate
(not available in this release)
24 x0 coordinate 51 wavelength (used in spectral
radiation)
25 y0 coordinate 52 creep strain ε er
26 z0 coordinate 53 pressure or primary quantity in
diffusion
27 2 2 2 54 equivalent strain rate for
s0 = x0 + y0 + z0
nonNewtonian viscosity
Independent variable types (5, 6, 7) will have the following characteristics.

1. When used to evaluate material behavior, they will be original integration point coordinates
unless the updated Lagrange procedure is used.
2. When used to evaluate DIST LOADS, they will be the original integration point coordinates unless
the FOLLOW FOR parameter is used.
3. When used to evaluate boundary conditions FIXED DISP, etc. or POINT LOAD, etc., they will be
the original nodal coordinates unless the FOLLOW FOR parameter is used.
Independent variable types (24, 25, 26) have the same characteristics as (4, 5, 6) except the original nodal
coordinate will be used for FIXED DISP or POINT LOAD, regardless of whether the FOLLOW FOR
parameter is invoked.
Note: If remeshing occurs, then “original” means the coordinates after the remeshing is done.
Main Index
796 TABLE
Define Table
If the method to read the function is 0, use the 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8a data blocks.
If the method to read the function is 1, use the 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8b data blocks.
If the method to read the function is 2, use the 9th data block.
If the method to read the function is 3, use the 10th data block.
A mathematical formula may be either 80 characters or 160 characters long if EXTENDED input format
is used. The formula is defined in terms of independent variables V1, V2, V3, and/or V4, where the
meaning of those variables is based on the variable type defined in the 3rd data block.
The evaluation is based upon usual mathematical standards moving from left to right with the
conventional rules of the use of parentheses. The following mathematical symbols/operations are
available.
+ addition
- subtraction
* multiplication
/ division
^ exponential
! factor
% mod
In addition to V1, V2, V3, and V4, the following constants may be used in the equation:
pi p
e exponent
tz offset temperature entered via PARAMETERS option
q Activation energy entered via MATERIAL DATA option
r Universal gas constant entered via PARAMETERS option
sb Stefan Boltzman constant entered via PARAMETERS option
The following mathematical functions may be used in an equation:
cos cosine (x) x in radians

sin sine (x) x in radians
tan tangent (x) x in radians
dcos cosine (x) x in degrees
dsin sine (x) x in degrees
dtan tangent (x) x in degrees
Main Index
TABLE 797
Define Table
acos inverse cosine (x) f in radians

asin inverse sine (x) f in radians
atan inverse tangent (x) f in radians
atan2 inverse tangent (x,y) f in radians
dacos inverse cosine (x) f in degrees
dasin inverse sine (x) f in degrees
datan inverse tangent (x) f in degrees
datan2 inverse tangent (x,y) f in degrees
log log based 10
ln natural log
exp exponent
cosh hyperbolic cosine
sinh hyperbolic sine
tanh hyperbolic tangent
acosh inverse hyperbolic cosine
asinh inverse hyperbolic sine
atanh inverse hyperbolic tangent
sqrt square root
rad convert degrees to radians
deg convert radians to degrees
abs obtain absolute value
int truncates the value to whole
frac take the fractional value
max takes the maximal value
min takes the minimal value
mod return the remainder of x, based on y
mod(x,y) = x - y * int (x/y)
Example 1
If a load on a cantilever has a linear dependence on x and a sinusoidal variation with time between 0 and
1 second, you would enter
A * V 1 * sin ( 2. * pi * V 2 )
where the first variable is type 5 (x-coordinate) and the second variable is type 1 (time).
Main Index
798 TABLE
Define Table
Example 2
If the creep strain rate is described by the Dorn-Weertman relation
· n –Q ⁄ R T
εc = A σ e ,
the formula would be
A * V 1 ^n * exp ( – q ⁄ ( R * V 2 ) )
where V1, the first variable, is type 20 (equivalent stress) and V2, the second variable, is type 12
(temperature).
Format
Data
The 4th data block is used to give the values of the first independent variable. Enter nw1 values, 8
values per line. Repeat as necessary, the data points must be in ascending order. If the independent
variable is a parametric variable, this data block is not required. The value of the parametric variable is
1 to nw1 and is given on the output.
4th data block
1-10 1st E Enter first data point for first independent variable.
11-20 2nd E Enter second data point for first independent variable.
21-30 3rd E Enter third data point for first independent variable.
etc.
The 5th data block is used to give the values of the second independent variable. If there is only one
independent variable, skip to data line 8. Enter nw2 values, 8 values per line. Repeat as necessary, the
data points must be in ascending order. If the independent variable is a parametric variable, this data
block is not required. The value of the parametric variable is 1 to nw2, and is given on the output.
5th data block
1-10 1st E Enter first data point for second independent variable.
11-20 2nd E Enter second data point for second independent variable.
21-30 3rd E Enter third data point for second independent variable.
etc.
The 6th data block is used to give the values of the third independent variable. If there is only one
block is not required. The value of the parametric variable is 1 to nw3 and is given on the output.
6th data block
1-10 1st E Enter first data point for third independent variable.
11-20 2nd E Enter second data point for third independent variable.
Main Index
TABLE 799
Define Table
Format
Data
21-30 3rd E Enter third data point for third independent variable.
etc.
The 7th data block is used to give the values of the fourth independent variable. If there is only one
block is not required. The value of the parametric variable is 1 to nw4 and is given on the output.
7th data block
1-10 1st E Enter first data point for fourth independent variable.
11-20 2nd E Enter second data point for fourth independent variable.
21-30 3rd E Enter third data point for fourth independent variable.
etc.
8th data block
If the reading method is zero (5th field of line 2), the function is read by giving nw1 data points
(nw4*nw3*nw2) times. The program reads the data using the following method.
do k4=1, nw4
do k3=1, nw3
do k2=1, nw2
read nw1 values f(X1, K2, K3, K4)
enddo
enddo
enddo
The nw1 data are read in 8 per line using the following 7a block format
8a data block
1-10 1st E Enter first value of function.
11-20 2nd E Enter second value of function.
21-30 3rd E Enter third value of function.
etc.
Main Index
800 TABLE
Define Table
Format
Data
If the reading method is one (5th field of line 2), the function is read one value at a time; hence,
nw1*nw2*nw3*nw4 lines.
do k4=1, nw4
do k3=1, nw3
do k2=1, nw2
do k1=1, nw1
read one values f(K1, K2, K3, K4)
enddo
enddo
enddo
enddo
The value is read using the 8b block format.
8b data block
1-10 1st E Enter value of function.
9th data block
Only used if read method = 2; enter nw1 line each with the value of independent variable and function.
If the independent variable is a parameter, enter the value of the function in the first field.
1-10 1st E Enter value of independent variable
11-20 2nd E Enter value of function.
Only used if read method = 3, enter a line with the formula.
10th data block
1-80 1st A Enter formula.
Main Index
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) 801
Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress
input style. If table driven input is provided, the strain rate dependence
should be defined in the table unless the Cowper-Symonds model is used.
For the Cowper-Symonds model, this option should be used.
Description
This option allows the definition of a strain rate dependent yield stress, for use in dynamic and flow (for
example, extrusion) problems. This can also be used in static analysis by entering a fictitious time using
the TIME STEP option. The zero strain rate yield stress is given on the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
and ANISOTROPIC options. This option must be repeated for each different material for which strain rate
data is necessary. The yield stress variation with strain rate is given using one of three options:
a. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the yield stress strain rate
curve are given. The strain rate breakpoints should be in ascending order, or
b. The yield stress and stain rate data points lying on the yield stress, strain rate curve are input
directly. The data is entered in ascending order of strain rate. This method is flagged by
entering the word DATA on the first data block.
· 1⁄P
ε
c. The Cowper and Symonds model is used. The yield stress is scaled with a factor 1 + ⎛ ----⎞ .
⎝ C⎠
Note that if multiple material models are used, they must all be expressed as piecewise linear,
or as Cowper and Symonds model.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the words STRAIN RATE.
13-80 2nd A Enter the word DATA to indicate that option B is being used.
Enter the word COWPER to indicate that the Cowper and Symonds model
is used.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I For option A, enter the number of slopes of yield versus strain rate curve.
For option B, enter the number of data points.
Not used for Cowper and Symonds model; enter 0.
6-10 2nd I Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to ISOTROPIC,
ORTHOTROPIC, and ANISOTROPIC options.
Main Index
802 STRAIN RATE (Material Properties)
Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Unit number for input of the set of this block.
Defaults to blocks.
3a data block
Data block 3a is used in conjunction with option A. The number of blocks in this series is equal to that
given in the first field of data block 2.
1-10 1st F Enter the slope of the yield versus strain rate curve.
11-20 2nd F Enter the strain rate value above which the above slope becomes
operational. Note, the first strain rate breakpoint must be zero.
3b data block
Data block 3b is used in conjunction with option B.
1-10 1st F Enter the value of the yield strength.
11-20 2nd F Enter the associated strain rate. Note that the first strain rate must be zero.
3c data block
Data block 3c is used in conjunction with option C.
1-10 1st F Enter the value of C.
11-20 2nd F Enter the value of P.
Main Index
FORMING LIMIT 803
Forming Limit Properties
FORMING LIMIT Forming Limit Properties
Description
This option defines the variation of forming limit properties with minor principal engineering. The curve
describing the relationship between minor principal engineering strain and forming limit is also called
Forming Limit Diagram (FLD). According to the forming limit values, Forming Limit Parameters (FLP)
are calculated based on the in-plane principal engineering strains and the FLD data input through this
FORMING LIMIT option. The FLP results can be postprocessed by specifying post code number 30.
There are three formats to describe the FLD curves:

1. Fitted function definition
2. Predicted function definition
3. TABLE definition
Note: FLP is only available for shell/membrane elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FORMING LI.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Input option parameter.
0. To input the FLD data as a fitted function (see Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information).
1. To input the FLD data by theory prediction.
2. To input the data by the TABLE option.
6-10 2nd I Number of FLD data points. Defaults to 9.
11-15 3rd I Material ID number.
16-20 4th I Input unit number. Defaults to standard input.
Option A
3a data block
1-10 1st F C0 – First parameter of the FLD curve.
11-20 2nd F C1 – Second parameter of the FLD curve.
21-30 3rd F C2 – Third parameter of the FLD curve.
31-40 4th F C3 – Fourth parameter of the FLD curve.
Main Index
804 FORMING LIMIT
Forming Limit Properties
Format
Data
41-50 5th F C4 – Fifth parameter of the FLD curve.
4a data block
1-10 1st F D1 – Sixth parameter of the FLD curve.
11-20 2nd F D2 – Seventh parameter of the FLD curve.
21-30 3rd F D3 – Eighth parameter of the FLD curve.
31-40 4th F D4 – Ninth parameter of the FLD curve.
Note: C0, C1, C2, C3, C4, D1, D2, D3, D4 are the parameters defining the function of FLD curve;
refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details.
Option B
This data block is necessary when the first field of the 2nd data block equals to 1.
3b data block
1-10 1st F Strain-hardening exponent.
11-20 2nd F Thickness coefficient.
Note: Strain-hardening exponent is the n value as defined in the power law form of strain-hardening
equation σ = k ε pn . The thickness coefficient is defined by the unit used in the model. For
example, if the shell thickness is defined by “Inch”, the thickness coefficient is 3.59. If the
shell thickness is defined by “mm”, the thickness coefficient is 0.141. Users should choose
the proper value according to the unit used in defining the shell thickness.
Option C
This data block is necessary when the first field of the 2nd data block equals to 2.
3c data block
1-5 1st I Enter the Table ID for the FLD data sets.
6-15 2nd F Reference value of forming limit diagram.
Main Index
WORK HARD 805
Define Workhardening Data
WORK HARD Define Workhardening Data
input style. When using table driven input, the table associated with the
yield stress should incorporate the effects of work(strain) hardening,
temperature, and rate effects.
Description
This option allows you to specify the material stress-strain relation for elastic-plastic behavior. Further
details on this option are given in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. The workhardening data
can be entered in one of three forms.
a. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the stress-strain curves are
given. The piecewise linear curve is entered in ascending order of equivalent plastic strain.
b. The stress and plastic strain data points lying on the stress-strain curve are input directly. The
data is entered in ascending order of plastic strains. This method is flagged by entering the
word DATA on the WORK HARD option. These data points are used to calculate slope
breakpoint data.
c. By the WKSLP user subroutine. This routine is called for every integration point where
elastic-plastic behavior occurs. See Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines
for details. Note that if this option is used, it must be used for ALL material types.
This option must be repeated for each different material for which workhardening data is necessary.
Note: When performing a small deformation analysis without the LARGE DISP or LARGE
STRAIN parameters, the work hard data should be given in terms of engineering stress and
engineering strain.
If a large displacement analysis is performed where the LARGE DISP parameter is included
but without either the LARGE STRAIN or UPDATE parameter, you should use the second
Piola-Kirchhoff stress and the Green Lagrange strain.
If either the LARGE STRAIN parameter is included, you should enter the work hard
information in terms of true stress and true strain.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-9 1st A Enter the words WORK HARD.
Main Index
806 WORK HARD
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I For option A, enter number of slopes of the workhardening curve. For
option B, enter the number of data points. For option C, enter -1. For
implicit creep, this field is for data associated with the back stress.
6-10 2nd I This is the same in the first field except it is for the data associated with
the 10th cycle yield used in the ORNL constitutive theory. For implicit
creep, this field is for data associated with the yield stress.
11-15 3rd I Material type identification (1,2,3 etc.) for cross-referencing with the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, and ANISOTROPIC options.
16-20 4th I Enter unit number for input of workhardening data. Defaults to input file.
Data blocks 3a and 4a are used in conjunction with Option A.
3a data block
The number of blocks entered is equal to the number of slopes entered above.
Included only if the first field of 2nd data block > 0.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of the workhardening curve.
16-30 2nd F Enter the breakpoint when the slope becomes operative. The breakpoint
and slope data should be described in ascending order of the equivalent
plastic strain, the first slope starting at zero plastic strain.
Note: The workhardening slope should be for a uniaxial tension
specimen, and is the change in stress per unit of plastic strain,
not per unit of total strain. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information.
For implicit creep, the slope-breakpoint data in data block 3a is

for the back stress versus creep strain.
4a data block
Included only if the first field of 2nd data line > 0. Then, number of blocks is equal to that number.
1-15 1st F Slope of 10th cycle workhardening curve (stress change per plastic strain
change).
16-30 2nd F Breakpoint when above slope becomes operative. First breakpoint should
be at zero plastic strain.
Note: For implicit creep, the slope-breakpoint data in data block 4a is
for the yield stress versus plastic strain.
Data blocks 3b and 4b are used in conjunction with Option B.
Main Index
WORK HARD 807
Format
Data
3b data block
The number of blocks entered is equal to the number of data points entered above.
1-15 1st F Enter the equivalent stress.
16-30 2nd F Enter the equivalent plastic strain. The data should be described in
ascending order of equivalent plastic strain; the first data set starting at
zero plastic strain.
Note: For implicit creep, the stress-strain data in data block 3b is for
the back stress versus equivalent creep strain.
4b data block
Included only if the first field of 2nd data line > 0. Then, number of data lines is equal to that number.
1-15 1st Enter the equivalent stress associated with the 10th cycle work-hardening
curve.
16-30 2nd Enter the equivalent plastic strain.
Note: For implicit creep, the stress-strain data in data block 4b is for
the yield stress versus equivalent plastic strain.
Main Index
808 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress)
Define Effects of Temperature
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress) Define Effects of Temperature
input style. If table driven input is used, material data should include
references to tables that provide temperature dependent behavior.
Description
This option defines the variation of material properties (Young’s modulus, yield stress, Poisson’s ratio,
and coefficient of thermal expansion) with temperature. The values read in through either the
ISOTROPIC or POWDER option are those at the lowest temperature specified. Properties are not defined
below the lowest temperature. The temperature dependency can be entered using one of the following
two options:
a. The variation of a particular property with temperature is specified as a piecewise linear curve.
Breakpoints must be given in ascending order of temperature.
b. The particular property value and temperature lying on the relevant curve are input directly.
Data points must be given in increasing order of temperature. This option is flagged by
entering the word DATA on the first data line.
Note: For Mooney materials, the temperature dependence for C10 and C01 can be defined by
replacing C10 for “Young’s modulus” and C01 for “Poisson’s ratio”. The other constants
can be specified by utilizing the UMOONY user subroutine. For the Arruda-Boyce model,
the temperature dependence of nkT and N can be defined using the “Young’s modulus” and
“Poisson’s ratio” field, respectively. For the Gent model, the temperature dependence of E
(tension modulus) and Im (maximum invariant) can be defined in these fields, respectively.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words TEMPERATURE EFFECTS.
21-80 2nd A Enter the word DATA to indicate that option B is used.
For option A, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, 5a, 6a, 7a and 8a. For option B, use data blocks 2b, 3b, 4b, 5b,
6b, 7b and 8b, below.
Main Index
Format
Data
Option A
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of slopes of yield stress versus temperature curve.
For implicit creep, number of slopes of back stress versus
temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of slopes of Young’s modulus versus temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of slopes of Poisson’s ratio versus temperature curve
16-20 4th I Number of slopes for instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion
versus temperature.
21-25 5th I Number of slopes of 10th cycle yield stress versus temperature curve of
ORNL constitutive theory option, or for powder materials, number of
slopes of viscosity versus temperature.
For implicit creep, number of slopes of yield stress versus temperature
curve.
26-30 6th I Number of slopes of the workhardening versus temperature curve.
31-35 7th I Material type identification (1,2,3,...) for cross-referencing the
ISOTROPIC option.
36-40 8th I Logical unit number for input of this set of data. Defaults to data lines.
3a data block
The number entered in the first field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines in data block 3.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of yield stress versus the temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Enter the temperature at which the above slope becomes operative.
for the back stress versus temperature.
4a data block
The number entered in the second field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in
data block 4.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of Young’s modulus versus the temperature curve.
5a data block
The number in the third field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 5.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of Poisson’s ratio versus the temperature curve.
Main Index
Format
Data
6a data block
The number in the fourth field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 6.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion.
16-30 2nd F Enter the temperature at which the above slope becomes operative. These
are instantaneous values.
7a data block
Slopes/breakpoints for 10th cycle yield or viscosity versus temperature curve. The number in the fifth
field of data block 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 7.
1-15 1st F Slope of 10th cycle yield or viscosity versus temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Temperature at which this slope becomes operative.
for the yield stress versus temperature.
8a data block
Slopes and breakpoints of the curve describing the ratio of the workhardening curve at temperature to
the workhardening curve at the first breakpoint of this set; that is, H ( ε p, T o ) • R ( T ) is the workhardening
slope at T given in terms of H ( ε p, T o ) the workhardening slope at plastic strain εp and the first
dR
breakpoint of this set, To, and R(T), the ratio parameter. In these data lines ------- the slope of the ratio
dT
curve, is input.
The ratio R(T) is not dependent on ε p , only on T. The number in the sixth field of data block 2 defines
the number of lines required in data block 8.
1-15 1st F Slope of ratio of workhardening slope versus temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Temperature at which this slope becomes operative.
Option B
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points on the yield stress versus temperature curve.
For implicit creep, number of data points of back stress versus
temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of data points on the Young’s modulus versus temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of data points on the Poisson’s ratio versus temperature curve.
16-20 4th I Number of data points on the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
expansion versus temperature.
Main Index
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Number of data points on the 10th cycle yield stress versus temperature
curve of ORNL constitutive theory option, or number of data points on the
viscosity versus temperature curve for powder materials.
For implicit creep, number of data points of yield stress versus
temperature curve.
26-30 6th I Number of data points on the workhardening versus temperature curve.
ISOTROPIC option.
3b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the yield stress.
16-30 2nd F Enter the associated temperature.
Note: For implicit creep, the value in data block 3b is for the back
stress versus temperature.
4b data block
The number entered in the second field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in
data block 4.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the Young’s modulus.
5b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the Poissons’s ratio.
6b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion.
7b data block
The number in the fifth field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 7.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the 10th cycle yield or viscosity.
Note: For implicit creep, the value in data block 7b is for the yield
stress versus temperature.
Main Index
Format
Data
8b data block
Data points on the curve describing the ratio of the workhardening curve at a given temperature to the
workhardening curve at the first temperature of this set; that is, H ( ε p, T o ) • R ( T ) is the workhardening
slope at plastic strain, εp , and the first temperature of this set, T, and R(T), the ratio parameter.
The same temperature effects are applied for all values of εp ; that is, the ratio R(T) is not dependent
on ε p , only on T. The number in the sixth field of data block 2 defines the number of data lines
required in data block 8.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the ratio of the workhardening slope vs. the temperature
curve, R(T).
Note: In calculating a particular temperature dependent property,
Marc averages the value of this property at the start and at the
end of the increment. Also, a first order correction is made for
the effect of temperature change on the total elastic stresses
because of changes in material properties. Even in the elastic
case, you should not expect a simple calculation with property
values corresponding to the temperature at the end of the
increment. More details are given on the discussion of
temperature-dependent plasticity in Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Main Index
Temperature Effects in Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal- Temperature Effects in Coupled

Stress) Thermal-Stress Analysis
Description
This option defines the variation of material properties (Young’s modulus, yield stress, Poisson’s ratio,
and coefficient of thermal expansion) with temperature. The values read in through either the
ISOTROPIC or POWDER options are those at the lowest temperature specified. Properties are not
defined below the lowest temperature. The temperature dependency can be entered using one of the
following two options:
entering the word DATA on the first data line.
Notes: For Mooney materials, the temperature dependence for C10 and C01 can be defined by
replacing C10 for “Young’s modulus” and C01 for “Poisson’s ratio”. The other constants
can be specified by utilizing the UMOONY user subroutine. For the Arruda-Boyce model,
the temperature dependence of nkT and N can be defined using the “Young’s modulus” and
“Poisson’s ratio” field, respectively. For the Gent model, the temperature dependence of E
(tension modulus) and Im (maximum invariant) can be defined in these fields, respectively.
In calculating a particular temperature dependent property, Marc averages the value of this
property at the start and at the end of the increment. Also, a first order correction is made
for the effect of temperature change on the total elastic stresses because of changes in
material properties. Even in the elastic case, you should not expect a simple calculation
with property values corresponding to the temperature at the end of the increment. More
details are given on the discussion of temperature-dependent plasticity in Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information.
Main Index
814 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress)
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
For option A, use data blocks 2a and 13a. For option B, use data blocks 2b through 13b, below.
Option A
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of slopes of yield stress versus temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of slopes of Young’s modulus versus temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of slopes of Poisson’s ratio versus temperature curve.
16-20 4th I Number of slopes for instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion
versus temperature.
21-25 5th I Number of slopes of 10th cycle yield stress versus temperature curve of
ORNL constitutive theory option, or for powder materials, number of
slopes of viscosity versus temperature.
26-30 6th I Number of slopes of the workhardening versus temperature curve.
31-35 7th I Number of slopes of conductivity versus temperature curve
36-40 8th I Number of slopes of specific heat versus temperature curve.
41-45 9th I Number of latent heats to be entered.
46-50 10th I Number of slopes of resistivity versus temperature curve.
51-55 11th I Number of slopes of emissivity versus temperature curve.
ISOTROPIC option.
61-55 13th I Logical unit number for input of this set of data. Defaults to blocks.
3a data block
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of yield stress versus the temperature curve.
Main Index
Format
Data
4a data block
The number entered in the second field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data
block 4.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of Young’s modulus versus the temperature curve.
5a data block
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of Poisson’s ratio versus the temperature curve.
6a data block
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion.
16-30 2nd F Enter the temperature at which the above slope becomes operative. These
are instantaneous values.
7a data block
Slopes/breakpoints for 10th cycle yield or viscosity versus temperature curve. The number in the fifth
field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 7.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of 10th cycle yield stress or viscosity versus temperature
curve.
16-30 2nd F Enter the temperature at which this slope becomes operative.
8a data block
Slopes and breakpoints of the curve describing the ratio of the workhardening curve at temperature to
the workhardening curve at the first breakpoint of this set; that is, H ( ε p, T o ) • R ( T ) is the workhardening
slope at T given in terms of H ( ε p, T o ) the workhardening slope at plastic strain εp and the first
dR-
breakpoint of this set, To, and R(T), the ratio parameter. In these data lines ------ the slope of the ratio
dT
curve, is input.
The ratio R(T) is not dependent on ε p , only on T. The number in the sixth field of data line 2 defines
the number of data lines required in data block 8.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of ratio of workhardening slope versus temperature curve.
Main Index
Format
Data
9a data block
Conductivity variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, seventh field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of conductivity versus temperature curve.
10a data block
Specific heat variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, eighth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of specific heat versus temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Temperature above which this slope becomes operative.
11a data block
Latent heat. Number of data lines given on data line 2, ninth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the latent heat.
16-30 2nd F Enter the solidus temperature (lower phase change limit).
31-45 3rd F Enter the liquidus temperature (upper phase change limit).
12a data block
Resistivity variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, eleventh field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of resistivity versus temperature curve.
13a data block
Emissivity variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, tenth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of emissivity versus temperature curve.
Option B
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points on the yield stress versus temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of data points on the Young’s modulus versus temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of data points on the Poisson’s ratio versus temperature curve.
16-20 4th I Number of data points on the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
expansion versus temperature.
21-25 5th I Number of data points on the 10th cycle yield stress versus temperature
curve of ORNL constitutive theory option, or number of data points on the
viscosity versus temperature curve for powder materials.
26-30 6th I Number of data points on the workhardening versus temperature curve.
31-35 7th I Number of data points on the conductivity versus temperature curve.
Main Index
Format
Data
36-40 8th I Number of data points on the specific heat versus temperature curve.
46-50 10th I Number of data points on the resistivity versus temperature curve.
51-55 11th I Number of data points on the emissivity versus temperature curve.
ISOTROPIC option.
3b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the yield stress.
4b data block
The number entered in the second field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data
block 4.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the Young’s modulus.
5b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the Poissons’s ratio.
6b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion.
7b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the 10th cycle yield or viscosity.
Main Index
Format
Data
8b data block
Data points on the curve describing the ratio of the workhardening curve at a given temperature to the
workhardening curve at the first temperature of this set; that is, H ( ε p, T o ) • R ( T ) is the workhardening
slope at plastic strain, εp , and the first temperature of this set, T, and R(T), the ratio parameter.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the ratio of the workhardening slope vs. the temperature
curve, R(T).
Note: The same temperature effects are applied for all values of ε p ,
that is, the ratio R(T) is not dependent on ε p , only on T. The
number in the sixth field of data line 2 defines the number of
data lines required in data block 8.
9b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the conductivity.
10b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the specific heat.
11b data block
Latent heat. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, ninth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the latent heat.
12b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the emissivity.
Main Index
Format
Data
13b data block
Resistivity variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, eleventh field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of resistivity heat.
end of the increment. Also, a first order correction is made for
the effect of temperature change on the total elastic stresses
because of changes in material properties. Even in the elastic
case, you should not expect a simple calculation with property
values corresponding to the temperature at the end of the
increment. More details are given on the discussion of
temperature-dependent plasticity in Marc Volume A:
User Information.
Main Index
820 ORTHO TEMP (Structural)
Define Temperature Effects for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHO TEMP (Structural) Define Temperature Effects for Orthotropic Materials
Description
This option defines the variation of all orthotropic material properties with temperature. Note that the
values read in through the ORTHOTROPIC model definition option are those at the lowest temperature
defined. Properties at temperatures below this temperature are defined to be equal to properties at this
temperature.
The variation of a particular property is defined as a piecewise linear curve. Two options are available to
define this curve.
a. Slope/breakpoint data in ascending order of temperature can be given.
b. Property value/temperature data in ascending order of temperature can be given. This option
is flagged by entering the word DATA after the string ORTHO TEMP on data block 1.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ORTHO TEMP.
12-15 2nd A Enter the word DATA to indicate that Option B defined above is to be used.
(There must be a space or comma between ORTHO TEMP and DATA.)
For Option A, use the 2a-22a data blocks. For Option B, use the 2b-22b data blocks.
Option A
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of slopes of yield vs. temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of slopes of E11 vs temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of slopes of E22 vs temperature curve.
Enter -1 to have (E22 vs. temp.) ≡ (E11 vs. temp.).
16-20 4th I Number of slopes of E33 vs. temperature curve.
21-25 5th I Number of slopes of ν12 vs. temperature curve.
Main Index
Format
Data
Enter -1 to have (ν23 vs. temp.) ≡ (ν12 vs. temp.).
Enter -1 to have (ν31 vs. temp.) ≡ (ν12 vs. temp.)
36-40 8th I Number of slopes of G12 vs. temperature curve.
Enter -1 to have (G23 vs. temp.) ≡ (G12 vs. temp.).
51-55 11th I Number of slopes of α11 vs. temperature curve.
Enter -1 to have (α22 vs. temp.) ≡ (α11 vs. temp.).
66-70 14th I Number of slopes of the workhardening vs. temperature curve.
71-75 15th I Enter the material identification for this data set.
76-80 16th I Enter the unit number for input of this data. Defaults to input file.
3a data block
Include this data block only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-5 1st I Number of slopes of K11 vs. temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of slopes of K22 vs. temperature curve.
Enter -1 to have (K22 vs. temp.) ≡ (K11 vs. temp.).
11-15 3rd I Number of slopes of K33 vs. temperature curve.
16-20 4th I Number of slopes of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
21-25 5th I Number of latent heats.
26-30 6th I Number of slopes of resistivity 11 versus temperature.
41-45 9th I Number of slopes of emissivity versus temperature.
Main Index
Format
Data
4a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, first field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of yield vs. temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Temperature at which above slope becomes operative.
5a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, second field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of E11 vs. temperature curve.
6a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
7a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, fourth field, or 0 if n = -1.
8a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, fifth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of ν12 vs. temperature curve.
9a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, sixth field, or 0 if n = -1.
10a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, seventh field, or 0 if n = -1.
11a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, eighth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of G12 vs. temperature curve.
Main Index
Format
Data
12a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, ninth field, or 0 if n = -1.
13a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, tenth field, or 0 if n = -1.
14a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, eleventh field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of α11 vs. temperature curve.
15a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, twelfth field, or 0 if n = -1.
16a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, thirteenth field, or 0 if n=-1.
17a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, fourteenth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of the ratio of work hardening slope vs. temperature.
Note: To define the dependence of 10th cycle yield on temperature,
use the YIEL user subroutine.
The following data blocks are used only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
Main Index
Format
Data
18a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in the first field of the 3a data block.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of K11 vs. temperature curve.
19a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the second field of the 3a data block, or 0 if
n = -1.
20a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the third field of the 3a data block, or 0 if
n = -1.
21a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in the fourth field of the 3a data block.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
22a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in the fifth field of the 3a data block.
1-15 1st F Enter latent heat value.
16-30 2nd F Solidus temperature (lower phase change limit).
31-45 3rd F Liquidus temperature (upper phase change limit).
23a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in the sixth field of the 3a data block.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of R 11 versus temperature curve.
24a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the seventh field of the 3a data block or 0 if
n = -1.
Main Index
Format
Data
25a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the seventh field of the 3a data block or 0 if
n = -1.
26a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in the ninth field of the 3a data block.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of emissivity.
Option B
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points of yield.
6-10 2nd I Number of data points of E11 vs. temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of data points of E22 vs. temperature curve. Enter -1 to have (E22
vs. temp.) ≡ (E11 vs. temp.).
16-20 4th I Number of data points of E33.
21-25 5th I Number of data points of ν12.
36-40 8th I Number of data points of G12.
51-55 1th1 I Number of data points of α11.
56-60 12th I Number of data points of α22.
Main Index
Format
Data
61-65 13th I Number of data points of α33.
66-70 14th I Number of data points of the workhardening vs. temperature curve.
71-75 15th I Enter the material identification for this data set.
76-80 16th I Enter the unit number for input of this data. Defaults to input file.
3b data block
Include this data block only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-5 1st I Number of data points of K11
6-10 2nd I Number of data points of K22.
Enter -1 to have (K22 vs. temp.) ≡ (K11 vs. temperature).
11-15 3rd I Number of data points of K33.
Enter -1 to have (K33 vs. temp.) ≡ (K11 vs. temperature).
16-20 4th I Number of data points of specific heat
4b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, first field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of yield stress.
5b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, second field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of E11.
6b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
7b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, fourth field, or 0 if n = -1.
Main Index
Format
Data
8b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, fifth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of ν12.
9b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, sixth field, or 0 if n = -1.
10b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, seventh field, or 0 if n = -1.
11b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, eighth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of G12.
12b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, ninth field, or 0 if n = -1.
13b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, tenth field, or 0 if n = -1.
14b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, eleventh field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of α11.
Main Index
Format
Data
15b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, twelfth field, or 0 if n = -1.
16b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, thirteenth field, or 0 if n = -1.
17b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, fourteenth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of work hardening slope.
Note: To define the dependence of 10th cycle yield on temperature,
use the YIEL user subroutine.
The following five data blocks are used only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
18b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 3b, first field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of K11.
19b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 3b, second field, or 0 if n = -1.
20b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 3b, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
21b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 3b, fourth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of specific heat.
Main Index
Format
Data
22b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 3b, fifth field.
23b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in the sixth field of the 3b data block.
24b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the seventh field of the 3b data block or 0 if
n = -1.
25b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the seventh field of the 3b data block or 0 if
n = -1.
26b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in the ninth field of the 3b data block
1-15 1st F Enter the value of emissivity.
Main Index
830 TIME-TEMP
Define Effects of Time/Temperature Transformation
TIME-TEMP Define Effects of Time/Temperature Transformation
Description
This option provides you with the option of defining either mechanical or thermal (heat transfer)
properties as a function of both temperature and the rate at which the temperature changes. It can also be
used to describe the effects of phase transformations on these properties. You are reminded to include the
T-T-T parameter when invoking this option. If the material properties are strictly dependent on
temperature and not time as well, the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option should be used instead.
In performing a thermal-stress analysis, the mechanical properties, which can be defined as a function of
time-temperature-transformation (T-T-T), are the Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield stress, work or
strain hardening rate, and thermal coefficient of expansion. The effects of volumetric change due to phase
transformation can be included through the definition of the thermal coefficient of expansion.
In performing a transient heat transfer analysis, the thermal properties, which can be defined as a function
of T-T-T, are the thermal conductivity and the specific heat per unit reference mass. Here, the effects of
heat or phase transformation can be included through the definition of the specific heat.
You are expected to have the test data for each property of each material group in a tabular form. For a
given cooling rate, the value of a property must be known at discrete points over a range of temperature.
There can be several sets of this data corresponding to measurements at several different cooling rates.
The cooling tests must be of a specific type known as “Newton Cooling”; for example, the temperature
change in the material is controlled such that
T(t) = A exp(-at) + B
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words TIME-TEMP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the total number of different material groups with time-temperature-
transformation dependent properties.
3rd data block
This data block is used to specify the minimum and maximum temperatures bracketing the range over
which the property values given below are meant to apply.
1-10 1st F Enter the value of the minimum temperature.
11-20 2nd F Enter the value of the maximum temperature.
Data blocks 4 through 8 are repeated for each material group.
Main Index
TIME-TEMP 831
Format
Data
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the material group number whose properties are defined in the
following data block.
6-10 2nd I Enter the element number corresponding to the first element in a
consecutive list of elements for this material group.
11-15 3rd I Enter the element number corresponding to the last elements in a
consecutive list of elements for this material group.
5th data block
a) Stress Analysis
1-5 1st I Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the Young’s modulus for
this material group. If this number is preceded by a minus sign, all
properties for this material group are assigned the same number of cooling
rates. In this case, the remaining fields on this block need not be specified.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the Poisson’s ratio for this
material group.
11-15 3rd I Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the yield point for this
material group.
16-20 4th I Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the work hardening rate
for this material group.
21-25 5th I Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the coefficient of thermal
expansion for this material group.
b) Heat Transfer (Thermal) Analysis
1-5 1st I Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the thermal conductivity
for this material group.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the specific heat per unit
reference mass for this material group.
Main Index
832 TIME-TEMP
Format
Data
6th data block
The coefficients associated with the definition of each cooling rate are specified in this data block. The
cooling rates are described by the formula
T(t) = Aij exp(-aij t) + Bij
where i refers to a particular cooling rate and j refers to a particular property
This data block is comprised of sets of blocks. There can be as many as five sets for a thermal-stress
analysis and a maximum of two sets for a heat transfer analysis corresponding to the maximum number
of properties which can be a function of time-temperature-transformation in each case. The number of
blocks in each set corresponds to the five (stress analysis) or two (heat transfer analysis) entries given
in the fifth data block. The order of the block sets is the same as for the entries on data block 5. On each
block, specify the coefficients for a particular rate. The order within each set must be from the fastest
to the slowest rate.
1-10 1st F Enter the value of the coefficient “A” in the above equation.
11-20 2nd F Enter the value of the coefficient “a” in the above equation.
21-30 3rd F Enter the value of the constant “B” in the above equation.
31-50 4th I If the number of cooling rates associated with each property is the same
and magnitude (that is, coefficients) of these rates is also the same, enter
a positive integer in this field on the first block (only) in this series. It is
then necessary to specify the coefficients of each cooling rate for only a
single property of the material group being used.
7th data block
1-80 1st I Specify the number of temperature points at which a property value is
specified for each cooling rate associated with a given property. If more
than sixteen cooling rates are being used, use additional blocks. The order
is from the fastest to the slowest cooling rate. Beginning on a new block
repeat this block set for each property. The order in which properties are
considered corresponds to the order specified in data block 5. (16I5)
If the number of temperature points is the same for all cooling rates of all
properties, enter this value in the first field preceded by a minus sign.
Main Index
TIME-TEMP 833
Format
Data
8th data block
The actual property values are defined in this data block. This series should be considered as a data
block. There are as many sub-blocks in it as there are properties with time-temperature-transformation
dependent effects for this material group. The order in which the property subblocks should be
specified is given in data blocks 5(a) or 5(b).
Each property sub-block can be considered as consisting of a series of block sets. The number of block
sets per sub-block corresponds to the number of cooling rates for the particular property in question.
These block sets are specified in the order of fastest to slowest cooling rate.
Each block set of a sub-block, corresponding to a given cooling rate for a given property, contains as
many blocks as there are temperature levels where a discrete value of the property is defined. The
property values must be defined in the order of increasing temperature levels.
1-10 1st F Enter the value of the material property for a particular cooling rate and
temperature level.
11-20 2nd F Enter the temperature level corresponding to the property value
defined above.
Main Index
834 SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input)
Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model
Input)
Description
This option allows you to define material properties used in conjunction with shape memory material
model. Two models are provided, a thermo-mechanical and a simplified mechanical (Auricchio) model.
Details of these models are provided in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 7.
Notes: The simplified mechanical model only supports ndi = 3 cases (3-D, plane-strain,
and axisymmetric elements). It does not support ndi = 1 and ndi = 2 (1-D and
plane-stress elements).
In the current release, the table IDs are not used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SHAPE MEMORY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets Shape Memory material data to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3 to 10 (thermo-mechanical model) or data blocks 3 to 6 (mechanical model) are repeated
as a set; once for each set of shape memory material defined.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Shape memory alloy model type:
0 or 1 Thermo-mechanical shape memory model.
2 Mechanical shape memory (Auricchio) model.
21-32 5th A Enter the material name.
Main Index
Format
Data
Data blocks 4a, 5a, 6a, 7a, 8a, 9a, and 10a are associated with the thermo-mechanical model.
4a data block
Austenite Properties
1-10 1st F Young’s modulus.
11-20 2nd F Poisson’s ratio.
21-30 3rd F Coefficient of thermal expansion.
41-50 5th F Mass density.
4aa data block
16-20 4th I Table ID for equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.
5a data block
Martensite Properties
5aa data block
16-20 4th I Table ID for equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.
6a data block
Kinetics of Phase Transformation
σ eq σ eq
M s = M s0 + -------- M f = M f0 + --------
Cm Cm
σ eq σ eq
A s = A s0 + -------- A f = A f0 + --------
Ca Ca
Main Index
Format
Data
1-10 1st F Martensite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( M s0 ).
11-20 2nd F Martensite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( M f0 ).
21-30 3rd F Slope of the stress-dependence of martensite start finish and start
temperatures ( C m ).
31-40 4th F Austenite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( A s0 ).
41-50 5th F Austenite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( A f0 ).
51-60 6th F Slope of the stress-dependence of austenite start finish and start
temperatures ( C a ).
6aa data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for martensite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( M s0 ).
6-10 2nd I Table ID for martensite finish temperature in the stress-free condition
( M f0 ).
11-15 3rd I Table ID for slope of the stress-dependence of martensite start finish and
start temperatures ( C m ).
16-20 4th I Table ID for austenite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( A s0 ).
21-25 5th I Table ID for austenite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( A f0 ).
26-30 6th I Table ID for slope of the stress-dependence of austenite start finish and
start temperatures ( C a ).
7a data block
Transformation Strains
1-10 1st F Equivalent deviatoric transformation strain ( ε eq
T ).
11-20 2nd F Volumetric part of the transformation strain ( ε vT ).

21-30 3rd F Twinning stress ( σ efg f ).
Twinning becomes operational when the equivalent stress reaches the
twinning stress.
Main Index
Format
Data
7aa data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for equivalent deviatoric transformation strain ( ε eq
T ).
6-10 2nd I Table ID for volumetric part of the transformation strain ( ε vT ).

11-15 3rd I Table ID for twinning stress ( σ efg f ).
twinning stress.
8a data block
Coefficient of function g
gb gd gf
σ eq σ eq σ eq σ eq
g ⎛ --------⎞ = 1 – exp g a ⎛ --------⎞ + g c ⎛ --------⎞ + g e ⎛ --------⎞
⎝ g0 ⎠ ⎝ g0 ⎠ ⎝ g0 ⎠ ⎝ g0 ⎠
1-10 1st F Coefficient ga .
11-20 2nd F Exponent gb .
21-30 3rd F Coefficient gc .
31-40 4th F Exponent gd .
41-50 5th F Coefficient ge .
51-60 6th F Exponent gf .
8aa data block

1-5 1st I Table ID for coefficient ga .
6-10 2nd I Table ID for exponent gb .
11-15 3rd I Table ID for coefficient gc .
16-20 4th I Table ID for exponent gd .
11-25 5th I Table ID for coefficient ge .
26-30 6th I Table ID for exponent gf .
Main Index
Format
Data
9a data block
Coefficient of function g (continued)
1-10 1st F Stress level ( g 0 ) used to nondimensionalizing the stress in the function.
11-20 2nd F Maximum value of function g , ( g ma x ), if a cut off value is needed.
21-30 3rd F Stress at which the maximum value of g = g max is reached ( σ max
g ) if a cut
off value is needed (normalized with g 0 ).
31-40 4th F Initial martensite volume fraction (0 - 1). Default value = 0.0
9aa data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for stress level ( g 0 ) used to nondimensionalizing the stress in the
function.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum value of function g , ( g max ), if a cut off value is
needed.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for stress at which the maximum value of g = g max is reached
( σ max
g ) if a cut off value is needed (normalized with g 0 ).
16-20 4th I Table ID for initial martensite volume fraction (0 - 1). Default value = 0.0
Data blocks 4b and 5b are associated with Auricchio’s model.
4b data block
1-10 1st F Young’s modulus (Austenite phase)
11-20 2nd F Poisson’s ratio (Austenite phase)
21-30 3rd F σ sAS
31-40 4th F σ fAS
41-50 5th F σ sS A
51-60 6th F σ fS A
61-70 7th F Mass density

4bb data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for Young’s modulus (Austenite phase)
6-10 2nd I Table ID for Poisson’s ratio (Austenite phase)
11-15 3rd I Table ID for σ sAS
16-20 4th I Table ID for σ fAS
Main Index
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Table ID for σ sSA
26-30 6th I Table ID for σ fSA
5b data block
1-10 1st F εL
11-20 2nd F α
21-30 3rd F Reference temperature used to measure stresses ( T o ).

31-40 4th F Slope of the stress-dependence for martensite ( C m ).
41-50 5th F Slope of the stress-dependence for austenite ( C a ).
51-60 6th F Young’s modulus of Martensite phase; if 0, defaults to Austenite phase.
61-70 7th F Poisson’s ratio of Martensite phase; if 0, defaults to Austenite phase.
5bb data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for εL
6-10 2nd I Table ID for α
11-15 3rd I Table ID for reference temperature used to measure stresses ( T o ).

16-20 4th I Table ID for slope of the stress-dependence for martensite ( C m ).
11-25 5th I Table ID for slope of the stress-dependence for austenite ( C a ).
26-30 6th I Table ID for Young’s modulus of Martensite phase.
31-35 7th I Table ID for Poisson’s ratio of Matensite phase.
Main Index
840 SHAPE MEMORY
SHAPE MEMORY Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material properties used in conjunction with shape memory material
model. Two models are provided, a thermo-mechanical and a simplified mechanical (Auricchio) model.
Details of these models are provided in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 7.
Note: The simplified mechanical model only supports ndi = 3 cases (3-D, plane-strain,
and axisymmetric elements). It does not support ndi = 1 and ndi = 2 (1-D and
plane-stress elements).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SHAPE MEMORY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets Shape Memory material data to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3 to 10 (thermo-mechanical model) or data blocks 3 to 6 (mechanical model) are repeated
as a set; once for each set of shape memory material defined.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Shape memory alloy model type:
0 or 1 Thermo-mechanical shape memory model.
2 Mechanical shape memory (Auricchio) model.
11-15 3rd I Not used
16-20 4th I Not used
Data blocks 4a through 10a are associated with the thermo-mechanical model.
Main Index
SHAPE MEMORY 841
Format
Data
4a data block
41-50 5th F Mass density
5a data block
6a data block
σ eq σ eq
M s = M s0 + -------- M f = M f0 + --------
Cm Cm
σ eq σ eq
A s = A s0 + -------- A f = A f0 + --------
Ca Ca
1-10 1st F Martensite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( M s0 ).

11-20 2nd F Martensite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( M f0 ).
21-30 3rd F Slope of the stress-dependence of martensite start finish and start
temperatures ( C m ).
31-40 4th F Austenite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( A s0 ).
41-50 5th F Austenite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( A f0 ).
51-60 6th F Slope of the stress-dependence of austenite start finish and start
temperatures ( C a ).
7a data block
1-10 1st F Equivalent deviatoric transformation strain ( ε eq
T ).
11-20 2nd F Volumetric part of the transformation strain ( ε vT ).
Main Index
842 SHAPE MEMORY
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F Twinning stress ( σ efg f ).
twinning stress.
8a data block
σ eq σ eq g b σ eq g d σ eq g f
g ⎛ --------⎞ = 1 – exp g a ⎛ --------⎞ + g c ⎛ --------⎞ + g e ⎛ --------⎞
⎝ g0 ⎠ ⎝ g0 ⎠ ⎝ g0 ⎠ ⎝ g0 ⎠
1-10 1st F Coefficient ga .
11-20 2nd F Exponent gb .
21-30 3rd F Coefficient gc .
31-40 4th F Exponent gd .
41-50 5th F Coefficient ge .
51-60 6th F Exponent gf .
9a data block
1-10 1st F Stress level ( g 0 ) used to nondimensionalizing the stress in the function.
11-20 2nd F Maximum value of function g , ( g ma x ), if a cut off value is needed.
21-30 3rd F Stress at which the maximum value of g = g max is reached ( σ max
g ) if a cut
off value is needed (normalized with g 0 ).
31-40 4th F Initial martensite volume fraction (0 - 1). Default value = 0.0
10a data block
Enter a list of elements associated with this material.
Data blocks 4b through 6b are associated with Auricchio’s model.
4b data block
1-10 1st F Young’s modulus of Austenite phase
11-20 2nd F Poisson’s ratio of Austenite phase
21-30 3rd F σ sAS
31-40 4th F σ fAS
41-50 5th F σ sS A
Main Index
SHAPE MEMORY 843
Format
Data
51-60 6th F σ fSA
61-70 7th F Mass Density

5b data block
1-10 1st F εL maximum strain obtained by detwinning. Default = 0.07.
11-20 2nd F α coefficient of thermal expansion.
21-30 3rd F Reference temperature used to measure stresses ( T o ).
31-40 4th F Slope of the stress-dependence for martensite ( C m ).
41-50 5th F Slope of the stress-dependence for austenite ( C a ).
51-60 6th F Young’s modulus of Martensite phase; if 0, defaults to Austenite phase.
61-70 7th F Poisson’s ratio of Martensite phase; if 0, defaults to Austenite phase.
6b data block
Main Index
844 CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input)
Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking
Input)
Description
This option inputs the uniaxial cracking data for a low tension (concrete) material. The standard material
properties, like Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio etc., are given in the ISOTROPIC option. Cross
reference is given by the material identification number. Cracking data can alternatively be specified by
the UCRACK, TENSOF, and USHRET user subroutines.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CRACK DATA.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of cracking material properties to be
input (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of cracking data. Default to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated once for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material type identification (1, 2, 3, ...) for cross-referencing the
ISOTROPIC option.
6-15 2nd F Critical cracking stress.
16-25 3rd F Modulus for tension softening material. (If no value is entered, stress goes
to zero upon cracking.)
26-35 4th F Strain at which crushing of the material occurs. If this value is not
given, it is automatically set to some large value.
36-45 5th F Shear retention factor.
Main Index
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input) 845
Format
Data
4th data block
1-5 1st I Not used; enter zero.
6-10 2nd I Table ID associated with critical cracking stress.
11-15 3rd I Table ID associated with tension softening modulus.
16-20 4th I Table ID associated with crushing strain.
21-25 5th I Table ID associated with shear retention factor.
Main Index
846 CRACK DATA
CRACK DATA Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking
input style.
Description
This option inputs the uniaxial cracking data for a low tension (concrete) material. The standard material
properties, like Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio etc., are given in the ISOTROPIC option. Cross
reference is given by the material identification number. Cracking data can alternatively be specified by
the UCRACK, TENSOF, and USHRET user subroutines.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CRACK DATA.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of element properties to be input
(optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of cracking data. Default to input.
The 3rd data block is repeated once for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material type identification (1, 2, 3, ...) for cross-referencing the
ISOTROPIC option.
6-15 2nd F Critical cracking stress.
16-25 3rd F Modulus for tension softening material. (If no value is entered, stress goes
to zero upon cracking.)
26-35 4th F Strain at which crushing of the material occurs. If this value is not
given, it is automatically set to some large value.
36-45 5th F Shear retention factor.
Main Index
Define Failure Criteria Data
FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input) Define Failure Criteria Data
Description
This option is used to define material dependent failure criteria data. Up to three failure criteria per
material can be specified. Failure indices are calculated and printed for every integration point at which
material dependent failure data exists. This option can also be used to invoke the progressive failure of a
material.
The supported failure criteria types are:
MX STRESS
MX STRAIN
TSAI-WU
HOFFMAN
HILL
HASHIN
HASHIN-TAPE
HASHIN-FABRIC
PUCK
UFAIL
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FAIL DATA.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of materials with Marc calculated failure criteria. If
blank, Marc reads until no more failure criteria data are left.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for reading. Defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are repeated as a set, once for each material with Marc calculated failure
criteria, as described above.
Main Index
848 FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Number of sets of failure criteria data for this material. No more than three
sets are allowed.
11-15 3rd I Flag to invoke the progressive failure option.
Enter 0 for no progressive failure analysis.
Enter 1 for the standard Marc method.
Enter 2 for gradual selective stiffness degradation.
Enter 3 for immediate selective stiffness degradation.
Data blocks 4 through 7 are entered for each set of failure criteria data. Data blocks 6 and 7 are not
required unless progressive failure option 2 or 3 is used.
For MX Stress:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MX STRESS.
11-20 2nd F X – Maximum tensile stress in x-direction.
21-30 3rd F Xc – Maximum absolute value of compressive stress in x-direction.
31-40 4th F Y – Maximum tensile stress in y-direction.
41-50 5th F Yc – Maximum absolute value of compressive stress in y-direction.
51-60 6th F Z – Maximum tensile stress in z-direction.
61-70 7th F Zc – Maximum absolute value of compressive stress in z-direction.
4b data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum tensile stress in x-direction.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for maximum compressive stress in x-direction.
16-20 4th I Table ID for maximum tensile stress in y-direction.
21-25 5th I Table ID for maximum compressive stress in y-direction.
26-30 6th I Table ID for maximum tensile stress in z-direction.
31-35 7th I Table ID for maximum compressive stress in z-direction.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st F Sxy – Maximum absolute value of shear stress in xy-plane.
11-20 2nd F Syz – Maximum absolute value of shear stress in yz-plane.
21-30 3rd F Szx – Maximum absolute value of shear stress in zx-plane.
Note: Xc, Yc, and Zc default to the values of X, Y, and Z, respectively,
if left undefined.
5b data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for maximum shear stress in xy-plane.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum shear stress in yz-plane.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for maximum shear stress in zx-plane.
Data blocks 6 and 7 are entered only if the progressive failure option is 2 or 3.
6th data block
1-10 1st F a1 – Residual stiffness fraction. For failure option 3, it is the fraction
of initial stiffness upon failure. For failure option 2, the stiffness
is not reduced more than this fraction. Defaults to 0.01.
7th data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 is failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to element
deactivation).
6-10 2nd I Set to 1 if failure in negative x-direction is critical.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 if failure in positive y-direction is critical.
16-20 4th I Set to 1 if failure in negative y-direction is critical.
21-25 5th I Set to 1 if failure in positive z-direction is critical.
26-30 6th I Set to 1 if failure in negative z-direction is critical.
31-35 7th I Set to 1 if failure in xy-plane is critical.
36-40 8th I Set to 1 if failure in yz-plane is critical.
41-45 9th I Set to 1 if failure in zx-plane is critical.
For MX Strain:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MX STRAIN.
11-20 2nd F εx – Maximum tensile strain in x-direction.
21-30 3rd F εxc – Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in x-direction.
31-40 4th F εy – Maximum tensile strain in y-direction.
Main Index
Format
Data
41-50 5th F εyc – Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in y-direction.
51-60 6th F εz – Maximum tensile strain in z-direction.
61-70 7th F εzc – Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in z-direction.
4b data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum tensile strain in x-direction.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for maximum compressive strain in x-direction.
16-20 4th I Table ID for maximum tensile strain in y-direction.
21-25 5th I Table ID for maximum compressive strain in y-direction.
26-30 6th I Table ID for maximum tensile strain in z-direction.
31-35 7th I Table ID for maximum compressive strain in z-direction.
5th data block
1-10 1st F γxy – Maximum absolute value of shear strain in xy-plane.
11-20 2nd F γyz – Maximum absolute value of shear strain in yz-plane.
21-30 3rd F γzx – Maximum absolute value of shear strain in zx-plane.
5b data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for maximum shear strain in xy-plane.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum shear strain in yz-plane.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for maximum shear strain in zx-plane.
6th data block
1-10 1st F a1 – Residual stiffness faction. For failure option 3, it is the fraction
7th data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 is failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to
element deactivation).
Main Index
Format
Data
For Hoffman or Hill:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter either HOFFMAN or HILL.
61-70 7th F Zc – Maximum absolute value of compressive stress z-direction.
if left undefined for Hoffman. For Hill, Xc, Yc, and Zc are
assumed to be equal to X, Y, and Z respectively and are
not used.
4b data block
5th data block
31-40 4th F Failure index. Default is 1.0.
5b data block
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
7th data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 if failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to element
deactivation).
For Tsai-Wu:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word TSAI-WU.
if left undefined.
4b data block
5th data block
41-50 5th F Fxy – Interactive strength tensor constant for the xy-plane.
Main Index
Format
Data
61-60 6th F Fyz – Interactive strength tensor constant for the yz-plane.
61-70 7th F Fzx – Interactive strength tensor constant for the zx-plane.
1 - --------
2 < --------- 1
Note: Fxy should be such that F xy ⋅ - , etc.
X X c YY c
5b data block
21-25 5th I Table ID for Fxy.
26-30 6th I Table ID for Fyz.
31-35 7th I Table ID for Fzx.
6th data block
7th data block
deactivation).
For HASHIN:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word HASHIN.
11-20 2nd F X – Maximum fiber tensile stress.
21-30 3rd F Xc – Maximum fiber compressive stress.
31-40 4th F Y – Maximum matrix tensile stress.
41-50 5th F Yc - Maximum matrix compressive stress.
Note: Xc and Yc default to the values of X and Y, respectively, if
left undefined.
4b data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum fiber tensile stress.
11-15 3rd F Table ID for maximum fiber compressive stress.
Main Index
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Table ID for maximum matrix tensile stress.
21-25 5th I Table ID for maximum matrix compressive stress.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Sxy - Maximum in-plane shear stress.
11-20 2nd F Syz - Maximum transverse shear stress.
5b data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for maximum in-plane shear stress.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum transverse shear stress.
6th data block
11-20 2nd F a2 – Factor for E2 reduction due to matrix compression failure. Takes
values between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where E2 is reduced
in the same way as for matrix tension. A value of 1.0 leads to no
E2 reduction due to matrix compression failure.
21-30 3rd F a3 – Factor for G12 reduction relative to E2 reduction. Takes values
between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where G12 is reduced in the
same way as E2. A value of 1.0 leads to no G12 reduction.
31-40 4th F a4 – Factor for E3 reduction due to fiber failure. Takes values between
0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where E3 is reduced in the same way
E1. A value of 1.0 leads to an E3 reduction due to E2 only. Values
between 0.0 and 1.0 lead to a mixture of degradation from matrix
and fiber failure.
41-50 5th F a5 – Factor for G12 reduction from fiber failure. Takes values
between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where G12 reduces only due
to matrix failure. A value of 1.0 leads to a G12 reduction due to
only fiber failure. Values between 0.0 and 1.0 lead to a mixture
of degradation from matrix and fiber failure.
Main Index
Format
Data
7th data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 if fiber tension failure is critical (leads to element deactivation).
6-10 2nd I Set to 1 if fiber compression failure is critical.
11-15 3rd E Set to 1 if matrix tension failure is critical.
16-20 4th E Set to 1 if matrix compression failure is critical.
For HASHIN-TAPE
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word HASHIN-TAPE.
11-20 2nd F X – Maximum tape fiber tensile stress.
21-30 3rd F Xc – Maximum tape fiber compressive stress.
31-40 4th F Y – Maximum tape cross fiber tensile stress.
41-50 5th F Yc – Maximum tape cross fiber compressive stress.
left undefined.
4b data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum tape fiber tensile stress.
11-15 3rd F Table ID for maximum tape fiber compressive stress.
16-20 4th I Table ID for maximum tape cross fiber tensile stress.
21-25 5th I Table ID for maximum tape cross fiber compressive stress.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Sxy – Maximum in-plane shear stress.
11-20 2nd F Syz – Maximum y-z transverse shear stress.
21-30 3rd F Sxz – Maximum x-z transverse shear stress.
5b data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum y-z transverse shear stress.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for maximum x-z transverse shear stress.
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
and fiber failure.
7th data block
For HASHIN-FABRIC
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word HASHIN-FABRIC.
11-20 2nd F X – Maximum first fiber tensile stress.
21-30 3rd F Xc – Maximum first fiber compressive stress.
31-40 4th F Y – Maximum second fiber tensile stress.
Main Index
Format
Data
41-50 5th F Yc – Maximum second fiber compressive stress.
51-60 6th F Z – Maximum thickness tensile stress.
61-70 7th F Zc – Maximum thickness compressive stress.
if left undefined.
4b data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum first fiber tensile stress.
11-15 3rd F Table ID for maximum first fiber compressive stress.
16-20 4th I Table ID for maximum second fiber tensile stress.
21-25 5th I Table ID for maximum second fiber compressive stress.
26-30 6th I Table ID for maximum thickness tensile stress
31-35 7th I Table ID for maximum thickness compressive stress
5th data block
5b data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for maximum y-z transverse shear stress.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for maximum x-z transverse shear stress.
6th data block
7th data block
S11-15 3rd E Set to 1 if matrix tension failure is critical.
Main Index
Format
Data
For PUCK:
4th data block
1-10 1sT A Enter the work PUCK.
41-50 5th F Yc – Maximum matrix compressive stress.
51-60 6th F S12 – Maximum in-plane shear stress.
left undefined.
4b data block
11-15 3rd I Table ID for maximum fiber compressive stress.
26-30 6th I Table ID for maximum in-plane shear stress.
5th data block
1-10 1st F p12C – slope of fracture envelope, in-plane compression.
11-20 2nd F p12T – slope of fracture envelope, in-plane tension. Defaults to p12C.
21-30 3rd F p23C – slope of fracture envelope, transverse compression.
31-40 4th F p23T – slope of fracture envelope, transverse tension. Not needed for
plane stress.
Defaults to p23C.
Note: For plane stress, either p12C or p23C is given (and optionally
p12T). For this case the fracture angle is calculated analytically.
5b data block
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
and fiber failure.
7th data block
16-20 4th E Set to 1 if matrix compression mode B failure is critical.
21-25 5th E Set to 1 if matrix compression mode C failure is critical.
For UFAIL:
For UFAIL type failure criterion, enter only the word UFAIL in the 4th data block and leave all other
fields blank.
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word UFAIL.
There is not 5th data blocks for this option.
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
7th data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 if failure is critical (leads to element deactivation).
Main Index
FAIL DATA 861
FAIL DATA Define Failure Criteria Data
input style.
Description
This option is used to define material dependent failure criteria data. Up to three failure criteria per
material can be specified. Failure indices are calculated and printed for every integration point at which
material dependent failure data exists. This option can also be used to invoke the progressive failure of
a material.
The supported failure criteria types are:
MX STRESS
MX STRAIN
TSAI-WU
HOFFMAN
HILL
HASHIN
HASHIN-TAPE
HASHIN-FABRIC
PUCK
UFAIL
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FAIL DATA.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of materials with Marc calculated failure criteria. If
blank, Marc reads until no more failure criteria data are left.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for reading. Defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are repeated as a set, once for each material with Marc calculated failure
criteria, as described above.
Main Index
862 FAIL DATA
Format
Data
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Number of sets of failure criteria data for this material. No more than three
sets are allowed.
11-15 3rd I Flag to invoke the progressive failure option.
Enter 0 for no progressive failure analysis.
Enter 1 for the standard Marc method.
Enter 2 for gradual selective stiffness degradation.
Enter 3 for immediate selective stiffness degradation.
Data blocks 4 and 7 are entered as pairs, once for each set of failure criteria data.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are not required unless progressive failure option 2 or 3 is used.
For MX Stress:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MX STRESS.
5th data block
if left undefined.
6th data block
Main Index
FAIL DATA 863
Format
Data
7th data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 is failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to element
deactivation).
For MX Strain:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MX STRAIN.
11-20 2nd F εx – Maximum tensile strain in x-direction.
21-30 3rd F εxc – Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in x-direction.
31-40 4th F εy – Maximum tensile strain in y-direction.
41-50 5th F εyc – Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in y-direction.
51-60 6th F εz – Maximum tensile strain in z-direction.
61-70 7th F εzc – Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in z-direction
5th data block
1-10 1st F γxy – Maximum absolute value of shear strain in xy-plane.
11-20 2nd F γyz – Maximum absolute value of shear strain in yz-plane.
21-30 3rd F γzx – Maximum absolute value of shear strain in zx-plane.
6th data block
7th data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 is failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to
element deactivation).
Main Index
864 FAIL DATA
Format
Data
For Hoffman or Hill:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter either HOFFMAN or HILL.
if left undefined for Hoffman. For Hill, Xc, Yc and Zc are
assumed to be equal to X, Y, and Z respectively and are
not used.
5th data block
6th data block
7th data block
deactivation).
Main Index
FAIL DATA 865
Format
Data
For Tsai-Wu:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word TSAI-WU.
if left undefined.
5th data block
41-50 5th F Fxy – Interactive strength tensor constant for the xy-plane.
61-60 6th F Fyz – Interactive strength tensor constant for the yz-plane.
61-70 7th F Fzx – Interactive strength tensor constant for the zx-plane.
1
2 < --------- 1-
Note: Fxy should be such that F xy - ⋅ -------- , etc.
X X c YY c
6th data block
7th data block
deactivation).
For HASHIN:
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word HASHIN.
Main Index
866 FAIL DATA
Format
Data
Note: Xc and Yc default to the values of X and Y, respectively, if left
undefined.
5th data block
11-20 2nd F Syz – Maximum transverse shear stress.
6th data block
31-40 4th F a4 – Factor for E3 reduction due to fiber failure. Takes values
between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where E3 is reduced in the
same way E1. A value of 1.0 leads to an E3 reduction due to E2
only. Values between 0.0 and 1.0 lead to a mixture of
degradation from matrix and fiber failure.
Main Index
FAIL DATA 867
Format
Data
7th data block
For HASHIN-TAPE
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word HASHIN-TAPE.
31-40 4th F Y – Maximum tape cross fiber tensile stress.
41-50 5th F Yc – Maximum cross fiber compressive stress.
undefined.
5th data block
6th data block
Main Index
868 FAIL DATA
Format
Data
7th data block
For HASHIN-FABRIC
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word HASHIN-FABRIC.
11-20 2nd F X – Maximum first fiber tensile stress.
21-30 3rd F Xc – Maximum first fiber compressive stress.
31-40 4th F Y – Maximum second fiber tensile stress.
41-50 5th F Yc – Maximum second fiber compressive stress.
51-60 6th F Z – Maximum thickness tensile stress.
61-70 7th F Zc – Maximum thickness compressive stress.
if left undefined.
5th data block
Main Index
FAIL DATA 869
Format
Data
6th data block
7th data block
For PUCK:
4th data block
1-10 1sT A Enter the work PUCK.
51-60 6th F S12 – Maximum in-plane shear stress.
undefined.
4b data block
11-15 3rd I Table ID for maximum fiber compressive stress.
26-30 6th I Table ID for maximum in-plane shear stress.
5th data block
1-10 1st F p12C – slope of fracture envelope, in-plane compression.
11-20 2nd F p12T – slope of fracture envelope, in-plane tension. Defaults to p12C.
Main Index
870 FAIL DATA
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F p23C – slope of fracture envelope, transverse compression.
31-40 4th F p23T – slope of fracture envelope, transverse tension. Not needed for
plane stress.
Defaults to p23C.
Note: For plane stress, either p12C or p23C is given (and optionally
p12T). For this case the fracture angle is calculated analytically.
5b data block
6th data block
7th data block
Main Index
FAIL DATA 871
Format
Data
16-20 4th E Set to 1 if matrix compression mode B failure is critical.
21-25 5th E Set to 1 if matrix compression mode C failure is critical.
For UFAIL:
For UFAIL type failure criteria, enter only the word UFAIL in the 4th data block and leave all other
fields blank.
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word UFAIL.
There is no 5th data block for this option.
6th data block
7th data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 if failure is critical (leads to element deactivation).
Main Index
872 MATERIAL DATA
Define Additional Material Data Constants
MATERIAL DATA Define Additional Material Data Constants
Description
This option allows you to enter additional material constants that may be required by constitutive laws,
damage models, grain size models, etc. Those fields explicitly mentioned are used by Marc models; the
other fields may be arbitrarily used and then passed to user subroutines.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MATERIAL DATA.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets.
6-10 2nd I Enter the maximum number of material data values per material ID.
Defaults to 1.
Repeat 3rd and 4th data blocks in sets.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter material ID.
4th data block
If more than 8 constants, repeat 4th data block as necessary.
1-10 1st E Enter the Activation Energy.
11-20 2nd E Enter next constant.
etc.
Note: The 2nd to 8th fields can be used by a smart user who wants to push material.
Main Index
GRAIN SIZE 873
Define Grain Size Growth Model
GRAIN SIZE Define Grain Size Growth Model
Description
This option allows you to define a model to predict the grain size based upon the process history. The
grain size can be placed on the post file for viewing.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words GRAIN SIZE.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input.
Repeat 3rd and 4th data blocks for each data set.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the grain growth model.
Enter 1 for Yada model
Enter -1 for the UGRAIN user subroutine.
4th data block
For Yada model:
The grain size (g) is defined by:
if ε < ε growth g = g 0
· – C 2 – C 3∗ Q ⁄ R T
if ε ≥ ε growth g = C 1 × ε *e
where
C5 ⁄ T
ε growth = C 4∗ e
The activation energy (Q) is specified in the MATERIAL DATA option and the universal gas constant
(R) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
1-10 1st F Enter the initial grain size g0.
11-20 2nd F Enter the initial grain size C1.
Main Index
874 GRAIN SIZE
Define Grain Size Growth Model
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F Enter the initial grain size C2.
31-40 4th F Enter the initial grain size C3.
Main Index
DAMAGE 875
Define Properties for Damaging Materials
DAMAGE Define Properties for Damaging Materials
Description
This option allows you to define a set of data for a specific material which includes a damage model. The
specific model and associated data can also be specified with this option.
Gurson Model
For elasto-plastic materials, the damage model is based on a Gurson model for the yield surface definition
for materials with voids:
σ 2 q 2 σ kk
F = ⎛ -----⎞ + 2 q 1 f cosh ⎛ --------------⎞ – [ 1 + ( q 1 f ) ] = 0
* * 2
⎝ σ y⎠ ⎝ 2σ y ⎠
Void nucleation and void growth are based on a model by Tvergaard and Needleman. Here, f * is
introduced to model the rapid decrease in load carrying capacity if void coalescence occurs:
*
f = f if f ≤ fc
* fu – fc
f = f c + --------------- ( f – f c ) if f > fc
fF – fc
the nucleation can be either stress or strain controlled. The strain controlled nucleation is given by:
p 2
· fN 1 ⎛ εm – ε n⎞ ·p
f nucleation = -------------- exp – --- ⎜ -------------------
-⎟ εm
S 2π 2⎝ S ⎠
Additional data for the initial void volume fraction can be defined with the UVOID user subroutine. Other
nucleation models are allowed via the UVOIDN user subroutine.
Rubber Models
For elastomeric materials, the model is based on the undamaged strain energy function W ° multiplied
by a Kachanov damage factor, K . The damage capability is available for Ogden strain energy model
using the total Lagrange formulation as well as the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, and general principal stretch
based model using the updated Lagrange formulation.
W = K ⋅ W°
Both continuous damage (Miehe’s formulation) as well as the discontinuous damage (Mullin’s effect)
can be modeled within an additive:
N N
∞ α β β
exp ⎛ – ------⎞ + d m exp ⎛ – ------⎞
a
K = d + ∑ dn
⎝ η n⎠ ∑ ⎝ λ m⎠
( N = 1, 2 )
n =1 m= 1
or a multiplicative format:
Main Index
876 DAMAGE
N
∞ α + δn β
K = d + ∑ d n exp ⎛ – --------------------⎞ ( N = 1, 2 )
⎝ ηn ⎠
n =1
∞
if d has not been specified, it will be automatically calculated by Marc such that at zero values of α and
β, the Kachanov factor K = 1 .
Lemaitre Model
The Lemaitre damage model is a phenomenological approach to ductile damage in ferrous materials that
are subject to large plastic deformations as they occur in the manufacturing processes. The model is based
on the thermodynamic dissipation potential of the material where ductile damage is considered as a
specific energy that is released when macroscopic fracture occurs. The Lemaitre model may only be used
with continuum elements. Without going further into detail the mathematical derivation can be found in:
Lemaitre, J.: A Course on Damage Mechanics, 2nd Ed., Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1996. In the following
paragraphs, some basic formulas are given that serve for the calculation and the interpretation of the
damage values. The material parameters can be derived by uniaxial tensile tests for the assumed forming
conditions (strain rate, temperature). Some standard values are given in this context, more information
can be found in the mentioned literature.
The Lemaitre damage model calculates three damage values which have different meanings.
Macroscopic damage is characterized by plastic deformation that leads to pore growth, pore coalescence
and final rupture of the material matrix. The damage growth begins approximately after an equivalent
plastic strain threshold, ε d . This is the first material parameter to be defined in an experiment. For mild
steels, it is assumed to be between 0.1 and 0.2. The so-called absolute damage D represents the ductile
damage growth in the material. The incremental damage law is given as follows:
2
f(η) ⋅ σ 0≤D≤1
d D = -----------------------------------------2- dε p ,
2E ⋅ S ⋅ ( 1 – D )
where the triaxiality function f(η) contains information about the state of stresses and is defined
as follows:
2 σm
f ( η ) = --- ( 1 + v ) + 3 ( 1 – 2v )η 2 η = -------
3 σ
σ is the von Mises stress, E the Young’s modulus, v the Poisson’s ratio, σm the mean normal stress, D
the current integrated value of the absolute damage at that material point and d ε p the effective plastic
strain increment. For most steels, one can assume a maximum value of D from 0.15 to 0.4 at fracture.
Copper might even reach D = 0.9 . The more ductile the material, the higher D becomes. S is called the
damage resistance factor, a material parameter to be determined from tensile tests. S is from 1 to 8
according to the ductility of the material (1 low, 8 high). This parameter influences mostly the growth of
D and can also be determined by data correlation (for example, simulate the material test then derive the
correct material parameter).
Main Index
DAMAGE 877
The critical damage D c is used to compare the ductile damage D with the “state” of the material; such
as, whether the actual conditions (stresses, strains, state of stresses, already reached damage, etc.) might
be critical for macroscopic failure:
2
σU 2
D c = D 1c -------------------------- (1 – D) 1 ≥ Dc ≥ 0
2
(σ f(η))
D 1c is the critical damage in the uniaxial loadcase, the third material parameter to be determined by
tensile tests. Most steels show a D 1 c from 0.15 to 0.4. σ v is the ultimate stress during the tensile test
(before necking begins). The lower D c , the more likely a material damage is. Note that D c behaves
contrary to D : Dc = 1 for the “safe” material and low for possible damaged regions.
In fact the comparison between D and D c is necessary to identify critical forming zones: as long as D is
(much) lower than D c , the forming operation is safe. When D reaches D c , the damage probability tends
to be 100%. The comparison is done by the relative damage value D rel (reflected in the postprocessing):
D
D rel = ------ 0 ≤ D rel ≤ 1
Dc
When D rel approaches 1 in a specific region, fracture is highly possible whereas small values indicate a
“safe” region.
Simplified Model
For elastic, elastic-plastic, or rigid-plastic materials, there is the option for you to define a simplified
damage model. You define the damage factor (df) in the UDAMAG user subroutine.
If model 9 is used, then:
p ·p
σ y = σ y ( ε , ε , T )* ( 1.0 – d f )
If model 10 is used, then:
p ·p
σ y = σ y ( ε , ε , T )* ( 1.0 – d f ) and E = E ( T )* ( 1.0 – df )
The normal data for a specific material are defined with the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, and WORK
HARD options. Cross-reference to this material is made with the material number.
For orthotropic materials, the Young’s moduli and the shear moduli are all scaled equally. These
simplified models may not be used with the FeFp elastic-plastic formulation, soil models, or in
conjunction with viscoelasticity.
Main Index
878 DAMAGE
Cockroft-Latham Damage Indicator

Cockroft-Latham damage indicator does not affect the yield stress. It is a postprocessing value to indicate
a possible damage area. It can also be used to initiate crack by removing elements in the area.
σ max ·
∫ -----------
σ
- ε dt ≥ C
where σ ma x is the maximum principal stress, σ is the effective von Mises stress and ε· is the effective
plastic strain rate. C is material constant threshold for damage.
The Cockroft-Latham model may only be used with continuum elements.
Principal-tension Damage Indicator

This damage indicator does not affect the yield stress.
σ max
∫ -----------
σ
- dt ≥ C
where σ ma x is the maximum principal stress and σ is the effective von Mises stress. C is material
constant threshold for damage.
This model may only be used with continuum elements.
Oyane Damage Indicator

σm
∫ ⎛⎝ ------
- + B⎞ ε dt ≥ C
·
σ ⎠
Similar to Cockroft-Latham, Oyane damage indicates a possible damage area where σm is the mean or
average stress, B and C are both material constants.
The Oyane model may only be used with continuum elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DAMAGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of material properties to be input
(optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the logical unit number for reading damage data. Defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if critically damaged elements should be removed from the post
file (valid only for Gurson Model).
Main Index
DAMAGE 879
Format
Data
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material type identification (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing to
ISOTROPIC or OGDEN options.
6-10 2nd I Damage Model:
0 – Gurson Model, with no nucleation.
1 – Gurson Model, with plastic-strain controlled nucleation.
2 – Gurson Model, with stress controlled nucleation.
3 – Gurson Model, with nucleation controlled by the UVOIDN
user subroutine.
4 – Elastomeric damage model; additive decomposition of the
Kachanov factor.
5 – Elastomeric damage model; multiplicative decomposition of
the Kachanov factor.
6 – Elastomeric damage model controlled by the UELDAM user
subroutine.
7 or 8 – Lemaitre damage model.
9 – Simplified damage model.
10 – Simplified model, damage applied to yield stress and Young’s
modulus.
11 – Cockroft-Latham damage indicator.
12 – Principal-tension damage indicator.
13 – Oyane damage indicator.
11-20 3rd F Scalar factor at infinity ( d ∞ ); used only for rubber damage with additive
or multiplicative decomposition of the Kachanov factor.
21-25 4th I Number of auxiliary damage variables to be stored per integration point
for damage models 9 and 10.
4a data block
Use only if the method of void nucleation (shown above) is 0, 1, 2, or 3.
1-10 1st F First yield surface multiplier q1 (recommended is q1 = 1.5).
11-20 2nd F Second yield surface multiplier q2 (recommended is q2 = 1).
21-30 3rd F Initial void volume fraction.
Main Index
880 DAMAGE
Format
Data
31-40 4th F Critical void volume fraction. This value represents the value at which
coalescence of voids start (fc).
41-50 5th F Failure void volume fraction (fF). This is the value of the void volume
fraction at which the stiffness of the material has reduced to zero.
51-60 6th F If strain controlled, enter the mean strain for nucleation.
If stress controlled, enter the mean stress for nucleation.
Not needed if UVOIDN user subroutine is used.
61-70 7th F Standard deviation in nucleation relation (S).
71-80 8th F Volume fraction of void nucleating particles fN.
Note: The presence of these blocks in the model definition option
automatically overwrites the yield criterion specified for a
specific material on the ISOTROPIC option. Currently, the
model can only be used for isotropic hardening materials.
4b data block
Use only for elastomeric damage model, additive decomposition, two term Prony series.
β
1-10 1st F First scalar factor, continuous damage ( d1 ).
11-20 2nd F First relaxation parameter, continuous damage (λ1).
β
21-30 3rd F Second scalar factor, continuous damage ( d2 ).
31-40 4th F Second relaxation parameter, continuous damage (λ2).
α
41-50 5th F First scalar factor, discontinuous damage ( d1 ).
51-60 6th F First relaxation parameter, discontinuous damage (η1).

α
61-70 7th F Second scalar factor, discontinuous damage ( d2 ).
71-80 8th F Second relaxation parameter, discontinuous damage (η2).
4c data block
Use only for elastomeric damage model, multiplicative decomposition, two term Prony Series.
1-10 1st F First scalar factor (d1).
11-20 2nd F First proportioning term (δ1).
21-30 3rd F First relaxation rate constant (η1).
Main Index
DAMAGE 881
Format
Data
31-40 4th F Second scalar factor (d2).
41-50 5th F Second proportioning term (δ2).
51-60 6th F Second relaxation rate constant (η2).
4d data block
Used only for Lemaitre models, type 7 and 8.
1-10 1st F Critical uniaxial damage ( D 1c ) .
11-20 2nd F Corrected ultimate stress ( σv ) .
21-30 3rd F Damage resistance factor (S) .

51-60 6th F Plastic strain threshold before damage ( εd ) .
4e data block
Used only for damage models type 11, 12, and 13.
1-10 1st F Damage threshold. Default 0.
11-20 2nd F Material constant (B) of Oyane damage model.
71-80 8th F Damage crack threshold (element removal).
Default 0 (no such control).
Note: For damage models 11, 12, and 13, the UDAMAGE_INDICATOR user subroutine can be used
to implement different damage indicators not supported here.
Main Index
882 GAP DATA
Define Data for Gap Elements
GAP DATA Define Data for Gap Elements
Description
This option allows you to specify all of the data associated with gap elements (types 12 and 97).
These data include gap closure distance, gap elastic stiffness, contact coefficient of friction, and
momentum ratio.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words GAP DATA.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of gap data to be input.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for reading data. Defaults to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each set of gap data.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F For a fixed direction gap, enter the gap closure distance Ucl.
For a true distance gap, enter the minimum distance d between end points.
Note: If d > 0, the two end points is never closer than a distance |d|
apart. If d < 0, the two end points are never farther apart than |d|.
11-20 2nd F μ, the contact coefficient of friction.
21-30 3rd F KGAP, the elastic stiffness of the closed gap in the contact direction.
Default: Gap is rigid when closed.
31-40 4th F KFRICTION, the elastic stiffness of the closed gap in the friction direction.
41-50 5th F User supplied momentum ratio for first gap node. Default: Marc
calculates this ratio internally.
51-60 6th F User supplied momentum ratio for fourth gap node. Default: Marc
Main Index
GAP DATA 883
Define Data for Gap Elements
Format
Data
61-65 7th I Enter 0 for fixed direction gap.
Enter 1 for true distance gap. Default is 0.
66-70 8th I Enter 0 if gap is open during increment 0.
Enter 1 if gap is closed during increment 0. Default is 0.
4th data block
Enter a list of gap elements to be associated with this set of gap data.
Main Index
884 COMPOSITE
Define Properties for Laminated Composite Materials
COMPOSITE Define Properties for Laminated Composite Materials
Description
This option allows you to define the layer-by-layer material identifications, layer thicknesses, and
orientation angles for a laminated composite material and to associate this information with an element
number. Property data for each material identification is entered using the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
ANISOTROPIC, HYPOELASTIC, or NLELAST options.
If the fast-integrated option is used, the material behavior of each layer must be entered using only the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC options.
To specify a user-defined orientation, use the ORIENTATION option. Note that an input error results if
the COMPOSITE option is specified for nonlayered elements.
This option is available for shell, beams in a plane (type 16), composite solid (types 149-154, 175-180)
or solid shell (type 185) elements. It is not available for open and closed-section beam elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word COMPOSITE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of composite group data sets to follow.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input. Defaults to standard input (unit 5).
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to use the 4a data block (default).
Enter 2 to use the 4b data block, which allows specification of the ply ID.
(Pre-release in 2005r3 release)
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Composite group number.
6-10 2nd I Number of layers in this group.
11-15 3rd I Enter 0 to input actual layer thicknesses in the second field of the 4th data
block. (Default is 0; that is, the sum of the layer thicknesses overrides
thickness data entered in the GEOMETRY option. This option needs to be
used if performing design sensitivity analysis or design optimization.
Enter 1 to input percentage of total thickness in the second field of the 4th
data block. In this case, element thickness is entered using the
GEOMETRY option or the NODAL THICKNESS option.
Main Index
COMPOSITE 885
Format
Data
If you are using the variable thickness capability for those elements which
have such an option, you must enter 1 here and then enter percentages of
total thickness in the second field of the 4th data block below.
If a continuum composite element (that is, element types 149-154,
175-180) is used, entering 1 to input the percentage of the total element
thickness is preferable. If 0 is entered, the actual layer thickness
is converted to the percentage of the total thickness by Marc.
16-25 4th F Enter position of user-defined reference plane. This is the value of the
local z-coordinate of the user-defined plane with respect to the geometric
midplane. Default is 0.
26-30 5th I Enter the method for integrating through the thickness of composite shell
elements. The default method is that given on the SHELL SECT
parameter, if no value is given there, then the default is method 1.
Enter 1 for conventional procedure, which supports all material behavior
available for composite elements.
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements
and computational costs for elastic shells. Thermal strains and
temperature dependent properties are not supported.
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements
and computational costs for elastic shells. This procedure uses more
memory and computational time than method 2.
31-40 6th F Enter the allowable bond shear stress. This in only used if the TSHEAR
parameter is activated. It may result in additional output and the usage of
post codes 110 and 257. Note that the allowable bond shear stress is
constant for all layer interfaces.
Note: The user-defined reference plane value is only used to adjust layer positions relative to the
geometric midplane of a composite shell element. If the location of the geometric mid-plane
itself needs to be adjusted, use the shell offset option in the GEOMETRY option.
Either the 4a or 4b data block is repeated once for each layer defined in the 3rd data block.
4a data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number for this layer.
6-15 2nd F Actual layer thickness if default (0) is used in data block 3, Field 3
(above). If 1, percentage of total thickness.
Main Index
886 COMPOSITE
Format
Data
16-25 3rd F Ply orientation angle in degrees. Location of principal material axes with
respect to element coordinate system measured positive about local z-
coordinate, (that is, angle defining orientation of preferred frame w.r.t.
element frame). The element orientation is either defined in the
ORIENTATION option or defaults to the v1, v2, v3 system defined in
element type 75 in the Marc Volume B: Element Library.
4b data block
1-5 1st I Enter the ply layer ID.
6-10 2nd I Material identification number for this layer.
11-20 3rd F Actual layer thickness if default (0) is used in data block 3, Field 3
(above). If 1, percentage of total thickness.
21-30 4th F Ply orientation angle in degrees. Location of principal material axes with
respect to element coordinate system measured positive about local z-
coordinate, (that is, angle defining orientation of preferred frame w.r.t.
element frame). The element orientation is either defined in the
ORIENTATION option or defaults to the v1, v2, v3 system defined in
element type 75 in the Marc Volume B: Element Library.
5th data block
Enter a list of elements to be associated with this particular
composite group.
Main Index
MIXTURE 887
Define Constituents of Composite Material in Original and Potentially Damaged State
MIXTURE Define Constituents of Composite Material in Original and

Potentially Damaged State
Description
This option allows one to create a new material that has multiple components in it. The material behavior
will be based upon a “mixture” of the individual components based upon the mixture rule. Several of
these mixture rules are only appropriate for linear elastic materials, but are still more than one finds in
text books because they will account for temperature dependent material properties. The most
sophisticated model (3) allows for the mixture of materials which undergo elastic-plastic behavior.
Notes: 1)If void ratio or porosity is defined, it applied to all components in a uniform manner.
2)Model types 1 and 2 only support linear elastic material.
3)Model type 3 can not include the following material laws in any of the components.
• Thermo-pore
• Gurson damage
• Simplified damage models 9 and 10
• Gasket material
• Shape memory material
• Soils
• User defined generalized stress-strain law
• ORNL
• Rigid-Plastic
• Grain size effects

• Rubber material
• Cohesive
4.) Rebar elements are not supported for type 3.
5.)Design sensitivity and design optimization is not supported for any of the models.
6.)PSHELL option is not supported for any of the models.
One restriction is that within a layer, if the components are orthotropic or anisotropic,
the preferred directions are aligned.
Main Index
888 MIXTURE
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st I Enter the word MIXTURE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of components/phases.
11-15 3rd I Enter the mixture rule.
1 – weighted average of material properties based upon volume
fraction (default) The components may be either elastic
isotropic or orthotropic.
2 – weighted average of Hooke’s law based upon volume fraction.
The components may be either elastic isotropic, orthotropic or
anisotropic.
3 – weighted average of nonlinear stress strain curve based upon
volume fraction
16-20 4th I Flag controlling averaging procedure for thermal expansion.
1 – weighted average based upon volume fraction (default)
2 – details later
21-25 5th I Not used, enter zero.
36-67 8th A Enter material name.
Data block 4 is repeated for each component
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter material id of component.
6-10 2nd I Not used, enter zero.
Main Index
MIXTURE 889
Format
Data
11-20 3rd E Enter the fraction of this component, the sum of the fractions should
equal 1.0.
5th data block
Enter a list of elements for which this mixture of materials is applied. If
composite, then leave blank.
Main Index
890 COHESIVE (with TABLE Input)
Define Material Data for Interface Elements
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input) Define Material Data for Interface Elements
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for interface elements, which may be used to
simulate the onset or progress of delamination, and to associate these material properties with a list of
element numbers.
The cohesive material is defined using the cohesive energy (also called critical energy release rate),
which equals the area below the equivalent traction versus equivalent relative displacement curve. The
shape of this curve can be bilinear, exponential, or combined linear-exponential. Mixed mode
delamination is incorporated by converting the normal and shear components of the relative
displacements into an equivalent relative displacement. The data entered basically refers to the behavior
in the normal direction and differences between the behavior in normal and shear direction can be defined
using the shear-normal ratios for the maximum stress and the cohesive energy.
As an alternative to the standard bilinear, exponential or linear-exponential model, the user can also use
this option to trigger the call to the UCOHESIVE user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word COHESIVE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of cohesive material data to follow (optional).
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if extra data blocks 6 and 7 are used. This entry will be used for
all sets of cohesive material data defined below. Default is 0,
which means that the extra data blocks 6 and 7 are not used.
Data blocks 3 through 6 are repeated as a set, once for each set of cohesive material defined.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 for the bilinear model (default).
Enter 2 for the exponential model.
Enter 3 for the combined linear-exponential model.
Main Index
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input) 891
Format
Data
Enter -1 to define the cohesive material model via the UCOHESIVE
user subroutine
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to deactivate the associated elements if the maximum damage in
all the element integration points has been reached. The
deactivated elements will remain on the post file.
Enter 2 to deactivate the associated elements if the maximum damage in
all the element integration points has been reached. Upon
deactivation, the elements are removed from the post file.
Default is 0, which implies that the elements will remain active
irrespective of the damage level.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 (default) if a secant matrix.
Enter 1 if a modified tangent matrix has to be used in the global Newton-
Raphson iterative procedure. If the modified tangent matrix is
selected, one may need to force the solution of a nonpositive
definite system via the CONTROL option.
21-32 5th A Material name.
4th data block
The data entered in the following block are the reference values that are used with tables or
are constants.
1-10 1st F Cohesive energy.
11-20 2nd F Critical opening displacement.
21-30 3rd F Maximum opening displacement (linear model only).
31-40 4th F Shear-normastress ratio (the ratio of the maximum stress in shear and the
maximum stress in tension). Default value is 1.
41-50 5th F Exponential decay factor (combined linear-exponential model only).
Default value is 1.
51-60 6th F Factor for viscous energy dissipation. Default is 0, which implies that
there is no viscous energy dissipation.
61-70 7th F Reference rate of relative displacement. This is only used if viscous energy
dissipation is activated using the 6th field of this data block. Default is 0,
which implies that the reference rate will automatically be calculated.
71-80 8th F Stiffening factor in compression. Default value is 1.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for the cohesive energy. The cohesive energy can be a function
of the first five state variables.
Main Index
892 COHESIVE (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
Data blocks 6 and 7 are only needed if the third field of the 2nd data block is set to 1.
6th data block
1-10 1st F Shear-normal energy ratio (the ratio of the cohesive energy in shear and
the cohesive energy in tension). Default value is 1.
7th data block
8th data block
Main Index
COHESIVE 893
Define Mechanical Data for Cohesive Materials
COHESIVE Define Mechanical Data for Cohesive Materials
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for interface elements, which may be used to
simulate the onset or progress of delamination, and to associate these material properties with a list of
element numbers.
The cohesive material is defined using the cohesive energy (also called critical energy release rate),
which equals the area below the equivalent traction versus equivalent relative displacement curve. The
shape of this curve can be bilinear, exponential, or combined linear-exponential. Mixed mode
delamination is incorporated by converting the normal and shear components of the relative
displacements into an equivalent relative displacement. The data entered basically refers to the behavior
in the normal direction and differences between the behavior in normal and shear direction can be defined
using the shear-normal ratios for the maximum stress and the cohesive energy
As an alternative to the standard linear, exponential, or linear-exponential model, the user can also utilize
this option to trigger the call to the UCOHESIVE user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word COHESIVE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of cohesive material data to follow (optional).
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if an extra data block 5 is used. This entry will be used for all
sets of cohesive material data defined below. Default is 0,
which means that the extra data blocks 5 is not used.
Data blocks 3 through 6 are repeated as a set, once for each set of cohesive material defined.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 for the bilinear model (default).
Enter 2 for the exponential model.
Enter 3 for the combined linear-exponential model.
Main Index
894 COHESIVE
Format
Data
Enter -1 to define the cohesive material model via the UCOHESIVE
user subroutine.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to deactivate the associated elements if the maximum damage
in all the element integration points has been reached. Upon
deactivation, the elements will remain on the post file.
Enter 2 to deactivate the associated elements if the maximum damage
in all the element integration points has been reached. Upon
deactivation, the elements will be removed from the post file.
Default is 0, which implies that the elements will remain active
irrespective of the damage level.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 (default) if a secant matrix.
Enter 1 if a modified tangent matrix has to be used in the global
Newton-Raphson iterative procedure. If the modified tangent
matrix is selected, one may need to force the solution of a
nonpositive definite system via the CONTROL option.
21-32 5th A Material name.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Cohesive energy.
11-20 2nd F Critical opening displacement.
21-30 3rd F Maximum opening displacement (linear model only).
31-40 4th F Shear-normal stress ratio (the ratio of the maximum stress in shear and the
maximum stress in tension). Default value is 1.
41-50 5th F Exponential decay factor (combined linear-exponential model only).
Default value is 1.
51-60 6th F Factor for viscous energy dissipation. Default is 0, which implies that
there is no viscous energy dissipation.
61-70 7th F Reference rate of relative displacement. This is only used if viscous
energy dissipation is activated using the 6th field of this data block.
Default is 0, which implies that the reference rate will automatically
be calculated.
71-80 8th F Stiffening factor in compression. Default value is 1.
Data block 5 is only needed if the third field of the 2nd data block is set to 1.
Main Index
COHESIVE 895
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st F Shear-normal energy ratio (the ratio of the cohesive energy in shear and
the cohesive energy in tension). Default value is 1.
6th data block
Main Index
896 PSHELL
Shell Element Property
PSHELL Shell Element Property
Description
This option allows you to define the membrane, bending, transverse shear, and coupling properties of the
shell elements independently. This option supports isotropic linear elastic material and anisotropic linear
elastic materials. Use of PSHELL for nonlinear analysis is not recommended.
If MID1 = 0 membrane or membrane-bending coupling stiffness does not occur.

If MID2 = 0 bending, membrane-bending coupling, or transverse shear stiffness does not occur.
If MID3 = 0 transverse shear flexibility does not occur.
If MID4 = 0 membrane-bending coupling does not occur. This is true in normal cases. However,
MID4 is not zero if there is an offset of shell middle surface and/or if the material
distribution is not symmetric along the thickness.
Shell made of homogeneous materials can be modeled with PSHELL option by simply setting
MID1=MID2=MID3, and MID4=0 if there is no offset of shell middle surface. However, for
homogeneous shell structures, it is more efficient to use the standard shell technique, which is relatively
easy and inexpensive, generally more accurate, capable to deal with advanced materials.
PSHELL is based on the classical lamination theory (also known as equivalent stiffness method, see Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information for details). It is useful for shell structures with layered composite
materials, and gets particularly attractive when the number of composite layers becomes large. By using
the option the shell structures contain only one layer with smeared material properties. It is more efficient
because analysis of such smeared shell structures uses less computer time and storage space.
The smeared material properties are defined as
h G1 = ∫ G dz
h2 G4 = ∫ ( – z ) G dz
IG 2 = ∫ z 2 G dz
where is the real material tangent connecting stress and strain tensors; h is the shell thickness;
G
I = h 3 ⁄ 12 ; G 1 , G 2 ,
and G 4 are the smeared material tangent matrices defined by MID1, MID2, and
MID4, respectively. The generalized stress-strain relations are then given as
⎧ f ⎫ h G1 h2 G4 ⎧ ε ⎫
⎨ ⎬ = ⎨ ⎬
⎩ m ⎭ h2 G4 I G2 ⎩ χ ⎭
where f , m , ε , and χ are the membrane and transverse shear forces, the bending moments, strains on the
middle surface of the shell, and curvatures, respectively.
Main Index
PSHELL 897
G1 in Marc contains both membrane and transverse shear parts. Unless users want to adjust transverse
shear stiffness, there is no need to define a new type of materials for it. Set MID3=MID1 to take into
account the transverse shear stiffness. Otherwise, set MID3=0.
Generally G 1 , G 2 and G 4 can be described by ANISOTROPIC option. However, the tangent matrix
defined with ANISOTROPIC is a 6 x 6 matrix for fully 3D cases. The G 1 , G 2 , and G 4 calculated here are
5 x 5 matrices because the third stress component normal to the shell surfaces is zero. Marc requires that
all components in the third row and the third column of the 6 x 6 matrix defined in ANISOTROPIC option
are entered as zero if the material is used with PSHELL option.
In a transient analysis, the structural mass is calculated from the density using the membrane thickness
and membrane material properties. If MID1 = 0, then the density is obtained from the MID2 materials.
To take into account the effect of thermal expansion, the coefficients of thermal expansion defined by
MID1 and MID2 are used. Transverse shear and membrane-bending coupling are not affected.
Please note that, if either MID1, MID2, or MID3 is zero, some of diagonal terms in the tangent matrix
will be zero. This results in singular stiffness matrix. In this case, the program will automatically fill a
small nonzero numbers in these diagonal terms to overcome the problem.
PSHELL assumes the constant transverse shear strain distribution through the thickness. Therefore, any
input with TSHEAR parameter is ignored for the elements using PSHELL option.
In order to take into account the effect of thermal expansion, the temperature and the gradient of
temperature need to be defined. Temperature in Marc is automatically stored as the first state variable.
The state variable number used to store temperature gradient is defined in the 3rd data field of the 2nd
data block. See the STATE VARS parameter, and the INITIAL STATE and CHANGE STATE options
for details.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PSHELL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data sets to be read in.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input; defaults to standard input (unit 5).
11-15 3rd I State variable number used to store the gradient of temperature through
the shell thickness. Must be greater than 1. Otherwise, the temperature
gradient is zero.
Main Index
898 PSHELL
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-5 1st I PSHELL property identification number
6-10 2nd I MID1 – Material identification number for membrane
11-20 3rd F T – Membrane thickness. Default is the thickness defined using
GEOMETRY option
21-25 4th I MID2 – Material identification number for bending
26-35 5th F 12I/T**3 – Ratio of the actual bending moment of inertia of the shell (I)
to the bending moment of inertia of a homogeneous shell
(T**3/12). The default is 1.0.
36-40 6th I MID3 – Material identification number for transverse shear
41-50 7th F TS/T – Ratio of transverse shear thickness TS to membrane
thickness of the shell (T). The default is 0.833333.
51-55 8th I MID4 – Material identification number for
membrane-bending coupling.
56-65 9th F Nonstructural mass per unit area.
66-75 10th F Fiber distance for stress calculation. Default is on the middle surface.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements using this set of PSHELL data.
Main Index
REBAR 899
Define Rebar Positions, Areas, and Orientations
REBAR Define Rebar Positions, Areas, and Orientations
Description
This option defines the rebar positions, areas, and orientations. It can be used with the REBAR user
subroutine which allows more general rebar definitions at element integration point level. Any nonzero
value defined by the REBAR user subroutine overwrites the corresponding values defined this
REBAR option.
Rebar Layer Concept

Cord-reinforced composites are characterized by a group of reinforcing cords with arbitrary spatial
orientations embedded in various matrix materials. The different constituents may have different
mechanical properties. Two typical examples of the cord-reinforces composites are tires and cord-
reinforced concretes. In modeling such materials, the rebar technique is very useful.
The basic idea of rebar layer concept contains that (1) the reinforcing cords and the matrix materials of
the composites are represented independently by different types of elements along with different
constitutive models, (2) the reinforcing cords within the elements modeling these cords (the so-called
rebar elements) are assumed to be in the form of layers, and (3) the rebar elements are then embedded
into the matrix elements. The compatibility between the cord elements and the matrix elements is
enforced by either of the following two options.
1. Superimposing solid rebar elements on corresponding solid matrix elements using the same
A list of solid rebar elements is available (see element types 23, 46, 47, 48, 142, 143, 144, 145,
and 146). They are empty 4- or 8-node quadrilaterals (2-D) and 4- or 8-node hexahedrons (3-D).
You can place reinforcing cord layers within the elements. Each solid rebar element is then
superimposed on a solid matrix element. The two elements share the same space with the same
element connectivity (therefore, the same element nodes). The compatibility condition between
the reinforcements and the matrix materials is then automatically enforced.
2. Embed membrane rebar elements into solid matrix elements using the INSERT option.
A list of membrane rebar elements is available (see element types 147, 148, 165, 166, 167, 168,
169, and 170). They are empty 2- or 3-node line elements (2-D) and 4- or 8-node quadrilaterals
(3-D). You can place reinforcing cord layers within these empty elements. These elements are
then embedded into their corresponding solid elements representing the matrix materials.
Independent meshes can be used for the rebar membrane elements and the matrix elements. The
INSERT option is used to enforce the compatibility between two different meshes (see the
INSERT model definition option in this manual for details).
To model a single reinforcing member, truss elements (for example, element types 9, 51, and 65) can be
used with the INSERT option.
Option 1 does not introduce additional degrees of freedom because the rebar element shares the same
nodes as that of the corresponding matrix element.
Main Index
900 REBAR
Option 2 may increase the node numbers because of the independent mesh of rebar membrane elements.
Though the degrees of freedom of these extra nodes are constrained by the INSERT option, it may still
be somewhat more expensive because the INSERT option can increase the bandwidth of the solution
matrix. The advantage of Option 2 is that it provides more flexibility in defining arbitrary rebar
orientations and in rebar element visualization.
Rebar Property Definition

For solid rebar element types (see element types 23, 46, 47, 48, 142, 143, 144, 145, and 146), Figure 3-1
illustrates a single rebar layer within an element. The shape of the rebar layer and its position within the
element can be defined by the Rebar Orientation Type of they layer and by the relative position of the
layer along the relevant element edges in thickness direction.
For membrane rebar element types (see element types 147, 148, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, and 170), the
shape of a rebar layer and its spatial position are the same as those of the element containing the layer.
No input on the Rebar Orientation Type or on the relative position of the layer is needed.
The maximum number of reinforcing cord layers within a rebar element is 5. By adding more rebar
elements in the same spatial location with the same element connectivity, this limit can be extended to a
larger number.
For each rebar layer, the user is required to define cord material identification number, cross section area
of the cords, density of the cords, and an angle α (defining spatial orientation of the cords). α is the angle
between the cord and the projection of a predefined reference axis on the rebar layer plane. See Figure 3-2
for a description of the rebar angle of a single rebar layer.
A check list of the rebar properties generally required follows:
1. Material identification number.
2. Cross-section of the reinforcing cords.
3. Density of the reinforcing cords.
4. Angle between the cord and the projection of a predefined reference axis on the rebar layer plane.
5. Rebar Orientation Type (not needed for rebar membrane elements).
6. Relative position of the cord layer within the element (not needed for rebar membrane elements).
If the properties from items 2 to 6 do not change on the layer, only one set of properties are required.
Otherwise, set the 7th field of the 3rd data block to 2 for 2-D or 3 for 3-D and define these properties at
all relevant edges (or at corner nodes for rebar membrane elements. See Figure 3-1 for edge definition of
solid rebar elements.
In many cases, reinforcing cords can only support tensile force. That is the so-called “micro-buckling”
behavior of cords. Consideration of the behavior can be activated by entering a 1 in the 8th field of the 3rd
data block. Factor to reduce rebar compression stiffness is defined in the 9th field of the 3rd data block.
Main Index
REBAR 901
2-D Edge 2
4 3 4 3
2
1 2
Edge 1
Edge 2
1
1 2
1 2
Rebar Orientation Type 1
Edge 1
3-D
Edge 1 Edge 3
5 5
8 8
Edge 4
Edge 4
7 6 7 4
6 3
1 3
Edge 2
2 4 1 4
4 2
1 1
Edge 2
Edge 3 Edge 1
2 3 2 3
5
Edge 3 8
Edge 2
7
6 2 Edge 1
4
4
1 1
2 3
Edge 4

Figure 3-19 Description of a Single Rebar Layer Within an Element
Main Index
902 REBAR
Direction Normal to the Rebar Layer
Reference Axis
Rebar Direction
-α
α
z
Projection of Reference Axis
onto Rebar Layer Plane
x
Figure 3-20 Description of Rebar Orientation on a Single Rebar Layer
Rebar Pre- and Postprocessing

Marc creates a file named jid_rebar.mfd for rebar layer verification purposes if a 1 is entered in the
3rd field of the 2nd data block. All rebar layers and their orientations can be seen with the Marc Mentat
graphic user interface.
Directly plotting rebar results with the Marc Mentat graphic user interface can be confusing as there
could be multiple rebar layers within one element and different layers could have different spatial
orientations. It is recommended to use post codes 471 and 481 (see the POST model definition option for
a more detailed description) to output the stress tensors of specific rebar layers into the post file. In the
2nd field of the 3rd data block of the POST option is the global layer identification number which is
defined by the REBAR option in the 7th field of the 4th data block. The stress and the direction of rebar
can be viewed using the tensor plot option in the Marc Mentat graphic user interface to process the
principal values and directions of the rebar stress tensor. The only nonzero principal stress of the stress
tensor is the value of the rebar stress on the specific layer. The corresponding principal direction is the
rebar direction. Both the principal value and direction are averaged within an element.
The angle α between rebar and the project of reference axis on rebar layer plane ( – 90 ≤ α ≤ 90 ) , defined
at the 5th field of the 4th data block, changes with the deformation. This angle can be postprocessed with
post code 487.
Main Index
REBAR 903
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word REBAR.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data sets to be read in.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input; defaults to standard input (unit 5).
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to create a file named jid_rebar.mfd for rebar layer
verification purposes.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are given for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Rebar data set ID.
6-10 2nd I Number of rebar layers to be read in. Maximum is 5.
11-15 3rd I Enter 2 if the considered structure is an axisymmetric expansion of
cylinders made of bias plies and the cords are nearly
inextensible relative to matrix materials. In this case, all
parameters below describe the cylinders from which the
considered structure was made. The rebar positions, areas, and
orientations for real structure is calculated by Marc.
When using cylinder expansion option in rebar data definition,
the reference axis needs to be the symmetric axis of the original
cylinder, and this needs to pass through the origin of the
coordinates.
Enter 3 In a 3-D axisymmetric structure with the x-axis (1,0,0) as the
asixymmetric axis and the reference axis, if the rebar layer is
vertical to (1,0,0), the program internally switches the reference
axis to (0,1,0).
16-25 4th F First direction cosine of reference axis.
26-35 5th F Second direction cosine of reference axis.
36-45 6th F Third direction cosine of reference axis.
The default reference axis is (1, 0, 0).
Notes: Reference axis should not be perpendicular to rebar layer.
If AXITO3D option is used, the reference axis must be (1,0,0).
If the rebar layer is vertical to (1,0,0), the program internally
switches the reference axis to (0,1,0).
46-50 7th I Enter 0 (default) if no skew type of rebar layers are to be defined.
Main Index
904 REBAR
Format
Data
Enter 2 for 2-D and for 2-D membrane elements (types 165 - 167).
Enter 3 for 3-D and for 3-D membrane elements (types 147 and 148).
Set to 0 if the third field of the third data block is 2.
51-55 8th I Enter 1 to activate the so-called “micro-buckling” behavior of rebar
cords in compression.
56-65 9th F Factor used to reduce rebar stiffness in compression. Used only if a 1 is
entered in the 8th field of the data block. The default if 0.02.
Data block 4 is given for each rebar layer.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Material ID.
6-15 2nd F p⋅r
----------- , relative position of the rebar layer at edge 1 (ratio of the distance
T
between the reference surface (edge) and the rebar layer to the distance
across the element); not used for membrane elements.
16-25 3rd F A, area of cross section of each rebar at edge 1.
26-35 4th F S, number of rebars per unit length in each layer at edge 1.
Equivalent thickness of the rebar layer is A ⋅ S .
36-45 5th F Angle (α) between the rebar and the projection of the reference axis on
rebar layer plane [-90, 90] at edge 1. See Figure 3-2.
46-55 6th F Radius of the cylinder; only used when the third field of the 3rd data block
is 2.
56-60 7th I Enter the global identification number of the rebar layer. Use for
postprocessing only.
61-65 8th I Enter the rebar layer orientation type. Not used for membrane elements.
2-D
Enter 1 if this rebar layer is similar to the 1,2 and 3,4 edges of the
element; the “thickness” direction is from the 1,2 edge to 3,4
edge of the element.
Enter 2 if this rebar layer is similar to the 1,4 and 2,3 edges of the
element; the “thickness” direction is from the 1,4 edge to 2,3
edge of the element.
Main Index
REBAR 905
Format
Data
3-D
Enter 1 if this rebar layer is similar to the 1,2,3,4 and 5,6,7,8 faces of
the element; the “thickness” direction is from the 1,2,3,4 face to
5,6,7,8 face of the element.
the element; the “thickness” direction is from the 1,4,8,5 face to
the element, the “thickness” direction is from the 2,1,5,6 face to
5th data block is only needed when the 7th field of the third data block is not zero.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Relative position of the rebar layer at edge 2. Not used for membrane
elements.
11-20 2nd F Area of cross-section of rebar at edge 2.
21-30 3rd F Number of rebars per unit length at edge 2.
31-40 4th F Angle between the rebar and the projection of the reference axis on rebar
layer plane (-90,90) at edge 2.
6th and 7th data blocks are only needed when the 7th field of the third data block is 3.
6th data block
elements.
7th data block
elements.
8th data block
Enter a list of elements.
Main Index
906 ORIENTATION
Define Orientation of Elements
ORIENTATION Define Orientation of Elements
Description
The ORIENTATION option is used to specify orientation angle data as follows:
1. Edge orientation types (EDGE i-j). For two-dimensional elements (both continuum and shells),
you choose a particular element edge with respect to which the preferred coordinates are
specified. With these types, the direction vector along the edge from the first to the second edge
˜1˜2
node is projected onto the surface tangent plane (xy plane if continuum, or V V plane if shell) at
each integration point.
The first preferred direction is given by a rotation about the surface normal (z axis if continuum,
˜3
V axis if shell) equal to the orientation angle. The third preferred direction is given by the surface
normal, and the second preferred direction is given by a cross product of the third and first
directions. See Figure 3-21.
2. Global intersecting plane types (ij PLANE). These types are also for two-dimensional elements.
Here, a particular global coordinate plane (selected by the orientation type) is intersected with the
surface tangent plane.
The first preferred direction is given by a rotation about the surface normal from this intersection
by an amount equal to the orientation angle. The third preferred direction is given by the surface
normal and the second direction by a cross product of the third and first. See Figure 3-22.
3. User-defined intersecting plane. These types are also for two-dimensional elements. Here, a
plane, defined by you, with one coordinate direction and a user-defined vector or by two user-
defined vectors is intersected with the surface tangent plane.
The first preferred direction is given by a rotation about the surface normal from this intersection
by an amount equal to the orientation angle. The third preferred direction is given by the surface
normal and the second direction by a cross product of the third and first. SeeFigure 3-23.
4. Three-dimensional orientation types (3D ANISO). For three-dimensional elements, you directly
enter vectors in the first and second preferred directions. The third preferred direction is given by
a cross product of the first and second direction.
If a nonzero orientation angle is defined, the first and the second preferred directions are given by
a rotation of the two corresponding user vectors about the third direction. SeeFigure 3-24.
5. UORIENT orientation type. Here, you define the transformation matrix between global
coordinates (if continuum elements) or local coordinates (if beams, plates or shells) directly in the
ORIENT user subroutine.
6. Three-dimensional local orientation (3D LOCAL). For hexahedral elements, a local element
system is used. This system can be rotated around the three local axes. The local system is defined
as follows. See Figure 3-25. The first preferred direction joins the centroids of faces 4-1-5-8 and
3-2-6-7. A second vector joins faces 1-2-6-5 and 4-3-7-8. The third preferred direction is given
by the cross product of the first preferred direction and this vector. The second preferred direction
is given by the cross product of the third and first preferred directions. This system is then rotated
around the three local axes by the three given angles.
Main Index
ORIENTATION 907
7. Closest point on curve (CURVE). One or more NURBS curves are used for defining the preferred
system. A list of curves are given as input. These curves must be defined with the CURVES model
definition option and only the NURBS variant is allowed. Using the centroid of the element, the
closest point on any of the given curves is found. The first preferred direction is given by the
tangent vector at this point. For 2-D elements, the second preferred direction is given by the cross
product of the global z direction and the first preferred direction. For 3-D elements, this option is
only supported for solid shell elements and solid composite elements. The third preferred
direction is given by the thickness direction and the second preferred direction by the cross
product between the third and first preferred direction. The first preferred direction is recalculated
as the cross product between the second and third preferred directions to insure that we have an
orthogonal system.
Notes: The ORIENTATION option is ignored for 1-D elements, gaps, pipe bend, shear panel and
cable elements.
The ORIENTATION option is ignored for 2-D continuum composite element types 151-154.
The preferred material orientation is obtained by rotating the element local coordinates on
an orientation angle about the direction normal to material layers. See the COMPOSITE
model definition option and Marc Volume B: Element Library for details.
The ORIENTATION option is turned on for composite elements. If no ORIENTATION data
is given for these elements, the default is no preferred orientation; that is, the default
material orientation of the element.
The ORIENTATION option, UORIENT, is turned on for particular material numbers if the
IANELS flag is set during data input (see ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC,
MOONEY and HYPOELASTIC options). You can override this default by entering your
own ORIENTATION option.
When visualizing the results, one can request that the generalized stresses and strains are
in either the element system or the preferred material coordinate system defined here.
Main Index
908 ORIENTATION
n = Normal to surface
tangent plane
Node I
Integration point
Ω α
Node J
Direction 1 of
preferred coordinate
system
Z
Element surface
Y Ω = Orientation angle (positive

right-hand rotation about n)
X α = Ply angle (if COMPOSITE)
Figure 3-21 Edge I-J Orientation Type
Main Index
ORIENTATION 909
n - Normal to surface
tangent plane
Global ZX plane
Surface tangent
plane
α
Ω
Direction 1 of
system
Intersection of
two planes Element surface
Z
Y Ω = orientation angle (positive

X α = ply angle (if COMPOSITE)
Figure 3-22 ZX Plane Orientation Type
Main Index
910 ORIENTATION
n = Normal to surface
tangent plane
u = User-defined vector
Surface tangent
plane
Ω
α
global
X
Direction 1 of
system
Element surface
Z
Y W = Orientation angle (positive

X α = ply angle (if COMPOSITE)
Figure 3-23 XU Plane Orientation Type
Main Index
ORIENTATION 911
Direction 2 of preferred coordinate system
U2 = User vector 2
Ω
U3 = U1 x U2
Ω
Z Direction 1 of preferred coordinate system
U1 = User vector 1
Y
Ω = Orientation angle
X
Figure 3-24 Three-dimensional ANISO Orientation Type
8
7
5 6
4 3
Figure 3-25 3D LOCAL Orientation Type
Main Index
912 ORIENTATION
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ORIENTATION.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of orientation angle data sets to follow.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input. Defaults to input file.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each angle data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st A Enter one of the following to specify orientation angle type.
EDGE 1-2
EDGE 2-3
EDGE 3-4
EDGE 3-1
EDGE 4-1
XY PLANE
YZ PLANE
ZX PLANE
XU PLANE
YU PLANE
ZU PLANE
UU PLANE
UORIENT
3D ANISO
COORD SYS
3D LOCAL
CURVE
11-20 2nd F Orientation angle.
For EDGE style orientations:
21-30 3rd F First component of user vector 1 in global coordinates.
31-40 4th F Second component of user vector 1 in global coordinates.
41-50 5th F Third component of user vector 1 in global coordinates.
Main Index
ORIENTATION 913
Format
Data
For XU PLANE, YU PLANE, ZU PLANE, UU PLANE, and 3-D ANISO, complete the following:
21-30 1st F 1
31-40 2nd F 2 component of user vector 1 with respect to global coordinates.
41-50 3rd F 3
For UU PLANE and 3-D ANISO, complete the following:
51-60 4th F 1
61-70 5th F 2 component of user vector 2 with respect to global coordinates.
71-80 6th F 3
For COORD SYS style orientation:
21-25 3rd I Enter the coordinate system ID from COORD SYSTEM option.
For 3D LOCAL, complete the following:
21-30 3rd F Rotation around local x axis
31-40 4th F Rotation around local y axis
41-50 5th F Rotation around local z axis
For CURVE, complete the following:
21-25 3rd I Enter 1 to flip the orientation of the curves.
3a data block
Enter a list of curves. Only for CURVE option.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to be associated with this orientation angle.
Main Index
914 POWDER (with TABLE input)
Define Powder Material Model
POWDER (with TABLE input) Define Powder Material Model
Description
This option allows you to input data associated with Marc’s powder material model. The material
parameters can be entered here or through the UPOWDR user subroutine. The influences of temperature
and relative density are entered through the TABLE option. The data entered here is at the beginning of
the analysis; for example, at the temperatures given through the INITIAL STATE option and the relative
density given through the RELATIVE DENSITY option.
The yield function for powder material is:
p2 1 / 2
F = --- ⎛ --- S i j S i j + -----2⎞
1 3
– σy
γ ⎝2 β ⎠
where s is the deviatoric stresses and p is the hydrostatic stress. γ and β are material properties which can
be expressed as:
b b4
β = ( b1 + b2 ρ 3 )
q q4
γ = ( q1 + q2 ρ 3 )
where ρ is the relative density.

This data is entered through this option. Additional details can be found in Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word POWDER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of powder material data to be defined (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the logical unit number for data input. Defaults to input data file.
Data blocks 3 through 10 are entered as a set, once for each data associated with this material definition.
Main Index
POWDER (with TABLE input) 915
Format
Data
3rd data block
4th data block
21-30 3rd F Mass density
41-50 5th F Compressive yield stress.
51-60 6th F Gamma (γ ).
61-70 7th F Beta ( β ).
71-80 8th F Viscosity.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID for Young’s modulus.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID for Poisson’s ratio.
16-20 4th I Enter table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
21-25 5th I Enter table ID for compressive yield stress.
36-40 8th I Enter table ID for viscosity.
6th data block
The 5th data block is only required in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
21-30 3rd F Mass density.
Main Index
916 POWDER (with TABLE input)
Format
Data
7th data block
1-5 1st I Enter table ID for thermal conductivity.
6-10 2nd I Enter table ID for specific heat.
11-15 3rd I Enter table ID for mass density.
8th data block
1-10 1st F q1
11-20 2nd F q2
21-30 3rd F q3
31-40 4th F q4
9th data block
1-10 1st F b1
11-20 2nd F b2
21-30 3rd F b3
31-40 4th F b4
10th data block
Enter a list of elements to be associated with this material definition.
Main Index
POWDER 917
POWDER Define Powder Material Model
input style.
Description
This option allows you to input data associated with Marc’s powder material model. The material
parameters can be entered here or through the UPOWDR user subroutine. The influences of temperature
and relative density are entered through the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS and DENSITY EFFECTS
options. The data entered here is at the beginning of the analysis; for example, at the temperatures given
through the INITIAL STATE option and the relative density given through the RELATIVE DENSITY
option.
The yield function for powder material is:
p2 1 / 2
F = --- ⎛ --- S i j S i j + -----2⎞
1 3
– σy
γ ⎝2 β ⎠
where s is the deviatoric stresses and p is the hydrostatic stress. γ and β are material properties which can
be expressed as:
b b4
β = ( b1 + b 2 ρ 3 )
q q4
γ = ( q1 + q2 ρ 3)
where ρ is the relative density.

This data is entered through this option. Additional details can be found in Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word POWDER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of powder material data to be defined (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the logical unit number for data input. Defaults to input data file.
Data blocks 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are entered as a set, once for each data associated with this
material definition.
Main Index
918 POWDER
Format
Data
3rd data block
4th data block
41-50 5th F Compressive yield stress.
51-60 6th F Gamma (γ ).
61-70 7th F Beta ( β ).
71-80 8th F Viscosity.
5th data block
6th data block
1-10 1st F q1
11-20 2nd F q2
21-30 3rd F q3
31-40 4th F q4
7th data block
1-10 1st F b1
11-20 2nd F b2
Main Index
POWDER 919
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F b3
31-40 4th F b4
8th data block
Enter a list of elements to be associated with this material definition.
Main Index
920 DENSITY EFFECTS
Define Effects of Density on Powder Materials
DENSITY EFFECTS Define Effects of Density on Powder Materials
input style. If table driven input is used, the POWDER option should
reference tables that provide temperature and density dependent behavior.
Description
This option defines the variation of powder material data with respect to the relative density. The base
values are those read in through the POWDER option at the initial state. The data in this option is used in
conjunction with the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option to give bilinear variations in the material
properties. The relative density can be entered using one of the following options:
a. The variation of a particular property relative to its base value with respect to the relative
density as a piecewise linear curve. Breakpoints must be given in ascending order of relative
density.
b. The particular value relative to its base value and with respect to the relative density lying on
the relevant curve are input directly. Data points must be given in increasing order of relative
density. This option is flagged by entering the word DATA on the first block.
Note: In this option, relative density is the density relative to the fully compacted density having
the range (0-1). The relative Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, relative conductivity, and
relative specific heat are their respective values relative to those given on the POWDER
option at the base temperature.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words DENSITY EFFECTS.
OPTION A
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of slopes of relative Young’s modulus versus relative
density curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of slopes of relative Poisson’s ratio versus relative density curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of slopes of relative Conductivity versus relative density curve
(coupled analysis only).
Main Index
DENSITY EFFECTS 921
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Number of slopes of relative Specific Heat versus relative density curve
(coupled analysis only).
21-25 5th I Material type identification number for cross-reference with POWDER
3a data block
The number entered in the first field of data block 2a defines the number of blocks required in data
block 3a.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of relative Young’s modulus versus the relative density
curve.
16-30 2nd F Enter the relative density at which the above slope becomes operative.
4a data block
The number in the second field of data block 2a defines the number of blocks required in data block 4a.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of relative Poisson’s ratio versus the relative density curve.
5a data block
The number in the third field of data block 2a defines the number of blocks required in data block 5a.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of relative conductivity versus relative density.
6a data block
The number in the fourth field of data block 2a defines the number of blocks required in data block 6a.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of the relative specific heat versus relative density.
16-30 2nd F Relative density at which this slope becomes operative.
Option B
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points on relative Young’s modulus versus relative
density curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of data points on relative Poisson ratio versus relative density
curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of data points on relative Conductivity versus relative density
curve (coupled analysis only).
16-20 4th I Number of data points on relative specific heat versus relative density
curve (coupled analysis only).
21-25 5th I Material type identification number for cross-reference with POWDER
Main Index
922 DENSITY EFFECTS
Format
Data
3b data block
The number in the first field of data block 2b defines the number of blocks required in data block 3b.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the relative Young’s modulus.
16-30 2nd F Enter the associated relative density.
4b data block
The number in the second field of data block 2b defines the number of blocks required in data block 4b.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the relative Poisson’s ratio.
5b data block
The number in the third field of data block 2b defines the number of blocks required in data block 5b.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the relative conductivity.
6b data block
The number in the fourth field of data block 2b defines the number of blocks required in data block 6b.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the relative specific heat.
Main Index
RELATIVE DENSITY 923
Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or Coupled Thermal Stress Analysis
RELATIVE DENSITY Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or

Coupled Thermal Stress Analysis
Description
This option allows you to define initial relative density in a powder material analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words RELATIVE DENSITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets to be input with this option.
6-10 2nd I Enter the logical unit number of the data input. Defaults to input data file.
The 3rd, 4th and 5th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Initial relative density.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to be associated with the above defined initial
relative density.
5th data block
Enter a list of integration points for which the defined initial relative
density is used.
Main Index
924 SOIL (with TABLE Input)
Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis
SOIL (with TABLE Input) Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis
Description
This option allows you to define material data for soil analysis. It is assumed that the soil skeleton is
composed of a collection of randomly oriented grains resulting in effectively isotropic or orthotropic
behavior. You must define here both the material properties of the soil and the fluid. For additional
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SOIL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data used to define the soil data.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number of input of soil data.
Defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing.
6-15 2nd A Enter one of the following soil models:
ELASTIC – linear elastic.
NON LINEAR – nonlinear elastic via HYPELA2.
CAMCLAY – Cam clay model.
VON MISES – von Mises
LIN MOHRC – Linear Mohr-Coulomb
PBL MOHRC – Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb
ORTHOTROPIC – orthotropic elastic
16-25 3rd A Not used.
26-30 4rd I Enter 1 if anisotropic linear elastic model is used. Material properties
should be entered via the ANELAS or HOOKLW user subroutines.
Main Index
Format
Data
The 4th through 7th data blocks are entered only if the second field of the third data block is
not orthotropic.
4th data block
41-50 5th F Yield strength.
51-60 6th F For Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, α–β parameter.
61-70 7th F Bulk modulus of fluid.
71-80 8th F Dynamic viscosity of fluid.
5th data block
21-25 5th I Table ID for yield strength.
26-30 6th I Table ID for Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, α–β parameter.
31-35 7th I Table ID for bulk modulus of fluid.
6th data block
1-10 1st F Permeability of the soil.
11-20 2nd F Virgin compression ratio.
21-30 3rd F Recompression ratio.
31-40 4th F Slope of critical state line.
7th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for permeability of the soil.
Main Index
926 SOIL (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
The 8th through 13th data blocks are entered only if the second field of the third data block
is orthotropic.
8th data block
9th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for E11.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for E22.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for E33.
10th data block
11th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for G12.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for G23.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for G31.
Main Index
Format
Data
12th data block
1-10 1st F K11 – Absolute permeability of the soil.
11-20 2nd F K22 – Absolute permeability of the soil.
21-30 3rd F K33 – Absolute permeability of the soil.
31-40 4th F μ – Dynamic viscosity of fluid.
41-50 5th F ρf – Fluid density.
51-60 6th F Kf – Bulk modulus of fluid.
13th data block
16-20 4th I Table ID for μ.
21-25 5th I Table ID for ρf.
26-30 6th I Table ID for Kf.
14th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with this particular soil data.
Main Index
928 SOIL
SOIL Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material data for soil analysis. It is assumed that the soil skeleton is
composed of a collection of randomly oriented grains resulting in effectively isotropic behavior. You
must define here both the material properties of the soil and the fluid. For additional details, see Marc
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-4 1st A Enter the word SOIL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data used to define the soil data.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number of input of soil data.
Defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing.
6-15 2nd A Enter one of the following soil models:
ELASTIC – linear elastic.
NON LINEAR – nonlinear elastic via HYPELA2.
CAMCLAY – Cam clay model.
VON MISES – von Mises.
LIN MOHRC – Linear Mohr-Coulomb.
PLB MOHRC – Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb.
ORTHOTROPIC – Orthotropic elastic.
16-25 3rd A Not used; enter 0.
26-30 4th I Enter 1 if anisotropic linear elastic model is used. Material properties
should be entered via the ANELAS or HOOKLW user subroutines.
Main Index
SOIL 929
Format
Data
41-52 7th A Enter the material
name.
The 4th and 5th data blocks are entered only if the second field of the third data block is not orthotropic.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Young’s modulus of soil.
11-20 2nd F Poisson ratio of soil.
41-50 5th F Yield strength.
51-60 6th F For Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, α–β parameter.
61-70 7th F Bulk modulus of fluid.
71-80 8th F Dynamic viscosity of fluid.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Permeability of the soil.
11-20 2nd F Virgin compression ratio.
21-30 3rd F Recompression ratio.
31-40 4th F Slope of critical state line.
The 6th, 7th, and 8th data blocks are entered only if the second field of the third data block
is orthotropic.
6th data block
7th data block
Main Index
930 SOIL
Format
Data
8th data block
1-10 1st F K11 – Absolute permeability of the soil.
11-20 2nd F K22 – Absolute permeability of the soil.
21-30 3rd F K33 – Absolute permeability of the soil.
31-40 4th F μ – Dynamic viscosity of fluid.
41-50 5th F ρf – Fluid density.
51-60 6th F Kf – Bulk modulus of fluid.
9th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with this particular soil data.
Main Index
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input) 931
Define Initial Porosity
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input) Define Initial Porosity
Description
This option provides the ability to define the initial porosity. The magnitude and location of the initial
porosity is associated with an initial condition name. The LOADCASE model definition option is used to
activate this data. For soil analysis, this will be changed during the analysis. For nonsoil analysis, the
porosity is an independent (state) variable that may be used in tables. You can either specify the porosity
or use the INITIAL VOID RATIO option to specify the void ratio.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL PR or INITIAL POROSITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the initial porosity.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number; defaults to input.
3rd data block
16-20 4th I Not used; enter zero.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the initial porosity.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the initial porosity.
Main Index
932 INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input)
Format
Data
1st field.
6th data block
1 – Elements IDs
3 – Volume/Region/Body IDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
INITIAL POROSITY 933
INITIAL POROSITY Define Initial Porosity
input style.
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the porosity. For nonsoil analysis, the porosity is an
independent (state) variable. You can either specify the porosity or use the INITIAL VOID RATIO option
to specify the void ratio.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL PR or INITIAL POROSITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the initial porosity.
The number of sets is equal to the number given in the first field above.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the initial porosity for the points given below at the start of
increment zero.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above porosity is to be applied.
5th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above porosity is to
be applied.
6th data block
This data block is necessary only when there are either beams or shells in the mesh.
Enter a list of layer points to which the above porosity is to be applied.
Main Index
934 POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis
POROSITY CHANGE (with Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis

TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Description
This option provides the ability to define the material porosity in nonsoil model. The magnitude and
location of the porosity is associated with a boundary condition name. The LOADCASE model definition
option is used to activate this data. You can either specify the porosity or use the VOID CHANGE option
to specify the void ratio.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words POROSITY CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the porosity.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the porosity.
5th data block
Main Index
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 935
Format
Data
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the porosity.
1st field.
6th data block
1 – Elements IDs
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above porosity is applied.
the geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
Main Index
936 INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input)
Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis
TABLE Input)
Description
This option provides the ability to define the initial void ratio model. The magnitude and location of the
initial void ratio is associated with an initial condition name. The LOADCASE model definition is used
to activate this data. For soil analysis, the void ratio will change during the analysis. For nonsoil analysis,
the void ratio is an independent (state) variable that may be used in tables. You can either specify the void
ratio or use the INITIAL POROSITY option to specify the porosity.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL VOID.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the initial void ratio.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the initial void ratio.
Main Index
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input) 937
Format
Data
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the initial void ratio.
1st field.
6th data block
1 – Elements IDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
938 INITIAL VOID RATIO
INITIAL VOID RATIO Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis
input style.
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the porosity throughout the soil analysis model. You can
either specify the void ratio or use the INITIAL POROSITY option to specify the porosity.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL VOID.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the initial void ratio.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the initial void ratio for the points given below at the start of
increment zero.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above void ratio is to be applied.
5th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above void ratio is to
be applied.
6th data block
This data block is necessary only when there are either beams or shells in the mesh.
Enter a list of layer points to which the above void ratio is to be applied.
Main Index
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 939
Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis
Input - Model Definition)
Description
This option provides the ability to define the void ratio in nonsoil analysis model. The magnitude and
location of the void ratio is associated with a boundary condition name. The LOADCASE model
definition option is used to activate this data. You can either specify the void ratio or use the POROSITY
CHANGE option to specify the porosity.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words VOID CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the void ratio.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the void ratio.
Main Index
940 VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the void ratio.
1st field.
6th data block
1 – Elements IDs
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above void ratio is applied.
data block.
Main Index
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input) 941
Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure
Description
This option provides the ability to define the preconsolidation pressure throughout the model for
soil analysis when using the Cam-Clay model. The magnitude and location of the preconsolidation
pressure is associated with an initial condition name. The LOADCASE model definition is used to
activate this data.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL PC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the
preconsolidation pressure.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the preconsolidation pressure.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the preconsolidation pressure.
Main Index
942 INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
1st field.
6th data block
1 – Elements IDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
INITIAL PC 943
INITIAL PC Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure
input style.
Description
This option provides the ability to define the preconsolidation pressure throughout the model for soil
analysis when using the Cam-Clay model.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL PC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the
preconsolidation pressure.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Initial value of the preconsolidation pressure for the points given below at
the start of the zeroth increment.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements for which the above data is to be applied.
5th data block
Enter a list of integration points for which the data is to be applied.
6th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above data is to be applied.
Main Index
944 SPECIFIC WEIGHT
Define Specific Weight Constant for Soil Analysis
SPECIFIC WEIGHT Define Specific Weight Constant for Soil Analysis
Description
This option allows you to enter the specific weight constant with respect to the global coordinate system
for soil analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SPECIFIC WEIGHT.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Enter gravity constant in first coordinate direction.
11-20 2nd F Enter gravity constant in second coordinate direction.
21-30 3rd F Enter gravity constant in third coordinate direction.
Main Index
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) 945
Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the pore pressure throughout the model for an uncoupled soil
analysis where the pore pressure is not calculated. In such cases, the 2nd field of the PORE parameter is
zero. These initial conditions will be activated using the LOADCASE model definition option. As an
alternative, the INITPO user subroutine can be used.
Initial Pore Pressure may be used in three different ways with the new table input format.
a table, where the independent variables are, e.g., position to allow a nonhomogeneous field.
Method 3 is using INITPO user subroutine to define initial plastic strain variables.
2. Read the initial values from a step of the post output file from a previous analysis with Marc. This
technique is most common for uncoupled soil analysis to initialize the pore pressure. With this
option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file elements with the elements in the
3. Read the initial values through the INITPO user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INITIAL PORE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of initial pore pressure data to be entered (optional)
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of initial pore pressure data.
3rd data block
Main Index
946 INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
3 – use binary post file
5 – use ASCII post file
6 – use data lines (default)
7 – use the INITPO user subroutine.
boundary condition.
31-35 7th A Enter the unique boundary condition label. This label will be referenced
by the LOADCASE option.
1-10 1st F Enter the initial pore pressure.
1-5 1st F Table ID associated with the initial pore pressure.
2nd data block (only used if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1 – Element IDs
3 – Volume/Region/Body iDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
INITIAL PORE 947
INITIAL PORE Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis
input style.
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the pore pressure throughout the model for an uncoupled
soil analysis where the pore pressure is not calculated. In such cases, the 2nd field of the PORE parameter
is zero.
Four ways of providing the initial pore pressures are given below.
1. Read the range of elements, integration points and layers, and a corresponding pore pressure.
2. Read the initial values through the INITPO user subroutine.
3. Read the initial values from a step of the binary or formatted post output file from a previous pore
pressure analysis with Marc. This technique is most common for uncoupled soil analysis to
initialize the pore pressure. With this option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file
elements with the elements in the current analysis. Any spatial interpolation must be provided
separately by you.
4. Read a list of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding pore pressure.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INITIAL PORE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to initialize the pore pressure via block 3 series below. See also the
third field on this data block.
Enter 2 to initialize the pore pressure via the INITPO user subroutine. This
subroutine is now called in a loop on all elements in the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the initial values of the pore pressure from the post file
written by a previous pore pressure analysis. In this case, the fourth and
fifth field must also be defined.
Enter 4 to initialize the pore pressure via data blocks 5, 6, 7 and 8 given
below. See also the third field on this data block.
Main Index
948 INITIAL PORE
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3 or 4. Then, this entry gives the
number of pairs of blocks in series 3 and 4 or in series 5, 6, 7, 8 used to input
the pore pressure.
number from which the post file information from the previous pore
pressure run is to be read.
21-25 5th I Only used if the second field is set to 3. In that case this entry defines the
step number on the pore pressure run post file to be used as the definition
of the initial pore pressure values.
31-35 7th I If option 3 and a formatted post file, are used, enter 1.
Enter 1 to suppress printout of pore pressure values that are initialized in
the INITPO user subroutine.
3rd data block
Data blocks 3 and 4 are only input if the second field above is set to 1. In that case, the number of blocks
4th data block
1-10 1st F Initial value of the pore pressure for the above range of points.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Initial pore pressure for the points given below at the start of the zeroth
increment.
6th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above pore pressure is to be applied.
Main Index
INITIAL PORE 949
Format
Data
7th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above pore pressure is to
be applied.
8th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above pore pressure is to
be applied.
Main Index
950 CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the pore pressure throughout the model for an uncoupled soil
analysis where the pore pressure is not calculated. The change in the pore pressure will be activated using
the LOADCASE model definition option. As an alternative, the NEWPO user subroutine can be used.
Initial Pore Pressure may be used in three different ways with the new table input format.
a table, where the independent variables are, e.g., position to allow a nonhomogeneous field.
Method 3 is using the NEWPO user subroutine to define initial plastic strain variables.
2. Read the initial values from a step of the post output file from a previous analysis with Marc. This
technique is most common for uncoupled soil analysis to initialize the pore pressure. With this
option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file elements with the elements in the
3. Read the initial values through the NEWPO user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words CHANGE PORE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of pore pressure data to be entered (optional)
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of pore pressure data.
3rd data block
Main Index
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 951
Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
Format
Data
3 – use binary post file
5 – use ASCII post file
6 – use data lines (default)
7 – use the NEWPO user subroutine.
boundary condition.
31-35 7th A Enter unique boundary condition label. This label will be referenced by
the LOADCASE option.
1-10 1st F Enter the pore pressure.
1-5 1st F Table ID associated with the pore pressure.
3rd data block (used only if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1 – Element IDs
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above pore pressure are
data block.
Main Index
952 CHANGE PORE (Model Definition)
Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
CHANGE PORE (Model Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
Definition)
input style.
Description
This option provides various ways of changing the pore pressure throughout the model. This option is
only used in uncoupled soil analysis. In such cases, the 2nd field of the PORE parameter is zero.
Four ways of providing the pore pressures are given below.
1. Read a range of elements, integration points and layers, and corresponding pore pressures for the
end of the current step.
2. Read the pore pressure values for the end of the current step through the NEWPO user subroutine.
3. Read the pore pressure values for the end of the current step from a named step of the post file
output from a previous pore pressure analysis with Marc. With this option, Marc assumes direct
4. Read a list of elements, integration points and layers, and corresponding pore pressure.
Note: On this option, total pore pressures are input.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to change the pore pressure via data block 3 below. In this case,
the third field must also be defined.
Enter 2 to change the pore pressure via the NEWPO user subroutine. This
subroutine is then called in a loop on all the elements in the mesh.
Enter 4 to change the pore pressure via data blocks 5, 6, 7 and 8 below.
Main Index
CHANGE PORE (Model Definition) 953
Format
Data
gives the number of block sets in series 3 and 4 used to input the new value
of the pore pressure (optional).
16-20 4th I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. Then, this entry defines the
unit number from which the post file information from the previous pore
pressure run is read.
the step number on the pore pressure run post file to be read as the
definition of the new value of the pore pressure at the end of the
current step.
of pore pressure values that are defined in the NEWPO user subroutine.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are only input if the second field above set to 1. In that case, the number of block
3rd data block
16-20 4th I Last integration point with this value can only be bigger than 1 if the ALL
POINTS parameter is used.
26-30 6th I Last layer or cross-section point with this value.
4th data block
1-10 1st F New value of the pore pressure for the above range of points at the end of
the current step.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Pore pressure for the points given below at the end of the current
increment.
6th data block
Main Index
954 CHANGE PORE (Model Definition)
Format
Data
7th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above pore pressure is to be
applied.
8th data block
be applied.
Main Index
Define Pressure Film Boundary Conditions
PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input) Define Pressure Film Boundary Conditions
Description
This option allows the input of pressure film boundary conditions applied on the surface of the model.
The user defines the pressure film coefficients and ambient pressures here. Nonuniform pressure film
coefficients or pressures can be specified via the UPRFILM user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines) or by using the TABLE model definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the words PRESS FILM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data used to input pressure films (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of pressure film data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 8 are entered for each film input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometric types used to define pressure film
boundary condition. See 7th and 8th data blocks.
Enter 1 if the UPRFILM user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
26-30 6th I Enter -1 to exclude applied load when the edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is fully
in contact.
Main Index
956 PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Reference value of pressure film coefficient.
11-20 2nd F Reference value of ambient pressure (reference values can be modified by
the UPRFILM user subroutine).
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the pressure film coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the ambient pressure.
6th data block
1: Normal flow (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal flow (top surface for shells)
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
13: Element-Edges IDs - Marc Mentat convention
14: Element-Faces IDs - Marc Mentat convention
Main Index
Format
Data
18: Surface ID: orientation ID - Marc Mentat convention
19: Curve ID: orientation ID - Marc Mentat convention.
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
958 PRESS FILM (Model Definition)
Define Pressure Film Coefficient Input
PRESS FILM (Model Definition) Define Pressure Film Coefficient Input
input style.
Description
This option allows pressure film coefficients and associated ambient pressures to be input. Nonuniform
pressure films or ambient pressures can be specified via the UPRFILM user subroutine (see Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the words PRESS FILM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data used to input pressure film (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of pressure film data, defaults to input.
3rd
data
block
1-5 1st I Face identification. Same as for the FLUX user subroutine – see Marc
6-15 2nd F Reference value of pressure film coefficient.
16-25 3rd F Reference value of ambient pressure (reference values can be modified by
the UPRFILM user subroutine).
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above film data is applied.
Main Index
Rate Effects
Chapt Rate Effects

er 3: This section describes the input of material behavior with rate effects. There are many models which
Mode exhibit this behavior and they can be numerically implemented in a variety of way.
Rate dependent yield stress is a particular type of rate effects. When used without any of the options
l defined in this section, the strain is decomposed into an elastic increment - irreversible plastic increment
Defini and thermal increment.
tion The rate dependent yield models include:
Optio Model Option User Subroutine

ns Piecewise linear STRAIN RATE or TABLE
Cowper Symonds STRAIN RATE
General ISOTROPIC/ORTHOTROPIC YIEL
Power Law ISOTROPIC
Rate Power Law ISOTROPIC
Kumar ISOTROPIC
Johnson-Cook ISOTROPIC
Marc Strain rate effects may also be included by the following models:
Volume
C: Implicit/ User
Program Behavior Model Explicit Parameter Model Definition Subroutine
Input Elastic-Deviatoric Maxwell Explicit CREEP,0 CREEP CRPLAW
Creep* (optional)
Elastic-Deviatoric Kelvin Explicit CREEP,0,1 CRPVIS
Creep*
or
VISCO ELAS
Elastic-Dilatational Maxwell Explicit CREEP,0 VSWELL
Elastic-Deviatoric Maxwell Implicit CREEP,0,0,1 CREEP UCRPLW
Creep (optional)
Viscoplasticity Maxwell Explicit CREEP,1,0,0 CREEP CRPLAW,
NASSOC,
ZERO. YIEL
* Can be combined with elastic-plastic behavior.
** Can only be used for plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric, and 3-D elements.
Main Index
Rate Effects
Implicit/ User
Behavior Model Explicit Parameter Model Definition Subroutine
Viscoplasticity** Maxwell Implicit CREEP,0,0,1 ISOTROPIC UVSCPL
“VISCO PLAS”
Isotropic Hereditary Implicit ISOTROPIC
Small Strain Integral VISCELPROP
Viscoelasticity
Orthotropic Small Hereditary Implicit ORTHOTROPIC HOOKVI
Strain Integral
VISCELORTH
Viscoelasticity
Large Strain Hereditary Implicit VISCELMOON
Incompressible Integral
Viscoelastic
(Mooney, Gent,
Arruda-Boyce)
Large Strain Hereditary Implicit VISCELOGDEN
Viscoelastic Integral
(Ogden)
Large Strain Hereditary Implicit VISCELFOAM
Viscoelastic Foam Integral
Thermal- Implicit SHIFT FUNCTION
Rheologically
Simple
Viscoelastic SHIFT FUNCTION
Thermal Expansion
VISCEL EXP
* Can be combined with elastic-plastic behavior.
** Can only be used for plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric, and 3-D elements.
Main Index
Define Creep Constitutive Data
CREEP (with TABLE Input) Define Creep Constitutive Data
Description
This option defines the parameters and material properties used in a creep analysis. The creep data can
be specified in either an exponent form or in a piecewise linear curve or an equation. Attention is drawn
to the existence of the CRPLAW user subroutine, which allows alternative forms of creep behavior to be
programmed indirectly. Further detail on creep is given in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special
Routines and Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. In addition, the CREEP parameter must be
included.
The three possible modes of input of creep constitutive data are:
1. Using a table or an equation to directly input the creep strain rate. In this case, the first four entries
of data block 2 are zero, and data block 3 is used to enter the table ID which may refer to an
equation. See Table option.
2. The dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter can be given
directly in power law form by giving the appropriate exponent (as a floating-point number) in the
first field of blocks 4, 5, 6, or 7. The equivalent creep strain rate is
·c
ε = Aσ n ⋅ ( ε c ) n ⋅ T n ⋅ ( nt n – 1 )
Note that the time dependence is specified as a function of total equivalent creep strain. ε c = Atn
The power law form is indicated by setting the corresponding field on data block 2 to -1. The
multiplier A may have a table associated with it.
3. For a user-supplied creep law (using the CRPLAW subroutine, see Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines), set the first five fields of block 2 to 0.
Note: The default numerical procedure for creep analysis is explicit. In case of Norton
creep, an alternative implicit procedure can be used. This should be set using the
CREEP parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
Main Index
962 CREEP (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter -1 if creep strain rate is a function of the temperature raised to a
power. The exponent is given on the 4th data block.
6-10 2nd I Enter -1 if creep strain rate is a function of the equivalent stress raised to
a power. The exponent is given on the 5th data block.
11-15 3rd I Enter -1 if creep strain rate is a function of the creep strain raised to a
power. The exponent is given on the 6th data block.
16-20 4th I Enter -1 if the total creep strain is a function of the time raised to a power.
The exponent is given on the 7th data block.
21-35 5th F Enter the numerical constant in total creep strain relation. Set to zero if a
creep law is being supplied through the CRPLAW user subroutine.
66-70 8th I Enter the unit number for input of creep data, defaults to input.
71-75 9th I Material ID number.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I No used; enter zero.
6-10 2nd I No used; enter zero.
11-15 3rd I No used; enter zero.
16-20 4th I No used; enter zero.
21-25 5th I Enter table ID associated with scalar multiplier A.
4th data block
Required only if 1st field, 2nd data block = -1.
1-15 1st F Enter the exponent of temperature in the exponential creep law.
4a data block
Required only if 2nd field, 2nd data block = -1.
1-15 1st F Enter the exponent of stress in the exponential creep law.
6th data block
Required only if 3rd field, 2nd data block = -1.
1-15 1st F Enter the exponent of total equivalent creep strain in the exponential
creep law.
Main Index
Format
Data
7th data block
Required only if 4th, 2nd data block = -1.
1-15 1st F Enter the exponent of time in the exponential creep law.
Main Index
964 CREEP
CREEP Define Creep Constitutive Data
input style.
Description
This option defines the parameters and material properties used in a creep analysis. The creep data can
be specified in either an exponent form or in a piecewise linear curve. Attention is drawn to the existence
of the CRPLAW user subroutine, which allows alternative forms of creep behavior to be programmed
indirectly. Further detail on creep is given in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines and
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. In addition, the CREEP parameter must be included.
The three possible modes of input of creep constitutive data are:

1. Express the dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter through a
piecewise-linear relationship. The equivalent creep strain rate is then assumed to be a piecewise
linear approximation to
·c dk ( t )
ε = A ⋅ f ( σ ) ⋅ g ( ε c ) ⋅ h ( T ) ⋅ -------------
dt
Note that the function k relates total equivalent creep strain to time. Any of the functions f, g, h,
or k can be set to unity by setting the number of slopes to zero for that relation on the input data.
This is done using one of two methods. Note that these methods cannot be mixed for different
functions (f, g, h, k).
a. The slopes and breakpoints of the piecewise linear functions are given using data blocks 3a,
4a, 5a, and 6a. Note that the independent variable either σ, εc, T, or t should be given in
ascending order. The format is as follows:
Column Field Entry

1-15 1st Slope of curve.
16-30 2nd Breakpoint at which slope begins with the number of blocks
describing each curve (up to a maximum of five) given in the
appropriate field on block 2 of this set.
b. The data points describing the curve of ε c are given directly using data blocks 3b, 4b, 5b, and
6b. This method is flagged by entering the word “DATA” on the CREEP option. These data
points are used to calculate slope breakpoint data. Note that the value of εc at the lowest data
point should equal the value A. The format is as follows:
Main Index
CREEP 965
Column Field Entry

1-15 1st ·c
Value of ε
16-30 2nd Value of either σ, εc, or T for data blocks 3b, 4b, 5b, or 6b
Column Field Entry

1-15 1st Value of εc
16-30 2nd Value of t
2. The dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter can be given
directly in power law form by giving the appropriate exponent (as a floating-point number) in the
first field of blocks 3, 4, 5, or 6. The equivalent creep strain rate is
·c
ε = Aσ n ⋅ ( ε c ) n ⋅ T n ⋅ ( nt n – 1 )
Note that the time dependence is specified as a function of total equivalent creep strain. ε c = Atn
The power law form is indicated by setting the corresponding field on data block 2 to -1.
3. For a user-supplied creep law (using the CRPLAW user subroutine, see Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines), set the first five fields of data block 2 to 0.
Note: The default numerical procedure for creep analysis is explicit. In case of Norton
creep, an alternative implicit procedure can be used. This should be set using the
CREEP parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of blocks defining creep-strain rate versus temperature relation.
6-10 2nd I Number of blocks defining creep-strain rate versus equivalent
stress relation.
11-15 3rd I Number of blocks defining creep-strain rate versus equivalent
creep-strain curve.
16-20 4th I Number of blocks defining total creep-strain increment versus time curve.
Main Index
966 CREEP
Format
Data
21-35 5th F Enter the numerical constant in total creep strain relation. Set to zero if a
creep law is being supplied through the CRPLAW user subroutine.
36-50 6th F If the entry in the tenth field is 0, enter tolerance on the creep strain
increment relative to the elastic strain. Default = 0.50.
A higher value is likely to cause stability problems.
If the entry in the tenth field is 1, enter the maximum allowable creep
strain increment. Default is .01.
Note: Use of the AUTO CREEP option to input this value is preferred.
51-65 7th F If the entry in the tenth field is 0, enter the tolerance on the stress change
per stress during creep.
Default is 0.10.
If the entry in the tenth field is 1, enter the maximum stress increment.
Default is 100. This control is included primarily for accuracy purposes.
Default value is adequate for creep laws of the type ε = aσn where 3 < n <
6. For lower values of n, tolerance can be increased; for higher values, it
should be decreased.
Note: Use of the AUTO CREEP option to input this value is preferred.
66-70 8th I Enter the unit number for input of creep data, defaults to input.
71-75 9th I Material ID number.
76-80 10th I Enter 1 if absolute rather than relative testing is to be performed.
3a data block
Slope and breakpoint data for equivalent creep strain rate versus temperature curve. The number
entered in the first field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 3.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of the curve or the exponent of temperature in the
exponential creep law.
16-30 2nd F Enter the temperature above which the slope (above) becomes operative.
This entry is left blank for exponential creep law.
4a data block
Enter the slope and breakpoint data for equivalent creep strain rate versus equivalent total stress curve.
The number entered in the second field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required
in data block 4.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of the curve or the exponent of stress in the exponential
creep law.
16-30 2nd F Enter the equivalent total stress above which the slope becomes operative.
This entry is left blank for exponential creep law.
Main Index
CREEP 967
Format
Data
5a data block
Slope and breakpoint data for equivalent creep strain rate versus total equivalent creep strain curve. The
number entered in the third field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data
block 5.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of the curve or the exponent of total equivalent creep strain
in the exponential creep law.
16-30 2nd F Enter the equivalent total creep strain above which the slope becomes
operative. This entry is left blank for exponential creep law.
6a data block
Slope and breakpoint data for total equivalent creep strain versus time curve. The number entered in
the fourth field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 6.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of the curve or the exponent of time in the exponential
creep law.
16-30 2nd F Enter the total time above which the slope becomes operative. This entry
is left blank for exponential creep law.
3b data block
Data points for the equivalent creep strain rate versus temperature curve. The number entered in the
first field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 3.
1-15 1st F Enter the equivalent creep strain rate or the exponent of temperature in the
16-30 2nd F Enter the associated temperature. This entry is left blank for exponential
creep law.
4b data block
Data points for the equivalent creep strain rate versus equivalent total stress curve. The number entered
in the second field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 4.
1-15 1st F Enter the equivalent creep strain rate or exponents of stress in the
16-30 2nd F Enter the associated equivalent total stress. This entry is left blank for
5b data block
Data points for the equivalent creep strain rate versus total equivalent creep strain curve. The number
entered in the third field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 5.
1-15 1st F Enter the equivalent creep strain rate or the exponent of total equivalent
creep strain in the exponential creep law.
16-30 2nd F Enter the associated total creep strain. This entry is left blank for
Main Index
968 CREEP
Format
Data
6b data block
Data point for the equivalent creep strain versus time curve. The number entered in the fourth field of
the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 6.
1-15 1st F Enter the equivalent creep strain or the exponent of time in the exponential
creep law.
16-30 2nd F Enter the associated total time. This entry is left blank for exponential
creep law.
Main Index
PHI-COEFFICIENTS 969
Define Phi-Coefficients for Rubber Viscoelastic Model
PHI-COEFFICIENTS Define Phi-Coefficients for Rubber Viscoelastic Model
Description
This option allows the input of phi function value vs. frequency for one out of the seven possible PHI
functions φ0, φ1, φ2, φ11, φ12, φ21, φ22 . This option can be repeated up to seven times to completely
define the seven PHI functions. These PHI functions are used in a harmonic analysis with rubber
materials using the Mooney material model. This can be used only in the total Lagrange formulation. See
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more detail.
Note: For symmetry of the relaxation data, φ12 should equal φ21.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words PHI-COEFFI.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of different frequencies per PHI function to be read in. If a
negative value is entered, the UPHI user subroutine is called to supply PHI
coefficients as a function of frequency for all PHI functions.
6-10 2nd I PHI function identifier.
= 1 for φ0
= 2 for φ1
= 3 for φ2
= 4 for φ11
= 5 for φ12
= 6 for φ21
= 7 for φ22
11-15 3rd I Material type identifier.
3rd data block (Not used if the UPHI user subroutine is requested)
1-10 1st F Frequency in radians/time unit.
11-20 2nd F Real PHI coefficient.
21-30 3rd F Imaginary PHI coefficient.
Main Index
970 VISCELPROP
Define Properties for Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials
VISCELPROP Define Properties for Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials
Description
This option is used to specify the time dependent part of the material behavior of a small strain
viscoelastic material. Here, only isotropic quantities can be specified. Note that the instantaneous moduli
for small-strain viscoelasticity are specified on the ISOTROPIC option. Orthotropic time-dependent
behavior can be specified using the VISCELORTH option.
Note: Thermo-rheologically simple behavior is specified with the SHIFT FUNCTION option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word VISCELPROP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of viscoelastic properties to be input.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of viscoelastic properties, default to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material type identification number. This number is used for cross
reference with the ISOTROPIC, TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, and
SHIFT FUNCTION options.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of terms in the Prony series expansion (maximum
value of either the deviatoric terms or the volumetric terms).
11-15 3rd I Number of terms in the Prony series expansion for deviatoric behavior.
16-20 4th I Number of terms in the Prony series expansion for volumetric behavior.
4th data block
Repeated for the maximum number of terms.
1-10 1st F Shear constant.
11-20 2nd F Relaxation time for deviatoric behavior.
21-30 3rd F Bulk constant.
31-40 4th F Relaxation time for volumetric behavior
Main Index
VISCELORTH 971
Define Properties for Viscoelastic Orthotropic Materials
VISCELORTH Define Properties for Viscoelastic Orthotropic Materials
Description
This option inputs the time dependent material data used in conjunction with the ORTHOTROPIC option
for viscoelastic materials. It can also be used to specify the anisotropic time dependent constants for an
anisotropic material exhibiting small strain viscoelastic behavior by use of the HOOKVI user subroutine.
The instantaneous elastic behavior is specified on the ORTHOTROPIC option.
Note: Since the material properties for orthotropic materials are independent, it is your
responsibility to enter all required data. No defaults are provided by Marc.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word VISCELORTH.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of VISCELORTH data to read.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for reading data, defaults to input.
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks are entered as a set, once for each set of VISCELORTH data.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number for cross-referencing with
ORTHOTROPIC data.
6-10 2nd I Number of terms in the Prony series expansion (note that deviatoric and
volumetric behavior are treated together).
4th data block
1-10 1st F Time constant for this term in the Prony series expansion.
11-20 2nd F n
E xx
21-30 3rd F n
E yy
31-40 4th F n
E zz
41-50 5th F ν xy
n
51-60 6th F ν yz
n
61-70 7th F ν zx
n
Main Index
972 VISCELORTH
Define Properties for Viscoelastic Orthotropic Materials
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st F n
G xy
11-20 2nd F n
G yz
21-30 3rd F n
G zx
Main Index
VISCELMOON 973
Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials
VISCELMOON Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials
Description
This option is used to input the time dependent data for a Mooney-Rivlin, Gent, or Arruda-Boyce
viscoelastic material. The instantaneous elastic behavior is specified using the MOONEY,
ARRUDBOYCE, or GENT model definition option, respectively.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word VISCELMOON.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of VISCELMOON data to read.
The 3rd data block is entered once for each set of VISCELMOON data.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material ID number for cross-referencing with the rate
independent properties.
6-10 2nd I Number of terms in the Prony series expansion for deviatoric behavior.
The 4th data block is entered once for each term in the Prony series.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Multiplier for energy function.
11-20 2nd F Relaxation time.
Main Index
974 VISCELOGDEN
Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Ogden Materials
VISCELOGDEN Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Ogden Materials
Description
This option is used to input the time dependent data for a Ogden viscoelastic material. The instantaneous
elastic behavior is specified using the OGDEN model definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word VISCELOGDEN.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data to read.
The 3rd data block is entered once for each set of data.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material ID number for cross-referencing with the OGDEN option.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of terms of either Prony series expansion.
11-15 3rd I Number of terms for deviatoric behavior.
16-20 4rd I Number of terms for dilatational behavior.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Multiplier for deviatoric energy function.
11-20 2nd F Deviatoric relaxation time.
21-30 3rd F Multiplier for dilatational energy function.
31-40 4rd F Dilatational relaxation time.
Main Index
VISCELFOAM 975
Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials
VISCELFOAM Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials
Description
This option is used to input the time dependent data for a foam viscoelastic material. The instantaneous
elastic behavior is specified using either the FOAM model definition option or the UELASTOMER user
subroutine.
This option must be used with LARGE STRAIN; i.e., updated Lagrange formulation.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word VISCELFOAM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of VISCELFOAM data to read.
The 3rd data block is entered once for each set of VISCELFOAM data.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material ID number for cross-referencing with the rate
independent properties.
6-10 2nd I Number of terms in the Prony series expansion for deviatoric behavior.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Multiplier for energy function.
11-20 2nd F Relaxation time.
Main Index
976 SHIFT FUNCTION
Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple Viscoelastic Materials
SHIFT FUNCTION Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple

Viscoelastic Materials
Description
This option allows you to define the shift function parameters for viscoelastic material groups that exhibit
thermo-rheologically simple behavior.
Note that for the Narayanaswamy model, the initial value of the fictive temperature for each term must
be specified as the second state variable via the INITIAL STATE option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SHIFT FUNCTION.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets used to define different shift functions.
6-10 2nd I Unit number from which the data block is read. Defaults to block input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material number for cross-referencing with the instantaneous and time
dependent viscoelastic properties.
6-10 2nd I Enter the code number denoting the shift function type:
1 = Williams-Landel-Ferry equation
2 = Power series expansion
3 = Narayanaswamy model
-N = any negative integer value denotes that the shift function is
specified in the user subroutine.
11-15 3rd I If the second field is 2, enter the number of coefficients in the power
series representation.
If the second field is 3, enter the number of terms in Prony
series expansion.
16-25 4th E Enter the reference or glass transition temperature Tg, for this
shift function.
For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the temperature for stress
relaxation data.
Main Index
SHIFT FUNCTION 977
Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple Viscoelastic Materials
Format
Data
26-35 5th E For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the activation energy divided by the
gas constant Q/R.
36-45 6th E For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the fraction parameter.
46-55 7th E For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the temperature shift between your
temperature and absolute temperature for calculating fictitive
temperatures.
56-65 8th E For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the reference temperature for the
structural relaxation data.
If Williams-Landel-Ferry form, use the following data block.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the constant C1.
11-20 2nd F Enter the constant C2.
If power series expansion, use the following data block.
If shift function is defined in the TRSFAC user subroutine, the 4th data block is not required.
4th data block
1-80 1st F Enter the constants Co to Cm in increasing order of subscript, using
additional blocks if necessary to define all constants.
If Narayanaswamy model, use the 4th and 5th data blocks.
4th data block
1-80 1st F Enter the weighting factors Wg in increasing order of subscript. Use
5th data block
1-80 1st F Enter the relaxation time τi,ref in increasing order of subscript. Use
Main Index
978 VISCEL EXP
Viscoelastic Thermal Expansion
VISCEL EXP Viscoelastic Thermal Expansion
Description
This option is used to define the thermal expansion behavior often observed in viscoelastic materials. It
is used in conjunction with the viscoelastic material models and the Narayanaswamy thermal
rheologically simple shift function. The fictive temperature is stored in the second state variable and can
be postprocessed by selecting post code 29.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words VISCEL EXP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of materials to be defined.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material number for cross-referencing with the instantaneous and time
dependent viscoelastic properties.
6-15 2nd E Enter the solid coefficient of thermal expansion, αg .
16-25 3rd E Enter the liquid coefficient of thermal expansion, αl .
Main Index
Dynamic Analysis
Chapt Dynamic Analysis

er 3: This section describes the data input required for dynamic analysis. There are several options available
Mode for specifying the initial conditions of the problem. The mass density of the object is specified through
any of the material options. Marc uses this to calculate a consistent mass matrix, which can be converted
l into a diagonal mass matrix by using the LUMP parameter. This is not recommended for either higher-
order elements or shells and beams. In addition, you can apply concentrated masses to particular degrees
Defini of freedom using options given in this section. Damping can be specified through either the DAMPING
tion or COEFFICIENT option. Note that stiffness damping should not be applied to either the multi-step
Herrmann elements or the gap elements. Damping is not recommended when using the multi-step
Optio Houbolt operator as this method has significant internal damping. If you want to specify material
damping, choose another dynamic operator. If you want to specify material damping, choose another
ns dynamic operator.Dashpots can be specified through either the SPRINGS, PBUSH, or PFAST option.
In addition, the FLUID SOLID option is included so that you can specify the interface between the fluid
and solid boundary.
If a response spectrum analysis is to be performed, the spectral density is provided through the
RESPONSE SPECTRUM option.
Main Index
980 DAMPING
Define Damping Factors
DAMPING Define Damping Factors
Description
This option allows the input of damping factors for use with the dynamic analysis options. Two damping
inputs are available depending on your choice of dynamic option. For modal superposition analysis, you
give the fraction of critical damping associated with each mode of the solution. For direct integration or
harmonic analysis, you input the factors weighting the mass and stiffness matrices to form the damping
matrix. In both cases, the damping matrix is assumed to be formed as a linear combination of the mass
and stiffness matrices of the system, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. There are two
styles for defining the damping coefficients for transient dynamics. In the first style, they are associated
with element numbers while the second style is based upon material ID. Using the second style, it is
possible to associate a table with the damping coefficients. This may be used to allow the coefficients to
be a function of the frequency in a harmonic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word DAMPING.
11-15 2nd I Method to read damping data for direct integration dynamics or
harmonics; default = 1.
Default; not used for modal analysis, the second data block is used.
Enter 1; damping is given on a element basis, data blocks 3, 4, and 5
are used.
Enter 2; damping is given based upon the material id, data blocks 3, 6,
and 7.
2nd data block
For dynamic type 1, transient analysis by modal superposition only.
1-10 1st F Fraction of critical damping for 1st mode.
11-20 2nd F Fraction of critical damping for 2nd mode.
Etc. Etc. Etc. Etc.
3th data block
For direct integration (Newmark-beta, Houbolt, generalized alpha, or central difference) or harmonics.
1-5 1st I Number of damping sets (NDMPST) to be read in. Either the 4th and 5th
data blocks or the 6th and 7th data blocks are given in pairs
NDMPST times. Optional.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of the damping data, defaults to input.
Main Index
DAMPING 981
Define Damping Factors
Format
Data
4th data block
Use 4th and 5th data blocks if method is 0 or 1 (1st data block, 2nd field).
1-10 1st F Multiplier (α) for mass matrix contribution to damping matrix.
11-20 2nd F Multiplier (β) for stiffness matrix contribution to damping matrix.
21-30 3rd F Multiplier (γ) for numerical damping.
5th data block
1-5 1st I First element to have these damping values.
6-10 2nd I Last element to have these damping values.
6th data block
Use the 6th and 7th data blocks if input method is 2 (1st data block, 2nd field).
6-15 2nd F Multiplier (α) for mass matrix contribution to damping matrix.
16-25 3rd F Multiplier (β) for stiffness matrix contribution to damping matrix.
26-35 4th F Multiplier (γ) for numerical damping.
7th data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the mass matrix coefficient.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with the stiffness matrix coefficient.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID associated with the numerical damping coefficient.
In a dynamic analysis, the damping matrix is evaluated as:
γ Δt
C = αM + ⎛ β + --------⎞ K
⎝ π ⎠
In a harmonic analysis, the damping matrix is evaluated as:
C = αM + ⎛⎝ β + ------⎞⎠ K
2γ
ω
Main Index
982 FLUID SOLID
Define Fluid-Solid Interface
FLUID SOLID Define Fluid-Solid Interface
Description
This option is used with the added mass approach to fluid-solid problems. In such analysis, the fluid is
considered incompressible and inviscid. This model definition set is necessary to identify the element
faces in the solid which abut the fluid. Note that with this feature, the fluid density is entered on the
ISOTROPIC option in the Young’s modulus field for the fluid elements. The fluid region is modeled using
heat transfer elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the words FLUID SOLID.
2nd data block
One data line per solid/fluid interface pair – for each abutting pair specify:
1-5 1st I Solid element number.
6-10 2nd I Solid element face number (as identified for distributed load option).
11-15 3rd I Fluid element number.
16-20 4th I Fluid element face number (as identified in distributed flux option).
Main Index
Define Initial Displacements
INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Displacements
Description
This option provides initial displacements for dynamic problems or a spatially varying interference fit in
contact analyses. The USINC user subroutine or the TABLE model definition can be used to enter spatially
varying initial conditions. The data specified here must be activated using the LOADCASE model
definition option.
To obtain the initial displacement from the calculated value of a previous analysis, use the
PRE STATE option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INITIAL DISP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of initial displacements (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of initial displacement data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometric types used to define initial condition,
Enter 1 if the USINC user subroutine is required for this initial condition.
Main Index
984 INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Initial displacement in first degree of freedom or the interference fit
normal to the contact surface.
11-20 2nd F Initial displacement in second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Initial displacement in third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th F Initial displacement in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50 5th F Initial displacement in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60 6th F Initial displacement in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70 7th F Initial displacement in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80 8th F Initial displacement in eighth degree of freedom.
5th data block - Table ID
31-35 7th I Table ID associated with the seventh degree of freedom.
36-40 8th I Table ID associated with the eighth degree of freedom.
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
7th data block
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial conditions are
applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
Main Index
986 INITIAL DISP
INITIAL DISP Define Initial Displacements
input style.
Description
This option provides initial displacements for dynamic problems or a spatially varying interference fit in
contact analyses.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INITIAL DISP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of prescribed displacements (optional).
If a -1 is entered, the USINC user subroutine is used for all nodes. Data
blocks 3 and 4 are not required.
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of prescribed displacement data, defaults to
input.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Initial displacement in first degree of freedom or the interference fit
normal to the contact surface.
11-20 2nd F Initial displacement in second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Initial displacement in third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th F Initial displacement in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50 5th F Initial displacement in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60 6th F Initial displacement in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70 7th F Initial displacement in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80 8th F Initial displacement in eighth degree of freedom.
Continuation data lines, if necessary, must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data lines are needed if
there are more than eight degrees of freedom per node in the analysis.
4th data block
Enter list of nodes for which the above initial displacements are applied.
Main Index
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input) 987
Define Initial Velocity
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Velocity
Description
This option allows the input of initial velocity for dynamic problems. The data specified here must be
activated using the LOADCASE model definition option.
To obtain the initial displacement from the calculated value of a previous analysis, use the
PRE STATE option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INITIAL VEL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of initial velocity (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of initial velocity data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are entered as pairs; one for each data set.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the USINC user subroutine required for this initial condition.
4th data block
1-10 1st E Initial velocity in first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd E Initial velocity in second degree of freedom.
Main Index
988 INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
21-30 3rd E Initial velocity in third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th E Initial velocity in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50 5th E Initial velocity in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60 6th E Initial velocity in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70 6th E Initial velocity in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80 6th E Initial velocity in eighth degree of freedom.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Node IDs
3: Volume/Region/Body ids
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
INITIAL VEL 989
INITIAL VEL Define Initial Velocity
input style.
Description
This option allows the input of initial velocity for dynamic problems.
Format
Entry
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INITIAL VEL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of prescribed velocity (optional).
Enter -1 if the USINC user subroutine is to be used for all nodes. In this
case, data blocks 3 and 4 are not used.
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of prescribed velocity data, defaults to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs; one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Initial velocity in first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd E Initial velocity in second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd E Initial velocity in third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th E Initial velocity in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50 5th E Initial velocity in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60 6th E Initial velocity in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70 7th E Initial velocity in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80 8th E Initial velocity in eighth degree of freedom.
Continuation data lines, if necessary, must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data lines are needed if
there are more than eight degrees of freedom per node in the analysis.
4th data block
Enter list of nodes for which the above initial velocities are applied.
Main Index
990 FIXED ACCE
Define Fixed Acceleration
FIXED ACCE Define Fixed Acceleration
Description
This option defines the fixed accelerations that each specified degree of freedom must take during the
first and subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the ACC CHANGE option. This option
can only be used in dynamic analyses. It is usually used to prescribe base motion accelerations.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FIXED ACCE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of boundary condition data lines to be read (optional).
For each set of boundary conditions, use the 3rd, 4th and 5th data blocks.
3d data block
1-10 1st E Prescribed acceleration for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed acceleration for second degree of freedom listed in data
block 4.
21-30 3rd E Prescribed acceleration for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
4th data block
5th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above accelerations are applied.
Main Index
MASSES 991
Define Concentrated Masses
MASSES Define Concentrated Masses
Description
This option is used to input any concentrated masses for use with the dynamic analysis options. Each
concentrated mass is associated with a single degree of freedom.
Note: Rotational degrees of freedom might have mass depending on the element types used in
the data.
In a coupled analysis, the lumped capacitance is the concentrated mass multiplied with the lumped
capacitance factor, if the lumped mass is given or is the lumped capacitance itself.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word MASSES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data used to enter mass points (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for reading mass point data. Defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Degree of freedom to which mass is applied.
6-15 2nd F Value of concentrated mass.
16-25 3rd F Value of concentrated damper.
26-35 4th F Lumped capacitance (factor).
36-40 5th I Table ID for concentrated mass.
41-45 6th I Table ID for concentrated damper.
46-50 7th I Table ID for lumped capacitance.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes having the above concentrated masses.
Main Index
992 CONM1
Define a General Concentrated Mass
CONM1 Define a General Concentrated Mass
Description
Define a general concentrated mass to be applied to a node. Either a diagonal or a symmetric 6 x 6 mass
matrix may be defined with respect to a local coordinate system. This mass is used in dynamic or
harmonic analyses only. The TABLE option may be used in conjunction with this option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CONM1.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of distinct sets of CONM1 entries.
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of CONM1 data (default to standard input).
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter Coordinate System ID (integer ≥ 0).
6-10 2nd I Enter method by which mass terms are specified.
1 = only diagonal masses specified on 4a – 5a data blocks.
2 = full 6 x 6 mass specified on 4b – 9b data blocks.
11-15 3rd I Enter method by which damping terms are specified.
1 = only diagonal damping specified on 10a – 11a data blocks.
2 = full 6 x 6 damping specified on 10b – 15b data blocks.
16-20 4th I Enter method by which capacitance terms are specified.
1 = thermal capacitance factor specified on data block 16a.
2 = thermal capacitance factor specified on data block 16b.
3 = absolute thermal capacitance specified on data block 16a.
4 = absolute thermal capacitance specified on data block 16b.
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 1, include the 4a and 5a data blocks.
4a data block
1-10 1st E M11
11-20 2nd E M22
21-30 3rd E M33
Main Index
CONM1 993
Format
Data
31-40 4th E M44
41-50 5th E M55
51-60 6th E M66
5a data block
1–5 1st I Table ID for M11.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for M22.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for M33.
16-20 4th I Table ID for M44.
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 2; for 2-D simulation, include the 4b and 5b data blocks (see
Remark 2).
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 2; for 3-D simulation, include the 4b through 9b data blocks.
4b data block
1-10 1st E M11
11-20 2nd E M21
21-30 3rd E M22
31-40 4th E M31
41-50 5th E M32
51-60 6th E M33
61-70 7th E M41
5b data block
6b data block
1-10 1st E M42
11-20 2nd E M43
Main Index
994 CONM1
Format
Data
21-30 3rd E M44
31-40 4th E M51
41-50 5th E M52
51-60 6th E M53
61-70 7th E M54
7b data block
8b data block
1-10 1st E M55
11-20 2nd E M61
21-30 3rd E M62
31-40 4th E M63
41-50 5th E M64
51-60 6th E M65
61-70 7th E M66
9b data block
If the 3rd field of the 3rd data block = 1, include the 10a and 11a data blocks.
Main Index
CONM1 995
Format
Data
10a data block
1-10 1st E D11
11-20 2nd E D22
21-30 3rd E D33
31-40 4th E D44
41-50 5th E D55
51-60 6th E D66
11a data block
1–5 1st I Table ID for D11.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for D22.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for D33.
16-20 4th I Table ID for D44.
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 2; for 2-D simulation, include the 10b and 11b data blocks (see
Remark 2).
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 2; for 3-D simulation, include the 10b through 15b data blocks.
10b data block
1-10 1st E D11
11-20 2nd E D21
21-30 3rd E D22
31-40 4th E D31
41-50 5th E D32
51-60 6th E D33
61-70 7th E D41
11b data block
Main Index
996 CONM1
Format
Data
12b data block
1-10 1st E D42
11-20 2nd E D43
21-30 3rd E D44
31-40 4th E D51
41-50 5th E D52
51-60 6th E D53
61-70 7th E D54
13b data block
14b data block
1-10 1st E D55
11-20 2nd E D61
21-30 3rd E D62
31-40 4th E D63
41-50 5th E D64
51-60 6th E D65
61-70 7th E D66
15b data block
Main Index
CONM1 997
Format
Data
If the 4th field of the 3rd data block = 1 or 2, include the 16a data block.
16a data block
1-10 1st E CP (will be multiplied by M11).
11-15 2nd I Table ID for CP.
If the 4th field of the 3rd data block = 3 or 4, include the 16b data block.
16b data block
1-10 1st E MCP
11-15 2nd I Table ID for MCP.
17th data block
Enter a list of nodes.
Remarks
1. The COORD SYSTEM ID is an integer that is ≥ 0. ID = 0 means that the mass and damping matrix
are defined in the global Cartesian system. ID > 0 means that the mass matrix is in a user-defined
coordinate system with the same number.
2. For 2-D problems, if the diagonal form is specified, then only M11, M22, and M33 (if rotation
degree of freedom is included) are defined. If the full form is specified and there are no rotational
degrees of freedom, then M11, M21, and M22 are supported. If the full form is specified and there
are rotational degrees of freedom, then M11, M21, M22, M31, M32, and M33 are supported.
3. For heat transfer shells, CP11 is applied to all degrees of freedom through the thickness.
Main Index
998 CONM2
Define a Diagonal Mass/Moment of Inertia
CONM2 Define a Diagonal Mass/Moment of Inertia
Description
Define a concentrated diagonal mass contribution and the mass moment of inertia with respect to a local
coordinate system. The mass is used in dynamic and harmonic analysis only. The TABLE option may be
used in conjunction with this option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CONM2.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of distinct sets of CONM2 entries.
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of CONM2 data (default to standard input).
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter Coordinate System ID (integer ≥ -1).
6-15 2nd E Offset distance component X1.
16-25 3rd E Offset distance component X2.
26-35 4th E Offset distance component X3.
36-40 5th I Table ID for X1.
4th data block
1-10 1st E M
11-20 2nd E I11
21-30 3rd E I21
31-40 4th E I22
41-50 5th E I31
51-60 6th E I32
61-70 7th E I33
Main Index
CONM2 999
Define a Diagonal Mass/Moment of Inertia
Format
Data
5th data block
1–5 1st I Table ID for M.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for I11.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for I21.
16-20 4th I Table ID for I22.
6th data
block
Enter a list of nodes.
Remarks
1. The COORD SYSTEM ID is an integer that is ≥ -1. ID = -1 or = 0 both mean that the mass
and moments of inertia defined in the 4th data block are in the global Cartesian coordinate system.
ID = -1 means that X1, X2, and X3 are the coordinates of the center of gravity in the global
Cartesian system. ID = 0 means that X1, X2, and X3 are the offset distances from the grid point
in the global Cartesian system. ID > 0 means that the mass and moments of inertia defined in the
4th data block are in the user-defined coordinate system with the same ID. Also, X1, X2, and X3
are the offset distances from the grid point in the same user system.
2. In 2-D problems, M, I33, X1, and X2 alone will need to be entered.
Main Index
1000 RESPONSE SPECTRUM
Define Density for Spectral Response
RESPONSE SPECTRUM Define Density for Spectral Response
Description
This option allows you to define the response spectral density. Note that the RESPONSE parameter must
also be included. A spectrum response calculation is performed based on the last set of extracted modes
when a SPECTRUM history definition option is encountered.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-20 A Enter the words RESPONSE SPECTRUM.
2nd data block
1-5 I Enter the number of spectral density pairs (optional).
6-10 I Enter the unit number to read data. Default is to input.
3rd data block
1-10 F Enter the frequency in cycles per time unit.
11-20 F Enter the displacement spectral response density.
Main Index
MODAL INCREMENT 1001
Define Increments for Eigenvalue Extraction
MODAL INCREMENT Define Increments for Eigenvalue Extraction
Description
This option allows you to specify at which increments an eigenvalue extraction is performed. It can be
used as either a replacement to the MODAL SHAPE history definition option or in conjunction with it.
This option allows you to extract modes within an AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, AUTO CREEP, or AUTO
INCREMENT period. Note that the increment numbers specified here cannot be changed upon restart.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-20 1st A Enter the words MODAL INCREMENT.
2a data block
Data block 2a is used if the inverse power sweep method is selected on the DYNAMIC parameter.
1-5 1st I Maximum number of iterations per mode in the power sweep. Maximum
number of iterations for all modes if subspace iteration is used. Default is
40.
6-15 2nd F Convergence tolerance. The power sweep terminates when the difference
between the eigenvalues in two consecutive sweeps divided by the
eigenvalue is less than the tolerance. Default is 0.0001.
16-25 3rd F Initial shift in cycles per time. The power shift is likely to start converging
to the eigenvalue closest to this value. Default is 0.
26-35 4th F Maximum frequency to be extracted in cycles per time. If this is left blank
or zero, the number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC parameter are
extracted. If this is nonzero, the extraction ends when this frequency is
exceeded or when the number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC
parameter is reached, whichever occurs first.
36-40 5th I Number of modes extracted per shift. This data field determines if auto
shifting occurs. If auto shift is not required, set equal to or greater than
number of modes requested on DYNAMIC parameter. Default is 5.
41-50 6th F Auto shift parameter. Marc determines the new shift point (in frequency
squared) as the highest frequency square plus this entry times the
difference between the highest and next highest distinct frequency
squared. Default is 1.0.
51-55 7th I Enter 1 if eigenvectors are to be written to the post file.
Main Index
1002 MODAL INCREMENT
Define Increments for Eigenvalue Extraction
Format
Data
2b data block
Data block 2b is used if the Lanczos method is selected on the DYNAMIC parameter.
1-10 1st F SHFMIN, lowest frequency of mode to be extracted (in cycles/time). This
is also the initial shift point. The shift point is SHFMIN∗SHFMIN. If a
negative frequency is given, shift point is -SHFMIN∗SHFMIN. This
cannot be changed upon restart.
11-20 2nd F SHFMAX, highest frequency of modes to be extracted. If set to 0,
NSNRM modes are extracted. If not set to zero, all modes between
SHFMIN and SHFMAX are extracted and NSNRM is not used. A Strum
sequence check is performed to calculate this number. This can be
changed upon restart.
21-25 3rd I NSNRM, number of requested modes. Only needed if SHFMAX is set
equal to 0. This can be increased upon restart.
36-40 6th I Enter 1 if eigenvectors are to be written to the post file.
3rd data block
Enter a list of increment numbers at which modes are to be extracted.
Main Index
BUCKLE INCREMENT 1003
Define Increments for Buckling Analysis
BUCKLE INCREMENT Define Increments for Buckling Analysis
Description
This option allows you to specify at which increments a buckling analysis is performed. It can be used
as either a replacement to the BUCKLE history definition option or in conjunction with it. This option
allows you to extract modes within an AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, AUTO CREEP, or AUTO INCREMENT
period. Note that the increment numbers specified here cannot be changed upon restart.
Perturbation buckling should not be used with Fourier buckling.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-20 1st A Enter the words BUCKLE INCREMENT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of iterations per mode in the power sweep. Default
is 40.
eigenvalue is less than the tolerance. Default is 0.0001.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 if Fourier Buckling is to be performed.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 if the eigenvectors are to be written to the post file.
26-30 5th I Enter 1 for automatic buckling perturbation.
Enter 2 for manual buckling perturbation.
31-35 6th I Enter buckling mode to be used in perturbation.
Enter negative number of modes if multiple modes are used
in perturbation.
36-45 7th F Enter the scale factor to be multiplied with the normalized buckle mode
and added to coordinates.
3rd data block
Used only with Fourier buckling.
Enter a list of Fourier harmonics at which to perform extractions.
Positive numbers are symmetric modes; negative numbers are
antisymmetric modes.
Data Block 3a is used only if sixth field of the 2nd data block is negative. Use one line for each mode
used for perturbation.
Main Index
1004 BUCKLE INCREMENT
Define Increments for Buckling Analysis
Format
Data
3a data block
1-5 1st I Mode number.
6-15 2nd F Scale factor.
If automatic buckling perturbation, the fifth field on the 2nd data block equals one, do not enter the 4th
data block.
4th data block
Enter a list of increment numbers at which modes are to be extracted.
Main Index
Heat Transfer Analysis
Chapt Heat Transfer Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for heat transfer
Mode problems. The boundary conditions discussed in this section are also used for coupled thermal-
mechanical problems or coupled fluid-thermal problems. The ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, and
l ANISOTROPIC options are used to define the conductivity, specific heat and density. If these material
properties are influenced with temperature, this variation can be prescribed by the TABLE,
Defini TEMPERATURE EFFECTS or ORTHO TEMP options. In problems where temperature effects are
tion important, a steady-state analysis performed in one increment requires recycling. A transient analysis
recycles and reassembles based upon the tolerances given in the CONTROL option. The initial
Optio temperatures can be prescribed using INITIAL TEMP option. Surface, volumetric or nodal fluxes can be
prescribed and convective boundary conditions can be imposed through the FILMS option.
ns
In Heat Transfer Analysis, data for POINT FLUX, DIST FLUXES, and QVECT should be prescribed as
total rather than incremental quantity (as used in Mechanical Analysis). This specification is to be used
consistently for the heat transfer portion of analysis in coupled thermal-mechanical (thermal-solid), fluid-
thermal, and fluid-thermal-solid.
Main Index
1006 FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input)
Define Fixed Temperature
FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) Define Fixed Temperature
Description
This option defines the temperature that each node must take. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the temperature and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of geometric entries. The
prescribed temperature is associated with a boundary condition name and is activated with the
LOADCASE history definition option. Note that unless heat transfer shell elements are used, there is only
one degree of freedom in a heat transfer analysis.
The FORCDT user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter nonuniform
time dependent boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words FIXED TEMPERATURE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of boundary conditions to be read (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit number to read data, default is the standard input file.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FORCDT user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
16-20 4th I Maximum number of degrees of freedom specified on the 4th, 5th, and 6th
data blocks for heat transfer shells if the number of degrees of freedom is
greater than 8.
26-30 6th I Enter a 1 if first prescribed temperature entered is to be applied for all DOF
of a heat transfer shell.
Main Index
FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) 1007
Format
Data
For conventional heat transfer element, only one degree of freedom is required.
For heat transfer shell elements, the 4th, 5th, and 6th data blocks are repeated to satisfy the maximum
number specified on the 4th field of the 3rd data block. A maximum of eight degrees of freedom per
data block.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed temperature for first degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
11-20 2nd F Prescribed temperature for second degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
21-30 3rd F Prescribed temperature for third degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
(See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal degrees
of freedom.)
5th data block
6th data block
temperatures are given.
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface ids
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
11 Element-Edges IDs
Main Index
1008 FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input)
Format
Data
8th data block
Enter a list of geometric entities for which the above boundary conditions
7th data block.
Main Index
FIXED TEMPERATURE 1009
FIXED TEMPERATURE Define Fixed Temperature
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed temperature that each node must take during the first and subsequent
increments, unless it is further modified using the TEMP CHANGE option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the temperature and a list of nodal numbers, or by the input of boundary
conditions generated during mesh generation (MESH2D).
Note: The boundary conditions are stored after the connectivity and coordinate data on this file,
so that the model definitions must be arranged accordingly.
For each set of boundary conditions, use the 3a and 4a data blocks or the 3b, 4b, and 5b blocks.
(3a); (4a) For analyses which do not include heat transfer shell elements.
Format
Format ‘
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words FIXED TEMPERATURE.
2nd data block
mesh generation (MESH2D). If this field is activated, no further data lines
are required in this option.
11-15 3rd I Unit number used for MESH2D option.
Use 3a,4a for analyses which do not include heat transfer shell elements.
3a data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed temperature.
4a data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above temperature is applied.
Main Index
1010 FIXED TEMPERATURE
Format ‘
Data
3b data block
Use 3b, 4b, and 5b for analyses which include heat transfer shell elements.
1-10 1st F Prescribed temperature for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
11-20 2nd F Prescribed temperature for second degree of freedom listed in data block
4b.
21-30 3rd F Prescribed temperature for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
(See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal degrees of
freedom.)
4b data block
5b data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above boundary conditions are applied.
Main Index
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1011
Define Thermal Boundary Conditions
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Define Thermal Boundary Conditions

Definition)
Description
This option allows the input of convection, natural convection, radiation, and applied fluxes on the
surface of the model. The user defines the film coefficients, sink temperatures, and fluxes here.
Nonuniform films or sink temperatures can be obtained via the UFILM user subroutine (see Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines) or by using the TABLE model definition option. As an
alternative, the sink temperatures may be prescribed using the SINK POINTS option. This option may
also be used to specify a radiation to the environment.
The convective boundary condition is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated and
deactivated by the LOADCASE history definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data used to input film (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of film data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometric types used to define film boundary
condition. See 7th and 8th data blocks.
6-10 2nd I Enter the sum of FILMTYP + TEMTYP where:
FILMTYP = 0 if no user subroutine is required.
FILMTYP = 1 if the UFILM user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
FILMTYP = 4 if a control node is to be used.
FILMTYP = 6 if the environment temperature is a function of the
temperature of the control node.
Main Index
1012 FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
TEMTYP = 0 if temperature dependent convective coefficients based
upon temperature at the surface is used.
upon average of the temperature of the surface
temperature and the ambient temperature is used.
upon the ambient temperature is used.
Note: The TEMPTYP 0 and 10 are opposite of the MD Nastran
convention, but are necessary to maintain backward
compatibility with Marc input files.
11-15 3rd I If FILMTYP = 4 or 6, enter the control node to be used.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 if environment temperature obtained from 4th data block.
Enter the group number containing the sink points which will be used to
obtain the environment temperature. If the sink points do not belong to any
group, enter 1.
26-30 6th I Enter -1 to exclude applied load when the edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is fully
in contact.
If a control node is used (see 4th field) or convection nodes are used (see 5th and 6th fields), the first
degree of freedom of this node will always be used even if this node is associated with a heat transfer
shell element.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Reference value of film coefficient.
11-20 2nd F Reference value of sink temperature (reference values can be modified by
the UFILM user subroutine). If convection is specified to a node(s), this
value is ignored.
21-30 3rd F Enter the magnitude of externally applied distributed flux.
31-40 4th F Reference value of the film coefficient for natural convection.
41-50 5th F Enter the exponent for natural convection.
51-60 6th F Enter the emissivity.
61-70 7th F Effective View factor (default = 1.0).
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the film coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the sink temperature.
Main Index
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1013
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with the distributed flux.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID associated with the natural convection.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID associated with the exponent for natural convection.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for emissivity.
31-35 7th I Enter the table ID for view factor.
6th data block
01: Normal flux (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal flux (top surface for shells)
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
1014 FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
19: Curve ID: orientation ID - Marc Mentat convention
8th data
block
7th data block.
Main Index
FILMS (Model Definition) 1015
Define Convection Film Coefficient Input
FILMS (Model Definition) Define Convection Film Coefficient Input
input style.
Description
This option allows film coefficients and associated sink temperatures to be input. Nonuniform films or
sink temperatures can be obtained via the FILM user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines
and Special Routines).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
6-15 2nd F Reference value of film coefficient.
16-25 3rd F Reference value of sink temperature (reference values can be modified by
the FILM user subroutine).
26-30 4th I Film coefficient index (optional).
31-35 5th I Sink temperature index (optional). (Film coefficient and sink temperature
indices are to be used in the FILM user subroutine).
4th data block
Main Index
1016 SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Sink Points
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) Define Sink Points
Description
This option is used to define the temperature at arbitrary points in the environment. The radiative and
convective thermal fluxes as entered through the FILMS option are based upon these values. These
temperatures may change with time by using either the TABLE model definition option or the USINKPT
user subroutine. The program uses the closest eligible sink point to the surface integration point.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SINK POINTS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sink point groups to be entered.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number used to read the sink points.
11-15 3rd I Enter a 1 to print out sink point data.
16-20 4th I Enter the number of real variables associated with sink point, default is 1
(temperature), maximum is 8.
3rd data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word GROUP.
11-15 2nd I Enter the group number. Default is 1.
16-20 3rd I Enter a 1 if the USINKPT user subroutine is used.
Repeat data blocks 4 through 6 for each sink point in this group.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the sink point id. Only used for the USINKPT user subroutine;
otherwise could be zero.
6-15 2nd E Enter the first coordinate of sink point.
16-25 3rd E Enter the second coordinate of sink point.
26-35 4th E Enter the third coordinate of sink point.
Main Index
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1017
Define Sink Points
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the sink temperature.
11-20 2nd E Enter the second sink variable if the 2nd data block, 4th field is greater
than 1.
etc.
6th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the sink temperature.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the second sink variable if required.
etc.
Main Index
1018 DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Distributed Fluxes
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Define Distributed Fluxes

Definition)
Description
This option defines total distributed (surface and volumetric) fluxes by giving the magnitude, location,
and associating the information with a boundary condition name. Distributed fluxes are converted to
consistent nodal fluxes by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established convention
for the application of surface flux on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or the TABLE
model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent fluxes.
The applied flux is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition option.
Note: If a distributed flux is applied on the bottom of a shell, the flux is applied to the highest
degrees of freedom of the shell.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST FLUXES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of distributed fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of distributed flux data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 8 are given for each set.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the FLUXTYPE:
FLUXTYPE = 0 if no user subroutine is required.
FLUXTYPE = 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
FLUXTYPE = 4 if the distributed flux is dependent on a control node.
Main Index
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1019
Format
Data
FLUXTYPE = 6 If the tables used to describe a temperature dependent
flux are based upon the temperature at the control node,
as opposed to the temperature at the surface integration
point.
11-15 3rd I If the FLUXTYPE = 4 or 6, enter the control node to be used.
in contact.
is referenced by the LOADCASE option.
Note: If a control node is used (see 3rd field), the first degree of
freedom of this node will always be used even if this node is
associated with a heat transfer shell element.
4th data block (used if FLUXTYPE = 0, 1, or 4)
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed fluxes.
5th data block (use if FLUXTYPE = 0, 1, or 4
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the distributed flux.
6th data block
11-15 3rd I Enter the face ID or edge ID.
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
Main Index
1020 DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
16: Surface ID: orientation Id
17: Curve ID: orientation id
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
DIST FLUXES (Model Definition) 1021
DIST FLUXES (Model Definition) Define Distributed Fluxes
input style.
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) fluxes to be specified. Distributed fluxes are
converted to consistent nodal fluxes by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface flux on a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be used
to input time and spatial dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Also see distributed flux type 101 under the COUPLE
parameter definition.
6-15 2nd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed fluxes.
16-20 3rd I Flux index (optional). (Flux index is to be used in the FLUX
user subroutine.)
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed fluxes.
Main Index
1022 POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Point Fluxes
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) Define Point Fluxes
Description
This option defines total nodal point fluxes by giving the magnitude, location, and associating the
information with a boundary condition name. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the TABLE model
definition option can be used for the time dependent fluxes.
The applied flux is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT FLUX.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of point fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point flux data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are given in sets.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the FLUXTYPE:
FLUXTYPE = 0 if no user subroutine is required.
FLUXTYPE = 1 if the FORCDT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
FLUXTYPE = 4 if the point flux is dependent on a control node.
FLUXTYPE = 6 If the tables used to describe a temperature dependent
flux are based upon the temperature at the control node,
as opposed to the temperature at which the flux
is applied.
11-15 3rd I If the FLUXTYPE = 4 or 6, enter the control node to be used.
Main Index
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1023
Define Point Fluxes
Format
Data
26-30 6th I Enter a 1 if first point flux is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of a
heat transfer shell.
Notes: If a control node is used (see 3rd field), the first degree of
freedom of this node will always be used even if this node is
If fluxes are applied to multiple degrees of freedom of a heat

transfer shell element, the control node will be applied to all
degrees of freedom.
For heat transfer shell elements having more than eight degrees of freedom, the 4th and 5th data blocks
are repeated as required, giving eight values per set.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of point flux in first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point flux in second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point flux in third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th F Magnitude of point flux in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50 5th F Magnitude of point flux in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60 6th F Magnitude of point flux in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70 7th F Magnitude of point flux in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80 8th F Magnitude of point flux in eighth degree of freedom.
block, 1st field.
Main Index
1024 POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Point Fluxes
Format
Data
6th data block
1: Element ids
2: Nodes ids
3: Volume/Region/Body ids
4: Surface ids
5: Curve ids
6: Point ids
11: Element-Edges ids
12: Element-Faces ids
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
POINT FLUX (Model Definition) 1025
Define Point Fluxes
POINT FLUX (Model Definition) Define Point Fluxes
input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point fluxes to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for the time dependent fluxes. Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes with point fluxes on the
FLUXES parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point flux data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of point flux.
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point flux for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point flux for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal sources are applied.
Main Index
1026 QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Thermal Vector Flux Boundary Conditions
QVECT (with TABLE Input - Define Thermal Vector Flux Boundary Conditions
Model Definition)
Description
This option allows the input of thermal vector flux from a distant source into one or more elements.
Variations may be given by using either a control node, or using tables.
The thermal vector flux boundary condition is associated with a boundary condition name that is
activated and deactivated by the LOADCASE history definition option.
The absorption is defined via the EMISSIVITY option.
The total power into an element is given by:
P = – α A * ( e * n ) * Q0 if no control node is given or

˜ ˜
P = – α A * ( e * n ) * Q0 * U cntr ln d if a control node is given.
˜ ˜
e is the user-defined direction cosine.
˜
n is the normal to the surface
˜
If the temperature of the radiant source is given, then all temperature dependent properties will be a
function of this temperature.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word QVECT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data used to input vector flux (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of vector flux data; defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 8 are entered for each vector flux input.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the sum of VECFLUXTYPE + TEMTYP + ISIDE where:
Main Index
QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1027
Format
Data
VECFLUXTYPE = 0 if no user subroutine required.
VECFLUXTYPE = 1 if the UQVECT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
VECFLUXTYPE = 4 if a control node is to be used.
VECFLUXTYPE = 6 if the table used to describe the temperature
dependent flux is based upon the temperature at the
control node.
TEMTYP=0 if temperature dependent absorption coefficients
based upon temperature at the surface.
TEMTYP=10 if temperature dependent absorption coefficients
based upon the average of the surface temperature
and the source temperature.
TEMTYP=20 if temperature dependent convective coefficients
based upon the source temperature.
If Q(0 > 0) then,
ISIDE=0 current default - means heat
will be added if e∗ n < 0
˜ ˜
will be subtracted if e∗ n > 0
˜ ˜
ISIDE=100 means heat will be added if e∗ n < 0
˜ ˜
no heat if e∗ n > 0
˜ ˜
ISIDE=200 means no heat if e∗ n < 0
˜ ˜
heat will be subtracted if e∗ n > 0
˜ ˜
ISIDE=300 means always add heat; this is the same as using
absolute value of e∗ n
˜ ˜
11-15 3rd I If VECFLUXTYPE =4 or 6, enter the control node to be used.
16-20 4th I Emissivity/Absorption ID.
The emissivity/Absorption ID is not required but if given, it reduces the
amount of memory required for the analysis.
Main Index
1028 QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
Note: It a control node is used (see 3rd field), the first degree of
freedom of this node will be always be used even if this node is
4th data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of the thermal flux into the face.
11-20 2nd F Temperature of the radiant source.
21-30 3rd F First direction cosine of thermal flux.
31-40 4th F Second direction cosine of thermal flux.
41-50 5th F Third direction cosine of thermal flux.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the magnitude of the thermal flux.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the temperature of the radiant source.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for first direction cosine of thermal flux.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for second direction cosine of thermal flux.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for third direction cosine of thermal flux.
6th data block
If geometry type is element IDs (1), use either the first field or the second and third field.
If geometry type is volume (3), surface (4), or curve (5), use the second field only.
01 Flux (bottom surface for shells)
10 Flux (top surface for shells)
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the geometry type
1: Element ids, top side if shell element
4: Surface ids, top side if shell element
5: Curve ids, top side if shell element
11: Element-Edge ids, top side if shell element
12: Element-Face ids, top side if shell element
Main Index
QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1029
Format
Data
13: Element-Edge IDs - Marc Mentat convention, top
side if shell element
14: Element-Face IDs - Marc Mentat convention, top
side if shell element.
16: Surface id: orientation id
17: Curve id: orientation id
18: Surface id: orientation ID - Marc Mentat
convention
19: Curve id: orientation ID - Marc Mentat convention
21: Element ids, bottom side if shell element
24: Surface ids, bottom side if shell element
25: Curve ids, bottom side if shell element
31: Element-Edge ids, bottom side if shell element
32: Element-Face ids, bottom side if shell element
33: Element-Edge IDs - Marc Mentat convention,
bottom side if shell element
34: Element-Face IDs - Marc Mentat convention,
bottom side if shell element.
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
1030 WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source
Description
This option allows welding (surface and volumetric) fluxes to be specified. Two groups of parameters
are used in this option to specify the weld flux. The first group pertains to the initial location and motion
of the weld source and the second group pertains to the magnitude and shape of the weld source. The
distributed weld fluxes are converted to consistent nodal fluxes by Marc.
The default volumetric weld flux has a double ellipsoidal shape and is suitable for deep penetration
welding processes like laser welding and electron beam welding. The default surface weld flux has a disc
shape and is suitable for welding processes like arc welding. Arbitrary volumetric or surface flux values
at integration points along the weld path can be specified through the UWELDFLUX user subroutine.
Refer to Marc Volumes A, D, and E for more details.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words WELD FLUX.
2nd data block
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are given for each set.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Weld Flux Index (Index can be used in the UWELDFLUX user subroutine).
11-15 3rd I Weld Flux Type:
1 – double ellipsoidal shaped volumetric weld flux.
2 – disc shaped surface weld flux.
3 – user subroutine defined weld flux.
16-20 4th I Weld Path Index.
21-25 5th I Weld Filler Index.
Main Index
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1031
Format
Data
26-30 6th I Initial Position Flag:
0 – Initial weld position is automatically taken as first point of associated
weld path.
1 – Initial weld position is specified in the first three fields of the 4th data
block.
4th data block
1-10 1st F X coordinate for initial position of weld flux.
11-20 2nd F Y coordinate for initial position of weld flux.
21-30 3rd F Z coordinate for initial position of weld flux.
31-40 4th F Local X offset from weld path.
41-50 5th F Local Y offset from weld path.
51-60 6th F Velocity of weld flux.
61-65 7th I Table ID for velocity.
Notes: The initial position defined in fields 1, 2, and 3 of data block 4 is only used if the initial
position flag in the 6th field of the 3rd data block is nonzero. Also, the given initial weld
position should be along the associated weld path. Else, the program will terminate with
exit 20. The defined initial weld position is mandatory when the user subroutine
UWELDPATH is used to define the associated weld path. When the same weld flux is
specified in multiple loadcases, the initial weld position is only used for the starting
loadcase. For subsequent loadcases, the position at the end of the previous loadcase is
used as the starting position.
The X and Y offsets (fields 4 and 5 in data block 4) are defined in the local coordinate
system of the weld flux. They are 0 by default. The Y offset is along the arc direction and
the X offset is along the tangent direction. These offsets allow the flux to be located at a
specified distance from the associated weld path.
The table defining the weld velocity can be a function of time.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Power of weld flux.
11-20 2nd F Efficiency of weld flux.
21-30 3rd F Scale Factor for weld flux.
31-40 4th F Width of weld (for volumetric source).
Radius of weld (for surface source).
Fields 5 through 7 are only valid for the double ellipsoidal volumetric weld flux:
41-50 5th F Depth of weld.
Main Index
1032 WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
51-60 6th F Forward length of weld.
61-70 7th F Rear length of weld.
71-80 8th F Maximum distance from weld origin for nonzero flux
6th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for Weld Flux Power.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for Weld Flux Efficiency.
11-15 3rd I Scale Factor Flag:
0 – Use automatic scale factor.
1 – Use manually defined scale factor.
16-20 4th I Table ID for Weld Width/Radius.
21-25 5th I Table ID for Weld Depth.
26-30 6th I Table ID for Weld Forward Length.
31-35 7th I Table ID for Weld Rear Length.
36-40 8th I Table ID for Maximum Distance from Weld Origin
Notes: The 5th and 6th data blocks are directly used for the ellipsoidal and disc shaped weld
fluxes. The flux values are defined directly for the user subroutine option. The weld
dimensions can still be entered in this case since they are useful for filler element
activation, adaptive meshing box definition, etc.
The scale factor in the 3rd field of the 5th data block can be manually specified or
automatically determined by the program. The scale factor flag in the 3rd field of the 6th
data block determines the usage. See Volume A for more details.
If the maximum distance from weld origin is not defined (left as 0), then the weld pool
dimensions are used to determine which elements receive the weld flux.
The tables defining the weld power, efficiency, weld width/radius, depth, forward and
rear lengths, and the maximum distance from weld origin can be a function of time or arc
length measured along the associated weld path.
7th data block
Main Index
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1033
Format
Data
block, 1st field.
8th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
9th data block
8th data block.
Main Index
1034 WELD FLUX (Model Definition)
WELD FLUX (Model Definition) Define Motion and Flux Parameters for
Weld Heat Source
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of weld fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of weld flux data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Weld Flux Index (Index is to be used in the UWELDFLUX user
subroutine).
6-10 2nd I Weld Flux Type:
11-15 3rd I Weld Path Index.
Main Index
WELD FLUX (Model Definition) 1035
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Parameter identifying the type of distributed flux. See library element
Note that the parameter in this field should be consistent with the weld
flux type specified in the 2nd field.
0 – Initial weld position is automatically taken as first point of
associated weld path.
1 – Initial weld position is specified in the first three fields of the 4th
data block.
31-35 7th I Weld Flux Activation Flag
0 – Weld Flux boundary condition is active in loadcase
1 – Weld Flux boundary condition is inactive in loadcase
36-67 8th C Weld Flux Name (optional)
4th data block
position should be along the associated weld path. Else, the program will terminate with exit
20. The defined initial weld position is mandatory when the UWELDPATH user subroutine is
used to define the associated weld path. When the same weld flux is specified in multiple
loadcases, the initial weld position is only used for the starting loadcase. For subsequent
loadcases, the position at the end of the previous loadcase is used as the starting position.
The X and Y offsets (fields 4 and 5 in data block 4) are defined in the local coordinate system
of the weld flux. They are 0 by default. The Y offset is along the arc direction and the X offset
is along the tangent direction. These offsets allow the flux to be located at a specified distance
from the associated weld path.
5th data block
Main Index
1036 WELD FLUX (Model Definition)
Format
Data
71-80 8th F Maximum distance from weld origin for nonzero flux.
6th data block
Fields 5 - 7 are only valid for the double ellipsoidal volumetric weld flux:
36-40 8th I Table ID for maximum distance from weld origin.
Notes: The 5th and 6th data blocks are directly used for the ellipsoidal and disc shaped weld fluxes.
The flux values are defined directly for the user subroutine option. The weld dimensions can
still be entered in this case since they are useful for filler element activation, adaptive meshing
box definition, etc.
automatically determined by the program. The scale factor flag in the 3rd field of the 6th data
block determines the usage. See Volume A for more details.
The tables defining the weld power, efficiency, weld width/radius, depth, forward and rear
lengths, and maximum distance from weld origin can be a function of time or arc length
measured along the associated weld path.
Main Index
WELD FLUX (Model Definition) 1037
Format
Data
7th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above weld flux.
Main Index
1038 WELD PATH (Model Definition)
Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source
WELD PATH (Model Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source
Definition)
Description
This option specifies the weld path to be followed by the weld flux. The orientation of the arc along the
path is also defined. The weld path can be specified through nodes or point coordinates of polyline curves
in the input file or through point coordinates in a separate text file, or through the UWELDPATH user
subroutine. The arc orientation can be specified through nodes, point coordinates of polyline curves,
vector components or Euler angles in the input file, point coordinates, vector components, or Euler angles
in a separate text file, or through the UWELDPATH user subroutine.
The specified path and arc orientation are used to define a moving local coordinate system. The Z axis
of the local coordinate system is along the weld path, the Y axis is along the arc orientation and the X
axis is along the tangent. X and Y axes that are perpendicular to each other and perpendicular to the given
weld path (Z axis) are constructed based on the information provided in this option. See Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information for more details.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words WELD PATH.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of weld paths to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of weld path data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Weld Path Index (Index is used for cross-referencing with the 3rd data
block of the WELD FLUX option)
6-10 2nd I Weld Path Type
1 – Weld Path is specified through ordered list of nodes
2 – Weld Path is specified through point coordinates of polyline curves.
4 – Weld Path is specified through text file
5 – Weld Path is specified through the UWELDPATH user subroutine.
11-15 3rd I Arc Orientation Type
1 – Arc Orientation is specified through ordered list of nodes.
2 – Arc Orientation is specified through point coordinates of
polyline curves.
Main Index
WELD PATH (Model Definition) 1039
Format
Data
3 – Arc Orientation is specified through vector components.
4 – Arc Orientation is specified through Euler angles.
5 – Arc Orientation is specified through the UWELDPATH
user subroutine.
16-20 4th I Number of curves used to define the Weld Path. This field is only valid
when Weld Path Type is 2.
21-25 5th I Path Interpolation flag 0 or 1.
0 – Arc Orientation at first point of segment is used for whole segment.
1 – Arc Orientation is linearly interpolated between first and last points
of segment.
31-62 7th C Weld Path Name (optional)
Notes: Weld Path Type 1 can only be used with Arc Orientation Types 1, 3, or 4.
Weld Path Type 2 can only be used with Arc Orientation Types 2, 3, or 4.
Weld Path Type 4 can only be used with Arc Orientation Type 2, 3, or 4. All quantities are
specified via separate text file in this case.
Weld Path Type 5 can only be used with Arc Orientation Type 5.
The 4th through 7th data blocks depend on the WELD PATH TYPE (2nd field of 3rd data block) and
ARC ORIENTATION TYPE (3rd field of 3rd data block). These data blocks are only needed for weld
path types 1, 2, and 4.
I. WELD PATH TYPE 1 (NODES)
4th data block
Enter an unsorted list of nodes or unsorted set of nodes (NDSQ) needed to
define the weld path.
A. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 1 (NODES)
5th data block
1-10 1st F Angle in degrees by which the ARC-TANGENT plane is rotated about
weld path (default is 0).
11-15 2nd I Table ID for Angle.
6th data block
define the weld orientation.
Main Index
Format
Data
Notes: The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length along the weld path or a
function of the position coordinates along the weld path.
The arc vector is defined as the vector from the weld path node to the weld orientation node.
The number of nodes defining the weld orientation has to be either equal to 1 or equal to the
number of nodes defining the weld path. If only one node is used, the arc vector is defined as
the vector from the weld path node to that node always.
B. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 3 (VECTOR)
5th data block
1-10 1st F Component X of Arc Orientation Vector.
11-20 2nd F Component Y of Arc Orientation Vector.
21-30 3rd F Component Z of Arc Orientation Vector.
31-35 4th I Table ID for Component X.
36-40 5th I Table ID for Component Y.
41-45 6th I Table ID for Component Z.
Note: The tables defining the arc orientation vector components can be a function of the arclength
along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along the weld path.
C. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 4 (EULER ANGLES)
5th data block
1-10 1st F Rotation of unit vector in X direction about global X axis.
11-20 2nd F Rotation of unit vector in X direction about global Y axis.
21-30 3rd F Rotation of unit vector in X direction about global Z axis.
31-35 4th I Table ID for Rotation about X.
36-40 5th I Table ID for Rotation about Y.
41-45 6th I Table ID for Rotation about Z.
Note: All rotation values are specified in degrees. If all rotation values are 0, the arc orientation is
taken as <1,0,0>; i.e., unit vector in global X direction. Tables defining the Euler angles can
be a function of arclength along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along
the weld path.
Main Index
Format
Data
II. WELD PATH TYPE 2 (CURVES)
Start Loop over Number of Polyline Curves
Read Number of Points to define Polyline (4th data block)
Start Loop over Number of Points to define Path Polyline
Read coordinates of each Weld Path Point (5th data block)
End loop over Points
End loop over Polyline Curves
For Each Curve:

4th data block
1-5 1st I Weld Curve Type (polyline = 1).
6-10 2nd I Number of Points to Define Polyline.
For each point on the Weld Path Curve:
5th data block
1-10 1st F X coordinate of point.
11-20 2nd F Y coordinate of point.
21-30 3rd F Z coordinate of point.
A. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 2 (CURVES)
Read Angle for Rotation of Tangent-Arc Plane (6th data block)
Start Loop over Number of Points to define Arc Polyline
Read coordinates of each Weld Orientation Point (7th data block)
End Loop over Point
End Loop over Polyline Curves
For Each Curve:

6th data block
1-5 1st I Arc Curve Type (polyline = 1).
6-15 2nd F Angle in degrees by which Arc-Tangent plane is rotated about Weld Path
(default = 0).
16-20 3rd I Table ID for angle.
For each point on the Arc Orientation Curve:
Main Index
Format
Data
7th data block
Notes: Only Polylines (Weld Curve Type = 1, Arc Curve Type = 1) are supported in the
current version.
The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length along the weld path or a
The number of points defining the arc orientation curve has to be equal to the number of points
defining the weld path curve.
6th data block
Note: The tables defining the arc orientation vector components can be a function of the arc length
6th data block
taken as <1,0,0> i.e., unit vector in global X direction. Tables defining the euler angles can be
a function of arclength along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along the
weld path.
Main Index
Format
Data
III. WELD PATH TYPE 4 (Text File)
4th data block
Enter name of Text File containing Weld Path and Arc
Orientation Information.
Note: Columns 1 - 3 of the text file contain weld path information. Columns 4 - 6 of the text file
contain arc orientation information. Depending on the arc orientation type (2, 3 or 4) specified
on the 3rd data block, columns 4 - 6 can contain point coordinates, vector components or Euler
angle values. The entry in each column is a real number of width 10. The columns can be in
free or fixed format with commas being used to separate the columns in the free format mode.
Main Index
1044 WELD FILL (Model Definition)
Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements
WELD FILL (Model Definition) Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements
Description
This option identifies the weld filler elements that are associated with a particular weld heat source. The
method by which the filler elements can potentially participate in the analysis is specified. Two methods
can be used: Quiet Element method and Deactivated Element Method.
In the Quiet Element Method, the filler elements are always part of the analysis. However, prior to their
physical creation, the filler elements are used with scaled down material properties. The regular material
properties are restored after the filler elements are physically created by the moving heat source. In the
Deactivated Element Method, the filler elements are deactivated at the outset and are automatically
activated only when they are physically created by the moving heat source.
Filler Bounding Box X, Y, and Z refer to dimensions in the local coordinate system attached to the
moving heat source. They are used to identify if filler elements are physically created during the welding
process. If these dimensions are not specified on the option (i.e., left at 0), they are related to weld pool
dimensions set on the WELD FLUX option:
Filler Bounding Box X in the Tangent direction = 1.5 x Weld Width
Filler Bounding Box Y in the Arc direction = 2 x Weld Width
Filler Bounding Box Z in the Arc Direction = Weld Pool Length
See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more details.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words WELD FILL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of weld fillers to be entered (optional).
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Weld Filler Index (Index is used for cross-referencing with field 4 of the
3rd data block in the WELD FLUX option).
6-10 2nd I Initial Activation Flag
0 – Quiet Element Method.
1 – Deactivated Element Method.
Main Index
WELD FILL (Model Definition) 1045
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Temperature Boundary Condition Flag
0 – Nodal boundary conditions are applied
1 – Nodal boundary conditions are not applied
16-25 4th F Melting Point Temperature
26-35 5th F Temperature Activation Time (0 by default)
36-45 6th F Material Property Scale Factor (1e-5 by default)
46-77 7th F Weld Filler Name (Optional)
Notes: The melting point temperature information in field 4 is only used if the boundary condition
flag in field 3 is 0. If nodal boundary conditions are not applied (3rd field = 1), weld fluxes
can be applied to the filler elements to ramp up the temperature. A user-specified thermal
activation time, specified in field 5, can also be used.
The thermal activation time serves two purposes: (1) It defines the time over which the
temperature boundary condition is ramped (only valid when field 3 is 0). Default is 0 which
means that the temperatures are applied instantaneously. For nonzero time values, the
temperatures of the active filler elements are linearly increased from the current value to the
specified temperature over the specified time step. (2) It defines the time during which the
filler elements only participate in the thermal pass and not in the mechanical pass (valid when
field 3 is 0 or 1). Default is 0 which means that if the filler elements are first created at
increment n, they only participate on the thermal side at increment n, and then participate in
both thermal and mechanical passes at increment n+1. For nonzero time values, the filler
elements remain thermally active over the specified time duration and become mechanically
active only after the time duration.
The property scale factor in field 6 is only used for the quiet element method.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Filler Bounding Box in X (weld width) direction
11-20 2nd F Filler Bounding Box in Y (weld depth) direction
21-30 3rd F Filler Bounding Box in +Z (forward path) direction
31-40 4th F Filler Bounding Box in -Z (rear path) direction
41-45 5th I Table ID for Filler Bounding Box X
46-50 6th I Table ID for Filler Bounding Box Y
51-55 7th I Table ID for Filler Bounding Box +Z
56-60 8th I Table ID for Filler Bounding Box -Z
Note: The table IDs for the filler bounding boxes can be a function of time or arc length. The arc
length is measured along the weld path from the first point to the current position of the
weld source. If the bounding box dimensions are not specified, the weld pool dimensions are
used to define the box.
Main Index
1046 WELD FILL (Model Definition)
Format
Data
5th data block
1-80 1 I Enter the list of filler elements
Main Index
Define Two-dimensional Thermal or Electrical Contact Conditions
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Thermal

or Electrical Contact Conditions
Description
This option allows for the input of 2-D thermal contact definition in heat transfer problems and the
definition of conducting bodies for electrostatic and Joule heating analysis. Near thermal contact is only
available if the input version is 10 or greater. THERMAL CONTACT should not be used in problems where
a mechanical-displacement solution is obtained as there is no checking for changes in contact; use the
CONTACT option instead.
Note: Always define heat conduction thermal bodies before heat sink bodies.
If the UHTCOEF option and the UHTCOE user subroutine are used, the film coefficient and sink
temperature data of a free surface can be skipped.
If the UHTCON option and the UHTCON user subroutine are used, the film coefficient data between
surfaces in contact can be skipped.
DCONTACT 1st field 3rd data block

Bias factor 2nd field 3rd data block
T1
d
T2
If d < DC ON TACT , then contact
q = H CT ( T 2 – T 1 ) if deformable-deformable
q = H CT ( T 2 – T BODY ) if rigid.
If DC ON TACT < d < DQN EAR and DQ NEAR is defined, the last term is only included if H BL is defined.
Main Index
1048 THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)
B NC 4 4
q = H CV ( T 2 – T 1 ) + H NC ( T 2 – T 1 ) + σε f ( T 2 – T 1 )
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛ 1 – --------------------------⎞ + H BL -------------------------- ⎬ ( T 1 )
S S
⎝ DQN EAR⎠ D QNE A R ⎭
⎩
If d > DQN EAR
4 4
q = H CTVE ( T 2 – T SINK ) + σε ( T 2 – T SI NK )
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word THERMAL CONTACT.
2nd data block
11-15 3rd I Upper bound to the number of nodes that lie on the periphery of any
deformable surface.
16-20 4th I Enter 1 to reduce printout of surface definition.
21-25 5th I Linearization flag to be used if a contact body consists of quadratic
element:
1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described based on the corner
nodes only. In the contact area, the midside nodes are linearly tied
to the corresponding corner nodes. Midside nodes cannot come
into contact.
-1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described using a quadratic
field. If a node touches a quadratic segment, a full quadratic
multipoint constraint is set up. Both corner and midside nodes can
come into contact.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Distance below which a node is considered touching a body
(DCONTACT). Leave blank if you want Marc to calculate it. This number
is also used to divide splines. If splines are used, this must be defined.
11-20 2nd F Contact tolerance BIAS factor. (0-1)
Data blocks 4th through 20th are repeated once for each body to be defined.
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
(NETTY).
11-15 3rd I Enter 0 for double-sided contact with default search order based upon
body id.
contact is used.
For conducting bodies, enter 2 if double-sided contact is used with
automatic optimization of the contact constraint equations. Notice that
this can be overruled per contact body combination by the CONTACT
TABLE option.
21-25 5th I Enter 1 if analytic form is to be used.
1: heat sink;
4: heat conduction body.
7: electromagnetic conducting body
5th data block
Default = 0.0.
Main Index
Format
Data
Default = 0.0.
Default = 1.0.
6th data block
7th data block
11-20 2nd F Not used; enter 0.
8th data block
9th data block
21-30 3rd F Contact heat transfer coefficient (HCT).
51-60 6th F Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior (HNC).
61-70 7th F Enter the exponent associated with natural convection (BNC).
71-80 8th F Enter the surface emissivity for near field behavior (ε).
Main Index
Format
Data
10th data block
(HCV).
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for natural convection coefficient for near field behavior
(HNC).
(BNC).
36-40 8th I Enter the table ID for the surface emissivity for near field behavior (ε).
11th data block (Only if heat transfer is included.)
1-10 1st F Enter the separation distance dependent heat transfer film coefficient
(HBL).
12th data block (Only if heat transfer is included.)
2. If separation distance (s) is greater than ERROR, but less than DQ NEAR , and DQ NEAR is
not zero.
B NC
4 4
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛ 1 – --------------------------⎞ + H B L -------------------------- ⎬ ( T B – T A )
S S
⎝ D QN EA R ⎠ DQ NEAR
⎩ ⎭

3. If separation distance (s) is greater than DQ NE A R , then convection to environment only.
4 4
q = H CVE ( T SI NK – T A ) + σε ( T SI NK – TA )
13th data block (Only if Joule Heating is included.)

Main Index
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F Contact Electrical transfer coefficient.
41-50 5th F Electrical transfer coefficient for near field behavior.
51-60 6th F Enter the separation distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the electrical transfer coefficient for near
field behavior.
15th data block (Only used if coupled mass diffusion.)
21-30 3rd E Enter the contact mass flow rate coefficient.
41-50 5th E Enter the mass flow rate coefficient for near field behavior.
51-60 6th E Enter separation distance dependent mass flow rate coefficient.
rate coefficient.
The 17th through 20th data blocks are repeated for as many geometrical data as required (NETTY).
Main Index
Format
Data
17a data block
17b data block
18b data block
17c data block
18c data block
17d data block
18d data block
17e data block
Main Index
Format
Data
18e data block
19e data block
20e data block
Main Index
THERMAL CONTACT (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Thermal

input style.
Description
Note: Always define deformable surfaces before rigid surfaces.

T1
d
T2
Main Index
1056 THERMAL CONTACT (2-D)
B NC 4
q = H CV ( T 2 – T 1 ) + ( T 2 – T 1 ) + σε f ( T 2 – T 1 )
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛ 1 – --------------------------⎞ + H BL -------------------------- ⎬ ( T 1 )
S S
⎝ DQN EAR⎠ D QN EA R ⎭
⎩
If d > DQN EAR
4 4
The distance below which near contact behavior occurs for thermal and electrical behavior (DQNEAR)
needs to be defined in the CONTACT TABLE and can be set for each interface separately.
Format
Format
Data En
Fixed Free Entry try
1st data block
2nd data block
deformable surface.
21-25 5th I Linearization flag to be used if a contact body consists of quadratic
element:
1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described based on the corner
nodes only. In the contact area, the midside nodes are linearly tied
to the corresponding corner nodes. Midside nodes cannot come
into contact.
-1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described using a quadratic
field. If a node touches a quadratic segment, a full quadratic
multipoint constraint is set up. Both corner and midside nodes can
come into contact.
3rd data block
Main Index
Format
Data En
4th data block
body id.
contact is used.
automatic optimization of the contact constraint equations. Notice that this
can be overruled per contact body combination by the CONTACT TABLE
option.
1: rigid body;
4: heat -rigid body.
7: electromagnetic conducting body.
5th data block
41-50 5th F First component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 0.0.
51-60 6th F Second component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 0.0.
Main Index
Format
Data En
61-70 7th F Third component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 1.0.
6th data block
7th data block
The 8th and 9th data blocks are only necessary for heat transfer.
8th data block
21-30 3rd F Contact heat transfer coefficient ( H CT ).
41-50 5th F Enter the convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H CV ).
51-60 6th F Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H NC ).
61-70 7th F Enter the exponent associated with natural convection ( B NC ).
71-80 8th F Enter the surface emissivity for near field behavior or radiation to
environment ( ε ).
9th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the separation distance dependent heat transfer file coefficient
( H BL ).
10th data block
21-30 3rd F Contact electrical transfer coefficient.
Main Index
Format
Data En
11a data block
11b data block
The 12b data block is repeated once for each point entered.
12b data block
11c data block
12c data block
11d data block
12d data block
Main Index
Format
Data En
11e data block
13e data block
14e data block
15e data block
Main Index
Define Three-dimensional Thermal or Electrical Contact Conditions
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Thermal

Description
Note: Always define heat conduction thermal bodies before heat sink bodies.

T1
d
T2
If d < DC ON TA CT , then contact
Main Index
B NC 4 4
q = H CV ( T 2 – T 1 ) + H NC ( T 2 – T 1 ) + σε f ( T 2 – T 1 )
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛ 1 – --------------------------⎞ + H BL -------------------------- ⎬ ( T 1 )
S S
⎝ DQN EAR⎠ D QNE A R ⎭
⎩
If d > DQN EAR
4 4
q = H CVE ( T SI NK – T A ) + σε ( T SI NK – T A )
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
deformable surface.
3rd data block
11-20 2nd F Contact tolerance BIAS factor. (0-1)Data blocks 4 through 24 are repeated
once for each body to be defined.
4th data block
(NETTY).
body ID.
contact is used.
Main Index
Format
Data
TABLE option.
1: heat sink;
4: heat conduction body.
7: electromagnetic conducting body.
5th data block
61-70 7th F Third component direction cosine of local axis; Default = 1.0.
6th data block
7th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
8th data block
9th data block
51-60 6th F Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior (HNC).
61-70 7th F Enter the exponent associated with natural convection (BNC).
71-80 8th F Enter the surface emissivity for near field behavior (ε).
10th data block
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the convection coefficient for near field
behavior (HCV).
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for natural convection coefficient for near field
behavior (HNC).
(BNC).
36-40 8th I Enter the table ID for the surface emissivity for near field behavior (ε).
(HBL).
Main Index
Format
Data
2. If separation distance (s) is greater than ERROR, but less than DQ NE A R , and DQ NE A R is not
zero.
B NC 4 4
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛ 1 – --------------------------⎞ + H B L -------------------------- ⎬ ( T B – T A )
S S
⎝ D QN EA R⎠ DQ NEAR ⎭
⎩

3. If separation distance (s) is greater than DQ NEAR , then convection to environment only.
4 4
q = H CVE ( T SI NK – T A ) + σε ( T SI NK – TA )

21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the electrical transfer coefficient for near field
behavior.
Main Index
Format
Data
41-50 5th E Enter the mass flow rate coefficient for near field behavior.
51-60 6th E Enter separation distance dependent mass flow rate coefficient.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for the separation distance dependent mass flow rate
coefficient.
The 17th through 24th data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NSURGN).
17a data block
17b data block
(JPOINT2).
Main Index
Format
Data
18b data block
17c data block
generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2
16-20 4th I Number of subdivisions along the first (surface generator)
direction (NDIV1).
direction (NDIV2).
18c data block
19c data block
17d data block
Main Index
Format
Data
18d data block
17e data block
NSEG.
Default: no printing.The 16e data block is repeated NSEG times for
patches not entered by means of user subroutines (ITYPE = 7 and KUNIT
not -1)
18e data block
19e data block
Main Index
Format
Data
17f data block
18f data block
17g data block
18g data block
19g data block
Main Index
Format
Data
20g data block
21g data block
22g data block
23g data block
24g data block
17h data block
18h data block
61-70 7th F Third coordinate of center point on bottom surface radius of
bottom surface.
Main Index
Format
Data
17i data block
18i data block
Main Index
Define Three-dimensional Thermal or ElectricalContact Conditions
THERMAL CONTACT (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Thermal or

ElectricalContact Conditions
input style.
Description
Note: Always define deformable surfaces before rigid surfaces.

T1
d
T2
Main Index
B NC 4
q = H CV ( T 2 – T 1 ) + ( T 2 – T 1 ) + σεf ( T 2 – T 1 )
⎧ ⎫
+ ⎨ H CT ⎛ 1 – --------------------------⎞ + H BL -------------------------- ⎬ ( T 1 )
S S
⎝ DQN EAR⎠ D QN EA R ⎭
⎩
If d > DQN EAR
4 4
The distance below which near contact behavior occurs for thermal and electrical behavior (DQNEAR)
needs to be defined in the CONTACT TABLE and can be set for each interface separately.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
deformable surface.
3rd data block
4th data block
(NETTY).
body ID.
Main Index
Format
Data
contact is used.
TABLE option.
1: rigid body;
4: heat -rigid body.
7: electromagnetic conducting body
5th data block
6th data block
7th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
The 8th and 9th data blocks are only necessary for heat transfer.
8th data block
41-50 5th F Enter the convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H CV ).
51-60 6th F Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H NC ).
61-70 7th F Enter the exponent associated with natural convection ( B NC ).
71-80 8th F Enter the surface emissivity for near field behavior ( ε ).
9th data block
( H BL ).
10th data block
11a data block
11b data block
Main Index
Format
Data
(JPOINT2).
12b data block
11c data block
generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2
(NDIV1).
(NDIV2).
12c data block
Main Index
Format
Data
13c data block
11d data block
12d data block
11e data block
NSEG.
21-25 5th I Set to 1 if patch data is to be printed. Default: no printing.
Main Index
Format
Data
12e data block
13e data block
11f data block
12f data block
11g data block
Main Index
Format
Data
12g data block
13g data block
14g data block
15g data block
16g data block
17g data block
18g data block
11h data block
Main Index
Format
Data
12h data block
61-70 7th F Third coordinate of center point on bottom surface radius of
bottom surface.
11i data block
12i data block
Main Index
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures
Description
This option defines initial temperatures for heat transfer problems. Associated with an initial condition
name will be the magnitude and location of the initial temperature. The initial condition is activated using
the LOADCASE model definition option. The USINC user subroutine or the TABLE model definition
option can be used to enter spatially varying initial conditions. Unless heat transfer shells are present,
there is only one degree of freedom in a heat transfer analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of initial temperatures (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of initial temperatures data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if user subroutines USINC required for this initial condition.
Enter 2 if initial temperatures are read from post file.
11-15 3rd I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 2. Then this entry defines the unit
number from which the post file information is read. Defaults to unit 24
for a formatted post file and to unit 25 for a binary post file.
16-20 4th I Enter the increment number to be read for initial conditions.
26-30 6th I Enter a 1 if the initial temperature is applied to all the degrees of freedom
of a heat transfer shell.
Main Index
1082 INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer)
Format
Data
The 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th data blocks are not used if initial temperatures are read from a post file.
For heat transfer shell elements having more than eight degrees of freedom, the 4th and 5th data blocks
are repeated as required giving eight values per set.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Initial temperature in first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd F Initial temperature in second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Initial temperature in third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th F Initial temperature in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50 5th F Initial temperature in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60 6th F Initial temperature in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70 7th F Initial temperature in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80 8th F Initial temperature in eighth degree of freedom.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
6: Point IDs
11: Element-Edges IDs 12: Element-Faces ids
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
1084 INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer)
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures
input style.
Description
This option provides initial temperatures for heat transfer problems.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Enter -1 if the USINC user subroutine is used. In this case, data blocks 3
and 4 are not used.
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of prescribed temperatures data, defaults to
input.
11-15 3rd I Flag to indicate that initial conditions read from previously generated post
file. Set to 1.
36-40 8th I Enter 1 if all degrees of freedom of all nodes have same initial temperature
given in the 9th field.
41-50 9th F Enter uniform initial temperature.
3a data block (Not used if 8th field = 1)
For analyses which do not include heat transfer shell elements:
1-10 1st F Initial temperature.
Main Index
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) 1085
Format
Data
3b data block (Not used if 8th field = 1)
For analyses which include heat transfer shell elements:
1-10 1st F Initial temperature in first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd F Initial temperature in second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Initial temperature in third degree of freedom.
Note: See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal
degrees of freedom.
4th data block (Not used if 8th field = 1)
Main Index
1086 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials
- Thermal)
Description
This option allows you to define thermal properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate these
material properties with a list of element numbers.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to call the ANKOND and ORIENT user subroutines.
16-20 4th I Data input mode
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1087
Format
Data
The data entered in data blocks 4 and 5 are the reference values that are used with tables or are
constants.
4th data block
31-40 4th F Resistivity (for Joule heating analysis).
51-60 6th F Enter the enthalpy of formation.
5th data block
31-35 7th I Table ID for reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
6th data block
Note: Do not enter composite elements which use this material in
its layers.
Main Index
1088 ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer)
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer) Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define thermal properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate these
material properties with a list of element numbers.
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS model
definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-reference to
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option.
temperature dependent properties.
The data entered in data blocks 4 and 5 should be the values at the lowest temperature expected during
an analysis, not necessarily at the initial temperature.
4th data block
31-40 4th F Resistivity (for Joule heating analysis).
41-50 5th F Emissivity (for radiation).
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer) 1089
Format
Data
5th data block
its layers.
Main Index
1090 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials

Input - Thermal)
Description
This option allows you to define thermal properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Notes: Since the material properties in an orthotropic material are independent, it is your
responsibility to enter all data required to match the dimension of the conductivity matrix
for the elements listed below. (See Marc Volume B: Element Library, if necessary). No
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ORTHOTROPI.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of orthotropic material data to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3 to 8 are repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1091
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F K11 Thermal conductivities.
11-20 2nd F K22 Thermal conductivities.
21-30 3rd F K33 Thermal conductivities.
31-40 4th F ρ Mass density.
41-50 5th F Specific heat per unit mass.
51-60 6th F R11 If Joule heating analysis, resistivities.
5th data block
Only necessary for input format 2 or greater.
6th data block
Only required if RADIATION parameter is present or version is greater or equal to 10.
1-10 1st F Emissivity (for radiation case).
Main Index
1092 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
Format
Data
7th data block
Only required if RADIATION parameter is present, input format style 2 or greater or version is greater
or equal to 10.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
8th data block
composite elements that use this material in their layers.)
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal) 1093
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define thermal properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the ORTHO TEMP model definition.
The data entered in the following blocks should be the values at the lowest temperature
expected during an analysis, not necessarily at the initial temperature.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
ORTHO TEMP option.
4th data block
Main Index
1094 ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal)
Format
Data
5th data block
Only required if RADIATION parameter is present.
1-10 1st F Emissivity (for radiation).
6th data block
Main Index
Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer Analysis
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer Analysis
Input - Thermal)
Description
This option specifies thermal properties defined by a call to user subroutines ANKOND and ORIENT. The
ANKOND user subroutine must be used for the input of constant or temperature dependent anisotropic
thermal conductivities (K11, K22, K33) and/or resistivities (R11, R22, R33) defined in the user coordinate
(1,2,3) system. The TABLE model definition option can be used for the definition of material properties
with temperatures.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ANISOTROPI.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of anisotropic data sets to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3 to 10 are repeated as a set NSET times.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing the
ANKOND and ORIENT user subroutines.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if the ANKOND user subroutine is to be called.
Enter 2 if the anisotropic conductivity is to be entered in the 4a data block.
Main Index
1096 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Mass density.
11-20 2nd F Specific heat per unit mass.
21-30 3rd F Emissivity (for radiation case).
31-40 4th F Enter the enthalpy of formation (only required if SURFACE ENERGY
is included).
5th data block
11-15 3rd I Table ID for emissivity.
21-25 5th I Table ID for reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
Data blocks 6 to 9 are only required if the second field of the 3rd data block is a 2.
6th data block
1-10 1st F K11
11-20 2nd F K12
21-30 3rd F K13
31-40 4th F K22
41-50 5th F K23
51-60 6th F K33
7th data block
1-5 1st I K11 Table ID for conductivity.
6-10 2nd I K12 Table ID for conductivity.
11-20 3rd I K13 Table ID for conductivity.
21-30 4th I K22 Table ID for conductivity.
Main Index
Format
Data
Data blocks 8 and 9 are only required for Joule heating, and the second field of the 3rd data block is a 2.
8th data block
1-10 1st E R11 If Joule heating analysis, resistivities.
11-20 2nd E R12 If Joule heating analysis, resistivities.
21-30 3rd E R13 If Joule heating analysis, resistivities.
31-40 4th E R22 If Joule heating analysis, resistivities.
9th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for R11.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for R12.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for R13.
10th data block
Main Index
1098 ANISOTROPIC (Thermal)
ANISOTROPIC (Thermal) Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer Analysis
input style.
Description
This option specifies thermal properties defined by a call to the ANKOND and ORIENT user subroutines.
The ANKOND user subroutine must be used for the input of constant or temperature dependent
anisotropic thermal conductivities (K11, K22, K33) and/or resistives (R11, R22, R33) defined in the user
coordinate (1,2,3) system. The TEMPERATURE EFFECTS model definition option can be used for the
input of variations of specific heat with temperatures. Note that the data entered in this option should be
the values at the lowest temperature expected during an analysis, not necessarily at the initial
temperature.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of anisotropic data sets to follow (optional)
Data blocks 3 to 7 are repeated as a set NSET times.
3rd data block
ANKOND and ORIENT user subroutines, as well as to the
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if the ANKOND user subroutine is to be called.
Enter 2 if the anisotropic conductivity is to be entered in the 4a data block.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Mass density.
11-20 2nd F Specific heat per unit mass.
21-30 3rd F Emissivity (for radiation).
Data blocks 5 and 6 are only required if the second field of the 3rd data block is a 2.
Main Index
ANISOTROPIC (Thermal) 1099
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st F K11
11-20 2nd F K12
21-30 3rd F K13
31-40 4th F K22
41-50 5th F K23
51-60 6th F K33
Data block 6 is only required for Joule heating.
6th data block
1-10 1st F R11
11-20 2nd F R12
21-30 3rd F R13
31-40 4th F R22
41-50 5th F R23
51-60 6th F R33
7th data block
Main Index
1100 LATENT HEAT
Define Latent Heat
LATENT HEAT Define Latent Heat
Description
This option is used to define the latent heat introduced into the system due to a phase change in the
material. It is an alternative input to the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option when the table driven input
format is used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words LATENT HEAT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of latent heats.
6-10 2nd I Material id.
11-15 3rd I Unit number to read input; defaults to standard input.
Repeat 3rd data block for each phase change.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the latent heat value.
11-20 2nd E Solidus temperature (lower phase change limit).
21-30 3rd E Liquids temperature (upper phase change limit).
Main Index
Define Variation of Material Properties in Heat Transfer Analysis
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Define Variation of Material Properties in

Transfer) Heat Transfer Analysis
Description
This option defines the variation of material properties (conductivity, specific heat and electrical
resistance) with temperature. The values read in through the ISOTROPIC option are those at the lowest
temperature specified. Properties are not defined below the lowest temperature. The temperature
dependency can be entered using one of the following two options:
Data points must be given in ascending order of temperature. This option is flagged by
entering the word “DATA” on the first data line.
Note: In calculating a particular temperature dependent property, Marc averages the value
of this property at the start and at the end of the increment. The temperature at the
end of the increment is an estimated value.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the word TEMPERATURE EFFECTS.
21-80 2nd A Enter the word DATA to indicate that Option B is used.
For option A, use data blocks 2a through 7a. For option B, use data blocks 2b through 7b.
Option A
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of slopes of conductivity versus temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of slopes of specific heat versus temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of latent heats to be entered.
16-20 4th I Number of slopes of resistivity versus temperature curve for Joule
heating problem.
Main Index
1102 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer)
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Number of slopes for emissivity versus temperature curve for
radiating cavities.
31-35 7th I Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to the
ISOTROPIC option.
3a data block
Conductivity variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, first field.
1-15 1st F Slope of conductivity versus temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Temperature above which above slope becomes operative.
4a data block
Specific heat variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, second field.
1-15 1st F Slope of specific heat versus temperature curve.
5a data block
Latent heat. Number of blocks given on data block 2, third field.
1-15 1st F Latent heat.
6a data block
Resistivity variation for Joule heating problem. Number of blocks given on data block 2, fourth field.
1-15 1st F Slope of resistivity versus temperature curve.
7a data block
Emissivity variation for radiating cavity problems. Number of blocks given on data block 2, fifth field.
1-15 1st F Slope of emissivity versus temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Temperature above which the above slope becomes operative.
Option B
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points on the conductivity versus temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of data points on the specific heat versus temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of latent heats to be entered.
Main Index
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Number of data points on the resistivity versus temperature curve for
Joule heating problem.
21-25 5th I Number of data points on the emissivity versus the temperature curve.
31-35 7th I Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to ISOTROPIC
option.
3b data block
Conductivity variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, first field.
4b data block
Specific heat variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, second field.
5b data block
Latent heat. Number of blocks given on data block 2, third field.
1-15 1st F Latent heat.
6b data block
Resistivity variation for Joule heating problem. Number of blocks given on data block 2, fourth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the resistivity.
7b data block
Emissivity variation for radiating cavity problem. Number of blocks given on data block 2, fifth field.
Main Index
1104 ORTHO TEMP (Thermal)
Define Variation of Orthotropic Thermal Properties
ORTHO TEMP (Thermal) Define Variation of Orthotropic Thermal Properties
Description
This option defines the variation of all orthotropic thermal properties with temperature. Note that the
values read in through the ORTHOTROPIC model definition are those at the lowest temperature defined.
Properties at temperatures below this temperature are defined to be equal to properties at this
temperature.
The variation of a particular property is defined as a piecewise linear curve. Two options are available to
define this curve.
a. Slope/breakpoint data in ascending order of temperature can be given.
b. Property value/temperature data in ascending order of temperature can be given. This option is
flagged by entering the word “DATA” after the string ORTHO TEMP on the first data block.
Note: In calculating a particular temperature dependent property, Marc averages the value
of this property at the start and at the end of the increment. The temperature at the
end of the increment is an estimated value.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the string ORTHO TEMP.
11-80 2nd A Enter the word DATA to indicate that option B defined above is to be used.
Note: For option A, use data blocks 2a-11a. For option B, use data
blocks 2b-11b.
Option A
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of slopes of K11 vs. temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of slopes of K22 vs. temperature curve.
11-15 3rd I Number of slopes of K33 vs. temperature curve.
Main Index
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Number of slopes of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
26-30 6th I In a Joule heating analysis, number of slopes of R11 vs. temperature curve.
Enter -1 to have (R22 vs. temp.) ≡ (R11 vs. temp.).
. Enter -1 to have (R33 vs. temp.) ≡ (R11 vs. temp.)
41-45 9th I Number of slopes of emissivity vs. temperature curve for radiating
cavities.
46-50 10th I Enter the material identification (1,2,3, etc.) for this data set.
51-55 11th I Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input file.
3a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2a data block, first field.
4a data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2a data block, second field, or 0 if n = -1.
5a data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2a data block, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
6a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2a data block, fourth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
7a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 3a data block, fifth field.
Main Index
Format
Data
8a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2a data block, sixth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of R11 vs. temperature curve.
9a data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2a data block, seventh field, or 0 if n = -1.
10a data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2a data block, eighth field, or 0 if n = -1.
11a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2a data block, ninth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of emissivity vs. temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Temperature at which the above slope becomes operative.
Option B
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points of K11 vs. temperature curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of data points of K22 vs. temperature curve. Enter -1 to have (K22
vs. temp.) ≡ (K11 vs. temp.)
11-15 3rd I Number of data points of K33 vs. temperature curve. Enter -1 to have (K33
vs. temp.) ≡ (K11 vs. temp.)
16-20 4th I Number of data points of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
26-30 6th I In a Joule heating analysis, number of data points of R11 vs.
temperature curve.
31-35 7th I In a Joule heating analysis, number of data points of R22 vs. temperature
curve.
Main Index
Format
Data
36-40 8th I In a Joule heating analysis, number of data points of R33 vs.
temperature curve.
41-45 9th I Number of data points of emissivity versus temperature curve.
46-50 10th I Enter the material identification (1, 2, 3, etc.) for this data set.
51-55 11th I Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input file.
3b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, first field.)
4b data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2b data block, second field, or 0 if n = -1.
5b data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2b data block, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
6b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, fourth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of specific heat
7b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, fifth field.
8b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, sixth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of R11.
Main Index
Format
Data
9b data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2b data block, seventh field, or 0 if n = -1.
10b data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2b data block, eighth field, or 0 if n = -1.
11b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, ninth field.
Main Index
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Model Definition) 1109
Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis
Model Definition)
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence solution and accuracy for heat
transfer analysis.
For heat transfer analysis, the only data field required to be set is the maximum number of steps, the first
field in the second data block. All other fields can, in these cases, be left blank but notice that the 3rd data
block must be included.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of load steps in this run. Default is 99999. This is a
cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when RESTART is
being used.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles during an increment due to temperature
dependent material properties. Default value is 3.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment. Note that this data field
forces this number of recycles to take place in all subsequent increments.
31-35 7th I Nonpositive definite flag. If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite
system is forced.
56-60 12th I Assembly flag. If set to 1, the conductivity matrix is assembled
each iteration.
Main Index
1110 CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Model Definition)
Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis
Format
Data
3rd data block
time step scheme for heat transfer. Default value of 20.
11-20 2nd F Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are
reevaluated and matrices reassembled. Default value of 100.
boundary conditions). Default is 0, which bypasses this test. Set to
maximum temperature error which is considered acceptable.
Main Index
CONVERT 1111
Define Conversion Factors
CONVERT Define Conversion Factors
Description
This option sets a converting factor when a physical quantity is converted to another physical quantity.
This is useful when the units used for the different physics are not consistent (that is, when SI units are
not used), or when there are losses in the process.
In the coupled thermal-stress analysis, depending on the units used for the passes, different conversion
factors must be used. In addition, following the work of Farren and Taylor, not all inelastic work is
dissipated into heat; for most metals, about 90% is converted11. This should also be considered when
defining this conversion factor.
In the Joule heating analysis or coupled electromagnetic thermal analysis, depending on the units used
for the passes, different conversion factors must be used. For example, in an Joule heating problem, the
heat generation due to the electric current can be expressed in terms of current and resistance as q = I2R.
If the units of current and resistance are (amp) and (ohm/ft), respectively, then the unit of heat generation
in the electric problem must be (watt/ft). Since 1 (watt) is equal to 3.4129 (btu/hr), a factor of 3.4129 must
be used in a Joule heating problem, for the purpose of converting the unit of heat generation from (watt/ft)
to (btu/hr-ft) for heat transfer analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CONVERT.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Heat generation conversion factor between inelastic mechanical energy
and heat transfer flux in a coupled analysis. Default is1.0.
11-20 2nd F Heat generation conversion factor between energy due to friction and heat
generated in a coupled contact analysis. Defaults to the value given in the
first field.
21-30 3rd F Heat generation conversion factor between electric current and heat
transfer flux. This can be used in both a Joule heating analysis and an
electromagnetic thermal analysis. Default is 1.0.
11 S. W. Farren, G. I. Taylor. “The Heat Developed During Plastic Extension of Metals”, Proceed-
ings of the Royal Society, London, A107, p. 422, 1925.
Main Index
1112 CONRAD GAP
Define Convection/Radiation Gap
CONRAD GAP Define Convection/Radiation Gap
Description
This option allows you to input emissivity, film coefficient, and gap closure temperature for
convection/radiation gap option. The Stefan-Boltzmann and conversion to absolute temperatures is done
via the PARAMETERS option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CONRAD GAP.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data used to input CONRAD GAP.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of CONRAD GAP data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Face identification – see Marc Volume B: Element Library. Note that these
identifiers are different from those used for DIST FLUXES.
6-15 2nd F Emissivity
36-45 5th F Film coefficient.
46-55 6th F GAP closure temperature.
61-65 8th I Table ID for film coefficient.
66-70 9th I Table ID for gap closure temperature.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above CONRAD GAP data
is applied.
Main Index
CHANNEL 1113
Define Fluid Channel Input
CHANNEL Define Fluid Channel Input
Description
This option allows you to input inlet temperature, fluxes, and film coefficient for a fluid channel in a heat
transfer analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CHANNEL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data used to input fluid channels.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of fluid channels data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Face identification – see Marc Volume B: Element Library. Note that these
identifiers are different from those used for DIST FLUXES.
6-10 2nd I First (inlet) element number in the channel.
11-20 3rd F Inlet temperature.
21-30 4th F Mass flow rate.
31-40 5th F Film coefficient.
41-45 6th I Table ID for inlet temperature.
46-50 7th I Table ID for mass flow rate.
51-55 8th I Table ID for film coefficient.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above fluid channel data is applied.
Main Index
1114 VIEW FACTOR
Read in Radiation View Factors
VIEW FACTOR Read in Radiation View Factors
Description
This option initiates the reading of radiation view factors created by Marc Mentat using the Monte Carlo
procedure. This file is read as vfid.vfs where vfid is entered using the -vf option when invoking
Marc. The RADIATION parameter is required and the 2nd field on this parameter is a 2.
Format
Format
Data
1-11 1st A Enter the words VIEW FACTOR.
Main Index
RADIATING CAVITY 1115
Define Outline of Radiating Cavity
RADIATING CAVITY Define Outline of Radiating Cavity
Description
This option allows for the input of the outlines of radiating cavities. Each cavity outline is defined by a
group of nodal points in a counter clockwise direction. The RADIATION parameter is required and the
2nd field on this parameter is a 1. This method may only be used for axisymmetric solid elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-16 1st A Enter the word RADIATING CAVITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Total number of cavities.
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input. Default is 5 (input).
3rd data block
Enter a list of nodes defining the outline of a cavity. Repeat for each cavity
to be defined.
Note: List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal in these
nodal lists.
Main Index
1116 RAD-CAVITY
Define Radiation Cavity
RAD-CAVITY Define Radiation Cavity
Description
This option defines a radiation boundary condition. The cavity geometry is specified through the CAVITY
DEFINITION option. If required, the view factors will be first calculated. In a coupled analysis, this option
may be used to control the frequency of recalculating the view factors. The RADIATION parameter is
required and the 2nd field on this parameter is a 3 or a 4. The CAVITY DEFINITION option must also be
used to define the shape of the cavity.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words RAD-CAVITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of radiation boundary conditions to be entered
(optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of radiation boundary condition data, defaults
to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of lines used in card series 6 (default is 1).
6-10 2nd I Enter 0 to calculate view factors.
Enter 1 to read view factors from a file jid_cnn.vfs, where nn is the
cavity ID.
11-15 3rd I Enter increment frequency to recalculate view factors.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 cavity is closed.
Enter 1 cavity is closed and scale view factors.
Enter 2 cavity is open.
21-25 5th I Enter 1 to make Radiation Exchange Matrix Symmetric. This matrix is
defined by A j ⋅ F i j .
If 1 is entered, the viewfactors are scaled for closed cavities.
Default is 0 and symmetry is not guaranteed.
26-30 6th I Enter a 1 if a post file is to be created that may be used to visualize the
view factors.
31-62 7th A Enter the unique label associated with this radiation boundary condition.
This label will be referenced by the LOADCASE option.
Main Index
RAD-CAVITY 1117
Define Radiation Cavity
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st E Temperature at infinity for an open cavity. If a control node is provided in
the CAVITY DEFINITION, the temperature entered here is ignored.
11-20 2nd E Enter the change in coordinates before view factors will be recalculated.
Only used if 7th field of RADIATION parameter is set to 1.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for Temperature at infinity for an open cavity.
6th data block (Repeat based upon 3rd block, first entry)
Enter a list of cavity IDs.
Main Index
1118 CAVITY DEFINITION
Define Geometry of a Cavity
CAVITY DEFINITION Define Geometry of a Cavity
Description
This option defines the geometric outline of the cavity, including symmetry surface information. This
option is used when the hemi-cube method is used to calculate the view factors, and is used in conjunction
with the RAD-CAVITY and EMISSIVITY options. The RADIATION parameter is required and the 2nd field
on this parameter is a 3 or a 4.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words CAVITY DEFINITION.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of cavities.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read input.
Repeat the 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, 8th, and 9th data blocks for each radiating cavity.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the cavity number.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of geometry types to define cavity.
11-15 3rd I Enter the number of symmetry surfaces to be used, maximum is 16.
16-20 4th I Control Node ID. Used for determining environment temperature – 1st
degrees of freedom is used. If the cavity is closed, this is not used.
4th data block - Enter as many as 16 symmetry surface ids
1-5 1st I Enter first symmetry ID
If positive number then ID comes from the SYMMETRY option.
If negative number then ID comes from the SURFACES option.
6-10 2nd I Enter second symmetry ID
11-15 3rd I Enter third symmetry ID.
Main Index
CAVITY DEFINITION 1119
Format
Data
5th data block
If geometry type is element IDs(1), use either the first or the second and third field.
If geometry type is surface(4) or curve(5), use the second field only.
1-5 1st I Enter the ibody type based upon element library description in Marc
6-10 2nd I Enter 1.
block, 2nd field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs, top side if shell element
4: Surface IDs, top side if shell element
5: Curve IDs, top side if shell element
11: Element-Edge IDs, top side if shell element
12: Element-Face IDs, top side if shell element
13: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention, top side if shell element
14: Element-Face IDs - Mentat convention, top side if shell element
21: Element IDs, bottom side if shell element
24: Surface IDs, bottom side if shell element
25: Curve IDs, bottom side if shell element
31: Element-Edge IDs, bottom side if shell element
32: Element-Face IDs, bottom side if shell element
33: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention, bottom side if shell element
34: Element-Face IDs - Mentat convention, bottom side if shell element
41: Element IDs, both sides if shell elements
44: Surface IDs, both sides if shell elements
45: Curve IDs, both sides if shell elements
Main Index
1120 CAVITY DEFINITION
Format
Data
51: Element-Edge IDs, both sides if shell elements
52: Element-Face IDs, both sides if shell elements
53: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention, both sides if shell elements
54: Element-Face IDs - Mentat convention, both sides if shell elements.
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to define the cavity. The geometric
entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 6th data block.
Main Index
EMISSIVITY 1121
Define Emissivity
EMISSIVITY Define Emissivity
Description
This option is used to define the diffuse surface radiation behavior. Separate emissivity and
absorption values may be entered. The properties may be a function of the spatial coordinate, the
temperature, and/or the frequency. This option is used in conjunction with the CAVITY DEFINITION
and RAD-CAVITY options.
Note: If the emissivity is spectral dependent, then the absorption equals the emissivity at each
frequency. The wavelength may be given in any units; i.e. m or μm, but the frequency used
for table evaluation is based upon the wavelength and the speed of radiation given in the
PARAMETERS option. They should be in consistent units. The emissivity is assumed to
have a linear variation within each band.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words EMISSIVITY.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number.
11-15 3rd I Enter 0 for new style input.
Enter 1 for MD Nastran style definition of spectral emissivity.
Repeat the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks for each different surface radiation property.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the emissivity ID.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of geometries that this emissivity will be applied to.
11-15 3rd I If input mode 1, then enter the number of wavebands of
spectral emissivity.
4th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the emissivity coefficient.
11-20 2nd E Enter the absorption coefficient.
Main Index
1122 EMISSIVITY
Define Emissivity
Format
Data
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for emissivity coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for absorption coefficient.
6th data block (Only used is input mode is 1 and the spectral emissivity is included. Repeat for
each band.)
1-10 1st E Enter the wavelength at the start of the band.
11-20 2nd E Enter the wavelength at the end of the band.
21-30 3rd E Enter the emissivity at the start of the band.
31-40 4th E Enter the emissivity at the end of the band.
41-45 5th I Enter the table ID associated with the emissivity at the start of the band.
46-50 6th I Enter the table ID associated with the emissivity at the end of the band.
7th data block
If geometry type is element ids(1), use either the first or the second and third field. If geometry type is
surface(4) or curve(5), use the second field only.
1-5 1st I Enter the ibody type based upon element library description in Marc
6-10 2nd I Enter 1.
block, 2nd field.
8th data block
1: Element IDs, top side if shell element
4: Surface IDs, top side if shell element
5: Curve IDs, top side if shell element
11: Element-Edge IDs, top side if shell element
12: Element-Face IDs, top side if shell element
13: Element-Edge IDs - Marc Mentat convention, top side if shell
element
14: Element-Face IDs - Marc Mentat convention, top side if
shell element.
Main Index
EMISSIVITY 1123
Define Emissivity
Format
Data
21: Element IDs, bottom side if shell element
24: Surface IDs, bottom side if shell element
25: Curve IDs, bottom side if shell element
31: Element-Edge IDs, bottom side if shell element
32: Element-Face IDs, bottom side if shell element
33: Element-Edge IDs - Marc Mentat convention, bottom side if
shell element
34: Element-Face IDs - Marc Mentat convention, bottom side if
shell element.
41: Element IDs, both sides if shell elements
44: Surface IDs, both sides if shell elements
45: Curve IDs, both sides if shell elements
51: Element-Edge IDs, both sides if shell elements
52: Element-Face IDs, both sides if shell elements
53: Element-Edge IDs - Marc Mentat convention, both sides if
shell elements
54: Element-Face IDs - Marc Mentat convention, both sides if
shell elements.
9th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to define the cavity.
Main Index
1124 VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer)
Define Nodal Velocity Components
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Define Nodal Velocity Components

Heat Transfer)
Description
This option allows the specification of the nodal velocity components in a heat transfer analysis, where
the convective terms are to be included. The convective option is specified by placing a 2 in the fifth field
of the HEAT parameter. This activates the nonsymmetric solver as well. The nodal velocity components
are defined by specifying the velocity magnitude of a series of components for sets of nodes.
Moreover, the velocity values can be specified via the UVELOC user subroutine (see Marc Volume D:
User Subroutines and Special Routines).
If the motion of the media is to be calculated, a coupled fluid-thermal analysis should be performed.
Note: The convective velocities are not applied to heat transfer shell elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words VELOCITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of velocity (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of velocity data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the UVELOC user subroutine required for this initial condition.
Main Index
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer) 1125
Format
Data
31-63 7th A Enter the unique label associated with this condition. This label will be
4th data block
1-10 1st E Velocity in first coordinate direction.
11-20 2nd E Velocity in second coordinate direction.
21-30 3rd E Velocity in third coordinate direction.
1-5 1st I Table ID associated with the first coordinate direction.
6-10 2nd I Table ID associated with the second coordinate direction.
11-15 3rd I Table ID associated with the third coordinate direction.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
1126 VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer)
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer) Define Nodal Velocity Components
input style.
Description
are defined by specifying the velocity magnitude of a series of components for sets of nodes. This data
can be input from data blocks or from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the velocity values can be
respecified, or initialized if no previous data was entered via user subroutine UVELOC (see Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
A summary of nodal velocities appears in the printout. This can be suppressed by specifying a nonzero
value for the print-suppress parameter.
If the motion of the media is to be calculated, a coupled fluid-thermal analysis should be performed.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word VELOCITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data blocks used to input nodal velocity components. If a
negative value is entered, the UVELOC user subroutine is called for
every node.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of the velocity field. Default to unit 5,
unless the INPUT TAPE parameter has been used.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printout of the summary of nodal
velocity components.
Data blocks 3, 4 and 5 should be repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the velocity in the first coordinate-direction for
which the velocity is given.
Additional velocity components in other coordinate directions must be
specified on the same data line in F10 format. The number of components
must equal the number of directions.
Main Index
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer) 1127
Format
Data
4th data block
Enter a list of coordinate directions in which the velocity is specified.
5th data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the velocity vector as defined in data blocks
3 and 4.
Main Index
1128 CURE RATE
Cure Kinetics
CURE RATE Cure Kinetics
Description
This option is used to define the curing property parameters of materials.This property is used to couple
the curing effect for heat transfer or thermal/mechanical problems. There are three choices for this option.
Each choice corresponds to its own input data format.
Option A: Embedded Models

This option allows you to choose one of the four cure models built into the Marc program. Default is a
no cure kinetics model.
Option B: Table Defined Models

This option allows you to define the cure kinetics model in the table format. In this case, the associated
table ID should be included.
Option C: User-defined Models (through user subroutine)

This option allows you to define the cure kinetics model in the UCURE user subroutine. See Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for the description of this subroutine.
Note: This option must be combined with CURING parameter to activate the curing analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CURE RATE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter cure kinetics model definition number.
Enter a negative value if the cure model is defined by the UCURE
user subroutine.
Enter 0 (default) if no cure kinetics model is defined or if table input is
used to define the cure kinetics model.
Enter 1 for Lee, Loos and Springer (1982) model;
Main Index
CURE RATE 1129
Cure Kinetics
Format
Data
Enter 2 for Combined model: Lee, Chiu, and Lin (1992); White and Hahn
(1992); Kenny (1992); Scott (1991); or Scott (1991)
Enter 3 for Lee, Chiu, and Lin (1992) model
Enter 4 for Johnston and Hubert (1995) model.
6-10 2nd I Enter 0 (default) if the model is not defined by a table, or
Enter the table ID number if a table is used to define the cure
kinetics model.
11-15 3rd I Enter the associated material ID number.
16-20 4th I Enter unit number for reading in the data (default is standard input).
Option A (Model 1)
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter First Pre-Exponential Factor: A1 .
11-20 2nd F Enter Second Pre-Exponential Factor: A2 .
21-30 3rd F Enter Third Pre-Exponential Factor: A3 .
31-40 4th F Enter Activation energy: Δ E1
41-50 5th F Enter Activation energy: Δ E2 .
51-60 6th F Enter Activation energy: Δ E3
61-70 7th F Enter value: B.
71-80 8th F Enter value: αC .
4th data block

1-10 1st F Enter the maximum cure reaction heat.
Option A (Model 2)
3rd data block
21-30 3rd F Enter Activation energy: Δ E1 .
41-50 5th F Enter Exponential Factor: m.
Main Index
1130 CURE RATE
Cure Kinetics
Format
Data
51-60 6th F Enter Exponential Factor: n .
4th data block
Option A (Model 3)
3rd data block
21-30 3rd F Enter Activation energy: Δ E1 .
41-50 5th F Enter Exponential Factor: l .

51-60 6th F Enter Exponential Factor: m.

4th data block
Option A (Model 4)
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter Pre-Exponential Factor: A.
11-20 2nd F Enter Activation Energy: ΔE .
21-30 3rd F Enter Exponential Factor: m.

41-50 5th F Enter Diffusion Constant: C.
51-60 6th F Enter Critical Resin Degree of Cure: α C0 .
61-70 7th F Enter Increase of Critical Resin Degree of Cure: α CT .

4th data block
Main Index
CURE RATE 1131
Cure Kinetics
Format
Data
Option B
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the reference value associated with the table input.
11-20 2nd F Enter the maximum cure reaction heat.
Option C
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are not needed for Option C.
Main Index
1132 INIT CURE (with TABLE Input)
Define Initial Degree of Cure
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Degree of Cure
Description
This option allows you to enter the initial degree of cure into each elements. The input data is based on
the new table driven input data format.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INIT CURE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of initial degree of cure data to be entered (optional)
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of initial degree of cure data. Defaults to input file.
3rd data block
1-10 1st I Enter the number of geometry types used to define this initial condition.
Default is 1. See the 6th and 7th data blocks.
31-63 7th A Enter the unique label associated with this initial condition. The label will
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the initial degree of cure.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the initial degree of cure.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data block,
1st field.
Main Index
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input) 1133
Format
Data
6th data block
1 - Element IDs
2 - Volume/region/body IDs.
7th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial conditions are
6th data block.
Main Index
1134 INIT CURE
INIT CURE Define Initial Degree of Cure
Description
This option allows you to enter the initial degree of cure into each elements. The input data is based on
the non-table driven input format.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words INIT CURE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of initial degree of cure data to be entered (optional)
6-10 2nd I Unit number for input of initial degree of cure data. Defaults to input file.
11-15 3rd I Not used; default is set to 0.
The 3rd to 6th data blocks are entered as pairs.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the value of the initial degree of cure.
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter the list of elements for which initial degree of cure prescribed above
is applied.
5th data block
Only necessary if the CENTROID parameter is not used.
1-80 1st I Enter the list of integration points for which the initial degree of cure
prescribed above is applied.
6th data block
1-80 1st I Enter the list of layers for which the initial degree of cure prescribed
above is applied.
Main Index
CURE SHRINKAGE 1135
Shrinkage Property of Resin Material
CURE SHRINKAGE Shrinkage Property of Resin Material
Description
This option is used to define the shrinkage property of resin material and to couple the curing shrinkage
effect into thermal/mechanical problems. There are three choices for this option. Each choice
corresponds to its own input data format.
Option A: Embedded Models:

This option is the default method and allows you to choose one of the two cure models built into the Marc
program. Default is a no cure kinetics model.
Option B: Table Defined Models

This option allows you to define the cure kinetics model in the table format. In this case, the associated
table ID should be included.
Option C: User-defined Models (through user subroutine)

This option allows you to define the cure kinetics model in the USHRINKAGE user subroutine. See Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for the description of this subroutine.
Note: This option must be combined with CURING parameter to activate the curing
shrinkage analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CURE SHRINKAGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter cure kinetics model definition number. (default is 0).
Enter a negative value if the cure model is defined by the USHRINKAGE
user subroutine.
Enter 0 if no cure kinetics model is defined or if table input is used to
define the cure kinetics model.
Enter 1 for Bogetti and Gillespie (1992) model;
Enter 2 for White and Hahn (1992) model.
Main Index
1136 CURE SHRINKAGE
Format
Data
6-10 2nd I Enter 0 (default) if the model is not defined by a table, or
Enter the table ID number if table is used to define the cure
kinetics model.
11-15 3rd I Enter the associated material ID number.
16-20 4th I Enter unit number for reading in the data (default is standard input).
Option A (Model 1)
3rd data block
1-10 1st F S∞
Enter the total volumetric resin shrinkage: Vr .
11-20 2nd F Enter the degree of cure after which the resin shrinkage stops: α C1 .
21-30 3rd F Enter the degree of cure after which the resin shrinkage stops: α C2 .
31-40 4th F Enter the linear cure shrinkage: A

4th data block
1-10 1st F Directional cure shrinkage coefficient: C SC 11 .
11-20 2nd F Directional cure shrinkage coefficient: C SC 22 .
21-30 3rd F Directional cure shrinkage coefficient: C SC 33 .
31-40 4th F Directional cure shrinkage coefficient: C SC 12 .
Option A (Model 2)
3rd data block
1-10 1st F S∞
Enter the total volumetric resin shrinkage: Vr .
11-20 2nd F Enter the degree of cure after which the resin shrinkage stops: αC .
21-30 3rd F Enter cure shrinkage model superscript: B.

Main Index
CURE SHRINKAGE 1137
Format
Data
4th data block
Option B
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the reference value associated with the table input.
4th data block
Option C
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are not needed for Option C.
Main Index
1138 THERMO-PORE
Define Properties of Thermal Degrading Material
THERMO-PORE Define Properties of Thermal Degrading Material
Description
This option is used to define the material data required for materials subjected to pyrolysis.
This format is based upon the different material states, virgin, charred, or coked being previously defined
using the ISOTROPIC or ORTHOTROPIC options. The thermal properties of the inert material, the gas,
and water, if required, should be defined in the ISOTROPIC option.
Notes: Data that is not required for model A is specified as (NRA), enter 0.
Data that is not required for model A or B is specified as (NRAB).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter word THERMO-PORE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sets of data.
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number to read the data from.
The 3rd through 15th data blocks are repeated for each set of material data.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter material ID.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 for simple pyrolysis model.
Enter 2 for advanced pyrolysis model.
11-15 3rd I Set to 3 if BSM database is used.
16-20 4th I Enter the material ID for virgin material.
21-25 5th I Enter the material ID for charred material.
26-30 6th I Enter the material ID for coked material.
31-35 7th I Enter the material ID for liquid water.
36-40 8th I Enter the material ID for gas.
41-45 9th I Enter the material ID for inert material.
46-50 10th I Enter the material ID for water vapor.
If the BSM database is used, then the 4th through 13th data blocks will be given in the BSM data file.
Main Index
THERMO-PORE 1139
Format
Data
Data block 3b is only used if BSM database is used.
3b data block
1-80 1st A Enter path to BSM data section for this option.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter pyrolysis model (NRA).
0 – No pyrolysis.
1 – Arrhenius law for pyrolysis based upon rho.
2 – Arrhenius law for coking based upon φj.
3 – UPYROLSL user subroutine is used.
6-10 2nd I Enter water vapor model (NRA).
0 – No water vapor model included.
1 – Arrhenius law used.
2 – Sullivan and Stokes model.
3 – UWATERSL user subroutine is used.
11-15 3rd I Enter coking model (NRA).
0 – No coking model.
1 – Arrhenius coking model based upon Kcg.
2 – Linear model for Kcg.
3 – UCOKSL user subroutine is used.
16-20 4th I Enter MATFLG where MATFLG = ICEFF*10+IISO.
ICEFF = 0 linear method for calculating effective conductivity.
= 1 CMA,PTIMAD weighted average method for calculating
effective conductivity.
= 2 UPYROLEFF user subroutine used to define
effective conductivity.
IISO = 0 if isotropic material is being used.
= 1 if orthotropic material is being used.
= 2 if anistropic material is being used.
21-25 5th I Number of terms used in Arrhenius pyrolysis model (NRA).
26-30 6th I Number of terms used in Arrhenius water vapor model (NRA). In current
model = 1.
Main Index
1140 THERMO-PORE
Format
Data
31-35 7th I Number of terms used in Arrhenius coking model (NRA). In current
model = 1.
36-40 8th I Enter 1 for pressure based upon bulk modulus model.
Enter 2 for pressure-temperature based upon Perfect gas law (default).
5th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the fraction of pyrolysis when pyrolysis stops and coking begins if
present. Default = 0.96.
11-20 2nd E Enter the viscosity of the fluid, only required if D’Arcy law
21-30 3rd E Enter the volume fraction of the inert material.
31-40 4th E Enter the fluid-gas bulk modulus, only required for D’Arcy law.
41-50 5th E Enter the molecular weight of the fluid.
6th data block
6-10 2nd I Table ID for viscosity, only required if D’Arcy law
16-20 4th I Table ID for fluid-gas bulk modulus.
21-25 5th I Table ID for the Molecular weight.
7th data block
The 7th data block is only required for the simple model.
1-10 1st E Enter reference time associated with the end of the
combustion/transformation.
11-20 2nd E Enter the pyrolysis temperature.
If the Arrhenius theta model is used for pyrolysis, then for each term - repeat the 8a data block.
Do not include for the simple model.
8a data block
1-5 1st I Enter term number (j).
6-15 2nd E Enter Bj .
11-25 3rd E Enter E aj .
26-35 4th E Enter ψj .
36-45 5th E Enter Δ ρ s ,p ,c ,j .
If the Arrhenius rho model is used for pyrolysis, then for each term - repeat the 8b data block.
Main Index
THERMO-PORE 1141
Format
Data
8b data block
1-5 1st I Enter term number (j).
6-15 2nd E Enter Bj .
16-25 3rd E Enter E aj .
26-35 4th E Enter ψj .
36-45 5th E Enter ρ̂ svj .
46-55 6th E Enter ρ̂ scj .
56-65 7th E Enter Γj .
If Water vapor model included, use the 9th and 10th data blocks.
9th data block
1-10 1st E Enter initial volumetric mass density of liquid ρ l, o .
11-20 2nd E Not used; enter 0.

21-30 3rd E Boiling point of liquid.
31-40 4th E Normalized of d P sat ⁄ dT (model C only).
10th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for initial volumetric mass density of liquid.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for boiling point of liquid.
If the Arrhenius water vapor model - 1 terms used for each term include the 11th data block.
11th data block
1-5 1st I Enter term number (j)
6-15 2nd E Enter Bw .
11-25 3rd E Enter E aw .
26-35 4th E Enter ψw .
If the Arrhenius model is used for coking, use the 12th data block.
Main Index
1142 THERMO-PORE
Format
Data
12th data block
1-5 1st I Enter term number. Default = 1.
6-15 2nd E Enter Kc .
11-25 3rd E Enter E ac .
26-35 4th E Enter ηc .
36-45 5th E Enter K CGE (total mass fraction of the carbon in the pyrolysis gas when
chemical equilibrium is achieved).
If the Linear model for K CG is used for coking, use the 13th and 14th data blocks.
13th data block
1-10 1st E Enter T low temperature
11-20 2nd E Enter K CG
21-30 3rd E Enter TC equilibrium temperature

31-40 4th E Enter K CGE
14th data block

1- 5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with T .
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with K CE .
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with TE .
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID associated with K CGE .
15th data block

Main Index
SURFACE ENERGY 1143
Define Surface Energy
SURFACE ENERGY Define Surface Energy
Description
This option allows the user to define the data required for calculating the surface energy balance and to
provide the data for the surface recession rate calculation. This option must be used in conjunction with
the STREAM DEFINITION option which is used to prescribe the elements/faces associated with a region.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words SURFACE ENERGY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of regions to be defined.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read input data. Defaults to standard input.
The 3rd through 18th data blocks are repeated for each surface region.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the numbers of geometry types used to define the surface energy.
Default is 1; see the 17th and 18th data blocks.
6-10 2nd I Enter the surface energy ID.
16-20 4th I Enter 3 if surface data is to be obtained from BSM database. In this case,
card series 4 through 16 will be given in the BSM file.
21-25 5th I Enter 1 for simplified heat of ablation model.
31-63 7th A Enter the unique label associated with the surface energy. This label will
Data block 3b is only used if BSM database is used.
3b data block
1-80 1st A Enter path to BSM data section for this option.
If the BSM database is used, then the 4th through 16th data blocks will be given in the BSM file.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1 to include diffusion.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of families of particles.
11-15 3rd I Enter the number of liquid phases.
Main Index
1144 SURFACE ENERGY
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Enter 0 if αH = αHo.
Enter 1 if αH given by standard calculation.
Enter 2 if the UFAH user subroutine is called.
21-25 5th I Enter 0 for constant G law (correlation factor).
Enter 1 if particles given in card series 12 and 13.
Enter 2 if particles defined by the UGLAW user subroutine.
26-30 6th I Enter 0 if empirical constant entered.
Enter 1 if linear formula used.
Enter 2 if arc tan formula.
Enter 3 if user subroutine ach06_03.fm: is called.
31-35 7th I Enter 1 if the UTIMP user subroutine and/or the UFLUXMEC user
subroutine are to be used.
Enter 2 if recession rate due to simplified erosion model.
36-40 8th I Enter 0 for mixture rule for Hsolid based on Hvirgin, Hcharred.
Enter 1 for Hsolid=Hcharred if pyrolysis Hsolid=Hcoked.
41-45 9th I Enter table ID that will control diffusion contribution to surface energy.
Default is 0; diffusion contribution is always active.
5th data block
1-10 1st E Not used; enter 0.
21-30 3rd E Not used; enter 0.
41-50 5th E Enter the convection coefficient αH .
O
51-60 6th E Enter the diffusion coefficient αM.

61-70 7th E Enter the transpiration factor κ.
6th data block
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the convection coefficient αH .
O
Main Index
SURFACE ENERGY 1145
Format
Data
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for the coefficient αM.
7th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the enthalpy of recovery Hrec.
11-20 2nd E Enter the enthalpy of the frozen composition He.
21-30 3rd E Enter the enthalpy of the wall gas Hw.
31-40 4th E Enter the enthalpy of ablation Δ H a bl for simple model.
8th data block
1- 5 1st I Enter the table ID for the enthalpy of recovery.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the enthalpy of frozen composition.
11-20 3rd I Enter the table ID for the enthalpy of the wall gas.
21-25 4th I Enter the table ID for the enthalpy of ablation.
9th data block
1-10 1st E Enter mass rate of the solid due to ablation by gasses, normalized by αm
B' c = m· s, th, g ⁄ α .
m
11-20 2nd E Enter mass rate of the solid due to ablation by particles. If number of
families of particles are given, this entry is not used m· s,th,p .
21-30 3rd E Enter mass rate of the solid due to ablation by erosion.
31-40 4th E Enter amount of ablation due liquid particles Φsolid ablated by liquid.
41-50 5th E Enter amount of ablation due to gases Φsolid ablated by gases.
51-60 6th E Enter the amount of ablation due to particle impact Φparticles impact.
61-70 7th E Enter the amount of pyrolysis at which recession may occur. If zero,
recession may occur at all densities.
71-80 8th E Surface recession rate due to simplified erosion model.
10th data block
1- 5 1st I Enter the table ID for B' c .
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the mass rate of the solid due to ablation by particles.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the mass rate of the solid due to ablation by erosion.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the amount of ablation due to liquid particles.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the amount of ablation due to gases.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for the amount of ablation due to particle impact.
Main Index
1146 SURFACE ENERGY
Format
Data
36-40 8th I Enter the table ID for the surface recession rate due to simplified
erosion model.
Enter only if diffusion is included in model (not for simple model).
11th data block
1-10 1st E Enter H.
11-20 2nd E Enter Ze.
21-30 3rd E Enter Zs.
31-35 4th I Enter the table ID associated with H.
36-40 5th I Enter the table ID associated with Ze.
41-45 6th I Enter the table ID associated with Zs.
Repeat card series 12th and 13th data blocks as pairs for each family of particles
12th data block
1-10 1st E Enter Vx of particle.
11-20 2nd E Enter Vy of particle.
21-30 3rd E Enter Vz of particle.
31-40 4th E Enter diameter of particle.
41-50 5th E Enter angle of incidence of particle.
51-60 6th E Enter m· of particle.
61-70 7th E Enter the correlation factor (G law) if it is constant.
71-80 8th E Enter the enthalpy of reaction ΔHr,p.
13th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with Vx.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with Vy.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with Vz.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID associated with the particle diameter.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID associated with angle of incidence of particle.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID associated with m· of particle.
31-35 7th I Enter the table ID associated with the correlation factor.
36-40 8th I Enter the table ID associated with the enthalpy of reaction.
Include the 14th data block only if particles are included.
Main Index
SURFACE ENERGY 1147
Format
Data
14th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the value of the empirical factor fthp.
11-20 2nd E Enter the value of temp1, used to define empirical factor.
21-30 3rd E Enter the value of temp2 used to define empirical factor.
31-40 4th E Enter the value of nfthp.
41-50 5th E Enter the value of fmec.
Repeat the 15th and 16th data block for each family of liquid phases.
15th data block
1-10 1st I Enter m· l p .
11-20 2nd I Enter Hl p .
16th data block

1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with m· l p .
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with Hl p .
17th data block

Marc Volume B, Element Library.
18th data block
04: Surface IDs
05: Curve IDs
09: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
1148 SURFACE ENERGY
Format
Data
19th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above surface energy terms
17th data block.
Main Index
Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to Thermo-chemical Erosion or Wear Behavior
RECEDING SURFACE Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to

Thermo-chemical Erosion or Wear Behavior
Description
This option allows the user to define where the surface is to recede due to either thermal, chemical, or
erosive processes. The process may be defined here, or via the UABLATE or UWEAR user subroutine,
or via an advanced model. This data for the advanced thermal model is given in the SURFACE ENERGY
option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words RECEDING SURFACE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number to read data default is standard input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometries used to describe this receding surface.
6-10 2nd I Enter the recession model:
0 no recession
1 simple thermal ablation model
2 advanced thermal ablation model
3 user subroutine UABLATE
4 wear model based upon nodal force
5 wear model based upon nodal stress
6 wear model based upon nodal force and coefficient of friction
7 wear model based upon nodal stress and coefficient of friction
8 wear model based upon user-defined wear rate
9 wear model based upon user subroutine UWEAR
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for ression model 1 or 8.
16-20 4th I Enter the surface ID for the advanced model 2.
Main Index
1150 RECEDING SURFACE
Format
Data
For the wear models enter the sum of k1 +k2+k3 +k4
K1 = 0 calculate and apply wear
K1 = 10 calculate wear, but do not update coordinates
K2 = 0 use values at nodes
K2 = 100 use an averaged value of stress or force over the surface
K3 = 0 do not include thermal mechanism
K3 = 1000 include thermal mechanism
K4 = 0 – “Archard” based models
K4 = 10000 – “Bayer” based models
21-30 5th E For simple model, enter the reference rate of recession.
For wear models 4 through 7, enter the wear coefficient.
For wear model 8, enter the user-defined wear rate.
31-35 6th I Recession Surface ID.
41-72 8th A Enter the name.
4th data block
Only required if k4 = 10000 on 3rd data block, 4th field
1-10 1st E Enter exponent applied to force or stress term.
11-20 2nd E Enter exponent applied to relative velocity term.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the geometry type.
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
11: Element-Edge IDs
12: Element-Face IDs
13: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention
14: Element-Face IDS - Mentat convention
16: Surface ID: orientation Id
17: Curve ID: orientation id
Main Index
Format
Data
6-10 2nd I If geometry type 1, enter the face ID.
6th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to define the location of the recession.
The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 4th
data block.
Main Index
1152 THROAT
Define Coordinates of Throat
THROAT Define Coordinates of Throat
Description
This option is used to provide the reference dimensions of the throat radius and axial position when used
with quantities that are dependent upon the radius/throat radius, or quantities that use dual tables based
upon the axial coordinate versus the throat axial position. See TABLE option.
For independent variable number 33, the ratio used is:
2-D planar ratio = y ( current ) ⁄ radius of the throat
2
2-D axisymmetric ratio = ( r ( current ) ⁄ radius of the throat )
2 2 2
3-D solid ratio = ( y + z ) ⁄ radius of the throat
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word THROAT.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the axial position of the throat.
11-20 2nd E Enter the radius of the throat.
21-25 3rd I Enter the recession surface ID used to update the throat radius and
axial coordinate.
If zero, the reference values are used for the complete calculation.
26-30 4th I Number of divisions around circumference for 3-D analysis
(default is 36).
31-35 5th I Enter 1 for default method to update node at throat point.
Enter 2 to update node at throat point based upon upstream points
36-40 6th I Enter point ID of throat location.
Main Index
INITIAL PYROLYSIS 1153
Define Initial Pyrolysis
INITIAL PYROLYSIS Define Initial Pyrolysis
Description
This option is used to define the initial material data in an ablating region. For streamline flow model,
this is along streamlines; for D’Arcy flow model, it is at conventional integration points. This option is
not necessary for model A.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INITIAL PYROLYSIS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data to follow.
The 3rd through 9th data blocks are repeated as a set NSET times.
3rd data block
The 3rd data block is only required for D’Arcy flow model.
1-10 1st E Enter the initial solid density.
11-20 2nd E Enter the initial gas density due to pyrolysis.
21-30 3rd E Enter the initial vapor density.
4th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the initial value of xsi,p.
21-30 3rd E Enter the initial value of xsi,c (only required if coking model is included).
31-40 4th E If one term Arrhenius water vapor model is used, enter the initial value
of φw.
The 5th data block is only used if Arrhenius Pyrolysis model is used.
5th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the first term of the initial value of phij.
11-20 2nd E Enter the second term of the initial value of phij; continue as necessary for
all terms, enter eight terms per line.
The 6th data block is only used if Arrhenius Coking model is used.
Main Index
1154 INITIAL PYROLYSIS
Define Initial Pyrolysis
Format
Data
6th data block
1-10 1st E Enter the initial value of Kcg.
The 7th data block is used for flowline model.
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of regions that has these initial conditions.
The 8th and 9th data blocks is used for D’Arcy flow model.
8th data block
1-80 Enter a list of elements that has these initial conditions.
9th data block
1-80 Enter a list of integration points that has these initial conditions.
Main Index
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer) 1155
Define Initial Density
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer) Define Initial Density
Description
This option provides initial density for pyrolysis analyses, using the streamline flow method. For the
D’Arcy flow method, use the INITIAL PYROLYSIS option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INITIAL DENSITY.
2nd data block
to input.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the initial density.
Main Index
1156 INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer)
Define Initial Density
Format
Data
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the geometric variations in initial
density.
1st field.
6th data block
2 – Node IDs
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial density are
data block.
Main Index
STREAM DEFINITION 1157
Define Stream Definition
STREAM DEFINITION Define Stream Definition
Description
This option allows the user to define the streamline and the reference point for the arc length. The
streamlines are used for model B of the thermo-poro analysis. The arc length is only required if the
material data and/or boundary conditions are functions of the arc length.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words STREAM DEFINITION.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read in the data.
11-15 3rd I Flag to control display of streamlines.
16-25 4th E Enter the tolerance distance to match streamlines across regions. Only
used if the 10th field of 3rd data block is not zero.
Repeat the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks for each pyrolysis region.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the region ID.
6-10 2nd I Enter the contact body ID associated with this streamline region if
ablation occurs, and remeshing is required, default is the region ID.
16-20 4th I Maximum number of elements through the region.
21-25 5th I Enter a 1 if stream definition region is used to define topology for stretch
meshers but no pyrolysis occurs in this region, or ABLATION,3 or
ABLATION, 4 is used, but no pyrolysis occurs.
31-35 7th I Enter the number of streamlines. Only required if an irregular mesh is
provided, or if the region is defined using curves.
36-40 8th I Enter the maximum number of edges/faces in a region. Only necessary if
region will be remeshed of if the region is defined by using curves or
surfaces.
41-45 9th I Enter 1 if regular region.
Enter 2 if irregular region.
Main Index
1158 STREAM DEFINITION
Define Stream Definition
Format
Data
Enter 3 if higher-order regular region.
Enter 4 if higher-order irregular region.
46-50 10th I Enter the previous region id, used to obtain m· at beginning of
streamline.Note this ID must be smaller than the current region ID.
If a zero is entered m· = 0.0 along inside surface.
51-55 11th I Enter the curve/surface ID associated with the free surface. If a
curve/surface is given, skip the 4th and 5th data blocks.
56-60 12th I Enter the curve/surface ID associated with the interior surface. If a
curve/surface is given, skip the 6th and 7th data blocks.
61-70 13th E Enter m· g, p at beginning of streamline if unequal to 0 and 10th field is not
used.
71-80 14th E Enter m· g, w at beginning of streamline if water model is included, and it is
unequal to 0, and 10th field is not used.
4th data block
Enter a list of element:edge or element:face pairs for the free surface.
5th data block
Enter a list of element:edge or element:face pairs for the interior surface.
Main Index
PRINT STREAMLINE 1159
Control Output of Results along a Streamline
PRINT STREAMLINE Control Output of Results along a Streamline
Description
This option allows the user to control the amount of results that will be placed in the output if the
pyrolysis model B is used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words PRINT STREAM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the unit number for output; default to .stm file (91).
6-10 2nd I Enter frequency to write results into file.
-1: don’t write results
0: (default) write results every increment
11-15 3rd I 0: write values at all SIP
1: write values at extreme SIP points only
Main Index
1160 TRACK STREAMLINE
Track Behavior of a Point along a Streamline
TRACK STREAMLINE Track Behavior of a Point along a Streamline
Description
This option allows you to create a file that may be viewed by Mentat, thus gives the results at points along
a streamline. This option is often useful when ablation occurs as the conventional streampoints have new
locations. The results are written to a file jidname.sltrk.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words TRACK STREAM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number for points to be tracked.
6-10 2nd I Unit number to read data; default is standard input.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if stream points are to be entered using 3rd data block.
Enter 2 if a list of elements are to be entered using 4th data block.
3rd data block (only used if 2nd data block, 3rd field is a 1)
1-5 1st I Enter the region number.
6-10 2nd I Enter the streamline number.
11-15 3rd I Enter the streamline point.
4th data block (only used if 2nd data block, 3rd field is a 2)
Main Index
Joule Heating Analysis
Chapt Joule Heating Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of additional data required for coupled Joule heating analysis and
Mode coupled structural-thermal-electrical analysis. All of the options in the previous subsection referring to
heat transfer are also applicable. You have the ability to apply surface, volumetric and nodal currents, and
l prescribe nodal voltages. All applied boundary conditions should be entered as total values. In addition,
you can input a conversion factor so that you can work in convenient units for both the heat transfer and
Defini electrical conduction problems.
tion Joule heating analysis is not available for shell elements.
Optio
ns
Main Index
1162 JOULE
Define Conversion Factor for Joule Heating Analysis
JOULE Define Conversion Factor for Joule Heating Analysis
Description
In the analysis of Joule heating, the unit of heat generation computed from the electrical problem is, in
general, not consistent with the unit required for the heat transfer analysis. Depending on the units used
for the problems, different conversion factors must be used. For example, in an electric problem, the heat
generation can be expressed in terms of current and resistance as q = I2R. If the units of current and
resistance are (amp) and (ohm/ft), respectively, then the unit of heat generation in the electric problem
must be (watt/ft). Since 1 (watt) is equal to 3.4129 (btu/hr), a factor of 3.4129 must be used in a Joule
heating problem for the purpose of converting the unit of heat generation from (watt/ft) to (btu/hr-ft) for
heat transfer analysis.
It is also possible to use the CONVERT model definition option as explained in the Heat Transfer
Analysis section to prescribe this factor.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word JOULE.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Heat generation unit conversion factor between electrical and heat
transfer analyses in a Joule heating problem.
Default is 1.0.
Main Index
Define Distributed Currents
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Define Distributed Currents

Heating)
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) currents to be specified. Distributed currents are
converted to consistent nodal currents by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface current on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or
the TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent currents.
The applied current is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
In the current releases, Joule heating is not available for shell elements.
Note: If a distributed current is applied on the bottom of a shell, the current is applied to the
highest degrees of freedom of the shell.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST CURRENT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of distributed currents to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of distributed current data, defaults to input.
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are given for each set.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
Main Index
1164 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
Format
Data
in contact.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed currents.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the distributed current.
6th data block
1: Normal current (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal current (top surface for shells)
11-15 3rd I Enter the face ID or edge id.
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
1166 DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - Model Definition)
Define Distributed Current
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - Model Definition) Define Distributed Current
input style.
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) current to be specified. Distributed current is
converted to a consistent nodal current by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface current of a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be
used to input time and spatial dependent current.
history definition.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered in pairs, once for each data block.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of current. See library element description
in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
6-15 2nd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed current.
Main Index
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1167
Define Point Currents
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Point Currents
Description
This option allows total nodal point currents to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent currents.
history definition.
In the current releases, Joule heating is not available for shell elements; so, point currents should only be
applied to the first degree of freedom.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT CURRENT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of point currents to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point current data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
condition.
26-30 6th I Enter a 1 if first point current is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of
a heat transfer shell.
Main Index
1168 POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
Define Point Currents
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of point current.
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point current for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer
shell elements only).
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point current for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for point current.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for point current for second degree of freedom (Heat transfer
11-15 3rd I Table ID for point current for third degree of freedom (Heat transfer shell
elements only).
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
POINT CURRENT (Joule - Model Definition) 1169
Define Nodal Point Current
POINT CURRENT (Joule - Model Definition) Define Nodal Point Current
input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point current to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for the time dependent current.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 A Enter the words POINT CURRENT.
2nd data block
1-5 I Enter the number of sets of point currents to be entered (optional).
6-10 I Enter unit number of input of point current data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10 F Magnitude of point current.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal current are applied.
Main Index
1170 FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
Define Fixed Voltage
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Fixed Voltage
Description
This option defines the fixed voltage that each node must take. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the voltage and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. Note that unless heat
transfer shell elements are used, there is only one degree of freedom in a heat transfer analysis. You must
specify it.
The fixed voltage is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
In the current releases, Joule heating is not available for shell elements; so, the degree of freedom should
always be set to one.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words FIXED VOLTAGE.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd Unit number to read data, default is the standard input file.
3a data block
condition.
Main Index
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1171
Format
Data
26-30 6th I Enter a 1 if first prescribed voltage entered is to be applied for all degrees
of freedom of a heat transfer shell.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed voltage for first degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
11-20 2nd F Prescribed voltage for second degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
21-30 3rd F Prescribed voltage for third degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
freedom.)
5th data block
6th data block
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
1172 FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
FIXED VOLTAGE 1173
Define Nodal Fixed Voltage
FIXED VOLTAGE Define Nodal Fixed Voltage
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed voltage that each associated nodal point must take during the first and
Note that a number equal to or exceeding the total number of degrees of freedom constrained must appear
on the SIZING parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 A Enter the words FIXED VOLTAGE.
2nd data block
1-5 I Number of sets of voltage boundary condition data lines to be read
(optional).
6-10 I Enter unit number for input of voltages;
defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10 F Enter the prescribed voltage.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the voltage is prescribed.
Main Index
1174 Chapter 3: Model Definition Options
Diffusion Analysis
Chapt Diffusion Analysis

er 3: This section defines the options required to perform a diffusion simulation. The solution obtains the
Mode pressure (concentration) based upon input of a mass flux across the surfaces or an internally generated
mass defined through the DIST MASS or POINT MASS options. Either a steady state or transient analysis
l may be performed based upon the STEADY STATE, TRANSIENT, or AUTO STEP history definition
options. For a transient analysis, the INITIAL PRESSURE should be used as well. The matrix (solid)
Defini material is defined by specifying the permeability on the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or
tion ANISOTROPIC option and the porosity in the INITIAL POROSITY option. In a simple diffusion analysis
as opposed to a coupled soil simulation performed with the PORE option, the porosity is a state variable
Optio and does not change. It is possible to define a new porosity using the CHANGE PORE option. The
fluid/gas is defined by giving the viscosity, density, and the bulk modulus.
ns
Main Index
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1175
Define Initial Pressure
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Initial Pressure
Description
This option defines initial pressure for mass diffusion problems. This option provides the magnitude and
location, and associates it with an initial condition name. The initial condition is activated with the
LOADCASE model definition option. The USINC user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option
can be used to enter spatially varying initial conditions. Unless shell elements are used, there is only one
degree of freedom in a diffusion analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INIT PRESS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of initial pressure (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of initial pressure data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the USINC user subroutine is required for this initial condition.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if a formatted post file is used.
16-20 4th I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 2. Then this entry defines the unit
number from which the post file information is read. Defaults to unit 24
for a formatted post file and to unit 25 for a binary post file.
21-25 5th I Enter the increment number to be read for initial conditions.
The 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th data blocks are not used if initial pressure are read from a post file.
Main Index
1176 INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Define Initial Pressure
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Initial pressure in first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd F Initial pressure in second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Initial pressure in third degree of freedom.
Note: See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal
degrees of freedom.
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1177
Define Fixed Pressure
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Fixed Pressure
Description
This data defines a potential fixed pressure boundary condition. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the pressure, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of nodal numbers or a list of
geometric entities. This boundary condition is activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE history
definition option.
Unless shell elements are used, there is only one pressure degree of freedom per node in a diffusion
analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FIXED PRESS.
2nd data block
3rd data block
condition.
Main Index
1178 FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Format
Data
1-10 1st E Prescribed pressure for first degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed pressure for second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
21-30 3rd E Prescribed pressure for third degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
6th data block
block, 1st field.
7th data
block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
Define Distributed Mass Flux
DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Distributed Mass Flux
Description
This block of data defines mass flux (surface and volumetric) type boundary conditions. The user defines
a surface distribute mass flux magnitude ( M ⁄ l 2 t ) and the location, and associates this with a boundary
condition name. This is activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE history definition option. The
FLUX user subroutine can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed mass fluxes or the TABLE
model definition option may be used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST MASS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of distributed mass fluxes to be entered
(optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of distributed mass fluxes data, defaults
to input.
3rd data block
boundary condition.
in contact.
Main Index
1180 DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of mass flux.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the mass flux.
6th data block
1: Normal
106: Uniform volumetric
107: Nonuniform volumetric
Data blocks 7 and 8 are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data block,
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
1182 POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Define Nodal Mass Flux
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Nodal Mass Flux
Description
This block of data defines nodal mass flux boundary condition. The user specifies a magnitude and
location, and associates this with a boundary condition name. This is activated or deactivated using the
LOADCASE history definition option.
time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT MASS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sets of point mass fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point mass flux data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
condition.
Main Index
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1183
Format
Data
4th data block
Magnitude.
1-10 1st F Point mass flux associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd F Point mass flux associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Point mass flux associated with third degree of freedom.
5th data block - Table ID for Magnitude
1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
1184 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials
Diffusion)
Description
This option allows you to define diffusion properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature or pressure, use the TABLE model
definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to call the UPERM and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to use Bulk Modulus.
Enter 2 to use perfect gas law.
16-20 4th I Data input mode; enter zero.
The data entered in data blocks 4 and 5 are the reference values that are used with tables or
are constants.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Absolute permeability.
11-20 2nd F Fluid dynamic viscosity.
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1185
Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F Fluid density.
31-40 4th F Fluid bulk modulus.
41-50 5th F Porosity if the material is used as a component in the
THERMO-PORE option.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for permeability.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for viscosity.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for fluid density.
16-20 4th I Table ID for fluid bulk modulus.
21-25 5th I Table ID for porosity.
6th data block
its layers.
Main Index
1186 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Define Diffusion Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Diffusion Properties for Orthotropic Materials

Input - Diffusion)
Description
This option allows you to define diffusion properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature or pressure, use the TABLE model definition
option.
responsibility to enter all data required to match the dimension of the permeability matrix
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to call the UPERM and ORIENT user subroutines.
16-20 4th I Data input mode.
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1187
Define Diffusion Properties for Orthotropic Materials
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F K11 Absolute permeability.
11-20 2nd F K22 Absolute permeability.
21-30 3rd F K33 Absolute permeability.
31-40 4th F μ Fluid dynamic viscosity.
41-50 5th F Flui
d
den
sity.
51-60 6th F Fluid bulk modulus.
61-70 7th F Porosity if the material is used as a component in the
THERMO-PORE option.
5th data block
16-20 4th I Table ID for dynamic viscosity.
21-25 5th I Table ID for fluid density.
26-30 6th I Table ID for fluid bulk modulus.
27-35 7th I Table ID for porosity.
7th data block
Main Index
1188 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Model Definition Option for Diffusion Analysis
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Model Definition Option for Diffusion Analysis
- Diffusion)
Description
This option specifies diffusion properties defined by a call to the UPERM and ORIENT user subroutines.
The UPERM user subroutine must be used for the input of constant, temperature, or pressure dependent
anisotropic permeability (K11, K22, K33) defined in the user coordinate (1,2,3) system. The TABLE model
definition option can be used for the input of variations of viscosity with temperatures or pressure.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ANISOTROPI.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of anisotropic data sets to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3rd through 8th are repeated as a set NSET times.
3rd data block
UPERM and ORIENT user subroutines.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if the UPERM user subroutine is to be called.
Enter 2 if the anisotropic permeability is to be entered in the 6th and 7th
data blocks.
16-20 4th I Data input mode.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Fluid Dynamic Viscosity.
11-20 2nd F Fluid density.
21-30 3rd F Fluid bulk modulus.
Main Index
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1189
Format
Data
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for fluid dynamic viscosity.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for fluid density.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for fluid bulk modulus.
Data block 6 required only if the second fields 6-10 of 3rd data block is a 2.
6th data block - anisotropic absolute permeability
1-10 1st F K11
11-20 2nd F K12
21-30 3rd F K13
31-40 4th F K22
41-50 5th F K23
51-60 6th F K33
7th data block - required only if the second field 6-10 of 3rd data block is a 2
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for K11
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for K12
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for K13
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for K22
8th data block
Main Index
1190 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Main Index
Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis
Chapt Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of data necessary for a hydrodynamic bearing analysis. You have the
Mode ability to define the lubricant film thickness and initial velocity in a variety of ways. In addition,
restrictors and pump pressures can be imposed on the film pressure. The FIXED PRESSURE or
l RESTRICTOR model definition option should be used to insure no rigid body modes exist. Lubricant
mass flux may be defined using the POINT MASS or DIST MASS options. FIXED PRESSURE, POINT
Defini MASS, and DIST MASS are documented in the Diffusion Analysis section.
tion
Optio
ns
Main Index
1192 VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Define Nodal Velocity Components

Hydrodynamic)
Description
This option allows the specification of the nodal velocity components in a bearing analysis, where the
convective terms are to be included. The nodal velocity components are defined for sets of nodes.
Moreover, the velocity values can be specified via the UVELOC user subroutine (see Marc Volume D:
User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note that the velocity in a stationary bearing analysis is specified with respect to the (moving) lubricant.
This means that, in case both the adjacent surfaces as well as the lubricant move with respect to some
global coordinate system, the velocity vector to be defined equals the sum of both surface velocities
relative to the stationary film profile.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words VELOCITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of velocity (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of velocity data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the UVELOC user subroutine is required.
Main Index
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) 1193
Format
Data
31-63 7th A Enter the unique label associated with this condition. This label will be
4th data block
1-10 1st E Velocity in first coordinate direction.
11-20 2nd E Velocity in second coordinate direction.
1-5 1st I Table ID associated with the first coordinate direction.
6-10 2nd I Table ID associated with the second coordinate direction.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
1194 VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic)
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic) Define Nodal Velocity Components
input style.
Description
This option allows the specification of the nodal velocity components in a bearing analysis or a heat
transfer analysis, where the convective terms are to be included. The nodal velocity components are
defined by specifying the velocity magnitude of a series of components for sets of nodes. This data can
be input from data blocks or from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the velocity values can be
respecified, or initialized if no previous data was entered via UVELOC user subroutine. See Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
value for the print-suppress parameter. Note that the velocity in a stationary bearing analysis is specified
with respect to the (moving) lubricant. This means that, in case both the adjacent surfaces as well as the
lubricant move with respect to some global coordinate system, the velocity vector to be defined equals
the sum of both surface velocities relative to the stationary film profile.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word VELOCITY.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data blocks used to input nodal velocity components. If a
negative value is entered, the UVELOC user subroutine is called for
every node.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printout of the summary of nodal
velocity components.
Data blocks 3, 4 and 5 should be repeated for each data set.
Main Index
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic) 1195
Format
Data
3rd data block
which the velocity is given.
4th data block
NOTE: List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.
5th data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the velocity vector as defined in data blocks
3 and 4 applied.
Main Index
1196 THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Lubrication Thickness
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model Define Lubrication Thickness

Definition)
Description
This option defines the thickness of the lubricant film in a bearing analysis. The nodal thicknesses are
specified by giving the thickness values for a list of nodes. This data can be input from data blocks or
from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the nodal thickness values can be respecified, or initialized in
case no previous data was input, via the UGROOV user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines
and Special Routines).
The lubricant thickness is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words THICKNESS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of nodal thickness to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of nodal thickness data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometric types used to define the lubricant
thickness, default is 1. See 6th and 7th data blocks.
Enter 1 if the UGROOV user subroutine is required to specify thickness.
Main Index
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1197
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Nodal thickness.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for nodal thickness.
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
1198 THICKNESS
THICKNESS Define Lubrication Thickness
input style.
Description
This option defines the thickness of the lubricant film in a bearing analysis. The nodal thicknesses are
specified by giving the thickness values for a list of nodes. This data can be input from data blocks or
from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the nodal thickness values can be respecified, or initialized in
case no previous data was input, via the UTHICK user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User Subroutines
and Special Routines. A summary of nodal thickness values appears in the printout. This can be
suppressed by specifying a nonzero value for the print-suppress parameter.
The input of element thicknesses can be done via the GEOMETRY option or by means of the UGROOV
user subroutine. Element thickness values usually only have to be defined in case of film discontinuities
(grooves). See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for a description of the various ways to
specify the contributions to the total lubricant film.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word THICKNESS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of data blocks used to input nodal thickness values (optional). If a
negative value is entered, the UTHICK user subroutine is called for
every node.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of film thicknesses. Default to unit 5.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printout of the nodal thickness summary.
The third and fourth blocks should be entered in pairs, one pair for each distinct nodal data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter nodal thickness value.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the thickness as specified in data block 3
is applied.
Main Index
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1199
Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis
Definition)
Description
This option allows restrictor coefficients and associated pump pressures to be input. Nonuniform
restrictors or pump pressures can be obtained via the URESTR user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the URESTR user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Reference value of restrictor coefficient.
11-20 2nd F Reference value of pump pressure.
Main Index
1200 RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Format
Data
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the restrictor coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the pump pressure.
6th data block
1: Normal flux
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
RESTRICTOR 1201
RESTRICTOR Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis
input style.
Description
This option allows restrictor coefficients and associated pump pressures to be input. Nonuniform
restrictors or pump pressures can be obtained via the URESTR user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-5 1st A Enter the word RESTRICTOR.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number data blocks used to input the restrictor coefficient data (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input of restrictor data. Default to unit 5, unless
the INPUT TAPE parameter has been used.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered in pairs, one pair for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Face identification. Same as for the FLUX user subroutine. See Marc
6-15 2nd F Reference value of restrictor coefficient.
16-25 3rd F Reference value of pump pressure (reference values can be modified by
the URESTR user subroutine).
4th data block
Enter a list of elements for which restrictor data as defined in data block
3 is applied.
Main Index
1202 CONTROL (Hydrodynamic)
Define Maximum Number of Increments for Bearing Analysis
CONTROL Define Maximum Number of Increments for Bearing Analysis

(Hydrodynamic)
Description
This option allows you to input the maximum number of increments in a hydrodynamic bearing analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of bearing increments in this run. Default is 4.
3rd data block
Not used. Enter a blank data line.
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) 1203
Define Lubricant Material Properties
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Define Lubricant Material Properties

Hydrodynamic)
Description
This option is used to define the lubricant material properties for all of the elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of lubricant material properties to be
input (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of data. Defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 6 should be entered as pairs, one for each distinct data block.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1,2,3, etc.) for cross-reference to the
material data base.
26-37 6th A Enter the material name to cross-reference with material data base.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the reference value of the viscosity.
11-20 2nd F Enter the value of the cavitation pressure.
21-30 3rd F Enter the reference value of the mass density of the lubricant.
Main Index
1204 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)
Format
Data
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for viscosity.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for cavitation pressure.
• 6th data block
1-80 Enter element data set for which the properties specified above are
applied.
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic) 1205
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic) Define Lubricant Material Properties
input style.
Description
This option is used to define the lubricant material properties for all of the elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of distinct sets of lubricant material properties to be
input (optional).
For temperature dependent properties, these are values corresponding to
the first (lowest temperature) breakpoint (see TEMPERATURE EFFECTS
option). A temperature dependent property is undefined below its lowest
breakpoint.
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks should be entered as pairs, one for each distinct data block.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1,2,3, etc.) for cross-reference to
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the reference temperature value of the viscosity.
11-20 2nd F Enter the value of the cavitation pressure.
21-30 3rd F Enter the reference value of the mass density of the lubricant.
5th data block
Enter element data set for which the properties as specified in data block
3 applies.
Main Index
1206 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic)
Define Effect of Temperature in Bearing Analysis
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS Define Effect of Temperature in Bearing Analysis

(Hydrodynamic)
Description
This option defines the variation of material property (viscosity) temperature. The values read in through
the ISOTROPIC option are those at the lowest temperature specified. Properties are not defined below
the lowest temperature. The temperature dependency can be entered using one of the following two
options:
Data points must be given in ascending order of temperature. This option is flagged by
entering the word DATA on the 1st data line.
In hydrodynamic bearing analyses, the temperature is defined as the second state variable via the INITIAL
STATE and CHANGE STATE options.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
For option A, use data blocks 2a and 3a.
For option B, use data blocks 2b and 3b.
Option A
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of slopes of viscosity versus temperature curve.
31-35 3rd I Material type identification (1,2,3,...) for cross-reference to the
ISOTROPIC option.
Main Index
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic) 1207
Format
Data
3a data block
Viscosity variation. Number of data lines as given on data block 2a, first field.
1-15 1st F Slope of viscosity versus temperature curve.
16-30 F Temperature above which slope becomes operative.
Option B
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points on the viscosity versus temperature curve.
31-35 3rd I Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to the
ISOTROPIC option.
3b data block
Viscosity variation. Number of data lines as given on data block 2b, first field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the viscosity.
Note: Since in bearing analysis no incrementation is performed, the
value of the viscosity is always taken at the current temperature.
No averaging is performed.
Main Index
1208 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic)
Main Index
Acoustic Analysis
Chapt Acoustic Analysis

er 3: Marc has two procedures for performing acoustic analysis. One calculates the pressure distribution in a
Mode cavity with rigid reflecting surfaces and the other for when the surfaces are deformable. In the first
procedure, an eigenvalue analysis is performed, and then modal superposition is used to obtain the
l transient response. In the second procedure a harmonic analysis is performed.
Defini This section describes the data required for an acoustic analysis where the pressure distribution in a cavity
with reflecting surfaces is calculated. For acoustic structural problems, the acoustive and structural
tion regions are modeled as separate bodies, and the CONTACT option is used to apply the interface boundary
Optio conditions between the two regions. The fluid in the cavity is treated as an inviscid compressible fluid.
ns
Main Index
1210 FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Fixed Pressure
Description
This data defines a potential fixed pressure boundary condition. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the pressure, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of nodal numbers or a list of
geometric entities. This boundary condition is activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or
The FORCDF user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter frequency
dependent boundary conditions in a harmonic acoustic analysis.
Unless shell elements are used, there is only one pressure degree of freedom per node in a
diffusion analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FIXED PRESS.
2nd data block
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines are required for this
boundary condition.
Main Index
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1211
Format
Data
will be referenced by the LOADCASE model or history definition option.
If a real pressure is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 are used.
If a complex harmonic pressure is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or the
magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
1-10 1st E Prescribed pressure for first degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed pressure for second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
21-30 3rd E Prescribed pressure for third degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex boundary condition.
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of pressure or the phase of the first
11-20 2nd E Prescribed imaginary component of pressure or the phase of the second
21-30 3rd E Prescribed imaginary component of pressure or the phase of the third
of freedom listed.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second degree
of freedom listed.
of freedom listed.
8th data block
Main Index
1212 FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
Format
Data
9th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
10th data block
9th data block.
Main Index
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic) 1213
Define Nodal Fixed Pressure
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic) Define Nodal Fixed Pressure
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed pressure that each node must take during the first and subsequent
increments, unless it is further modified using the PRESS CHANGE option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the pressure and a list of nodal numbers, or by the input of boundary conditions
generated during mesh generation (MESH2D).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words FIXED PRESSURE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of boundary condition blocks to be read (optional).
are required in this option block.
Enter 1 for excitation boundary conditions for harmonic analysis.
11-15 3rd I Unit number used for MESH2D option. Note that the boundary conditions
are stored after the connectivity and coordinate data on this file, so that the
model definition options must be arranged accordingly.
Enter 1 if harmonic boundary condition is input as magnitude and phase.
If blank, real and imaginary values are given.
For each set of boundary conditions, use the 3a and 4a data blocks, or the 3b, 4b, and 5b data blocks.
For analyses which do not include heat transfer shell elements, use the 3a and 4a data blocks.
3a data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed nodal pressure.
4a data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above pressure is applied. 3b, 4b and
5b data blocks for analyses which include heat transfer shell elements.
Main Index
1214 FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic)
Define Nodal Fixed Pressure
Format
Data
3b data block
1-10 1st E Prescribed pressure for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed pressure for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
21-30 3rd E Prescribed pressure for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal degrees of freedom.
4b data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed pressures
are given.
5b data block
Main Index
Define Distributed Sources
DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Distributed Sources
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) sources to be specified. Distributed sources are
converted to consistent nodal sources by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface source on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or
the TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent sources.
Note: If a distributed source is applied on the bottom of a shell, the source is applied to the highest
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST SOURCES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of distributed sources to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of distributed source data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
boundary condition.
Main Index
1216 DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed sources.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the distributed source.
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of source or phase angle.
8th data block
1: Normal source (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal source (top surface for shells)
9th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
10th data block
9th data block.
Main Index
1218 DIST SOURCES (Acoustic - Model Definition)
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic - Model Definition) Define Distributed Sources
input style.
Description
This option allows incrementally distributed (surface and volumetric) sources to be specified in an
acoustic analysis. Distributed sources are converted to consistent nodal sources by Marc. Note that for a
given element type, there is an established convention for the application of surface source on a particular
face. The FLUX user subroutine can be used to input time and spatial dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
DATA
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST SOURCES.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of distributed source data, defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each set of distributed sources.
3rd data block
6-15 2nd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed sources.
16-20 3rd I Source index (optional). (Source index is to be used in the FLUX
user subroutine.)
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed sources.
Main Index
Define Point Source
POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Point Source
Description
This option allows total nodal point source to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent source. Either the FORCDF user
subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used for frequency dependent source loads in a
complex harmonic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT SOURCE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of point source to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point source data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
21-25 5th I Enter a 1 if first point source is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of
Main Index
1220 POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
Define Point Source
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of point source.
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point source for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point source for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for point source.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for point source for second degree of freedom (Heat transfer
11-15 3rd I Table ID for point source for third degree of freedom (Heat transfer shell
elements only).
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of point source or phase.
block, 1st field.
8th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
Define Point Source
Format
Data
9th data block
8th data block.
Main Index
1222 POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - Model Definition)
Define Point Sources
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - Model Definition) Define Point Sources
input style.
Description
This option allows incremental nodal point sources to be specified in an acoustic analysis. The FORCDT
user subroutine can be used for the time dependent sources. Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes
with point sources on the DIST LOADS parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 A Enter the words POINT SOURCE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of point sources to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 is excitation boundary conditions for harmonic analysis.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if harmonic boundary condition is input magnitude and phase.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each set of distributed sources.
3rd data block
1-10 F Magnitude of incremental point source.
11-20 F Magnitude of point source for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer
21-30 F Magnitude of point source for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
4th data block
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1223
Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity

Acoustic)
Description
This option allows you to define properties for the fluid/gas in the acoustic cavity. You can also associate
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Data blocks 3 through 6 should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data block.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Bulk modulus.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for bulk modulus.
6th data block
Main Index
1224 ISOTROPIC (Acoustic)
Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity
ISOTROPIC (Acoustic) Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define properties for the fluid/gas in the acoustic cavity. You can also associate
Note: For coupled-structural acoustic analysis or for including fluid drag, you must use
ACOUSTIC model definition option to define the properties of the acoustic media.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data block.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Bulk modulus.
5th data block
Main Index
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1225
Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis
Acoustic)
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for an acoustic medium (fluid).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ACOUSTIC
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of acoustic material data to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3 to 6 are repeated as a set, once for each set of acoustic material.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Fluid bulk modulus.
11-20 2nd F Fluid drag (only used for acoustic-solid coupled harmonic analysis).
21-30 3rd F Mass density of fluid.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for fluid bulk modulus.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for fluid drag.
6th data block
Main Index
1226 ACOUSTIC
Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis
ACOUSTIC Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for an acoustic medium (fluid).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ACOUSTIC
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of acoustic material data to follow (optional).
Data blocks 3 through 5 are repeated as a set, once for each set of acoustic material.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Fluid bulk modulus.
11-20 2nd F Fluid drag (only used for acoustic-solid coupled harmonic analysis).
21-30 3rd F Mass density of fluid.
5th data block
Main Index
Chapt Electrostatic Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for electrostatic
Mode problems. The boundary conditions discussed in this section are also used for coupled electrostatic-
structural problems. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC options are used to define dielectric constants
l in electrostatic analysis. A steady-state solution can be obtained in one increment using the STEADY
STATE option. In addition, the FLUX user subroutine can be used for variable distributions of charges;
Defini the UEPS user subroutine can be used for the anisotropic dielectric constants.
tion
Optio
ns
Main Index
1228 FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
Define Fixed Potential
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential
Description
This option defines the fixed potential that each node must take. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. Note that unless heat
specify it.
The prescribed potential is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
LOADCASE history definition.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words FIXED EL-POT.
2nd data block
3a data block
condition.
26-30 6th I Enter a 1 if first prescribed potential entered is to be applied for all degrees
Main Index
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1229
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed potential for first degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
11-20 2nd F Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
21-30 3rd F Prescribed potential for third degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
freedom.)
5th data block
6th data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed potentials
are given.
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
1230 FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) 1231
Define Fixed Nodal Potential
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) Define Fixed Nodal Potential
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed potential that each node must take during the first and subsequent
increments. The boundary conditions are specified either by giving the potential and a list of nodal
numbers, or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation (MESH2D).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words FIXED EL-POT.
2nd data block
Data blocks 3a and 4a are for analyses which do not include shell elements.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed nodal potential.
4a data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above potential is applied.
Data blocks 3b, 4b, and 5b are for analyses which include shell elements.
3b data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed potential for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
11-20 1st F Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
21-30 2nd F Prescribed potential for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
of freedom.)
Main Index
1232 FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic)
Format
Data
4b data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed potential
is given.
5b data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above fixed potential conditions
are applied.
Main Index
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential
Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. Note that unless heat
specify it.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words FIXED POTENTIAL.
2nd data block
3a data block
Enter 1 if the FORCDT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
26-30 6th I Enter a 1 if first prescribed potential entered is to be applied for all degrees
Main Index
1234 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
Format
Data
4th data
block
freedom.)
5th data block
6th data block
are given.
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
1236 FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic) Define Fixed Nodal Potential
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
4a data block
3b data block
11-20 1st F Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
21-30 2nd F Prescribed potential for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
of freedom.)
Main Index
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic) 1237
Format
Data
Entry Entry
4b data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed potential
is given.
5b data block
are applied.
Main Index
1238 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic)
Define Distributed Charges
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Define Distributed Charges

Electrosatatic)
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) charges to be specified. Distributed charges are
converted to consistent nodal charges by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface flux on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent charges.
The prescribed charge is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
Note: If a distributed charge is applied on the bottom of a shell, the charge is applied to the highest
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST CHARGES.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of distributed charges to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of distributed charge data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
boundary condition.
Main Index
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic) 1239
Format
Data
in contact.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed charges.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the distributed charge.
6th data block
1: Normal charge (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal charge (top surface for shells)
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
1240 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic)
Format
Data
8th data block
9th data block.
Main Index
DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic) 1241
DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic) Define Distributed Charges
input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface charge on a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be
used to input spatially dependent charges.
Format
Format
Data
Fixed For Entry Entry
1st data block
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each set of distributed charges.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of distributed charge. See description of
library element in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
6-15 2nd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed charges.
16-20 3rd I Charge index (optional). Charge index is to be used in the FLUX
user subroutine.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed charges.
Main Index
1242 POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
Define Point Charges
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Point Charges
Description
This option allows total nodal point charges to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT CHARGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of point charges to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point charge data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
condition.
21-25 5th I Enter 1 if first point charge is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of a
heat transfer shell.
Main Index
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1243
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of point charge.
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point charge for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point charge for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for point charge.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for point charge for second degree of freedom (Heat transfer
11-15 3rd I Table ID for point flux for third degree of freedom (heat transfer shell
elements only).
1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
1244 POINT CHARGE
Define Nodal Point Charges
POINT CHARGE Define Nodal Point Charges
input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for nonuniform point charges.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point charge for second degree of freedom (shell elements
only).
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point charge for third degree of freedom (shell elements
only).
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal charges are applied.
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1245
Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials
- Electrostatic)
Description
This option allows you to define electrical properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of isotropic material data to follow.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input data file.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.)
4th data block
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for permittivity.
6th data block
Main Index
1246 ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic)
Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define electrical properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of isotropic material data to follow.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input data file.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.)
4th data block
5th data block
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1247
Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials

TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
Description
This option allows you to define electrical properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
Note: Since the material properties in an orthotropic material are independent, it is your
for the elements listed below. (See Marc Volume B: Library Elements, if necessary). No
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to call the UEPS and ORIENT user subroutines.
4th data block
1-10 1st F ε11 Electric permittivity.
11-20 2nd F ε22 Electric permittivity.
Main Index
1248 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F ε33 Electric permittivity.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for ε11.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for ε22.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for ε33.
6th data block
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical) 1249
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical) Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials
input style.
Description
Note: Since the material properties in an orthotropic material are independent, it is your
for the elements listed below. (See Marc Volume B: Library Elements, if necessary). No
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
ORTHO TEMP option.
4th data block
1-10 1st F ε11 Electric permittivity
11-20 2nd F ε22 Electric permittivity
21-30 3rd F ε33 Electric permittivity
5th data block
Main Index
1250 ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical)
Main Index
Piezoelectric Analysis
Chapt Piezoelectric Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of additional material data and boundary conditions applicable to
piezoelectric problems. A piezoelectric analysis is a coupled mechanical-electrostatic analysis. The input
Mode for mechanical material data is done using the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC option
l as described in the section about Material Properties. The PIEZOELECTRIC option is used to define the
piezoelectric coupling matrix and the dielectric constants. The mechanical boundary conditions that can
Defini be applied are similar to what is described in the section about Mechanical Analysis. The electrostatic
tion boundary conditions are described here.
Optio
ns
Main Index
1252 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Fixed Potential
Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces.
The FORCDF user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter nonuniform
frequency dependent boundary conditions in a harmonic analysis.
Note: Currently there are no piezoelectric shell elements, so the degree of freedom is always one.
You must specify it.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of geometric types used to define boundary
condition, default is 1. See 7th and 8th data blocks.
Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutine required for this
boundary condition.
Main Index
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1253
Format
Data
31-63 7th A Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This
label will be referenced by the LOADCASE option.
4th data block
11-20 2nd F Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block
6.
(See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal
degrees of freedom.)
5th data block
Data blocks 6 and 7 are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the first
11-20 2nd E Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the
second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
21-30 3rd E Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the third
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the first
Main Index
1254 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
Format
Data
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the third
8th data block
potentials are given.
1st field.
9th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
10th data block
9th data block.
Main Index
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) 1255
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric - Model Define Fixed Nodal Potential

Definition)
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed potential that each specified node must take during the first and subsequent
increments, unless it will be modified using the POTENTIAL CHANGE option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3a data block
4a data block
3b data block
NOTE: Currently, there are no piezoelectric shell elements, but it is
possible to use mechanical shell elements in a piezoelectric analysis.
4b data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1.
5b data block
are applied.
Main Index
1256 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

Piezoelectric)
Description
TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent charges.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this boundary condition.
Main Index
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1257
Format
Data
in contact.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the distributed charges.
5th data block
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of the distributed charge or the phase.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for imaginary component of the distributed charge or the
phase.
8th data block
1st field.
9th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
Main Index
1258 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
Format
Data
10: Polysurface IDs
10th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) 1259
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) Define Distributed Charges
input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface charge on a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be
used to input spatially dependent charges.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each set of distributed charges.
3rd data block
16-20 3rd I Charge index (optional). Charge index is to be used in the FLUX
user subroutine.
4th data block
Main Index
1260 POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Point Charges
Description
This option allows total nodal point charges to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent charge.
The FORCDF user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter nonuniform
frequency dependent boundary conditions in a harmonic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
Main Index
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1261
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Enter a 1 if first point charge is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of
4th data block
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for point charge.
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of point charge or phase.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for imaginary component of point charge or phase.
1st field.
8th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
9th data block
8th data block.
Main Index
1262 POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)Define Nodal Point Charges
input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for nonuniform point charges.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each set of point charges.
3rd data block
4th data block
Main Index
Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric Analysis
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric Analysis

Input - Piezoelectric)
Description
This option allows you to specify the coupled electric-mechanical (stress based or strain based) properties
eijk, and the electric properties εi for piezoelectric material. A description of the piezoelectric capabilities
is included in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Note: In the current release, the table IDs are not used. All piezoelectric properties are constant.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PIEZOELECTRIC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of piezoelectric material data to follow
(optional).
Data blocks 3 through 12 are repeated as a set; once for each set of piezoelectric material to be input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1,2,3,etc) for cross-reference to the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC option.
6-10 2nd I Flag to indicate if the piezoelectric coupling matrix and the dielectric
matrix is stress based or strain based. Enter 0 for stress based, and a 1 for
strain based data.
4th data block
1-10 1st F e111
11-20 2nd F e221
21-30 3rd F e331
Main Index
1264 PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
Format
Data
31-40 4th F e121
41-50 5th F e231
51-60 6th F e131
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for e111
6-10 2nd I Table ID for e221
11-15 3rd I Table ID for e331
16-20 4th I Table ID for e121
6th data block
1-10 1st F e112
11-20 2nd F e222
21-30 3rd F e332
31-40 4th F e122
41-50 5th F e232
51-60 6th F e132
7th data block
8th data block
1-10 1st F e113
11-20 2nd F e223
21-30 3rd F e333
31-40 4th F e123
Main Index
Format
Data
41-50 5th F e233
51-60 6th F e133
9th data block
10th data block
11th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for ε11 Electric permittivity.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for ε22 Electric permittivity.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for ε33 Electric permittivity.
12th data block
Main Index
1266 PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric Analysis

Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This option allows you to specify the coupled electric-mechanical (stress based or strain based) properties
eijk, and the electric properties εi for piezoelectric material. A description of the piezoelectric capabilities
is included in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PIEZOELECTRIC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of piezoelectric material data to follow
(optional).
Data blocks 3 through 8 are repeated as a set; once for each set of piezoelectric material to be input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1,2,3,etc) for cross-reference to the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC option.
6-10 2nd I Flag to indicate if the piezoelectric coupling matrix and the dielectric
matrix is stress based or strain based. Enter 0 for stress based, and a 1 for
strain based data.
4th data block
1-10 1st F e111
11-20 2nd F e221
21-30 3rd F e331
31-40 4th F e121
41-50 5th F e231
51-60 6th F e131
Main Index
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) 1267
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st F e112
11-20 2nd F e222
21-30 3rd F e332
31-40 4th F e122
41-50 5th F e232
51-60 6th F e132
6th data block
1-10 1st F e113
11-20 2nd F e223
21-30 3rd F e333
31-40 4th F e123
41-50 5th F e233
51-60 6th F e133
7th data block
8th data block
Main Index
1268 PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
Main Index
Chapt Magnetostatic Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for magnetostatic
problems. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC options are used to define magnetic permeability in
Mode magnetostatic analysis. The variation of magnetic permeability with either magnetic field density or
l magnetic field vector can be prescribed by the B-H RELATION option where the magnetic field intensity
(H) is a function of the magnetic induction (B) with B being the independent variable. This variation of
Defini the magnetic permeability can also be described using the table driven option. Then, either the magnetic
tion induction (B) or the magnetic field intensity (H) can be chosen as the independent variable. A steady state
solution can be obtained in one increment using the STEADY STATE option. In addition, the FLUX user
Optio subroutine can be used for variable distributions of currents; the UMU user subroutine can be used for
anisotropic magnetic permeabilities.
ns
Main Index
1270 FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Fixed Potential
Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. In 2-D magnetostatic
analysis, a scalar potential is used; hence, only one degree of freedom. In 3-D magnetostatic analysis, a
vector potential is used.
The fixed potential is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-19 1st A Enter the words FIXED MG-POT.
2nd data block
3th data block
condition.
Main Index
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1271
Format
Data
4th data block
of freedom.)
5th data block
6th data block
are given.
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
1272 FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic) 1273
Define Nodal Fixed Potential
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of boundary condition data blocks to be read (optional).
Data blocks 3a and 4a are used for analyses which are planar or axisymmetric.
3a data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed potential φ.
4a data block
Data blocks 3b, 4b, and 5b are used for analyses which include solid brick or shell elements.
Main Index
1274 FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic)
Format
Data
3b data block
11-20 2nd F Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
21-30 3rd F Prescribed potential for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
of freedom.)
4b data block
are given.
5b data block
Main Index
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Define Fixed Potential

Magnetostatic)
Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. In 2-D magnetostatic
analysis, a scalar potential is used; hence, only one degree of freedom. In 3-D magnetostatic analysis, a
vector potential is used.
The fixed potential is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3th data block
condition.
Main Index
1276 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
Format
Data
4th data block
of freedom.)
5th data block
6th data block
are given.
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
1278 FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of boundary condition data blocks to be read (optional).
Data blocks 3a and 4a are used for analyses which are planar or axisymmetric.
3a data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed potential φ.
4a data block
Data blocks 3b, 4b, and 5b are used for analyses which include solid brick or shell elements.
Main Index
FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic) 1279
Format
Data
3b data block
11-20 2nd F Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
21-30 3rd F Prescribed potential for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
of freedom.)
4b data block
are given.
5b data block
Main Index
1280 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Define Distributed Currents

Magnetostatic)
Description
convention for the application of surface current on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine(2-
D), the FORCEM user subroutine (3-D), or the TABLE model definition option can be used to input time
and spatial dependent currents.
history definition.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FLUX (2-D) or the FORCEM (3-D) user subroutine is
required for this boundary condition.
in contact.
Main Index
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1281
Format
Data
4th data block
For load type 106 or 107, enter the magnitude of this type of distributed
current in the first coordinate direction.
11-20 2nd F For load type 106 or 107, enter the magnitude of this type if distributed
current in the second coordinate direction.
21-30 3rd F For load type 106 or 107, enter the magnitude of this type of distributed
current in the third coordinate direction.
5th data block
6th data block
1: Normal current
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
1282 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Current
input style.
Description
used to input spatially dependent current.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
in Marc Volume B: Element LIbrary.
6-15 2nd E Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current.
16-20 3rd I Current index (current index is to be used in the FLUX user subroutine).
4th data block
Main Index
1284 POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Define Nodal Point Current

Magnetostatic)
Description
This option allows total nodal point currents to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for spatially dependent or time dependent currents.
The point current is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point current data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
boundary condition.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of point current for first degree of freedom.
Main Index
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1285
Format
Data
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point current for second degree of freedom
(3-D elements only).
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point current for third degree of freedom
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for point current for first degree of freedom.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for point current for second degree of freedom
11-15 3rd I Table ID for point current for third degree of freedom (3-D elements only).
1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
1286 POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic)
POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Point Current
input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point current to be specified.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number of input of point current data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of point current.
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point current for second degree of freedom
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point current for third degree of freedom
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal currents are applied.
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1287
Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials
- Magnetostatic)
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic properties for isotropic materials. This can be done by entering
one of the following properties:
Method Required Data

1 Permeability possibly controlled by a table.
2 Inverse permeability possibly controlled by a table.
3 H-B relation where a table has to be given with B as the independent variable and H as the
dependent variable.
4 B-H relation where a table has to be given with H as the independent variable and B as the
dependent variable.
You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Format
1st data block

2nd data block
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-reference to B-H
RELATION option.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to call the UMU and ORIENT user subroutines.
Main Index
1288 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
11-15 3rd I Input Mode:

Enter 0 for Marc 2005 style or older with table driven input.
Enter 1 if permeability is defined.
Enter 2 if inverse permeability is defined.
Enter 3 if H-B relation with B as the independent variable is defined; a
table is also required.
Enter 4 if B-H relation with H as the independent variable is defined; a
table is also required.
4th data block
1-10 1st F If input mode = 0 or 1, enter permeability.
If input mode = 2, enter inverse permeability.
If input mode = 3, enter scale factor for H-B relation.
If input mode = 4, enter scale factor for B-H relation.
11-20 2nd F If input mode = 0, enter inverse permeability.
5th data block
1-5 1st I If input mode = 0 or 1, enter table ID for permeability.
If input mode = 2, enter table ID inverse permeability.
If input mode = 3, enter table ID for B-H relation; H is the
independent variable.
If input mode = 4, enter table ID for H-B relation; B is the
independent variable.
6-10 2nd I If input mode = 0, enter table ID inverse permeability.
6th data block
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) 1289
ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic properties for isotropic materials. You can also associate these
material properties with a list of element numbers. Note that either the permeability or its inverse can be
entered.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
B-H RELATION option.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Permeability.
11-20 2nd F Inverse permeability.
5th data block
Main Index
1290 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
Define Magnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Magnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials

Input - Magnetostatic)
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic properties for an orthotropic material. This can be done by
entering one of the following properties in each direction:
Method Required Data

1 Permeability possibly controlled by a table.
2 Inverse permeability possibly controlled by a table.
3 H-B relation where a table has to be given with B as the independent variable and H as the
dependent variable.
4 B-H relation where a table has to be given with H as the independent variable and B as the
dependent variable.
You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Main Index
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Input Mode (1st component):
Enter 1 for permeability.
Enter 2 for inverse permeability
Enter 3 for H-B relation with B as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
Enter 4 for B-H relation with H as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
16-20 4th I Input Mode (2nd component):
Enter 2 for inverse permeability.
also required.
Enter 4 for B-H relation with H as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
21-25 5th I Input Mode (3rd component):
Enter 2 for inverse permeability.
also required.
Enter 4 for B-H relation with H as the independent variable; a table is also
required.
temperature dependent properties.
4a data block
Use if the input modes for all components are zero.
1-10 1st F μ11 Magnetic permeability.
11-20 2nd F μ22 Magnetic permeability.
Main Index
1292 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F μ33 Magnetic permeability.
31-40 4th F 1/μ11 Inverse magnetic permeability.
4b data block
Use if the input modes are not zero.
1-10 1st F Data for 1st component:
Method 1; enter μ11 (magnetic permeability).
Method 2; enter 1/μ11 (inverse magnetic permeability).
Method 3; enter scale factor for H-B relation.
Method 4; enter scale factor for B-H relation.
11-20 2nd F Data for 2nd component:
Method 1; enter μ22 (Magnetic permeability).
21-30 3rd F Data for 3rd component:
Method 1; enter μ33 (magnetic permeability).
5a data block
Use if the input modes for all components are zero.
1-5 1st I Table ID for μ11
6-10 2nd I Table ID for μ22.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for μ33.
16-20 4th I Table ID for 1/μ11.
Main Index
Format
Data
5b data block
Use if the input modes are not zero.
1-5 1st I Table IDs for 1st component:
Method 1; table ID for μ11.
Method 2; table ID for 1/μ11.
Method 3; table ID for H-B relation; B is the independent variable.
Method 4; table ID for B-H relation; H is the independent variable.
6-10 2nd I Table IDs for 2nd component:
Method 2; table ID for 1/μ22.
11-15 3rd I Table IDs for 3rd component:
Method 2; table ID for 1/μ33
6th data block
Main Index
1294 ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)
ORTHOTROPIC Define Magnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials

(Magnetostatic)
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
these material properties with a list of element numbers. Note that either the permeability or the inverse
permittivity can be entered.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
RELATION option.
4th data block
1-10 1st F μ11 Magnetic permeability
11-20 2nd F μ22 Magnetic permeability
21-30 3rd F μ33 Magnetic permeability
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) 1295
Format
Data
31-40 4th F 1/μ11 Inverse magnetic permeability
5th data block
Main Index
1296 B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic)
Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear Magnetic Material
B-H RELATION Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear Magnetic Material

(Magnetostatic)
Description
This option can be used to specify the magnetization curve(s) for nonlinear isotropic or orthotropic
material. Depending on the material type, a different method of entering data must be used:
isotropic material: Enter one set of data points (|H|, |B|) representing the magnitude of H as a
(OPTION A) function of the magnitude of B. For |H| = 0 the value of |B| should be zero. If
not, the corresponding offset of the curve is disregarded.
orthotropic material: For every component of H, a set of data points (H,B) is entered, relating this
(OPTION B) component of H to the corresponding component of B. A component of the
remanence vector can be specified by choosing a nonzero value of B for H = 0.
Note: In either cases the curve(s) represented by the data sets must be monotone and uniquely
defined. Furthermore, the data points must be given in ascending order of B.
An alternative way of specifying the magnetization curve(s) is to supply the reluctivity 1/μ in the UMU
user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words B-H RELATION.
For option A, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, and 5a. For option B, use data blocks 2b, 3b, 4b, and 5b.
Option A — Isotropic Behavior
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points of |H|-|B| curve.
6-10 2nd I Not used; 0.
11-15 3rd I Not used; 0.
16-20 4th I Not used; 0.
Main Index
B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic) 1297
Format
Data
31-35 7th I Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to
ISOTROPIC option.
36-40 8th I Logical unit number for input of this set of data. Defaults to data blocks.
3a data block
|H| - |B| variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, first field.
1-15 1st F Enter value of |H|.
16-30 2nd F Enter value of |B|.
Option B — Orthotropic Behavior
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points of H1 - B1 curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of data points of H2 - B2 curve.
11-15 3rdt I Number of data points of H3 - B3 curve.
ORTHOTROPIC option.
3b data block
H1 - B1 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, first field.
1-15 1st F Enter value of H1.
16-30 2nd F Enter value of B1.
4b data block
H2 - B2 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, second field.
5b data block
H3 - B3 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, third field.
Main Index
1298 PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
Define Permanent Magnet
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet
Description
This option provides various ways of defining a permanent magnet in parts of the model. The default is
that no permanent magnets are present.
You need to enter the remanence vector Br, which is the product of the magnet vector M0 and the
permeability of the vacuum μ0.
The permanent magnet data is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
LOADCASE model definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PERMANENT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data to be entered (optional)
Data blocks 3 through 7 are repeated once for each data set.
3rd data block
Main Index
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1299
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the first component of remanence vector.
11-20 2nd F Enter the second component of remanence vector.
21-30 3rd F Enter the third component of remanence vector.
5th data block
1-5 1st F Table ID associated with the first component of remanence vector.
6-10 2nd F Table ID associated with the second component of remanence vector.
11-15 3rd F Table ID associated with the third component of remanence vector.
Data blocks 6 and 7 are repeated for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data block, 1st field.
6th data
block
1 – Element IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
1300 PERMANENT (Magnetostatic)
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet
input style.
Description
You need to enter the remanence vector Br, which is the product of the magnet vector M0 and the
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to initialize the permanent magnet via data blocks 3 and 4 below.
See also the third field on this block.
Enter 4 to initialize the permanent magnet via data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8
given below. See also the third field on this block.
11-15 3rd I This entry gives the number of pairs of bocks in data blocks 3 and 4 or in
data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 used to input the permanent magnet.
3rd data block
Main Index
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic) 1301
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F First component of remanence vector.
11-20 2nd F Second component of remanence vector.
21-30 3rd F Third component of remanence vector.
5th data block
6th data block
7th data block
This data block is not necessary if CENTROID parameter is used.
Enter a list of integration points to which the above remanence is applied.
8th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above remanence is applied.
Main Index
1302 CONTROL (Magnetostatic)
Control for Magnetostatic Analysis
CONTROL (Magnetostatic) Control for Magnetostatic Analysis
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and accuracy for
magnetostatic analysis. This option is only required if the B-H RELATION option is used to enter a
nonlinear permeability.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of steps in this run. Default is 9999.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles during an increment. Default is 3.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Maximum allowed relative error in residual current.
11-20 2nd F Maximum allowed absolute error in residual current.
Main Index
Electromagnetic Analysis
Chapt Electromagnetic Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for electromagnetic
problems. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC options are used to define magnetic permeability,
Mode electrical permittivity, conductivity and susceptibility in the electromagnetic analysis. In addition, the
l FORCEM user subroutine can be used for variable distributions of currents and charges.
Defini Electromagnetic analysis can be performed using either a harmonic or transient approach. If the harmonic
approach is used, the steady state sinusoidal result is obtained. Using this method, the excitation
tion frequency is given using the HARMONIC option. If the transient approach is used, the time step is defined
Optio using the DYNAMIC CHANGE option.
ns
Main Index
1304 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Define Fixed Potential

Electromagnetic)
Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. In electromagnetic
analysis, the potential consists of vector and scalar potentials, the first three of which are associated with
the magnetic vector potential, and the fourth degree of freedom with the scalar potential.
The FORCDF user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter frequency
dependent boundary conditions in a harmonic electromagnetic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3a data block
boundary condition.
Main Index
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1305
Format
Data
4th data block
31-40 4th F Prescribed potential for fourth degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
5th data block
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the fourth degree of freedom listed.
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the first
11-20 2nd E Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the second
21-30 3rd E Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the third
31-40 4th E Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the fourth
of freedom listed.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second degree
of freedom listed.
Main Index
1306 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
Format
Data
of freedom listed.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the fourth degree
of freedom listed.
8th data block
are given.
9th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
14: Element-Faces ID - Marc Mentat convention
10th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic) 1307
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential
input style.
Description
numbers, or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation (MESH2D). In
electromagnetic analysis, the potential consists of vector and scalar potentials, the first three of which are
associated with the magnetic vector potential, and the fourth degree of freedom with the scalar potential.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
mesh generation (MESH2D). If this field is activated, no further blocks
11-15 3rd I Unit number used for the MESH2D option. Note that the boundary
conditions are stored after the connectivity and coordinate data on this
file, so that the model definition options must be arranged accordingly.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are repeated for each set.
3rd data block
31-40 4th F Prescribed potential for fourth degree of freedom list in data block 4.
Main Index
1308 FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic)
Format
Data
4th data block
are given.
5th data block
Main Index
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Define Distributed Currents

Electromagnetic)
Description
convention for the application of surface current on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or
the TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent currents.
history definition.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
Main Index
1310 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
Format
Data
in contact.
4th data block
5th data block
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of the distributed current or the phase.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for imaginary component of the distributed current or
the phase.
8th data block
1: Normal current
1st field.
9th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
10th data block
9th data block.
Main Index
1312 DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - Model Definition)
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - Model Define Distributed Currents

Definition)
input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface current of a particular face. The FORCEM user subroutine can
be used to input spatially dependent current.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
16-20 3rd I Current index (current index is to be used in the FORCEM
user subroutine).
4th data block
Main Index

Electromagnetic)
Description
TABLE model definition option can be used to input time, frequency, and spatial dependent charges.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
Main Index
1314 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
Format
Data
in contact.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the distributed charges.
5th data block
1-10 1st E Prescribed imaginary component of the distributed charge or the phase.
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for imaginary component of the distributed charge or
the phase.
8th data block
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
Main Index
Format
Data
10: Polysurface IDs
10th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
1316 DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - Model Definition)
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - Model Define Distributed Charges

Definition)
input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface charge on a particular face. The FORCEM user subroutine can
be used to input spatially dependent charges.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST CHARGE.
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
16-20 3rd I Charge index (optional). Charge index is to be used in the FORCEM user
subroutine.
4th data block
Main Index
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1317
Define Point Fluxes
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Define Point Fluxes

Electromagnetic)
Description
This option allows total nodal point fluxes to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent fluxes. The FORCDF user subroutine
or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter frequency dependent boundary conditions in
a harmonic electromagnetic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point flux data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutine required for this
boundary condition.
Main Index
1318 POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
Define Point Fluxes
Format
Data
4th data block
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point current for second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point current for third degree of freedom.
31-40 4th F Magnitude of point current for fourth degree of freedom.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for point current for first degree of freedom.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for point current for second degree of freedom.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for point current for third degree of freedom.
16-20 4th I Table ID for point charge.
1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE 1319
Define Nodal Point Currents and Point Charges
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE Define Nodal Point Currents and Point Charges
input style.
Description
This option allows nodal point currents and point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine
can be used for nonuniform loading conditions.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT CURRENT-CHARGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sets of point current and charge to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point current and charge data;
defaults to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
31-40 4th F Nodal charge.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above point current-charge applies.
Main Index
1320 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
Define Electromagnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Electromagnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials

Input - Electromagnetic)
Description
This option allows you to define electromagnetic properties for an isotropic material. You can also
associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Data blocks 3 through 6 should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
4th data block
Necessary only in coupled electromagnetic-thermal analysis.
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1321
Format
Data
5th data block
6th data block
1-10 1st F Permeability (μ).
11-20 2nd F Permittivity (ε).
21-30 3rd F Permeability of air.
31-40 4th F Electric conductivity (σ).
7th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for permeability.
6-10 2nd I Table ID for permittivity.
11-15 3rd I Table ID for permeability of air.
16-20 4th I Table ID for electric conductivity.
8th data block
Main Index
1322 ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)
ISOTROPIC Define Electromagnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials

(Electromagnetic)
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define electromagnetic properties for an isotropic material. You can also
associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
RELATION option.
4th data block
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) 1323
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st F Permeability (μ).
11-20 2nd F Permittivity (ε).
21-30 3rd F Permeability of air.
31-40 4th F Electric conductivity (σ).
6th data block
Main Index
1324 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
Define Electromagnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with Define Electromagnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials

TABLE Input -
Electromagnetic)
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Data blocks 4 through 7 are only necessary in coupled electromagnetic-thermal analysis.
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1325
Format
Data
4th data block
5th data block
6th data block
7th data block
11-15 3rd I Table ID for reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
8th data block
31-40 4th F ε11 Permittivity
61-70 7th F Permeability of air
Main Index
1326 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
Format
Data
9th data block
1-10 1st I Table ID for μ11 magnetic permeability
1-20 2nd I Table ID for μ22 magnetic permeability
21-30 3rd I Table ID for μ33 magnetic permeability
31-40 4th I Table ID for ε11 permittivity
61-70 7th I Table ID for permeability of air
10th data block
1-10 F σ11 Electrical Conductivity
11th data block
1-10 I Table ID for σ11 electrical Conductivity
12th data block
Main Index
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) 1327
ORTHOTROPIC Define Electromagnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials

(Electromagnetic)
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Data blocks 3-8 are repeated once for each data set.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to call the UMU, UEPS, and USIGMA user subroutines.
4th data block
Data blocks 4 and 5 are only necessary in coupled electromagnetic-thermal analysis.
Main Index
1328 ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)
Format
Data
5th data block
6th data block
61-70 7th F Permeability of air
7th data block
8th data block
Main Index
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic) 1329
B-H RELATION Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear Magnetic Material

(Electromagnetic)
Description
This option can be used to specify the magnetization curve(s) for nonlinear isotropic or orthotropic
material. Depending on the material type, a different method of entering data must be used:
isotropic material: Enter one set of data points (|H|, |B|) representing the magnitude of H as a
(OPTION A) function of the magnitude of B. For |H| = 0 the value of |B| should be zero. If
not, the corresponding offset of the curve is disregarded.
orthotropic material: For every component of H, a set of data points (H,B) is entered, relating this
(OPTION B) component of H to the corresponding component of B. A component of the
remanence vector can be specified by choosing a nonzero value of B for H = 0
Note: In either case, the curve(s) represented by the data sets must be monotone and uniquely
defined. Furthermore, the data points must be given in ascending order of B.
An alternative way of specifying the magnetization curve(s) is to supply the reluctivity 1/μ in the UMU
user subroutine.
This option is only applicable for transient electromagnetic analysis and is not applicable to
harmonic calculations.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words B-H RELATION.
For option A, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, and 5a. For option B, use data blocks 2b, 3b, 4b, and 5b.
Option A — Isotropic Behavior
2a data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points of |H|-|B| curve.
6-10 2nd I Not used; 0.
11-15 3rd I Not used; 0.
Main Index
1330 B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic)
Format
Data
ISOTROPIC option.
3a data block
|H| - |B| variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, first field.
1-15 1st F Enter value of |H|.
16-30 2nd F Enter value of |B|.
Option B — Orthotropic Behavior
2b data block
1-5 1st I Number of data points of H1 - B1 curve.
6-10 2nd I Number of data points of H2 - B2 curve.
11-15 3rdt I Number of data points of H3 - B3 curve.
ORTHOTROPIC option.
3b data block
H1 - B1 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, first field.
4b data block
H2 - B2 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, second field.
5b data block
H3 - B3 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, third field.
Main Index
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic) 1331
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic) Define Permanent Magnet
input style.
Description
You need to enter the remanence vector Bv, which is the product of the magnet vector M and the
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to initialize the permanent magnet via data blocks 3 and 4 below. See
also the third field on this block.
Enter 4 to initialize the permanent magnet via data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8
given below. See also the third field on this block.
11-15 3rd I This entry gives the number of pairs of blocks in data blocks 3 and 4 or in
data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 used to input the permanent magnet.
3rd data block
21-25 5th I First layer of cross-section point with this value.
26-30 6th I Last layer or cross-section point with this value can only be bigger than 1
Main Index
1332 PERMANENT (Electromagnetic)
Format
Data
4th data block
5th data block
6th data block
7th data block
This data block is not necessary if CENTROID parameter is used.
Enter a list of integration points to which the above remanence is applied.
8th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above remanence is applied.
Main Index
CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic) 1333
Control for Electromagnetostatic Analysis
CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic) Control for Electromagnetostatic Analysis
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and accuracy for magnetostatic
analysis. This option is only required if the B-H RELATION option is used to enter a nonlinear
permeability.
This option is only applicable for transient electromagnetic analysis and is not applicable to
harmonic calculations.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of steps in this run. Default is 9999.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles during an increment. Default is 3.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Maximum allowed relative error in residual current.
11-20 2nd F Maximum allowed absolute error in residual current.
Main Index
1334 CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic)
Control for Electromagnetostatic Analysis
Main Index
Fluid Analysis
Chapt Fluid Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for fluid, fluid-
Mode thermal, fluid-solid and fluid-thermal-solid interaction analyses. The ISOTROPIC option is used to
define the fluid material properties, viscosity, density, and, if necessary, the conductivity and specific
l heat. Non-Newtonian fluid behavior can be defined through the STRAIN RATE option, while temperature
dependent properties are defined through the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option. The boundary
Defini conditions on a fluid can be either defined through the FIXED VELOCITY, or the POINT LOAD, and DIST
tion LOADS options. The POINT LOAD and DIST LOADS options are described in the Mechanical Analysis
section. In a fluid-thermal analysis, the additional boundary conditions are FIXED TEMPERATURE,
Optio POINT FLUX, DIST FLUXES, and FILMS which are defined in the Heat Transfer Analysis section. In a
fluid-solid analysis, the boundary conditions on the solid region are specified using the FIXED DISP,
ns POINT LOAD, DIST LOADS, and FOUNDATION options. Initial conditions in a transient analysis can be
specified using the INITIAL VEL or INITIAL TEMP options.
In Fluid Analysis, data for POINT LOAD and DIST LOADS should be prescribed as total rather than
incremental quantity (as used in Mechanical Analysis). Similarly, POINT FLUX and DIST FLUXES for
Heat Transfer Analysis are also given as total quantity. This specification is to be used consistently for
fluid and/or heat transfer portion of analysis in coupled fluid-solid, fluid-thermal, and fluid-thermal-
solid.
Note the degrees of freedom in an analysis are dependent upon the type of analysis and the procedure
used. This is important when applying boundary conditions in these analyses and is summarized
as follows:
Fluid Parameter 2-D-planar 2-D-axisymmetric 3-D

Fluid only, mixed 10 vx , vy , p vz , vr , p vx , vy , vz , p
Fluid only, penalty 11 vx , vy vz , vr vx , vy , vz
Fluid-thermal, mixed, 12 vx , vy , p, T vz , vr , p, T vx , vy , vz , p, T
strong coupling
Fluid-thermal, penalty, 13 vx , vy , T vx , vr , T vx , vy , vz , T
strong coupling
Fluid-thermal, mixed, 2 vx , v y, p vz , vr , p vx , vy , vz , p
weak coupling
T T T
Fluid-thermal, penalty, 3 vx , vy vz , vr vx , vy , vz
weak coupling
T T T
Fluid-solid, mixed, 40 vx , vy , p vz , vr , p vx , vy , vz
weak coupled
ux , uy uz , ur ux , uy , uz
Fluid-solid, penalty, 41 vx , vy vz , vr vx , vy , vz
weak coupling
Main Index
1336 Chapter 3: Model Definition Options
Fluid Analysis
Fluid Parameter 2-D-planar 2-D-axisymmetric 3-D

Fluid-thermal-solid, 42 vx , vy , p, T vx , vr , p, T vx , vy , vz , p, T
mixed, strong-weak
Fluid-thermal-solid, 43 vx , vy , T vz , vr , T vx , vy , vz , T
penalty, strong-weak
Fluid-thermal-solid, 44 vx , vy , p vz , vr , p vx , vy , vz
mixed, weak-weak
T T T
Fluid-thermal-solid, 45 v x , vy vz , vr vx , vy , vz
penalty, weak-weak
T T T
The fluid region cannot contain any truss, beams, membranes, shells, generalized plain strain,
axisymmetric elements with twist or any semi-infinite elements. Element types 155-157 and the higher
order tetrahedral elements are also not supported. For a complete list of supported elements, see Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 6: Nonstructural and Coupled Procedure Library,
Element Types.
Main Index
REGION (Fluid) 1337
Define Elements in a Region
REGION (Fluid) Define Elements in a Region
Description
This option allows you to define which elements are part of a region. In fluid-solid, or fluid-thermal-solid
analysis, it is necessary to divide the model into different regions depending on whether only a fluid
analysis is performed in an area or a structural analysis is performed. This is used in conjunction with
using the weakly coupled formulations. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for
more details.
This option is also necessary in an acoustic-solid analysis, where you have to define the parts of the model
belonging to the solid and the parts of the model belonging to the acoustic fluid.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word REGION.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of regions.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number for reading data. Defaults to input file.
Repeat data blocks 3 and 4 for region.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the region type:
1 – solid region
3 – fluid or acoustic region
4th data block
Main Index
1338 COUPLING REGION
Define Coupling Regions
COUPLING REGION Define Coupling Regions
Description
This data block defines coupling regions and associates them with boundary condition names.
These boundary conditions are activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history
definition option.
Coupling regions, with the accompanying application programming interface (API), provide an interface
to couple Marc with external numerical solvers such as computational fluid dynamics codes, via user
subroutine programming. A coupling region is that part of the surface or volume of the model where the
interaction with the external solver takes place. A surface region consists of a list of edges or geometric
curves in 2-D and a list of faces or geometric surfaces in 3-D. A volumetric region consists of a list of
elements or contact bodies.
On coupling regions, the basic mechanical and thermal quantities (see Table 3-14, Table 3-15,
Table 3-16, Table 3-17) can be exchanged with an external solver via API calls. The quantities that will
be received from the external solver are applied through appropriate boundary conditions on the coupling
region and must be specified on the 4th data block.
The code coupling interface may also be used to apply complex boundary conditions on certain regions
of the model or to develop dedicated post-processing tools. See Chapter 14 Code Coupling Interface in
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information and Chapter 12 Code Coupling Interface in Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for more information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words COUPLING REGION.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of coupling regions to be read (optional).
6-10 2nd I Unit number to read data. Default is the standard input file.
Data blocks 3 through 6 are repeated for each coupling region.
Main Index
Format
Data
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of quantities that will be prescribed on this region. See
4th data block.
31-63 7th A Enter the unique label associated with this coupling region. This label will
be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.
The 4th data block is repeated for as many quantities as specified in the 3rd data block, 2nd field.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the ID of the prescribed quantity (see tables below). Only quantities
which can be “put” can be selected here. The quantity will be prescribed
through appropriate boundary conditions on the region.
block, 1st field.
5th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
Main Index
1340 COUPLING REGION
Format
Data
6th data block
5th data block.
Table 3-14 Global Quantities

Quantity ID Dimension Description Put Get
1 Scalar Time Step No Yes
2 Scalar Coupling Time Step Yes* No
* Only with the time stepping scheme. If the Coupling Time Step is prescribed on one coupling region, it
will be prescribed on all coupling regions in the model.
Table 3-15 Nodal Quantities*

101 Vector Current Coordinates No Yes
102 Vector Displacement Yes Yes
103 Vector External Force Yes Yes
104 Vector Reaction Force No Yes
112 Vector Displacement (Local) Yes Yes
113 Vector External Force (Local) Yes Yes
114 Vector Reaction Force (Local) No Yes
121 Scalar Displacement X No Yes
122 Scalar Displacement Y No Yes
123 Scalar Displacement Z No Yes
124 Scalar External Force X No Yes
125 Scalar External Force Y No Yes
126 Scalar External Force Z No Yes
127 Scalar Reaction Force X No Yes
128 Scalar Reaction Force Y No Yes
129 Scalar Reaction Force Z No Yes
* All mechanical nodal quantities are defined in the global coordinate system, except those tagged with
“(Local)”. The latter are defined in the local coordinate systems of the nodes, if such coordinate systems
have been defined by the TRANSFORMATION or the COORD SYSTEM model definition option or in
the global system, otherwise.
Main Index
Table 3-15 Nodal Quantities*

161 Scalar Displacement X (Local) Yes Yes
162 Scalar Displacement Y (Local) Yes Yes
163 Scalar Displacement Z (Local) Yes Yes
164 Scalar External Force X (Local) Yes Yes
165 Scalar External Force Y (Local) Yes Yes
166 Scalar External Force Z (Local) Yes Yes
167 Scalar Reaction Force X (Local) No Yes
168 Scalar Reaction Force Y (Local) No Yes
169 Scalar Reaction Force Z (Local) No Yes
201 Scalar Temperature Yes Yes
202 Scalar External Heat Flux Yes Yes
203 Scalar Reaction Heat Flux No Yes
* All mechanical nodal quantities are defined in the global coordinate system, except those tagged with
“(Local)”. The latter are defined in the local coordinate systems of the nodes, if such coordinate systems
have been defined by the TRANSFORMATION or the COORD SYSTEM model definition option or in
the global system, otherwise.
Table 3-16 Edge/Face Quantities

1101 Scalar Total Pressure Yes No
1102 Vector Total Traction Yes No
1201 Scalar Heat Flux Density Yes No
1202 Scalar Film Coefficient Yes No
1203 Scalar Environment Temperature Yes No
Table 3-17 Element Quantities

10101 Vector Volume Load Yes No
10131 Scalar Volume Load X Yes No
10132 Scalar Volume Load Y Yes No
10133 Scalar Volume Load Z Yes No
Main Index
1342 FIXED DISP (Fluid)
FIXED DISP (Fluid) Define Fixed Displacement
input style.
Description
This data defines the fixed displacement that each specified degree of freedom must take during the first
and subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the DISP CHANGE option. The boundary
conditions are specified either by giving the kinematic displacement and a list of degrees of freedom and
a list of nodal numbers or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation
(MESH2D).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
required in this option block.
model definition data must be arranged accordingly.
3rd data block
11-20 2nd E Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data block
4.
A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified. Third data
block is read as 8E10.3.
Main Index
FIXED DISP (Fluid) 1343
Format
Data
4th data block
5th data block
Main Index
1344 FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid)
Define Fixed Velocity
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid) Define Fixed Velocity
Description
This data block defines potential fixed velocity, including the magnitude, degrees of freedom and applied
locations, and associates it with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition is activated or
deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the velocity, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of nodal numbers or
a list of surfaces. The prescribed velocities are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the
element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the
TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, or UTRANFORM options.
The FORCDT user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter nonuniform
time-dependent boundary conditions.
Note: In steady state analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to
remove all rigid body modes.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FIXED VELOCITY.
2nd data block
3rd data block
Enter 1 if the FORCDT user subroutine are required for this boundary
condition.
Main Index
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid) 1345
Format
Data
will be referenced by the LOADCASE history definition option.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data block
8.
A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified.
6th data block
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Main Index
1346 FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid)
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
FIXED VELOCITY 1347
FIXED VELOCITY Define Fixed Velocity
input style.
Description
This data defines the fixed velocity that each specified degree of freedom must take during the first and
subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the VELOCITY CHANGE option in a fluid
analysis. The boundary conditions are specified either by giving the kinematic velocity and a list of
degrees of freedom and a list of nodal numbers or by the input of boundary conditions generated during
mesh generation (MESH2D).
Note: In steady state analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to
remove all rigid body modes.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words FIXED VELOCITY.
2nd data block
required in this option block.
model definition data must be arranged accordingly.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Prescribed velocity for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed velocity for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
21-30 3rd F Prescribed velocity for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
Main Index
1348 FIXED VELOCITY
Format
Data
4th data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed velocities
are prescribed.
5th data block
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid) 1349
Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis
Fluid)
Description
This option is used to define the fluid properties for all of the elements. To define the dependence of these
properties on temperature, use the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS model definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
(optional).
The 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8th data blocks should be entered as pairs, one for each distinct data
block.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1,2,3, etc.).
6-10 2nd A Enter the word FLUID if fluid-solid interaction and this is a fluid region.
4th data block
21-30 3rd F Enter the reference value of the mass density of the fluid.
31-40 4th F Enter the coefficient of volumetric expansion.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Table ID for viscosity.
16-20 4th I Table ID for coefficient of volumetric expansion.
Main Index
1350 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid)
Format
Data
6th data block
Necessary only in a coupled fluid-thermal analysis or a fluid-thermal-solid analysis.
31-40 4th F Reference temperature.
7th data block
8th data block
3 applies.
Main Index
ISOTROPIC (Fluid) 1351
ISOTROPIC (Fluid) Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis
input style.
Description
This option is used to define the fluid properties for all of the elements. To define the dependence of these
properties on temperature, use the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS model definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
(optional).
For temperature dependent properties, these are values corresponding to
the first (lowest temperature) breakpoint (see TEMPERATURE EFFECTS
option). A temperature dependent property is undefined below its lowest
breakpoint.
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks should be entered as pairs, one for each distinct data block.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Material identification number (1,2,3, etc.) for cross-reference to
6-10 2nd A Enter the word FLUID if fluid-solid interaction and this is a fluid region.
4th data block
21-30 3rd F Enter the reference value of the mass density of the fluid.
31-40 4th F Enter the coefficient of volumetric expansion.
Main Index
1352 ISOTROPIC (Fluid)
Format
Data
5th data block
Necessary only in a coupled fluid-thermal analysis or a fluid-thermal-solid analysis.
1-10 1st F Thermal conductivity
21-30 3rd F Mass density (heat transfer analysis)
31-40 4th F Reference temperature.
6th data block
3 applies.
Main Index
Define Strain Rate Dependent Viscosity
STRAIN RATE (Fluid) Define Strain Rate Dependent Viscosity
Description
This option allows the definition of a strain rate dependent viscosity for use in fluid flow problems. It
also allows specification of different non-Newtonian viscosity models. The zero strain rate viscosity is
given on the ISOTROPIC option. This option must be repeated for each different material for which strain
rate data is necessary. The yield stress variation with strain rate is given using the following options:
a. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the viscosity strain rate
curve are given. The strain rate breakpoints should be in ascending order, or
b. The viscosity and stain rate data points lying on the viscosity strain rate curve are input
directly. The data is entered in ascending order of strain rate. This method is flagged by
entering the word DATA on the first data block.
c. Bingham Fluid – enter 3 in the fourth field on the second data block.
d. Fluid in the form of Power Law Relation – enter 4 in the fourth field on the second data block.
e. Fluid in the form of Generalized Power Law Relation – enter 5 in the fourth field on the second
data block.
f. Fluid in the form of Carreau Model - enter 6 in the fourth field on the second data block.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the words STRAIN RATE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I For option A, enter the number of slopes of viscosity versus strain
rate curve.
For option B, enter the number of data points.
For other options, enter 0.
6-10 2nd I Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to
ISOTROPICAlphaList.1+option.
11-15 3rd I Unit number for input of the set of this block. Defaults to blocks.
16-20 4th I Non-Newtonian Viscosity Model type.
Enter 0 for piecewise linear (use data block 3a or 3b).
Enter 3 for Bingham Fluid (use data block 3c).
Main Index
1354 STRAIN RATE (Fluid)
Format
Data
Enter 4 for Power Law Relation (use data block 3d).
Enter 5 for Generalized Power Law Relation (use data block 3e).
Enter 6 for Carreau model (use data block 3f).
3a data block
Data block 3a is used in conjunction with piecewise representations, Option A. The number of blocks
in this series is equal to that given in the first field of data block 2.
1-10 1st F Enter the slope of the viscosity versus strain rate curve.
11-20 2nd F Enter the strain rate value above which the above slope becomes
operational. Note, the first strain rate breakpoint must be zero.
3b data block
Data block 3b is used in conjunction with piecewise representation, Option B.
11-20 2nd F Enter the associated strain rate. Note that the first strain-rate must be zero.
3c data block
Data block 3c is used for Bingham Fluid.
1-10 1st F · · · ·
Enter the value of g (stress; σ i j ′ = μ o γ ij + g γ ij ⁄ γ if σ ≥ g ; γ ij = 0 if σ < g ).
3d data block
Data block 3d is used for Power Law Relation Fluid.
· n – 1·
1-10 1st F Enter the value of K (stress; σi j ′ = μo K ( γ ) γ ij ).
11-20 2nd F Enter the value of N (power; see above equation).

21-30 3rd F Enter the value of μo . (cutoff shear rate; see above equation).
3e data block
Data block 3e is used for Generalized Power Law Relation Fluid.
1-10 1st F Enter the value of K.
11-20 2nd F Enter the value of N.
21-30 3rd F Enter the value of μo .
31-40 4th F Enter the value of A1.

then
Main Index
Format
Data
·
p ow = N + A3 * log ( γ ) + A 4 × T
· pow ·
σ' i j = μ o ⋅ Kγ ⋅ exp ( A 1 * T + A 2 * T 2 )γ ij
3f data block
Data block 3f is used for Carreau Model Fluid.
2 · 2 (n – 1) ⁄ 2
1-10 1st F Enter the value of τ (time constant); μ = μ∞ + ( μ o – μ∞ ) ( 1 + τ γ ) ).
11-20 2nd F Enter the value of n (power; see above equation).
21-30 3rd F Enter the value of μ∞ (infinite shear viscosity; see above equation).
Main Index
1356 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal)
Temperature Effects in Coupled Fluid-Thermal Analysis
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid- Temperature Effects in Coupled

Thermal) Fluid-Thermal Analysis
input style. This option is not available with the table driven input; use the
TABLE model definition option instead.
Description
This option defines the variation of material properties (viscosity, thermal conductivity, specific heat)
with temperature for the fluid region. The values read in through the ISOTROPIC option are those at the
lowest temperature specified. Properties are not defined below the lowest temperature. The temperature
dependency can be entered using one of the following two options:
entering the word DATA on the 1st data line.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
For option A, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, 5a, 6a, 7a and 8a. For option B, use data blocks 2b, 3b, 4b, 5b,
6b, 7b and 8b, below.
Option A
2a data block
21-25 5th I Number of slopes of viscosity versus temperature curve.
31-35 7th I Number of slopes of conductivity versus temperature curve
36-40 8th I Number of slopes of specific heat versus temperature curve.
Main Index
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal) 1357
Format
Data
46-50 10th I Number of slopes of emissivity versus temperature curve.
ISOTROPIC option.
3a data block
Slopes/breakpoints for viscosity versus temperature curve. The number in the fifth field of data line 2
defines the number of data lines required in data block 3.
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of viscosity versus temperature curve.
4a data block
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of conductivity versus temperature curve.
5a data block
1-15 1st F Enter the slope of specific heat versus temperature curve.
16-30 2nd F Temperature above which this slope becomes operative.
6a data block
Latent heat. Number of data lines given on data line 2, ninth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the latent heat.
Option B
2b data block
21-25 5th I Number of data points on the viscosity versus temperature curve for
powder materials.
Main Index
1358 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal)
Format
Data
31-35 7th I Number of data points on the conductivity versus temperature curve.
36-40 8th I Number of data points on the specific heat versus temperature curve.
46-50 10th I Number of data points on the emissivity versus temperature curve.
ISOTROPIC option.
3b data block
4b data block
5b data block
6b data block
Latent heat. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, ninth field.
1-15 1st F Enter the value of the latent heat.
7b data block
end of the increment.
Main Index
Control Option for Fluid Analysis or Fluid-Thermal Analysis
CONTROL (Fluid) Control Option for Fluid Analysis or Fluid-Thermal Analysis
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for
fluid analysis.
For coupled fluid-thermal analysis, data block 4 must be used in addition to the 3rd data block.
For nonlinear analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. They
do not appear on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
restart is being used.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment. Default is
3.
If a negative number is entered, then Marc does a maximum of the absolute
value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is given
and Marc proceeds to the next increment. This is not recommended.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment. Default is 0. Note that
this data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all
0 or left blank Testing is done on residuals.
1 Testing is done on velocities.
Note: Testing on relative velocity always requires at least one iteration.
If nonlinear analysis is done with the CENTROID parameter, the
residuals are not calculated and testing is always done on
velocities.
Fluid analysis with the CENTROID parameter is
not recommended.
Main Index
1360 CONTROL (Fluid)
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Flag to specify relative or absolute error testing. If equal to 0, testing is
done on relative error. If equal to 1, testing is done on absolute value.
If set to 2, testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or
incremental velocities are below minimum value in which case absolute
tolerances testing is used.
1. Full Newton-Raphson (default).
4. Direct substitution.
31-35 7th I Nonpositive definite flag. If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system
is forced. Default in fluid analysis.
3rd data block
maximum reaction force. Default is 0.10.
If relative velocity checking:
Maximum allowable value of the change in velocity increment divided by
the velocity increment. Default is 0.10.
Maximum allowable value of the change in rotational increment divided
by the rotational increment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on
change in rotational increment occurs.
Minimum velocity, if velocity increment is less than this value, checking
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
Only necessary for coupled fluid-thermal analysis.
evaluated and matrices reassembled. Default value of 100.
21-30 3rd F Maximum error in temperature estimate used for property evaluation. This
control provides a recycling capability to improve accuracy in highly
Main Index
1362 CONTROL (Fluid-Solid)
Control Option for Fluid-Stress or Fluid-Thermal-Stress Analysis
CONTROL (Fluid- Control Option for Fluid-Stress or Fluid-Thermal-Stress Analysis

Solid)
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for fluid-solid
or fluid-thermal-solid analysis.
For nonlinear analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: User Information. They do not appear
on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
In fluid-solid or fluid-thermal-solid analysis, there are two areas of the model which are defined using
the REGION option. The data given here governs the convergence behavior in these regions. The 2nd and
3rd data blocks control the behavior in the solid region. The 4th and 5th data blocks control the behavior
for thermal analysis in either region. The 6th and 7th data blocks control the fluid behavior.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of load steps/increments in this run. Default is 9999. This is a
cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when restart is being used.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment for solid region.
If a negative number is entered, then Marc does a maximum of the absolute value
entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is given and Marc proceeds to
the next increment. This is not recommended.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment for plasticity or other tangent
modulus nonlinearities in solid region. Default is 0. Note that this data field forces this
number of recycles to take place at all subsequent increments.
0 or left blank Testing is done on residuals.
1 Testing is done on displacements.
2 Testing is done on strain energy.
Note: Testing on relative displacements or strain energy always requires at least one
iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done with the CENTROID parameter, the
residuals are not calculated and testing is always done on displacements.
Nonlinear analysis with the CENTROID parameter is not recommended.
Main Index
Format
Data
Equal to 0 Testing is done on relative error.
Equal to 1 Testing is done on absolute value.
If set to 2 Testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or incremental
displacements are below minimum value in which case absolute
tolerances testing is used.
2. Modified Newton-Raphson (no reassembly during iteration).
3. Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification.
8. Secant method.
31-35 7th I Nonpositive definite flag. If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system is forced.
Note that with use of gap and Herrmann elements, the matrix always is nonpositive
definite and this entry has no significance.
1 For Mooney material, reduce contribution of hydrostatic pressure on
initial stress stiffness according to:
σinitial = σ -fr ⋅ p ⋅ I
where σinitial is the stress tensor used in the initial stress stiffness matrix,
σ is the current stress tensor, fr is entered through the PARAMETERS
option, p is the hydrostatic pressure and I is a unit tensor.
4 Results in the inclusion of only the positive stresses in the initial stress
stiffness during the equilibrium iteration.
56-60 12th I Assembly flag. If set to 1, the stiffness matrix is assembled each iteration. Note that this
switches off the modified Newton-Raphson procedure if chosen in the sixth field of this
data block.
Main Index
Format
Data
3rd data block
Maximum allowable value of maximum residual force divided by maximum reaction
force. Default is 0.10.
If relative displacement checking:
Maximum allowable value of the change in displacement increment divided by the
displacement increment. Default is 0.10.
Maximum allowable value of maximum residual moment divided by maximum
reaction moment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on residual moment occurs.
Maximum allowable value of the change in rotational increment divided by the
rotational increment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on change in rotational
increment occurs.
Minimum reaction force, if reaction force is less than this value, checking is bypassed
or absolute testing is performed.
Minimum displacement, if displacement increment is less than this value, checking is
Minimum moment: if moment is less than this value, checking is bypassed or absolute
testing is performed.
Minimum rotation: if rotation increment is less than this value, checking is bypassed.
Maximum value of residual force. Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual
force takes place.
If absolute displacement tasking:
Maximum value of displacement increment. Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking
on displacements takes place.
The 4th and 5th lines are used to control the thermal behavior. In an fluid-structure analysis (no thermal), do not
include these blocks.
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of load steps in this run. Default is 99999. This is a cumulative number
and is usually used to stop the run when RESTART is being used.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles during an increment due to temperature dependent
material properties. Default value is 3.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment. Note that this data field forces this
number of recycles to take place in all subsequent increments.
5th data block
1-10 1st F Maximum nodal temperature change allowed. Used to control automatic time step
scheme for heat transfer. Default value of 20.
11-20 2nd F Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are re-evaluated and
matrices reassembled. Default value of 100.
21-30 3rd F Maximum error in temperature estimate used for property evaluation. This control
provides a recycling capability to improve accuracy in highly nonlinear heat-transfer
problems (for example, latent heat, radiation boundary conditions). Default is 0, which
bypasses this test. Set to maximum temperature error which is considered acceptable.
6th data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of load steps/increments in this run. Default is 9999. This is a
cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when restart is being used.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment.
If a negative number is entered, then Marc does a maximum of the absolute value
entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is given and Marc proceeds to
the next increment. This is not recommended.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment. Default is 0. Note that this data field
forces this number of recycles to take place at all subsequent increments.
16-20 4th I Flag for convergence testing. If set to 0 or left blank, testing is done on residuals. If set
to one, testing is done on velocities. Note that testing on relative velocity always
requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done with the CENTROID
parameter, the residuals are not calculated and testing is always done on velocities. Note
that fluid analysis with the CENTROID parameter is not recommended.
21-25 5th I Flag to specify relative or absolute error testing. If equal to 0, testing is done on relative
error. If equal to 1, testing is done on absolute value.
If set to 2, testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or incremental
velocities are below minimum value in which case absolute tolerances testing is used.
Main Index
Format
Data
4. Direct substitution.
31-35 7th I Nonpositive definite flag. If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system is forced.
Default in fluid analysis.
7th data block
Maximum allowable value of maximum residual force divided by maximum reaction
force. Default is 0.10.
Maximum allowable value of the change in velocity increment divided by the velocity
increment. Default is 0.10.
Maximum allowable value of maximum residual moment divided by maximum
reaction moment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on residual moment occurs.
Maximum allowable value of the change in rotational increment divided by the
rotational increment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on change in rotational
increment occurs.
Minimum reaction force, if reaction force is less than this value, checking is bypassed
or absolute testing is performed.
Minimum velocity, if velocity increment is less than this value, checking is bypassed or
absolute testing is performed.
Main Index
END OPTION 1367
Model Definition Data End
END OPTION Model Definition Data End
Description
This option is used to signify the end of all model definition data.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 A Enter the words END OPTION.
Main Index
1368 END OPTION
Model Definition Data End
Main Index
Chapter 4 History Definition Options List 1369
Chapter 4 History Definition Options List
4 History Definition Options List
History Definition Option Page

ACC CHANGE 1601
ACCUMULATE 1587
ACTIVATE 1508
ACTUATOR 1581
ADAPT GLOBAL 1422
ADD RIGID (2-D) 1527
ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D) 1521
ANNEAL 1576
APPROACH 1573
ASSEM LOAD 1507
AUTO CREEP 1585
AUTO INCREMENT 1469
AUTO LOAD 1462
Main Index
1370

AUTO STEP 1474
AUTO THERM CREEP 1589
AUTO THERM 1487
B2GG, B2PP 1443

BEGIN SEQUENCE 1466
BUCKLE 1501
CHANGE PORE 1496

CHANGE RIGID 1513
CHANGE STATE 1489
COMMENT 1365
CONTACT NODE 1566
CONTACT TABLE 1559
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES 1550
CONTINUE 1680
CONTROL (Heat Transfer) 1623
CONTROL (Mechanical) 1391
CREEP INCREMENT 1584
DAMPING COMPONENTS 1649

DEACTIVATE 1509
DISP CHANGE 1448
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic) 1678
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric) 1664
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic) 1676
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating) 1633
DIST FLUXES 1607
DIST LOADS 1455
DIST MASS (Diffusion) 1642
DIST SOURCES 1654
Main Index

DMIG-OUT 1435
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic) 1598
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic) 1672
ELEMENT SORT 1384

EMCAPAC 1659
EMRESIS 1632
END SEQUENCE 1467
EXCLUDE 1580
EXTRAPOLATE 1588
FILMS 1627
FOUNDATION 1512
GAP CHANGE 1452

GRID FORCE 1380
HARMONIC (Acoustic) 1656

HARMONIC (Dynamic) 1600
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic) 1671
INCLUDE 1368
INERTIA RELIEF 1464
K2GG, K2PP 1440
LOADCASE 1432
M2GG, M2PP 1442

MODAL SHAPE 1594
MOTION CHANGE 1567
MOVE 1574
Main Index
1372

NEW 1367
NO ELEM SORT 1386
NO NODE SORT 1389
NO PRINT 1375
NO PRINT CONTACT 1377
NO PRINT SPRING 1379
NO SUMMARY 1383
NODE SORT 1387
P2G 1444
PARAMETERS 1397
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric) 1663
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic) 1675
POINT CURRENT (Joule) 1634
POINT FLUX 1609
POINT LOAD 1460
POINT MASS (Diffusion) 1645
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic) 1655
POINT TEMP 1494
POROSITY CHANGE 1638
POST 1404
POST INCREMENT 1419
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric) 1661
POTENTIAL CHANGE 1673
PRESS CHANGE 1652
PRINT CHOICE 1369
PRINT CONTACT 1376
PRINT ELEMENT 1371
PRINT NODE 1373
PRINT SPRING 1378
PRINT VMASS (History Definition) 1390
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT 1468
Main Index

READ FILE 1445
RECOVER 1596
RELEASE NODE 1451
RELEASE 1572
RESET TIME 1500
RESTART INCREMENT 1421
SOLVER 1401
SPECTRUM 1599
SPLINE 1578
SS-ROLLING 1569
STEADY STATE (Electrostatic) 1658
STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer) 1606
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic) 1667
STIFFNS COMPONENTS 1650
SUMMARY 1382
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications) 1505
SUPERELEM 1503
SUPERPLASTIC 1483
SYNCHRONIZED 1577
TEMP CHANGE 1625

TERMINATE 1481
THERMAL LOADS 1485
THICKNS CHANGE 1648
TIME STEP 1499
TITLE 1366
TRANSIENT 1604
TYING CHANGE 1454
VELOCITY CHANGE 1628

VOID CHANGE 1640
VOLTAGE CHANGE 1635
Main Index
1374

WELD FILL 1620
WELD FLUX 1610
WELD PATH 1614
WRITE FILE 1446
Main Index
Chapter 4 History Definition Options
4 History Definition Options
J
General Controls 1378
J
Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis 1461
J Rate Dependent Analysis 1597
J
Joule Heating Analysis 1645
J
Diffusion Analysis 1651
J Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis 1661
J
Acoustic Analysis 1665
J
Electrostatic Analysis 1671
J Piezoelectric Analysis 1674
J
Magnetostatic Analysis 1680
J
Electromagnetic Analysis 1684
Main Index
The END OPTION ends the initial definition of the problem. All data subsequent to the END OPTION
is interpreted as history definition or mesh display options. The input data for the history options controls
the flow of Marc for the next loadcase which may consist of a single increment or multiple increments
in the case of automatic control of loading.
Facilities exist for changing the boundary conditions and the tying data. This new data is read in when
the analysis of the previous loadcase is complete. A CONTINUE option terminates the input and initiates
the analysis for the series of load increments corresponding to that input. The total number of increments
in the analysis (no table input) is controlled by the CONTROL option or by conditions set within these
options.
Elastic Analysis
When the ELASTIC parameter is includes, all boundary conditions applied are total values that are
applied in a single increment. Each loadcase would contain its own DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD,
THERMAL LOADS, or CHANGE STATE option and be completed by the CONTINUE option.
Mechanical, Acoustic, Piezoelectric or Electrostatic-Structural

or Electromagnetic Analyses
All quantities specified for the previous load increment are also applied in the increment unless it is
modified by the optional data described below. By judicious choice of the order of the load
incrementation options, you can apply many combinations of displacement, traction, and thermal load
vectors. You should note here that any new loads applied after the END OPTION are incremental and the
total load at the end of any increment corresponds to the zero increment load plus all load increments to
that point.
Caution: You must ensure that you zero out load increments that are being switched off since Marc,
for some options, does not do this automatically.

For heat transfer analysis, total fluxes or temperatures should always be input, and the solution time
controlled by the TRANSIENT or AUTO STEP option.

In a bearing analysis, the lubricant thickness can be modified or the damping or stiffness behavior can
be obtained.
Main Index
Chapter 4 History Definition Options 1377
For electrostatic analysis, total charges or potentials should always be input, and the solution time
controlled by the STEADY STATE option.
For magnetostatic analysis, total currents or potentials should always be input, and the solution time
controlled by the STEADY STATE option.
Table Driven Boundary Conditions

When using the table driven boundary conditions, you always enter the total loads at the end of the
loadcase. This is done by having the boundary condition reference a table where one of the independent
variables is time, normalized time, increment number, or normalized increment number. For the case of
loadcases controlled by the arc-length method (AUTO INCREMENT), the independent variable should be
the loadcase number. The LOADCASE option is used to activate boundary conditions. If a boundary
condition is not named, it is deactivated.
Restart Considerations
If a restart is made from one of the increments generated by a multi-increment procedure such as AUTO
LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, TRANSIENT, AUTO STEP, AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO THERM, AUTO
CREEP, AUTO THERM CREEP, the rest of the increments associated with this procedure are
automatically completed before reading of new input. This can be avoided by using the REAUTO option.
The completion of an AUTO LOAD by a restart is done using the control parameters specified by Marc
used with the RESTART option.
Main Index
General Controls
General Controls
This section describes modifications of program controls. The values given here override the values that
might have been previously specified either with the model definition options or prior load
incrementation data. Note that the CONTROL option is extremely important for specifying the
convergence and tolerance controls.
Main Index
COMMENT 1379
Enter Comments
COMMENT Enter Comments
Description
This option allows you to enter informative comments for your own benefit. These data blocks can
appear between parameters, model definition and history definition options.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word COMMENT.
11-80 2nd A User entered comment.
Alternate Format
Format
Data
1-1 1st A Enter the $ character.
2-80 2nd A User entered comment.
Main Index
1380 TITLE
Output Title Definition
TITLE Output Title Definition
Description
This option defines the output title. There is no limit to the number of the title data read in as long as the
word TITLE appears in the first field. However, only the last TITLE data is used as an output header. Due
to the free-format processor, do not place commas within the TITLE data (Columns 11-80).
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word TITLE.
11-80 2nd A Enter the title to be output with results.
Main Index
NEW (History Definition) 1381
Use New Format
NEW (History Definition) Use New Format
Description
This option can be used to switch from input with extended format to the default width or vice-versa.
Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW history definition option is
encountered. This option must not appear embedded inside any history definition option.
Format
Format
Data
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input.This will
override the EXTENDED parameter.
Main Index
1382 INCLUDE (History Definition)
INCLUDE (History Definition) Insert File into the Input File
Description
file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited
to 240 characters.
Format
Format
Data
case sensitive.
Main Index
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition) 1383
Define Data to be Printed
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition) Define Data to be Printed
Description
This option allows you the control of the output from Marc. The data given here remains in control until
a subsequent PRINT CHOICE set is inserted – such a set can be included with either the model definition
or with history definition set.
point or at the centroid only, depending on whether the ALL POINTS or CENTROID parameter is used.
For shells, only the extreme fibers are output, plus layers where the inelastic strains or state variables are
nonzero. For beams, fibers with inelastic strains or nonzero state variables are printed. In addition,
section forces are given for these elements. This option also allows debug output of certain items. The
default is no debug printout.
The PRINT CHOICE option has no effect on the postprocessor file (see Chapter 3).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of first and last element numbers to be printed
(maximum 10).
(maximum 10).
ALL POINTS is not flagged).
16-20 4th I Number of layers to be printed. This is for beams and shells only, and
21-25 5th I Increments between printout. Default is print every increment.
26-30 6th I Enter 1 for complex nodal quantities to be output as magnitude and phase;
otherwise, real and imaginary components are given.
36-40 8th I Log File Flag: Enter unit number to which log file is to be written.
Main Index
1384 PRINT CHOICE (History Definition)
Define Data to be Printed
Format
Data
3rd data block
Include only if the first field of 2nd data block is not zero.
Etc. Etc. in I5 format.
4th data block
5th data block
I Enter the list of integration point to be printed in (16I5) format (number
of entries given in the third field of data block 2). This is only used if ALL
POINTS is flagged. Be careful with analyses with several different
element types.
6th data block
Include only if the fourth field of 2nd data block is not zero)
I Enter the list of shell or beam fibers to be printed in (16I5) format. As this
over-rides the Marc default, you should be aware that you do not
unintentionally miss the plasticity or creep printout.
7th data block
Include only if the seventh field is not zero.
1-5 1st I Enter debug plot code. See the PRINT parameter.
Main Index
PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition) 1385
PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition) Specify Elements to be Included in Output
Description
This option allows you to choose which elements, and what quantities associated with an element are to
be printed. If you do not specify NODE on the first data line, these values are at the integration points.
This option can be used to print response quantities for the first 28 integration points of any element. This
suffices for all elements, except continuum composite elements (types 149 - 154, 175 - 180) which can
have as many as 2040 integration points. For print-outs at integration point numbers greater than 28 for
continuum composite elements, use PRINT CHOICE. If you specify the word NODE, these values are the
extrapolated nodal values. This extrapolation is currently not available for rebar elements, composite
continuum elements, semi-infinite elements, or cavity elements.
PRINT ELEMENT and not followed by PRINT NODE results in the selected element
printout and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE with a blank node list to suppress
node output.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words PRINT ELEMENT.
11-20 2nd A Enter the word NODE (optional).
2nd data block
11-15 3rd I File unit to which output is to be written. Defaults to standard output, unit
6.
Data blocks 3, 4, and, if necessary, 5 and 6 are given once for each data set.
3rd data block
STRAIN output total strain.
STRESS output total stress.
PLASTIC output plastic strain.
Main Index
1386 PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition)
Format
Data
ENERGY output of strain energy densities:
• total strain energy
• incremental total strain energy
• total elastic strain energy
• incremental elastic strain energy
• plastic strain energy
• incremental plastic strain energy
CRACK output of cracking strain
CAUCHY output Cauchy stress.
STATE output state variables.
PREFER output stresses in preferred system.
ELECTRIC output electric field and electric flux
MAGNETIC output magnetic field and magnetic flux
CURRENT output current
ALL output of all of the above.
4th data block
Note: To suppress all element print-out, enter a blank list for the list
of elements.
5th data block
If the NODE option is not specified on the 1st data block, enter a list of
integration points to be printed.
If the NODE option is specified on the 1 data block, enter a list of node
positions based upon the CONNECTIVITY option. These node positions
range from one to the maximum number of nodes per element.
6th data block
Enter a list of layers to be printed. This is only necessary if there are either
thin walled beam, shell, rebar, solid composite elements in the mesh, (that
is, element types 1, 4, 5, 8, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 22, 23, 24, 25, 45,46, 47,
48, 49, 50, 72, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 98, 138, 139, 140,
142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 165, 166,
167, 168, 169, 170, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180).
It is also necessary to include this data block if there are beam element
types 52 or 98 and they are used with integrated solid cross sections.
Main Index
PRINT NODE (History Definition) 1387
Define Nodes and Nodal Quantities to be Printed
PRINT NODE (History Define Nodes and Nodal Quantities to be Printed

Definition)
Description
This option allows you to choose which nodes and what nodal quantities are to be printed. The average
nodal generalized stresses are obtained via an extrapolation and averaging procedure. If there is a
geometric or material discontinuity at a node, this value is not correct unless either double nodes were
used and kinematic tying, or you control which elements are to be averaged using the
PRINT ELEMENT feature.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words PRINT NODE.
2nd data block
11-15 3rd I File unit to which output is to be written. Default to standard output, unit 6.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
INCR output incremental displacement or potentials
TOTA output total displacement or potentials
VELO output velocity
ACCE output acceleration
LOAD output total applied load
REAC output reaction/residual force
TEMP output temperature
FLUX output flux (Fluxes are only available if the HEAT, 0, 0, 2
parameter is used.)
MODE output eigenvector (modal or buckle)
STRESS output average generalized stresses at nodes
VOLT output voltage (Joule analysis)
PRES output pressure (bearing analysis)
Main Index
1388 PRINT NODE (History Definition)
Define Nodes and Nodal Quantities to be Printed
Format
Data
COOR output coordinates (only for rezoning)
ALL output all relevant quantities
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to be printed. To suppress all nodal printout, enter a
blank list for the list of nodes.
Main Index
NO PRINT (History Definition) 1389
Suppress Printing
NO PRINT (History Definition) Suppress Printing
Description
This option suppresses element and nodal output. This option is revoked by using either the PRINT
CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, or PRINT NODE option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO PRINT.
Main Index
1390 PRINT CONTACT (History Definition)
Prints the Contact Body Summary
PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) Prints the Contact Body Summary
Description
This option ensures that the summary of contact information for each body is printed to the output file
even if the NO PRINT option is activated.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words PRINT CONTACT.
Main Index
NO PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) 1391
Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout
NO PRINT CONTACT (History Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout

Definition)
Description
This option deactivates the output of the summary of contact information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO PRINT CONTACT.
Main Index
1392 PRINT SPRING (History Definition)
Controls the Print Out of Springs
PRINT SPRING (History Definition) Controls the Print Out of Springs
Description
This option controls the output for selected springs.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PRINT SPRING.
2nd data block
Enter a list of springs to be printed
Main Index
NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition) 1393
Deactivates the Printing of All Springs
NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition) Deactivates the Printing of All Springs
Description
This options supresses the output of spring results.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word NO PRINT SPRING.
Main Index
1394 GRID FORCE (History Definition)
GRID FORCE (History Definition) Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level
This option allows the user to output the contributions to the nodal force at either an element level or a
nodal level. This is useful when constructing a free body diagram of part of the structure. The Marc for
grid force balance is with respect to the global coordinate system. In Marc, the following contributions
are considered:
On an element level the grid force balance is based upon the
Internal Forces
Distributed Loads
Foundation Forces
Reaction Force
On a nodal basis it is much more complete and includes
Internal Forces Distributed + Point Forces

Foundation Forces Spring Forces
Contact Normal Forces Contact Friction Forces
Tying/MPC Forces Inertia Forces
Damping Forces DMIG Forces
Reaction Force
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word GRID FORCE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Frequency (increments) between writing out the grid forces.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if force output is based upon elements.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if force output is based upon nodes.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 if grid force output is to be written to standard output (default).
Enter 1 if grid force output is to be written to file jid.grd.
21-25 5th I Enter the number of times that grid force should be output in a load case;
if 1 is entered, the output will occur at the last increment of the load case.
3rd and 4th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
Main Index
GRID FORCE (History Definition) 1395
Format
Data
3rd data block
4th data block
1-80 Enter a list of elements for which grid force output will be done
5th data block
6th data block
1-80 Enter a list of bodies, grid force on an element level will be given for
elements in these bodies.
7th data block
8th data block
1-80 Enter a list of nodes for which forces will be output on a nodal basis.
Main Index
1396 SUMMARY (History Definition)
Create Summary Report
SUMMARY (History Definition) Create Summary Report
Description
This option produces a summary of the results of the increment and outputs them in a report format. This
option is in effect until a NO SUMMARY option is encountered. The summary consists of the maximum
and minimum of temperatures, stresses, strains, plastic strains, creep strains, displacements, velocities,
accelerations and reaction forces. The option also produces a detailed accounting of both the memory
usage and timing information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SUMMARY.
11-15 2nd I Enter the unit number to be used for output.
Default is standard output, unit 6.
16-20 3rd I Enter the increment frequency of summary.
Default is every increment.
Main Index
NO SUMMARY (History Definition) 1397
Suppress Summary
NO SUMMARY (History Definition) Suppress Summary
Description
This option turns off the summary feature. The default is off unless the SUMMARY option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO SUMMARY.
Main Index
1398 ELEMENT SORT (History Definition)
Sort Elements for Report
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition) Sort Elements for Report
Description
This option allows various element quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This
option is in effect until a NO ELEM SORT option is encountered. This option allows you to sort either in
ascending or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute
value. A range can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ELEM SORT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block, as given
below, defines each sort.
6.
3rd data block
The 3rd data block is repeated once for each sort.
Default is 0; sort in descending order.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value.
Enter 0 for sort by absolute value. Default is 0; sort by absolute value.
21-25 5th I Enter lowest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.
26-30 6th I Enter highest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last
element in mesh.
Main Index
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition) 1399
Sort Elements for Report
Table 4-1 Element Sort Codes

Code Description Code Description
1 first stress 28 fourth plastic strain
2 second stress 29 fifth plastic strain
3 third stress 30 sixth plastic strain
4 fourth stress 31 equivalent plastic strain
5 fifth stress 32 mean plastic strain
6 sixth stress 33 Tresca plastic strain
7 equivalent stress 34 first principal plastic strain
8 mean stress 35 second principal plastic strain
9 Tresca stress 36 third principal plastic strain
10 first principal stress 37 first creep strain
11 second principal stress 38 second creep strain
12 third principal stress 39 third creep strain
13 first strain 40 fourth creep strain
14 second strain 41 fifth creep strain
15 third strain 42 sixth creep strain
16 fourth strain 43 equivalent creep strain
17 fifth strain 44 mean creep strain
18 sixth strain 45 Tresca creep strain
19 equivalent strain 46 first principal creep strain
20 mean strain 47 second principal creep strain
21 Tresca strain 48 third principal creep strain
22 first principal strain 49 temperature
23 second principal strain 61 voltage
24 third principal strain 73 first gradient
25 first plastic strain 74 second gradient
26 second plastic strain 75 third gradient
27 third plastic strain
Main Index
1400 NO ELEM SORT (History Definition)
Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element
NO ELEM SORT (History Definition) Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element
Description
This option turns off the ELEM SORT feature. The default is off unless the ELEM SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO ELEM SORT.
Main Index
NODE SORT (History Definition) 1401
Sort Nodal Results
NODE SORT (History Definition) Sort Nodal Results
Description
This option allows various nodal quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This option
is in effect until a NO NODE SORT is encountered. NODE SORT allows you to sort either in ascending
or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute value. A range
can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NODE SORT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block as given
below defines each sort.
6.
3rd data block
The 3rd data block is entered once for each sort.
Default is 0, sort in descending value.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value. Enter 0 for sort by absolute value.
Default is 0, sort by absolute value.
21-25 5th I Enter lowest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.
26-30 6th I Enter highest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last node in
mesh.
Main Index
1402 NODE SORT (History Definition)
Sort Nodal Results
Table 4-2 Node Sort Codes

Code Meaning Result
1-12 sort code I Results in the Ith component of the incremental displacement to
be sorted.
13-34 sort code I +12 Results in the Ith component of the total displacement to be sorted.
25-36 sort code I + 24 Results in the Ith component of the velocity to be sorted.
37-48 sort code I + 36 Results in the Ith component of the acceleration to be sorted.
48-60 sort code I + 48 Results in the nodal temperature to be sorted.
61-72 sort code I + 60 Results in the Ith component of the reaction force to be sorted.
71-84 sort code I + 72 Results in the Ith component of the contact force to be sorted.
101 101 Sort on magnitude of incremental displacement.
102 102 Sort on magnitude of total displacement.
103 103 Sort on magnitude of velocity.
104 104 Sort on magnitude of acceleration.
105 105 Sort on magnitude of temperature.
106 106 Sort on magnitude of reaction force.
107 107 Sort on magnitude of contact force.
Main Index
NO NODE SORT (History Definition) 1403
Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes
NO NODE SORT (History Definition) Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes
Description
This option negates the NODE SORT option. The default is off unless the NODE SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words NO NODE SORT.
Main Index
1404 PRINT VMASS (History Definition)
Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies
PRINT VMASS Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies
(History Definition)
Description
This option allows you to obtain printed output of element volumes, masses, costs and strain energies.
Options are provided for you to print the total quantities for each group of elements and the quantities for
each element in the group or the total quantities for each group of elements only.
In order to have correct mass computations, mass density for each element must be entered through one
of the material options. In order to have the correct cost, the cost per unit mass or the cost per unit volume
must be defined through the ISOTROPIC/ORTHOTROPIC option. The total strain energy and the plastic
strain energy, if applicable, are printed. Note that volumes and masses for some special elements (for
example, gap element, semi-infinite element, etc.) is not be computed. These quantities can be written on
either standard output file unit 6, or your specified unit.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the words PRINT VMASS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets to be given below.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 for option to print only total volumes, masses, costs, and strain
energy for groups of elements. Default is 0.
11-15 3rd I File unit to which output is to be written; default to standard output, unit 6.
Either data block 3a or 3b may be used
3a data block
3b data block
Enter the negative of deformable body number (only one body number per
data block).
Main Index
CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition) 1405
CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition) Control Option for Stress Analysis
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for nonlinear
analysis. For heat transfer analysis, see the CONTROL (Heat Transfer) history definition option.
For coupled thermal-stress analysis, data block 6 must be used.
For coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, data block 7 must be used.
For nonlinear static analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
They do not appear on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
restart is being used. If an ELASTIC parameter is included, this field is
ignored and all load cases are analyzed.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment for
plasticity, or other tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 3. This
should usually be increased to 10 for rigid-plastic flow option.
If a negative number is entered, Marc does a maximum of the absolute
value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is
given and Marc proceeds to the next increment. This is not recommended.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment for plasticity or other
tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 0.
Note: This data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all
Caution: This value is overwritten by the PROPORTIONAL
INCREMENT option.
0 or left blank Convergence is achieved when residuals satisfy
the criterion.
1 Convergence is achieved when displacements satisfy
the criterion.
Main Index
1406 CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition)
Format
Data
2 Convergence is achieved when strain energy satisfies
the criteria.
4 Convergence is achieved when either residual or
5 Convergence is achieved when both residual and
Notes: Testing on relative displacements or strain energy always
requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done
with the CENTROID parameter, the residuals are not
calculated and testing is always done on displacements.
Notes: Nonlinear analysis with the CENTROID parameter is not
recommended.
Notes: If the fields are set as 0, 1, or 2, only the 3rd data block is
needed.
Notes: If the fields are set as 4 or 5, the 3a data block is also
needed. In this case, the 3rd data block is set for residual
testing and 3a data block is set for displacements
check only.
If equal to 0 Testing is done on relative error.
If equal to 1 Testing is done on absolute value.
If equal to 2 Testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or
incremental displacements are below minimum value, in
which case absolute tolerances testing is used.
1 Full Newton-Raphson (default).
2 Modified Newton-Raphson (no reassembly
during iteration).
3 Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification (see
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information).
8 Secant method.
31-35 7th I Nonpositive definite flag.
If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system is forced.
Note: With use of gap and Herrmann elements, the matrix always is
nonpositive definite and this entry has no significance.
Main Index
Format
Data
1 For Mooney material, reduce contribution of hydrostatic
pressure on initial stress stiffness according to:
σ i ni ti al = σ – f r ⋅ p ⋅ I
where σ i ni ti al is the stress tensor used in the initial stress

stiffness matrix, σ is the current stress tensor, f r is entered
through the PARAMETERS option, p is the hydrostatic
pressure and I I is a unit tensor.
4 Results in the inclusion of only the positive stresses in the
initial stress stiffness during the equilibrium iteration.
Besides faster convergence, this leads to a stable analysis
of very thin shell structures.
51-55 11th I Control parameter:
0 Do not allow switching of convergence testing between
residuals and displacements.
1 Allow switching of convergence testing between residual
and displacements if reaction forces or displacements
become extremely small. For more details, see Marc
Note: Set this parameter to 0 if any kind of absolute value testing is
being used.
56-60 12th I Assembly flag. If set to 1, the stiffness matrix is assembled each iteration.
Note that this switches off the modified Newton-Raphson procedure if
chosen in the sixth field of this data block.
61-65 13th I For some material models, such as damage, cracking, and Chaboche,
there is an inner iteration loop to insure accuracy. The maximum number
of iterations allowed can be set here.
Default is 50.
3rd data block
Include if residual testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 0, 4, or 5.
Main Index
Format
Data
maximum reaction force.
Default is 0.10.
Minimum moment: if moment is less than this value, checking is
Maximum value of residual force.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual force takes place.
Maximum value of residual moment.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual moments
takes place.
If absolute displacement testing, maximum value of rotation increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking or rotations take place.
Notes: The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
Include if displacement testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 1, 4, or 5.
1-10 1 F Maximum allowable value of the change in displacement increment
divided by the displacement increment.
Default is 0.10.
11-20 2nd F Maximum allowable value of the change in rotational increment divided
by the rotational increment.
Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on change in rotational
increment occurs.
21-30 3rd F Minimum displacement, if displacement increment is less than this value,
checking is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.
31-40 4th F Minimum rotation: if rotation increment is less than this value, checking
is bypassed.
41-50 5th F Maximum value of displacement increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on displacements takes place.
51-60 6th F Maximum value of rotation increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on rotations takes place.
Notes: The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to
5th data block
Include if energy testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 2.
1-10 1st F Maximum allowable value of the change is energy increment.
Default is 0.1.
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
Only necessary for coupled thermal-mechanical analysis.
time step scheme for heat transfer.
evaluated and matrices reassembled.
boundary conditions).
Default is 0, which bypasses this test. Set to maximum temperature error
which is considered acceptable.
Note: Only the temperature estimate error (3rd field) is checked for
the TRANSIENT NON AUTO fixed stepping procedure. All three
fields are checked for the transient adaptive stepping procedure.
None of the three fields are checked for the auto step adaptive
stepping procedure.
7th data block
Only necessary for coupled electrostatic structural analysis.
1-10 1st F Maximum allowed relative error in residual charge.
11-20 2nd F Maximum allowed absolute error in residual charge.
Main Index
PARAMETERS (History Definition) 1411
PARAMETERS (History Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Definition)
Description
There are many parameters that are used in the finite element calculations. These parameters can be
customized for your particular application. Some of these constants can be entered in other input blocks
as well. The last nonzero value is used for the calculation.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word PARAMETERS.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the scale factor which, when multiplied with the incremental strain,
is used to predict the incremental strain in the next increment.
Default is 1.0.
11-20 2nd E Enter the multiplier used to calculate the penalty factor to impose
boundary conditions. The penalty factor is this multiplier times the
maximum diagonal value of the operator matrix. Default multiplier is
1 x 109. If the APPBC parameter is used, this option is not used.
21-30 3rd E Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in rigid plastic
analysis for plane strain, axisymmetric, or solid analysis when
displacement elements are used.
Default is 100.
31-40 4th E Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in fluid analysis
when displacement elements are used.
Default is 1 x 106.
41-50 5th E Beta parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmark-beta
procedure.
Default is 0.25.
51-60 6th E Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmark-
beta procedure.
Default is 0.50.
61-70 7th E Gamma1 parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step
Houbolt procedure.
Main Index
1412 PARAMETERS (History Definition)
Format
Data
Default is 1.5.
71-80 8th E Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step
Houbolt procedure.
Default is -0.5.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the angle at which a node separates from a convex corner or
becomes stuck in a concave corner for two-dimensional contact.
Default is 8.625°.
11-20 2nd E Enter the angle at which a node separates from a convex corner or
becomes stuck in a concave corner for three-dimensional contact.
Default is 20.0°.
21-30 3rd E Enter the initial strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.
31-40 4th E Enter the cutoff strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.
41-50 5th E Enter the fraction of the hydrostatic pressure that is subtracted from the
stress tensor in the initial stress calculation. See the tenth field of the
CONTROL option.
Default is 1.0
51-60 6th E Enter the factor used to calculate the drilling mode for shell elements type
22, 75, 138, 139, and 140.
Default is 0.0001.
61-70 7th E Enter the scale factor to the initial incremental displacements estimate for
the increment after a rezoning increment. The default value is 1.0, which
usually improves friction convergence, but may result in an inside-out
element.
1-10 1st E Universal gas constant (R). Default is 8.314 J mol-1K-1.
11-20 2nd E Offset temperature between user units and absolute temperature.
Default is 273.15°; that is, user input in Centigrade.
If user temperature is in Kelvin (K) or Rankine (R), enter a negative value.
The offset temperature is then set to zero.
21-30 3rd E Thermal Properties Evaluation Weight.
Default is 0.5
Main Index
PARAMETERS (History Definition) 1413
Format
Data
31-40 4th E Surface projection factor for single step Houbolt.
Default is 0.0.
41-50 5th E Stefan Boltzmann Constant.
Default is 5.67051 x 10-8 W/m2K4.
51-60 6th E Planks second constant.
Default is 14387.69 μM°K.
61-70 7th E Speed of light in a vacuum.
Default is 2.9979 x 1014 μM/s
71-80 8th E Maximum change in the incremental displacement in a Newton-Raphson
iteration.
Default is 1 x 1030.
1-10 1st E Initial friction stiffness (only for friction models 6 and 7). This stiffness
will be used during the first cycle of an increment to define the friction
stiffness matrix in cases where a touching node has a zero normal force
and the amount of sliding does not exceed the elastic sticking limit.
If set to zero, Marc will estimate the initial friction stiffness based on
the initial average stiffness of the contact body to which the touching
node belongs.
11-20 2nd E Specifies the minimum value that indicates a singularity if a direct solver
is used. If a zero is given, that this value is set internally by Marc and
depends on the solver being used.
21-30 3rd E Specify the maximum change in temperature per iteration in radiation
simulations. This is useful to stabilize the solution. The default is 100.
31-40 4th E Enter parameter alphaf for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
Note that the value of alphaf defined here may be overruled by defining
Main Index
1414 PARAMETERS (History Definition)
Format
Data
41-50 5th E Enter parameter alpham for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
Note that the value of alpham defined here may be overruled by defining
51-60 6th E Define the spectral radius S for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
The following conventions apply:
• 0 ≤ S ≤ 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and alphaf and alpham
are calculated based upon the spectral radius according to
alphaf = - S /(1+ S ) and alpham = (1-2 S )/(1+ S )
• S = – 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and neither alphaf nor
alpham will be changed
and alpham will be optimized for a dynamic contact analysis
and alpham will be optimized for an analysis without dynamic
contact
• S = – 4 : use the values of alphaf and alpham as entered on the 4th
and 5th field
61-70 7th E RBE3 conditioning number. If the conditioning number is greater than
this value, the RBE3 is probably singular and a warning message is
printed. If the value is negative, the analysis is stopped. Default is 1 x 106.
Main Index
SOLVER (History Definition) 1415
SOLVER (History Definition) Specify Direct or Iterative Solver
Description
This option defines the solver to be used in the analysis. You can specify either the direct or iterative
solver. The choice of whether the in-core or out-of-core procedure is used is automatically determined
by Marc, based upon the amount of workspace required and the amount of memory that can be allocated.
You can also select whether a symmetric or nonsymmetric solver is used. Additionally, you can specify
if the solution of a nonpositive definite system is to be obtained. For DDM, an out-of-core procedure is
only available for solver type 8.
As a convenience, it is necessary to specify the control parameters for the decoupled pre-conditioner only
in the first domain file, eliminating unnecessary editing.
When the iterative solver, type 2 or type 9, is chosen, additional parameters must be defined which are
used to control the accuracy.
Note: It is not recommended to use the iterative solver type 2 for beam or shell models, because
these problems are ill conditioned, resulting in a large number of iterations. For a well-
conditioned system, the number of iterations should be less than the square root of the total
number of degrees of freedom in the system.
You control the maximum number of iterations allowed. If this is a positive number, Marc
stops if this is exceeded. If this is a negative number, Marc prints a warning and continues
to the next Newton-Raphson iteration or increment.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SOLVER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Solver Type, enter:
0 for Profile Direct Solver.
2 for Sparse Iterative.
4 for Sparse Direct Solver
6 for Hardware Provided Direct Sparse Solver
8 for Multifrontal Direct Sparse Solver.
9 for CASI Iterative solver.
10 for mixed direct/iterative solver.
Main Index
1416 SOLVER (History Definition)
Format
Data
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 for solving a nonsymmetric system. Only available for solver
types 0 and 8. (Not supported for DDM.)
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if the solution of nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.
16-20 4th I Enter 0 if standard pre-conditioner is to be used.
Enter 3 if decoupled pre-conditioner is to be used.
Default value is 0.
36-40 8th I Enter, in millions, the number of four-byte words to be used by solver type
6, 8, or 10 before going out-of-core. Default is the same behavior as for
other solvers. For solver type 6, this option is only available on SGI. For
solver type 8 or 10, it is available on all platforms.
66-70 14th Enter 1 to activate AUTOSPC when singularity occurs. This is only
applicable to the direct solvers.
Enter -1 to deactivate AUTOSPC.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9
(CASI). They may also be used with the solver type 10.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter maximum number of conjugate-gradient iterations. Default is 1000.
For solver type 10, set to 0.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if the previous solution is to be used as the initial trial solution.
11-15 3rd I Solver type 2:
Enter 3 for diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 4 for scaled-diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 5 for incomplete Cholesky preconditioner.
Solver type 9:
Enter 0 for CASI Primal Preconditioner.
Main Index
SOLVER (History Definition) 1417
Format
Data
Enter 1 for CASI Standard Preconditioner.
Solver type 10:
Enter 0; not used.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter tolerance on conjugate gradient convergence for stress analysis.
Main Index
1418 POST (History Definition)
POST (History Definition) Create File for Postprocessing
Description
This option creates a postprocessor file for time-history or variable versus variable plots using Marc
Mentat or your own postprocessing. In the latter case, the file is accessed via the PLDUMP utility given
in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
Note: In a modal or buckling analysis in addition to POST option, the RECOVER history
definition option must be used for storing eigenvectors on post file.
Element data is written to the post file for each integration point of a continuum element or for the
integration points on the layer requested; unless, either the CENTROID parameter is used or the average
value is requested via the 14th field.
Note: The stresses/strains are generally engineering stresses/strains in an analysis involving only
small deformations. In a geometrically nonlinear analysis, if the total Lagrangian
formulation is used, the stresses and the strains are the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress and
the Green-Lagrange strains, respectively. You can always request to output Cauchy stresses
(post code 41-47 and 341) in the post file. If the updated Lagrangian formulation is used in
the large deformation analysis, the stresses and the strains are generally Cauchy stresses
and the logarithmic strains, respectively.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-4 1st A Enter the word POST.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of element variables to be written on the file (optional)
For heat transfer, by default, the temperatures are written to a post file.
Enter -1 to suppress the default.
Enter -2 if both element and nodal post codes are not changed in
this loadcase.
Main Index
POST (History Definition) 1419
Format
Data
41-45 9th I Number of increments between writing of post data. Defaults to writing
to the post file every increment.
Enter -1 if the number of increments is not changed in this loadcase.
51-55 11th I Enter 0 to use the elements in last post option.
Enter 1 to select elements to be written to post files.
Enter 2 for all elements to be written to post files.
66-70 14th I Enter 1 if per element only the average element integration point data
should be written on the post file. This might considerably reduce the size
of the post file, but some significant information might be lost.
The default is 0 where the element data is written on the post file for all
available integration points.
Only needed if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is not a -2.
71-75 15th I Enter 1 if automatically generated extra nodes associated with element
types 80-84 and 155-157 do not appear on the post file.
The default is 0, where all the available nodes are written on the post file.
76-80 16th I Enter 1 to exclude forces caused by glued contact from the contact normal
and friction forces.
The default is 0 where the contact normal and friction forces also contain
the contributions due to glued contact.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are used for input of variables to be written on the post file. They are only needed
if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is not -2.
3rd data block
Use for defining element post codes.
11-15 2nd I Enter an element post code. The code numbers are described in Table 4-3.
Main Index
Format
Data
16-20 3rd I Enter the layer number for shell elements or continuum
composite elements.
rebar layer
21-68 4th A Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use in
postprocessing.
4th data block
Use for defining nodal post codes.
11-15 2nd I Enter a nodal post code. The code numbers are described in Table 4-4.
16-63 3rd A Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use in
postprocessing.
Data blocks 5, 6, and 7 are only needed if the 11th field of the 2nd data block is 1.
5a data block
5b data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of elements to be written to post file.
6a data block
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if all elements of the selected contact body are placed on post file
(default)
Enter 2 if only the elements on the exterior surface are placed on the
post file.
6b data block
1-80 I Enter a list of contact bodies, for which the elements are to be written to
post file.
For the 7th data block, these nodes are in addition to nodes based upon element selection; typically, it
is used for nodes not associated with elements.
7a data block
7b data block
1-80 I Enter a list of nodes to be written to post file.
Main Index
Table 4-3 Element Post Codes

Codes Description
1-6 Components of strain. For rigid-perfectly plastic flow problems, components of strain rate
7 Equivalent plastic strain (integral of equivalent plastic strain rate). For rigid-perfectly
plastic flow problems, equivalent plastic strain rate
8 Equivalent creep strain (integral of equivalent creep strain rate)
9 Total temperature
10 Increment of temperature
11-16 Components of stress
17 Equivalent von Mises stress
18 Mean normal stress (tensile positive) for Mohr-Coulomb
19 User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
20 Thickness of element
21-26 Components of plastic strain
27 p 2---
Equivalent plastic strain. ε = Σ Δ ε ipj ΣΔ ε ijp
3
28 Plastic strain rate

29 Total value of second state variable
30 Forming Limit Parameter: FLP = calculated major engineering strain/maximum major
engineering strain
31-36 Components of creep strain
c 2---
37 Equivalent creep strain. ε = ΣΔ ε icj Σ Δε ijc
3
38 Total swelling strain (from the VSWELL user subroutine)

39 Total value of third state variable
41-46 Components of Cauchy stress
47 Equivalent Cauchy stress
48 Strain energy density
49 Thickness strain for plane stress: Mooney or Ogden material
51-56 Real components of harmonic stress
57 Equivalent real harmonic stress
58 Elastic strain energy density
59 Equivalent stress/yield stress
60 Equivalent stress/yield stress (at current temperatures)
Main Index

Codes Description
61-66 Imaginary components of harmonic stress
67 Equivalent imaginary harmonic stress
68 Plastic strain energy density
69 Current volume
71-76 Components of thermal strain
78 Original volume
79 Grain size
80 Damage indicator for Cockroft-Latham, Oyane, and Principal Stress criteria, and criteria
using the UDAMAGE_INDICATOR user subroutine.
81-86 Components of cracking strain (only for stress analysis)
91-107 Failure indices associated with failure criteria
108-109 Interlaminar shear for thick composite shells (TSHEAR parameter must be present)
110 Interlaminar shear bond index for thick composite shells (only available if TSHEAR
parameter is present and Allowable Shear Bond Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the
COMPOSITE option) = max(Interlaminar shear components given by post codes 108 and
109)/SB
111-116 Components of stress in preferred coordinate system defined by the ORIENTATION option
121-126 Elastic strain
127 Equivalent elastic strain
128 Major engineering strain
129 Minor engineering strain
175 Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate (powder material)
176 Relative density (powder material)
177 Void volume fraction (damage model)
178 Lemaitre damage factor
179 Lemaitre relative damage
<0 User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
241 Gasket Pressure
242 Gasket Closure
243 Plastic Gasket Closure
251 Global components of Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1
254 Global components of Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1
Main Index

Codes Description
257 Interlaminar shear bond index for composite solids (only available if Allowable Shear Bond
Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the COMPOSITE option) = magnitude of interlaminar
shear vector calculated by post code 254/SB
261 Beam axis (required if beam moment plots are created with Marc Mentat). Orientation axis
of CBUSH/CFAST elements 194 and 195.
264 Axial Force
265 Moment Mxx
266 Moment Myy
267 Shear Force Vxz
268 Shear Force Vyz
269 Torque
270 Bimoment
301 Total strains tensor
311 Stress tensor
321 Plastic strain tensor
331 Creep strain tensor
341 Cauchy stress tensor
351 Real harmonic stress tensor
361 Imaginary harmonic stress tensor
371 Thermal strain tensor
381 Cracking strain tensor
391 Stresses in preferred direction tensor
401 Elastic strain tensor
411 Stress in global coordinate system tensor
421 Elastic strain in global coordinate system tensor
431 Plastic strain in global coordinate system tensor
441 Creep strain in global coordinate system tensor
451 Velocity strains (for fluids)
461 Elastic strain in preferred direction tensor
471 Global components of the rebar stresses in the undeformed configuration
(Second Piola-Kirchhoff). See Marc Volume B: Element Library for details.
481 Global components of the rebar stress in the deformed configuration (Cauchy). See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for details.
Main Index

Codes Description
487 Rebar angle.
501 Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library for details.
511 Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element Library
for details.
531 Volume fraction of Martensite.
541 Phase transformation strain tensor.
547 Equivalent Phase Transformation strain
ε eq
PH = 2 ⁄ 3 ΣΔ ε ijPH Σ Δ ε ijPH
548 Equivalent TWIN Strain
ε eq
T WIN = 2 ⁄ 3 ΣΔ ε ijTWI N Σ Δ ε ijTWI N
549 Equivalent TRIP Strain in the forward transformation
ε eq
T RIP = 2 ⁄ 3 Σ Δε ijTRI P Σ Δ ε iTR
j
IP
551 Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Multiphase Aggregate:
ε eq
PL = 2 ⁄ 3ΣΔ ε iPL
j Σ Δ εi j
PL
552 Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Austenite

553 Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Martensite
557 Yield Stress of Multiphase Aggregate
601-617 Strength ratios based upon FAIL DATA failure modes.
621 Generalized Strain (Harmonic only)
631 Imaginary Generalized Strain (Harmonic only)
641 Generalized Strain - curvatures tensor
661 Generalized Stress - Moments tensor
681 True Strain Tensor (for continuum elements)
697 Layer Orientation Angle
Main Index

Codes Description
Post Codes for Heat Transfer Analysis
9 or 180 Total temperature
181-183 Components of temperature gradient T
184-186 Components of flux
271 Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysised solid (model C) or nonhomogeneous density
272 Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysis gas (model C)
273 Volumetric Mass density of liquid (model C)
274 χp (Pyrolysis model B or C)
275 φw (Pyrolysis model B or C)
276 χc (Pyrolysis model B or C)
ef f
277 ρc (Pyrolysis model B or C)
278 k
eff
(Pyrolysis model B or C)
279 ρ g, w Pyrolysis Volumetric Mass density of water vapor
280 mg (Pyrolysis model B or C)

·
281 ρ s, p (Pyrolysis model C only)
·
282 ρ s, l (Pyrolysis model C only)
·
283 ρ s, c (Pyrolysis model C only)
Post Codes for Bearing Analysis
190 Pressure
194-196 Mass flux vector
Post Codes for Joule Heating Analysis
87 Voltage
88 Current
89 Heat generated
197-199 Components of electric potential gradient
577-579 Components of current density
Post Codes for Acoustic Analysis
190 Pressure
Main Index

Codes Description
Post Codes for Electrostatic Analysis
130 Electric potential (V)
Post Codes for Magnetostatic Analysis
140 Magnetic potential (2-D analysis only) (Az)
Post Codes for Transient Electromagnetic Analysis
567-569 Components of Lorentz force
577-579 Components of current density (J)
Post Codes for Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis
137-139 Real components of Lorentz force
141-143 Real components of magnetic induction (B)
144-146 Real components of magnetic field intensity (H)
147-149 Real components of current density (J)
157-159 Imaginary components of Lorentz force
161-163 Imaginary components of magnetic induction (B)
164-166 Imaginary components of magnetic field intensity (H)
167-169 Imaginary components of current density (J)
Post Codes for Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)
Main Index

Codes Description
Post Codes for Harmonic Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)
Post Codes for Soil Analysis
171 Porosity
172 Void ratio
173 Pore pressure
174 Preconsolidation pressure
Post Codes for Cure and Cure Shrinkage Analysis
285 Degree of cure
286 Total cure reaction heat
287 Degree of cure shrinkage
288 Volumetric cure shrinkage of resin
289-294 Cure shrinkage strain components in global coordinate system
295-300 Cure shrinkage strain components in preferred coordinate system
581-586 Cure shrinkage strain tensor in global coordinate system
591-596 Cure shrinkage strain tensor in preferred coordinate system
Notes: For heat transfer, code 9 is used for all heat transfer elements.
When using shells in heat transfer, it is important to enter a code for each layer in
chronological order if post file is to be correctly read by the INITIAL STATE or CHANGE
STATE options.
Note that you do not need to select nodal values (that is, displacement, velocities and
accelerations, and temperature for a heat transfer run) as these are automatically written to
the post file.
Eigenmodes (dynamic analysis) and eigenvectors (buckling analysis) are written to
the post file only if indicated by the RECOVER or MODAL
INCREMENT/BUCKLE INCREMENT option.
Main Index
Note that post codes 91-107 refer to failure indices for different failure criteria and post
codes 601-617 refer to associated strength ratios. More than 17 quantities are allowed in
the analysis but only the first 17 quantities are available for postprocessing. For example.
if three failure criteria (say, max. stress, Hoffman and Puck) are flagged, post codes 91-
97/601-607 would contain the six indices/ratios associated with maximum stress, post code
98 / 608 would contain the one index / ratio associated with Hoffman and post codes 99-
103 / 609-613 would contain the five indices / ratios associated with Puck criterion.
Post codes 691 and 694 provide access to the first and second orientation vectors
respectively. These vectors depict the alignment of the material coordinate system at the
element level with respect to the global cartesian system. They are available for elements
that are either composites, or using materials that are orthotropic/anisotropic / requiring the
HOOKLW ANELAS user subroutines, or using the ORIENTATION option to identify the
material coordinate system. Note that these element orientation vectors are averaged across
all integration points of the element and presented as a single set of vectors at the element
centroid. They are always calculated on the current element geometry and any layer IDs
associated with post codes 691 and 694 are ignored. Note also that while the normal usage
of these post vectors is in conjunction with the ORIENTATION option, if no special material
orientation is provided, then they can also be used to obtain the element coordinate system
for orthotropic materials, composites, etc. For composites, post code 697 provides access
to the fiber angle in any layer. If used without any associated layer id, post code 697
provides access to all layer angles. Else, the user can obtain the angle for a specific layer L
by using 697,L as the post code. Note that if there are no composite elements, post code
697 is ignored. The orientation vectors on the post file are available for visualization in
Marc Mentat. Either element orientations or layer orientations can be plotted. Note that for
layer orientation vectors to be available for a set of layers, the associated layer orientation
angle should be available on the post file through post code 697.
For post codes 411, 421, 431, and 441, global quantities for shell elements are reported for
as many layers as requested and the same layer numbering system is used as for regular
shell quantities. Layer 1 is the top surface; layer 2 is the next surface, etc. This convention
is followed from MSC.Marc 2000 on.
Main Index
Caution has to be exercised in interpreting the results when strain and/or stress tensors are
requested for beam and shell elements:
1.For most elements in this category (elastic beam elements 31, 52, 98 are exceptions),
stress tensors (post codes 311, 351, 361) or their associated component values (post
codes 11-16, 51-56, 61-66) and total strain tensor (post code 301) or its associated
component values (post code 1-6) can be requested with or without an associated layer
number. When no layer number is requested, the generalized strains (stretches, shear
strains) are reported for the strain post values and generalized stresses (axial force,
shear forces) are reported for the stress post values. Generalized curvature strains and
generalized moments can be requested through post codes 641, 651, 661, and 671 for
shells and numerically integrated beams. Note that for shell elements, the generalized
stresses are forces per unit length. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a
definition of the generalized strain and stress output for each element type. When a
layer number is used, the actual strain and stress components at the requested layer are
reported.
2.For elastic beams (types 31, 52, 98), there are no layers - so only the generalized strains
and stresses are reported for these elements. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library
for a definition of the generalized strain and stress output for each element type.
Equivalent quantities are not computed for these element types since they do not make
physical sense.
3.For other stress tensors (post codes 341, 391, 411) and strain tensors (post codes 321,
331, 371, 381, 401, 421, 431, 441, 461), there are no generalized values and they can
only be requested for a particular layer. If no layer number is provided by the user, by
default, the tensors are reported for layer number 1. For elastic beams (types 31, 52, 98),
only the thermal strain tensor (post code 371) or its associated components (post codes
71-76) are available.
Main Index
Table 4-4 Nodal Post Codes

Code Description
1 Displacement
2 Rotation
3 External Force
4 External Moment
5 Reaction Force
6 Reaction Moment
7 Fluid Velocity
8 Fluid Pressure
9 External Fluid Force
10 Reaction Fluid Force
11 Sound Pressure
12 External Sound Source
13 Reaction Sound Source
14 Temperature
15 External Heat Flux
16 Reaction Heat Flux
17 Electric Potential
18 External Electric Charge
19 Reaction Electric Charge
20 Magnetic Potential
21 External Electric Current
22 Reaction Electric Current
23 Pore Pressure
24 External Mass Flux
25 Reaction Mass Flux
26 Bearing Pressure
27 Bearing Force
28 Velocity
29 Rotational Velocity
30 Acceleration
31 Rotational Acceleration
32 Modal Mass
Main Index

Code Description
33 Rotational Modal Mass
34 Contact Normal Stress
35 Contact Normal Force
36 Contact Friction Stress
37 Contact Friction Force
38 Contact Status
39 Contact Touched Body
40 Herrmann Variable
41 ρ sol id (Pyrolysis Model B only)
42 M· g (Pyrolysis Model B or C)
·
43 ρ s, p (Pyrolysis Model B only)
·
44 ρ s, l (Pyrolysis Model B only)
46 Tying Force
47 Coulomb Force
48 Tying Moment
49 Generalized Nodal Stress
50 Generalized Nodal Strain
51 Inertia Relief Load
52 Inertia Relief Moment
53 J-Integral
54 Stress Intensity, Mode I
55 Stress Intensity, Mode II
56 Stress Intensity, Mode III
57 Energy Release
58 Energy Release Rate I
59 Energy Release Rate II
60 Energy Release Rate III
61 —
62 Crack System Local X
63 Crack System Local Y
64 Crack System Local Z
Main Index

Code Description
65 Near Contact Distance
66 Breaking Index (Normal)
67 Breaking Index (Tangential)
68 Breaking Index
69 Delamination Index (Normal)
70 Delamination Index Tangential)
71 Delamination Index
72 Recession
73 Glue Deactivation Status
74 VCCT Failure Index
<0 User-defined nodal quantity via the UPSTNO user subroutine.
Note: The contact status (code 38) can have the following values:
0 if a node is neither in contact nor has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
0.5 if a node is in near contact.
1 if a node is in true contact.
2 if a node has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
Main Index
POST INCREMENT 1433
Define Increments between Writing on Post File
POST INCREMENT Define Increments between Writing on Post File
Description
This option allows you to alter the increments at which data is written to the post file. This option has the
same effect as the data in the ninth field of the POST model definition option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POST INCREMENT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of increments between writing of post data. Defaults to
write post file very increment.
Enter a -1 to turn off all writing of post data until the next POST
INCREMENT option.
6-10 2nd I Enter number of times data will be written to the post file for each load
case. The step is calculated based on the progress from the total load case
time, displacement, or energy. This control is used only if there is no
increment frequency control in the first field.
Enter 1 if the post file is to be written at the end of the load case only.
Default is 0 (no such control).
Notes: Post data is automatically written to the post file at the increment in which the POST
INCREMENT option occurs.
This value is not saved upon restart; it must be reset through the POST model definition
option or POST INCREMENT option.
Example
POST INCREMENT
2
writes every other increment to the post file beginning with the current increment.
Main Index
1434 POST INCREMENT
Define Increments between Writing on Post File
POST INCREMENT
05
writes five steps in the post file for the current loadcase. Based upon the progress check, the steps that
need output will be at about 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, and 100% of the progress report. Progress check is
based upon the total loadcase time, displacement, or energy.
Main Index
RESTART INCREMENT 1435
Define Increments between Writing on Restart File
RESTART INCREMENT Define Increments between Writing on Restart File
Description
This option allows you to alter the increments at which restart data is written to the restart data file. This
option has the same effect as the data in the second field of the RESTART model definition option. This
does not effect the RESTART LAST option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words RESTART INCREMENT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of increments between writing of the restart data.
It defaults to writing of restart data every increment.
Enter -1 to stop all writing of restart data until the next RESTART
INCREMENT option.
Notes: Restart data is automatically written to the restart file at the increments in which the
RESTART INCREMENT option occurs.
This value is not saved upon restart; it must be reset through the RESTART model
definition or RESTART INCREMENT option.
Example
RESTART INCREMENT
2
writes every other increment to the restart file beginning with the current increment.
Main Index
1436 ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition)
ADAPT GLOBAL Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

(History Definition)
Description
This history definition set provides control parameters used for the global remeshing. The REZONING
parameter must also be included in the parameter section.
The ADAPT GLOBAL history definition option can also be used to support boundary conditions assigned
to the remeshing body for 2-D, 3-D solid (tetrahedral) and 3-D shell. When applying boundary
conditions, the new table style input format is preferred.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the words ADAPT GLOBAL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of bodies to be remeshed.
6-10 2nd I Enter the unit number to read data; defaults to input.
The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated as a set for each body to be remeshed.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 2 for Advancing Front 2-D quad or mixed mesher.
Enter 3 for Delaunay 2-D mesher.
Enter 4 for 2-D Overlay mesher.
Enter 5 for 3-D Overlay Hexahedral mesher.
Enter 6 for Delaunay 3-D tetrahedral mesher.
Enter 7 for Relax mesh generator.
Enter 8 for Stretch mesh generator.
Enter 9 for Shave mesh generator.
Enter 10 for quadtree mesher. (FEMUTEC externally supplied)
Enter 11 for MD Patran 3-D tetrahedral meshers.
Enter 12 for triangular shell mesh generator.
Enter 18 for reading new mesh from .mesh file.
Note: jobid_b*.mesh file name is expected where * is the
remeshing body number and jobid is the job name.
Main Index
ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition) 1437
Format
Data
Enter 19 for quadrilateral shell mesh generator.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to remesh body (default).
Enter 2 if first relax mesh; if that fails, do full remeshing.
Enter 3 if relax mesh only.
11-15 3rd I Enter the body to be remeshed (default = 1).
16-20 4th I Enter the element type; default is to previous element type.
Note: This element type must also be specified on the
ELEMENTS parameter.
21-25 5th I Enter the number of criteria.
26-30 6h I Not used; enter 0.
31-35 7th I Echo mode for Overlay Hexahedral Meshing
0 Default; no message print out.
1 Some message print out.
100 Prints out more messages and saves all the meshing input files. For
details about these files, see Appendix I: 3-D Remeshing Files.
Repeat the 4th block for each criteria (5th field, 3rd data block).
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1 if increment frequency is used.
Enter 2 if element distortion is used (2-D only).
Enter 3 if angle based.
Enter 4 if aspect ratio based.
Enter 5 if strain change.
Enter 6 if penetration based.
Enter 7 if force remeshing at next opportunity.
Enter 8 if recession distance based.
6-10 2nd I Enter the frequency in increments if criteria 1.
11-20 3rd E For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle
for quadrilaterals. Default is 40°. The reference angle is the angle of the
current mesh without deformation. For 3-D analysis, enter minimum
volume ratio for hexahedral element. Default is 0.1.
For criteria 4, enter the maximum aspect ratio allowed. Default is 10.0.
For criteria 5, enter maximum change of equivalent strain allowed before
remeshing occurs.
Main Index
Format
Data
Default is 0.4.
For criteria 6, enter the penetration limit; default is 2*contact tolerance.
For criteria 8, enter the maximum element side reduction fraction before
remeshing occurs.
If current length divided by the original length < tolerance, remeshing
will occur.
21-30 4th E For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle
for triangles. Default is 40°. The reference angle is the angle of the current
mesh without deformation.
For 3-D analysis, enter minimum volume ratio for tetrahedral element.
Default is 0.1.
For criteria 8, enter the total amount of recession before remeshing occurs.
5th data block (Two-dimensional Advancing Front All Quadrilateral or Mixed Mesher)
Mesher type = 2
1-5 1st I Enter 0 for all quadrilateral mesh.
Enter 1 for mixed quadrilateral/triangular mesh.
Enter 2 for all triangular mesh.
16-25 3rd E Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments. (Default = 120°)
control.
If both the 2nd and 4th fields are default, the number of elements in the
previous mesh are used.
Default = 36.
36-45 6th E Outline smoothing ratio range 0 - 1.0; default = 0.8.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block (Two-dimensional Delaunay Triangular Mesher) Mesher type = 3
16-25 3rd E Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments (default 120°).
control.
Default = 36.
36-45 6th E Outline smoothing ratio range 0-1.0; default = 0.8.
5th data block (Two-dimensional Overlay Quadrilateral Mesher) Mesher type = 4
1-10 1st E Enter the element target length.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined one level
if necessary.
Enter 2 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined two levels
if necessary.
16-20 3rd I Enter 1 if elements in the interior can be merged together. Four elements
at a time will be merged.
control.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block (Three-dimensional Delaunay Tetrahedral Mesher) Mesher type = 6
1-10 1st E Enter target atom size (A).
11-20 2nd E Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0).
A value of 1 means that all element edges between elements not in the
same plane will be considered a hard edge.
21-30 3rd E Minimum edge length.
31-40 4th E Minimum edge angle.
5th data block (Relax Mesh Generator) Mesher type = 7
1-5 1st I Enter the number of relaxes to be performed.
6-10 2nd I Enter the global direction to relax in, default is all directions.
11-20 3rd E Enter the sweep distance, nodes closer than this distance will be swept
together.
5th data block (Stretch Generator) Mesher type = 8
1-5 1st I Enter the first corner node number, if zero, then the second field gives the
streamline region that is used to define the stretching orientation.
6-10 2nd I Enter the node increment in first direction, or the streamline
region number.
11-15 3rd I Enter number of nodes in first direction.
Enter the contact body which if nodes contact, they should not be
adjusted, if zero all nodes will be adjusted.
16-20 4th I Enter the node increment in second direction.
21-25 5th I Enter the number of nodes in second direction.
26-30 6th I Enter the node increment in third direction (3-D only).
31-35 7th I Enter the number of nodes in third direction (3-D only).
5th data block (Shave Mesh Generator) Mesher type = 9
This 5th data block is not required.
5th data block (Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher) Mesher type = 11
Main Index
Format
Data
56-60 7th I Enter 1 for volume control; default = 1.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block (Reading .mesh file) Mesher type = 18
1-10 1st I Enter mesh file type. Default = 3.
Enter 1 for mesh file in .t18 format
Enter 2 for mesh file in .feb format
Enter 3 for mesh file in .dat format (Marc input format)
5th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher) Mesher type = 5
1-10 1st E Enter target atom size (Ax). For cylindrical grid, Ar.
11-20 2nd E Enter target atom size (Ay). For cylindrical grid, AË.
21-30 3rd E Enter target atom size (Az).
31-40 4th E Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0). A value of 1 means
that all element edges between elements not in the same plane will be
considered a hard edge.
41-50 5th E Minimum edge length. If an edge length is less than this value, it will not
be considered as a hard edge.
51-60 6th E Minimum edge angle. If the angle between element faces is less than this
value, the common edge will not be considered as a hard edge.
71-75 8th I The template file name is specified on the 9th data block.
Enter 1 if grid-based template
Enter 2 if mesh-based template.
Enter 3 if kernel-based template.
6th data block (Two-dimensional Advancing Front or Delaunay Mesher [If refinement boxes
are used])
Main Index
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Body ID 1; if not zero, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.
16-20 4th I Body ID 2; if not zero, corner 2 will be attached to this rigid body.
6th data block (Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher [If refinement boxes
are used])
11-15 3rd I Body ID 1. If not 0, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.
16-20 4th I Body ID 2. If not 0, corner 2 will be attached to this rigid body.
6th data block (Two-dimensional Quadtree Mesher or 3-D Hexahedral Mesher)
1-5 1st I Number of boxes used for element refinement; entered on 10th series.
6-10 2nd I Enter number of levels to coarsen (merge) the interior elements.
26-30 6th I Enter 0 for no wedge elements
Enter 1 to allow wedge elements.
Enter to split hexahedral elements.
31-35 7th I Enter 1 to perform shuffle after mesh is snapped to contact surface
(default).
Enter 2 to avoid shuffle.
Main Index
Format
Data
36-40 8th I Enter 1 for Coons projection in meshing phase. This improves the
accuracy, but increases the cost.
41-45 9th I Number of shakes. Default is 10.
46-50 10th I Number of tries. Default is 5.
51-55 11th I Type of enhancement.
56-60 12th I Edge detection:
Enter 0 to detect new edges and use contact data.
Enter 1 to use contact data only.
Enter 2 to detect new edges.
Enter 3 to not use edge information.
Enter 4 to use previously detected edges, new edges, and contact
information.
Enter 5 to use contact data and previous edges.
Enter 6 to use user edges previously detected and new edges.
Enter 7 to use previous edge information only.
7th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only)
1-5 1st I Grid type:
Enter 1 for Cartesian (default).
Enter 2 for cylindrical.
Enter 3 for user defined.
6-10 2nd I For cylindrical grid:
Enter 1 for axis aligned with x-direction.
Enter 2 for axis aligned with y-direction.
Enter 3 for axis aligned with z-direction.
11-15 3rd I Maximum allowed refinement levels.
16-20 4th I First user-defined integer parameter.
21-25 5th I Second user-defined integer parameter.
26-30 6th I Third user-defined integer parameter.
8th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only [Version 11 only])
1-10 1st F For cylindrical grid, enter the angle of the part.
11-20 2nd F Enter the geometric refinement tolerance.
21-30 3rd F Enter the surface curvature tolerance.
Main Index
Format
Data
31-40 4th F First user-defined real parameter.
41-50 5th F Second user-defined real parameter.
51-60 6th F Third user-defined real parameter.
9th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only and Template-based
Mesh Requested)
1-32 1st A Enter the template name.
10th data block (Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used])
One can either specify that refinement is in a box based upon coordinate positions or between
two bodies.
Repeat for each box (1st field, 6th data block)
1-5 1st I Enter the refinement level.
0 = refinement in the box.
1 = minimum number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
2 = minimum number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
3 = minimum number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
4 = exact number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
5 = exact number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
6 = exact number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
11-15 3rd I Body ID 1. If refinement is in the box, corner 1 is attached to this
rigid body
16-20 4th I Body ID 2. If refinement is in the box, corner 2 is attached to this
rigid body
Main Index
1446 LOADCASE (History Definition)
Define Loadcase
LOADCASE (History Definition) Define Loadcase
Description
This option is used to specify the boundary conditions and initial conditions that are active in this
loadcase. This is used to activate or deactivate FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc., DIST LOADS,
DIST FLUXES, etc., POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc., FOUNDATION, FILMS, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL
VEL, INITIAL TEMP, etc. Boundary conditions not explicitly activated are deactivated.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word LOADCASE.
11-32 2nd A Enter the name of the loadcase (no blanks).
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of labels. This is required.
3rd data block (Repeat as many times as specified on 2nd data block.)
1-32 1st A Enter the boundary condition or initial condition label.
33-40 2nd I Enter flag to control application of this boundary condition.
This is applicable to FIXED DISP, DIST LOADS, POINT TEMP, and
CHANGE STATE only.
If a time dependent table (independent variable types 1,2,3,4) is applied to
this boundary condition, this flag is ignored and the table is used to control
the temporal variations.
Enter 0 if load is applied instantaneously,
or if boundary condition has been previously activated, it
remains constant (default).
linearly changed from current magnitude to prescribed
magnitude,
Main Index
LOADCASE (History Definition) 1447
Define Loadcase
Format
Data
loadcase: point load, distributed load or kinematic load is
linearly reduced in magnitude to zero,
loadcase:
magnitude to zero,
reduced to zero,
Enter -1 or -2 load is removed “gradually”.
point load, distributed load or kinematic load is linearly
reduced in magnitude to zero,
Main Index
1448 LOADCASE (History Definition)
Define Loadcase
Format
Data
Enter -3 load is removed “gradually”,
magnitude to zero,
reduced to zero,
point temperature is linearly ramped to the
initial temperatures,
change state is linearly ramped to the “initial state”.
Enter -4 Load is removed instantaneously,
point load, distributed load is instantaneously reduced to
zero,
reduced to zero,
point temperature is instantaneously changed to the initial
temperature,
change state is instantaneously changed to the
“initial state”.
When POINT TEMP is used, the initial temperatures are
prescribed in the INITIAL TEMP option.
When CHANGE STATE is used, the “initial temperatures”
are prescribed in the CHANGE STATE option.
Main Index
DMIG-OUT (History Definition) 1449
DMIG-OUT (History Definition) Output Control of Matrices
Description
This option allows you to control the output of matrices into DMIG format. These matrices may then be
read in using the DMIG option and activated using either the B2GG, B2PP, K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP,
and P2G options within Marc or within MD Nastran. To output the substructure matrix, use the
SUPERELEM option. In the case of element matrix, they can either be written in the Marc global
(MSC.Nastran Basic) or a local coordinate system. Both symmetric and nonsymmetric matrices are
supported. Note that the scalar factor associated with the STIFSCALE option is not applied to the element
matrices. This option may be repeated in each loadcase.
The files created associated with element matrices have the names jidname_dmigXX_inc, where:
Jidname is the job ID name

XX is the suffix associated with the matrix type
ST stiffness matrix
DF differential stiffness matrix
MS mass matrix
DM damping matrix
CO conductivity matrix
SP specific heat matrix
Inc is the increment number
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word DMIG-OUT.
The 2nd and 3rd, 4th and 5th, 6th and 7th, 8th and 9th, 10th and 11th, 12th and 13th data blocks are
entered as pairs as required.
2nd data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word STIFFNESS.
Main Index
1450 DMIG-OUT (History Definition)
Format
Data
Enter -2 to switch off writing DMIG output.
31-35 6th I Enter 0 to output global stiffness in untied state.
Enter 1 to output global stiffness in tied state.
3rd data block (only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given)
4th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIFF MATRIX.
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MASS MATRIX.
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Mass values below this
8th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DAMPING MATRIX.
Main Index
1452 DMIG-OUT (History Definition)
Format
Data
21-25 4th I Enter 1 to output in Marc global, Nastran basic (default).
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Damping values below this
10th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word CONDUCTIVITY.
31-35 6th I Enter 0 to output global conductivity in untied state.
Enter 1 to output global conductivity in tied state.
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Conductivity values below
Main Index
Format
Data
12th data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SPECIFIC.
36-45 7th E Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Specific heat values below
Main Index
1454 K2GG, K2PP (History Definition)
K2GG, K2PP (History Definition) Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix
Description
This option activates or deactivates a stiffness matrix defined by the DMIG option.
This option should be in the input file before the matrix is read in by the DMIG option.
Note: If transformation or rigid body rotations of the stiffness matrix are to occur, all degrees of
freedom of the nodes must appear on the DMIG file.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word K2GG or K2PP.
41-45 6th I Enter 0 to suppress the transformation to the stiffness matrix although a
transformation has been applied to the node (default - this implies that the
stiffness matrix used is provided in the transformed system).
Enter 1 to apply transformations to the stiffness matrix.
46-50 7th I Enter first node number used to rigidly rotate G stiffness.
51-55 8th I Enter second node number used to rigidly rotate stiffness matrix.
56-60 9th I Enter third node number used to rigidly rotate stiffness matrix.
Note: If only the seventh field is entered, this node must have six
degrees of freedom.
Main Index
K2GG, K2PP (History Definition) 1455
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the stiffness matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. A scale factor may be applied to the stiffness matrix specified here or to all stiffness matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CK2 entry.
4. If a transformation is to be applied to the stiffness matrix, the DMIG must contain all of the
degrees of freedom associated with the node to which the transformation is applied.
5. The 6th and 7th, 8th and 9th entries cannot change in the history definition section.
Main Index
1456 M2GG, M2PP (History Definition)
Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix
M2GG, M2PP (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix
Description
This option activates or deactivates a mass matrix defined by the DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word M2GG or M2PP.
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the mass matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain a 6.
4. M2GG input must either be in consistent mass units or the COEFFICIENT model definition option,
CM2 entry may be used.
Main Index
B2GG, B2PP (History Definition) 1457
Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix
B2GG, B2PP (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix
Description
This option activates or deactivates a damping matrix for dynamic or harmonic analysis defined by the
DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word B2GG or B2PP.
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the damping matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain the integer 6.
4. A scale factor may be applied to the damping matrix specified here or to all damping matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CB2 entry.
Main Index
1458 P2G (History Definition)
Selects Direction Input Load Vector
P2G (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Load Vector
Description
This option activates or deactivates a load vector defined by the DMIG option. This load vector may be
scaled by referencing a table which is a function of time.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word P2G.
21-25 3rd I Enter 0 or 1 to activate the load vector.
Enter -1 to deactivate the load vector.
31-35 5th I Enter a table ID.
Remarks
1. Terms are added to the load matrix before any constraints are applied.
2. The matrix must be rectangular in form (i.e., field 4 on DMIG entry - IFO -must contain the integer
9).
3. A scale factor may be applied to the vector specified here or to all vectors via the COEFFICIENT
model definition option entry.
Main Index
READ FILE 1459
Read Data Transfer File Used in Contact Decoupled Analysis
READ FILE Read Data Transfer File Used in Contact Decoupled Analysis
Description
This option allows you to define a data transfer file for reading in the analysis performed for tool stress
analysis. This option overrides all other loadcases in the same history block and should be placed at the
end of that history block before CONTINUE. This option forces analysis to use the loading data in the
transfer file and perform a single step loading.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words READ FILE.
2nd data block
1-80 1st A Enter a full data file name including extension.
Notes: The data file is expected in the run directory.

This option is used with DECOUPLING,3. If this option is not used, the default data transfer
file is jid.t70.
Main Index
1460 WRITE FILE
Write Data Transfer File Used in Contact Decoupled Analysis
WRITE FILE Write Data Transfer File Used in Contact Decoupled Analysis
Description
This option allows users to define a data transfer file for writing in contact decoupled analysis. The
contact forces are written in the file for every loading increment. This option should be placed in the
first loadcase.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words WRITE FILE.
2nd data block
1-80 1st A Enter a full data file name including extension.
Notes: The data file is created in the run directory.

This option is used with DECOUPLING,1/2. If this option is not used, the default data
transfer file is jid.t70.
Main Index
Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis
Chapt Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis

er 4 This section describes the application of incremental boundary conditions and/or specifies automatic
Histor multi-increment load control. These boundary conditions include:
• kinematic constraint of either zero or specified displacement;
y
• surface, volumetric or nodal loads;
Defini • thermal loads, and
tion • modification of tying constraint.
Optio These boundary changes are incremental in nature with the following exceptions:
ns 1. If the ELASTIC parameter is used, each load case is an independent analysis and the load value
are total values.
2. If the FORCEM user subroutine is used with the FOLLOW FOR parameter, the distributed loads
given in this routine are total values.
3. If the AUTO INCREMENT option is used, the total load is applied.
4. If the AUTO STEP option is used, the total load at the end of the time period is entered.
5. The table driven input is used to define boundary conditions.
There are five possibilities for automatic load control:
1. AUTO LOAD allows you to repeat the same incremental load a prescribed number of times.
2. AUTO INCREMENT divides the incremental mechanical load requested into a series of steps to
satisfy the user-prescribed tolerances.
3. AUTO THERM divides the incremental thermal load requested into a series of steps to satisfy the
user-prescribed tolerances.
4. AUTO STEP allows automatic time-stepping in dynamic analysis or in coupled thermal-stress
analysis with a choice of error criteria.
5. AUTO THERM CREEP divides the requested incremental thermal load into a series of steps and
carries out creep analysis between every two steps to satisfy your prescribed tolerances.
The BUCKLE option activates the calculation of the collapse loads and eigenvectors. Note that
eigenvalues can be extracted at any increment of the analysis.
The BACKTOSUBS option allows you to recover the displacements, strains, and stresses from
a substructure.
The RECOVER option allows the recovery of stresses and reactions for a specified mode during
modal analysis.
Main Index
1462 DISP CHANGE
Define Displacement Boundary Conditions
DISP CHANGE Define Displacement Boundary Conditions
input style. When using the table driven input for boundary conditions, the
variation with time or increment number should be specified in the table. If
this boundary condition is applied as a harmonic excitation, it may be
defined as a function of the frequency. The complete definition of the
boundary condition can be specified in the model definition section.
Description
This option allows new displacement boundary conditions to be specified or old displacement boundary
conditions to be changed. The exact numbering sequence of the boundary conditions is used in some
applications of this option. This numbering sequence is output after the boundary condition option is used
in the input data describing the problem.
This option is used for incrementation of fixed displacement components or for adding or removing
displacement constraints. Care should be taken when removing fixed displacement conditions to ensure
that the reaction forces are handled properly. The residual load correction should be used to reduce
reactions to zero after a constraint has been removed (the LOAD COR parameter might be necessary);
however, a constraint force might be too large for the piecewise linear analysis. Note that enough space
must be specified on the SIZING parameter in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow
for possible increased storage requirements arising from use of this option. Complex displacement,
velocity, or acceleration histories are more conveniently input by user subroutine FORCDT.
This option implies a proportional increment of 1.0. Any resetting of this factor (for example, the
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT option used before the next CONTINUE option), proportions these
displacement increments as well. When used in conjunction with harmonic analysis, this boundary
change is used for all excitation frequencies until a new boundary change is invoked. In a coupled
thermal-stress analysis, use DISP CHANGE for stress and TEMP CHANGE for thermal analysis.
When used in conjunction with harmonic analysis, this boundary change is used for all excitation
frequencies until a new boundary change is invoked.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the words DISP CHANGE.
Main Index
DISP CHANGE 1463
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to the number of boundary conditions (specified displacement
components to be changed or added). A negative number removes
boundary conditions from the end of the boundary condition list.
Note: A zero invokes the FIXED DISP option; a complete set of
necessary boundary conditions are then read, using the blocks
for that option except for that key word block.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 if excitation boundary conditions for harmonic analysis.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if harmonic boundary condition is input as magnitude and phase.
3a data block
Data block 3a is only entered if the number in columns 1 through 5 in data line 2 is positive and then
has the number of data lines required by data block 2.
1-5 1st I Number of the boundary condition being changed. This number is derived
from the “Fixed Boundary Condition Summary” table in the input echo of
a Marc run. Boundary conditions being added should be given labels
which increment the total count of boundary conditions properly.
Note: A boundary condition in the middle of the list can be removed
by specifying that labeled boundary condition as a repeat of
some other boundary condition.
6-10 2nd I Nodal point to be constrained.
16-30 4th F Specified displacement increment (real part).
31-45 5th F Specified displacement increment (imaginary part).
Data blocks 3b through 6 are only entered if the number in columns 1 through 5 in data line 2 in zero.
3b data block
For each set of boundary conditions use the 4th, 5th, and 6th data blocks.
4a data block
Use only if not Fourier Analysis.
block 5.
Main Index
1464 DISP CHANGE
Format
Data
21-30 3rd F Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 5.
A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified. The third
data block is read as 8E10.3.
4b data block
Use for Fourier analysis only.
1-5 1st I Enter the series number associated with this boundary condition.
6-15 2nd F Prescribed displacement for first degree of freedom listed in data block 5.
16-25 3rd F Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data block
5.
26-35 4th F Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 5.
36-45 5th F Prescribed displacement for fourth degree of freedom listed in data block
5.
46-55 6th F Prescribed displacement for fifth degree of freedom listed in data block 5.
5th data block
6th data block
Main Index
RELEASE NODE 1465
Define Nodes for which the Boundary Condition is Gradually Released
RELEASE NODE Define Nodes for which the Boundary Condition is

Gradually Released
.The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven
release node procedure is controlled through the LOADCASE history
definition option.
Description
This option removes a boundary condition constraint from a node in a gradual manner. This option is
similar to changing boundary conditions, but it allows the reaction force to be brought to a zero value
over a series of increments. The load is reduced in equal steps if used in conjunction with the
AUTO LOAD or DYNAMIC CHANGE option. The load is proportionally reduced to zero if used with the
AUTO STEP or AUTO INCREMENT option. If the RELEASE NODE and DISP CHANGE are given in the
same load incrementation section, the DISP CHANGE option should be given first.
Note: This option should not be applied to nodes in contact with rigid surfaces.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word RELEASE NODE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data; this must be given.
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of release data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to be released.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to be released.
Main Index
1466 GAP CHANGE
Redefine Data for Gap Elements
GAP CHANGE Redefine Data for Gap Elements
Description
This option allows you to modify the data associated with gap elements. This data includes gap closure
distance, gap elastic stiffness, contact coefficient of friction, and momentum ratio.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words GAP CHANGE.
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each set of gap data.
3rd data block
For a true distance gap, enter the minimum distance d between end points.
Note: If d > 0, the two end points are never closer than a distance |d|
apart. If d<0, the two end points are never farther apart than |d|.
21-30 3rd F KGAP, the elastic stiffness of the closed gap in the contact direction.
31-40 4th F KFRICTION, the elastic stiffness of the closed gap in the friction direction.
41-50 5th F User supplied momentum ratio for first gap node. Default: Marc
51-60 6th F User supplied momentum ratio for fourth gap node.
Default: Marc calculates this ratio internally.
61-65 7th I Enter 0 for fixed direction gap.
Enter 1 for true distance gap. Default is 0.
66-70 8th I Enter 0 if gap is open during increment 0.
Enter 1 if gap is closed during increment 0. Default is 0.
Main Index
GAP CHANGE 1467
Redefine Data for Gap Elements
Format
Data
4th data block
Enter a list of gap elements to be associated with this set of gap data.
Main Index
1468 TYING CHANGE
TYING CHANGE Define Tying Constraints
Description
This allows the number of tying constraints to be modified or a totally new series of tying constraints to
be introduced. This option modifies the constraints previously entered on the TYING option. If the
number of ties is increased, the TIE parameter is also required.
Notes: The use of TYING CHANGE can increase the bandwidth beyond that calculated for the
original space allocation and, therefore, Marc recalculates the nodal bandwidth and the
storage allocation for the assembly and solution part of Marc.
To completely remove a set of tying constraints, set column 5 to 1 and column 10 to 0.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words TYING CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set equal to 1 to reduce the number of tying constraints at this point of
the analysis.
Set equal to 2 to read in an entire new set of tying constraints.
If column 5 is set to 1, the new number of tying constraints has to be less
than the originally specified number of ties. The tying constraints are
deleted from the end of the list to the desired number of remaining ties.
The list is in the same sequence as the list of ties in the input file.
6-10 2nd I New number of tying constraints.
The data lines required by the tying option are read in next if column 5 of
this data line is set to 2, except for the key word block.
Main Index
DIST LOADS (History Definition) 1469
DIST LOADS (History Definition) Define Distributed Loads
Description
This block of data allows pressure (surface and volumetric) loads to be specified. These values are
incremental values per increment if a fixed time-step procedure is used or the total change over the
loadcase if an adaptive time-step procedure is used or the total value of the load if the ELASTIC parameter
is used. User subroutine FORCEM can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads.
Note: If FOLLOW FOR is included in the input file with DIST LOADS, the input about type of
load, magnitude etc. (data blocks 3 and 4) needs to be consistent in the model and history
definition options.
If FEATURE,203 is used, then the pressure on an edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is applied, unless all nodes of
that edge or face are in contact with another body. If separation occurs, the distributed load is reapplied
to the surface.
For most distributed load types, one enters a load per unit length (on beams or shell edges) or a load per
unit area. There are a few exceptions listed below:
Load Type
100 Centrifugal Enter ω2 (ω in radians/time)

102 Gravity Enter three values (Force/mass)
103 Centrifugal and Coriolis Enter ω2 (ω in radians/time)
104 Centrifugal Enter ω (ω in cycles/time)
105 Centrifugal and Coriolis Enter ω (ω in cycles/time)
106 Uniform Volumetric load Enter three values force/volume
107 Nonuniform Volumetric load Enter three values force/volume
110 Uniform load per unit length Enter three values force/length
111 Nonuniform load per unit length Enter three values force/length
Main Index
1470 DIST LOADS (History Definition)
Load Type
112 Uniform load per unit area Enter three values force/area
113 Nonuniform load per unit area Enter three values force/area
-10 to -21 General traction Enter three values force/area
Table 4-5 CID Load Types (Not Table Driven Input)

IBODY Specify Traction on Edge or Face User Subroutine
-10 1 No
-11 1 Yes
-12 2 No
-13 3 Yes
-14 3 No
-15 3 Yes
-16 4 No
-17 4 Yes
-18 5 No
-19 5 Yes
-20 6 No
-21 6 Yes
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Main Index
Format
Data
3a data block
Use if conventional Marc input, not Fourier, not applied to a cavity, and not Nastran PLOAD4 style.
times a thousand.
6-15 2nd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.
16-25 3rd F For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in
second coordinate direction
coordinate direction
3b data block
Use if distributed load is applied to cavity and not Fourier. The CAVITY parameter and CAVITY model
definition option is also required.
1-5 1st I Enter the value of ibody_cavity.
i bo dy _c a vi t y = ic a vi t y * 10000 + i c av it y _t y pe * 1000 + ib od y
where
ibody_cavity is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.
icavity is the cavity ID.
icavity_type is the cavity load type:
0: cavity is closed.
1: cavity is loaded with an applied pressure.
2: cavity is loaded with an applied mass.
9: cavity load is defined by the UCAV user subroutine.
ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see
library element description in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.)
6-15 2nd F If icavity_type = 1, enter incremental pressure.
If icavity_type = 2, enter incremental mass.
Main Index
1472 DIST LOADS (History Definition)
Format
Data
41-45 6th I Enter -1 if the cavity load is not active.
3c data block
Use if Fourier Analysis.
times a thousand.
6-15 2nd I Enter the series number associated with this load.
16-25 3rd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.
26-35 4th F For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in
3d data block
Use if Nastran PLOAD4 style input.
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of load plus 200. See library element
6-15 2nd F Enter P1, the magnitude of load at node 1 of face or edge.
16-25 3rd F Enter P2, the magnitude of load at node 2 of face or edge.
26-35 4th F Enter P3, the magnitude of load at node 3 of face or edge.
36-45 5th F Enter P4, the magnitude of load at node 4 of face or edge. Not required if
a triangular face.
46-55 6th F Enter first component of direction of load.
56-65 7th F Enter second component of direction of load.
Main Index
Format
Data
66-75 8th F Enter third component of direction of load.
76-80 9th I If positive, distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to
be used in the FORCEM user subroutine.) If the direction of the load is
given with respect to a COORD SYSTEM option, then enter the negative
of the coordinate system ID.
Notes: If the direction of the load is not defined, then the conventional Marc direction is used.
If the direction of the load is defined, then it is fixed and not updated even if the FOLLOW
FOR parameter is activated.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed loads.
Main Index
1474 POINT LOAD (History Definition)
Define Point Loads
POINT LOAD (History Definition) Define Point Loads
Description
This option allows nodal point loads to be specified. The nodal loads can be specified as fixed direction
loads or follower loads. For the fixed direction loads, the nodal forces are always specified in vector form.
For the follower loads, two options are possible: Option 1 is the MD Nastran style Follower Force
wherein the magnitudes of the nodal force and moment are specified and the direction is independently
specified using 2 or 4 nodes. Option 2 is the Mesh Based Automated Follower Force wherein the nodal
loads are specified in vector form and the initial load orientation with respect to the mesh is maintained
as the structure deforms. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
If the number of nodes which have point loads has been changed from the model definition option, you
must give an upper bound on the DIST LOADS parameter.
Note: The fourth field of the FOLLOW FOR parameter should be set to 1 when follower force
loads are used in the model. When this global parameter for follower force point loads is
turned on, the 5th data block is mandatory. The follower force option is not valid for fourier
loads or harmonic loads. Also, the follower force capability is not supported for point loads
specified through the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 to enter real harmonic load.
Enter 2 to enter imaginary harmonic load.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter logical unit number for input of point load data; defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to signal existence of more than one point load on the same node.
The loads are summed in this case.
Main Index
POINT LOAD (History Definition) 1475
Define Point Loads
Format
Data
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
Nodal Force magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.
Nodal Moment magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.
61-70 7th F Nodal load associated with seventh degree of freedom.
71-80 8th F Nodal load associated with eighth degree of freedom.
Note: Continuation data line is necessary and must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data lines are
needed if there are more than eight degrees of freedom per node in the analysis.\
The nodal load vector is valid for fixed direction force or for automated follower force.
Only the first two fields are used for the MD Nastran style follower force.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above point load is applied.
5th data block
Used only when 4th field of FOLLOW FOR parameter is 1.
For the MD Nastran style follower force, enter as many lines as there are nodes in the 4th data block.
1-5 1st I 0 = Fixed direction force
-1 = Automated follower force
First node for MD Nastran style follower force
6-10 2nd I Second node for MD Nastran style follower force
11-15 3rd I Third node for MD Nastran style follower force
16-20 4th I Fourth node for MD Nastran style follower force
Main Index
1476 AUTO LOAD
Define Equal Load Increments
AUTO LOAD Define Equal Load Increments
Description
This option is useful for nonlinear analysis with proportional loads. It generates a specified number
of increments.
For contact analysis, the TIME STEP history definition option is also needed with AUTO LOAD, so that
the incremental displacement of the contact body can be obtained from the velocity.
AUTO LOAD primarily controls mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions. For
uncoupled thermal stress analysis, AUTO LOAD can also be used to control state variables specified
by the THERMAL LOADS/CHANGE STATE options or point temperatures specified by the
POINT TEMP option.
No Table Driven Input

The load increment is the net result of the changes and scalings made to the load increment in all the
previous increments, plus the effect of any tractions, proportional increment options, etc., in the current
increment. The load increment is the same for all steps in this loadcase. These options should come after
the AUTO LOAD option. If the proportional increment option is not included, AUTO LOAD sets the
proportionality factor to a default of 1.
Table Driven Input

When this option is used with the table driven boundary conditions, it is only used to control the number
of increments, and with TIME STEP the total time period. The magnitude of the boundary conditions is
determined by the table.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-9 1st A Enter the words AUTO LOAD.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of times this load increment is to be applied.
6-10 2nd I Reassembly interval for stiffness matrices.
Defaults to whenever nonlinearity occurs.
Main Index
AUTO LOAD 1477
Define Equal Load Increments
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Maximum number of allowable time step cuts.
= 0 means no automatic restart from the previously converged step.
> 1 means maximum number of time step cutbacks allowed if
convergence is not achieved. Marc automatically restarts the analysis
after each cutback until the maximum number is reached.
Main Index
1478 INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition)
INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition) Define Inertia Relief
Description
This option defines the parameters necessary for conducting an inertia relief analysis. The parameters are
used to evaluate the Rigid Body Modes of the system. Once the modes are evaluated, the program
evaluates the inertia relief load vector which balances the external load vector acting on the system. For
more details of these procedures, you are referred to Inertia Relief in Chapter 5 in the Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information manual.
When inertia relief is no longer active in a current loadcase, an option can be provided to remove or retain
inertia relief loads from previous loadcases.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words INERTIA RELIEF.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Flag for Rigid Body Mode evaluation method:
0 - Inertia Relief is not active in current loadcase
3 - Support Method
6-10 2nd I Flag to retain/remove previous Inertia Relief Loading:
1 - retain load
-1 - remove load immediately (default)
-2 - remove load gradually
11-15 3rd I Number of Lines containing Support degree of freedom information
(default 1)
Note: Field 2 of data block 2 is only used if inertia relief is not active in the current loadcase (i.e.,
Field 1 of data block 2 is 0). Also, data block 3 is not necessary in this case.
Data block 3 is repeated as many times as specified in the 2nd data block, 3rd field.
3rd data block
Use only if 1st field of 2nd data block is 3 (Support Method)
Main Index
INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition) 1479
Format
Data
71-75 15th I Node ID 8.
Note: The degrees of freedom in fields 2, 4, etc. of data block 3 refer to the nodal degrees of
freedom that define the rigid body motion (r-constraint set). The associated nodes are defined
in fields 1,3, etc. The degrees of freedom that form part of the r-constraint set at any
particular node can be specified in combined form (e.g., 123, 135, etc.). If all degrees of
freedom at node N are to be part of this set, simply specify a negative number in the
associated degrees of freedom field.
Main Index
1480 BEGIN SEQUENCE
Initiate a Series of Repeated Load Cases
BEGIN SEQUENCE Initiate a Series of Repeated Load Cases
Description
This option begins a sequence of load cases. All history commands between the BEGIN SEQUENCE and
END SEQUENCE are repeated as often as specified here. The input lines are copied to a file named
jid.seq.
Note: This does not work with RESTART.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words BEGIN SEQUENCE.
11-15 2nd I Enter the number of times the following history definition commands are
to be repeated.
Main Index
END SEQUENCE 1481
Terminates a Series of Repeated Load Cases
END SEQUENCE Terminates a Series of Repeated Load Cases
Description
This option is used in conjunction with BEGIN SEQUENCE to terminate a series of repeated load cases.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words END SEQUENCE.
Main Index
1482 PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT
Define Proportional Increments
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT Define Proportional Increments
Description
Using this option, the previous load increment can be scaled up or down for use in the current load
increment. This is most frequently used in elastic-plastic analysis where the first load increment is scaled
up to the values that cause first yield. This option governs mechanical loads only; temperature changes
are independent of this proportioning.
The option can precede or follow all the other options in this optional series. If it precedes a DIST LOADS,
POINT LOAD, or DISP CHANGE option, these options reset the proportionality factor to 1.0. If it follows
either of these options, it also scales any nonzero load or displacement increments given in these options.
Note: If the SCALE parameter is used, the load increment that is applied in the first increment is
the scaled load multiplied by the value given in the second field of the second data block.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-22 1st A Enter the words PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Minimum number of cycles for each step of one increment; normally 1
(forces recycling n times). Every recycle might cause an assembly and
decomposition of the stiffness matrix. Marc automatically recycles if
convergence to tolerance is not achieved. The default value of recycles is
0. If this value is set above 1, more cycles are allowed but each increment
is forced to cycle at least n times before solution. Use caution that no
unnecessary recycling is being forced (for example, in AUTO LOAD).
Recycling is usually forced for the first few critical load steps to get
convergence and then resume normal condition.
6-20 2nd F Ratio of the current increment of load to the previous increment. Only
mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions are scaled.
Main Index
AUTO INCREMENT 1483
Define Automatic Load Stepping
AUTO INCREMENT Define Automatic Load Stepping
Description
This option allows automatic load stepping in a quasi-static analysis and is very useful for both geometric
(LARGE DISP) and material (elastic-plastic) nonlinear problems. The option is capable of handling
elastic/plastic snap-through phenomena; hence, the post-buckling behavior of structures can be analyzed.
However, the option cannot be used for thermal loading.
You have to specify in the DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD, and/or DISP CHANGE options the total loading
at the end of the loadcase, and Marc automatically generates the magnitude of each load step based on
an initial load step and the amount of nonlinearity occurring during the loading.
The length of the incremental displacement vector (C = ΔuTΔu) is based upon a number of parameters.
The analysis is stopped when the total load is reached or when the maximum allowed number of
increments is reached. In case of a snap-through problem, the loading can initially increase, decrease after
the buckle load has been reached, and increase if the stiffness increases in the post-buckled state. Within
the history definition data, the AUTO INCREMENT option can be used as often as desired. For more
When this option is used with table driven boundary conditions, the independent variable should not be
time, normalized time, increment number, or normalized increment number. If multiple loadcases are to
be used, the boundary condition should be a function of the loadcase number.
Notes: The option cannot be used for thermal loading; use the AUTO THERM option instead.
If this option is used for post-buckling analysis, the nonpositive definite flag in the
SOLVER model definition option has to be used. This option can be added upon restart.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-14 1st A Enter the words AUTO INCREMENT.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Fraction (α) of the total load increment that should be applied in the first
cycle of the first increment of this AUTO INCREMENT session resulting in
Δu1 = K-1αP.
T
C in = Δ u 1 Δ u 1 .
Main Index
1484 AUTO INCREMENT
Format
Data
Recommendations – If one knows nothing about the problem, this value
should be 0.01 to 0.02. If one knows that the initial behavior is relatively
linear and the material is elastic, then a higher value may be chosen.
Note that in the first increment of the Auto Increment Loadcase, an initial
arclength is calculated based upon the initial fraction of the load. This
value is used with the data provided in the 5th field of this data block to
determine the maximum change in arclength allowed in this loadcase.
Hence, if the fraction entered here is small and a small value is given in
the 5th field, small increments in displacement will occur.
11-15 2nd I Maximum number of increments during this AUTO INCREMENT session.
Recommendations – For elastic buckling problems, 500 increments is a
conservative number. For nonlinear material behavior, 1000 increments
should work for most problems.
16-20 3rd I Desired number of recycles per increment. Used to increase or decrease
load steps during AUTO INCREMENT session.
Default is 3. Please allow for more recycles via CONTROL model
definition option.
Recommendations – The desired number of recycles of 3 is good for
elastic buckling problems. For contact problems, especially if friction is
present, the number should be increased to 5. If the convergence criteria is
1% or displacement based convergence checking is preformed, increase
this number by 1.
Note that this number does not control the number of iterations in this
increment, but rather controls how the target arclength will be changed in
the next increment. If the actual number of iterations is less than this
number, the target arclength will be increased in the next increment. If the
actual number of iterations is greater than this number, the target arclength
will be decreased.
If the value is too high, the target change in arclength becomes too large,
but it will hit the upper bound based upon the 5th field.
21-30 4th F Maximum fraction of the total load that can be applied in any increment
of this AUTO INCREMENT session. Default is 1 if no contact is present.
Default is 0.01 if contact is present.
If the 10th field is 1 or 2, the default is 0.1 for all simulations.
Recommendations – For true buckling simulations, this number should be
between 0.01 and 0.025. For mildly nonlinear problems, a value of 0.10
may be used.
Main Index
AUTO INCREMENT 1485
Format
Data
31-40 5th F Maximum multiplier of applied arc length in norm of displacement vector
to initial arc length. Cmax/Cin
Defaults to maximum fraction of load divided by initial fraction of load.
Comments - This number, along with the 1st field, is used to determine the
maximum change of arclength in an increment. It is a critical number for
the case of stability analyses; unfortunately, it is hard to determine.
Recommendations – Typically, a value of 10 should be used. The problem
with the default is that the initial arclength based upon the first increment
is usually very small, because the initial fraction of load is 1% and the
structure is elastic at that point. Hence, the default results in a large
number of small displacements.
41-50 6th F Total time period to be covered; to be used in conjunction with
contact analyses.
Default is 1.0.
51-60 7th F Fraction of the initial arclength to define a minimal arclength. Cmin/Cin
Default is 0.01.
Recommendations – The default is acceptable; as the arclength is small,
the minimal arclength will be very small.
61-65 8th I Arclength root procedure:
1 = Crisfield (quadratic constraint).
2 = Riks/Ramm (linear constraint).
3 = Modified Riks/Ramm (linear constraint) (default).
4 = Crisfield; switch to Modified Riks/Ramm if no real root found.
5 = Scaled Riks/Ramm.
Recommendations – The default (Modified Riks/Ramm is good. Though,
the Crisfield method with the root selection based upon the sign of the
singularity ratio - 3rd data block, 1st field appears to be very effective.
66-70 9th I Maximum number of allowable time step cuts.
= 0 means no automatic restart from the previously converged step.
> 1 means maximum number of time step cutbacks allowed. Marc
automatically restarts the analysis after each cutback until the
maximum number is reached.
Recommendation - A value of 3 should be used.
Main Index
1486 AUTO INCREMENT
Format
Data
71-75 10th I Enter 1 or 2 for new Crisfield approach and new defaults.
Enter 2 if the 3rd data block is to be entered. This is only available
beginning with 2005r3a release.
76-80 11th I Enter a 0 if the maximum fraction of the total load is constant over the
loadcase (default).
Enter a 1 if the maximum fraction of the total load can vary over the
loadcase. This requires the 4th data block.
3rd data block (only used if 10th field of 2nd data block is a 2)
1-5 1st I For the Crisfield method, select the method to choose the roots.
Enter 1 for method used in 2005r3 and previous versions based upon the
angle between Δ u n – 1 and Δ u n such that the displacement is in the same
direction (default).
Enter 2 for selection of root based upon the sign of the singularity ratio.
Enter 3 for root selection based upon Falzon.
Recommendation – Method 2 appears to be the best for problems that do
not have Lagrange multipliers in them; i.e., no Herrmann elements.
6-10 2nd I Enter method to modify arclength in next increment.
Enter 1 for method used in 2005r3 and pervious versions.
The target arclength, λ n + 1 = icydes/ncycle * λ , where icydes is the desired
number of cycles (3rd field, 2nd data block) and ncycle is the number of
cycles required in the nth increment.
Enter 2 for gradual approach of changing target arclength.
λ n + 1 = factor * λ n , where
factor = 1.5 if 3 < ratio < 5
factor = 1.25 if 1 < ratio < 3
factor = ratio if 0.1 < ratio < 1
factor = 0.1 if ratio < 0.1
where ratio is icydes/ncycle.
Recommendation – Use method 2.
Main Index
AUTO INCREMENT 1487
Format
Data
16-25 4th F Enter a target incremental displacement. The maximum allowable
arclength will be calculated based upon the maximum displacement due to
the initial load and this value. This is an alternative to used the 5th field,
2nd data block and is more physical.
Recommendation – For shell buckling, enter the thickness of the shell.

26-30 5th I Enter 1 to allow the analysis to continue even if the load has reached 100%
of the magnitude, but in the opposite direction.
Enter 2 to terminate analysis if load has reached 100% of the magnitude,
but in the opposite direction. This is the default if this data block is
included.
Note: Upon restart, before reading history definition data, this AUTO INCREMENT session is
finished. The maximum number of increments allowed, the desired number of recycles, and
the maximum step size for this session can be changed upon restart using the REAUTO model
definition option.
4th data block
Only required if 11th field of 2nd data block is a one.
1-10 1st E Maximum fraction of total load to be applied between (MFA) 0%
and L1%.
11-20 2nd E First percentage cutoff L1.
21-30 3rd E MFA between L1% and L2%.
31-40 4th E Second percentage cutoff L2.
41-50 5th E MFA between L2% and L3%.
51-60 6th E Third percentage cutoff L3.
61-70 7th E MFA between L3% and L4%.
71-80 8th E Fourth percentage cutoff = 100%.
Main Index
1488 AUTO STEP
Adaptive Load Step Control
AUTO STEP Adaptive Load Step Control
Description
This option allows control of the automatic time/load stepping procedure. In this procedure, the time step
is adjusted based upon the calculated value of a parameter (strain increment, plastic strain increment,
creep strain increment, stress increment, strain rate, strain energy increment, temperature increment,
displacement increment, rotation increment) versus a user-defined maximum. More than one criterion
can be specified. If the criteria are not satisfied within an increment, recycling occurs with a reduced
time/load applied. After the increment has converged based upon tolerances specified on the CONTROL
values, the data given here controls the next increment.
The enhanced variant (flagged with a 1 in the 9th field of the second data block) allows the scheme to be
used with or without a user specified criterion. The default auto step scheme is available for backward
compatibility only. The enhanced auto step scheme should be always used for MSC.Marc 2001 and
beyond. The time step is adjusted based upon the number of recycles in addition to the user criteria. More
details on the scheme can be found in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 11.
The recycling criterion for the enhanced auto step scheme works as follows: For every increment,
depending on the starting time step and the minimum time step (specified in the 5th field of the 2nd data
block) a maximum number of recycling related cutbacks, N max r , are automatically determined by the
program. If an increment converges in less than the desired number of recycles specified in the 8th field
of the 2nd data block, the time step for the next increment is scaled up using the factor specified in the
6th field of the 3rd data block S u . If the desired number of recycles are exceeded in the current increment,
the time step is scaled back with an automatically determined factor and the actual recycling related
cutback count, N r , is updated by 1. The value for the automatic scaleback factor is at least 1 ⁄ S u .
For each additional cutback, the magnitude of the scaleback factor is progressively increased such
that the minimum time step specified in the 5th field of the 2nd data block is reached on or before N r
max
reaches Nr .
For the enhanced auto step scheme, user criteria can be prescribed by explicitly defining the criteria
(defined in data blocks 4 and 5), or by allowing the program to automatically add appropriate physical
criteria (flagged by a 1 or -1 in the 12th field of the 3rd data block), or by doing both. In the last case, the
program will only add automatic criteria if there are no competing explicitly defined criteria already.
Details of the automatic criteria that are added can be found in Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information, Chapter 11.
The user criteria for the enhanced auto step scheme works as follows: After every iteration, the user
criteria are checked to see if they are satisfied. If not, the time step is scaled back and the user-criteria
related cutback number, N c , is updated by 1. The smallest factor that can be used for reducing the time
step is specified by the 3rd field of the 2nd data block. The maximum allowable number of user-criteria
related cutbacks, Ncmax, is specified by the 2nd field of the 3rd data block.
For each scaleback (recycling related or user-criterion related), the increment is started from the
beginning. Scalebacks also occur if any of the following occurs: maximum number of iterations reached
Main Index
AUTO STEP 1489
(exit 3002), elements going inside out (exits 1005, 1009), or a contact node slides off the end of a rigid
body (exit 2400). In this case, the time step is divided by a minimum of 2. The enhanced auto step scheme
is available for mechanical, thermal and thermo-mechanically coupled analyses.
When using table driven input, the 10th field of the 3rd data block is used to determine if the peaks in the
tables are to be exactly satisfied. If the table controlling load is based on experimental data, it is suggested
that a -1 be used, which will remove the constraint and effectively smooth out the time history of the load.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words AUTO STEP.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the initial time step.
Defaults to 1% of total time period for enhanced scheme. Input is required
for old scheme.
Recommendations – If one knows nothing about the problem, this value
should be 0.01 to 0.02 of the total time period. If one knows that the initial
behavior is relatively linear and the material is elastic, a higher value may
be chosen.
11-20 2nd E Enter the total time period.
Defaults to 1.0 for enhanced scheme.
21-30 3rd E Enter the smallest ratio between steps.
Default is 0.1.
31-40 4th E Enter the largest ratio between steps.
Default is 10.0.
Recommendation – Enter a value of 2.0.
41-50 5th E Enter the minimum time step.
Defaults to total time/maximum number of steps.
51-60 6th E Enter the maximum time step.
Defaults to half of the total time period.
Recommendation – The default is acceptable except for buckling analyses
where a value of 0.025 is more appropriate.
Main Index
1490 AUTO STEP
Format
Data
61-65 7th I Enter the maximum number of steps allowed.
Recommendations – For elastic buckling problems, 200 increments is a
conservative number. For nonlinear material behavior, 500 increments
should work for most problems. For extremely nonlinear contact
problems, 1000 should be used.
Normally, a very large number can be used to be conservative.
66-70 8th I Controls the iteration criteria. This criteria is not used if the damping
energy criteria type 5 is used.
Enter the desired number of recycles per increment.
Enter -1 if the iteration criteria are not to be used.
Recommendations – The desired number of recycles of 3 is good for
elastic buckling problems or mildly nonlinear problems. For contact
problems, especially if friction is present or highly material nonlinear
problems, the number should be increased to 5. If the convergence criteria
is 1% or displacement based convergence checking is performed, increase
this number by 1.
Note: If the damping method selected in the 10th field is set to 4, this
entry is not used and should be set to -1.
71-75 9th I Enter 1 to read an extra data block below.
76-80 10th I Control of the addition of artificial damping to improve stability.
-1 No damping considered.
0 When the time step reaches the minimum time step, increase the time
step by a factor of 10 and add damping similar to method 4.
1 Turn on artificial damping if time step is below minimum time step.
Reduce time step by a factor of 1000. Damping is based on factor
specified in 9th field of data block 3.
2 Always turn on artificial damping. Damping is based on factor
specified in 9th field of data block 3.
4 Always turn on artificial damping. Damping is based upon the
estimated damping energy and the estimated total strain energy.
Estimates are based upon the first increment in this loadcase.
Artificial damping strain rate is also controlling the time step.
5 Do not add damping but use the damping energy to control the
time step.
Recommendation – For buckling or other stability problems, it is
recommended that a 4 be entered.
Main Index
AUTO STEP 1491
Format
Data
AUTOSTEP utilizes the desired number of iterations unless the damping
energy criteria type 4 or 5 is used.
The 3rd data block is only present if the 9th field of the 2nd data block is equal to 1.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of states to put on the post file. These states will be
equally spaced in time. By default, the increment based variant as given
by the POST option will be used.
6-10 2nd I Enter the maximum number of times to cut down the time step in each
increment to satisfy any user-specified criteria. Defaults to 10.
11-15 3rd I Enter 0 to treat user criteria as limits on behavior within an increment.
Enter 1 to treat user criteria as both limits on behavior within an increment
and as a target to adjust the time step for the next increment.
Recommendation – If user criteria are used, it is recommended that a value
of 1 be entered here.
16-20 4th I Indicate finish criterion for thermal or coupled analysis.
Set to 1 to finish the transient time period when all nodal temperatures fall
below the value given in the 5th field (see below).
Set to -1 to finish the transient time period when all nodal temperatures
exceed the value given in the 5th field (see below).
Set to 0 to complete transient time period without any check on
temperatures reached.
21-30 5th E Finish temperature value to be used in conjunction with flag set above.
31-40 6th E Enter scale factor for time step changes other than changes due to user
criteria. Defaults to 1.2.
41-45 7th I Enter flag to override CREEP and DYNAMIC parameters as specified in
the parameter section for this load case.
0 Do not override parameters.
1 Turn off CREEP and DYNAMIC.
2 Turn off CREEP.
3 Turn off DYNAMIC.
46-50 8th I Enter table ID for the table that is used for scaling the damping factor. This
field is only relevant for artificial damping method 2.
Recommendation – This is an advanced feature that would allow the
amount of damping to change with time. It is recommended that this field
be set to 0.
Main Index
1492 AUTO STEP
Format
Data
51-60 9th E Enter damping factor for artificial damping. Amount of damping depends
on the damping flag in the 10th field of data block 2.
If it is 1, the damping matrix is scaled by setting this factor to be the ratio
of the initial damping energy to the initial strain energy (defaults to 1e-5).
If it is 2, the damping matrix is directly scaled by this factor.
If it is 4, the estimated total damping energy in the loadcase will be
this factor times the estimated total strain energy. Default value of 2.e-4
is used.
Recommendation - Use the defaults.
61-65 10th I Enter flag for reaching instances in time from load tables.
-1 Ignore points in tables.
0 Reach peak (and valley) points in active load tables (default).
1 Reach all points in active load tables.
Recommendation – If there are just a few points, one should enter 0; but if
the time history of the boundary condition is generated from experimental
data with many points, one should enter -1.
66-70 11th I Enter 1 to put states reached by the above flag on the post file.
71-75 12th I Enter flag to determine if automatic physical criteria should be added and
how analysis should proceed if they are not satisfied.
2 Do not add automatic physical criteria. Stop when any user criteria are
not satisfied (default).
1 Add automatic physical criteria. Stop when any user criteria are not
satisfied.
-1 Add automatic physical criteria. Continue when any user criteria are
not satisfied.
-2 Do not add automatic physical criteria. Continue when any user
criteria are not satisfied.
Recommendation - If no user criteria are specified, this should be set to 1.
The automatic criteria are:
a Δ ε < 0.5 if large displacement analysis.
b Δ ε p < 0.1 if PLASTICITY,3 or PLASTICITY,5 or large strain.
c Δ ε cr ⁄ ε el < 0.5 if creep analysis.
d Δ σ ⁄ σ < 0.5 if creep analysis.
e Δ σ t h ⁄ σ < σ < 0.5 if thermal stress analysis.
Main Index
AUTO STEP 1493
Format
Data
75-80 13th I Enter flag to check if dynamic integration error checks should be made
while determining time step (only valid for single-step Houbolt and
Newmark-Beta operators).
0 Skip error check (default).
1 Include error check.
Recommendation – Including error check typically results in smaller time
step. For larger models, it is cost effective to enter 0, but physical based
criteria should be included to limit the time step.
Note: For dynamic analysis, controlling the time step based upon the
number of iterations or the damping energy are not very useful.
Repeat 4rd and 5th data blocks in pairs for each criterion.
4th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the criterion ID:
Enter 1 for strain increment. (Elements)
Enter 2 for plastic strain increment. (Elements)
Enter 3 for creep strain increment. (Elements)
Enter 4 for normalized creep strain increment. (Elements)
Enter 5 for stress increment. (Elements)
Enter 7 for strain energy increment. (Elements)
Enter 8 for temperature increment. This is only for heat transfer or thermal
part of coupled analysis. (Nodes)
Enter 9 for displacement increment. (Nodes)
Enter 10 for rotation increment. (Nodes)
Enter 12 for normalized stress increment (Elements)
Enter (13 x 100 + state variable id) for state variable increment. Criterion
ID 13, 1300, or 1301 can all be used for temperature. (Elements)
Recommendation For buckling or post buckling analysis, it is very useful
to cure Criteria type 9 with a displacement increment equal to the shell
thickness.
For large strain plasticity problems, it is very useful to use criteria type 2
with a requirement of change in plastic strain to be 0.01 or, at most 0.05.
6-80 2nd I Enter set name of elements/nodes to which this criterion is to be applied.
Main Index
1494 AUTO STEP
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st E ΔYI.
11-20 2nd E XMAX1.
21-30 3rd E ΔY2.
31-40 4th E XMAX2.
41-50 5th E ΔY3.
51-60 6th E XMAX3.
61-70 7th E ΔY4.
71-80 8th E XMAX4.
For criteria 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, the time step is adjusted based upon:
if X ≤ XMAX1 ΔY calculated/ΔY1
if XMAX1 < X < XMAX2 ΔY calculated/ΔY2
if XMAX2 < X < XMAX3 ΔY calculated/ΔY3
if XMAX3 < X ΔY calculated/ΔY4
where
Criterion X ΔY
1 strain strain increment
2 plastic strain plastic strain increment
3 creep strain creep strain increment
4 creep strain creep strain increment/elastic strain
5 stress stress increment
7 strain energy strain energy increment
8 temperature temperature increment
9 displacement displacement increment
10 rotation rotation increment
12 stress stress increment/stress
13*100+ n state variable n increment of state variable n
Main Index
TERMINATE 1495
Terminate Loadcase
TERMINATE Terminate Loadcase
Description
This option terminates the current loadcase defined by the AUTO LOAD and AUTO STEP options if the
termination criterion is satisfied.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word TERMINATE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of termination criteria; maximum of 10 allowed.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Termination Criteria Type.
Enter 1 if termination occurs when a percentage of the boundary nodes are
in contact.
Enter 2 if termination occurs when the maximum force on a rigid body
is exceeded.
Enter 3 if termination occurs when the displacement of the rigid body
exceeds the allowed displacement.
Enter 5 if termination occurs when the distance between the reference
points of two rigid bodies is less or greater than the specified value.
Enter 6 if termination occurs, when any displacement in body, is greater
than the specified value.
Enter 7 if termination occurs, when the displacement at the node, is
greater than the specified value.
6-10 2nd I Enter the body number.
For criterion type 7, enter the node number.
11-15 3rd I For criterion type 1, enter the percentage of nodes to be in contact for
termination; default = 100.
For criterion type 2, enter direction 1/2/3 for the x, y, z global directions
For criterion type 5, enter the second body.
Main Index
1496 TERMINATE
Terminate Loadcase
Format
Data
For criterion type 6 or 7, enter the degree of freedom.
For criterion type 6 or 7, enter -1 if the total translational displacement.
For criterion type 6 or 7, enter -2 if total rotation.
16-25 4th F For criterion type 2, enter the critical force.
For criterion type 3, enter the critical maximum displacement.
For criterion type 5, enter the critical distance. If the value is positive, the
termination occurs when the distance is less than the value. If the value is
negative, the termination occurs when the distance is greater than the
value in a positive sign.
For criterion type 6 or 7, enter the critical distance (rotation).
Main Index
SUPERPLASTIC 1497
SUPERPLASTIC Superplastic Forming Analysis
Description
This option allows you to define the various parameters needed in superplastic forming analysis. The
pressure is modified such that the calculated strain rate is approximately equal to the target strain rate.
This option is not supported with the table driven input format.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SUPERPLASTIC.
2nd data block
This data block controls the prestress options.
1-10 1st I Prestress function
1 For a constant application of prestress for a given number of
increments.
2 If the prestress is ramped down linearly to 0 in a given number of
increments from the prescribed value.
11-20 2nd I Number of increments for which prestress is applied.
21-30 3rd F Prestress to be applied (applicable for membrane elements only).
3rd data block
This data block controls the process control parameters.
1-10 1st F Target strain rate.
11-20 2nd F Strain rate sampling cutoff factor - the use of this factor depends on the
sampling method specified by field 5 (ignores any value above this given
number for calculating the average strain rate - this helps in ruling out
numerical aberrations).
21-30 3rd F Minimum pressure for this loadcase.
31-40 4th F Maximum pressure for this loadcase.
Main Index
1498 SUPERPLASTIC
Format
Data
41-45 5th I Strain rate sampling method:
0 Sampling is done over elements with strain rate > cut-off factor (field
2) * target strain rate. If no elements exist, sampling is done over all
elements.
1 (default) Averaging is done over elements with strain rate > cut-off
factor (field 2) * maximum strain rate. The cut-off factor can vary
between 0 (all elements will be sampled) and 1 (only elements with
maximum strain rate will be sampled). Recommended value range for
cut-off factor is 0.7 to 0.9 (default is 0.8). The cut-off factor is also
used to smooth out the maximum strain rate in the mesh.
4th data block
This data block controls the process driving parameters.
1-10 1st I Number of sets to define pressure orientation.
Repeat the 5th and 6th data blocks for the number of sets defined.
5th data block
1-10 1st I Pressure orientation
6th data block
Enter list of distributed load indices.
7th data block
This data block controls the analysis termination criteria.
Enter the fraction of the total nodes that must come into contact before the
analysis is stopped.
Main Index
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition) 1499
Define Thermal Loads
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition) Define Thermal Loads
Description
This option allows input of temperature and other state variables (see STATE VARS parameter). Used
here, the loads are incremental; in that, they are in addition to any loads previously applied. The loads are
total loads only if the ELASTIC parameter is used.
You can specify either a uniform or nonuniform change in temperature (or other state variables). If a
nonuniform change is desired, the change of every state variable at every layer of every integration point
of every element must be specified. In this case, Marc calls the CREDE user subroutine for every element
in the mesh. (See the THERMAL LOADS model definition option for more information.)
If the Fourier decomposition method is being used to analyze an arbitrarily loaded axisymmetric
structure, the THERMAL LOADS option must be invoked separately for each Fourier series term that has
temperatures (state variables) associated with it. If there is no variation of these variables in the
circumferential direction, only the zeroth term of the series should be specified.
This option is not supported with the table driven input format; use INITIAL STATE and CHANGE STATE
or INITIAL TEMP and POINT TEMP instead.
Note: On a restart run, any THERMAL LOADS option before the END OPTION reads data.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words THERMAL LOADS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to 1 if uniform increment temperature (state variable) increment is
applied to all elements.
Set to 2 if nonuniform incremental total temperature (state variable) is read via the
Set to 3 if nonuniform total temperature (state variable) is read via the
Main Index
1500 THERMAL LOADS (History Definition)
Define Thermal Loads
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-80 1st F Include only if the first field of data line 2 is 1; enter the uniform
increments in temperature and any additional state variables in (8E10.3)
format is applied to all elements.
4th data block
1-80 1st F Include only if the first field of data line 2 is 2 or 3, and using the default
CREDE user subroutine. Temperature and state variable data to be read in
by CREDE. All lines should contain 8 values in (8E10.3) format; do not
start a new data line for each element.
Main Index
AUTO THERM 1501
Specify Data for Automatic Thermal Loading
AUTO THERM Specify Data for Automatic Thermal Loading
Description
This option is intended to allow automatic, static, elastic-plastic, thermally loaded stress analysis based
on a set of temperatures defined throughout the mesh as a function of time. The temperatures are
presented to Marc through the CHANGE STATE option using any of the input possibilities of that option,
and Marc then creates its own set of temperature steps based on a temperature change tolerance provided
on this option. You should recall that the elastic-plastic stress analysis is time independent, but that the
strain increments should be small to obtain accuracy in the integration of the rate equations of plasticity.
As a guideline, the maximum thermal strain should be restricted to 20%–50% of the strain to cause yield,
depending on how much free thermal expansion is possible. Based on this argument, a temperature
σ
change tolerance of 20%–50% of -------- , where σ is the yield stress, E is Young’s modulus and α is the
Eα
coefficient of thermal expansion, should be set. Given your temperature change tolerance on this option,
Marc proceeds through your definition of the history of the temperatures provided on the CHANGE
STATE set, and linearly subdivides or merges together the user-defined steps so as to conform to the
tolerance.
The automatic thermally loaded analysis continues until all steps indicated on the CHANGE STATE
option are completed, so that a typical automatic thermally loaded analysis would have as input:
AUTO THERM
30., 0, 0, 4.0,
CHANGE STATE
1, 3, 0, 19, 1, 15, 1,
In the above case, a temperature change tolerance of 30 is set for the creation of temperature steps by
Marc; the total transient time in thermal analysis is 4.0. The data in the CHANGE STATE option indicates
that the temperatures are stored in a formatted post file (unit 19) and there are 15 sets of temperatures on
the file.
Mechanical Loading - No Table Driven Input

If no DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD, or PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT options appear with the AUTO
THERM set, all mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions are held constant during the AUTO
THERM. However, DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD, PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT, or DISP CHANGE can
be included in the set – the mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions, which are then defined,
are assumed to change in proportion to the time scale of the temperature history defined by the CHANGE
STATE option and are applied accordingly, on the basis that the increments of load and displacement
correspond to the end of the transient time (TOTIM) of the AUTO THERM input.
Main Index
1502 AUTO THERM
Specify Data for Automatic Thermal Loading
Mechanical Loading - Table Driven Input

When table input is used and either FIXED DISP, POINT LOAD, or DIST LOADS references a table
which is a function of time, the total mechanical boundary condition will be evaluated based upon the
current time.
Notes: All load options must be specified before AUTO THERM.

The CHANGE STATE option must follow the AUTO THERM option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words AUTO THERM.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the maximum temperature change to be used per step of stress
analysis. Marc linearly subdivides steps or merges steps together to create
increments which are close to, but do not exceed, this tolerance.
11-15 2nd I Enter the maximum number of increments to be allowed in this AUTO
THERM. If this number of increments is exceeded before the temperature
history is completed, Marc ends. This is intended as a protection to avoid
excessive increments in the case of a data error. Default value is 50
increments if set to 0.
16-20 3rd I Reassembly interval for element matrices.
21-30 4th F Total transient time, TOTIM. This is used to proportionally scale the
incremental boundary conditions.
If TOTIM is equal to zero, mechanical loads given with this group are
applied for each increment in this group. If TOTIM is unequal to zero, then
the mechanical loads specified in this group are linearly scaled.
If the temperatures are obtained from a previous heat transfer
analysis/post file, enter the total time period of the heat transfer analysis.
31-40 5th F Maximum time step allowed per step of stress analysis. Marc linearly
subdivides steps or merges steps to create increments which are close to,
but do not exceed, this tolerance. Both the maximum temperature change
allowed and the maximum time step allowed tolerances must be satisfied.
Main Index
CHANGE STATE (History Definition) 1503
Change State Variables
CHANGE STATE (History Definition) Change State Variables
variation with time or increment number should be specified in the table.
The complete definition of the boundary condition can be specified in the
model definition section.
Description
This option provides various ways of changing the state variables throughout the model. State variables
are initialized in the INITIAL STATE model definition set. The number of state variables per point is
defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default is one with temperature always being the first state
variable at a point. If more than one state variable per point has been assigned, this option can be used
repeatedly to change the values of all state variables. The default value is no change if this option is not
used. In this option, the values of the state variable at the end of the current increment are read in. When
the temperature is being defined, the following points should be noted:
• For “history following analysis”, the thermal strains are based on temperature change during this
step.
• For elastic re-analysis (ELASTIC parameter), the thermal strains are always based on temperature
change between the initial, stress free temperature field and the values read in here.
• The AUTO LOAD option is available for specifying a time-varying history of state variables. The
value of the total state variable at the end of each increment is specified.
• The AUTO THERM option is available for automatic control of a nonlinear (elastic-plastic)
temperature loaded stress problem, to be used in conjunction with this option.
• The THERMAL LOADS option can be used as an alternative to input the change of temperature.
Either incremental or total temperatures can be specified using this option.
• The AUTO THERM CREEP option is available for automatic control of a thermally loaded
elastic-plastic-creep problem and is to be used in conjunction with this option.
• The AUTO STEP option is available for automatic control of a nonlinear thermally loaded
problem, to be used in conjunction with this option. Time steps based on default recycling
criteria and/or user-defined physical criteria are used to determine appropriate state variable
increments.
Four ways of changing any state variable through CHANGE STATE are possible:
• Read a range of elements, integration points, and layers, and a corresponding state variable value
for the end of the current step.
• Read the state variable values for the end of the current step through user subroutine NEWSV.
Main Index
1504 CHANGE STATE (History Definition)
• Read the state variable values for the end of the current step from a named step of the post file
output from a previous heat transfer analysis with Marc. With this option, Marc assumes direct
interpolation must be provided separately the user. Providing state variables through the thermal
post file is currently supported for AUTO LOAD, AUTO THERM, AUTO THERM CREEP and
AUTO STEP. It is not supported other adaptive stepping procedures.
• For AUTO LOAD, a one-to-one correspondence between the thermal
increments on the post file and the mechanical increments is assumed
between the user-defined starting and ending post increments.
• For AUTO THERM or AUTO THERM CREEP, based on the user-defined allowable
temperature change, the thermal increments on the post file can be
subdivided into many mechanical increments.
• For AUTO STEP, thermal values on the post file are used to determine
interpolated values of state variables for the mechanical run. The
interpolation is based on how the current mechanical loadcase time compares
with the times read in from the thermal post file. Use of a state variable
criterion to control the temperature increment is optional. The starting
increment to be read in from the thermal post file (5th field of the 2nd data
block) is user-defined. The number of sets of input to be read in (6th field of
the 2nd data block) is not supported for AUTO STEP. Instead, the thermal
information is read till the mechanical loadcase time or the thermal post file
is completed. The post file is rewound and read from the beginning at the
start of each loadcase or at any time a cutback is used by the AUTO STEP
algorithm to reduce the current time step.
• Read a list of elements, integration points, and layers, and a corresponding state variable value.
It should be noted that the end of the current step is interpreted as the end of the current increment for
fixed stepping procedures (AUTO LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, CREEP INCREMENT) and as the end of
the loadcase for adaptive stepping procedures (AUTO STEP, AUTO THERM, AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO
CREEP).
Note: Using this option, total state variable values are input. From Marc 2001 onwards, the
incremental change in the state variables is reset to 0 before each new increment if the
AUTO LOAD option is used.
Main Index
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the state variable identifier for the state variable being changed
(1,2,3,etc.) 1 = temperature. If more than one state variable is being used,
the STATE VARS parameter must be included.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to change the state variable via the 3rd and 4th data blocks below.
In this case, the third field must also be defined, and the sixth field if the
AUTO THERM option is in use.
Enter 2 to change the state variable via the NEWSV user subroutine. This
subroutine is now called in a loop on all the elements in the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the new values of the state variable from a post file written
by a previous heat transfer analysis. In this case, the fourth and fifth field
must be defined, and the sixth field if the AUTO THERM option is in use.
Enter 4 to change the state variable via data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 below.
gives the number of data blocks set in data blocks 3 and 4 used to input
the new value of the state variable (optional).
16-20 4th I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. Then. this entry defines the
unit number from which the post file information from the previous heat
the step number on the heat transfer run post file to be read as the definition
of the new value of the state variable at the end of the current step. This
is currently only supported for AUTO LOAD, AUTO THERM, and
AUTO STEP.
26-30 6th I Only used if the AUTO LOAD or AUTO THERM options are in use. Give
the number of sets of input to be read to define the temperature history.
Not used for AUTO STEP.
31-35 7th I Enter 1 if formatted post file is used.
Main Index
1506 CHANGE STATE (History Definition)
Format
Data
Set to 1 to suppress printout of state variable values that are defined
in NEWSV.
41-45 9th I Enter the post code number to be read into this state variable; default is 9
(temperature).
3rd data block
16-20 4th I Last integration point with this value (11-15 and 16-20 can only be bigger
than 1 if ALL POINTS parameter is used).
26-30 6th I Last layer or cross-section point with this value (21-25 and 26-30 can
only be bigger than 1 for beam or shell elements).
4th data block
1-10 1st F New value of this state variable for the above range of points at the end of
the current step.
5th data block
6th data block
7th data block
applied.
8th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
of the 2nd data block is -1.
9th data block
Main Index
1508 POINT TEMP (History Definition)
POINT TEMP (History Definition) Define Point Temperatures
Description
This option defines temperatures at nodal points for an uncoupled thermal stress problems at the end of
the increment.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
to input.
3rd data block
file. Set to 1.
Main Index
POINT TEMP (History Definition) 1509
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the temperature.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the temperature.
1st field.
6th data block
2 - Node IDs
7th data block
data block.
Main Index
1510 CHANGE PORE (History Definition)
CHANGE PORE (History Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
Definition)
Description
This option provides various ways of changing the pore pressure throughout the model. This option is
only used in uncoupled soil analysis.
Given below are four ways of providing the pore pressures.
1. Read a range of elements, integration points and layers, and corresponding pore pressures for the
end of the current step.
2. Read the pore pressure values for the end of the current step through the NEWPO user subroutine.
3. Read the pore pressure values for the end of the current step from a named step of the post file
output from a previous pore pressure analysis with Marc. With this option, Marc assumes direct
4. Read a list of elements, integration points and layers, and corresponding pore pressure.
Note: On this option, total pore pressures are input.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to change the pore pressure via data block 3 below. In this case,
the third field must also be defined.
Enter 2 to change the pore pressure via the NEWPO user subroutine. This
subroutine is then called in a loop on all the elements in the mesh.
Main Index
CHANGE PORE (History Definition) 1511
Format
Data
Enter 4 to change the pore pressure via data blocks 5, 6, 7 and 8 below.
gives the number of block sets in series 3 and 4 used to input the new value
of the pore pressure (optional).
16-20 4th I Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. Then, this entry defines the
unit number from which the post file information from the previous pore
pressure run is read.
the step number on the pore pressure run post file to be read as the
definition of the new value of the pore pressure at the end of the
current step.
of pore pressure values that are defined in the NEWPO user subroutine.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are only input if the second field above set to 1. In that case, the number of block
3rd data block
16-20 4th I Last integration point with this value can only be bigger than 1 if the ALL
POINTS parameter is used.
26-30 6th I Last layer or cross-section point with this value.
4th data block
1-10 1st F New value of the pore pressure for the above range of points at the end of
the current step.
5th data block
Main Index
1512 CHANGE PORE (History Definition)
Format
Data
1-10 1st F Pore pressure for the points given below at the end of the current
increment.
6th data block
7th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above pore pressure is to be
applied.
8th data block
be applied.
Main Index
TIME STEP 1513
Define Time Step
TIME STEP Define Time Step
Description
This option allows you to enter a time step for static analysis.This option can be used to prescribe the
time step in a contact analysis. This time step can be used in conjunction with strain rate effects (CREEP,
VISCO ELAS) option. This time step is used for this step or series of steps if AUTO LOAD is used. This
time step is not scaled by the proportional increment option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words TIME STEP.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Enter time step.
Main Index
1514 RESET TIME
Resets Time to Zero
RESET TIME Resets Time to Zero
Description
In multi-stage forging, it is often useful to consider each stage beginning at time = 0.0. This facilitates
the definition of tool velocities, and is useful for postprocessing. This option allows you to reset the time,
at the beginning of the increment.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words RESET TIME.
2nd data block
1-10 1st E Enter the time at beginning of step.
Default is 0.0.
Main Index
BUCKLE 1515
Specify Buckling Analysis
BUCKLE Specify Buckling Analysis
Description
This sets a flag for the buckling analysis and solves the eigenvalue problem by the inverse power sweep
method or the Lanczos method. The number of modes and the procedure used is specified on the
BUCKLE parameter. This option can be exercised after every increment of load. The LARGE DISP
parameter should be included for nonlinear collapse analysis. This option can also be used to control
perturbation analyses. The perturbation is added to the coordinates in the increment following the
eigenvalue extraction.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word BUCKLE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of iterations allowed.
Not used for Lanczos. Enter 0.
Default is 40.
eigenvalue is less than the tolerance.
Not used for Lanczos. Enter 0.
Default is 0.0001.
16-20 3rd I Enter the harmonic number for Fourier buckling; positive number results
in cosine terms, negative number results in sine terms.
Default is zero.
21-25 4th I Enter 1 for buckling perturbation to occur in the next increment.
26-30 5th I Enter mode number to be used in the perturbation analysis.
Enter negative number of modes if multiple modes are used in the
perturbation analysis.
31-40 6th F Enter the scale factor to be multiplied with the normalized mode and
added to the coordinates in the next increment.
Main Index
1516 BUCKLE
Specify Buckling Analysis
Format
Data
41-50 7th F Solution scaling factor for linear analysis.
If the applied load in increment 0 is too large, the Lanczos procedure may
fail; this number is used to scale the solution for numerical reasons. The
collapse load will be output based upon the total load applied.
3a data block is used only if 5th field of the 2nd data block is negative. Use one line for each mode.
3a data block
1-5 1st I Mode number.
6-15 2nd F Scale factor.
Main Index
SUPERELEM (History Definition) 1517
SUPERELEM (History Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface

Definition)
Description
This option triggers Marc to perform the Craig-Bampton method of Component Mode Synthesis and
generate a Modal Neutral File (MNF) that can be uploaded into MD Adams models to represent flexible
components. The option allows direct definition of the boundary or interface degrees of freedom. The
option also allows automatic definition of interface degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact
with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint
analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are not known a priori. It also allows the specification
of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The
two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies are consolidated into one node with six degrees of
freedom before exporting to the MNF.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to generate MNF.
3a data block
4a data block
3b data block
1-5 1st I Enter -1.
4b data block
Main Index
1518 SUPERELEM (History Definition)
Format
Data
3c data block
1-5 1st I Enter -2.
4c data block
Main Index
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) 1519
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) Create DMIG of Substructure
Description
This option allows the creation of a DMIG file containing the stiffness associated with the degrees of
freedom specified here. This DMIG may be subsequently read into Marc or Nastran. The option allows
direct definition of the degrees of freedom. The option also allows automatic definition of interface
degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful
for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are
not known a priori. It also allows the specification of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes
of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies
are consolidated into one node with six degrees of freedom before exporting to the DMIG.
This option can only occur once in the analysis. However, it may be used in either the model definition
or the load increment section.
The DMIG will be written to file jidname_dmigst_inc, where:
jidname is the job name

inc is the increment number
Notes: If a node is subsequently going to be transformed, all degrees of freedom of all nodes must
be specified here.
If a rigid body rotation is to be applied to the DMIG, all degrees of freedom of all nodes
must be specified here.
This option may only be used with direct solution techniques.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Main Index
1520 SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition)
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Enter 1 to create DMIG file.
Enter 3 to create a DMIGB file.
DMIGB uses a different output format, which results in a smaller file

(about one third of the size of a DMIG file). When a DMIGB file is
included in a Marc analysis, the program uses a column-wise storage
instead of a full in-core matrix storage. This memory reduction can be
important for large DMIG files. The DMIGB format can be used only
as input for a Marc analysis; it can not be used in a Nastran analysis.
26-30 6th I Enter 0 if all stiffness terms written to DMIG.
Enter 1 if terms less than x f ⋅ K1 are filtered out.
Enter 2 if terms less than xf are filtered out.
31-40 7th F Enter the value used for filtering xf ; default = 1.e-8.
41-50 8th A Enter the name of the matrix; default is KAAX which is limited to
eight characters.
3a data block
4a data block
3b data block
1-5 1st I Enter -1.

4b data block
3c data block
Main Index
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) 1521
Format
Data
1-5 1st I Enter -2.
4c data block
Main Index
1522 ASSEM LOAD
Assemble Equivalent Nodal Force Vector
ASSEM LOAD Assemble Equivalent Nodal Force Vector
Description
This option signals Marc to compute only the equivalent nodal force vector for all loads defined in this
loadcase. These loads are not applied to the finite element model and no matrix solution takes place for
this loadcase.
In the case of Marc - MD Adams MNF interface, Marc projects the computed equivalent nodal force
vectors onto the modal space and exports them to the MNF as modal loads. MD Adams models can then
make use of these modal loads; e.g., by scaling them up or down, before applying them in MD Adams.
For MNF generation, all ASSEM LOAD loadcases should appear in the input file before any actual
loading is applied to the component.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ASSEM LOAD.
Main Index
ACTIVATE 1523
Activate Elements
ACTIVATE Activate Elements
Description
This option allows you to activate elements which were deactivated either before the start of the analysis
or during the analysis. Elements, which were deactivated before analysis, have zero internal stress upon
activation. Elements, which were used earlier and deactivated during analysis, have an internal stress
which is equal to the state when they were deactivated or zero if requested on the DEACTIVATE option.
Elements can be activated and deactivated as often as needed. Note that activation of elements results in
an increase in the size of the stiffness matrix.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ACTIVATE.
11-20 2nd A Enter the word POST to update the post file geometry so the activated
elements are shown.
21-30 3rd A Enter the word NOPO to not update the post file geometry; the activated
2nd data block
1-80 1st I Enter the list of elements that are to be activated at this time.
Main Index
1524 DEACTIVATE (History Definition)
Deactivate Elements
DEACTIVATE (History Definition) Deactivate Elements
Description
The DEACTIVATE option has two choices.
Option A
This option is the default method. This option allows the manual deactivation of elements during the
course of an analysis, which can be useful to model ablation, excavation and other problems. By default,
after the elements are deactivated, they demonstrate zero stresses and strains on the post file. However,
internally, they retain the stress state in effect at the time of deactivation and this state can be
postprocessed or printed at any time. At the later stage in the analysis, the elements can again be activated
with the ACTIVATE history definition option. As an alternative, one can use the UACTIVE user
subroutine. The stress state is restored in the post file when the elements are reactivated. If this is not
desirable, stress/strain states can be permanently set to zero at deactivation by using the additional
command line option STRESS/STRAIN.
Option B
This option allows one to automatically deactivate elements according to the cutter path defined by either
Automatically Programmed Tools (APT) source or Cutter Location (CL) data files. This is useful for
modeling NC machining (for example, metal cutting or material removal) processes. Marc has an
interface to translate the cutter path information into a series of elements to be deactivated. The
deactivated elements are not postprocessed or printed. The post file only includes the elements that
remain in the model. This method can be chosen by setting the second field of the first data block as
CUTTING and specifying the APT/CL file name in the second data block. APT/CL data files should be
located in the same directory as the input data file jid.dat.
Notes: The typical definition of APT source file or CL file is shown as below:
cutterpath.apt
cutterpath.ccl
where the extensions .apt or .ccl are used to distinguish these two types of cutter path
data. For example, if the Marc input data specifies the cutter path file name as:
cutterpath without either the extension .apt or .ccl, the Marc program looks for
either type of cutter path file by adding the extension .apt or .ccl. The first file found
existing in the input data directory is used for the analysis.
This option must be combined with MACHINING parameter.
In the current release, this option can only be used with the AUTO LOAD option.
Main Index
DEACTIVATE (History Definition) 1525
Deactivate Elements
Format
Format
Data
Option A
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word DEACTIVATE.
11-20 2nd A Enter the word STRESS to set the stresses to zero.
21-30 3rd A Enter the word STRAIN to set the strains to zero.
31-40 4th A Enter the word POST to update the post file geometry so deactivated
41-50 5th A Enter the word NOPO to not update the post file geometry; the deactivated
elements are shown.
2nd data block
This is needed for Option A.
1-80 1st I Enter the list of elements to be deactivated at this time.
Option B
1st data block
1-10 1st I Enter the word DEACTIVATE.
11-20 2nd A Enter the word CUTTING if MACHINING feature is to be used.
2nd data block
This is needed for Option B.
1-80 1st A Enter the name of the file that defines the cutter path.
3rd data block
1-10 1st I Enter 0 for NC Machining (default)
11-20 2nd I Enter 0 if no time synchronization between the time defined by the load
case definition option and the real calculated time based on cutter motion
defined by the APT/CL file.
Enter 1 if time synchronization is needed between the time defined by the
load case definition option and the real calculated time based on cutter
motion defined by the APT/CL file. In this case, a factor is applied to the
calculated time based on cutter motion.
21-30 3rd I Enter the ID of the rigid contact body which is defined by cutter if the user
wants to visualize the cutter motion of the cutting process.
Default is set to 0.
Main Index
1526 DEACTIVATE (History Definition)
Deactivate Elements
Format
Data
31-40 4th I Enter 0 if the time spent for rapid cutter motion is to be ignored.
Enter 1 if the adaptive remeshing is to be performed for every cutter
motion step.
Enter 2 if the adaptive remeshing is only performed at the end of the
cutting process.
41-50 5th I Enter 0 if the speed of the rapid cutter motion is the same as the regular
cutting speed of cutter.
Enter 1 if the speed of the rapid cutter motion is provided by the user.
51-65 6th F Enter the rapid motion speed of cutter if the fifth field is equal to 1.
Main Index
FOUNDATION (History Definition) 1527
Define Foundation Spring Force for Elements
FOUNDATION (History Definition) Define Foundation Spring Force for Elements
Description
This option allows the specification of elements and associated foundation spring force to be used with
the elastic foundation option (Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information). Nonlinear foundations are
available via the USPRNG user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of foundation data. Defaults to input.
3rd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each list.
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of elastic foundation; this is the same
parameter as used in the DIST LOADS option. See Marc Volume B:
Element Library for a description of the possible distributed load types for
each element type in Marc.
6-15 2nd E Spring stiffness per unit surface area (or per unit length for
beam elements).
4th data block
1-80 1st Enter a list of elements to which the above foundation is applied.
Main Index
1528 CHANGE RIGID
Define New Geometry For a Rigid Contact Surface
CHANGE RIGID Define New Geometry For a Rigid Contact Surface
Description
This option allows for the input of a new geometry for an existing rigid contact surface. The procedure
used to control the surface motion (displacement controlled, velocity controlled, or load controlled) will
not change. The position of the reference point of the rigid surface is also not changed. It is good
engineering practice to first move the rigid surface away from deformable bodies such that it is not in
contact before changing the geometry of the rigid body. Otherwise, penetration may occur. This option
may be used multiple times to change different contact bodies.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the word CHANGE RIGID.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Body number (must be an existing rigid body).
6-10 2nd I Number of sets of geometrical data to be input for this rigid body (NETTY).
11-15 3rd I Not used enter 0
16-20 4th I Enter 1 if geometry will be defined with respect to original position of this
body (default if 0 is entered).
Enter 2 if geometry will be defined with respect to current position of this
body.
3rd data block
1-32 1st A Contact body name (optional)
A. For 2-D Rigid Body (Line-Segment)
4a data block
The 5a data block is repeated once for each point entered.
Main Index
CHANGE RIGID 1529
Format
Data
5a data block
B. For 2-D Rigid Body (Circular Arc)
4b data block
The 5b data block is repeated four times.
5b data block
C. For 2-D Rigid Body (Spline)
4c data block
The 5c data block is repeated for each point to be entered.
5c data block
D. For 2-D Rigid Body (NURBS)
4d data block
The 5d data block is repeated NPTU times for control points
5d data block
The 6d data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
Main Index
1530 CHANGE RIGID
Format
Data
6d data block
The 7d data block is repeated NPTU times for knot vectors.
7d data block
E. For 3-D Rigid Body (Ruled Surface)
4e data block
(JPOINT2).
The 5e data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for ruled surface.
5e data block
F. For 3-D Rigid Body (Surface of Revolution)
4f data block
generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2 method to describe the circular arc (METH).
Main Index
CHANGE RIGID 1531
Format
Data
(NDIV1).
direction (NDIV2).
The 5f data block is repeated NPOINT times for surface of revolution.
5f data block
6f data block
G. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface)
4g data block
The 5g data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for Bezier surface.
5g data block
Main Index
1532 CHANGE RIGID
Format
Data
H For 3-D Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch)
4h data block
NSEG.
The 5h data block is repeated NSEG times for patches not entered by means of user subroutines
5h data block
The 6h data block is repeated NPOINT times for patches not entered by means number of user
6h data block
I. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Poly-Surface)
4i data block
The 5i data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for poly-surfaces.
Main Index
CHANGE RIGID 1533
Format
Data
5i data block
J. For 3-D Rigid Surface (NURBS)
4j data block
The 5j data block is repeated (NPTU ∗ NPTV) for control points.
5j data block
The 6j data block is repeated (NPTU ∗ NPTV) for homogeneous coordinate.
6j data block
The 7j data block is repeated (NPTU + NORU) + (NPTV + NORV) for knot vectors.
7j data block
For each trimming curve, data blocks 8j, 9j, 10j, and 11j.
8j data block
The 9j data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
Main Index
1534 CHANGE RIGID
Format
Data
9j data block
The 10j data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
10j data block
The 11j data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
11j data block
K. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Cylinder)
4k data block
5k data block
surface.
L. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Sphere)
4l data block
5l data block
Main Index
CHANGE RIGID 1535
Format
Data
Main Index
1536 ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D)
Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
D)
Description
This option allows for the input of a new rigid contact surface. The new body will be velocity controlled.
If a load controlled rigid body is added the node number(s) having the degrees of freedom associated with
the rigid body must already exist in the model. This option may be used multiple times to add more than
one new rigid surface.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the word ADD RIGID.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Body number (must be 1 higher than the current number of bodies).
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if body is a symmetry plane.
position of this node is at the center of rotation given in the 5th data block.
degrees of freedom. The position of this node is at the center of rotation
given in the 5th data block.
Both nodes of a load-controlled body may use the TRANSFORMATION or COORD SYSTEM option to
allow for movement in the user-defined directions. Note also that it is not necessary for the user-defined
directions at the nodes to be identical to each other.
Main Index
Format
Data
The load controlled body node(s) may have FIXED DISP/POINT LOAD or connections with
environment/other structures using the SPRINGS option.
1: rigid body,
3: symmetry body
3rd data block
4th data block
5th data block
31-40 4th F Angular velocity or angular position about local axis through center
of rotation.
Main Index
Format
Data
71-80 8th F Friction Coefficient.
center of rotation.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the third component of velocity, or target position
36-40 8th I Enter the table id for the friction coefficient.
8th data block
31-40 4th F Body temperature (TBODY).
9th data block
(HBL).
Main Index
Format
Data
31-40 4th E Enter the body pressure.
1-5 1st I Not used; enter 0t.
16th data block
1
k1
1
11-20 2nd F ----- reactive boundary coefficient.
c1
17th data block

1
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with ----- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
1-
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with ---- reactive boundary coefficient.
c1
The 18th through 21st data blocks are repeated for as many geometrical data as required (NETTY).
Main Index
Format
Data
18a data block
19a data block
18b data block
19b data block
18c data block
19c data block
The 18d data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
18d data block
Main Index
Format
Data
19d data block
20d data block
The 21d data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
21d data block
Main Index
1542 ADD RIGID (2-D)
ADD RIGID (2-D) Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the word ADD RIGID.
2nd data block
Main Index
Format
Data
1: rigid body,
3: symmetry body
3rd data block
4th data
block
5th data block
6th data block
The 6th data block is only required for a mechanical-displacement analysis.
of rotation.
Main Index
Format
Data
71-80 8th F Friction coefficient.
7th data block
8th data block
( H BL ).
9th data block
10th data block
1-
k1
1-
c1
11a data block
The 12a data block is repeated once for each point entered.
Main Index
Format
Data
12a data block
11b data block
12b data block
11c data block
12c data block
11d data block
The 12d data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
12d data block
Main Index
Format
Data
13d data block
The 14d data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
14d data block
Main Index
Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
ADD RIGID with TABLES Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
(3-D)
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words ADD RIGID.
2nd data block
Main Index
Format
Data
1: rigid body,
3: symmetry body
3rd data block
4th data block
5th data block
6th data block (Only required if a mechanical-displacement analysis.)
of rotation.
Main Index
Format
Data
71-80 8th F Friction Coefficient.
7th data block (Only required if a mechanical-displacement analysis.)
center of rotation.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the third component of velocity, or target position
8th data block
31-40 4th F Body temperature (TBODY).
9th data block
(HBL).
1-5 1st I Enter the table id associated with (HBL).
Main Index
Format
Data
1-10 1st F Not used.
31-40 4th F Body voltage.
31-40 4th E Enter the body pressure.
16th data block
1
k1
1
c1
17th data block

1
1-5 1st I Enter the table id associated with ----- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
1-
6-10 2nd I Enter the table id associated with ---- reactive boundary coefficient.
c1
The 18th through 25th data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NETTY).
Main Index
Format
Data
A. For 3-D Rigid Body (Ruled Surface)
18a data block
(JPOINT2).
The 19a data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for ruled surface.
19a data block
B. For 3-D Rigid Body (Surface of Revolution)
18b data block
generator (NPOINT).
(NDIV1).
direction (NDIV2).
The 19b data block is repeated NPOINT times for surface of revolution.
Main Index
Format
Data
19b data block
20b data block
C. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface)
18c data block
The 19c data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for Bezier surface.
19c data block
D. For 3-D Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch)
18d data block
surface) NSEG.
Main Index
Format
Data
The 19d data block is repeated NSEG times for patches not entered by means of user subroutines
19d data block
The 20d data block is repeated NPOINT times for patches not entered by means number of user
20d data block
E. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Poly-Surface)
18e data block
The 19e data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for poly-surfaces.
19e data block
Main Index
Format
Data
F. For 3-D Rigid Surface (NURBS)
18f data block
The 19f data block is repeated (NPTU ∗ NPTV) for control points.
19f data block
The 20f data block is repeated (NPTU ∗ NPTV) for homogeneous coordinate.
20f data block
The 21f data block is repeated (NPTU + NORU) + (NPTV + NORV) for knot vectors.
21f data block
For each trimming curve, data blocks 22f, 23f, 24f, and 25f.
22f data block
The 23f data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
23f data block
The 24f data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
Main Index
Format
Data
24f data block
The 25f data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
25f data block
G. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Cylinder)
18g data block
19g data block
surface.
H. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Sphere)
18h data block
19h data block
Main Index
ADD RIGID (3-D) Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words ADD RIGID.
2nd data block
Main Index
Format
Data
1: rigid body,
3: symmetry body
3rd data block
4th data block
6-10 2nd I Number of sets of body entities, NSURGN, to be input for this rigid body.
11-15 3rd I For rigid bodies, enter 1 if body is a symmetry plane.
contact is used. Note that in this case, results are dependent upon the order
in which contact bodies are defined.
Main Index
Format
Data
1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
5th data block
Default = 0.0.
Default = 0.0.
61-70 7th F Third component direction cosine of local axis.
Default = 1.0.
6th data block
7th data block
The 7th data block is only required for a mechanical-displacement analysis.
Main Index
Format
Data
rotation.
8th data block
9th data block
( H BL ).
10th data block
11th data block
1-
k1
1
c1
Main Index
Format
Data
A. For 3-D Rigid Body (Ruled Surface)
12a data block
16-20 4th I Entity type of the second surface generator (child) of the
surface (JPOINT2).
The 13a data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for ruled surface.
13a data block
B. For 3-D Rigid Body (Surface of Revolution)
12b data block
generator (NPOINT).
(NDIV1).
(NDIV2).
The 13b data block is repeated NPOINT times for surface of revolution.
Main Index
Format
Data
13b data block
14b data block
C. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface)
12c data block
The 13c data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for Bezier surface.
13c data block
D. For 3-D Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch)
12d data block
surface) NSEG.
Main Index
Format
Data
The 13d data block is repeated NSEG times for patches not entered by means of user subroutines
13d data block
The 14d data block is repeated NPOINT times for patches not entered by means number of user
14d data block
E. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Poly-Surface)
12e data block
The 13e data block is repeated (NPOINT1 ∗ NPOINT2) times for poly-surfaces.
13e data block
Main Index
Format
Data
F. For 3-D Rigid Surface (NURBS)
12f data block
The 13f data block is repeated (NPTU ∗ NPTV) for control points.
13f data block
The 14f data block is repeated (NPTU ∗ NPTV) for homogeneous coordinate.
14f data block
The 15f data block is repeated (NPTU + NORU) + (NPTV + NORV) for knot vectors.
15f data block
For each trimming curve, data blocks 16f, 17f, 18f, and 19f.
16f data block
The 17f data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
17f data block
The 18f data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
Main Index
Format
Data
18f data block
The 19f data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
19f data block
G. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Cylinder)
12g data block
13g data block
surface.
NOTE: If the radius is negative value in 4th field the normal of cylinder
H. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Sphere)
12h data block
13h data block
Main Index
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition) 1565
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition) Define Contact Table
Description
a gap exists.
initial contact.
Main Index
1566 CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition)

Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Enter 2 if the 5th, 8th, 9th, 16th, 17th, 18th, and 19th data blocks are to be
read to control contact, ungluing, and multiphysics. Default is 0.
The 3rd through the 22nd data blocks are entered once for each set of bodies to be input.
3rd data block
occurs ( DQ NE A R ). A 0 entered here indicates that near contact behavior
is not included.
degrees of freedom.
Main Index
Format
Data
71-75 9th I Enter 0 (default) if during initial contact, a projection onto the contact
been set.
Enter 0 (default) if a node should not separate.
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the contact tolerance.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the near contact distance.
5th data block
3rd data block).
18th data block).
meaning are:
A = 1: the outside edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) of continuum elements are included in the
B = 1: both top and bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B = 2: only bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the
B = 3: only bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the
B = 4: only top faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B = 5: only top faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B = 6: both top and bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the
direction/thickness contribution of shell elements as entered on the
CONTACT option.
Note: The choice B = 6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only
C = 0: neither beam elements nor shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C = 1: beam elements are included in the boundary description (allowing for beam-to-
beam contact).
Main Index
Format
Data
C = 10: shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C = 11: both beam elements and shell edges are included in the boundary description.
If beam-to-beam contact is not activated on the CONTACT option, the default value
of C is 0, otherwise the default value is 1.
6th data block
21-30 3rd F Enter the interference closure amount, normal to the contact surface.
friction stress is given by min ( μ σ n ,σ limit ) , with μ the friction coefficient
ratio is 2.
Main Index
Format
Data
7th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the contact separation threshold.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the friction coefficient.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the interface closure amount.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the friction stress limit.
8th data block
m n
9th data block

1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with normal stress to break glued contact.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with tangential stress to break glued contact.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with exponent of normal stress term.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID associated with exponent of tangential stress term.
10th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the contact heat transfer coefficient. (HCT)
11-20 2nd F Enter the convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior. (HCV)
21-30 3rd F Enter the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for near
behavior. (HNC)
behavior. (BNC)
41-50 5th F Enter the surface emissivity. (ε)
51-60 6th F Enter the separation distance dependent thermal convection
coefficient. (HBL)
Main Index
Format
Data
11th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the contact heat transfer coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the heat transfer coefficient for near behavior.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID for the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
16-20 4th I Enter the table ID for the exponent associated with the natural convection
for near behavior.
21-25 5th I Enter the table ID for the surface emissivity.
26-30 6th I Enter the table ID for the separation dependent thermal
convection coefficient.
12th data block
21-30 3rd F Enter the separation distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient.
13th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the contact electrical coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the electrical transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with the separation distance dependent
electrical transfer coefficient.
14th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the contact mass transfer coefficient).
Main Index
Format
Data
15th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the contact mass transfer coefficient.
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID associated with the mass transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
11-15 3rd I Enter the table ID associated with the separation distance dependent mass
diffusion coefficient.
16th data block
17th data block
18th data block
19th data block
20th data block
1
1-10 1st F Enter the ----- reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
1
11-20 2nd F Enter the ----- reactive boundary coefficient.
c1
Main Index
Format
Data
21st data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID for the 1-
k1
6-10 2nd I Enter the table ID for the 1

c1
22nd data block

Main Index
1574 CONTACT TABLE (History Definition)
CONTACT TABLE (History Definition) Define Contact Table
input style.
Description
a gap exists.
initial contact.
Main Index
CONTACT TABLE (History Definition) 1575

Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
Enter 2 if the 4th, 6th, 10th, and 11th data blocks are to be read to control
contact, ungluing, and multiphysics. Default is 0.
The 3rd through the 13th data blocks are entered once for each set of bodies to be input.
3rd data block
occurs ( DQ NE A R ). A zero entered here indicates that near contact
behavior is not included.
degrees of freedom.
Main Index
Format
Data
71-75 9th I Enter 0 (default) if, during initial contact, a projection onto the contact
been set.
Enter 0 if a node should not separate (default).
Main Index
Format
Data
4th data block
3rd data block).
11th data block).
meaning are:
A=1: the outside edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) of continuum elements are included in the
B=1: both top and bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=2: only bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=3: only bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=4: only top faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B=5: only top faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B=6: both top and bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
direction/thickness contribution of shell elements as entered on the CONTACT
option.
Note: The choice B=6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only
C=0: neither beam elements nor shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C=1: beam elements are included in the boundary description (allowing for beam-to-
beam contact).
C=10: shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C=11: both beam elements and shell edges are included in the boundary description.
If beam-to-beam contact is not activated on the CONTACT option, the default
value of C is 0, otherwise the default value is 1.
Main Index
Format
Data
5th data block
21-30 3rd F Enter the interference closure amount; normal to the contact surface.
friction stress is given by min ( μ σn ,σ limit ) , with μ the friction coefficient
ratio is 2.
Main Index
Format
Data
6th data block
m n
7th data block

1-10 1st F Enter the contact heat transfer coefficient ( H T ).
11-20 2nd F Enter the convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior ( H CV ).
21-30 3rd F Enter the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior
( H NC ).
behavior ( B NC ).
41-50 5th F Enter the surface emissivity ( ε ).
51-60 6th F Enter the separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient
( H BL ).
8th data block
21-30 3rd F Enter the separation distance dependent electrical coefficient.
9th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the contact mass transfer coefficient.
10th data block
Main Index
Format
Data
11th data block
12th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the 1-
k1
11-20 2nd F Enter the 1-

c1
13th data block

Main Index
CONTACT NODE (History Definition) 1581
Define Nodes for Surface Contact
CONTACT NODE (History Definition) Define Nodes for Surface Contact
Description
This option is used to define which nodes in a body might potentially contact other surfaces. This option
can be used to reduce the computational cost if a body has many exterior nodes and it is known for which
nodes contact might occur. If this option is not used, all exterior surface nodes are checked for contact.
Notes: If this option is used and a node number is not explicitly listed, that node might penetrate
other bodies.
the CONTACT NODE option after the END OPTION.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-12 1st A Enter the words CONTACT NODE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of bodies for which exterior nodes are defined
3rd data block
4th data block
1-80 1st I Enter a list of nodes that are potential contact nodes.
Main Index
1582 MOTION CHANGE
Define Motion of Rigid Surfaces
MOTION CHANGE Define Motion of Rigid Surfaces
input style. When using the table driven input for contact, the motion of the
rigid surfaces can be defined on the CONTACT with TABLES model
definition option by referencing tables that are functions of time.
Description
This option is useful for prescribing the motion of rigid bodies when the CONTACT option is used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words MOTION CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of rigid bodies to be input.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
2-D Contact Problems
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the rigid body number.
6-10 2nd I Enter -1 for position controlled body.
Enter 0 for velocity controlled body.
Enter 1 for load controlled body.
4th data block (if velocity controlled rigid surface)
1-10 1st F First component of velocity of center of rotation (COR).
11-20 2nd F Second component of velocity of COR.
21-30 3rd F Angular velocity (in radian/unit time) about COR.
4th data block (if position controlled rigid surface)
1-10 1st F First component of position of COR.
11-20 2nd F Second component of position of COR.
21-30 3rd F Angular position (in radian) about COR.
Main Index
MOTION CHANGE 1583
Define Motion of Rigid Surfaces
Format
Data
3-D Contact Problems
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the rigid body number.
6-10 2nd I Enter -1 for position controlled body.
Enter 0 for velocity controlled body.
Enter 1 for load controlled body.
4th data block (if velocity controlled rigid surface)
1-10 1st F First component of velocity of COR.
11-20 2nd F Second component of velocity of COR.
21-30 3rd F Third component of velocity of COR.
31-40 4th F Angular velocity (in radian/unit time) about local axis through COR.
4th data block (if position controlled rigid surface)
1-10 1st F First component of position of COR.
11-20 2nd F Second component of position of COR.
21-30 3rd F Third component of position of COR.
31-40 4th F Angular position (in radian) about local axis through COR.
Main Index
1584 SS-ROLLING
Define the Parameters for Steady State Transport
SS-ROLLING Define the Parameters for Steady State Transport
Description
This option is used to define the spinning, cornering, and ground moving velocities for a body in steady
state rolling analysis.
Alternatively, this option can also define parameters for a procedure in steady state transport analysis
to achieve certain load conditions such as friction force or torque by adjusting spinning velocity.
This requires the corresponding degrees of freedom of the ground body being properly constrained
(no moving).
The torque (friction force) controlled steady state analysis requires iteration to determine the spinning
velocity; in addition to Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations, the convergence is slower compared to
the spinning velocity controlled analysis. It is recommended the spinning velocity control option be used
if a series of steady state solutions are to be obtained. The torque (friction force) control option is
advantageous in case of only one steady state solution at a specific torque (friction force) is required. Start
the job with spinning velocity control and switch to torque (friction force) control at a point near to the
real solution improves the efficiency of the calculation.
This option can be used with either AUTO LOAD or AUTO STEP. The velocities, friction force, or torque
defined here are total values. Their values at a given time within the load case are obtained by time
interpolating between the values defined here and those at the end of the last case.
In the current release, there can be only one spinning body under steady state conditions and it contains
all existing elements. The spinning velocity is applied to all elements in the model. The frictional force
and torque are associated with the contact body defined here. Refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Input, Chapter 5 in the Steady State Rolling Analysis section for more details.
Ps
Ts
ωs
Tc
ωc
Pc
Figure 4-1 Kinematics of a Rolling Body
Main Index
SS-ROLLING 1585
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SS-ROLLING.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Body ID for spinning body.
If no contact body is defined, all existing elements are included in the
spinning body.
6-10 2nd I Body ID for ground.
11-15 3rd I jtrncon:flag to input format.
= 0 spinning velocity/ground velocity input
= 1 friction force/ground velocity input
= 2 torque/ground velocity input
Default is 0.
16-25 4th F If jtrncon
= 0 spinning velocity (cycle/time)
= 1 friction force in 0° rolling direction
= 2 torque with respect to spinning axis.
26-35 5th F Cornering velocity (cycle/time).
36-45 6th F x component of ground velocity (in sliding direction).
46-55 7th F y component of ground velocity (normal to surface).
56-65 8th F z component of ground velocity (in rolling direction).
66-70 9th F Used only if jtrncon = 0.
If set to 1, friction coefficient increases gradually from 0 to the final value
within the load case based on the time increment. In this case only solution
at the end of the load case is physically meaningful. This may enhance
stability of the analysis, especially for the transition periods from
standstill to rolling and from brake to traction.
Default is 0.
Main Index
1586 SS-ROLLING
Format
Data
3rd data block
Only needed if the 3rd field in the 2nd data block (jtrncon) is not zero.
1-5 1st I Maximum number of adjustments in friction force (torque) - ground
velocity input.
Default is 20.
6-15 2nd F Tolerance ratio of friction force (torque) change in the adjustment over the
maximum friction force (torque).
Default is 0.02.
Main Index
RELEASE 1587
Define Release Data
RELEASE Define Release Data
Description
This option is useful for the analysis of spring-back after bodies contact one another. The body number
is entered and then all of the nodes which contact that body are released at the beginning of the increment.
The contact force can either be immediately removed or gradually reduced. In addition, the body must
either be moving away to avoid nodes recontacting during the same increment or the CONTACT TABLE
option should be used to deactivate contract.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word RELEASE.
11-15 2nd I Enter 0 if the contact forces are to be immediately removed (default).
Enter 1 if the contact forces are to be reduced to zero over the number of
increments specified in this load period.
2nd data block
Enter a list of bodies. All nodes contacting these bodies are released.
Main Index
1588 APPROACH
Move Rigid Surfaces into Position
APPROACH Move Rigid Surfaces into Position
Description
The APPROACH option allows you to move rigid bodies so that they just make contact with deformable
bodies. In the case of multistage forging, you usually have a time period where the first set of bodies are
released, followed by a new time period where the second set of bodies are brought into contact. This
option is used in conjunction with the CONTACT TABLE option to determine which bodies are now
applicable, and the CONTACT (2-D or 3-D), CONTACT with TABLES (2-D or 3-D), or MOTION CHANGE
option which prescribes the velocity of the rigid bodies. Marc moves all rigid bodies with nonzero
velocities until they come into contact with a deformable body.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the word APPROACH.
Main Index
MOVE (History Definition) 1589
Perform Rigid Body Motion on Model
MOVE (History Definition) Perform Rigid Body Motion on Model
Description
The MOVE option allows you to apply a rigid body motion to either a rigid body, a deformable body, or
a collection of elements.
In general, use the RELEASE option to separate the moving elements from previously contacting
surfaces. You need to use the CONTACT TABLE and/or MOTION CHANGE to control the rigid bodies,
and the APPROACH option to position the new rigid bodies.
Note: The MOVE option may not be used with shell or beam elements. One must be very careful
if the elements use the ORIENTATION option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word MOVE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the contact body number. For deformable body, all elements
associated with this body are moved. If a zero is entered, the 3rd data
block is used.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to move symmetry bodies that contact the deformable body.
3rd data block (Used only if body number is zero)
Enter list of elements to be moved.
4th data block
1-10 1st E Translation in first direction.
11-20 2nd E Translation in second direction.
21-30 3rd E Translation in third direction.
31-40 4th E Rotation about first direction.
41-50 5th E Rotation about second direction.
51-60 6th E Rotation about third direction.
For 2-D planar analysis, rotation about X and Y axis should be zero.
For axisymmetric analysis, all rotations should be zero.
Main Index
1590 MOVE (History Definition)
Perform Rigid Body Motion on Model
Format
Data
5th data block
1-10 1st E First coordinate of center of rotation.
11-20 2nd E Second coordinate of center of rotation.
21-30 3rd E Third coordinate of center of rotation.
Main Index
ANNEAL 1591
Modify State of Material
ANNEAL Modify State of Material
Description
This option allows you to simulate an annealing operation at the end of deformation. You can choose to
set the stresses and/or strains to zero. Also, an annealing temperature can be set.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word ANNEAL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1 to set stresses to zero.
6-10 2nd I Enter 1 to set strains to zero.
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to set temperature to anneal temperature.
16-25 4th E Enter the anneal temperature.
26-30 5th I Enter 0 if a list of elements is entered in the 3rd data block.
Enter 1 if a list of deformable contact bodies is entered in the 3rd
data block.
3rd data block
Enter a list of elements or deformable contact bodies for which this
is applied.
Main Index
1592 SYNCHRONIZED
Move Rigid Surfaces into Position
SYNCHRONIZED Move Rigid Surfaces into Position
Description
The SYNCHRONIZED option allows you to move rigid bodies so that they just make contact with
deformable bodies. (In the case of multistage forging, you usually have a time period where the first set
of dies are released, followed by a new time period where the second set of dies are brought into contact.
This option is used in conjunction with the CONTACT TABLE option to determine which dies are now
applicable, and the CONTACT (2-D or 3-D), CONTACT with TABLES (2-D or 3-D), or MOTION CHANGE
option which prescribes the velocity of the rigid dies. Marc all rigid bodies with nonzero velocities until
one of the moving rigid surfaces makes contact with a deformable body.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the word SYNCHRONIZE.
Main Index
SPLINE (History Definition) 1593
SPLINE (History Definition) Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body
Description
In order to improve the accuracy for a deformable-deformable contact analysis, the outer surface of a
contacted body can be described based on a spline (2-D) or Coons surface (3-D) description. The
analytical surface is then used to calculate the normal to the deformable body and the closest point
projection of a contacting node.
In 2-D, for a contacted segment, a spline is created based on:
tangent at first and second point of segment
position of first and second point of segment
In 3-D, for a contacted segment, a Coons surface is created based on:
tangent vectors at corner points of segment
position of corner points of segment
zero twist vectors
This option should be included in the history definition section if a rezoning step is performed.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word SPLINE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of deformable bodies for which the spline description
must be applied.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each deformable body with a spline description.
3rd data block
6-10 2nd I For 3-D analyses only: enter 1 to enforce C0-continuity at edges where the
normal vector to the outer contour of the structure shows a discontinuity
(also see the 4th data block below).
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 to automatically determine nodes (2-D) or edges (3-D) where the
Main Index
1594 SPLINE (History Definition)
Format
Data
16-25 4th F Used only if the 3rd entry of this data block is set to 1; enter the threshold
angle to decide if there is a normal vector discontinuity between two
adjacent segments of the contact body defined in the first entry of this data
block. The threshold angle should be between 0 and 90 degrees; the
default value is 60 degrees.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes defining nodes (2-D) or edges (3-D) where the normal
vector to the outer contour of the structure shows a discontinuity.
Notes: In 3-D, when there is a normal vector discontinuity at an element
edge, the corner nodes defining the edge must be entered one
after another.
If the automatic detection is activated using the 3rd data block
above, the nodes/edges with a normal vector discontinuity found
by the program will be added to the list defined here.
For an example see the SPLINE model definition option.
Main Index
EXCLUDE (History Definition) 1595
Ignore Contact with Certain Regions
EXCLUDE (History Definition) Ignore Contact with Certain Regions
Description
For certain contact problems, you might wish to influence the decision regarding the deformable segment
a node contacts. By means of the EXCLUDE option, you can specify a list of nodes defining segments to
be excluded from the contacted bodies.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word EXCLUDE.
2 data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of deformable bodies for which the EXCLUDE option
must be applied.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each deformable body with the EXCLUDE option.
3rd data block
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes defining segments to be excluded from contacted
bodies.
Note: In 2-D, each segment must be defined by two nodes. In 3-D,
each segment must be defined by four nodes. If, in 3-D, a
segment corresponds to a tetrahedral or a collapsed hexahedral
element, the last two nodes of the set of four should be identical.
Main Index
1596 ACTUATOR
Define the Length of the Actuator Link
ACTUATOR Define the Length of the Actuator Link
Description
This option can be used in conjunction with the truss element type 9 to simulate an actuator. This is often
used in mechanism analyses to allow the prescription of the relative distance between two points. This
option should be used with the LARGE DISP parameter whenever large rotations of the actuator or large
displacements are anticipated.
The original length of the actuator is given in the fourth field of the GEOMETRY option. The actuator is
treated as an elastic link.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word ACTUATOR.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of actuators (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of actuator data.
Defaults to input.
3rd data block
Repeat for each actuator to be modified.
1-5 1st I Enter the element number
6-15 2nd F Enter the new length of the actuator.
16-20 3rd I Enter the table ID for the length of the actuator.
Main Index
Rate Dependent Analysis
Chapt Rate Dependent Analysis

er 4 This section describes the control of the transient aspects of rate dependent analysis. There are several
ways to specify the time step (TIME STEP) in either creep or viscoelastic analysis. Note that the adaptive
Histor options AUTO STEP, AUTO CREEP, and AUTO THERM CREEP are recommended. The ACCUMULATE
y and EXTRAPOLATE options are techniques to allow extrapolation in time based on the results previously
calculated. Note that extrapolation is always a risky procedure.
Defini
tion
Optio
ns
Main Index
1598 CREEP INCREMENT
Define Creep Increment
CREEP INCREMENT Define Creep Increment
Description
This option allows manual control of the creep time step size. This form of control is not recommended.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words CREEP INCREMENT.
2nd data block
1-15 1st F Creep time increment.
Main Index
AUTO CREEP 1599
Control Transient Creep
AUTO CREEP Control Transient Creep
Description
This option controls the transient creep analysis. You specify a total creep time and a suggested time
increment. Marc automatically selects the largest possible time increment consistent with the tolerance
set on stress and strain increments.
You should make sure that load increments are not left on unintentionally, since this would reduce the
time step size severely. Information is also input for limiting the total number of time increments. See
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words AUTO CREEP.
2nd data block
1-15 1st F Enter the suggested time increment for creep. When the automatic creep
control is in use, Marc iterates for the appropriate increment size to satisfy
the tolerances placed on stress and strain increments.
16-30 2nd F Period of creep time to be covered during this AUTO CREEP option. This
value can be changed at restart by using the REAUTO option.
31-35 3rd I Maximum number of time increments to be allowed during this part of the
creep analysis.
Default is 50 increments.
36-40 4th I Maximum number iterations allowed to modify the time step during
an increment.
Default is 5.
41-45 5th I Number of increments between stiffness matrix updates. This option is
used to prevent unnecessary updating of the stiffness matrix during large
displacement creep analysis.
If left blank, the stiffness matrix is reformed each step if tangent modulus
nonlinearities (for example, plasticity) are present.
51-60 7th F Enter stable time step limit, if known. Marc uses stresses and strain
change tolerances if this is not used. Stable time step limit is needed
for viscoplasticity.
Main Index
1600 AUTO CREEP
Control Transient Creep
Format
Data
3rd data block
1-10 1st F If the fifth field is 0, enter tolerance on the creep strain increment relative
to the elastic strain.
Default is 0.50. Note that a higher value is likely to cause
stability problems.
If the fifth field is 1, enter the maximum creep strain increment allowed.
Default is .01.
11-20 2nd F If the fifth field is 0, enter the tolerance on the stress change per stress
during creep.
Default is 0.10.
If the fifth field is 0, enter the maximum stress increment.
Default is 100.
This control is included primarily for accuracy purposes. The default
value is adequate for creep laws of the type ε = Aσn, where 3<n<6. For
lower values of n, the tolerance can be increased; for higher values, it
21-30 3rd F Tolerance on low stress point cut-off. Points with a stress lower than this
ratio relative to the maximum stress in the structure are not used in the
creep tolerance checking.
Default is 0.05.
31-35 4th I Number of the element in which the stress change is checked. Leave
blank to check all elements for stress change. If a number of elements
(but not all elements) are to be checked, enter the number of elements as
a negative number, with 14 as the maximum. In this case, the actual
elements are entered on the next data block.
4th data block
This series is only required if the entry in the fourth field of the previous block is negative.
1-70 1st I Enter the elements to be checked in (14I5) format.
Main Index
ACCUMULATE 1601
Specify Accumulation Option
ACCUMULATE Specify Accumulation Option
Description
This flags the start of accumulation of strains and displacements for use with the extrapolate option. If a
new accumulation period is to be started immediately after an extrapolation in the same increment, the
ACCUMULATE option must be preceded by the EXTRAPOLATE option. These options are typically used
to predict creep behavior at large times.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the word ACCUMULATE.
Main Index
1602 EXTRAPOLATE
Specify Extrapolation Option
EXTRAPOLATE Specify Extrapolation Option
Description
This option uses the accumulation of strains and displacements during one cycle of loading. It takes a
linear extrapolation with respect to time or loading of the accumulated quantities.
Note: In order to use this option, the ACCUMULATE parameter must be included. The
extrapolation is made from the period starting with the last entry of the ACCUMULATE
option and ending at the current increment. If no ACCUMULATE option was used before,
the accumulation period starts at the beginning of the analysis. A regular load increment
can be applied simultaneously with the EXTRAPOLATE option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-9 1st A Enter the word EXTRAPOLATE.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F If a positive number is entered: Time to which extrapolation is to
be extended.
If a negative number is entered: Factor with which the previous
accumulation period is multiplied to obtain extrapolation period.
Main Index
Automatic, Thermally-Loaded Elastic-Creep Analysis
AUTO THERM CREEP Automatic, Thermally-Loaded Elastic-Creep Analysis
Description
This option is intended to allow automatic, thermally loaded elastic-creep/elastic-plastic-creep stress
analysis, based on a set of temperatures defined throughout the mesh as a function of time. The
temperatures and transient times are presented to Marc through the CHANGE STATE option, using input
option 3 (post file), and Marc then creates its own set of temperature steps (increments) based on a
temperature change tolerance provided on this option. The times at all temperature steps are calculated
by Marc for creep analyses.
At each temperature step (increment), an elastic/elastic-plastic analysis is carried out first to establish
stress level in the structure. A creep analysis is performed next on the structure for the time period
between current and previous temperature steps (increments). Both the elastic/elastic-plastic stress and
the creep analyses are repeated until the total creep time provided on this option is reached. Convergence
controls are provided on the CONTROL option for elastic-plastic analysis and on the AUTO THERM
CREEP option for creep analysis.
You also specify a suggested time increment for creep analysis. Marc automatically selects the largest
possible time increment consistent with the tolerance set on stress and strain increments. The analysis can
be restarted at temperature steps (increments) or at creep steps (subincrements). The results can be saved
on a post file (POST option) for postprocessing.
The automatic thermally loaded elastic-creep/elastic-plastic-creep analysis continues until the total
creep time is reached. A typical automatic thermally loaded elastic-creep/elastic-plastic-creep analysis
has as input:
AUTO THERM CREEP
50.,0,0,4.0,
0.1,2.0,
0.,0.,0.,1,
CHANGE STATE
1,3,0,19,1,4,1,
CONTINUE
In the above case, a temperature change tolerance of 50 is set for the creation of temperature steps
(increments) by Marc; the total transient time in thermal analysis is equal to 4.0; the suggested time
increment for creep analysis is 0.1; and the total creep time (time for the termination of this analysis) is
2.0. Note that the total creep time cannot be greater than the total transient time in the thermal analysis.
The data in the CHANGE STATE option indicates that the temperatures are stored in a formatted post file
(file 19) and there are four sets of temperatures on the file.
Mechanical Loading - No Table Driven Input

If no DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD or PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT option appears with the AUTO
THERM CREEP set, all mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions are held constant during
the AUTO THERM CREEP. However, DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD, PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT, or
DISP CHANGE can be included in the set. The mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions,
Main Index
1604 AUTO THERM CREEP
which are then defined, are assumed to change in proportion to the time scale of the temperature history
defined by the CHANGE STATE option and are applied accordingly on the basis that the increments of
load and displacement correspond to the end of the transient time (TOTIM) of the AUTO THERM CREEP
option input.
Mechanical Loading - Table Driven Input

When table input is used and either FIXED DISP, POINT LOAD, or DIST LOADS references a table
which is a function of time, the total mechanical boundary condition will be evaluated based upon the
current time.
Note: You must include the CHANGE STATE, option 3 (post file), in conjunction with
this option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-16 1st A Enter the words AUTO THERM CREEP.
2nd data block

1-10 1st F Enter the maximum temperature change to be used per step of stress
analysis. Marc linearly subdivides steps, or merges steps together, to
create increments which are close to, but do not exceed, this tolerance.
11-15 2nd I Enter the maximum number of increments to be allowed in this AUTO
THERM CREEP. If this number of increments is exceeded before the
temperature history is completed, Marc ends. This is intended as a
protection to avoid excessive increments in the case of a data error.
Default value is 50 increments if set to 0.
16-20 3rd I Reassembly internal for element matrices.
21-30 4th F Total transient time from heat transfer analysis. This is used to
proportionally scale the incremental boundary conditions.
3rd data block
1-15 1st F Enter the suggested time increment for creep. When the automatic creep
control is in use, Marc iterates for the appropriate increment size to satisfy
the tolerances placed on stress and strain increments by the CREEP model
definition option.
16-30 2nd F Total creep time to be covered during this AUTO THERM CREEP option.
This value can be changed at restart by using the REAUTO option.
Main Index
Format
Data
31-35 3rd I Maximum number of subincrements to be allowed during this part of the
creep analysis.
Default is 50.
36-40 4th I Maximum number of iterations allowed to modify the time step during
an increment.
Default is 5.
41-45 5th I Number of increments between stiffness matrix updates. This reduces
the number of updates to the stiffness matrix for mildly nonlinear
analyses. This should not be activated if elastic material properties are
temperature dependent.
If left blank, the stiffness matrix is reformed each step if tangent modulus
nonlinearities occur.
4th data block
1-10 1st F If the fifth field is a zero, enter tolerance on the creep strain increment
relative to the elastic strain. Default is 0.50. Note that a higher value is
likely to cause stability problems.
If the fifth field is a one, enter the maximum creep strain
increment allowed.
Default is .01.
11-20 2nd F If the fifth field is a zero, enter the tolerance on the stress change per stress
during creep.
Default is 0.10.
If the fifth field is a one, enter the maximum stress increment.
Default is 100.
This control is included primarily for accuracy purposes. The default
value is adequate for creep laws of the type ε = Aσn, where 3<n<6. For
lower values of n, the tolerance can be increased; for higher values, it
21-30 3rd F Tolerance on low stress point cut-off. Points with a stress lower than this
ratio relative to the maximum stress in the structure is not used in the creep
tolerance checking.
Default is 0.05.
Main Index
1606 AUTO THERM CREEP
Format
Data
31-35 4th I Number of the element in which the stress change is checked. Leave blank
to check all elements for stress change. If a number of elements (but not
all elements) are to be checked, enter the number of elements as a negative
number, with 14 as the maximum. In this case, the actual elements are
entered on the next data line.
5th data block
This data block is only required if the entry in the fourth field of the previous data block is negative.
1-70 1st I Enter the elements to be checked in (14I5) format.
Main Index
Dynamic Analysis
Chapt Dynamic Analysis

er 4 This section describes the options used to control dynamic analysis. The MODAL SHAPE option requests
Histor that Marc calculate the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the structure. In linear dynamic analysis, this
option immediately follows the END OPTION. It is possible to do a nonlinear static analysis and then
y perform a modal extraction based on the current deformed state. These modes can then be used to
perform a transient analysis. The DYNAMIC CHANGE option is used to specify the incremental time and
Defini the total time period to be covered. An automatic time-stepping scheme (AUTO STEP) is also available
tion for dynamic analysis. The SPECTRUM option allows a spectral response analysis be performed based
upon the modes previously extracted. In addition, harmonic analysis can be performed at any step in an
Optio analysis. The harmonic response is based on the current configuration of the structure.
ns
Main Index
1608 MODAL SHAPE
Define Modal Shape
MODAL SHAPE Define Modal Shape
Description
This option is used when a modal analysis is indicated on the DYNAMIC parameter or during an acoustic
analysis to indicate that eigenmodes are to be extracted.
When using the inverse power shift method, this option controls the initial shift and the number of modes
to be calculated per shift. The accuracy of the modes calculated is degraded if the number of modes per
shift is too high.
When using the Lanczos method, if a highest frequency is entered, a Sturm sequence check is performed.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 A Enter the words MODAL SHAPE.
Option A
If inverse power sweep method is used (as specified with the DYNAMIC parameter), use this option.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of iterations per mode in the power sweep.
Default is 40.
eigenvalue is less than the tolerance.
16-25 3rd F Initial shift in cycles per time. The power shift is likely to start converging
to the eigenvalue closest to this value.
Default is 0.
26-35 4th F Maximum frequency to be extracted in cycles per time. If this is left blank
or zero, the number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC parameter is
extracted. If this is nonzero, extraction ends when this frequency is
exceeded or when the number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC
parameter is reached, whichever occurs first.
36-40 5th I Number of modes extracted per shift. This data field determines if auto
shifting occurs. If auto shift is not required, set equal to or greater than
number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC parameter.
Default is 5.
Main Index
MODAL SHAPE 1609
Define Modal Shape
Format
Data
41-50 6th F Auto shift parameter. Marc determines the new shift point (in
frequency squared) as the highest frequency square plus this entry
times the difference between the highest and next highest distinct
frequency squared.
Default is 1.0.
Option B
If the Lanczos method is used (as specified with the DYNAMIC parameter), use the following data
blocks.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Lowest frequency of mode to be extracted (in cycles/time). This is also the
initial shift point. This cannot be changed upon restart.
11-20 2nd F SHFMAX, highest frequency of modes to be extracted. If set to 0, NSNRM
modes are extracted. If not set to zero, all modes between SHFMIN and
SHFMAX are extracted and NSNRM is not used. A Strum sequence check is
performed to calculate this number. This can be changed upon restart.
21-25 3rd I NSNRM, number of requested modes. Only needed if SHFMAX is set equal
to 0. This can be increased upon restart.
Main Index
1610 RECOVER
Recover Option
RECOVER Recover Option
Description
This option allows for: (1) the storing of eigenvectors on the post file, (2) the recovery of reaction forces,
or (3) the recovery of stresses and reactions for a specified number of modes during a modal or a buckling
analysis. The option should be used after the modal shapes and frequencies or buckling modes have been
extracted (MODAL SHAPE or BUCKLE history definition option), and can be repeated as many times as
you wish. Additional input data is required on parameters DYNAMIC or BUCKLE for the activation of this
option, and the POST model definition option must be included in the input if the eigenvectors are to be
stored on a post file.
In the RECOVER option, the stresses are computed from the modal displacement vector, φ (eigenvector
without normalization), and the nodal reactions are calculated from F = Kφ -ω2 Mφ for the modal
analysis or from F = Kφ for buckling analysis.
You can choose your normalization by entering the amplitude value of one particular degree of freedom
of one particular node in the mesh. The eigenvector is scaled linearly such that the degree of freedom on
this node reaches above amplitude.
When performing a modal analysis on a structure with rubber material, it is recommended that the modes
be scaled so that the amplitude is small relative to the element size if the modal stresses or the reactions
are to be calculated.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-7 1st A Enter the word RECOVER.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Starting mode number.
Default is 1.
6-10 2nd I Ending mode number.
Default is modes specified on the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter.
11-15 3rd I Set to 0 if only the eigenvectors are to be written to post file.
Set to 1 if only reactions are to be calculated.
Set to 2 if both stresses and reactions are to be calculated.
NOTE: If set to 2, the 4th field of the DYNAMIC parameter or the 3rd field
of the BUCKLE parameter must be set equal to 1.
Main Index
RECOVER 1611
Recover Option
Format
Data
16-20 4th I Node number of node with respect to which the eigenvector is scaled.
Default is 0.
21-25 5th I Degree of freedom of node selected in the fourth field with respect to
which the eigenvector is scaled.
Default is 0.
26-35 6th E Reference amplitude of degree of freedom of node selected above.
Default is 0, which uses the eigenvector without user scaling.
Main Index
1612 DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic)
Define Integration in Time
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic) Define Integration in Time
Description
This option specifies the parameters required for integration in time when the fixed time step procedure
is to be used. It can be used for either the modal or the direct integration procedure. See Marc Volume A:
User Information on Dynamic Options and the DYNAMIC, ACOUSTIC, PIEZO, or EL-MA parameter (see
Chapter 2).
In the case of explicit analysis, IDYN = 5, the time step is adjusted at the given increment interval to
insure that the stability limit is not violated.
In the case of explicit analysis, IDYN = 4, the time step is adjusted to ensure that the stability limit is not
violated at the start of this DYNAMIC CHANGE.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-14 1st A Enter the words DYNAMIC CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-15 1st F Time step size.
16-30 2nd F Period of time for this set of boundary conditions.
31-35 3rd I Number of time steps in this set of boundary conditions.
36-40 4th I Increment frequency to recalculate the time step for IDYN = 5; default
is 100.
set equal to value in the third field. This may be used to reduce the number
of updates to the stiffness matrix for mildly nonlinear analysis.
46-50 6th I This field is not used; enter 0.
51-60 7th F Enter γ for Newmark operator.
Default is γ = 0.5 or what was used in previous
DYNAMIC CHANGE option.
61-70 8th F Enter β for Newmark operator.
Default is β = 0.25 or what was used in previous
DYNAMIC CHANGE option.
Main Index
SPECTRUM 1613
Initiate Spectral Response Analysis
SPECTRUM Initiate Spectral Response Analysis
Description
This option initiates the spectral response analysis. The calculation is based upon the last set of
eigenmodes obtained.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SPECTRUM.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of modes to be used.
Enter 0 if a range of frequencies are given in the second and third field.
6-15 2nd F Enter the lowest frequency to be used in response analysis, in cycles per
time unit.
16-25 3rd F Enter the highest frequency to be used in response analysis, in cycles per
time unit.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Weighting factor associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd F Weighting factor associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Weighting factor associated with third degree of freedom.
Etc.; for higher degrees of freedom–maximum of 8 factors on a data line.
Main Index
1614 HARMONIC (Dynamic)
Define Excitation Frequency
HARMONIC (Dynamic) Define Excitation Frequency
Description
This option is necessary to specify the frequency of excitation implemented. The option is used in
dynamic harmonic, acoustic, and piezoelectric analyses.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Enter the lowest frequency in cycles per time unit.
11-20 2nd F Enter the increment in frequency for each subincrement.
If zero, only single frequency is used.
21-30 3rd F Enter the highest frequency in cycles per time unit.
31-35 4th I Enter 0 for linear increments in frequency (default).
Enter 1 for logarithmic increments in frequency.
36-40 5th I Enter the number of frequencies (n) if linear intervals, then if n = 0;
n = ( ω HIGH – ω L OW ) ⁄ ( Δ ω )
Δ ω i = entered value of ( ω HI GH – ω L OW ) ⁄ n – 1
If logarithmic increments in frequency

ω HIGH ( 1 ⁄ n – 1 )
f ac = ⎛ ----------------⎞
⎝ ω LOW ⎠
Δ ω i = f ac ** ( i – 1 )
Main Index
ACC CHANGE 1615
Define Acceleration Boundary Conditions
ACC CHANGE Define Acceleration Boundary Conditions
Description
This option allows new nodal acceleration conditions to be specified in a dynamic analysis. You specify
total accelerations through this option. Complex accelerations are more conveniently defined by the
FORCDT user subroutine. Note that enough space must be specified on the SIZING parameter on the
maximum number of boundary condition field to allow for possible increased storage requirements
arising from the use of this option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ACC CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of boundary condition data lines to be read
(optional)
For each set of boundary conditions use the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks.
3rd data block
1-10 1st E Prescribed acceleration for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
11-20 2nd E Prescribed acceleration for second degree of freedom listed in data block
4.
21-30 3rd E Prescribed acceleration for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
4th data block
5th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above accelerations are applied.
Main Index
1616
Main Index
Chapt Heat Transfer Analysis

er 4 This section describes the control of both steady-state and transient heat transfer analyses. The
option is available to specify the incremental time and the total time in this set. The default
Histor isTRANSIENT
that an adaptive time stepping is performed to cover the complete time period, such that the your
y tolerances are satisfied. These tolerances are given in the CONTROL option. The AUTO STEP option may
also be used to control the time steps in a transient thermal analysis. There are several methods of
Defini specifying the fluxes. Note that the total flux is required in a heat transfer analysis.
tion
Optio
ns
Main Index
1618 TRANSIENT
Specify Transient or Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis
TRANSIENT Specify Transient or Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis
Description
This option controls the transient heat transfer analysis. Marc optionally uses automatic time step
controls, based on the maximum nodal temperature change allowed (input on the CONTROL model
definition option). You input a suggested initial time step which is adjusted according to the automatic
stepping scheme (see Marc Volume A: User Information). The transient period can be ended in one of two
ways. A time period is input – the transient solution continues until this period is completed. You can also
give a finish temperature, and a flag which indicates that the transient solution should end when all nodal
point temperatures are below (or above) this finish temperature. This second technique for ending the
transient is optional and does not disable the first option, so that an adequately long time period should
be allowed if the finish temperature option is to govern the solution. In addition, you should supply a
maximum number of steps to be allowed. This is intended to prevent an excessive number of increments
in case of a data error. If Marc analyzes this number of increments before completing the time period (or
reaching the finish temperature), it stops any further analysis.
For steady-state solutions, use the TRANSIENT NON AUTO option with one “infinite” time step (set
specific heat to zero if problem is linear). Use the recycling tolerance for property evaluation for
nonlinear steady-state solutions. In addition, the STEADY STATE option is also available for
steady-state solution.
The first line must be in fixed format.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-9 1st A Enter the word TRANSIENT.
11-18 2nd A Leave blank to use automatic time stepping. Enter the words NON AUTO to
suppress automatic time stepping, and complete total period with a uniform
time step.
21-28 3rd A Enter the words NO SOLID to suppress performing a structural analysis
during this period in a coupled analysis.
2nd data block
1-10 1st F Suggested initial time step. This is be adjusted by the automatic time-
stepping scheme (see Marc Volume A: User Information).
11-20 2nd F Time period. Marc continues the transient solution until this time period
is completed, unless the finish temperature option is flagged.
Main Index
TRANSIENT 1619
Specify Transient or Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis
Format
Data
21-25 3rd I Maximum number of steps to be allowed in this transient period. Marc
stops the analysis if this number of steps is exceeded. This data field is
intended to be used to avoid excessive steps in the automatic control.
Default (if left blank) is time period divided by suggested step.
31-35 5th I Reassembly interval – number of increments between reassessment of
element (material) properties based on temperature or time dependency.
For purely linear problems (constant properties), a large number should be
given here to avoid reassembly.
Default value (if left blank) is automatic reassembly controlled by the
temperature change given on the CONTROL option, data line 3, second
field. Note that if a material property or film coefficient changes,
reassembly is needed.
36-40 6th I Set to 1 to finish the transient when all nodal temperatures fall below the
value given in the seventh field (see below).
Set to -1 to finish the transient when all nodal temperatures exceed the
value given in the seventh field (see below).
Set to 0 to complete transient time period without any check on
temperatures reached.
Set to 2 to indicate that a steady-state analysis is to be performed in
one increment.
41-50 7th F Finish temperature value to be used in conjunction with flag set above.
Main Index
1620 STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer)
Specify Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis
STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer) Specify Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis
Description
This option allows the solution of the steady-state heat transfer problem. This procedure uses less
computation time than using the TRANSIENT NON AUTO option with a large time step. If temperature
dependent properties or boundary conditions are included, the recycling tolerance for property evaluation
must be used so that iteration is performed.
Marc begins execution of the step when a CONTINUE option is encountered. Multiple steady-state steps
can be performed to solve quasi-steady-state problems.
The first line must be in fixed format.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words STEADY STATE.
21-28 2nd A Enter the words NO SOLID to suppress performing a structural analysis
during this period in a coupled analysis.
Main Index
DIST FLUXES (History Definition) 1621
DIST FLUXES (History Definition) Define Distributed Fluxes
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) fluxes to be specified. Distributed fluxes are
converted to consistent nodal fluxes by Marc. For a given element type, there is an established convention
for the application of surface flux on a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be used to input and
spatial dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
Also see distributed flux type 101 under the COUPLE
parameter definition.
6-15 2nd F Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed fluxes.
16-20 3rd I Flux index (optional). (Flux index is to be used in the FLUX
user subroutine.)
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed fluxes.
Main Index
1622
Main Index
POINT FLUX (History Definition) 1623
Define Point Fluxes
POINT FLUX (History Definition) Define Point Fluxes
Description
This option allows total nodal point fluxes to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used for
the time dependent fluxes. If the number of nodes which have point fluxes has been changed from the
model definition option, you must give an upper bound on the FLUXES parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point flux data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of point flux.
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point flux for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point flux for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
4th data block
Main Index
1624 WELD FLUX (History Definition)
WELD FLUX (History Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source
Definition)
Description
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of weld fluxes to be entered (optional).
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Weld Flux Index (Index is to be used in the UWELDFLUX
user subroutine).
6-10 2nd I Weld Flux Type:
11-15 3rd I Weld Path Index.
Main Index
WELD FLUX (History Definition) 1625
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Parameter identifying the type of distributed flux. See library element
Note that the parameter in this field should be consistent with the weld
flux type specified in the 2nd field.
0 – Initial weld position is automatically taken as first point of
associated weld path.
1 – Initial weld position is specified in the first three fields of the 4th
data block.
31-35 7th I Weld Flux Activation Flag
0 – Weld Flux boundary condition is active in loadcase
1 – Weld Flux boundary condition is inactive in loadcase
36-67 8th C Weld Flux Name (optional)
4th data block
position should be along the associated weld path. Else, the program will terminate with exit
20. The defined initial weld position is mandatory when the UWELDPATH user subroutine is
used to define the associated weld path. When the same weld flux is specified in multiple
loadcases, the initial weld position is only used for the starting loadcase. For subsequent
loadcases, the position at the end of the previous loadcase is used as the starting position.
The X and Y offsets (fields 4 and 5 in data block 4) are defined in the local coordinate system
of the weld flux. They are 0 by default. The Y offset is along the arc direction and the X offset
is along the tangent direction. These offsets allow the flux to be located at a specified distance
from the associated weld path.
Main Index
1626 WELD FLUX (History Definition)
Format
Data
5th data block
71-80 8th F Maximum distance from weld origin for nonzero flux.
6th data block
Fields 5 - 7 are only valid for the double ellipsoidal volumetric weld flux:
36-40 8th I Table ID for maximum distance from weld origin.
Main Index
WELD FLUX (History Definition) 1627
Format
Data
Notes: The 5th and 6th data blocks are directly used for the ellipsoidal and disc shaped weld fluxes.
The flux values are defined directly for the user subroutine option. The weld dimensions can
still be entered in this case since they are useful for filler element activation, adaptive meshing
box definition, etc.
automatically determined by the program. The scale factor flag in the 3rd field of the 6th data
block determines the usage. See Volume A for more details.
The tables defining the weld power, efficiency, weld width/radius, depth, forward and rear
lengths, and maximum distance from weld origin can be a function of time or arc length
measured along the associated weld path.
7th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above weld flux.
Main Index
1628 WELD PATH (History Definition)
WELD PATH (History Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source
Definition)
Description
This option specifies the weld path to be followed by the weld flux. The orientation of the arc along the
path is also defined. The weld path can be specified through nodes or point coordinates of polyline curves
in the input file or through point coordinates in a separate text file, or through the UWELDPATH user
subroutine. The arc orientation can be specified through nodes, point coordinates of polyline curves,
vector components or Euler angles in the input file, point coordinates, vector components, or Euler angles
in a separate text file, or through the UWELDPATH user subroutine.
The specified path and arc orientation are used to define a moving local coordinate system. The Z axis
of the local coordinate system is along the weld path, the Y axis is along the arc orientation and the X
axis is along the tangent. X and Y axes that are perpendicular to each other and perpendicular to the given
weld path (Z axis) are constructed based on the information provided in this option. See MARC Volume
A: Theory and User Information for more details.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words WELD PATH.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of weld paths to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of weld path data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Weld Path Index (Index is used for cross-referencing with the 3rd data
block of the WELD FLUX option)
6-10 2nd I Weld Path Type
1 – Weld Path is specified through ordered list of nodes
2 – Weld Path is specified through point coordinates of polyline curves.
4 – Weld Path is specified through text file
5 – Weld Path is specified through the UWELDPATH user subroutine.
11-15 3rd I Arc Orientation Type
1 – Arc Orientation is specified through ordered list of nodes.
2 – Arc Orientation is specified through point coordinates of
polyline curves.
Main Index
WELD PATH (History Definition) 1629
Format
Data
3 – Arc Orientation is specified through vector components.
4 – Arc Orientation is specified through Euler angles.
5 – Arc Orientation is specified through the UWELDPATH
user subroutine.
16-20 4th I Number of curves used to define the Weld Path. This field is only valid
when Weld Path Type is 2.
21-25 5th I Path Interpolation flag 0 or 1.
0 – Arc Orientation at first point of segment is used for whole segment.
1 – Arc Orientation is linearly interpolated between first and last points
of segment.
31-62 7th C Weld Path Name (optional)
Notes: Weld Path Type 1 can only be used with Arc Orientation Types 1, 3, or 4.
Weld Path Type 2 can only be used with Arc Orientation Types 2, 3, or 4.
Weld Path Type 4 can only be used with Arc Orientation Type 2, 3, or 4. All quantities are
specified via separate text file in this case.
Weld Path Type 5 can only be used with Arc Orientation Type 5.
The 4th through 7th data blocks depend on the WELD PATH TYPE (2nd field of 3rd data block) and
ARC ORIENTATION TYPE (3rd field of 3rd data block). These data blocks are only needed for weld
path types 1, 2, and 4.
I. WELD PATH TYPE 1 (NODES)
4th data block
define the weld path.
A. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 1 (NODES)
5th data block
1-10 1st F Angle in degrees by which the ARC-TANGENT plane is rotated about
weld path (default is 0).
11-15 2nd I Table ID for Angle.
6th data block
define the weld orientation.
Main Index
Format
Data
Notes: The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length along the weld path or a
The arc vector is defined as the vector from the weld path node to the weld orientation node.
The number of nodes defining the weld orientation has to be either equal to 1 or equal to the
number of nodes defining the weld path. If only one node is used, the arc vector is defined as
the vector from the weld path node to that node always.
5th data block
Note: The tables defining the arc orientation vector components can be a function of the arclength
5th data block
taken as <1,0,0>; i.e., unit vector in global X direction. Tables defining the Euler angles can
be a function of arclength along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along
the weld path.
Main Index
Format
Data
II. WELD PATH TYPE 2 (CURVES)
Read Number of Points to define Polyline (4th data block)
Start Loop over Number of Points to define Path Polyline
Read coordinates of each Weld Path Point (5th data block)
End loop over Points
End loop over Polyline Curves
For Each Curve:

4th data block
1-5 1st I Weld Curve Type (polyline = 1).
6-10 2nd I Number of Points to Define Polyline.
For each point on the Weld Path Curve:
5th data block
A. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 2 (CURVES)
Read Angle for Rotation of Tangent-Arc Plane (6th data block)
Start Loop over Number of Points to define Arc Polyline
Read coordinates of each Weld Orientation Point (7th data block)
End Loop over Point
End Loop over Polyline Curves
For Each Curve:

6th data block
1-5 1st I Arc Curve Type (polyline = 1).
6-15 2nd F Angle in degrees by which Arc-Tangent plane is rotated about Weld Path
(default = 0).
16-20 3rd I Table ID for angle.
Main Index
Format
Data
For each point on the Arc Orientation Curve:
7th data block
Notes: Only Polylines (Weld Curve Type = 1, Arc Curve Type = 1) are supported in the
current version.
The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length along the weld path or a
The number of points defining the arc orientation curve has to be equal to the number of points
defining the weld path curve.
6th data block
Note: The tables defining the arc orientation vector components can be a function of the arc length
6th data block
taken as <1,0,0> i.e., unit vector in global X direction. Tables defining the euler angles can be
a function of arclength along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along the
weld path.
Main Index
Format
Data
III. WELD PATH TYPE 4 (Text File)
4th data block
Enter name of Text File containing Weld Path and Arc
Orientation Information.
Note: Columns 1 - 3 of the text file contain weld path information. Columns 4 - 6 of the text file
contain arc orientation information. Depending on the arc orientation type (2, 3 or 4) specified
on the 3rd data block, columns 4 - 6 can contain point coordinates, vector components or Euler
angle values. The entry in each column is a real number of width 10. The columns can be in
free or fixed format with commas being used to separate the columns in the free format mode.
Main Index
1634 WELD FILL (History Definition)
WELD FILL (History Definition) Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements
Description
This option identifies the weld filler elements that are associated with a particular weld heat source. The
method by which the filler elements can potentially participate in the analysis is specified. Two methods
can be used: Quiet Element method and Deactivated Element Method.
In the Quiet Element Method, the filler elements are always part of the analysis. However, prior to their
physical creation, the filler elements are used with scaled down material properties. The regular material
properties are restored after the filler elements are physically created by the moving heat source. In the
Deactivated Element Method, the filler elements are deactivated at the outset and are automatically
activated only when they are physically created by the moving heat source.
Filler Bounding Box X, Y, and Z refer to dimensions in the local coordinate system attached to the
moving heat source. They are used to identify if filler elements are physically created during the welding
process. If these dimensions are not specified on the option (i.e., left at 0), they are related to weld pool
dimensions set on the WELD FLUX option:
Filler Bounding Box X in the Tangent direction = 1.5 x Weld Width
Filler Bounding Box Y in the Arc direction = 2 x Weld Width
Filler Bounding Box Z in the Arc Direction = Weld Pool Length
See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more details.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words WELD FILL.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of weld fillers to be entered (optional).
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Weld Filler Index (Index is used for cross-referencing with field 4 of the
3rd data block in the WELD FLUX option).
6-10 2nd I Initial Activation Flag
0 – Quiet Element Method.
1 – Deactivated Element Method.
Main Index
WELD FILL (History Definition) 1635
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Temperature Boundary Condition Flag
0 – Nodal boundary conditions are applied
1 – Nodal boundary conditions are not applied
16-25 4th F Melting Point Temperature
26-35 5th F Temperature Activation Time (0 by default)
36-45 6th F Material Property Scale Factor (1e-5 by default)
46-77 7th F Weld Filler Name (Optional)
Notes: The melting point temperature information in field 4 is only used if the boundary condition
flag in field 3 is 0. If nodal boundary conditions are not applied (3rd field = 1), weld fluxes
can be applied to the filler elements to ramp up the temperature. A user-specified thermal
activation time, specified in field 5, can also be used.
The thermal activation time serves two purposes: (1) It defines the time over which the
temperature boundary condition is ramped (only valid when field 3 is 0). Default is 0 which
means that the temperatures are applied instantaneously. For nonzero time values, the
temperatures of the active filler elements are linearly increased from the current value to the
specified temperature over the specified time step. (2) It defines the time during which the
filler elements only participate in the thermal pass and not in the mechanical pass (valid when
field 3 is 0 or 1). Default is 0 which means that if the filler elements are first created at
increment n, they only participate on the thermal side at increment n, and then participate in
both thermal and mechanical passes at increment n+1. For nonzero time values, the filler
elements remain thermally active over the specified time duration and become mechanically
active only after the time duration.
The property scale factor in field 6 is only used for the quiet element method.
4th data block
1-10 1st F Filler Bounding Box in X (weld width) direction
11-20 2nd F Filler Bounding Box in Y (weld depth) direction
21-30 3rd F Filler Bounding Box in +Z (forward path) direction
31-40 4th F Filler Bounding Box in -Z (rear path) direction
41-45 5th I Table ID for Filler Bounding Box X
46-50 6th I Table ID for Filler Bounding Box Y
51-55 7th I Table ID for Filler Bounding Box +Z
56-60 8th I Table ID for Filler Bounding Box -Z
Note: The table IDs for the filler bounding boxes can be a function of time or arc length. The arc
length is measured along the weld path from the first point to the current position of the
weld source. If the bounding box dimensions are not specified, the weld pool dimensions are
used to define the box.
Main Index
1636 WELD FILL (History Definition)
Format
Data
5th data block
1-80 1 I Enter the list of filler elements
Main Index
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition) 1637
Define Controls for Heat Transfer Analysis
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Define Controls for Heat Transfer Analysis
Definition)
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence solution and accuracy for heat
transfer analysis.
For transient heat transfer, the only data field required to be set is the maximum number of steps, the first
field in the second data block. All other fields can, in these cases, be left blank, but notice that the third
data block must be included.
For coupled thermal-stress analysis, see CONTROL option for stress analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Maximum number of load steps in this run. Default is 99999. This is a
cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when RESTART is
being used.
6-10 2nd I Maximum number of recycles during an increment due to temperature
dependent material properties. Default value is 3.
11-15 3rd I Minimum number of recycles during an increment. Note that this data field
forces this number of recycles to take place in all subsequent increments.
31-35 7th I Nonpositive definite flag. If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite
system is forced.
56-60 12th I Assembly flag. If set to 1, the conductivity matrix is assembled
each iteration.
Main Index
1638 CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition)
Define Controls for Heat Transfer Analysis
Format
Data
3rd data block
11-20 2nd F Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are
reevaluated and matrices reassembled. Default value of 100.
Main Index
TEMP CHANGE 1639
Specify or Change Fixed Temperatures
TEMP CHANGE Specify or Change Fixed Temperatures
Description
This option allows new fixed temperature to be specified or old fixed temperatures to be changed. The
exact numbering sequence of the fixed temperatures is used in some applications of this option. This
numbering sequence is output after the fixed temperature option is used in the input data describing
the problem.
This option is used to change fixed temperatures in heat transfer. Note that enough space must be
specified on the SIZING parameter in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow for
possible increased storage requirements arising from use of this option. Complex temperature histories
are more conveniently input by the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words TEMP CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to the number of fixed temperatures to be changed or added.
A negative number removes fixed temperatures from the end of the fixed
temperature list.
A zero activates the FIXED TEMPERATURE option; a complete set of
necessary fixed temperatures are then read, using the data blocks for that
option except for that key word block.
Main Index
1640 TEMP CHANGE
Specify or Change Fixed Temperatures
Format
Data
3rd data block
Data block 3 is only entered if columns 1 through 5 in data block 2 are a positive number and then has
the number of data lines required by data block 2.
Note that a boundary condition in the middle of the list can be removed by
specifying that labeled boundary condition as a repeat of some other
boundary condition.
Main Index
FILMS (History Definition) 1641
Define Film Coefficients and Sink Temperatures
FILMS (History Definition) Define Film Coefficients and Sink Temperatures
Description
This option allows film coefficients and associated sink temperatures to be input. Nonuniform films or
sink temperatures can be obtained via the FILM user subroutine, see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines
and Special Routines.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
6-15 2nd F Reference value of film coefficient.
16-25 3rd F Reference value of sink temperature (reference values can be modified by
the FILM user subroutine).
26-30 4th I Film coefficient index (optional).
31-35 5th I Sink temperature index (optional). (Film coefficient and sink temperature
indices are to be used in the FILM user subroutine).
4th data block
Main Index
1642 VELOCITY CHANGE
Modify Nodal Velocity Components
VELOCITY CHANGE Modify Nodal Velocity Components
Description
are defined by specifying the velocity magnitude of a series of components for sets of nodes. This data
can be input from data blocks or from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the velocity values can be
respecified or initialized if no previous data was entered via the UVELOC user subroutine. See Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
value for the print-suppress parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word VELOCITY CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data lines used to input nodal velocity components. If
a negative value is entered, the UVELOC user subroutine is called for
every node.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printout of the summary of nodal velocity
components.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 should be repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
which the velocity is to be given.
Main Index
VELOCITY CHANGE 1643
Modify Nodal Velocity Components
Format
Data
4th data block
5th data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the velocity vector, as defined in data
blocks 3 and 4, is applied.
Main Index
1644
Main Index
Joule Heating Analysis
Chapt Joule Heating Analysis

er 4 This section describes the input of data necessary for a Joule heating analysis. All of the options in the
Histor previous subsections referring to heat transfer are also applicable. Both the applied currents and the nodal
voltages can be specified in this section. In Joule heating analysis, these are total values.
y
Defini
tion
Optio
ns
Main Index
1646 EMRESIS
Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Resistance Calculation
EMRESIS Select Conducting Bodies to be

used in a Resistance Calculation
Description
The purpose of this option is to define a group of conductors that will be used in a resistance calculation.
This option is to be used only in conjunction with the THERMAL CONTACT model definition option. You
can select all conductor bodies or a sub-set of these bodies for resistance computation.
This option may only be used in a Joule Heating analysis.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word EMRESIS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 0; not used.
3rd data block
Enter a list of body IDs.
Main Index
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Definition) 1647
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Define Distributed Current

Definition)
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) current to be specified. Distributed current is
converted to a consistent nodal current by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
used to input time and spatial dependent current.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered in pairs, once for each data block.
3rd data block
4th data block
Main Index
1648 POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition)
POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition) Define Nodal Point Current
Description
This option allows total nodal point current to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for the time dependent current. If the number of nodes which have point currents has been changed from
the model definition option, you must give an upper bound on the DIST LOADS parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 A Enter the words POINT CURRENT.
2nd data block
1-5 I Enter the number of sets of point currents to be entered (optional).
6-10 I Enter unit number of input of point current data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10 F Magnitude of point current.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal current are applied.
Main Index
VOLTAGE CHANGE 1649
Define or Change Voltage for Joule Heating Analysis
VOLTAGE CHANGE Define or Change Voltage for Joule Heating Analysis
Description
This option allows new voltage conditions to be specified or old voltage conditions to be changed in a
Joule heating analysis. The exact numbering sequence of the voltage conditions is used in some
applications of this option. This numbering sequence is output after the voltage conditions governing
increment zero are read by Marc.
This option is used for Joule heating analysis. Enough space must be specified on the SIZING parameter
in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow for possible increased storage
requirements arising from use of this option. Complex time dependent voltage histories are more
conveniently input by the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words VOLTAGE CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to the number of specified voltage conditions to be changed or added.
A negative number removes voltage conditions from the end of the
voltage condition list.
A zero activates the voltage option; a complete set of voltages are then
read, using the data blocks for that option as described in the model
definition section, except for that key word block.
Main Index
1650 VOLTAGE CHANGE
Define or Change Voltage for Joule Heating Analysis
Format
Data
3rd data block
Data block 3 is only entered if the first field in data block 2 is a positive number determining the
number of blocks required in this series.
from the “Fixed Voltage Condition Summary” table in the input echo of a
Marc run. Voltage conditions being added should be given labels which
increment the total count of voltage conditions properly.
A voltage condition in the middle of the list can be removed by specifying
that labeled boundary condition as a repeat of some other boundary
condition.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1.
16-30 4th F Specified voltage.
Main Index
Diffusion Analysis
Chapt Diffusion Analysis

er 4 This section describes the input of data necessary for a transient diffusion simulation with changing
Histor boundary conditions or porosity.
y
Defini
tion
Optio
ns
Main Index
1652 POROSITY CHANGE
POROSITY CHANGE Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis
Description
This option provides the ability to change the porosity in nonsoil model. You can either specify
the porosity or use the VOID CHANGE option to specify the void ratio.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words POROSITY CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the porosity.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the porosity.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table id associated with the porosity.
1st field.
Main Index
POROSITY CHANGE 1653
Format
Data
6th data block
1 – Elements IDs
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above porosity is applied.
data block.
Main Index
1654 VOID CHANGE
VOID CHANGE Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis
Description
This option provides the ability to change the void ratio in a nonsoil analysis model. You can either
specify the void ratio or use the POROSITY CHANGE option to specify the porosity.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-13 1st A Enter the words VOID CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of data required to define the void ratio.
3rd data block
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of the void ratio.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table id associated with the void ratio.
1st field.
Main Index
VOID CHANGE 1655
Format
Data
6th data block
1 – Elements IDs
7th data block
1-80 Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above void ratio is applied.
data block.
Main Index
1656 DIST MASS (Diffusion)
DIST MASS (Diffusion) Define Distributed Mass Flux
Description
This block of data defines mass flux (surface and volumetric) type boundary conditions. The user defines
a surface distribute mass flux magnitude ( M ⁄ l 2 t ) and the location, and associates this with a boundary
condition name. This is activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE history definition option. The
FLUX user subroutine can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed mass fluxes or the TABLE
model definition option may be used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST MASS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of distributed mass fluxes to be entered
(optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of distributed mass fluxes data, defaults
to input.
3rd data block
boundary condition.
in contact.
Main Index
DIST MASS (Diffusion) 1657
Format
Data
4th data block
1-10 1st F Enter the magnitude of mass flux.
5th data block
1-5 1st I Enter the table ID associated with the mass flux.
6th data block
1: Normal
106: Uniform volumetric
107: Nonuniform volumetric
1st field.
7th data block
1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
Main Index
1658 DIST MASS (Diffusion)
Format
Data
8th data block
7th data block.
Main Index
POINT MASS (Diffusion) 1659
POINT MASS (Diffusion) Define Nodal Mass Flux
Description
This block of data defines nodal mass flux boundary condition. The user specifies a magnitude and
location, and associates this with a boundary condition name. This is activated or deactivated using the
time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT MASS.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sets of point mass fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter unit number for input of point mass flux data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
condition.
Main Index
1660 POINT MASS (Diffusion)
Format
Data
4th data block
Magnitude.
1-10 1st F Point mass flux associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20 2nd F Point mass flux associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30 3rd F Point mass flux associated with third degree of freedom.
5th data block - Table ID for Magnitude
1st field.
6th data block
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
6th data block.
Main Index
Chapt Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis

er 4 The purpose of bearing analysis history definition options are mainly to activate the calculation of
bearing characteristics like damping and stiffness coefficients for a particular film profile. In addition, it
Histor is possible to solve the lubrication problem for a new film profile. The history definition options used are:
y • THICKNS CHANGE to specify a variation of the thickness field.
Defini • DAMPING COMPONENTS to activate the calculation of damping coefficients based on the
defined thickness change.
tion
• STIFFNS COMPONENTS to activate the calculation of stiffness coefficients based on the
Optio defined thickness change.
ns The calculation of damping and stiffness properties is performed within subincrements.
If only the THICKNS CHANGE option is activated within an increment, the defined thickness change is
added to the current film profile. The lubrication problem is then solved for the current film thickness.
Main Index
1662 THICKNS CHANGE
Define Thickness Variations
THICKNS CHANGE Define Thickness Variations
Description
This option defines the thickness variations of the lubricant film in a bearing analysis. The nodal
thickness changes are specified by giving the thickness increments for a list of nodes. This data can be
input from data blocks or from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the nodal thickness changes can be
respecified or initialized, in case no previous data was input, via the UTHICK user subroutine. See Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
A summary of nodal thickness changes appears in the printout. This can be suppressed by specifying a
nonzero value for the print-suppress parameter.
The THICKNS CHANGE option enables the solution of the lubrication problems for a modified film
profile. The defined thickness variation is added to the previously defined film profile. In case this option
is combined with either the DAMPING COMPONENTS or STIFFNS COMPONENTS option, no updating
is performed and damping or stiffness components are calculated within a subincrement based on the
specified thickness variation.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word THICKNS CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of data lines used to input nodal thickness changes.
If a negative value is entered, the UTHICK user subroutine is called for
every node.
6-10 2nd I Enter the file number for input of film thickness variations.
Default to unit 5, unless the INPUT TAPE parameter has been used.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printout of the summary of nodal thickness
increments.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Enter nodal thickness increment.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the nodal thickness variation as specified
in data block 3 applied.
Main Index
DAMPING COMPONENTS 1663
Define Damping Coefficients
DAMPING COMPONENTS Define Damping Coefficients
Description
This option activates the calculation of damping coefficients for bearing analysis. Based on the thickness
variation specified in the THICKNS CHANGE option, an incremental pressure distribution due to the
thickness variation per unit time is calculated for the current bearing configuration within a
subincrement. The resulting bearing force represents the damping properties pertaining to the specified
rate of thickness change for the current film profile.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DAMPING COMPONENTS.
Main Index
1664 STIFFNS COMPONENTS
Define Stiffness Coefficients
STIFFNS COMPONENTS Define Stiffness Coefficients
Description
This option activates the calculation of stiffness coefficients for bearing analysis. Based on the thickness
variation specified in the THICKNS CHANGE option, an incremental pressure distribution due to the
thickness variation is calculated for the current bearing configuration within a subincrement. The
resulting bearing force represents the stiffness properties pertaining to the specified thickness change for
the current film profile.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word STIFFNS COMPONENTS.
Main Index
Acoustic Analysis
Chapt Acoustic Analysis

er 4 This section describes options for the control of an acoustic analysis in a cavity with rigid boundaries. In
an acoustic analysis, you would first extract the eigenmodes of the cavity using the MODAL SHAPE
Histor option. The time step during the transient option would be controlled by the DYNAMIC CHANGE option.
y These two options are previously discussed in this chapter. The DIST SOURCES, POINT SOURCE, and
PRESS CHANGE options are available to specify the data to allow Marc to calculate the fundamental
Defini frequencies of the cavity as well as the pressure distribution in the cavity. Incremental load information
tion is provided here.
Optio
ns
Main Index
1666 PRESS CHANGE
Define Fixed Pressures
PRESS CHANGE Define Fixed Pressures
Description
This option allows new fixed pressures to be specified or old fixed pressures to be changed. The exact
numbering sequence of the fixed pressures is used in some applications of this option. This numbering
sequence is output after the fixed pressure option is used in the input data describing the problem.
This option is used to change fixed pressures in acoustic transfer. Enough space must be specified on the
SIZING parameter in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow for possible increased
storage requirements arising from use of this option. Complex pressure histories are more conveniently
input by the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-15 1st A Enter the words PRESS CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to the number of fixed pressure to be changed or added.
A negative number removes fixed pressures from the end of the fixed
pressure list.
A zero activates the FIXED PRESSURE option; a complete set of necessary
fixed pressures are then read, using the blocks for that option except for that
key word block.
3rd data block
Data block 3 is only entered if columns 1 through 5 in data block 2 is a positive number and then has
the number of data lines required by data block 2.
Main Index
PRESS CHANGE 1667
Define Fixed Pressures
Format
Data
A boundary condition in the middle of the list can be removed by
boundary condition.
16-30 4th F Specified pressure.
Main Index
1668 DIST SOURCES (History Definition)
Define Incremental Distributed Sources
DIST SOURCES (History Definition) Define Incremental Distributed Sources
Description
This option allows incrementally distributed (surface and volumetric) sources to be specified in an
acoustic analysis. Distributed sources are converted to consistent nodal sources by Marc. Note that for a
given element type, there is an established convention for the application of surface source on a particular
face. The FLUX user subroutine can be used to input time and spatial dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST SOURC.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if distributed source is to be applied as excitation load in a
harmonic analysis.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of distributed source data. Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are given as pairs; once for each data set.
3rd data block
6-15 2nd E Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed sources.
16-20 3rd I Source index (optional). Source index is to be used in the FLUX user
subroutine.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed sources.
Main Index
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Definition) 1669
Define Incremental Nodal Point Sources
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Define Incremental Nodal Point Sources

Definition)
Description
This option allows incremental nodal point sources to be specified in an acoustic analysis. The FORCDT
user subroutine can be used for the time dependent sources. If the number of nodes which have point
source has been changed from the model definition option, you must give an upper bound on the DIST
LOADS parameter.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POINT SOUR.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 to enter real harmonic load.
Enter 2 to enter imaginary harmonic load.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of point sources to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of point source data. Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are given in pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F Magnitude of incremental point source.
11-20 2nd F Magnitude of point source for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer
21-30 3rd F Magnitude of point source for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
4th data block
Main Index
1670 HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition)
HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition) Define Excitation Frequency
Description
dynamic harmonic, acoustic, and piezoelectric analyses.
Note: This history definition option cannot be used in modal or transient acoustic analysis.
Format
1st data block

2nd data block
n = ( ω HIGH – ω L OW ) ⁄ ( Δ ω )

ω HIGH (1 ⁄ n – 1)
f ac = ⎛ ----------------⎞
⎝ ω LOW ⎠
Δ ω i = f ac ** ( i – 1 )
Main Index
Chapt Electrostatic Analysis

er 4 In an electrostatic analysis, the boundary conditions are charges given in the POINT CHARGE and DIST
CHARGES option, and the potential given in the FIXED POTENTIAL option. The history definition
Histor consists of the STEADY STATE option and the CONTINUE option which initiates the analysis. The
y analysis is linear, so no iterations occur.
Defini For a coupled electrostatic structural analysis a static or a dynamic transient analysis type are possible.
For the static analysis the application of the mechanical boundary conditions, and how to specify
tion automatic multi-increment load control is similar to what was described in the subsection Static,
Optio Dynamic, Creep Analysis. Options which are used to control the dynamic transient analysis are
described in the subsection Dynamic Analysis. For nontable driven input, the electrostatic boundary
ns conditions are charges given in the POINT CHARGE and DIST CHARGE option, and the potential
given in the POTENTIAL CHANGE option. Incremental values are required for coupled electrostatic
structural analyses.
Main Index
1672 STEADY STATE (Electrostatic)
Specify Steady-State Electrostatic Analysis
STEADY STATE (Electrostatic) Specify Steady-State Electrostatic Analysis
Description
This option allows the solution of the steady-state electrostatic problem.
Marc begins execution of the step when a CONTINUE option is encountered.
Format
Format
Data
Main Index
EMCAPAC 1673
Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Capacitance Calculation
EMCAPAC Select Conducting Bodies to be used

in a Capacitance Calculation
Description
The purpose of this option is to select a group of conductors that will be used in a capacitance calculation
in this increment.
This option is to be used only in conjunction with the THERMAL CONTACT model definition option. You
can select all conductor bodies or a subset of these bodies for capacitance computation. The chosen
conductor bodies are used for the capacitance matrix calculation in Marc. This option may only be used
with electrostatic analysis.
No two conductors should touch each other.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word EMCAPAC.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 0; not used.
6-10 2 nd I Enter the increment frequency at which the capaciatnce calculation should
be done. Default is 1.
3rd data block
Enter a list of body IDs.
Main Index
1674 EMCAPAC
Piezoelectric Analysis
Chapt Piezoelectric Analysis

er 4 This section describes options used to control a piezoelectric analysis. Possible analysis types are static,
Histor dynamic modal, dynamic transient, and dynamic harmonic. For static analysis the application of the
mechanical boundary conditions, and how to specify automatic multi-increment load control is similar
y to what was described in the subsection Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis. Options which are used to
control the dynamic modal, dynamic transient, or dynamic harmonic analysis are described in the
Defini subsection Dynamic Analysis. The electrical boundary conditions are charges given in the POINT
tion CHARGE and DIST CHARGE option, and the potential given in the POTENTIAL CHANGE option.
Optio
ns
Main Index
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) 1675
Define Potential Boundary Conditions
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - Define Potential Boundary Conditions

History Definition)
Description
This option allows new potential boundary conditions to be specified or old potential boundary
conditions to be changed. The change in potential is incremental. Care should be taken, when removing
fixed potential conditions, to ensure that the reaction forces are handled properly. Note that enough space
must be specified on the SIZING parameter in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to
allow for possible increased storage requirements arising from use of this option. Time dependent
potentials are more conveniently input by the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words POTENTIAL CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter 0. This activates the FIXED POTENTIAL option; a complete set of
necessary fixed potential boundary conditions are then read, replacing the
existing fixed potential boundary conditions.
11-15 3th I Enter 1 if harmonic boundary condition is input as magnitude and phase.
3rd data block
1-5 1st I Number of the boundary condition blocks to be read (optional).
Main Index
1676 POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
Define Potential Boundary Conditions
Format
Data
4a data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed potential or amplitude or real part of potential for harmonic
analysis.
11-20 2nd F Phase or imaginary part of potential for harmonic analysis.
5a data block
4b data block
1-10 1st F Prescribed potential, or amplitude or real part of potential for
harmonic analysis.
11-20 2nd F Enter 0.
21-30 3rd F Phase or imaginary part of potential for harmonic analysis.
Note: Currently, there are no piezoelectric shell elements, but it is
possible to use mechanical shell elements in a piezoelectric
analysis.
5b data block
1-5 1st I Enter 1.
6b data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above potential change conditions
are applied.
Main Index
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) 1677
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Define Nodal Point Charges

Definition)
Description
This option allows nodal point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used for
nonuniform loading conditions.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 to enter real harmonic charge.
Enter 2 to enter imaginary harmonic charge.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of sets of point charge to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of point charge data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
4th data block
Main Index
1678 DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Distributed Charges
Description
converted to consistent nodal charges by Marc. For a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface charge of a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be
used to input spatially dependent charge.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if distributed charge is to be applied as excitation load in a
harmonic analysis.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of distributed charge data; defaults to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are given in pairs; once for each data set.
3a data block
16-20 3rd I Charge index. Charge index is to be used in the FLUX user subroutine.
3b data block
Use if harmonic analysis.
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of charge. See library element description
6-15 2nd F Enter the real component of this type of distributed charge.
Main Index
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) 1679
Format
Data
16-25 3rd F Enter the imaginary component of this type of distributed charge.
25-30 4th I Charge index. Charge index is to be used in the FLUX user subroutine.
4th data block
Main Index
1680 DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
Chapt Magnetostatic Analysis

er 4 In a magnetostatic, the boundary conditions are currents given to the POINT CURRENT and DIST
options and the potential given in the FIXED POTENTIAL option. The history definition
Histor CURRENT
consists of the STEADY STATE and the CONTINUE options which initiate the analysis. If a nonlinear
y material is present, defined through the B-H RELATION option, iteration is required as specified in the
CONTROL option; otherwise, no iterations occur.
Defini
tion
Optio
ns
Main Index
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic) 1681
Specify Steady-State Magnetostatic Analysis
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic) Specify Steady-State Magnetostatic Analysis
Description
This option allows the solution of the steady-state magnetostatic problem. If nonlinear magnetic
properties are included, the recycling tolerance for property evaluation must be used so that iteration is
performed.
Marc begins execution of the step when a CONTINUE option is encountered.
Format
Format
Data
Fixed Free Entry
Main Index
1682 DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic)
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Current
input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface current of a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine for 2-D
and the FORCEM user subroutine for 3-D can be used to input spatially dependent current.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
3rd data block
in Marc Volume B: Element LIbrary.
6-15 2nd E Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current.
16-20 3rd I Current index (current index is to be used in the FLUX for 2-D and
FORCEM for 3-D user subroutine).
3b data block
The following block is only used if the parameter identifying the type of current is 106 or 107.
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of current (106 or 107). See
library element description in Marc Volume B: Element LIbrary.
6-15 2nd E Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current in the first
16-25 3rd E Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current in the second
Main Index
Format
Data
26-35 4th E Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current in the third
36-40 3rd I Current index (current index is to be used in the FORCEM
user subroutine).
4th data block
Main Index
1684 DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic)
Electromagnetic Analysis
Chapt Electromagnetic Analysis

er 4 This section describes options used to control both transient and harmonic electromagnetic analysis. The
DYNAMIC CHANGE option is used to specify the time step, while the HARMONIC option is used to
Histor control the excitation frequency. Note that all loads are incremental in nature.
y For a coupled electromagnetic thermal analysis a harmonic electromagnetic analysis is combined with a
Defini thermal analysis. To activate this analysis chose the HARMONIC option to set the excitation frequency of
the electromagnetic pass, and either STEADY STATE, TRANSIENT, or AUTO STEP, for the thermal pass.
tion For the thermal boundary conditions like DIST FLUXES, POINT FLUX, TEMP CHANGE, and FILMS see
Optio the Heat Transfer Analysis section.
ns
Main Index
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Definition) 1685
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Define Excitation Frequency

Definition)
Description
dynamic harmonic, acoustic, and piezoelectric analyses. This can be used if the harmonic flag (1) has
been set on the EL-MA parameter. For a coupled electromagnetic thermal analysis enter only one
excitation frequency.
Format
1st data block

2nd data block
n = ( ω HIGH – ω L OW ) ⁄ ( Δ ω )

ω HIGH ( 1 ⁄ n – 1 )
f ac = ⎛ ----------------⎞
⎝ ω LOW ⎠
Δ ω i = f ac ** ( i – 1 )
Main Index
1686 DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
Define Dynamic Change
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Define Dynamic Change

Definition)
Description
This option specifies the parameters required for integration in time. This can be used if the transient flag
(0) has been set on the EL-MA parameter. The Newmark-beta procedure with a fixed time step is used.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-14 1st A Enter the words DYNAMIC CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-15 1st F Time step size.
16-30 2nd F Period of time for this set of boundary conditions.
31-35 3rd I Number of time steps in this set of boundary conditions.
36-40 4th I This field is not used.
set equal to value in the seventh field.
Main Index
POTENTIAL CHANGE 1687
Define or Redefine Potential Boundary Conditions
POTENTIAL CHANGE Define or Redefine Potential Boundary Conditions
Description
This option allows new potential boundary conditions to be specified or old potential boundary
conditions to be changed. The exact numbering sequence of the boundary conditions is used in some
applications of this option. This numbering sequence is output after the boundary condition option is used
in the input data describing the problem.
This option is used for incrementation of fixed potential components or for adding or removing potential
constraints. Care should be taken, when removing fixed potential conditions, to ensure that the reaction
forces are handled properly. Note that enough space must be specified on the SIZING parameter in the
maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow for possible increased storage requirements
arising from use of this option. Time dependent potentials are more conveniently input by the FORCDT
user subroutine.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-11 1st A Enter the words POTENTIAL CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Set to the number of boundary conditions (specified potential components
to be changed or added).
A negative number removes boundary conditions from the end of the
boundary condition list.
A zero activates the FIXED POTENTIAL option; a complete set of
necessary boundary conditions are then read, using the blocks for that
option except for that key word block.
Main Index
1688 POTENTIAL CHANGE
Define or Redefine Potential Boundary Conditions
Format
Data
11-15 3rd I Enter 1 if harmonic boundary condition is input as magnitude and phase.
3rd data block
Data block 3 is only entered if the number in columns 1 through 5 in data block 2 is positive and then
has the number of data lines required by data block 2.
Note that a boundary condition in the middle of the list can be removed by
boundary condition.
16-30 4th F Specified potential increment (real part).
31-45 5th F Specified potential increment (imaginary part).
Main Index
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) 1689
Define Point Current and/or Charge
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - Define Point Current and/or Charge

History Definition)
Description
This option allows nodal point currents and point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine
can be used for nonuniform loading conditions.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 to enter real harmonic current and charge.
Enter 2 to enter imaginary harmonic current and charge.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter number of sets of point current and charge to be entered (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of point current and charge data.
Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs; once for each data set.
3rd data block
31-40 4th F Magnitude of point charge.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above point current-charge applies.
Main Index
1690 DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Define Distributed Current

Definition)
Description
converted to consistent nodal currents by Marc. For a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface current of a particular face. The FORCEM user subroutine can
be used to input spatially dependent current.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if distributed current is to be applied as excitation load in a
harmonic analysis.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of distributed current data. Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are given in pairs; once for each data set.
3a data block
Use if not harmonic analysis.
16-20 3rd I Current index. Current index is to be used in the FORCEM user
subroutine.
Main Index
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) 1691
Format
Data
3b data block
6-15 2nd F Enter the real component of distributed current.
16-25 3rd F Enter the imaginary component of distributed current.
26-30 4th I Current index. Current index is to be used in the FLUX user subroutine.
4th data block
Main Index
1692 DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Define Distributed Charges

Definition)
Description
convention for the application of surface charge on a particular face. The FORCEM user subroutine can
be used to input spatially-dependent charges.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words DIST CHARGE.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if distributed charge is to be applied as excitation load in a
harmonic analysis.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of distributed charge data. Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are given as pairs; once for each data set.
3a data block
Use if not harmonic analysis.
6-15 2nd E Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed charges.
16-20 3rd I Charge index (optional). Charge index is to be used in the FORCEM user
subroutine.
Main Index
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) 1693
Format
Data
3b data block
1-5 1st I Parameter identifying the type of charge. See library element description
6-15 2nd F Enter the real component of distributed charge.
16-25 3rd F Enter the imaginary component of distributed charge.
26-30 4th I Charge index. Charge index is to be used in the FORCEM user subroutine.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed charge.
Main Index
1694 CONTINUE (History Definition)
End Loadcase
CONTINUE (History Definition) End Loadcase
Description
The CONTINUE option is necessary to indicate that all data for this increment or series of increments has
been read in. The analysis is then initiated.
Format
Format
Data
1-8 1st A Enter the word CONTINUE.
Main Index
Chapter 5 Rezoning Options List
5 Rezoning Options List
Rezoning Options Page

CONNECTIVITY CHANGE 1690
CONTACT CHANGE 1702
CONTINUE 1711
COORDINATE CHANGE 1699
END REZONE 1712
GAP DATA CHANGE 1697

GEOMETRY CHANGE 1691
MOVE 1701
ORIENTATION CHANGE 1695
PRINT CHOICE 1708
REZONE 1686
Main Index
1696
Rezoning Options Page

SECTIONING 1688
SPLIT BODIES 1687
UFRORD 1700
URCONN 1710
Main Index
Chapter 5 Rezoning Options
5 Rezoning Options
J
Rezoning Options 1699
Main Index
For the analysis of metal forming problems, Marc utilizes the updated Lagrange approach. In this
approach, the state at the beginning of an increment serves as the reference state for the calculation of the
incremental values. At each subsequent increment, the reference state is updated.
This analysis method has several advantages, but it has a limit on the maximum deformation attainable.
Due to the large deformations, the element mesh can degenerate strongly, and, in the updated approach,
this means that the analysis of subsequent increments is carried out with a very poor mesh. This effect
can even be so serious that elements locally turn inside out, which makes further analysis impossible.
In order to continue the analysis with sufficient accuracy, it is necessary to use a new mesh. The state in
the old mesh must be transferred to the new mesh. Such a transfer is, of course, only possible if the state
in the old mesh is defined with respect to the current configuration. Hence, if you use the updated
Lagrange approach, you might be required to rezone the mesh to successfully complete a given analysis.
This process involves two steps, defining a new mesh or remeshing and transferring the results from the
old mesh to the new mesh. This section defines the used-controlled process of creating a new mesh. As
an alternative, the ADAPT GLOBAL option may be used. This procedure automatically creates a new
mesh and is preferred because the meshing automatically occurs when necessary. When using the
“manual” procedure discussed in this chapter, one increment is required to perform this definition of the
new mesh using a complete set of input options, as defined in the following sections of this chapter.
The rezoning capability is available for the following element types:
• Continuum 2-D and 3-D displacement elements (except semi-infinite).
• Shell elements 22 and 75.
• Herrmann elements 80-84, 118-120, and 155-157 using techniques defined under the
SECTIONING option.
• Heat transfer continuum elements.
Main Index
Chapter 5 Rezoning Options 1699
Rezoning Options
Rezoning Options
When you insert the REZONE option into a typical data setup of a problem, Marc is able to read a
selection of the rezoning option format to control the rezoning steps. These rezoning option formats are
described on the following pages. These options must follow immediately after a load incrementation
CONTINUE option. If you do not want any rezoning steps, Marc reinterprets the input as load
incrementation data.
You can select as many rezoning steps in one increment as are needed. Every rezoning step is defined by
the data starting with the REZONE option and ending with the CONTINUE option. The complete set of
rezoning steps that form a complete rezoning increment is terminated by the END REZONE option. The
rezoning input is followed by normal load incrementation data or again by rezoning data.
Main Index
1700 REZONE
Specify Rezoning Input
REZONE Specify Rezoning Input
Description
This option starts the rezoning input and should be present in the rezoning input data. If this option is not
encountered, no rezoning step is performed and the option read in is interpreted as a history definition
option.
This option must be repeated for every rezoning step; if the rezoning increment consists of more than one
step, this option must be repeated.
Format
Format
Data
1-6 1st A Enter the word REZONE.
11-15 2nd I Enter 1 if the total displacements in subsequent increments are to be
printed with respect to the original configuration; otherwise, they are with
respect to the updated coordinate position defined in this rezoning step.
For the regions modeled using Mooney, Ogden, or powder materials, this
should be set to 1.
Main Index
SPLIT BODIES 1701
Defines Rezoned Data of Contact Nodes
SPLIT BODIES Defines Rezoned Data of Contact Nodes
Description
This option is very useful in ensuring correct rezoning in bodies involved in deformable to deformable
contact. In case of slight penetration of the contact node (allowed by the contact zone tolerance) of one
body into another, the rezoned data of the contact nodes is correctly defined with this option. This option
is currently available for 4-node quadrilateral in two-dimensional analysis and 8-node hexahedral in
three-dimensional analysis.
Note: This option must immediately follow the REZONE option and is necessary only in the
increment with rezoning.
Main Index
1702 SECTIONING (Rezoning)
Define Sections for Rezoning
SECTIONING (Rezoning) Define Sections for Rezoning
Description
This option allows rezoning of parts of the mesh. Three input definitions are allowed for specifications
of the mesh part to be rezoned. Only one of the following sectioning options can be used during a
rezoning step definition.
a. Selection by element numbers – a list of element numbers must be supplied.
b. Selection by element type – the element type must be supplied.
c. Selection by material type – the material type must be supplied.
If Herrmann elements are to be used in a rubber rezoning, they should be selected using method B
described above. Only Herrmann element types 80-84, 118-120, and 155-157 can be rezoned.
Note: Only one of the above sectioning options can be used during a rezoning step definition.
If the sectioning option is not used, the complete mesh is taken into account during the current rezoning
step which can cause problems. If discontinuities in material type or element thickness are present, not
all element variables are continuous across element boundaries. In that case, SECTIONING should be
used to divide the regions. If continuum and shell elements are to be rezoned, two rezoning steps should
be taken and the SECTIONING option used to separate the element types.
Caution: If an analysis has both Herrmann elements and displacement elements and a rezoning step
is to be performed, it is necessary to have double nodes at the interface and to tie all the
displacement degrees of freedom. See note on COORDINATE CHANGE option on
definition of coordinate points
Note: For an analysis with 2-D deformable to deformable contact, the SPLIT BODIES option
must be used if rezoning is required for the contacting bodies.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word SECTIONING.
Main Index
SECTIONING (Rezoning) 1703
Define Sections for Rezoning
Format
Data
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of lists of elements to be given in data block 3. If either
option B or C are used, enter 0.
6-10 2nd I If a particular element type is selected enter the element type number to
be selected.
11-15 3rd I If a particular material type is selected enter the material type to be
selected.
3rd data block
The 3rd data block is repeated once for each list of elements.
Enter a list of elements to be taken into account during this rezoning step.
Main Index
1704 CONNECTIVITY CHANGE
Define or Change Connectivity
CONNECTIVITY CHANGE Define or Change Connectivity
Description
This option provides the possibility of changing the connectivity of a number of elements or to delete
and/or add some elements. If elements are added, you must ensure that all the other element quantities
(for example, GEOMETRY) are initialized for this element number in the model definition data and that
the element number to be added is smaller than the maximum number of elements given on the SIZING
parameter. If elements are deleted, you must enter element type 0 in this option.
Caution: If this option is used, the bandwidth of the system matrix might change and this makes a
renewed calculation of the bandwidth necessary. This is automatically done by Marc.
Format
1st data block

1-19 1st A Enter the words CONNECTIVITY CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of elements to be change with this option (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter the file number for input of connectivity. Defaults to input.
11-15 3rd I Set to 1 to suppress printing of element connectivity list during
this option.
3rd data block
One data block per element.
1-5 1st I Element number.
6-10 2nd I Element type. Enter 0 if this element is to be deleted. In the latter case, no
nodes have to be read in for this option.
11-15 3rd I First nodal point.
16-20 4th I Second nodal point.
etc. etc. Repeat until all nodes for this element type are read in. Continuation, if
necessary, is in format 16I5.
Main Index
Specify New Geometry
GEOMETRY CHANGE Specify New Geometry
Description
This option can be used to specify the GEOMETRY model definition data for changed or added elements.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-8 1st A Enter the words GEOMETRY CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of distinct sets of element geometries to be input (optional).
6-10 2nd I Enter file number for input of geometry data. Defaults to input.
3rd data block
Element geometries. The 3rd through 6th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.
1-10 1st F EGEOM1
11-20 2nd F EGEOM2
21-30 3rd F EGEOM3
31-40 4th F EGEOM4
41-50 5th F EGEOM5
51-60 6th F EGEOM6
61-70 7th F EGEOM7
71-80 8th F EGEOM8
For beam and shells, EGEOM8 is the negative of the sum of three numbers
= -(ioffset + iorien + ipin)
ioffset = 0 – no offsets
10 – offsets with beams; include the 5a data block
2 – offsets with shells; include the 5b data block
iorien = 0 – conventional definition of local beam
orientation, beam axis given in 4th through 6th
field in global system
10 – the local beam orientation is given with respect to
the coordinate system of the first beam node.
Main Index
1706 GEOMETRY CHANGE
Format
Data
ipin = 0 – no pin codes are used
100 – pin codes are used; include the 4th data block
Note: iorien and ipin are only valid for beam elements.
See library element descriptions in “Quick Reference” of Marc Volume B:
Element Library for the meaning of EGEOM1, etc. for each element type.
4th data block
Necessary only if ipin = 100
1-5 1st I Enter the pin code associated with the first node of the beam.
6-10 2nd I Enter the pin code associated with the second node of the beam.
The degrees of freedom are defined in the element’s coordinate system
and the pin flags are applied at the offset ends of the beam.
The pin code is a packed integer of up to five unique integers 1 through 6
with no embedded blanks.
5a data block
1-10 1st F X component of offset vector at beam node 1
11-20 2nd F Y component of offset
vector at beam node 1
21-30 3rd F Z component of offset vector at beam node 1
31-40 4th F X component of offset vector at beam node 2
41-50 5th F Y component of offset vector at beam node 2
51-60 6th F Z component of offset vector at beam node 2
61-65 7th I Interpolation flag for higher-order beams
0 – no interpolation of offset vector for midside node
(Offset vector at midside node set to 0.).
1 – linear interpolation of offset vector for midside node
1 – vector in element coordinate system
2 – vector along associated shell normal at node
Main Index
Format
Data
1 – vector in element coordinate system
2 – vector along associated shell normal at node
5b data block
1-10 1st F Offset magnitude at corner node 1
11-20 2nd F Offset magnitude at corner node 2
21-30 3rd F Offset magnitude at corner node 3
31-40 4th F Offset magnitude at corner node 4
41-45 5th I Interpolation flag for higher-order shells
0 – no interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes
1 – linear interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes
46-50 6th I Constant Offset flag
0 – offset magnitude is variable. Four data fields are used to
1 – offset magnitude is constant. First data field is used to
6th data block
Enter a list of elements to which the above geometry is applied.
Notes: For elements 7, 10, 11, and 19, enter 1 in the EGEOM2 field to activate the constant dilatation
option. This improves the behavior of the element for nearly incompressible analysis. See
Marc Volume B: Element Library for further details.
For elements 3, 7, and 11, enter 1 in the EGEOM3 field to activate the assumed strain
formulation. This improves the element bending behavior. This is an alternative to the
ASSUMED STRAIN parameter.
For elements 109 and 110, the penalty factor used to add the constraint for the vector potential
(Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information) to the set of equations for magnetostatic
calculations can be set in the EGEOM2 field.
Main Index
1708 GEOMETRY CHANGE
Format
Data
Beam offset capability is possible for elements 5, 14, 25, 36, 45, 52, 65, 76, 77, 78, 79, 98.
Enter -1 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4a data block. See Marc
The components of the local x-axis for beam elements are entered in the EGEOM4-EGEOM6
fields. These components can be entered in the global Cartesian coordinate system (default)
or in a local coordinate system. In the latter case, the local coordinate system used to define
the beam x-axis is flagged through the EGEOM8 field and is taken to be the coordinate system
defined at the first nodal point of the beam element using the TRANSFORMATION,
CYLINDRICAL, or COORD SYSTEM options. Enter ‘--10 or -11 in the EGEOM8 field to
indicate that the fields EGEOM4-EGEOM6 are in the local coordinate system. If EGEOM8 is
-11, it further indicates that the beam elements are offset and that the nodal offset vectors are
provided via the 4a data block.
Shell offset capability is possible for elements 1, 22, 50, 75, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 138, 139, 140.
Enter -2 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4b data block. See Marc
Main Index
ORIENTATION CHANGE 1709
Redefine Orientation
ORIENTATION CHANGE Redefine Orientation
Description
This option allows redefinition of the internal material orientation data for the new rezoned mesh. See
the discussion of the ORIENTATION model definition option in Chapter 3.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words ORIENTATION CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of orientation angle data sets to follow.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated as pairs; once for each angle data set.
3rd data block
1-10 1st A Enter one of the following to specify orientation angle type:
EDGE 1-2
EDGE 2-3
EDGE 3-4
EDGE 3-1
EDGE 4-1
XY PLANE
YZ PLANE
ZX PLANE
XU PLANE
YU PLANE
ZU PLANE
UU PLANE
UORIENT
3D ANISO
COORD SYS
3D LOCAL
CURVE
Main Index
1710 ORIENTATION CHANGE
Redefine Orientation
Format
Data
11-20 2nd Enter orientation angle.
For EDGE style orientations:
For XU PLANE, YU PLANE, ZU PLANE, UU PLANE, and 3D ANISO, complete the following:
21-30 1st F 1
31-40 2nd F 2 component of user vector 1 with respect to global coordinates.
41-50 3rd F 3
For UU PLANE, 3D ANISO, complete the following:
51-60 4th F 1
61-70 5th F 2 component of user vector 2 with respect to global coordinates.
71-80 6th F 3
For COORD SYS style orientation:

21-25 3rd I Enter the coordinate system ID from COORD SYSTEM option.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with this orientation angle.
Main Index
GAP DATA CHANGE 1711
Redefine Gap Data
GAP DATA CHANGE Redefine Gap Data
Description
This option allows redefinition of gap data for the new rezoned mesh.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the words GAP DATA CHANGE.
2nd data block
6-10 2nd I Unit number for reading data.
Defaults to input format.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are entered as a set; once for each set of gap data materials.
3rd data block
For a true distance gap, enter the minimum distance between end points
|d|.
Notes: If d>0, the two end points are never closer than a distance
|d| apart.
If d<0, the two end points are never farther apart than |d|.
21-30 3rd F KGAP’, the elastic stiffness of the closed gap in the contact direction.
Default: gap is rigid when closed.
31-40 4th F KFRICTION’, the elastic stiffness of the closed gap in the friction direction.
Default: gap is rigid when closed.
41-50 5th F User-supplied momentum ratio for first gap node. Default: Marc
51-60 6th F User-supplied momentum ratio for fourth gap node. Default: Marc
Main Index
1712 GAP DATA CHANGE
Redefine Gap Data
Format
Data
61-65 7th I Enter 1 for true distance gap.
Default is 0: fixed direction gap.
66-70 8th I Enter 1 if gap is closed during increment 0.
Default is 0: gap is open during increment 0.
4th data block
Enter a list of gap elements associated with this set of gap data.
Main Index
COORDINATE CHANGE 1713
Redefine Node Coordinates
COORDINATE CHANGE Redefine Node Coordinates
Description
This option allows redefinition of the coordinates of a number of nodes to redefine the mesh.
If the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used or a rubber rezoning analysis using element types 80-84, 118-
120, or 155-157 is preformed, the new coordinates to be read in by this option are the updated
coordinates. Marc itself divides this into new coordinates and new total displacements. If LARGE
STRAIN is not used, the coordinates to be read in are the actual new coordinates without considering the
displacements.
Format
1st data block

1-17 1st A Enter the words COORDINATE CHANGE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the maximum number of coordinate directions to be read in
per node.
Defaults to the number of coordinates per node.
6-10 2nd I Enter the number of nodal points for which the new coordinates are read
in this block (optional).
11-15 3rd I Enter the unit number to read coordinates.
Defaults to input.
16-20 4th I Enter 1 to suppress printout of nodal coordinate list.
3rd data block
One data block per nodal point.
Input six coordinates per data block; CONTINUE options in format 6E10.
1-5 1st I Nodal point number.
6-15 2nd F Coordinate 1.
16-25 3rd F Coordinate 2.
etc. etc. Number of coordinates per node to read in.
Main Index
1714 UFRORD
Use Subroutine UFRORD
UFRORD Use Subroutine UFRORD
Description
This option calls the UFRORD user subroutine to generate or modify nodal coordinates. See Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines. The option can be repeated as often as necessary. If
coordinates must be modified, this option should follow the COORDINATE CHANGE option. If
coordinates must be defined, this option can be used alone.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word UFRORD.
2nd data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the UFRORD user subroutine is to
be called.
Main Index
MOVE (Rezoning) 1715
Redefine Node Coordinates
MOVE (Rezoning) Redefine Node Coordinates
Description
This option allows you to apply a uniform translation to a list of elements, redefining the coordinates of
all nodes in the elements. This translation is applied to the last value of the coordinates, excluding any
displacement. This option can be repeated as often as necessary.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-10 1st A Enter the word MOVE.
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Enter the number of lists to be entered.
3rd data block
1-10 1st F The amount of translation in the first coordinate direction.
11-20 2nd F The amount of translation in the second coordinate direction.
21-30 3rd F The amount of translation in the third coordinate direction.
4th data block
This data block is entered once for each list.
Enter a list of element numbers to which the above translation is applied.
Main Index
1716 CONTACT CHANGE
Change Surface Contact after Rezoning
CONTACT CHANGE Change Surface Contact after Rezoning
Description
This option allows changes to a deformable surface definition (rezoned mesh) in 2-D and 3-D contact
problems after rezoning occurs. Changes to the rigid surfaces should be made in the next loadcase using
the CHANGE RIGID option. It also allows changes to friction type, choice of Coulomb friction
calculation, maximum number of separations in each increment, suppression of splitting of increment. In
addition, relative sliding velocity for sticking condition, contact tolerance, separation force, as well as
average and cut-off strain rates in rigid-plastic analysis, can also be changed.
Note: See the SPLIT BODIES option if the analysis has deformable-to-deformable contact.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-14 1st A Enter the words CONTACT CHANGE.
2nd data block
(Must be same value as before rezoning.)
deformable surface.
0: No Friction
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb
(Same value as before rezoning.)
Main Index
CONTACT CHANGE 1717
Format
Data
21-25 5th I Enter 0 for the calculation of Coulomb friction based on nodal stress.
Default is 0.
This can only be activated for friction types 1 to 4. Friction types 5 to 7
always used nodal force.
26-30 6th I Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. Default is
9999.
NON AUTO).
Enter 3 to use contact procedure which does not require increment
splitting (iterative penetration checking procedure).
Note: The iterative penetration checking procedure is not available for
dynamic problems using the AUTO STEP option.
36-40 8th I Enter 3 to not reset NCYCLE = 0 when separation occurs; this speeds up
When 0 is entered, if the force on a node is greater than the separation
force, the node separates and an iteration occurs.
next increment.
(ISH).
Enter 0 – Check Node Contact with top and bottom surface
shell thickness
Main Index
1718 CONTACT CHANGE
Format
Data
thickness
node separates.
the node separates.
quadratic elements:
Main Index
CONTACT CHANGE 1719
Format
Data
a file called jid.comnpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
3rd data block
Default = 1.0.
For friction type 5, enter the slip-to-stick transition region (β); Default is
1.e-6.
11-20 2nd F Distance below which a node is considered touching a body (ERROR).
41-50 5th F Separation threshold. The physical meaning of this threshold (a force, a
Notice that the CONTACT TABLE option offers the possibility to define a
separation threshold per pair of contact bodies.
51-60 6th F Contact tolerance BIAS factor. (0-1)
Defaults to 1.05
Defaults to 0.05.
Main Index
1720 CONTACT CHANGE
Format
Data
For two- and three-dimensional contact problems
The data blocks 4 and 5 are repeated once for each data set.
4th data block
11-15 3rd I For rigid surfaces, enter 1 if surface is a symmetry plane.
contact is used.
The first node of a load-controlled body may use the TRANSFORMATION
or COORD SYSTEM option to allow for movement in
user-defined directions.
SPRINGS option.
1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
Main Index
CONTACT CHANGE 1721
Format
Data
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
The 5th data block is only necessary if the surface is deformable; if the surface is rigid, no additional
data is required.
5th data block
Enter a list of elements of which the surface is comprised.
Main Index
1722 PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning)
Select Print Settings
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning) Select Print Settings
Description
This option allows control of the output from Marc. The data given here remains in control until a
subsequent PRINT CHOICE set is inserted – such a set can be included with either the model definition
or the history definition data options.
point or at the centroid only, depending on whether ALL POINTS parameter was used. For shells, only
the extreme fibers are output, plus layers where the inelastic strains or state variables are nonzero. For
beams, fibers with inelastic strains or nonzero state variables are printed. In addition, section forces are
given for these elements. This option also allows debug output of certain items. The default is no debug
printout.
The PRINT CHOICE option has no effect on the postprocessor file (see the POST model
definition option).
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
2nd data block
1-5 1st I Number of sets of first and last element numbers to be printed
(maximum 10).
(maximum 10).
ALL POINTS parameter not flagged).
16-20 4th I Number of layers to be printed. This is for beams and shells only, and
21-25 5th I Increments between printout.
Default is print every increment.
26-30 6th I Enter 1 for complex nodal quantities to be output as magnitude and phase;
otherwise, real and imaginary components are given.
36-40 8th I Log File Flag: Enter unit number to which log file is to be written.
Main Index
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning) 1723
Select Print Settings
Format
Data
3rd data block
Include only of the first field of 2nd data block is not zero.
4th data block
5th data block
Enter the list of integration points to be printed in (16I5) format (number
of entries given in the third field of cards series 2). This is only used if ALL
POINTS parameter is flagged. Be careful with analyses with several
different element types.
6th data block
Include only if the fourth field of the 2nd data block is not zero.
Enter the list of shell or beam fibers to be printed in (16I5) format. This
over-rides Marc’s default, so that you should be aware that you do not
unintentionally miss plasticity or creep printout.
7th data block
Include only if the seventh field of the 2nd data block is not zero
1-5 Enter debug plot code. See the PRINT parameter.
Main Index
1724 URCONN
Invoke User Subroutine URCONN
URCONN Invoke User Subroutine URCONN
Description
This option calls the URCONN user subroutine to generate or modify element connectivity (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.) The option can be repeated as often as necessary.
This option must follow the connectivity change option.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1-6 1st A Enter the word URCONN.
2nd data block
Enter a list of elements for which the URCONN user subroutine is called.
Main Index
CONTINUE (Rezoning) 1725
End Rezoning Input
CONTINUE (Rezoning) End Rezoning Input
Description
This option closes the input for this rezoning step and gives control back to the executing routine.
Format
Format
Data
1-8 1st A Enter the word CONTINUE.
Main Index
1726 END REZONE
End Input for Rezoning Increment
END REZONE End Input for Rezoning Increment
Description
This option closes the input for the rezoning increment. It must follow the CONTINUE option of the last
defined rezoning step of the increment.
If this option is read, control is given back to the main control routine of Marc, and the next input is
interpreted as either mesh plot data or as history definition data.
Format
Format
Data
1-10 1st A Enter the words END REZONE.
Main Index
Appendix A Program Messages
A Program Messages
J
Marc Exits 1728
Main Index
Marc Exits
Marc Exits
Marc provides an exit number when execution terminates, unless a system abort interrupts execution
first. These exits are grouped as follows:
Exit Number Classification

1-1000 Simple data errors detected during initial data input (before END OPTION).
1001-2000 Errors detected during stiffness assembly or load distribution.
2001-3000 Errors detected during solution of stiffness matrix or boundary condition or constraint
application.
3001-4000 Exits during load incrementation control and output. Most normal exits are in this
range.
4001-5000 System I/O Errors.
5001-6000 Errors detected during adaptive meshing.
The following subsections list the current exit numbers with their corresponding description and
probable cause.
Exit Numbers 1-1000

Exit Number Explanation
1 The number of elements associated with a distributed load exceeds the maximum
number given on the SIZING, DIST LOADS, or FLUXES parameters. This usually
happens in the history definition when a new distributed load is added or the number
of elements is increased. Increase the value on the parameter. Note that this cannot be
done in a restarted analysis, it must be done beginning with increment zero.
2 A line being read as a parameter line is unidentifiable. This may be caused by illegal
data or a mistyped line.
3 The compilation of a user subroutine failed. The log file contains information about
the failure. This error is given by the start-up script run_marc before the execution of
Marc has started.
4 The number of fixed displacement boundary conditions input with the BC FILL or BC
GENER options exceeds the maximum specified with the SIZING parameter. Check
the data and change the maximum specification as necessary.
6 The analysis cannot be run in the memory space available. Either increase the work
space on the SIZING parameter or modify the input.
Main Index
Appendix A Program Messages 1729
Marc Exits

Adding the ELSTO parameter stores the element data on the disk, thus reducing the
amount of memory necessary. Reducing the number of layers associated with beam
and shell elements and/or switching to reduced integration elements also reduces the
amount of memory necessary. Be sure that the best solver has been chosen for your
problem and that the bandwidth is being minimized.
7 Normal finish caused by setting the STOP parameter. Try to request larger work space
on the SIZING parameter than the required work space mentioned in the output file,
remove the STOP parameter, and resubmit the analysis.
9 Too many points (more than 60) used in the BEAM SECT parameter. Either the number
of branches in a beam section is large, or the number of points per branch is large.
Reduce the relevant number(s).
13 Data errors have been detected during data input. Refer to output for location of error.
Likely causes are misspelled keywords, mistyped lines, or invalid input options.
14 Negative relative density during equilibrium iterations for the POWDER model.
Decrease the load increment or use AUTO STEP or AUTO INCREMENT schemes. If
the problem still occurs, check the material properties in the input data.
17 Conjugate gradient solver (2) or Hardware solver (6) cannot be combined with the
OOC (out-of-core) parameter, or there is not enough available memory to use this
solver in-core, or Memory Allocation Failed for CASI solver
18 Error with MACHINING (METAL CUTTING) is found.
Possible reason and solution:
1. Features that MACHINING does not support yet are used. Turn off the unsupported
feature if possible.
2. Error in cutter path data. Check the APT/CCL file.
3. If cutter motion type other than
a. Point to Point (GOTO/)
b. Cycle motion (CYCLE/DRILL)
has been used, use the correct CATIA setting to convert it into one of the above
motion types.
4. Wrong loadcase definition option is used.
5. Wrong load case definition option is used.
Main Index
Marc Exits

19 Error in welding simulation. Inconsistency in WELD FLUX, WELD PATH, and
WELD FILL data.
1. Check that weld flux id exists.
2. Check that weld path id associated with weld flux exists.
3. Check that weld filler id associated with weld flux exists.
4. Check that weld flux type (volumetric or surface) is consistent with distributed
flux index.
20 Error in welding simulation. Position of weld flux is not within specified weld path.
1. Check initial position of weld flux specified on WELD FLUX option.
2. Weld flux may be moving out of range of the specified weld path. Check weld
velocity and/or WELD FLUX data. Extrapolation flag may be set to continue
beyond last point on WELD FLUX option.
23 The wave front optimization scheme has lost continuity. This indicates that the mesh
is not continuous. Two or more distinct bodies are defined in the same problem, and
the wave front renumbering scheme cannot handle this case.
Switch to the Sloan optimizer.
24 No elements, springs or ties exist; the analysis cannot be meaningful. Check your
input, it is possible that the input file is empty.
25 Internal renumbering scheme for Lagrange multipliers does not converge. Check if
there are Herrmann elements where all displacement degrees of freedom are
prescribed. Try a different optimization scheme. Otherwise, Marc system error;
consult with an MSC software analyst.
26 No element type chosen. Include ELEMENTS or SIZING parameter.
27 Failure in transformation, most probably due to bad coordinates data.
28 The contacting body is moving away from the bottom dead center. Check current
position and the bottom dead center in the output file (jidname.out) and adjust your
input data.
29 The contacting body is not moving at all. Either the bottom dead center is reached or
the zero moving velocity is encountered. Check current position and the bottom dead
center or the velocity in the output file (jidname.out) and adjust the input data.
30 Selected surface entity not allowable in CONTACT model definition option. Check the
input data.
31 A surface has more entities than the maximum declared. Increase the maximum
number of entities on the CONTACT model definition option.
32 Circle segment data not consistent. Likely cause is that radii calculated are not
consistent with the given input. Check input.
Main Index
Marc Exits

33 There are more boundary nodes than the upper bound declared. Increase the upper
bound to the number of boundary nodes on the CONTACT model definition option.
34 Error in CONTACT model definition option. Either no deformable body has been
defined, or there are rigid surfaces defined before deformable bodies. There must be
at least one deformable body on the CONTACT option. All deformable bodies should
be specified before rigid bodies.
35 During initial surface approach, velocities were set to zero before initial contact
occurred.
36 Data error in supplying the surface profile for a 2-D deformable body. Check that
elements specified for the body form a continuous path. Make sure that there are no
inside-out or upside-down elements.
37 Friction calculations with the CONTACT option are being attempted without defining
the relative sliding velocity below which sticking is simulated. Input the relative
sliding velocity below which sticking is simulated on the CONTACT option.
38 The CONTACT model definition option is being exercised without a time increment
being defined. Enter the time period using either TIME STEP, AUTO TIME, AUTO
STEP, AUTO INCREMENT, DYNAMIC CHANGE, or TRANSIENT history definition
options.
39 Attempt to change contact data during a REZONE increment. Only the elements
associated with a deformable body can be changed during rezoning. Other changes
must be done through the MOTION CHANGE or CONTACT TABLE history definition
options.
40 During the approach stage of a contact analysis, a rigid body did not contact a
deformable body within 1000 trials. The time step per trial is chosen in such a way that
the displacement of the rigid body does not exceed 100 times the error tolerance
calculated by Marc. The initial distance between the rigid and deformable contact
bodies is probably too large or the rigid body velocity has an incorrect direction.
41 Error in determining normal direction to a contact surface; potential conflict with
boundary condition. Try to remove boundary conditions on nodes that come into
contact. It is better to use symmetry surfaces.
42 The number of subdivisions of a 3-D arc must be greater than 1. Change your input in
the CONTACT model definition option.
43 The number of data points of a 3-D curve must be less than or equal to the number of
subdivisions. Change your input in the CONTACT model definition option.
44 The number of data points on a polyline must be equal to the number of subdivisions
minus 1. Change your input in the CONTACT model definition option.
45 The number of spline data points should be greater than 3 and less than 30. If the
number is less than 3, convert the spline segment into a line. If the number of points
is greater than 30, consider breaking the spline segment into multiple spline segments.
Main Index
Marc Exits

46 The number of Bezier data points should be greater than 3. If the number of points is
2, treat entity as a 4-node patch (Type 7).
47 The input data points are either too close or colinear. Could not convert input to
proposed surface type. Check input in the CONTACT model definition option.
48 The current patch is too small for program to find its normal. Check input of rigid
contact surfaces. It is also possible that deformation has caused a surface of a
deformable body to become very small.
50 The normal direction of the tied node in deformable-deformable contact has the same
direction as a boundary condition. Try to remove boundary conditions of nodes that
come into contact. It is better to use symmetry surfaces.
51 END parameter is missing. This must be included in the input file.
57 In a contact body used in the beam-to-beam contact model definition option a branch
is detected. This is not supported in the current version of the program.
58 An analysis feature requested is currently not supported by the parallel version of
Marc but will be in the near future.
59 An analysis feature requested is currently not supported by the parallel version
of Marc.
Unsupported features in the current parallel version of Marc are: acoustic, adaptive,
auto therm creep, axisymmetric to 3-D data transfer (AXITO3D), bearing, buckling,
beam-to-beam contact, design sensitivity and optimization, electromagnetics, explicit
dynamics, fluid and its coupled analysis, gap elements, harmonic, hydrodynamics, J-
Integral, out-of-core solver, radiation, response spectrum, and rezoning.
60 The listed contact body contains elements from the acoustic region and elements from
other regions.
61 The listed contact body contains a combination of different element types (solid +
shell or solid + beam or beam + shell). This is not supported.
62 Beam bodies in the current version cannot touch both beam bodies and other bodies.
67 Marc password security has determined that you are not allowed to run on this
machine; possible reasons are:
1. The choice of machine or current OS level is not compliant with the passwords.
2. The file “license.dat” in the Marc subdirectory “security” contains wrong
information.
3. The directory “security” has wrong access permissions.
4. All available licenses are in use - contact your local MSC software office to
purchase additional licenses.
Main Index
Marc Exits

68 Marc password security has determined that you are not allowed to run on this
machine; possible reasons are:
1. The license has expired.
2. The file “license.dat” in the Marc subdirectory “security” contains
wrong information.
69 A third party solver requested is not supported in this version of Marc on this platform
or in multi-processor mode.
70 Attempt to run a model larger than 500 nodes or 500 elements using the demo version
of Marc.
71 While extracting outlines for remeshing, Marc found more than 100 closed loops in
one body. The closed loops should be smaller than 100 at this time.
72 While extracting outlines for remeshing, Marc found more than 1000 nodes
penetrating a contact body. The slave surface probably has a very coarse mesh
compared with the master contact surface.
75 More than 1 outline found for the 2-D overlay mesher. Use other meshers, such as the
advancing front mesher, in order to overcome the problem.
76 Incompatible view factor data has been read in. The number of segments read in is not
consistent with the number required.
77 Error in restart run. There is an illegal change in parameter or model definition options
in the input file of the restart run, such that the core allocation has changed. This may
also occur if restart data utilized is from a different version of Marc.
78 Error in restart run with user provided mesh data.
79 Error in memory allocation.
80 Lap formation encountered during the analysis.
81 Error in remeshing. Nodes belonging to a body which is being remeshed have
boundary conditions which cannot be transported correctly to the new mesh.
82 Number of faces of a cavity exceeds maximum estimated value. Increase maximum
number on CAVITY parameter.
83 Error determining streamline. Check the input in the STREAM DEFINITION option.
Make sure that the number of edges is consistent between inner and outer surface, and
that the outer surface is truly the outer surface of this body.
84 The density at the surface is less than or equal to zero in recession/ablation calculation.
Enter initial value of density was not provided, or charred density was not provided,
or pyrolysis calculation is incorrect. Check input data.
85 The program is trying to perform an incremental data backup for a nonlinear analysis.
However, the ELASTIC or SUBSTRUC parameter indicates that this is a linear elastic
analysis. This is a conflict.
Main Index
Marc Exits

100 Viewpoint chosen for plotting causes excessive distortion. Probable causes are that the
viewpoint chosen is either within the body or too close to it.
666 The Powder model data input is incomplete. Check the input in the POWDER option.
Exit Numbers 1001-2000

1001 Connectivity exceeded at the node given in the message:
MORE THAN MAXNP JOINED TO NODE...
during in-core assembly of elements. This aborts Marc at that point. If this occurs
during a contact analysis, try to activate single-sided contact on the CONTACT option.
This can also occur if a contacted element has a user-defined tying on the contacted
patch or edge. Otherwise, Marc system error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
1002 Connectivity exceeded at the node given in the message:
MORE THAN MAXNP JOINED TO NODE...
during out-of-core assembly of elements. This aborts Marc at that point. If this occurs
during a contact analysis, try to activate single-sided contact on the CONTACT option.
This can also occur if a contacted element has a user-defined tying on the contacted
patch or edge.Otherwise, Marc system error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
1003 Too many nodes joined to node in forming fluid coupling matrix. Marc system error;
1004 Error occurred when calculating equivalent nodal loads. This is either due to an
incorrect load type, or the element going inside out. Check input for valid load type
for this element type or reduce step size.
1005 Errors during stiffness or mass matrix generation. The output reveals which element
has a particular problem.
If this occurs during the first assembly, it is due to input errors associated with the
COORDINATES, GEOMETRY or the CONNECTIVITY model definition options. If
this occurs during a later increment, it is due to excessive deformation in the element.
Note that this can occur during the iterative process, so that it is not always possible
to visualize the excessive deformation. Check the material behavior and the
magnitude of the incremental loads.
Suggestion:
Activate the cut-back feature if using the AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, or AUTO
INCREMENT solution schemes. This will allow the analysis to automatically cut down
the time step and try again from the end of the last converged increment. For the
AUTO LOAD procedure, the increment numbers are maintained as specified in
the input.
Main Index
Marc Exits

1006 Elastic reanalysis attempted with nonzero displacement boundary conditions and
boundary condition enforcement by row/column elimination. This is not possible.
Remove the APPBC option.
1007 Incorrect Film or Foundation load type given. See additional messages in output to
indicate which element and correct input.
1009 Error encountered in stress recovery. The output reveals which element has a
particular problem. The error is usually due to excessive deformation in the element.
This can occur during the iterative process, so that it is not always possible to visualize
the excessive deformation. Check the material behavior and the magnitude of the
incremental loads.
Suggestion:
INCREMENT solution schemes. This will allow the analysis to automatically cut down
the time step and to try again from the end of the last converged increment. For the
AUTO LOAD procedure, the increment numbers are maintained as specified in
the input.
1010 Error occurred because emissivity was not defined for an element edge or face that is
used in a radiating cavity. Correct input file.
1021 Error in adding fluid mass to node. Marc system error; consult with an MSC
software analyst.
1030 Reference vector obtained by intersection of tangent plane and orientation plane has
zero length; cannot determine preferred orientation. Check input in the
ORIENTATION model definition option.
1031 Error while determining view factors in cavity. Make sure that node numbers defining
cavity are in consecutive order in the input file.
1040 Maximum number of element groups exceeded while using EBE iterative solver.
Increase the maximum number of groups allowed in the SOLVER option.
1041 Error in calculation of the spline constants during the reading of the material database.
1042 Material database file could not be opened.
1043 Too many materials from database used.
1044 Curves in material database have too many points.
1045 Error in calculation of the spline constants during the reading of the material database.
Total number of curves read from material database is too large.
1050 Radiation is using an element type that is not supported by CAVITY option - output
indicates element type. Remove elements of this type from CAVITY DEFINITION.
1051 Error in calculating pyrolysis damage. Damage indicator is less than 0 or greater
than 1.0
Main Index
Marc Exits

1052 The pyrolysis appears to begin on the colder side. Possibly the definition of interior
and exterior surfaces is incorrect.
1053 The mass density is less than or equal to zero; either the initial mass density was not
defined via INITIAL PYROLYSIS or the pyrolysis calculation is incorrect.
1054 Too much ablation occurred within this increment and the fixed time stepping
procedure is used. Either switch to adaptive time stepping or reduce the time step or
increase the amount of ablation allowed per time step.
1055 Attempt to use table ID which has not been defined.
1111 An error occurred during the outline search of a 2-D contact body. In planar problems,
check for correct anti-clockwise numbering of all elements in the body. Otherwise,
Marc system error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
1112 An error occurred during the adding of load provided in DMIG. Marc system error;
consult MSC software analyst.
1113 An error occurred during adaptive meshing. Marc system error; consult MSC software
analyst.

2004 The determinant of the stiffness matrix becomes zero or negative when the indicated
node has been reached during the Gaussian elimination phase of the solution process.
This means that the stiffness matrix is nonpositive definite. If this happens at the start
of the analysis, the condition is usually caused by the existence of rigid body modes.
It may also be caused by incorrect material properties (for example, Poisson's ratio
greater than 0.5; note that these situations may arise through temperature dependence
of properties). In nonlinear cases, the structure may have buckled or reached a plastic
limit load. In rubber analysis, it may also be due to the strain state being in a region
where the input data for the strain energy function is invalid. In contact analysis with
friction, lack of normal forces may result in friction being absent. If desired, Marc may
be forced to continue by use of the PRINT parameter or the CONTROL model (or
history) definition option. Either one of these procedures may be used for restart.
Whenever a nonpositive definite situation occurs one must exercise caution, as the
resultant numerical solution may be infeasible.
2006 System error in multifrontal sparse solver. Marc system error; consult with an MSC
software analyst.
2007 System error in CASI iterative solver. The output gives additional messages. The
problem may be due to rigid body modes in the system. Switch to the multifrontal
direct solver if possible.
Main Index
Marc Exits

2008 Maximum connectivity has been exceeded during application of tying constraints. If
tyings are included, check the TYING model definition and TYING CHANGE history
definition options. This may also occur because of inconsistencies in deformable-
deformable contact; switch to single-sided (K3 style) contact. Marc system error;
2009 Not enough space to convert system from nodal blocks to row format. Marc system
error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
2011 Errors encountered during application of TYING equations. Printout indicates
specific problem.
2012 One of the surface directions in Tying Type 22 (intersecting shells of type 22) has zero
length. This is caused by bad surface normal coordinates at one of the nodes being tied.
2014 Search vector for eigen extraction is zero. Caused by inadequate guess vector, or by
asking for more eigenvalues than the system contains. Do not attempt to extract more
modes than exist in the system. The number of modes is the total number of degrees
of freedom minus the number of boundary conditions. Remember that contact to rigid
bodies effectively apply boundary conditions to the system, hence removing potential
modes.
2015 Not enough work space for the fluid/solid interface calculations. Increase the space
specified on the SIZING parameter,
specified on the SIZING parameter.
2020 Conjugate gradient iterative solver fails to converge within the required number of
iterations. This may be due to the fact that there are rigid body modes in the system,
or that the system is numerically ill-conditioned, such as with shell or membrane
structures.
Possible things to do:
1. Add pre-conditioner, incomplete Cholesky preferred.
2. Increase the number of iterations.
3. Set the number of iterations to a negative number. This forces Marc to continue.
If the solution is truly poor, Marc does not converge in the outer Newton-Raphson
iterations.
2030 Unable to perform dynamic memory allocation for hardware-provided direct sparse
solver. Decrease the amount of memory requested on the SIZING parameter down to
the number printed in the output file (jidname.out). Use reduced integration
elements and reduce the number of layers of shell elements. If you still get this
message, either increase the amount of virtual/real memory on the computer, switch
to the multifrontal sparse solver, or switch to the sparse iterative solver.
Main Index
Marc Exits

2031 Error occurred during initialization or factorization process with hardware provided
direct sparse solver. Switch to one of the Marc solvers. Consult with an MSC
software analyst.
2032 The number of entries including fill-in is too large for the sky-line solver. Use
another solver.
2033 Memory allocation error; not enough memory to perform internal nodal renumbering
with METIS. To avoid this error, try using either a different solver or nodal
optization routine.
2109 Mode with zero energy is found during transient modal response analysis. Probable
cause is failure to use MODAL SHAPE history definition option before DYNAMIC
CHANGE is used. Check input file.
2201 Attempt to recover a substructure, before solving the one level higher superstructure.
2304 Cannot use AUTO INCREMENT with boundary conditions using table input that is a
function of time. either switch to AUTO STEP or remove time dependent table - load
will be controlled by AUTO INCREMENT procedure.
2400 A node on the boundary of a deformable body tried to slide out of surface definition
in a contact analysis. Either the segment of a rigid body is not large enough, in which
case increase the length, or the nodal points in the area of contact have a large
incremental displacement due to possible instability. In the latter case, the suggestion
below may help under certain circumstances.
Suggestion:
INCREMENT solution schemes. This allows the analysis to automatically cut down the
time step and to try again from the end of the last converged increment. For the AUTO
LOAD procedure, the increment numbers are maintained as specified in the input.
2401 In a 3-D contact analysis, a node touching a 3-D NURBS cannot be projected on the
NURBS. Marc system error: consult with an MSC software analyst.
2402 A growing rigid body may have different growing factors in x, y, and z-direction in
this release only if it is not rotating.
2404 A growing rigid body should have relative size of 1.0 at time 0.0 You should scale the
initial size in the modelling phase of your analysis.
Main Index
Marc Exits

3001 The maximum number of increments specified on the CONTROL option has been
reached. Note that increment zero has to be considered as an increment as well.
3002 Analysis has failed to converge to required convergence tolerances. One of several
error conditions has been detected and the run aborted. The output specifies
additional messages.
3003 Analysis could not be finished because the maximum number of increments defined
in an adaptive loading procedure has been reached or the calculated step is too small.
The user should increase the number of increments allowed during the automatic
loading procedure.
3004 This is a successful completion to a Marc analysis, indicating that no additional
incremental data was found and the analysis is complete.
3005 This is a successful completion to a Marc analysis when the CASE COMBIN(ATION)
model definition option is used.
3006 This is a successful completion to a Marc analysis when the user has requested that the
restart file is to be read and that either the results are to be printed or a post file is to
be created.
3007 A restart analysis has been requested at an increment that is not on the restart file. The
previous output will give the message
RESTART DATA AT INCREMENT XX
The new input file should specify the increment number XX on the RESTART model
definition option.
3008 Contact caused the restarting of an increment an excessive number of times. This may
be due to separation or increment splitting. Increase the separation force or reduce the
size of the step. An alternative is to increase the number of recycles allowed.
3009 Time step size becomes too small to continue the analysis. This may be due to having
too many cutback times in current increment. An alternative is to increase the allowed
maximum number of cutback times.
3010 Successful completion of design sensitivity analysis.
3011 Successful completion of design optimization process.
3012 No constraints activated at vertex of design space. Enter bounds on design variables,
as these are probably missing.
3013 User element is not supported in design sensitivity analysis or design
optimization process.
3014 For design optimization with composite layer thicknesses as design variables, the
initial thicknesses may not be given in terms of percentages. Enter only estimated
values, as it is not necessary to enter accurate values in this case.
Main Index
Marc Exits

3015 Unable to reduce the time step below the minimum value allowed, and to still satisfy
the user criteria in the AUTO STEP history definition option. Either change the criteria
or reduce the minimum time step allowed.
3016 The element chosen is not supported in the Lorenzi j-integral calculation. This element
type must not be used in the crack region of the model, but it can be used outside the
crack region.
3017 DESIGN SENSITIVITY cannot be used with rebar elements.
3018 This is a successful completion of an analysis to generate an MD Adams MNF
database file.
3019 MD Adams MNF database file generation failed.
3020 Job stopped immediately due to user intervention.
3021 Job stopped at end of increment due to user intervention.
3022 This is a successful completion of an analysis to generate a DMIG file of a substructure.
3023 This analysis needs the use of solver 8.
3025 Normal ending of Marc-reader.
3026 Marc-reader does not support substructures or superelements.
3027 Marc-reader does not support:
1. UFCONN user subroutine;
2. Element type chosen.
3. Reading of a restart file. Set relevant field to 1 in Marc input file.
3030 Job has created brake squeal DMIG matrices as requested.
3031 Job has created contact interface file as requested.
3032 Job has been terminated in an AUTO INCREMENT loadcase because the load has
reached over 100% of desired load in opposite direction. It is likely that the wrong
branch in bifurcation analysis has been taken. Change the AUTO INCREMENT
procedure and/or tighten the convergence testing.
3300 The eigenvalue extraction did not converge within the maximum number of iterations
allowed. Increase the maximum number of cycles or tolerance in the MODAL SHAPE,
MODAL INCREMENT, BUCKLE, or BUCKLE INCREMENT options or, if applicable,
change from the inverse power sweep to the Lanczos method using the BUCKLE
parameter.
3301 Eigenvalue analysis requested, but either mass is zero or initial stress stiffness is zero.
For dynamic modal analysis, make sure that there is mass in the system. This can be
from either entering a mass density or mass points. For buckling analysis, make sure
that load has been previously applied to the structure, such that stresses are present.
Main Index
Marc Exits

3302 Nonpositive definite system occurred during Lanczos eigenvalue extraction for
buckling analysis. Decrease the applied load before the buckling analysis is performed
or switch to the inverse power sweep method using the BUCKLE parameter.
3303 Either eigenvalue extraction for modal analysis or buckling analysis cannot be
performed immediately after the activation or de-activation or local adaptive meshing
or global rezoning of elements or the number of modes below the specified maximum
frequency is zero. You should perform at least one extra increment before the
eigenvalue extraction can be performed or change the maximum frequency.
3304 In an inertia relief analysis using the Kinematic method, only free directions specified
for inertia relief loading can be left unconstrained. If non-inertia relief directions are
unconstrained, the system has a singularity. You should constrain the non-inertia relief
directions OR you should specify the unconstrained directions as free inertia relief
directions.
3305 Eigenvalue extraction for modal analysis using the Lanczos method did not converge.
A possible cause is that the model contains rigid body modes and the value of the
lowest frequency to be extracted (defined on the MODAL SHAPE option) is either zero
or very small.
Try to specify this value to be around 10% of the first nonzero eigenfrequency. If you
specify a positive value, you will only find the positive eigenmodes; if you specify a
negative value also, the rigid body modes will be found.
3401 Errors in torque (or friction force) controlled steady state rolling analysis. Check the
error messages in the output file for details.
3402 In a structural zooming analysis, the local analysis time exceeds the maximum time
available in global post file. Either rerun the global analysis with a wider time range
in post file, or use extrapolation option defined under GLOBALLOCAL.
3403 Errors in a structural zooming analysis when read in the global post file. Check the
error messages in output file for details.
3410 The thermal solution has become unstable. If using fixed time step procedure reduce
time step and/or reduce the maximum error in the temperature estimate allowed. If
using adaptive time step procedure reduce the maximum temperature change allowed
nd/or reduce the maximum error in the temperature estimate allowed.
Main Index
Marc Exits

4001 Sequential I/O error: problems with opening, reading or writing files. Check file
access permissions and available disk space. If on a restart or post file, there was an
attempt to read an increment which is not on file. Otherwise, Marc system error;
4002 Cannot find jidname.pass file which is needed for automatic restart run. This is an
internal file and should not be removed.
4003 Cannot read any “continue” statement in jidname.rst file for the automatic
restart run. Check jidname.dat to make sure there are loadcases to run the problem.
4004 Cannot find the jidname.rst file which is needed for automatic restart run. This is
an internal file and should not be removed.
4009 Sequential I/O error, unable to open file. Either a file requested is not found, or there
is a system protection against opening the file. Make sure that you have read/write
permission in the current directory or that the file has not been opened by another
process; for example, Marc Mentat.
If this is a mesh data file, the mesher may have failed to create a mesh.
4031 Unable to obtain the memory requested during a dynamic memory request. This can
be due to the following reasons:
1. The maximum allowed amount of memory is exceeded. This is specified by the
MAXSIZE variable in the include file in the tools directory in the Marc install
directory. MAXSIZE specifies the memory in million words, multiply by 4 to get
the amount in megabytes.
2. There is not enough free memory on the system. If the memory available is not
enough for an in-core solution, Marc attempts to perform the solution out-of-core.
In this case, some data which normally would be stored in memory is stored on
the hard disk (which could slow down the analysis considerably). The memory
request fails if there is still not enough memory for the analysis.
4032 The maximum amount of memory in the job is exceeded and it was not possible at this
point to switch over to an out-of-core solution.
4209 The option of reading radiation view factors from a file is specified in the related
model definition option, but either the given file could not be opened (for example, no
read permission) or, the input option -vf was not used to specify the file.
4210 Restart requested, but no restart file was provided. Add “-rid” parameter when
submitting the job.
4211 Substructure analysis requested, but no database was found. Add “-sid” parameter
when submitting the job.
4212 AUTO STEP does not support electromagnetics analysis. Try to use other auto
loading strategies.
Main Index
Marc Exits

4213 AUTO STEP does not support soil material models. Try to use other auto loading
strategies.
4214 AUTO STEP does not support powder material models. Try to use other auto loading
strategies.

5001 The number of nodes created during adaptive meshing is greater than the number
specified on the ADAPTIVE parameter. Either increase the number on the ADAPTIVE
parameter or reduce the number of levels allowed with the ADAPTIVE model
definition option. The analysis can be forced to continue using the
ADAPTIVE parameter.
5002 The number of elements created during adaptive meshing is greater than the number
specified on the ADAPTIVE parameter. Either increase the number on the ADAPTIVE
parameter or reduce the number of levels allowed with the ADAPTIVE model
definition option. The analysis can be forced to continue using the
ADAPTIVE parameter.
5003 Adaptive meshing is not available for the element type used. Either use a valid element
type, remove ADAPTIVE option or use ADAPTIVE option with a set specifying
elements of a valid type.
5004 Adaptive meshing is not available for the element type used. Either use a valid element
type, remove ADAPTIVE option or use ADAPTIVE option with a set specifying
elements which are of a valid type.
5005 Number of boundary conditions created during adaptive meshing exceeds the number
specified on the SIZING parameter. Increase the number of boundary conditions
5006 The number(s) of nodes and/or elements created during adaptive meshing is greater
than the numbers specified on the ADAPTIVE parameter. Either increase the numbers
on the ADAPTIVE parameter or increase the element edge length on the ADAPT
GLOBAL option. The analysis can be forced to continue using the ADAPTIVE
parameter.
5007 Error in performing adaptive meshing with elastic foundations or films; Marc system
error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
5008 The number of elastic foundations or films created during adaptive meshing exceeds
the number specified on the ADAPTIVE parameter. Add FOUNDATION model (or
history) or FILMS model (or history) definition option.
5009 Error in memory allocation while performing adaptive meshing. Marc system error;
Main Index
Marc Exits

5010 System error during adaptive meshing. Marc system error; consult with an MSC
software analyst.
5011 Unable to find surface for adaptive meshing with shells if the ATTACH NODE model
definition option is used. Check definition of surfaces.
5012 Unable to find surface normal when using the ATTACH NODE model definition option
with 3-D adaptive meshing. Check definition of surfaces.
5013 The command string to call mesher is too long. It is likely that your path to the mesher
is too long or your filename is too long.
5024 Not enough space on SIZING parameter to perform rezoning. Increase
workspace available.
5025 The node being printed is used in the TRANSFORMATION or COORD SYSTEM
model definition option and also belongs to an element which is subdivided in the
ADAPTIVE option. This is not allowed.
5050 Number of divisions in the x-direction exceeds maximum needed.
Increase the element target length on ADAPT GLOBAL option.
5051 Number of divisions in the y-direction exceeds maximum needed. Increase the
element target length on ADAPT GLOBAL option.
5052 Something is wrong with start point in mesher. Reduce the element target length on
ADAPT GLOBAL option.
5053 Something is wrong with projection in mesher. Reduce the element target length on
ADAPT GLOBAL option.
5054 Something is wrong with start point in mesher. Marc system error; consult with an
MSC software analyst.
5055 Something is wrong with the mesh outline; outline is not complete. Marc system error;
5056 Cannot mesh with current edge length. Try smaller edge length and, if necessary,
increase maximum number of elements and nodes on the ADAPTIVE parameter.
5057 Error found from 3-D hexmesher. Check error message in file jidname.log.
5058 2-D overlay mesher failed to create a mesh after many trials. This may be due to small
element size or wrong outlines.
5059 The mesher failed to create a mesh. Check error messages in the output file
(jidname.out) or in the log file.
5060 Cannot find the mesh data file. The mesher might be hanging due to memory problem
or the disk space is full.
5061 The mesh data file is not complete. The mesher might be hanging due to memory
problem or the disk space is full.
Main Index
Marc Exits

5062 The solver has been waiting for remeshing status file. Check if Run_sleep program
is running properly.
5063 The element size for remeshing is found to be zero. You need to specify the element
size or number of elements needed for remeshing. Check input.
5064 2-D trimming fails because of the above error. Check your input and redesign
your trimmer.
5065 Bad elements are found after remeshing check if the mesher creates a good mesh.
Contact with MSC Support.
5066 Trimming operation is not supported in Marc release.
5067 During the rezoning process, a new node is found outside the previous mesh. It is not
possible to transfer data to the new mesh. Contact Support.
5091 Stand alone view factor program failed; consult Software analyst.
5092 The solver has been waiting for view factor status file. Check if Run_sleep program
is running properly.
5093 The command string to call viewfactor program is too long. It is likely that your path
to the bin directory is too long or your filename is too long.
5094 Cannot find the view factor data file. The view factor program might be hanging due
to memory problem or the disk space is full.
5095 The view factor file is not complete. The view factor might be hanging due to memory
problem or the disk space is full or the view factor file does not output the
required data.

6001-6999 Reserved for auto restart exit.
Main Index
Marc Exits

9991 Error in 2-D contact code. This is usually related to excessive iterative
displacements which cause difficulties in finding the correct new position
of nodes in contact. Possible remedies are:
– use the iterative penetration checking procedure;
– reduce the load incrementation;
– define the maximum change in the incremental displacement to be equal
to, e.g., a characteristic element length;
– for incompressible materials, only use the tensile stresses in the
geometric stiffness matrix.
If the problem remains, consult an MSC software analyst.
9992 Error in 3-D contact code. This is usually related to excessive iterative
displacements which cause difficulties in finding the correct new position
of nodes in contact. Possible remedies are:
– use the iterative penetration checking procedure;
– reduce the load incrementation;
– define the maximum change in the incremental displacement to be equal
to, e.g., a characteristic element length;
– for incompressible materials, only use the tensile stresses in the
geometric stiffness matrix.
If the problem remains, consult an MSC software analyst.
9993 Error in equation intepretor or evaluator; used by TABLE option.
Main Index
Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option
Workspace Definition and the

B Sizing Option
J I/O With Marc 1749

J
Estimating File Sizes 1750
J
Running Marc 1752
Main Index
1748
Estimating Workspace Sizes for Marc Jobs
Finite element analysis requires the generation of a large amount of data including element quantities,
nodal quantities, input data and the stiffness matrix. Under ideal circumstances, all of this data can be
stored in core.
Marc uses dynamic memory management in performing the analysis. The memory used by Marc is
allocated in separate parts. One part is what is referred to as “general memory” and contains much of the
data used in the analysis. The largest parts are the assembled stiffness matrix and, possibly, the
decomposed stiffness matrix. Solvers 6 (hardware provided), 8 (multifrontal sparse), and 9 (CASI)
allocate the main part of the memory separately. Another part of the memory allocation is the so-called
incremental backup. This is a copy of part of the element data and is needed for a nonlinear analysis.
Other parts allocated separately are the element data, vector data, contact data, tyings, transformations
and data for boundary conditions. The memory allocation is automatically done for the amount of
memory needed. When more memory is needed, additional memory is allocated. Only the general
memory part can be affected by the user. At the beginning of the job, Marc allocates the amount of
memory specified by the SIZING parameter in the Marc input file (if no sizing value is specified, it uses
5,000,000). This memory is among other things used for storing data that is read in. After the model data
is read, more memory is allocated for the general memory as needed. This additional allocation of
memory can be limited by means of the variable MAXSIZE defined in the file include (include.bat on
Windows) in the tools directory of the Marc installation. In the case that the amount specified by
MAXSIZE, or that there is no more memory to allocate, Marc attempts to put part of the memory on disk.
It then activates either the ELSTO parameter or the out-of-core solver option, or both. The ELSTO
parameter places the element quantities on the disk. This option substantially reduces the memory
requirements with only a small penalty to the performance.
For models that require an amount of memory close to the memory limit, it is advantageous to specify a
sizing value high enough to avoid that additional allocation is necessary. The memory allocation in Marc
is done via a C routine called calloc. When additional memory is needed the memory portion is
extended via the C routine realloc. This part is handle by the operative system. During the realloc
phase both the old and the new memory needs to be kept in virtual memory. Thus, it is important that the
system is set up with enough swapping (paging) space. For efficiency, it is usually best to avoid realloc
of large memory segments.
The amount used for general memory is reported at the end of the analysis in the output file under
“memory usage:” as the item “general memory (sizing)”. This printout can also be obtained during the
analysis by means of the control file, see Appendix D. A test run for determining the memory usage
without running the whole job can be done by using the STOP parameter in the input file. Unfortunately,
because of deformable-deformable contact the global bandwidth may increase, hence requiring
additional memory allocation. There is no way to predict this.
Estimating Workspace Sizes for Marc Jobs

Unfortunately, there is no easy method for estimating how much workspace is needed by Marc, as the
space computation is a complicated function of many variables. The most efficient method is to select a
workspace to handle as large a variety of runs as possible, without at the same time sacrificing efficiency
or wasted core space.
Main Index
Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option 1749
I/O With Marc
Marc presents some complications to estimating sizing as both in-core and out-of-core solutions are
possible. It is also possible to have the storage of elements data out-of-core through the use of the ELSTO
parameter. Normally, you have no direct control over whether the solution is in-core or out-of-core except
the OOC parameter may be used to force out-of-core assembly. If the memory limitation is exceeded, the
job goes out-of-core. If the disk space limitation is exceeded, the job stops. The program now comes with
defaults sufficient to run well-sized problems, so simply setting the SIZING parameter to zero (0) allows
these defaults to take over.
I/O With Marc

In this section, the input and output (I/O) that Marc performs during an analysis are discussed. The
machine dependent specifics are discussed in subsequent sections. In many cases, it is your responsibility
to preserve one or more of the files written out for subsequent analysis.
Marc’s execution is performed in a noninteractive manner; that is, input data is placed in a file and is not
modified during the execution of the problem. During the execution of this job, this file and others are
either read, written, or both written and read.
The primary data file is the “input” file and is normally read from FORTRAN unit 5. This file is a so-
called card image file, referring to the days when input was prepared as punch card decks. It is necessary
for all analyses.
The results of the finite element analysis containing the stresses, strains, displacements, reactions, etc.
are normally written to FORTRAN unit 6. This is the “output” file. This file is always created by Marc.
If you request a “restart” file, it is written by default to unit 8. Upon restarting the analysis, this previously
generated file is, by default, read from as unit 9. The restart files are binary sequential files containing
the results of one or more increments. You can control the frequency with which the restart information
is written. The information written for each increment contains control information, element and
nodal data.
Normally, you should request that a subset of the results be written to an auxiliary file labeled the post
file. This information is typically used for postprocessing by Marc. Mentat and MD Patran use this
information to produce either deformation, contour, x-y, or time history plots. The PLDUMP program, as
discussed in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines, can also be used to examine this
information. This file is used to transfer temperature data from a heat transfer analysis to a stress analysis.
You select the post file to be either a binary or formatted (ASCII) file. Either type of a file is a sequential
file. By default, the binary file is written to unit 16 and the formatted file is written to unit 19. The
advantage of generating a binary file is that the I/O time is faster and the resultant file is smaller. The
advantage of generating a formatted file is that the results can be more readily transferred to another
machine for postprocessing. The PLDUMP program can be used to translate the post file from one format
to the other. One or more increments of analysis can be written to this file.
Upon restart, you can request that Marc make a new post file that contains either the information from
both previous and restart analyses (continuous) or the data from the restart analysis only. If the RESTART
option appears before the POST option, a continuous post file is written. In such an analysis, the old post
Main Index
1750
Estimating File Sizes
file is read from units 17 or 20 depending on whether a binary or formatted file was made, respectively.
The creation of a continuous post file results in a much larger file.
If the CHANGE STATE option is used in a thermal stress analysis, the post files previously generated in
a heat transfer analysis is read from unit 24 (formatted) or unit 25 (binary).
If the PRE STATE option is used, the post files previously generated is read from unit 24 (formatted) or
unit 25 (binary).
If the GLOBALLOCAL option is used, the post files previously generated is read from unit 24 (formatted)
or unit 25 (binary).
The use of substructures/superelements requires I/O on multiple files. The primary data base is a direct
access binary file written to unit 31. Optionally, you can place the bulk of the information required in
substructure analysis to auxiliary sequential binary files. In this case, each formed superelement is placed
in its own file. The direct access database is still required.
Marc also uses additional files for scratch purposes depending on the type of the analysis or options
selected, as discussed below.
If you include the ELSTO parameter, the information associated with element quantities is stored on a
binary direct access file on unit 3. These element quantities are stresses, strains, plastic strains, etc. Marc
may automatically switch on the ELSTO parameter if the workspace specified on the SIZING parameter
is not adequate to store the information in core.
The global stiffness matrix typically requires the largest amount of data. If the amount of data exceeds
the available workspace, Marc automatically utilizes the out-of-core solver. The out-of-core assembly
and solver utilize as many as five files. Some of the files are used for multiple purposes during this
process. Files 11, 12, 13, and 15 are binary sequential files, while file 14 is a binary direct access file.
Marc also uses files 12 and 13 during the iteration process of nonlinear analysis.
If the Lanczos eigenvalue extraction procedure is used, the eigenvectors are stored in a binary sequential
file on unit 22.

In an out-of-core solution using the symmetric profile solver, units 11 and 12 have approximately the
same storage space requirements. The number of single-precision words needed is:
NUMNP*(MAXBW*NDEG*2+3)*NDEG
where
NUMNP = number of nodes in the mesh

MAXB = average nodal half-bandwidth
W
NDEG = number of degrees of freedom per node
Main Index
The other two out-of-core solution files, units 13 and 15, are also approximately the same regarding total
disk space usage. The number of single- precision words is:
MAXBW2 * NDEG2
where
MAXBW and NDEG are defined as above.
Also important is the need to have some idea of how large the files created by the POST or RESTART
options are going to be. For the POST option, the approximate number of words written per increment is:
(NUMV*INTEL*NUMEL)+(NUMNP*JNODE*NDEG)
where
NUMV = number of element variables per integration point

INTEL = maximum number of integration points per element
NUMEL = number of elements
NUMNP = number of nodes
JNODE = number of types of nodal vectors written to the post file.
NDEG = number of degrees of freedom per node
Note: INOD = JNODE * NDEG. Also see Block 502nn for PLDUMP 2000 in the same chapter
mentioned above.
The format of a restart file is much more complicated and changes somewhat with every new feature
added. Therefore, an accurate estimate of space requirements is very difficult. The amount of data output
depends, to some extent, on the options within Marc that have been selected.
However, the largest amount of data on the file is formed from three parts:
1. Space for element variables (connectivity, stresses, etc.).
2. Space for the storage of the displacement, load and coordinate vectors.
The space for the first two can be found by examining the output of a Marc run. About one-third of the
way down the page entitled “Key to Strain, Stress, and Displacement Output”, there is a section “Internal
Core Allocation Parameters”. In this section, the total space required in words for element and
vector storage is printed.
When these two numbers are added together, you will have a rough idea of how many words per
increment are written to the restart file. When a large analysis of many increments is run, the total number
of words in the restart file is quite large.
Note that since all these files contain unformatted variable-length records, some extra space must be
added to the above figures to determine the total disk space. Also, Marc requires some additional space
Main Index
1752
Running Marc
for internal control variables, thereby increasing the total space even more. Thus, any estimates should
be at least doubled to provide a sufficient safety margin.
Running Marc
This section describes the use of Marc on UNIX- and Linux-based and Windows platforms. Marc is
mainly controlled by a shell script program called run_marc (run_marc.bat for Windows
platforms) which is stored in the subdirectory tools. If you have used the option to create a link during
the installation, this shell script is also known system wide as marc. It is designed to handle practically
all possible options.
The shell script submits a job and automatically takes care of the file assignments provided that use is
made of the default FORTRAN file units as specified in Table B-1. Note that Marc automatically opens
all needed file units. For the single processor case, the shell script must be executed in the directory where
all relevant input and output files concerning the job are available. To use the shell script, each Marc job
should have a unique name qualifier and, as a result, all Marc output files connected to that job use this
same qualifier.
For domain decomposition based parallel processing on the same platform, see the -nprocd option in
Table . For parallel processing over a number of machines refer to the Parallel Installation and User Notes
for the Parallel Network version of Marc on UNIX or NT.
Table B-1 FORTRAN File Units Used by Marc

File Name Unit Description File Type
jidname.log 0 Analysis sequence log file sequential access, formatted
jidname.t01 1 Usually contains mesh data random access, formatted
jidname.t02 2 OOC* solver scratch file random access, binary
jidname.t03 3 Element data storage (see random access, binary
ELSTO parameter)
jidname.dat 5 Data input file sequential access, formatted
jidname.out 6 Output file sequential access, formatted
jidname.t08 8 Restart file, written out sequential access, binary
ridname.t08 9 Restart file to be read in from a sequential access, binary
previous job
jidname.t11 11 OOC* solver scratch file sequential access, binary
jidname.t14 14 OOC* solver scratch file random access, binary
*OOC denotes Out-Of-Core solution.
Main Index
Running Marc
Table B-1 FORTRAN File Units Used by Marc (continued)

jidname.t16 16 Post file, written out sequential access, binary
ridname.t16 17 Post file to be read in from a sequential access, binary
previous job
jidname.t18 18 Mesh optimization sequential access, formatted
correspondence table
jidname.fem 18 From Marc to external mesher sequential access, formatted
jidname.t19 19 Post file, written out sequential access, formatted
ridname.t19 20 Post file to be read in from a sequential access, formatted
previous job
jidname_j_.dat 21 Temporary input file when cut- sequential access, formatted
back is used.
jidname.t22 22 Subspace iteration scratch file. random access, binary
jidname.t23 23 Fluid-solid interaction file. sequential access, binary
pidname.t19 24 Temperature post file for sequential access, formatted
CHANGE STATE or post file
from previous analysis for PRE
STATE or GLOBALLOCAL.
pidname.t16 25 Temperature post file for sequential access, binary
CHANGE STATE or post file
from previous analysis for PRE
STATE or GLOBALLOCAL.
jidname.t29 29 Incremental backup file when sequential access, binary
ELSTO, IBOOC is used, or
insufficient memory exists.
sidname.t31 31 Substructure results file sequential access, binary
jidname.t32 32 Secant method file sequential access, binary
jidname.t33 33 Lanczos scratch file sequential access, binary
sidname.t35 35 Substructure results file sequential access, binary
material.mat 38 Material data base file sequential access, formatted
jidname.g 39 Intergraph post file sequential access, formatted
jidname.unv 40 I-DEAS Universal post file sequential access, formatted
jidname.t41 41 Post file – Domain sequential access, binary
Decomposition
Main Index
1754
Running Marc

ridname.t42 42 Post file – Domain sequential access, formatted
Decomposition
jidname.opt 45 Duplicate loadcase data file sequential access, formatted
during design optimization run
jidname.t46 46 Design optimization scratch file sequential access, binary
jidname.trk 47 New particle tracking file sequential access, formatted
ridname.trk 48 Old particle tracking file sequential access, formatted
userspecified 49 User defaults file sequential access, formatted
(see Appendix C: Default File)
jidname.vfs 50 Viewfactors sequential access, formatted
jidname.lck 51 Locking of post file sequential access, formatted
jidname.cnt 52 Dynamic control file sequential access, formatted
jidname.mfd 52 rebar - Marc Mentat interface sequential access, formatted
jidname- 52 beam-beam contact - Marc sequential access, formatted
bbc.mfd Mentat interface
jidname_spline 52 Contact with spline - Marc sequential access, formatted
.mfd Mentat interface
jidname.seq 53 Sequence option sequential access, formatted
jidname.rst 54 Loadcase data sequential access, formatted
jidname.mesh 55 User supplied mesh sequential access, formatted
jidname.feb 55 From 3-D mesher to Marc sequential access, formatted
jidname.pass 56 Auto restart command line sequential access, formatted
jidname.rms 57 2-D outline file for remeshing sequential access, formatted
jidname.domesh 59 Lock files indicating meshing sequential access, formatted
status
jidname.doneme
sh “do mesh” and “done mesh”
jidname.sltrk 60 New streamline tracking file sequential access, formatted
ridname.sltrk 61 Old streamline tracking file sequential access, formatted
jidname.sts 67 Analysis progress reporting file sequential access, formatted
bbctch.noconv 80 beam-beam contact information sequential access, formatted
jidname.t81 81 multifrontal OOC scratch file random access, binary
jidname.t82 82 multifrontal OOC scratch file random access, binary
Main Index
Running Marc

jidname.t83 83 multifrontal OOC scratch file sequential access, binary
jidname.t84 84 multifrontal OOC scratch file sequential access, binary
jidname.t85 85 multifrontal DDM scratch file sequential access, binary
jidname.fld 91 Forming Limit input file sequential access, binary
filename.apt 94 APT file - machining option sequential access, file
filename.ccl 95 CL file - machining option sequential access, file
EXITMSG 97 Exit messages sequential access, formatted
USRDEF 98 User global defaults file sequential access, formatted
(see Appendix C: Default File)
jidname.t08 99 Base restart file for DDM sequential access, formatted
jidname.grd 103 Grid Force Balance Output sequential access, formatted
user specified 110 - 119 Include files for input sequential access, formatted
jidnam-dmig* 120 - 130 DMIG output files. sequential access, formatted
jidname.hmr N/A Hypermesh results file sequential access, binary C file
jidname.dump N/A Scratch file used during sequential access, binary C file
memory reallocation on
Windows if in-core
reallocation fails.
Marc input files should always be named job_name.dat, whereby the prefix job_name (or jidname,
as in Table B-1; also see -jid below) is the name qualifier which you are free to choose. The
suffix .dat is obligatory.
To actually submit a Marc job from the command line, the following command should be used. The
single input line is split over multiple lines for clarity:
run_marc -jid job_name (required as minimum)

-rid restart_name
-pid post_name
Main Index
1756
Running Marc
-sid job_name containing solution of the external nodes

-prog program_name
-user user_subroutine_name
-save save_user_executable
-queue queue_name
-back alternative for -queue
-ver verification_flag
-def data_name
-vf viewfactor
-nprocd domains
-nthread threads
-dir directory where job I/O takes place
-sdir directory where job scratch files are placed
-itree message passing type
-host hostfile (for running over the network)
-comp compatible machines on a network
-pq Batch queue only: queue priority
-at Batch queue only: delay time for start of job
-cpu Batch queue only: cpu time limit
-autorst autorestart_value.
Table B-2 describes the meanings of these input options and Table B-3 gives examples.
Main Index
Running Marc
Table B-2 run_marc Input Options*

Keyword Options Description
-jid (-j) job_name Input file (and, therefore, job) name identification. Requires
job_name.dat for all programs except the curve fit and
neutral plot programs.
-prog (-pr) progname Run marc with or without user subroutine.
Run the post file conversion program pldump.
Run saved executable progname.marc from a previous job

(see -user and -save).
-user (-u) user_name User subroutine user_name.f is used to generate a new
executable program called user_name.marc (see -save and
-prog).
-save (-sa) no Do not save the new executable program user_name.marc.
yes Save the executable program user_name.marc for a next

time (see -prog and -user).
-rid -(r) restart_name For marc or progname: identification of previous job_name
that created restart file.
-pid (-pi) post_name For marc or progname: identification of previous job_name
that created the post file containing temperature data.
-sid (-si) super Identify the job that contains the solution to the external nodes
of the superelement.
-queue (-q) background Run Marc in the background.
foreground Run Marc in the foreground.
queue name Submit to batch queue the queue name. Only available for
machines with batch queue; for example, Convex, Cray. Queue
names and submit command syntax can differ from site to site,
adjust run_marc if necessary.
-back (-b) yes Alternative for -queue: run Marc in the background.
no Run Marc in the foreground.

-ver (-v) yes Ask for confirmation of these input options before starting the
job. Start the job immediately.
no
-def (-de) data_name File name containing user defined default data.
*Default options are shown in bold.
Main Index
1758
Running Marc
Table B-2 run_marc Input Options* (continued)

-vf viewfactor Name of file containing viewfactors for radiation
viewfactor.vfs.
-nprocd number Number of domains for parallel processing.
-nprods number Number of domains for parallel processing using a Single
Input file.
-nthread number Number of threads per task.
-itree Message passing tree type for domain
decomposition.(Normally for internal debugging
purposes only.)
-dir directory_name Pathname to directory where the job I/O should take place.
Defaults to current directory.
-sdir directory_name Directory where scratch files are placed.
-host (-ho) hostfile Specify the name of the host file for running over a network
(default is execution on one machine only in which case this
option is not needed).
-comp (-co) yes When machines are compatible in a run over the network.
Examples of compatible machines are:
no
1. Two or more SGI, SUN, IBM, HP, and DEC with
exactly the same processor type and OS.
2. One SGI R8000/Irix 6.2 and one SGI R10000/Irix
6.5 machine.
3. One SUN Ultra/Solaris 2.5 and one SUN
Ultra/Solaris 2.6.
4. One HP J Class/HPUX-10.20 and
one HP C Class/HPUX-10.20.
This option is only needed when user subroutines are used.
-ci yes Copy input files automatically to remote hosts for a network
run, if necessary.
no
-cr yes Copy post files automatically from remote hosts used for a
network run, if necessary.
no
-pq 0,1,2,etc Batch queue only: queue priority.
Main Index
Running Marc
Table B-2 run_marc Input Options* (continued)

-at (-a) date/time Batch queue only: delay time for start of job.
Syntax: January,1,1994,12:30
or: today,5pm
-cpu sec Batch queue only: CPU time limit.
-autorst 0 or 1 If 0 when remeshing is required, the analysis program goes into
a wait state until meshing is complete.
If 1 when remeshing is required, the analysis program

stops, the mesher begins, and the analysis program
automatically restarts.
Using the default procedure (0) uses more memory, but

less I/O.
Using the restart procedure (1), invokes the

RESTART LAST option.
Table B-3 Examples of Running Marc Jobs

Examples of Running Marc Jobs Description:
run_marc -jid e2x1 Runs the job e2x1 in the background. The
input file e2x1.dat resides in the current
working directory.
run_marc -jid e2x14 -user u2x14 -save yes Runs the job e2x14 in the background,
using the user subroutine u2x14.f and the
input file e2x14.dat. An executable
program named u2x14.marc is saved after
completion of the job.
run_marc -jid e2x14a -prog u2x14 Runs the job e2x14a in the background
using the executable produced by job
e2x14.
run_marc -jid e3x2a -ver no -back no Runs the job e3x2a in the foreground. The
job runs immediately without verifying
interactively.
run_marc -jid e3x2b -rid e3x2a Performs a restart job in the background
using the results of the previous job e3x2a.
run_marc -jid e3x29 -nprocd 2 Runs the two domain job in the background
over two processors. Asks for verification.
Main Index
1760
Running Marc
Main Index
Appendix C Default File
C Default File
Main Index
Marc allows commonly used options to be stored in a file, so that it is not necessary to include them into
the input file. This can be done in two ways. First, an organization could have a file that has options that
are commonly used and shared by all users. The file name is defined by an environment variable named
USRDEF (see Appendix B, Table B-1, Unit 98). This default file is read first. Second, you can specify a
file when you are running an analysis. This is done when submitting a job using the -def option (see
Appendix B, Table B-1, Unit 49). This file is read second.
Values of data previously read can be overwritten. Your actual model data specified by -jid is read last.
It can also overwrite previously defined data. The form of the file containing the defaults is the same as
the standard Marc input file (it must include an END parameter and an END OPTION model definition
option), but is restricted to selective options. These options include:
Parameters
All parameters can be put in the default file.
Model Definition Options

ADAPTIVE
CONTROL
CONVERT
NO PRINT
OPTIMIZE
POST
RESTART
RESTART LAST
SOLVER
SUMMARY
END OPTION
Main Index
Appendix D Control File
D Control File
Main Index
Marc allows you to change the controls while the analysis is being performed. This is done by creating a
file named jid.cnt where jid is the job id name.
This file supports the following options.
STOP Stops the job as soon as the current operation is complete; goes through the
Marc quit procedure to correctly close files.
STOP NEXT Stops the job after the completion of the current increment. As you can change
the restart frequency or post frequency, you can make sure that his last
increment is saved.
CONTROL Same as normal CONTROL history definition option; can be used to change
tolerances, etc.
POST INCREMENT Same as normal POST INCREMENT option; can be used to change post
tape frequency.
RESTART IN Same as normal RESTART INCREMENT option; can be used to change restart
file frequency.
RESTART NOW Writes a restart file at the end of the current increment.
ADAPT GLOBAL Same as normal ADAPT GLOBAL option; can be used to change global
remeshing settings.
MEMORY Prints out a memory usage summary similar to the one printed at the end of
the analysis.
TIMING Prints out a timing summary similar to the one printed at the end of
the analysis.
Main Index
Appendix E Environment Variables
E Environment Variables
Main Index
Marc has introduced user-controlled environment variables. They can be put into your login shell script
or the run_marc shell script. However, it is not recommended that you change any of these default
settings.
These environment variables include:
EXITMSG Name of file containing centralized exit messages. The default is set in run_marc
or run_marc.bat.
USRDEF Name of file containing default input options/data. Change is not recommended.
There is no default setting for this variable. The default input options/data are set
internally in Marc.
AFMATDAT Name of file containing material data base. The default is set in run_marc or
run_marc.bat.
IBIG Set to 1 for reading integers in I5 format, reals in F10 format.
Set to 2 for reading integers in I10 format, reals in F20 format. This setting is not
necessary if the EXTENDED parameter is used in the Marc input file. There is no
default setting for this variable.
NPROCDS Set to the number of domains when using the single input data file for parallel
processing using DDM.
MSC_MMEM Set to the maximum number of elements or nodes in the model. Default is one
million.
If you need to reset these variables:
For UNIX environments, you typically use

csh and similar: setenv USRDEF myfile.dat
sh, ksh and similar: USRDEF=myfile.dat
export USRDEF
For Windows, you typically define the environmental variable under the Control Panel or define at a
Command Prompt:
set USRDEF=myfile.dat
Main Index
Appendix F Material Database
F Material Database
Main Index
To enter a new material into the database, the following steps would be performed.
Please use the name convention followed in Marc to be certain that Marc reads your material data file
properly. Using the convention, Marc exits with error if the file with the material name does not exist in
the directory. The user-defined material data should use the prefix of usr_ and the file extension for the
flow stress data should be .mat. Eight characters are allowed after usr_. For example, if you name your
material as usr_material, you will create one use_material.mud or use_material.mfd file for
Marc Mentat database and one flow stress data file, usr_material.mat for the analysis. You have to
place the Marc Mentat database file in mentat/materials/directory. You can put the flow stress file in your
current job directory or in marc/AF_flowmat directory if you want to share it with other users. Once you
have done the preparation for the material database, you can use it in setting up your finite element model
file in the future.
Step 1
Collect all experimental data for the new material. This includes the following data:
Young’s modulus
Poisson’s ratio
mass density
instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion
yield stress
conductivity
specific heat
latent heats (if applicable)
The above properties may be dependent on the temperature. For the yield stress, it is dependent upon the
equivalent plastic strain and optionally with strain rate.
For the yield behavior of materials, the data must be in the form of Cauchy (true) stress versus logarithmic
(true) strain. Therefore, if your data is in any other form, it is necessary to convert the data. Make sure
your material data is in a consistent set of units.
Step 2
Begin with a new database, use the FILES>NEW to clear out old data. Use SAVE AS to create a database
with the material name you desire. Material name must be no more than eight characters.
Step 3
Use the MATERIAL and TABLE menus to define the material properties except for the flow stress. Enter
a 1 for the initial yield stress.
Step 4
Save database for this material. This file will be called usr_material.mfd, or usr_material.mud.
Main Index
Appendix F Material Database 1769
Step 5
If you have the write permissions, move this database into mentat/materials/. Be sure that you don’t
overwrite a material that has been previously defined.
Step 6
Use the editor to define a file for the flow stress. This file should be called usr.material.mat.
The structure of this file is as follows:
Data structure in x_xxxxcc.mat

1. data card: Material name beginning in column one with the material identification number
Format : character*40
Example : 3.2318 AlMgSi 1
2. data card: ncurves, npoints, ntemps, nerates, number of :
where ncurves : number of curves in input (Max. 400)
npoints : number of data points in each curve (Max. 100)
ntemps : number of reference temperatures (Max. 20)
nerates : number of reference strain rates (Max. 20)
Format : four integer in free format
Example : 30, 13, 5,
6
3. data card: eqpemin, eqpemax, equivalent plastic strain range of the material described in
this input eqpemin
must be = 0.0, logarithmic strain measure
Format : two real in free format
Example : 0.0, 7.0,
4. data card: eratmin, eratmax, equivalent plastic strain rate range of the material described
in this input
Example : 0.2, 10.0,
5. data card: eratmin, eratmax, Temperature range of the material described in this input
Example : 350.0, 550.0,
Main Index
The following data are repeated “ncurves” time (See card 2)

6. 0 data card : documentation text, character*80
6. 1 data card : icurve, temp., erate, sequential curve identification number, Temperature and
equivalent plastic strain rate
6. 2 data card : eqpmin, eq_stress, logarithmic equivalent plastic strain and equivalent von
mises (true) stress (first point)
6. n data card : eqpmax, eq_stress, logarithmic equivalent plastic strain and equivalent von
mises (true) stress (npoint’th point, see card 2)
6.0 : Format : character*80
Example : === CURVE_01 Sig_Yiel, T=350. C, Eps_dot=0.2 1/s
6.1 : Format : one integer, two real in free format
Example : 1, 350.0, 0.20,
6.2 : Format : two real in free format
Example : 0.00, 78.0,
6.i : Format : two real in free format
Example : 11.75, 59.0,0,
6.n : Format : two real in free format
Example : 7.00, 52.0,
•
•
•
Step 7
Save file and move file into marc/AF_flowmat/.
Step 8
Your new material can now be read from:
material properties>Read>Read other materials.
Main Index
Appendix G Flow Line FIle Format
G Flow Line File Format
Main Index
This appendix defines the syntax of the flow line file if the user desires to specify an initial geometry for
the flow lines. This data is entered into a file called jidnam.flw. All data entered is in free format.
Format
Format
Data
1st data block
1st I Enter number of flow lines.
2nd data block
1st I Enter flow line ID.
2nd I Enter flow line type:
0 – straight line
1 – 2-D circle
3rd I Enter number of divisions of the flow line.
3rd data block
For 2-D analysis, if flow line type = 0 (straight line)
1st E Starting point X-coordinate.
2nd E Starting point Y-coordinate.
3rd E Starting point Z-coordinate.
4th E End point X-coordinate.
5th E End point Y-coordinate.
6th E End point Z-coordinate.
For 2-D analysis, if flow line type = 1 (circle)
1st E Center point X-coordinate.
2nd E Center point Y-coordinate.
3rd E Center point Z-coordinate.
4th E Radius.
Note: For 2-D flow line, the Z-coordinate equals 0.
For 3-D analysis, if flow line type = 0 (straight line)
1st E Starting point X-coordinate.
2nd E Starting point Y-coordinate.
3rd E Starting point Z-coordinate.
Main Index
Appendix G Flow Line FIle Format 1773
Format
Data
4th E End point X-coordinate.
5th E End point Y-coordinate.
6th E End point Z-coordinate.
Main Index
Main Index
Appendix H: 3-D Remeshing Files
H 3-D Remeshing Files
Main Index
During the automatic 3-D remeshing phase, several files are created depending on the value of the
verbose flag. These files may be viewed within the GUI to observe the remeshing process. The file names
are based upon the following syntax, jid_bnn.fe?, where jid is the job name, nn is the body number,
and the suffix fe? is described below.
.fem This file is created by the analysis program containing the mesh of the deformed
body, contact information, and meshing information. It is created every time there
is a remeshing operation. Normally, the current working directory contains the last
one created.
If the verbose flag is set to greater than 20, files are saved for each meshing operation.
They have the syntax jid_bnn_ll.fem. Here ll, is the number of times this body
has been remeshed. Note that this is not the same as the increment number.
.fen This file contains the previous edge information, which may be used to create the
new mesh.
If the verbose flag is set to greater than 20, files are saved for each meshing operation.
They have the syntax jid_bnn_11.fen.
.feb This file is created by the mesher containing the new meshing data. This includes the
connectivity, coordinated, and contact node information. This is the mesh that
MSC.SuperForm uses for the next increment.
.fee This file contains information about what edges have been detected. If one observes
small edges with discontinuities between them, one should increase the minimum
edge length.
.fei This file shows the surface of the workpiece after checking for penetration with the
tools, but before remeshing. Only saved if verbose > 40.
.feik This file shows the surface of tool number k. Only saved if verbose > 40.
.fek This file contains the kernel of the mesh. The kernel should do a good job
representing the volume of the body and be smooth. If the kernel is too far from the
surface, it is necessary to reduce the target element size.
.fes This file contains the surface of the final mesh. This is useful for quick visualization.
Only saved if verbose > 2.
To visualize the intermediate files go into the FILE menu, and select NEW, and then type
*read_marc filename.
Main Index
Appendix I: Units
I Units
J
Tables of Units 1778
Main Index
Tables of Units
Tables of Units
Marc has no units built into it. Therefore, the units chosen must be self-consistent. The International
System of units (SI) is an example of a self-consistent set of units but there are more sets of units
supported by Marc tabulated below:
mm/tonne/s/K
Quantity SI or SI-mm Imperial US Common
Length m mm in in
Time s s s s
2
Mass kg tonne lbf-s /in pound (lb)
Mg
Force kg-m/s2 tonne-mm/s2 lbf pound force (lbf)
N N
Density kg/m3 tonne/mm3 lbf-s2/in4 lb/in3
Mg/mm3
Stress kg/m/s2 tonne/mm/s2 lbf/in2 p.s.i.
N/m2 MPa or N/mm2

Energy kg-m2/s2 tonne-mm2/s2 lbf-in lbf-in
J MJ or N-mm
Temperature K C R F
Spec. Heat Capacity m2/s2/K mm2/s2/C in2/s2/R Btu/lb/F
J/kg/C
Heat Convection kg/s3/K tonne/s3/C lbf/in/s/R Btu/in2/s/F
W/m2/C N/s/°K/mm
3
Thermal Conductivity kg-m/s /K tonne-mm/s3/C lbf/s/R Btu/in/s/F
W/m/C N/s/K
Thermal Expansion m/m/K mm/mm/C in/in/R in/in/F
Sometimes the standard units are not convenient to work with. For example, Young’s modulus is
frequently specified in terms of MegaPascals (MPa or, equivalently,
Main Index
Appendix I: Units 1779
Tables of Units
N/mm2) where 1 Pascal is 1 N/m2. As shown in the table below, SI units are fundamental units with only
conversion factors for stress and temperature.
Quantity Common Units to SI Units Multiplication Factor

Length meter (m) meter (m) 1.0
Time second (s) second (s) 1.0
Mass kilogram (kg) kilogram (kg) 1.0
3 kg/m3
Density kg/m 1.0
Force Newton (N) kg-m/s2 1.0
2
Stress MegaPascal (MPa) kg/m/s 1.0x106
Temperature Celsius (C) Kelvin (K) K = C + 273.15
Spec. Heat Capacity J/kg/K m2 2 /s /K 1.0
2 3
Heat Convection W/m /C kg/s /K 1.0
Thermal W/m/C kg-m/s3 /K 1.0
Conductivity
Thermal Expansion m/m/C m/m/K 1.0
However, Imperial or American units can cause confusion since the naming conventions are not as clear
as in the SI system. The American units are not consistent and require the user to give a conversion factor
in coupled analyses. Below you can find a conversion table which will help you to derive Imperial units
from common US units:
Quantity Common Units to Imperial Multiplication Factor

Length inch (in) inch (in) 1.0
Time second (s) second (s) 1.0
2
Mass pound (lb) lbf-s /in 2.590076x10-3
Density lb/in3 lbf-s2/in4 2.590076x10-3
Force pound force (lbf) pound force (lbf) 1.0
Stress lbf/in2 lbf/in 2
1.0
Temperature Fahrenheit (F) Rankine (R) R = 459.67 + F
2/s2/R 3.605299x106
Spec. Heat Capacity Btu/lb/F in
Heat Convection Btu/in2/sec/F lbf/in/s/R 9336.0
Thermal Conductivity Btu/in/s/F lbf/s/R 9336.0
Thermal Expansion in/in/F in/in/R 1.0
Main Index
Tables of Units
The following is a table to convert from SI(mm) to either Imperial or common US units.
Quantity SI(mm) Imperial Factor US Factor

-2
Length mm inch 3.9370x10 inch 3.9370x10-2
Time s s 1.0 s 1.0
Mass Mg lbf-s2/in 5.7101 pound(lb) 2204.6
3 2 4 3
Density Mg/mm lbf-s /in 93.573 lb/in 3.6127x104
Stress N/mm2 lbf/in2 145.04 lbf/in2 145.04
Force N lbf 0.22481 lbf 0.22481
-3 8.8508x10-3
Energy MJ(Nmm) lbf-in 8.8508x10 lbf-in
Temperature C F 9/5*C+32 F 9/5*C+32
2 2 2 2 -4
Spec. Heat Capacity mm /s /C in /s /F 8.6111x10 Btu/lb/F 2.3883x10-10
Heat Convection N/s/C/mm lbf/in/s/F 3.1723 Btu/in2/s/F 3.3979x10-4
Heat Conductivity N/s/C lbf/s/F 0.12489 Btu/in/s/F 1.3377x10-5
Thermal Expansion l/C l/F 0.55556 l/F 0.55556
Finally, it is often necessary to convert between US and SI units for which the following table may used.
General Conversion Factors (to five significant digits)

Quantity US Units SI Equivalent
Length 1 in 0.025400 m
1 ft 0.30480 m
1 mile 1609.3 m
Area 1 in 2
0.64516x10-3 m2
1 ft2 0.092903 m2
1 acre 4046.9 m2
Volume 1 in3 0.016387x10-3 m3
1 ft3 0.028317 m3
1 US gallon 3.7854x10-3 m3
Main Index
Appendix I: Units 1781
Tables of Units
Conversion Factors for Stress Analysis

Quantity US Units SI Equivalent
Density 1 slug/ft3 = 1 lbf s2/ft4 515.38 kg/m3
1 lbf s2/in4 10.687x106 kg/m3

Energy 1 ft lbf 1.3558 J (N m)
Force 1 lbf 4.4482 N (kg m/s2)
Mass 1 slug = 1 lbf s2/ft 14.594 kg (N s2/m)
1 lbf s2/in 175.13 kg
1 lb 0.45359 kg
Power 1 ft lbf/s 1.3558 W (N m/s)
Pressure, Stress 1 psi (lbf/in ) 2
6894.8 Pa (N/m2)
Conversion Factors for Heat Transfer Analysis
Conductivity 1 Btu/ft hr F 1.7307 W/m C
1 Btu/in hr F 20.769 W/m C

Density 1 lb/in3 27680.0 kg/m3
Energy 1 Btu 1055.1 J
Heat flux density 1 Btu/in hr2 454.26 W/m2
Power 1 Btu/hr 0.29307 W
Specific heat 1 Btu/lb F 4186.8 J/kg C
Temperature 1F 5/9 C
Temp F 9/5 x Temp C + 32°
9/5 x Temp K–459.67°

Important Constants
Absolute zero -459.67 F -273.15 C
Acceleration of gravity 32.174 ft/s2 9.8066 m/s2
Stefan-Boltzmann constant 0.1714x10-8 Btu/hr ft2 R4 5.669x10-8 W/m2 K4
where R = F + 459.67 where K = C + 273.15
Main Index
Tables of Units
Main Index
Appendix J: Parameters List
J Parameters List
Links to Parameter
$NO LIST
ABLATION
ACCUMULATE
ACOUSTIC
ADAPTIVE
ALIAS
ALL POINTS
ALLOCATE
APPBC
ASSUMED STRAIN
AUTOMSET
AUTOSPC
BEAM SECT
BEARING
Main Index
Links to Parameter
BOOC
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
BUCKLE
CAVITY
CENTROID
COMMENT
CONSTANT DILATATION
COUPLE
CREEP
CURING
DECOUPLING
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION
DESIGN SENSITIVITY
DIFFUSION
DIST LOADS
DYNAMIC
ELASTIC
ELASTICITY
ELECTRO
ELEMENTS
EL-MA
ELSTO
END
EXTENDED
FEATURE
FILMS
FINITE
FLUID
FLUXES
Main Index
Appendix J: Parameters List 1785
Links to Parameter
FOLLOW FOR
FOURIER
HARMONIC
HEAT
INCLUDE
INPUT TAPE
ISTRESS
JOULE
LARGE DISP
LARGE STRAIN
LINEAR
LOAD COR
LUMP
MACHINING
MAGNETO
MNF
MPC-CHECK
NEW
NO ECHO
NO LOADCOR
NOTES
OOC
PIEZO
PLASTICITY
PORE
Main Index
Links to Parameter
PREALLOC
PRINT
PROCESSOR
PYROLYSIS
RADIATION
RBE
RESPONSE
RESTRICTOR
REZONING
R-P FLOW
SCALE
SHELL SECT
SIZING
SPFLOW
SS-ROLLING
STATE VARS
STOP
STRUCTURAL
TABLE
THERMAL
TIE
TITLE
TSHEAR
T-T-T
UNIT
UPDATE
USER
Main Index
Appendix J: Parameters List 1787
Links to Parameter
VERSION
VISCO ELAS
WELDING
Main Index
Main Index
Appendix K: Options List
K Options List
Links to Options
ACC CHANGE
ACCUMULATE
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
ACOUSTIC
ACTIVATE
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition)
ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)
ADAPTIVE
ADD RIGID (2-D)
ADD RIGID (3-D)
ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D)
ADD RIGID with TABLES (3-D)
ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical)
ANISOTROPIC (Thermal)
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
Main Index
Links to Options
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
ANNEAL
APPROACH
ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input)
ARRUDBOYCE
ASSEM LOAD
ATTACH EDGE
ATTACH FACE
ATTACH NODE
AUTO CREEP
AUTO INCREMENT
AUTO LOAD
AUTO STEP
AUTO THERM CREEP
AUTO THERM
AXITO3D (Model Definition)
B2GG, B2PP (History Definition)

B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition)
BEGIN SEQUENCE
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic)
B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic)
BLOCKS
BOUNDARY
BUCKLE INCREMENT
BUCKLE
CASE COMBIN
CAVITY DEFINITION
CAVITY
CFAST
CHANGE PORE (History Definition)
CHANGE PORE (Model Definition)
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Main Index
Appendix K: Options List 1791
Links to Options
CHANGE RIGID
CHANGE STATE (History Definition)
CHANGE STATE (Model Definition)
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
CHANNEL
COEFFICIENT
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input)
COHESIVE
COMMENT
COMPOSITE
CONM1
CONM2
CONN FILL
CONN GENER
CONNECT
CONNECTIVITY CHANGE
CONNECTIVITY
CONRAD GAP
CONSTRAINT
CONTACT (2-D)
CONTACT (3-D)
CONTACT CHANGE
CONTACT NODE (History Definition)
CONTACT NODE (Model Definition)
CONTACT TABLE (History Definition)
CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition)
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition)
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition)
CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)
CONTACT with TABLES (3-D)
CONTINUE (History Definition)
CONTINUE (Rezoning)
CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic)
CONTROL (Fluid)
CONTROL (Fluid-Solid)
Main Index
Links to Options
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition)
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Model Definition)
CONTROL (Hydrodynamic)
CONTROL (Magnetostatic)
CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition)
CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition)
CONVERT
COORD SYSTEM
COORDINATE CHANGE
COORDINATES
CORNERING AXIS
COUPLING REGION
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input)
CRACK DATA
CREEP (with TABLE Input)
CREEP INCREMENT
CREEP
CURE RATE
CURE SHRINKAGE
CURVES
CWELD
CYCLIC SYMMETRY
CYLINDRICAL
DAMAGE
DAMPING COMPONENTS
DAMPING
DEACT GLUE (Model Definition)
DEACTIVATE (History Definition)
DEACTIVATE (Model Definition)
DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type)
DEFINE (Sets)
DELAMINATION
DENSITY EFFECTS
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS
Main Index
Links to Options
DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS
DESIGN OBJECTIVE
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS
DESIGN VARIABLES
DISP CHANGE
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - Model Definition)
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic)
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic)
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - Model Definition)
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Definition)
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - Model Definition)
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic)
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic)
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
DIST FLUXES (History Definition)
DIST FLUXES (Model Definition)
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
DIST LOADS (History Definition)
DIST LOADS (Model Definition)
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
DIST MASS (Diffusion)
DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic - Model Definition)
DIST SOURCES (History Definition)
DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
DMIG
Main Index
Links to Options
DMIG-OUT (History Definition)
DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic)
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition)

ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition)
EMISSIVITY
END OPTION
END REZONE
END SEQUENCE
ERROR ESTIMATE
EXCLUDE (History Definition)
EXCLUDE (Model Definition)
EXTRAPOLATE
FACE IDS
FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input)
FAIL DATA
FILMS (History Definition)
FILMS (Model Definition)
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
FIXED ACCE
FIXED DISP (Fluid)
FIXED DISP (Mechanical)
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic)
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic)
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
Main Index
Links to Options
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic)
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input)
FIXED TEMPERATURE
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid)
FIXED VELOCITY
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
FIXED VOLTAGE
FLOW LINE
FLUID DRAG
FLUID SOLID
FOAM (with TABLE Input)
FOAM
FORCDT
FORMING LIMIT
FOUNDATION (History Definition)
FOUNDATION (Model Definition)
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
FOURIER
FXORD
GAP CHANGE
GAP DATA CHANGE
GAP DATA
GASKET
GENERATE
GENT (with TABLE Input)
GENT
GEOMETRY CHANGE
GEOMETRY
GLOBALLOCAL
Main Index
Links to Options
GRAIN SIZE
GRID FORCE (History Definition)
GRID FORCE (Model Definition)
HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition)

HARMONIC (Dynamic)
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
HOLD NODES
HYPERMESH
HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input)
HYPOELASTIC
INCLUDE (History Definition)

INCLUDE (Model Definition)
INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition)
INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition)
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input)
INIT CURE
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input)
INIT STRESS
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer)
INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input)
INITIAL DISP
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input)
INITIAL PC
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input)
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input)
INITIAL PORE
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input)
INITIAL POROSITY
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
INITIAL PYROLYSIS
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input)
INITIAL STATE
Main Index
Links to Options
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer)
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress)
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer)
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress)
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input)
INITIAL VEL
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input)
INITIAL VOID RATIO
INSERT
IRM
ISLAND REMOVAL
ISOTROPIC (Acoustic)
ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)
ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic)
ISOTROPIC (Fluid)
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer)
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic)
ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)
ISOTROPIC (Stress)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress)
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
J-INTEGRAL
JOULE
K2GG, K2PP (History Definition)

K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition)
Main Index
Links to Options
LATENT HEAT
LOADCASE (History Definition)
LOADCASE (Model Definition)
LORENZI
M2GG, M2PP (History Definition)

M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition)
MANY TYPES
MAPPER
MASSES
MATERIAL DATA
MERGE (Model Definition)
MERGE SELECTIVE
MESH2D
MIXTURE
MNF UNITS
MODAL INCREMENT
MODAL SHAPE
MOONEY (with TABLE Input)
MOONEY
MOTION CHANGE
MOVE (History Definition)
MOVE (Rezoning)
NEW (History Definition)

NEW (Model Definition)
NLELAST
NO ELEM SORT (History Definition)
NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition)
NO NODE SORT (History Definition)
NO NODE SORT (Model Definition)
NO PRINT (History Definition)
NO PRINT (Model Definition)
NO PRINT CONTACT (History Definition)
NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)
Main Index
Links to Options
NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition)
NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)
NO SUMMARY (History Definition)
NO SUMMARY (Model Definition)
NODAL THICKNESS
NODE CIRCLE
NODE FILL
NODE GENER
NODE MERGE
NODE SORT (History Definition)
NODE SORT (Model Definition)
OGDEN (with TABLE Input)

OGDEN
OPTIMIZE
ORIENTATION CHANGE
ORIENTATION
ORTHO TEMP (Structural)
ORTHO TEMP (Thermal)
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical)
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)
ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical)
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal)
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
P2G (History Definition)
P2G (Model Definition)
PARAMETERS (History Definition)
PARAMETERS (Model Definition)
PBUSH
Main Index
Links to Options
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic)
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic)
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
PFAST
PHI-COEFFICIENTS
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
PIN CODE
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
POINT CHARGE
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition)
POINT CURRENT (Joule - Model Definition)
POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic)
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE
POINT FLUX (History Definition)
POINT FLUX (Model Definition)
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
POINT LOAD (History Definition)
POINT LOAD (Model Definition)
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
POINT MASS (Diffusion)
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Definition)
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - Model Definition)
POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
POINT TEMP (History Definition)
POINT TEMP (Model Definition)
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Main Index
Links to Options
POINTS
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
POROSITY CHANGE
POST (History Definition)
POST (Model Definition)
POST INCREMENT
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
POTENTIAL CHANGE
POWDER (with TABLE input)
POWDER
PRE STATE
PRESS CHANGE
PRESS FILM (Model Definition)
PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input)
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition)
PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition)
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning)
PRINT CONTACT (History Definition)
PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)
PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition)
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition)
PRINT NODE (History Definition)
PRINT NODE (Model Definition)
PRINT SPRING (History Definition)
PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)
PRINT STREAMLINE
PRINT VMASS (History Definition)
PRINT VMASS (Model Definition)
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT
PRTCONNECT
PSHELL
PWELD
QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Main Index
Links to Options
RAD-CAVITY
RADIATING CAVITY
RBE2
RBE3
READ FILE
REAUTO
REBAR
RECEDING SURFACE
RECOVER
REGION (Fluid)
RELATIVE DENSITY
RELEASE NODE
RELEASE
RESET TIME
RESPONSE SPECTRUM
RESTART INCREMENT
RESTART LAST
RESTART
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
RESTRICTOR
REZONE
ROTATION A
RROD
SDRC
SECTIONING (Rezoning)
SERVO LINK
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input)
SHAPE MEMORY
SHELL TRANSFORMATION
SHIFT FUNCTION
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
SOIL (with TABLE Input)
SOIL
SOLVER (History Definition)
Main Index
Links to Options
SOLVER (Model Definition)
SPECIFIC WEIGHT
SPECIFIED NODES
SPECTRUM
SPLINE (History Definition)
SPLINE (Model Definition)
SPLIT BODIES
SPRINGS
SS-ROLLING
START NUMBER
STEADY STATE (Electrostatic)
STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer)
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic)
STIFFNS COMPONENTS
STIFSCALE
STRAIN RATE (Fluid)
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties)
STREAM DEFINITION
STRING
SUMMARY (History Definition)
SUMMARY (Model Definition)
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition)
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition)
SUPERELEM (History Definition)
SUPERELEM (Model Definition)
SUPERPLASTIC
SURFACE ENERGY
SURFACES
SWLDPRM
SYMMETRY
SYNCHRONIZED
TABLE
TEMP CHANGE
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal)
Main Index
Links to Options
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress)
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer)
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic)
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress)
TERMINATE
THERMAL CONTACT (2-D)
THERMAL CONTACT (3-D)
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (3-D)
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition)
THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition)
THERMO-PORE
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
THICKNESS
THICKNS CHANGE
THROAT
TIME STEP
TIME-TEMP
TITLE
TRACK STREAMLINE
TRACK
TRANSFORMATION
TRANSIENT
TYING CHANGE
TYING
UDUMP
UFCONN
UFRICTION
UFRORD
UFXORD
UHTCOEF
UHTCON
UMOTION
URCONN
Main Index
Links to Options
USDATA
UTRANFORM
VCCT
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer)
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic)
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer)
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)
VELOCITY CHANGE
VIEW FACTOR
VISCEL EXP
VISCELFOAM
VISCELMOON
VISCELOGDEN
VISCELORTH
VISCELPROP
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
VOID CHANGE
VOLTAGE CHANGE
WELD FILL (History Definition)

WELD FILL (Model Definition)
WELD FLUX (History Definition)
WELD FLUX (Model Definition)
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
WELD PATH (History Definition)
WELD PATH (Model Definition)
WORK HARD
WRITE FILE
WRITE
Main Index
Main Index

Marc 2008 r1 Volume C: Program Input

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Marc 2008 r1 Volume C: Program Input

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Marc 2008 r1

Volume C: Program Input

EXTENDED — Extended Precision of Reading in Data, 84

PIEZO — Activate Piezoelectric Analysis, 133

BOUNDARY CONDITIONS — Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to

3 Model Definition Options List

NODE FILL — Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation, 249

DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS — Define Limits on Displacement Response, 469

I. Laminated Composite, 701

GAP DATA — Define Data for Gap Elements, 880

SHIFT FUNCTION — Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple

INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) — Define Initial Temperatures, 1082

FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) — Define Fixed Nodal Potential, 1229

Electromagnetic Analysis, 1301

4 History Definition Options List

Heat Transfer Analysis, 1374

P2G (History Definition) — Selects Direction Input Load Vector, 1456

5 Rezoning Options List

B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option

G Flow Line File Format

H 3-D Remeshing Files

About this Manual

Who Should Read this Manual

Other Marc Manuals

Input of List Items

Element numbers Points

3. SUBLIST1 EXCEPT SUBLIST2

The SUBLISTS can have the form:

Sorted vs. Unsorted Lists

Edges and Faces

1-D 2-Node Elements

1-D 3-Node Elements

2-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Elements

Load shown on EDGE ID 1

2-D 8-Node Quadrilateral Elements

2-D 3-Node Triangle

2-D 6-Node Triangle

3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral

3-D 6-Node Pentahedral

3-D 8-Node Brick

3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral

3-D 20-Node Brick

3-D 3-Node Shell

3-D 4-Node Shell/Membrane

3-D 6-Node Shell

3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral

3-D 6-Node Pentahedral

3-D 8-Node Brick

3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral

3-D 15-Node Pentahedral

3-D 20-Node Brick

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

Model Definition Data

History Definition Data

Input data file organization for Marc is shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Marc Input Data File

Typical Marc Problem Data Files

Marc Input for New Users

Finite Element Modeling

Figure 1-2 Plate with Hole

Model Definition Data

3. pressure loading and prescribed displacement boundary conditions, and

1. Topology of the Model

3. Pressure Loading and Prescribed Displacement Boundary Conditions